RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

RAN14.0

Feature Activation Guide Issue

05

Date

2012-12-31

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

About This Document Purpose This document provides guidelines for enabling or disabling a feature after initial configuration. Based on the activation, verification, and deactivation of a feature in the feature list, the guidelines aim to ensure that the feature is available on the network. This document describes how to activate a license and configure a feature in RAN. NOTE

The BSC6900 is used as an example to describe the network controller in this document.

Product Version The solution version is RAN14.0 related to this document, for more details you can refer to the following table. Product Name

Product Version

BSC6900

V900R014C00

NodeB

V100R014

NodeB

V200R014

Intended Audience This document is intended for: l

Technical support engineers

l

Maintenance engineers

l

Field engineers

l

Network optimization engineers

Organization 1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


ii


About This Document

This chapter describes the changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide. 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions RANFeatures are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not licensecontrolled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Some optional features are license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. If the Configuration Method column for a basic feature in the RAN basic feature list is None, enabling this feature does not involve any configurations. If the Configuration Method column for an optional feature in the RAN optional feature list is None, this feature is enabled once it is activated. 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME This section provides an overview of the configuration on the CME. The CME is a configuration tool on GUIs assisting you to effectively configure the data about wireless NE features. You can reconfigure configuration parameters by using the configuration expresses provided by the CME to activate or deactivate specified features. 4 Activating the UMTS License In the case of certain UMTS features, a license control item is defined for each feature. The license control item of a feature must be activated before the configuration and use of the feature. The license control items related to the RNC can be activated on the M2000 or RNC LMT, whereas those related to the NodeB can be activated only on the M2000. 5 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010510 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release. 6 Configuring Conversational QoS Class This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010501 Conversational QoS Class. 7 Configuring Streaming QoS Class This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010502 Streaming QoS Class. 8 Configuring Interactive QoS Class This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010503 Interactive QoS Class. 9 Configuring Background QoS Class This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010504 Background QoS Class. 10 Configuring Emergency Call This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021104 Emergency Call. 11 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010506 RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


iii


About This Document

12 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210604 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity. 13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010205 Cell Digital Combination and Split. 14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010202 UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH). 15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010301 Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1). 16 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010302 Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2). 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021101 Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 18 Configuring Integrity Protection This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011401 Integrity Protection. 19 Configuring Encryption This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011402 Encryption. 20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020501 Open Loop Power Control. 21 Configuring Downlink Power Balance This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020502 Downlink Power Balance. 22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020503 Outer Loop Power Control. 23 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020504 Inner Loop Power Control. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


iv


About This Document

24 Configuring Admission Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020101 Admission Control. 25 Configuring Load Measurement This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020102 Load Measurement. 26 Configuring Load Reshuffling This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020106 Load Reshuffling. 27 Configuring Overload Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020107 Overload Control. 28 Configuring Code Resource Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020108 Code Resource Management. 29 Configuring Potential User Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020105 Potential User Control. 30 Configuring Cell Barring This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021102 Cell Barring. 31 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021301 Shared Network Support in Connected Mode. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 32 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020201 Intra NodeB Softer Handover. 33 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020202 Intra RNC Soft Handover. 34 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020203 Inter RNC Soft Handover. 35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020301 Intra Frequency Hard Handover. 36 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


v


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010801 Intra RNC Cell Update. 37 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010802 Inter RNC Cell Update. 38 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010901 Intra RNC URA Update. 39 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010902 Inter RNC URA Update. 40 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021400 Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR). 41 Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-140102 CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls. For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor. 42 Configuring NodeB Clock This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501 NodeB Clock. 43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030104 Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface. 44 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030105 Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic. 45 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030106 Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth. 46 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature "WRFD-05030107 CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes". 47 Configuring F5 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030110 F5. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 48 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature "WRFD-050305 UBR+ ATM QoS Class". Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


vi


About This Document

49 Configuring Link Aggregation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210103 Link Aggregation. 50 Configuring Flow Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040100 Flow Control. 51 Configuring BOOTP This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031100 BOOTP. In ATM transport mode, the NodeB can automatically set up the OM channel with the BSC6900 by using the BOOTSTRAP Protocol (BOOTP) function. 52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031101 NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode. 53 Configuring License Control for Urgency This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040300 License Control for Urgency. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 54 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031000 Intelligently Out of Service. 55 Configuring OCNS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031200 OCNS (Orthogonal Channel Noise Simulator). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031400 Power Off the Equipment Level by Level. 57 Configuring Solar Power Device Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031500 Solar Power Device Management. 58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 59 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 60 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz) Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


vii


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-060003 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+ This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010617 VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+. 62 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061703 Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA. 63 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010618 IMS Signaling over HSPA. 64 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011501 PDCP Header Compression (RoHC). 65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+ This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010619 CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+. 66 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010613 AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 67 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020701 AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control. 68 Configuring TFO/TrFO This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011600 TFO/TrFO. 69 Configuring AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140201 AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA. 70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011000 Cell Broadcast Service. 71 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011001 Simplified Cell Broadcast. 72 Configuring Warning of Disaster Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


viii


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020127 Warning of Disaster. 73 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package. 74 Configuring MBMS Admission Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061602 MBMS Admission Control. 75 Configuring MBMS Load Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061603 MBMS Load Control. 76 Configuring MBMS Transport Resource Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061605 MBMS Transport Resource Management. 77 Configuring Streaming Service on MBMS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061606 Streaming Service on MBMS. 78 Configuring 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061608 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS. 79 Configuring MBMS Phase 2 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2. 80 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066001 MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode. 81 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066002 MBMS P2P over HSDPA. 82 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066003 MBMS Admission Enhancement. 83 Configuring Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066004 Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users. 84 Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010627 FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


ix


About This Document

85 Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010626 MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion). 86 Configuring MBMS over Iur This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010661 MBMS over Iur. 87 Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010662 Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH. 88 Configuring MSCH Scheduling This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010663 MSCH Scheduling. 89 Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010665 MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics. 90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020801 Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS. 91 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020802 OTDOA Based LCS. 92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020803 A-GPS Based LCS. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 93 Configuring LCS Classified Zones This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020804 LCS Classified Zones. 94 Configuring LCS over Iur This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020805 LCS over Iur. 95 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020807 Iupc Interface for LCS service. 96 Configuring Push to Talk This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020134 Push to Talk. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 97 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


x


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package. 98 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061202 HSUPA Admission Control. 99 Configuring HSUPA Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061203 HSUPA Power Control. 100 Configuring HSUPA Mobility Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061204 HSUPA Mobility Management. 101 Configuring HSUPA DCCC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061208 HSUPA DCCC. 102 Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061211 20 HSUPA Users per Cell. 103 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061212 HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion. 104 Configuring HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061401 HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH). 105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI. 106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061404 HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover. 107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061405 HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User. 108 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010632 Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA. 109 Configuring HSUPA over Iur This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010635 HSUPA over Iur. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xi


About This Document

110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010690 TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage. 111 Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010641 HSUPA Adaptive Transmission. 112 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE Resource Management. 113 Configuring HSUPA FDE This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010692 HSUPA FDE. 114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010712 Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA. 115 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020136 Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA. 116 Configuring Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020137 Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation. 117 Configuring 60 HSUPA Users per Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010634 60 HSUPA Users per Cell. 118 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation. 119 Configuring SRB over HSUPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA. 120 Configuring Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140202 Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2). Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation is short for CCPIC. 121 Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 122 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xii


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061001 15 Codes per Cell. 123 Configuring Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061018 Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex. 124 Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061009 HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF). 125 Configuring HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061005 HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation. 126 Configuring HSDPA Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061004 HSDPA Power Control. 127 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061003 HSDPA Admission Control. 128 Configuring Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061020 Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service. 129 Configuring HSDPA Flow Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061010 HSDPA Flow Control. 130 Configuring HSDPA Mobility Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061006 HSDPA Mobility Management. 131 Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061002 HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28. 132 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010629 DL 16QAM Modulation. 133 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010631 Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB. 134 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xiii


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package. 135 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR. 136 Configuring HSDPA State Transition This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061111 HSDPA State Transition. 137 Configuring HSDPA DRD This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061112 HSDPA DRD. 138 Configuring HS-DPCCH Preamble Support This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061113 HS-DPCCH Preamble Support. 139 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010630 Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA. 140 Configuring HSDPA over Iur This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010651 HSDPA over Iur. 141 Configuring SRB over HSDPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA. 142 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-030010 CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target. 143 Configuring MIMO Prime This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-030011 MIMO Prime. 144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-030004 Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate. 145 Configuring HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140221 HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location. 146 Configuring Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140222 Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xiv


About This Document

147 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010680 HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User. 148 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010681 HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User. 149 Configuring Downlink Enhanced L2 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2. 150 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbps per User This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010689 HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbps per User. 151 Configuring Downlink 64QAM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010683 Downlink 64QAM. 152 Configuring 2x2 MIMO This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010684 2x2 MIMO. Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) is a multi-antenna technology, which enables multiple antennas to receive and transmit data. This increases the data transmission rate. 153 Configuring Downlink 64QAM+MIMO This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010693 DL 64QAM+MIMO. 154 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010698 HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User. 155 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010703 HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User. 156 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010699 DC-HSDPA+MIMO. 157 Configuring UL 16QAM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010694 UL 16QAM. 158 Configuring UL Layer 2 Improvement This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010695 UL Layer 2 Improvement. 159 Configuring DC-HSDPA Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xv


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA. 160 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140203 HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User. 161 Configuring DC-HSUPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140204 DC-HSUPA. 162 Configuring Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010688 Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH. 163 Configuring Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010700 Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier. 164 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010686 CPC - DTX /DRX. 165 Configuring CPC - HS-SCCH less operation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010687 CPC - HS-SCCH less operation. 166 Configuring E-DPCCH Boosting This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010697 E-DPCCH Boosting. 167 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010701 Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH. 168 Configuring 96 HSDPA Users per Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010653 96 HSDPA Users per Cell. 169 Configuring 96 HSUPA Users per Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010639 96 HSUPA Users per Cell. 170 Configuring 128 HSDPA Users per Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010654 128 HSDPA Users per Cell. 171 Configuring 128 HSUPA Users per Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010670 128 HSUPA Users per Cell. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xvi


About This Document

172 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010704 Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection. 173 Configuring Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010713 Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier. 174 Configuring Enhanced DRX This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010702 Enhanced DRX. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 175 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020500 Enhanced Fast Dormancy. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 176 Configuring Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140205 Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs. 177 Configuring Layered Paging in URA_PCH This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140206 Layered Paging in URA_PCH. 178 Configuring Web browsing acceleration This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020132 Web browsing acceleration. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 179 Configuring P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020133 P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 180 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020116 Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers. 181 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020117 Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load. 182 Configuring Energy Efficiency Improved This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020118 Energy Efficiency Improved. 183 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020119 Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xvii


About This Document

184 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020122 Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS. 185 Configuring Intelligent Power Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020121 Intelligent Power Management. 186 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package This section describes how to activate, verify and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package. 187 Configuring Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02130401 Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator. 188 Configuring Flexible Network Architecture This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02130402 Flexible Network Architecture. 189 Configuring Mobility Control and Service Differentiation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD02130403 Mobility Control and Service Differentiation. 190 Configuring Independent License Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02130404 Independent License Control. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 191 Configuring RAN Sharing Phase 2 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021305 RAN Sharing Phase 2. 192 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02130501 Dedicated Iub Transmission Control. 193 Configuring IMSI Based Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021303 IMSI Based Handover. 194 Configuring MOCN Introduction Package This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021311 MOCN Introduction Package. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 195 Configuring Carrier Sharing by Operators This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02131101 Carrier Sharing by Operators. 196 Configuring Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xviii


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02131102 Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators. 197 Configuring MOCN Mobility Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02131103 MOCN Mobility Management. 198 Configuring MOCN Load Balance This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02131104 MOCN Load Balance. 199 Configuring Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02131106 Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion. 200 Configuring MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140223 MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation. 201 Configuring HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure). 202 Configuring One Tunnel This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020111 One Tunnel. 203 Configuring Overbooking on ATM Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050405 Overbooking on ATM Transmission. 204 Configuring ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050105 ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB. 205 Configuring AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050106 AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB. 206 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 207 Configuring Hybrid Iub IP Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050403 Hybrid Iub IP Transmission. 208 Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050404 ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xix


About This Document

209 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050409 IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface. 210 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050410 IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface. 211 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050420 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission. 212 Configuring Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050422 Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP. 213 Configuring Overbooking on IP Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050408 Overbooking on IP Transmission. 214 Configuring IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050107 IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB. 215 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011500 PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507). 216 Configuring RNC Offload This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-012001 RNC Offload. With this feature, the RNC can send some PS service data directly to Internet over the offload Gi interface. 217 Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature WRFD-050412 UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission. 218 Configuring Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140207 Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC. 219 Configuring Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140208 Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC. 220 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050104 Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface. 221 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xx


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050108 Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface. 222 Configuring Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050501 Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB. 223 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050502 Synchronous Ethernet. 224 Configuring Ethernet OAM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050425 Ethernet OAM. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 225 Configuring RNC Node Redundancy This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-040202 RNC Node Redundancy. 226 Configuring RRU Redundancy This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-040203 RRU Redundancy. 227 Configuring Iu Flex This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021302 Iu Flex. 228 Configuring Iu Flex Load Distribution Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021306 Iu Flex Load Distribution Management. 229 Configuring Transmit Diversity This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010203 Transmit Diversity. Transmit diversity enables the NodeB to provide twice the number of RF DL channels compared with no transmit diversity. 230 Configuring 4-Antenna Receive Diversity This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010209 4-Antenna Receive Diversity. 231 Configuring Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021308 Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km. 232 Configuring HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020138 HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation. 233 Configuring Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021001 Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxi


About This Document

234 Configuring High Speed Access This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010206 High Speed Access. 235 Configuring Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021350 Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell. 236 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020302 Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage. 237 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020304 Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS. 238 Configuring SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02060501 SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 239 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02060502 SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover. 240 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02060503 SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update. 241 Configuring Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010615 Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2). 242 Configuring Combination of Two PS Services This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061501 Combination of Two PS Services. 243 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061502 Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services. 244 Configuring Combination of Three PS Services This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061503 Combination of Three PS Services. 245 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061504 Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services. 246 Configuring Combination of Four PS Services Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxii


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061505 Combination of Four PS Services. 247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020103 Inter Frequency Load Balance. 248 Configuring Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020114 Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC). 249 Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020160 Enhanced Multiband Management. 250 Configuring DRD Introduction Package This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package. 251 Configuring Intra System Direct Retry This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02040001 Intra System Direct Retry. 252 Configuring Inter System Direct Retry This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02040002 Inter System Direct Retry. 253 Configuring Inter-System Redirect This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02040003 Inter System Redirect. 254 Configuring Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02040004 Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup. 255 Configuring Measurement Based Direct Retry This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020402 Measurement Based Direct Retry. 256 Configuring Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020120 Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup. 257 Configuring Uplink Flow Control of User Plane This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020124 Uplink Flow Control of User Plane. 258 Configuring Intra Frequency Load Balance This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020104 Intra Frequency Load Balance. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxiii


About This Document

259 Configuring Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140211 Dynamic Target RoT Adjustment. 260 Configuring CE Overbooking This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140212 CE Overbooking. 261 Configuring Intelligent Access Class Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140213 Intelligent Access Class Control. 262 Configuring Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140215 Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period. 263 Configuring Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140216 Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration. 264 Configuring Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140217 Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold. 265 Configuring Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070004 Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g. 266 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070005 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g. 267 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070006 GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g. 268 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070007 GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g. 269 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage. 270 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020309 Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS. 271 Configuring Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxiv


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020307 Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO. 272 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2. 273 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02030801 NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change). 274 Configuring PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02030802 PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS. 275 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service. 276 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load. 277 Configuring Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature WRFD-020401 Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance. 278 Configuring 3G/2G Common Load Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020310 3G/2G Common Load Management. 279 Configuring Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020126 Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1. For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 280 Configuring Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020129 Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE. 281 Configuring Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140218 Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE. 282 Configuring Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-140224 fast CS fallback based on RIM. For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor. 283 Configuring Queuing and Preemption Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxv


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010505 Queuing and Preemption. 284 Configuring Access Class Restriction This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021103 Access Class Restriction. 285 Configuring Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050424 Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources. 286 Configuring Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight. 287 Configuring Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020131 Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness. 288 Configuring Active Queue Management (AQM) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011502 Active Queue Management (AQM). 289 Configuring Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020128 Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service. 290 Configuring TCP Accelerator This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020123 TCP Accelerator. 291 Configuring Rate Negotiation at Admission Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010507 Rate Negotiation at Admission Control. 292 Configuring Videophone Service Restriction This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020130 Videophone Service Restriction. 293 Configuring Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020135 Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management. 294 Configuring Micro NodeB Self-Planning This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140219 Micro NodeB Self-Planning. 295 Configuring NodeB Integrated IPSec This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140209 NodeB Integrated IPSec. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxvi


About This Document

296 Configuring NodeB PKI Support This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140210 NodeB PKI Support. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 297 Configuring Intelligent Battery Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140220 Intelligent Battery Management. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 298 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS). 299 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS). This feature enables the spectrum resources to be dynamically shared between the GSM and UMTS networks based on their traffic load, improving frequency utilization. 300 Configuring IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission on Base Station Side (NodeB) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221501 IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission on Base Station Side. For details about data configurations, see section Configuration Reference > MBTS Configuration Reference (V100R007C00) > Common Transmission in the 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide, or see section Common Transmission in the WCDMA RAN Feature Documentation. The latest 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide can be obtained from the following path: HUAWEI Technical Support (support.huawei.com), Support > Documentation > SingleRAN > MBTS > SingleRAN7.0. 301 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221504 TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 302 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221601 Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB). For details about data configurations, see section Configuration Reference > MBTS Configuration Reference (V100R007C00) > Common Clock in the 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide, or see section Common Clock in the WCDMA RAN Feature Documentation. The latest 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide can be obtained from the following path: HUAWEI Technical Support (support.huawei.com), Support > Documentation > SingleRAN > MBTS > SingleRAN7.0. 303 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(UMTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature MRFD-221602 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(UMTS). 304 Configuring 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS) Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxvii


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221703 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS). 305 Configuring Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature MRFD-221803 Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(UMTS). 306 Configuring GSM Power Control on Interface Frequency for GU Small Frequency Gap (UMTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature MRFD-221804 GSM Power Control on Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency gap (UMTS).

Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol

Description Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.


xxviii


About This Document

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Format

Description

Key

Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.


xxix


About This Document

Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Action

Description

Click

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.

Double-click

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag

Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.


xxx


Contents

Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide......................................................................1 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions...............................................................10 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME...............................................................................54 3.1 Introduction to Configuration Methods............................................................................................................56 3.2 Configuring Device Data..................................................................................................................................57 3.3 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Parameters.......................................................58 3.4 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iub Interfaces...........................................................................59 3.5 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-CS Interfaces......................................................................60 3.6 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PS Interfaces.......................................................................61 3.7 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iur Interfaces...........................................................................62 3.8 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-BC Interfaces......................................................................63 3.9 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PC Interfaces......................................................................64 3.10 Introduction to the Configuration Express for the (U)Iur-g Interface............................................................65 3.11 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Gi Interfaces..........................................................................66 3.12 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Radio Parameters..........................................67 3.13 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Cells..........................................................................68 3.14 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Neighboring UMTS Cells.....................................................69 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches.........................................................................................................70 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches.........................................................................................70 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches........................................................................................71 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches...............................................................................................71 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches...................................................................................72 3.20 Modifying UMTS Channel Parameters in Batches........................................................................................73 3.21 Introduction to the Object Group Configuration............................................................................................74

4 Activating the UMTS License...................................................................................................76 4.1 Activating the BSC6900 License.....................................................................................................................77 4.2 Allocating a license to Telecom Operators.......................................................................................................78 4.3 Allocating a License to NodeBs.......................................................................................................................78

5 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release...........................................................................................................80 Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxxi


Contents

6 Configuring Conversational QoS Class .................................................................................83 7 Configuring Streaming QoS Class...........................................................................................86 8 Configuring Interactive QoS Class..........................................................................................89 9 Configuring Background QoS Class.......................................................................................91 10 Configuring Emergency Call...................................................................................................93 11 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface...........................94 12 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity..................................................................97 13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split...............................................................99 14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH).................................................................................................................................102 15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1)......................105 16 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2)...........................109 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control..................................................111 18 Configuring Integrity Protection..........................................................................................120 19 Configuring Encryption.........................................................................................................122 20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control.............................................................................124 21 Configuring Downlink Power Balance...............................................................................127 22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control.............................................................................129 23 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control .............................................................................132 24 Configuring Admission Control..........................................................................................134 25 Configuring Load Measurement..........................................................................................138 26 Configuring Load Reshuffling.............................................................................................140 27 Configuring Overload Control.............................................................................................144 28 Configuring Code Resource Management.........................................................................147 29 Configuring Potential User Control.....................................................................................149 30 Configuring Cell Barring.......................................................................................................151 31 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode..........................................156 32 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover........................................................................159 33 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover...............................................................................161 34 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover...............................................................................163 35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover...................................................................165 Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxxii


Contents

36 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update....................................................................................168 37 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update....................................................................................171 38 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update..................................................................................173 39 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update..................................................................................176 40 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR) ........................179 41 Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls.....................................182 42 Configuring NodeB Clock.....................................................................................................184 43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface...........................188 44 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic........................190 45 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth...........................192 46 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes........................................194 47 Configuring F5.........................................................................................................................196 48 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class....................................................................................198 49 Configuring Link Aggregation.............................................................................................200 50 Configuring Flow Control.....................................................................................................204 51 Configuring BOOTP...............................................................................................................209 52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode..................................................211 53 Configuring License Control for Urgency..........................................................................215 54 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service...........................................................................217 55 Configuring OCNS.................................................................................................................219 56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level...................................................221 57 Configuring Solar Power Device Management.................................................................224 58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)................................226 59 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt......................................................................................229 60 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)...........................................232 61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+................................................................................235 62 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA..............................................241 63 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA.............................................................................243 64 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)............................................................246 65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+........................................................................249 Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxxiii


Contents

66 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band).............................................254 67 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control........................................................257 68 Configuring TFO/TrFO..........................................................................................................262 69 Configuring AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA.................................264 70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service.....................................................................................266 71 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast..............................................................................276 72 Configuring Warning of Disaster.........................................................................................279 73 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package........................................................................281 74 Configuring MBMS Admission Control............................................................................285 75 Configuring MBMS Load Control.......................................................................................287 76 Configuring MBMS Transport Resource Management...................................................289 77 Configuring Streaming Service on MBMS........................................................................291 78 Configuring 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS.................................................293 79 Configuring MBMS Phase 2..................................................................................................295 80 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode...............................................................297 81 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA................................................................................299 82 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement.................................................................301 83 Configuring Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users ..........................................................................................................................................................303 84 Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS....................................................304 85 Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion) ....................................................................................................................................306 86 Configuring MBMS over Iur.................................................................................................309 87 Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH.......................................................311 88 Configuring MSCH Scheduling...........................................................................................313 89 Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics...............................................315 90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS.............................................................317 91 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS.........................................................................................325 92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS............................................................................................328 93 Configuring LCS Classified Zones......................................................................................336 94 Configuring LCS over Iur......................................................................................................339 Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxxiv


Contents

95 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service.......................................................................346 96 Configuring Push to Talk......................................................................................................349 97 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package.......................................................................351 98 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control...........................................................................354 99 Configuring HSUPA Power Control ..................................................................................358 100 Configuring HSUPA Mobility Management...................................................................361 101 Configuring HSUPA DCCC................................................................................................363 102 Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per Cell.............................................................................366 103 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion............................368 104 Configuring HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH)...........370 105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI.............................................................................................372 106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover.............................................................375 107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User..........................................................................377 108 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA...........................................................380 109 Configuring HSUPA over Iur.............................................................................................382 110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage.......................................384 111 Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission.................................................................388 112 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management..........................................................391 113 Configuring HSUPA FDE....................................................................................................393 114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA ..........................................................................................................................................................395 115 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA................................................403 116 Configuring Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation ..........................................................................................................................................................407 117 Configuring 60 HSUPA Users per Cell.............................................................................411 118 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation.......................................................413 119 Configuring SRB over HSUPA...........................................................................................416 120 Configuring Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2).............418 121 Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package.....................................................................423 122 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell............................................................................................426 123 Configuring Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex....................................................429 Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxxv


Contents

124 Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF).........................430 125 Configuring HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation.......................................................................................................................................432 126 Configuring HSDPA Power Control ................................................................................434 127 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control.........................................................................437 128 Configuring Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service......................440 129 Configuring HSDPA Flow Control....................................................................................442 130 Configuring HSDPA Mobility Management...................................................................445 131 Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28........................................................................447 132 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation...............................................................................448 133 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB.............................................450 134 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package..........................................................................454 135 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR...........................................................456 136 Configuring HSDPA State Transition...............................................................................458 137 Configuring HSDPA DRD..................................................................................................460 138 Configuring HS-DPCCH Preamble Support...................................................................462 139 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA...........................................................465 140 Configuring HSDPA over Iur.............................................................................................467 141 Configuring SRB over HSDPA...........................................................................................469 142 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target.................................473 143 Configuring MIMO Prime...................................................................................................475 144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate......................................478 145 Configuring HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location..............................................480 146 Configuring Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions ..........................................................................................................................................................482 147 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User..........................................................485 148 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User..........................................................487 149 Configuring Downlink Enhanced L2................................................................................489 150 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbps per User..........................................................492 151 Configuring Downlink 64QAM.........................................................................................495 152 Configuring 2x2 MIMO........................................................................................................499 Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxxvi


Contents

153 Configuring Downlink 64QAM+MIMO..........................................................................509 154 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User...........................................................513 155 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User.......................................................517 156 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO......................................................................................519 157 Configuring UL 16QAM......................................................................................................524 158 Configuring UL Layer 2 Improvement..............................................................................527 159 Configuring DC-HSDPA.....................................................................................................531 160 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User.............................................................537 161 Configuring DC-HSUPA.....................................................................................................540 162 Configuring Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH.............................................................545 163 Configuring Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier.............547 164 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX............................................................................................552 165 Configuring CPC - HS-SCCH less operation...................................................................555 166 Configuring E-DPCCH Boosting........................................................................................558 167 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH...................................................................565 168 Configuring 96 HSDPA Users per Cell.............................................................................567 169 Configuring 96 HSUPA Users per Cell.............................................................................569 170 Configuring 128 HSDPA Users per Cell...........................................................................571 171 Configuring 128 HSUPA Users per Cell...........................................................................573 172 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection......................................................575 173 Configuring Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier..............................................................................................................................579 174 Configuring Enhanced DRX................................................................................................581 175 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy.............................................................................584 176 Configuring Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs ..........................................................................................................................................................593 177 Configuring Layered Paging in URA_PCH......................................................................601 178 Configuring Web browsing acceleration..........................................................................604 179 Configuring P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour................................607 180 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers...............................................610 181 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load......................................612 Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxxvii


Contents

182 Configuring Energy Efficiency Improved........................................................................616 183 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup..................................618 184 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS....................................................622 185 Configuring Intelligent Power Management...................................................................626 186 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package...........................................................628 187 Configuring Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator.........................................................632 188 Configuring Flexible Network Architecture....................................................................635 189 Configuring Mobility Control and Service Differentiation.........................................637 190 Configuring Independent License Control......................................................................639 191 Configuring RAN Sharing Phase 2....................................................................................641 192 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control........................................................642 193 Configuring IMSI Based Handover...................................................................................647 194 Configuring MOCN Introduction Package......................................................................649 195 Configuring Carrier Sharing by Operators......................................................................654 196 Configuring Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators.........................................................657 197 Configuring MOCN Mobility Management....................................................................660 198 Configuring MOCN Load Balance.....................................................................................662 199 Configuring Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion.........................................................664 200 Configuring MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation...........................................................667 201 Configuring HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)..............................................................673 202 Configuring One Tunnel.....................................................................................................676 203 Configuring Overbooking on ATM Transmission.........................................................681 204 Configuring ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB...........................................................685 205 Configuring AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB..........................................................687 206 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface.......................................689 207 Configuring Hybrid Iub IP Transmission........................................................................696 208 Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB..........................................................................699 209 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface..........................................703 210 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface........................................705 211 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission.......................................................................707 Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxxviii


Contents

212 Configuring Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP.....................................................709 213 Configuring Overbooking on IP Transmission..............................................................711 214 Configuring IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB....................................................................715 215 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507).....................................................717 216 Configuring RNC Offload...................................................................................................719 217 Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission............................................................723 218 Configuring Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC.............................................725 219 Configuring Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC.................................................728 220 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface....................................................732 221 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface.......................................................734 222 Configuring Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB.........................................736 223 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet...................................................................................739 224 Configuring Ethernet OAM................................................................................................741 225 Configuring RNC Node Redundancy...............................................................................744 226 Configuring RRU Redundancy..........................................................................................752 227 Configuring Iu Flex...............................................................................................................754 228 Configuring Iu Flex Load Distribution Management....................................................757 229 Configuring Transmit Diversity.........................................................................................762 230 Configuring 4-Antenna Receive Diversity.......................................................................764 231 Configuring Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km........................................................766 232 Configuring HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation.....................769 233 Configuring Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier.....................................772 234 Configuring High Speed Access.........................................................................................774 235 Configuring Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell ..........................................................................................................................................................777 236 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage.............................787 237 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS................................791 238 Configuring SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved).........................................................794 239 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover.....................................................799 240 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update.................................................803 241 Configuring Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2)........................................................806 Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xxxix


Contents

242 Configuring Combination of Two PS Services...............................................................808 243 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services..........................810 244 Configuring Combination of Three PS Services.............................................................812 245 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services....................... 814 246 Configuring Combination of Four PS Services...............................................................816 247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance.....................................................................818 248 Configuring Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC).................................................825 249 Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management............................................................828 250 Configuring DRD Introduction Package..........................................................................833 251 Configuring Intra System Direct Retry.............................................................................837 252 Configuring Inter System Direct Retry.............................................................................840 253 Configuring Inter-System Redirect....................................................................................843 254 Configuring Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup..........................845 255 Configuring Measurement Based Direct Retry...............................................................848 256 Configuring Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup............851 257 Configuring Uplink Flow Control of User Plane............................................................854 258 Configuring Intra Frequency Load Balance.....................................................................857 259 Configuring Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment............................................................. 860 260 Configuring CE Overbooking.............................................................................................863 261 Configuring Intelligent Access Class Control.................................................................865 262 Configuring Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period...................870 263 Configuring Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration.....................................875 264 Configuring Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold ..........................................................................................................................................................878 265 Configuring Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g ..........................................................................................................................................................884 266 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g........................................................................................................................................... 888 267 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g....................................891 268 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g...................................896 269 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage..................................................899 270 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS....................................................903 Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xl


Contents

271 Configuring Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO.........906 272 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2.......................................................................908 273 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)....................................................910 274 Configuring PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS..................................................912 275 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service.....................................................915 276 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load..........................................................918 277 Configuring Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance................................................921 278 Configuring 3G/2G Common Load Management...........................................................924 279 Configuring Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1..............................................926 280 Configuring Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE...................930 281 Configuring Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE.....................................934 282 Configuring Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM..................................................................938 283 Configuring Queuing and Preemption.............................................................................941 284 Configuring Access Class Restriction ..............................................................................943 285 Configuring Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources........................947 286 Configuring Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight............................................949 287 Configuring Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness...................................955 288 Configuring Active Queue Management (AQM)...........................................................959 289 Configuring Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service.........................................961 290 Configuring TCP Accelerator..............................................................................................964 291 Configuring Rate Negotiation at Admission Control....................................................966 292 Configuring Videophone Service Restriction.................................................................970 293 Configuring Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management.................................972 294 Configuring Micro NodeB Self-Planning.........................................................................977 295 Configuring NodeB Integrated IPSec................................................................................983 296 Configuring NodeB PKI Support.....................................................................................1004 297 Configuring Intelligent Battery Management...............................................................1015 298 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS)......................................1018 299 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS).......................1021 300 Configuring IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission on Base Station Side (NodeB) ........................................................................................................................................................1026 Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xli


Contents

301 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB).........................................................................................................................................1027 302 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB)............................1033 303 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(UMTS).........................................................................1034 304 Configuring 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS)...............................................................................................................................1054 305 Configuring Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)...............1058 306 Configuring GSM Power Control on Interface Frequency for GU Small Frequency Gap (UMTS)................................................................................................................................1061

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


xlii


1

1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide This chapter describes the changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide.

05 (2012-12-31) This is the fifth commercial release of RAN14.0. Compared with issue 04 (2012-11-07), this issue does not include any topics. Compared with issue 04 (2012-11-07), this issue incorporates the following changes: Content

Description

284 Configuring Access Class Restriction

The verification procedure is changed.

248 Configuring Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC)


107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User

The activation procedure is changed.

153 Configuring Downlink 64QAM +MIMO

The prerequisite is changed.

217 Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission


290 Configuring TCP Accelerator


Compared with issue 04 (2012-11-07), this issue does not exclude any topics.

04 (2012-11-07) This is the fourth commercial release of RAN14.0. Compared with issue 03 (2012-08-30), this issue does not include any topics. Compared with issue 03 (2012-08-30), this issue incorporates the following changes: Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1



Content

Description

249 Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management


262 Configuring Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period


186 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package


167 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH


68 Configuring TFO/TrFO

The context is changed.

269 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage



03 (2012-08-30) This is the third commercial release of RAN14.0. Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-30), this issue includes the following topics: l

138 Configuring HS-DPCCH Preamble Support

Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Content

Description

43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface

The task example is changed.

156 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO


155 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User


148 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User




141 Configuring SRB over HSDPA


106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover


110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage

The procedure is changed.


2


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Content

Description

220 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface




237 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS


270 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS


236 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage


268 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g


92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS

The task example and the procedure are changed.

67 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control


112 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management


175 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy


137 Configuring HSDPA DRD


157 Configuring UL 16QAM


49 Configuring Link Aggregation


58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)


144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate

The data preparation is added.

146 Configuring Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions


176 Configuring Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs

The procedure is changed, and the data preparation is added.

200 Configuring MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation


202 Configuring One Tunnel


247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance



3



Content

Description





263 Configuring Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration


264 Configuring Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold


281 Configuring Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE


282 Configuring Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM



02 (2012-06-30) This is the second commercial release of RAN14.0. Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-26), this issue does not include any topics. Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-26), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Content

Description




The activation procedure is optimized.


The context is changed.



286 Configuring Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight


159 Configuring DC-HSDPA







4



Content

Description

260 Configuring CE Overbooking


115 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA


151 Configuring Downlink 64QAM



01 (2012-04-26) This is the first commercial release of RAN14.0. Compared with issue Draft B (2012-03-26), this issue includes the following new topics: l


l


l


l

69 Configuring AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA

l

160 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User

l


l

294 Configuring Micro NodeB Self-Planning

Compared with issue Draft B (2012-03-26), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

content

Description



215 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507)

The step of activating the license is deleted.


The dependencies on other features is changed.


The verification procedure is optimized.


The verification procedure is optimized.

250 Configuring DRD Introduction Package

The configuration procedure of activating the RRC Inter-frequency Redirection Based on Distance is added.

192 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control

The configuration procedure of activating Dedicated Iub Transmission Control in IP mode is added.


5



content

Description

105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI

The step of enabling the single-user peak-rate improvement algorithm of HSUPA 2 ms TTI is added.


The configuration procedure is optimized.

52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode

The configuration of NodeB deployment on the M2000 is modified.

120 Configuring Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2)

The verification steps are modified.

161 Configuring DC-HSUPA

The description of the HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User feature is incorporated into 160 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User.

295 Configuring NodeB Integrated IPSec

The task example is optimized.

296 Configuring NodeB PKI Support

The task example is optimized.

143 Configuring MIMO Prime

The cell configuration is added.

Compared with issue Draft B (2012-03-26), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft B (2012-03-26) This is the Draft B release of RAN14.0. Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


6



content

Description


The dependecy of BBU3806C is deleted from prerequisites.

287 Configuring Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness 174 Configuring Enhanced DRX 172 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection 169 Configuring 96 HSUPA Users per Cell 164 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX 162 Configuring Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH 119 Configuring SRB over HSUPA 148 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User 152 Configuring 2x2 MIMO 147 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User 142 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target 141 Configuring SRB over HSDPA 115 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA 107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User 106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover 259 Configuring Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment 105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI 159 Configuring DC-HSDPA 151 Configuring Downlink 64QAM 144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


The dependencies on hardware are added to prerequisites.

172 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection

The limit that WRFD-010704 Flexible HSPA + Technology Selection cannot be used together with WRFD-010699 DC-HSDPA +MIMO is deleted from prerequisites, and the configuration of DC-HSDPA and MIMO is added.


7



Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft A (2012-02-15) This is the Draft A release of RAN14.0. Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05) of RAN13.0, this issue includes the following new topics: l

41 Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls

l


l

145 Configuring HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location

l


l


l


l

177 Configuring Layered Paging in URA_PCH

l

218 Configuring Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC

l

219 Configuring Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC

l

259 Configuring Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment

l

261 Configuring Intelligent Access Class Control

l


l


l


l


l


l


l

297 Configuring Intelligent Battery Management

l

303 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(UMTS)

l

305 Configuring Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)

l

306 Configuring GSM Power Control on Interface Frequency for GU Small Frequency Gap (UMTS)

Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05) of RAN13.0, this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

content

Description


The configuration of S12 interface is added.

235 Configuring Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell

The configuration of new function is added.






8



Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05) of RAN13.0, this issue does not exclude any topics.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


9


2

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

RANFeatures are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not licensecontrolled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Some optional features are license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. If the Configuration Method column for a basic feature in the RAN basic feature list is None, enabling this feature does not involve any configurations. If the Configuration Method column for an optional feature in the RAN optional feature list is None, this feature is enabled once it is activated. Table 2-1 lists the RAN basic features. Table 2-2 lists the RAN optional features. Table 2-1 RAN Basic Feature List

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Feature ID

Feature Name

Configuration Method

WRFD-000001

System Improvement for RAN5.1

None

WRFD-000002


None

WRFD-000003


None

WRFD-000004


None

WRFD-000005


None

WRFD-000006


None

WRFD-000007


None

WRFD-000008


None

WRFD-010101

3GPP R9 Specifications

None


10


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name


WRFD-010102

Operating Multi-band

None

WRFD-010201

FDD Mode

None

WRFD-010510

3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release

5 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release

WRFD-010501

Conversational QoS Class

6 Configuring Conversational QoS Class

WRFD-010502

Streaming QoS Class

7 Configuring Streaming QoS Class

WRFD-010503

Interactive QoS Class

8 Configuring Interactive QoS Class

WRFD-010504

Background QoS Class

9 Configuring Background QoS Class

WRFD-010609

Multiple RAB Introduction Package (PS RAB < 2)

None

WRFD-01060901

Combination of Two CS Services (Except for Two AMR Speech Services)

None

WRFD-01060902

Combination of One CS Service and One PS Service

None

WRFD-01060903

Combination of Two CS Services and One PS Service (Except for Two AMR Speech Services)

None

WRFD-021104

Emergency Call

10 Configuring Emergency Call

WRFD-010506

RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface

11 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface

MRFD-210604

2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity

12 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity

WRFD-010205

Cell Digital Combination and Split

13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split

WRFD-010208

Fast Power Congestion Control (FCC)

None


11


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name


WRFD-010211

Active TX Chain Gain Calibration

None

WRFD-010202

UE State in Connected Mode (CELL-DCH, CELL-PCH, URA-PCH, CELL-FACH)

14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH)

WRFD-010401

System Information Broadcasting

None

WRFD-010301

Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1)

15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1)

WRFD-010302

Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2)

16 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2)

WRFD-020900

Logical Channel Management

None

WRFD-021000

Transport Channel Management

None

WRFD-022000

Physical Channel Management

None

WRFD-021101

Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC)

17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

WRFD-011401

Integrity Protection

18 Configuring Integrity Protection

WRFD-011402

Encryption

19 Configuring Encryption

WRFD-020501

Open Loop Power Control

20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control

WRFD-020502

Downlink Power Balance

21 Configuring Downlink Power Balance

WRFD-020503

Outer Loop Power Control

22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control

WRFD-020504

Inner Loop Power Control

23 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control

WRFD-020101

Admission Control

24 Configuring Admission Control

WRFD-020102

Load Measurement

25 Configuring Load Measurement


12


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name


WRFD-020106

Load Reshuffling

26 Configuring Load Reshuffling

WRFD-020107

Overload Control

27 Configuring Overload Control

WRFD-020108

Code Resource Management

28 Configuring Code Resource Management

WRFD-020105

Potential User Control

29 Configuring Potential User Control

WRFD-021102

Cell Barring

30 Configuring Cell Barring

WRFD-021301

Shared Network Support in Connected Mode

31 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode

MRFD-210104

BSC/RNC Resource Sharing

None

WRFD-020201

Intra NodeB Softer Handover

32 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover

WRFD-020202

Intra RNC Soft Handover

33 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover

WRFD-020203

Inter RNC Soft Handover

34 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover

WRFD-020301

Intra Frequency Hard Handover

35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover

WRFD-010801

Intra RNC Cell Update

36 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update

WRFD-010802

Inter RNC Cell Update

37 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update

WRFD-010901

Intra RNC URA Update

38 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update

WRFD-010902

Inter RNC URA Update

39 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update

WRFD-021400

Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR)

40 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Reestablishment (DSCR)

WRFD-140102

CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls


MRFD-210204

Star Topology

None

MRFD-210205

Chain Topology

None


13


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name


MRFD-210206

Tree Topology

None

MRFD-210501

NodeB Clock

42 Configuring NodeB Clock

MRFD-210502

RNC Clock

None

WRFD-050301

ATM Transmission Introduction Package

None

WRFD-05030101

ATM over E1T1 on Iub Interface

None

WRFD-05030102

ATM over Channelized STM-1/OC-3 on Iub Interface

None

WRFD-05030103

ATM over Non-channelized STM-1/OC-3c on Iub/Iu/Iur Interface

None

WRFD-05030104

Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface

43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/ IuCS/Iur Interface

WRFD-05030105

Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic

44 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic

WRFD-05030106

Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth

45 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth

WRFD-05030107

CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes

46 Configuring CBR, rtVBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes

WRFD-05030110

F5

47 Configuring F5

WRFD-050304

IMA for E1T1 or Channelized STM-1/OC-3 on Iub Interface

None

WRFD-050305

UBR+ ATM QoS Class

48 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class

MRFD-210103

Link aggregation


WRFD-040100

Flow Control

50 Configuring Flow Control

WRFD-040101

DPU Board Replaced without Service Interrupt in RNC

None


14


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name


MRFD-210101

System Redundancy

None

MRFD-210102

Operate System Security Management

None

MRFD-210302

Performance Management

None

MRFD-210304

Fault Management

None

MRFD-210303

Inventory Management

None

MRFD-210301

Configuration Management

None

MRFD-210305

Security Management

None

MRFD-210801

Interface Tracing

None

MRFD-210802

Call Tracing

None

MRFD-210401

RNC Software Management

None

MRFD-210402

NodeB Software Management

None

MRFD-210310

NodeB Software USB Download

None

WRFD-031100

BOOTP

51 Configuring BOOTP

WRFD-031101

NodeB Self-discovery Based on IP Mode

52 Configuring NodeB SelfDiscovery Based on IP Mode

WRFD-031102

NodeB Remote Selfconfiguration

None

WRFD-031103

NodeB Self-test

None

MRFD-210403

License Management

None

WRFD-040300

License Control for Urgency

53 Configuring License Control for Urgency

MRFD-210309

DBS Topology Maintenance

None

WRFD-031000

Intelligently Out of Service

54 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service

WRFD-031200

OCNS

55 Configuring OCNS

WRFD-031400

Power off the equipment level by level

56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level

WRFD-031500

Solar Power Device Management

57 Configuring Solar Power Device Management


15



Feature ID

Feature Name


WRFD-021404

Single IP Address for NodeB

None

WRFD-020406

Intelligent Power Measurement

None

WRFD-010212

Improved CE Mapping for EDCH

None

MRFD-210701

Documentation

None

MRFD-210601

Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)


MRFD-210602

Remote Electrical Tilt

59 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

WRFD-060003

Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900Mhz)

60 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)

MRFD-220001

Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface(NodeB)

None

MRFD-220002

Multi-mode BS RRU/RFU star-connection with separate CPRI interface(NodeB)

None

Table 2-2 RAN Optional Feature List

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item

License Configured on...


WRFD-010617

VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

VoIP over HSPA Introduction Pakage

BSC6900

61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

WRFD-010617 01

RAB Mapping


BSC6900

None

WRFD-010617 03

Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA


BSC6900

62 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA


16


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010618

IMS Signaling over HSPA

IMS Signaling over HSPA

BSC6900

63 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA

WRFD-011501

PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)

PDCP ROHC Function

BSC6900

64 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)

WRFD-010619

CS voice over HSPA/HSPA+

CS voice over HSPA

BSC6900

65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+

WRFD-010613

AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band)

Wide Band AMR

BSC6900

66 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band)

WRFD-020701

AMR/WBAMR Speech Rates Control

AMR voice coding rate control

BSC6900

67 Configuring AMR/WBAMR Speech Rates Control

WRFD-011600

TFO/TrFO

TFO/TrFO

BSC6900


WRFD-140201

AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA

AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA

NodeB


WRFD-011000

Cell Broadcast Service

Cell broadcast service

BSC6900

70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service

WRFD-011001

Simplified Cell Broadcast

Simplified Cell Broadcast

BSC6900

71 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast

WRFD-020127

Warning of Disaster

Warning of Disaster

BSC6900

72 Configuring Warning of Disaster

WRFD-010616

MBMS Introduction Package

MBMS Function

BSC6900&Nod eB

73 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package


17


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010616 01

MBMS Broadcast Mode

MBMS Function

BSC6900&Nod eB

None

WRFD-010616 02

MBMS Admission Control

MBMS Function

BSC6900&Nod eB

74 Configuring MBMS Admission Control

WRFD-010616 03

MBMS Load Control

MBMS Function

BSC6900&Nod eB

75 Configuring MBMS Load Control

WRFD-010616 04

MBMS Soft/ Selective Combining

MBMS Function

BSC6900&Nod eB

None

WRFD-010616 05

MBMS Transport Resource Management

MBMS Function

BSC6900&Nod eB

76 Configuring MBMS Transport Resource Management

WRFD-010616 06

Streaming Service on MBMS

MBMS Function

BSC6900&Nod eB

77 Configuring Streaming Service on MBMS

WRFD-010616 07

MBMS 2 Channels per Cell

MBMS Function

BSC6900&Nod eB

None

WRFD-010616 08

16/32/64/128K bps Channel Rate on MBMS

MBMS Function

BSC6900&Nod eB

78 Configuring 16/32/64/128K bps Channel Rate on MBMS

WRFD-010660

MBMS Phase 2

None

BSC6900

79 Configuring MBMS Phase 2

WRFD-010660 01

MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode

MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode

BSC6900

80 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode

WRFD-010660 02

MBMS P2P over HSDPA

MBMS P2P over HSDPA

BSC6900

81 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA


18


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010660 03

MBMS Admission Enhancement

MBMS Admission Enhancement

BSC6900

82 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement

WRFD-010660 04

Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users

None

None

83 Configuring InterFrequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users

WRFD-010627

FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS

None

None

84 Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS

WRFD-010626

MBMS FLC (Frequency Layer Convergence)/ FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)

MBMS FLC (Frequency Layer Convergence)/ FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)

BSC6900

85 Configuring MBMS FLC (Frequency Layer Convergence)/ FLD (Frequency Layer Dispersion)

WRFD-010624



BSC6900

None

WRFD-010625

256Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS

256Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS

BSC6900

None

WRFD-010628



BSC6900

None

WRFD-010661

MBMS over Iur

MBMS over Iur

BSC6900

86 Configuring MBMS over Iur

WRFD-010662

Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH

Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH

BSC6900

87 Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH


19



Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010663

MSCH Scheduling

MSCH Scheduling

BSC6900

88 Configuring MSCH Scheduling

WRFD-010665

MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics

MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics

BSC6900

89 Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics

WRFD-020801

Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS

Cell ID LCS

BSC6900

90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS

WRFD-020802

OTDOA Based LCS

OTDOA LCS

BSC6900

91 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS

WRFD-020803

A-GPS Based LCS

AGPS LCS

BSC6900


WRFD-020804

LCS Classified Zones

LCS Classified Zones

BSC6900

93 Configuring LCS Classified Zones

WRFD-020805

LCS over Iur

LCS over Iur

BSC6900

94 Configuring LCS over Iur

WRFD-020807

Iupc Interface for LCS service

Iu-PC Interface for LCS service

BSC6900

95 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service

WRFD-020134

Push to Talk

Push To Talk (per PTT Active User)

BSC6900

96 Configuring Push to Talk

WRFD-010612

HSUPA Introduction Package

RNC:High Speed Uplink Packet Access

BSC6900&Nod eB

97 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package

NodeB:the number of NodeBs with HSUPA function enabled

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


20



Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010612 01

HSUPA UE Category Support


BSC6900&Nod eB

None

BSC6900&Nod eB

None

BSC6900&Nod eB

98 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control

BSC6900&Nod eB

99 Configuring HSUPA Power Control

NodeB:the number of NodeBs with HSUPA function enabled WRFD-010612 09

WRFD-010612 02

HSUPA HARQ and Fast UL Scheduling in Node B


HSUPA Admission Control




HSUPA Power Control

RNC:High Speed Uplink Packet Access NodeB:the number of NodeBs with HSUPA function enabled

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


21



Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010612 04

HSUPA Mobility Management


BSC6900&Nod eB

100 Configuring HSUPA Mobility Management

BSC6900&Nod eB

101 Configuring HSUPA DCCC

BSC6900&Nod eB

None

BSC6900&Nod eB

None


HSUPA DCCC


WRFD-010612 07

WRFD-010612 06

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

HSUPA Transport Resource Management


Interactive and Background Traffic Class on HSUPA





22



Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010612 10

HSUPA 1.44Mbps per User


BSC6900&Nod eB

None

BSC6900&Nod eB

102 Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per Cell


20 HSUPA Users per Cell


WRFD-010612 12

HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion

None

None

103 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion

WRFD-010614

HSUPA Phase 2

HSUPA 2ms/ 10ms TTI handover

BSC6900

None

the number of NodeBs with HSUPA 2ms TTI function enabled

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

WRFD-010614 01

HSUPA EAGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HSSCCH)


BSC6900

104 Configuring HSUPA EAGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HSSCCH)

WRFD-010614 02

Enhanced Fast UL Scheduling


BSC6900

None


23


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010614 03

HSUPA 2ms TTI

the number of NodeBs with HSUPA 2ms TTI function enabled

NodeB


WRFD-010614 04

HSUPA 2ms/ 10ms TTI Handover


BSC6900

106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/ 10 ms TTI Handover

WRFD-010614 05



BSC6900


WRFD-010632

Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA

Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA

BSC6900

108 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA

WRFD-010635

HSUPA over Iur

HSUPA over Iur

BSC6900

109 Configuring HSUPA over Iur

WRFD-010640

Uplink Macro Diversity Intelligent Receiving

Uplink Macro Diversity Intelligent Receiving

BSC6900

None

WRFD-010690

TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage

TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage

BSC6900


WRFD-010641

HSUPA Adaptive Transmission

HSUPA Adaptive Retransmission

BSC6900

111 Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission


24


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010638

Dynamic CE Resource Management

the number of NodeBs with dynamic CE function enabled

NodeB


WRFD-010692

HSUPA FDE

The number of Cells with FDE function enabled

NodeB

113 Configuring HSUPA FDE

WRFD-010712

Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA

Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA

BSC6900

114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA

WRFD-020136

AntiInterference Scheduling for HSUPA

the number of cells with antiinterference scheduling for HSUPA function enabled

NodeB

115 Configuring AntiInterference Scheduling for HSUPA

WRFD-020137

Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation

the number of NodeBs with dual-threshold scheduling with HSUPA interference cancellation function enabled

NodeB

116 Configuring DualThreshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation

WRFD-010634



BSC6900


WRFD-010210

Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (CCPIC)

the number of NodeBs with CCPIC function enabled

NodeB

None


25



Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010691

HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation

The number of Cells with UL IC function enabled

NodeB

118 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation

WRFD-010636

SRB over HSUPA

SRB over HSUPA

BSC6900

119 Configuring SRB over HSUPA

WRFD-140202

Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2)

The number of NodeBs with flexible frequency separation function enabled

NodeB


WRFD-010610

HSDPA Introduction Package

High Speed Downlink Packet Access

BSC6900

121 Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package

WRFD-010610 17

QPSK Modulation

NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1

NodeB

None

NodeB

122 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell

NodeB

123 Configuring Time and HSPDSCH Codes Multiplex

NodeB

124 Configuring HSDPA HARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF)

NodeB:HSDPA function WRFD-010610 01

15 Codes per Cell

NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function

WRFD-010610 18

WRFD-010610 09

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Time and HSPDSCH Codes Multiplex


HSDPA HARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR and PF)


NodeB:HSDPA function



26



Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010610 05

HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNCControlled Dynamic Code Allocation


NodeB

125 Configuring HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNCControlled Dynamic Code Allocation

HSDPA Power Control


NodeB

126 Configuring HSDPA Power Control

NodeB

127 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control

NodeB

None

NodeB

128 Configuring Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service

NodeB

129 Configuring HSDPA Flow Control

NodeB

130 Configuring HSDPA Mobility Management

NodeB

None

WRFD-010610 04



WRFD-010610 19

WRFD-010610 20

WRFD-010610 10

HSDPA Admission Control


HSDPA Dynamic Power Allocation


Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service


HSDPA Flow Control






WRFD-010610 14

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

HSDPA Mobility Management


HSDPA Transport Resource Management





27



Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010610 08

Interactive and Background Traffic Class on HSDPA


NodeB

None

HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28


NodeB

131 Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28

NodeB

None

NodeB

None

WRFD-010610 02



WRFD-010610 16

HSDPA 1.8Mbps per User


16 HSDPA Users per Cell



NodeB:HSDPA function WRFD-010620


High Speed Downlink Packet Access Function 3.6M

BSC6900

None

WRFD-010629

DL 16QAM Modulation


NodeB

132 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

WRFD-010631

Dynamic Code Allocation Based on Node B

HSDPA RRM package 1

NodeB

133 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB

WRFD-010621


High Speed Downlink Packet Access Function 7.2M

BSC6900

None

WRFD-010622



BSC6900

None


28


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010611

HSDPA Enhanced Package

None

BSC6900

134 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package

WRFD-010611 03

Scheduling based on EPF and GBR

None

None

135 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR

WRFD-010611 11

HSDPA State Transition

HSDPA State Transition

BSC6900

136 Configuring HSDPA State Transition

WRFD-010611 12

HSDPA DRD

HSDPA DRD

BSC6900


WRFD-010611 13

HS-DPCCH Preamble Support

HS-DPCCH Preamble support

BSC6900


WRFD-010630

Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA

Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA

BSC6900

139 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA

WRFD-010650



BSC6900

None

WRFD-010651

HSDPA over Iur

HSDPA over Iur

BSC6900

140 Configuring HSDPA over Iur

WRFD-010652

SRB over HSDPA

SRB over HSDPA

BSC6900


WRFD-010623



BSC6900

None


29


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-030010

CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target

CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target(per Cell)

NodeB

142 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target

WRFD-030011

MIMO Prime

MIMO Prime (per Cell)

NodeB


WRFD-030004

Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate

Self-adaption of HSPA Typical Throughput

BSC6900


WRFD-140221

HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location

HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location(Per Cell)

NodeB


WRFD-140222

Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmission s

None

None

146 Configuring Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissio ns

WRFD-010680

HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User

HSPA + Downlink 28 Mbit/s Per User

BSC6900


WRFD-010681


HSPA + Downlink 21 Mbit/s Per User

BSC6900



30


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010685

Downlink Enhanced L2

Downlink Enhanced L2

BSC6900

149 Configuring Downlink Enhanced L2

WRFD-010689


HSPA+ Downlink 42 Mbit/s per User

BSC6900


WRFD-010683

Downlink 64QAM

the number of cells with 64QAM function enabled

NodeB


WRFD-010684

2x2 MIMO

the number of cells with MIMO function enabled

NodeB

152 Configuring 2x2 MIMO

WRFD-010693

DL 64QAM +MIMO

the number of Cells with DL 64QAM +MIMO function enabled

NodeB

153 Configuring Downlink 64QAM +MIMO

WRFD-010698

HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User

HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User

BSC6900

154 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User

WRFD-010703

HSPA+ Downlink 84Mbit/s per User

HSPA+ Downlink 84Mbit/s per User

BSC6900


WRFD-010699

DC-HSDPA +MIMO

the number of cells with DCHSDPA +MIMO function enabled

NodeB

156 Configuring DC-HSDPA +MIMO


31


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010694

UL 16QAM

The number of Cells with UL 16QAM function enabled

NodeB


WRFD-010695

UL Layer 2 Improvement

The number of Cells with UL L2 Improvement function enabled

NodeB

158 Configuring UL Layer 2 Improvement

WRFD-010696

DC-HSDPA

The number of Cells with DL DC function enabled

NodeB


WRFD-140203

HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User

HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User

BSC6900


WRFD-140204

DC-HSUPA

DC-HSUPA (Per Cell)

NodeB


WRFD-010688

Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH

Enhanced CELL_FACH

BSC6900

162 Configuring Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH

WRFD-010700

Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Cocarrier

the number of cells with performace improvement of MIMO and HSDPA cocarrier function enabled

NodeB

163 Configuring Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Cocarrier

WRFD-010686

CPC - DTX / DRX

CPC-DTX / DRX

BSC6900

164 Configuring CPC - DTX / DRX


32


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010687

CPC - HSSCCH less operation

CPC-HS-SCCH Less Operation

BSC6900

165 Configuring CPC - HSSCCH less operation

WRFD-010697

E-DPCCH Boosting

the number of cells with EDPCCH boosting function enabled

NodeB

166 Configuring EDPCCH Boosting

WRFD-010701

Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH

Enhanced Uplink for CELL_FACH

BSC6900


WRFD-010653



BSC6900

168 Configuring 96 HSDPA Users per Cell

WRFD-010639



BSC6900


WRFD-010654



BSC6900


WRFD-010670



BSC6900


WRFD-010704

Flexible HSPA + Technology Selection

Flexible HSPA + Technology Selection

BSC6900

172 Configuring Flexible HSPA + Technology Selection


33


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010713

Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multicarrier

the number of cells with traffic-based activation and deactivation of the slave carrier function enabled

NodeB

173 Configuring Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementar y Carrier In Multi-carrier

WRFD-010702

Enhanced DRX

Enhanced DRX

BSC6900

174 Configuring Enhanced DRX

WRFD-020500

Enhanced Fast Dormancy

Fast Dormancy Enhancement (per PS Active User)

BSC6900


WRFD-140205

Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception Ues

Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception Ues

BSC6900


WRFD-140206

Layered Paging in URA_PCH

Layered Paging in URA_PCH

BSC6900


WRFD-020132

Web browsing acceleration

Web Browsing Acceleration

BSC6900

178 Configuring Web browsing acceleration

WRFD-020133

P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour

P2P Rate Control

BSC6900

179 Configuring P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour


34


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-020116

Dynamic Power Sharing in Multi-Carriers

the number of NodeBs with PA-SHARING function enabled

NodeB

180 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing of MultiCarriers

WRFD-020117

Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load

Multi-carrier switch off based on traffic load

BSC6900

181 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load

WRFD-020118

Energy Efficiency Improved

the number of NodeBs with energy efficiency improved function enabled

NodeB

182 Configuring Energy Efficiency Improved

WRFD-020119

Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup

the number of NodeBs with multi-carrier switch off based on power backup function enabled

NodeB

183 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup

WRFD-020122

Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS

the number of cells with multicarrier switch off based on QoS function enabled

NodeB

184 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS

WRFD-020121

Intelligent Power Management

the number of NodeBs with PSU Intelligent Shutdown function enabled

NodeB

185 Configuring Intelligent Power Management

WRFD-021304

RAN Sharing Introduction Package

RAN Sharing Function

BSC6900



35


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-021304 01

Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator


BSC6900

187 Configuring Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator

WRFD-021304 02

Flexible Network Architecture


BSC6900

188 Configuring Flexible Network Architecture

WRFD-021304 03

Mobility Control and Service Differentiation


BSC6900

189 Configuring Mobility Control and Service Differentiation

WRFD-021304 04

Independent License Control


BSC6900

190 Configuring Independent License Control

WRFD-021304 05

Independent Cell-level FM/ PM/CM


BSC6900

None

WRFD-021304 06

Transmission Recourse Sharing on Iub/ Iur Interface


BSC6900

None

WRFD-021305

RAN Sharing Phase 2

RAN Sharing Enhanced Package

BSC6900

191 Configuring RAN Sharing Phase 2

WRFD-021305 01

Dedicated Iub Transmission Control

RAN Sharing Enhanced Package

BSC6900


WRFD-021303

IMSI Based Handover

IMSI Based Handover

BSC6900

193 Configuring IMSI Based Handover


36


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-021311

MOCN Introduction Package


BSC6900

194 Configuring MOCN Introduction Package

WRFD-021311 01

Carrier Sharing by Operators


BSC6900

195 Configuring Carrier Sharing by Operators

WRFD-021311 02

Dedicated Node B/Cell for Operators


BSC6900

196 Configuring Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators

WRFD-021311 03

MOCN Mobility Management


BSC6900

197 Configuring MOCN Mobility Management

WRFD-021311 04

MOCN Load Balance


BSC6900

198 Configuring MOCN Load Balance

WRFD-021311 05

MOCN Independent Performance Management


BSC6900

None

WRFD-021311 06

Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion


BSC6900

199 Configuring Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion

WRFD-140223

MOCN Cell Resource Demarcatio

MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation (per Cell)

BSC6900


WRFD-021200

HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)

Hierarchical Cell Structure

BSC6900

201 Configuring HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)


37


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-020111

One Tunnel

One Tunnel

BSC6900


WRFD-050405

Overbooking on ATM Transmission

ATM IUB overbooking Function

BSC6900

203 Configuring Overbooking on ATM Transmission

WRFD-050105

ATM Switching Based Hub Node B

ATM Switching Based Hub NodeB (per NodeB)

NodeB

204 Configuring ATM SwitchingBased Hub NodeB

WRFD-050106

AAL2 Switching Based Hub Node B

ATM Switching Based Hub NodeB (per NodeB)

NodeB

205 Configuring AAL2 SwitchingBased Hub NodeB

WRFD-050406

ATM QoS Introduction on Hub Node B (Overbooking on Hub Node B Transmission)

HUB IUB overbooking Function

BSC6900

None

WRFD-050302

Fractional ATM Function on Iub Interface

Fractional ATM

BSC6900

None

WRFD-050402

IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface

IP Transportation in Iub Interface

BSC6900

206 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface

WRFD-050411

Fractional IP Function on Iub Interface

Fractional IP

BSC6900

None

WRFD-050403

Hybrid Iub IP Transmission

IUB Hybrid IP Transportation Function

BSC6900

207 Configuring Hybrid Iub IP Transmission


38


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-050404

ATM/IP Dual Stack Node B

IUB ATM/IP Dual Stack Transportation Function

BSC6900

208 Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB

WRFD-050409

IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface

IP Transportation in Iu Interface

BSC6900

209 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface

WRFD-050410

IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface

IP Transportation in Iur Interface

BSC6900

210 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface

WRFD-050420

FP MUX for IP Transmission

FP MUX

BSC6900

211 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission

WRFD-050422

Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP

Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP

BSC6900

212 Configuring Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP

WRFD-050408

Overbooking on IP Transmission

IP IUB overbooking Function

BSC6900

213 Configuring Overbooking on IP Transmission

WRFD-050107

IP routing Based Hub Node B

IP Routing Based Hub NodeB (per NodeB)

NodeB

214 Configuring IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB

WRFD-011500

PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507)

PDCP Header compression

BSC6900


WRFD-012001

RNC offload (trial)

None

None

216 Configuring RNC Offload


39


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-050412

UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission

UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission

BSC6900


WRFD-140207

Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC

Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC

BSC6900


WRFD-140208

Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC

Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC

BSC6900


WRFD-050104

Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface

Satellite Communication in Iub Interface

BSC6900


WRFD-050108

Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface

Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface

BSC6900

221 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface

WRFD-050501

Clock Sync on Ethernet in Node B

the number of NodeBs with IP Clock function enabled

NodeB

222 Configuring Clock Synchronizatio n on Ethernet in NodeB

WRFD-050502

Synchronous Ethernet

The Number of NodeBs with Ethernet Synchronizatio n Function Enabled

NodeB

223 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet


40


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-050425

Ethernet OAM

Ethernet Operation and Maintenance Function (per NodeB)

NodeB

224 Configuring Ethernet OAM

WRFD-040202

RNC Node Redundancy

RNC Node Redundancy

BSC6900

225 Configuring RNC Node Redundancy

WRFD-040203

RRU Redundancy

RRU Backup (per Sector)

NodeB

226 Configuring RRU Redundancy

WRFD-021302

Iu Flex

IU FLEX

BSC6900

227 Configuring Iu Flex

WRFD-021306

Iu Flex Load Distribution Management

Enhanced Iu Flex

BSC6900

228 Configuring Iu Flex Load Distribution Management

WRFD-010203

Transmit Diversity

Transmit Diversity (per NodeB)

NodeB

229 Configuring Transmit Diversity

WRFD-010209

4-Antenna Receive Diversity

4-Antenna Receive (per NodeB)

NodeB

230 Configuring 4Antenna Receive Diversity

WRFD-021308

Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km

None

None

231 Configuring Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km

WRFD-021309

Improved Downlink Coverage

Improved Downlink Coverage

BSC6900

None


41


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-020138

HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE power limitation

HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE power limitation

BSC6900

232 Configuring HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation

WRFD-021001

Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier

The number of NodeBs with flexible frequency separation function enabled

NodeB

233 Configuring Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier

WRFD-010206

High Speed Access

None

None

234 Configuring High Speed Access

WRFD-021350

Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell

the number of RRUs with in independent demodulation of signals in one cell

NodeB


WRFD-020302

Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage

Inter frequency hard handover

BSC6900


WRFD-020304

Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS

Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS

BSC6900



42


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-020605

SRNS Relocation Introduction Package

SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved)

BSC6900

None

WRFD-020605 01



BSC6900

238 Configuring SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved)

WRFD-020605 02

SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover

SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover

BSC6900

239 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover

WRFD-020605 03

SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update

SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update

BSC6900

240 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update

WRFD-020605 04

Lossless SRNS Relocation

Lossless SRNS Relocation

BSC6900

None

WRFD-010615

Multiple RAB Package

Multiple RAB

BSC6900

241 Configuring Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2)

WRFD-010615 01

Combination of Two PS Services

Multiple RAB

BSC6900

242 Configuring Combination of Two PS Services

WRFD-010615 02

Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services

Multiple RAB

BSC6900

243 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services


43


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-010615 03

Combination of Three PS Services

Multiple RAB

BSC6900

244 Configuring Combination of Three PS Services

WRFD-010615 04

Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services

Multiple RAB

BSC6900

245 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services

WRFD-010615 05

Combination of Four PS Services

Multiple RAB

BSC6900

246 Configuring Combination of Four PS Services

WRFD-020103

Inter Frequency Load Balance

Inter frequency load handover

BSC6900


WRFD-020114

Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC)

Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC)

BSC6900


WRFD-020110

Multi Frequency Band Networking Management

Multi Frequency Band Networking Management

BSC6900

None

WRFD-020160

Enhanced Multiband Management

Enhancement for Multi frequency band Networking management

BSC6900


WRFD-020400

DRD Introduction Package

None

None



44


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-020400 01

Intra System Direct Retry

Intra System Direct Retry

BSC6900

251 Configuring Intra System Direct Retry

WRFD-020400 02

Inter System Direct Retry

Inter System Direct Retry

BSC6900

252 Configuring Inter System Direct Retry

WRFD-020400 03

Inter System Redirect

Inter System Redirect

BSC6900

253 Configuring Inter-System Redirect

WRFD-020400 04

Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup

None

None

254 Configuring Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup

WRFD-020402

Measurement Based Direct Retry

Measurement Based Direct Retry Function

BSC6900

255 Configuring Measurement Based Direct Retry

WRFD-020120

Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup

Service Steering in RRC Connection Setup

BSC6900

256 Configuring Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup

WRFD-020124

Uplink Flow Control of User Plane

Uplink Flow Control of User Plane

BSC6900

257 Configuring Uplink Flow Control of User Plane

WRFD-020104

Intra Frequency Load Balance

Intra frequency load balancing

BSC6900

258 Configuring Intra Frequency Load Balance


45


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-140211

Dynamic Target RoT Adjustment

Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment(per Cell)

BSC6900


WRFD-140212

CE Overbooking

CE overbooking (Per NodeB)

NodeB


WRFD-140213

Intelligent Access Class Control

Intelligent Access Class Control

BSC6900


WRFD-140215

Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period

Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period (per Cell)

BSC6900


WRFD-140216

Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration

Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration (per Cell)

BSC6900


WRFD-140217

Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold

Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold (per Cell)

BSC6900

264 Configuring InterFrequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold


46


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-070004

Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g

Handover Based on Load on Iur-g

BSC6900

265 Configuring Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g

WRFD-070005

NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g

NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g

BSC6900

266 Configuring NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g

WRFD-070006

GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g

BSC Load Balancing Based on Iur-g

BSC6900

267 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g

WRFD-070007

GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g

BSC Service Distribution Based on Iur-g

BSC6900


WRFD-020303

Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage

Coverage Based Inter-RAT Handover Between UMTS and GSM/ GPRS

BSC6900


WRFD-020309

Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS

Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS

BSC6900



47


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-020307

Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO

Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO

BSC6900

271 Configuring Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO

WRFD-020308

Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2

None

BSC6900

272 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2

WRFD-020308 01

NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change)

NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change)

BSC6900

273 Configuring NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change)

WRFD-020308 02

PS Handover Between UMTS and GPRS

PS Handover Between UMTS and GPRS

BSC6900

274 Configuring PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS

WRFD-020305

Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service

Inter system Service Handover

BSC6900

275 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service

WRFD-020306

Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load

Inter system Load Handover

BSC6900

276 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load

WRFD-020401

Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance

Inter System Redirect Based on Distance

BSC6900

277 Configuring Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance


48


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-020310

3G/2G Common Load Management

3G/2G Common Load Management

BSC6900

278 Configuring 3G/2G Common Load Management

WRFD-020126

Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1

Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1

BSC6900

279 Configuring Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1

WRFD-020129

Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE

Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE

BSC6900

280 Configuring Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE

WRFD-140218

Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE

PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE

BSC6900


WRFD-140224

Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM

Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM

BSC6900


WRFD-010505

Queuing and Pre-Emption

Queuing and Pre-emption

BSC6900

283 Configuring Queuing and Preemption

WRFD-021103

Access Class Restriction

Access Class Restriction when SPU overload

BSC6900


WRFD-050424

Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources

Traffic Priority Mapping on Transport

BSC6900

285 Configuring Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources


49


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-020806

Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight

Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight

BSC6900


WRFD-020131

Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness

Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness

BSC6900

287 Configuring Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness

WRFD-011502

Active Queue Management (AQM)

Active Queue Management (AQM)

BSC6900

288 Configuring Active Queue Management (AQM)

WRFD-020128

Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service

Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service

BSC6900

289 Configuring Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service

WRFD-020123

TCP Accelerator

TCP Accelerator

BSC6900


WRFD-010507

Rate Negotiation at Admission Control

RAB Downsizing at Admission Control

BSC6900

291 Configuring Rate Negotiation at Admission Control

WRFD-020130

Videophone Service Restriction

Videophone Service Restriction

BSC6900

292 Configuring Videophone Service Restriction

WRFD-020135

Intelligent InterCarrier UE Layered Management

Intelligent InterCarrier UE Layered Management (per Cell)

BSC6900

293 Configuring Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management


50


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




WRFD-140219

Micro NodeB Self-Planning

Micro NodeB Self-Planning (Per Cell)

NodeB


WRFD-140209

NodeB Integrated IPSec

NodeB integrated IPSec (Per NodeB)

NodeB


WRFD-140210

NodeB PKI Support

NodeB PKI support(Per NodeB)

NodeB


WRFD-140220

Intelligent Battery Management

Intelligent Battery Management (Per NodeB)

NodeB


MRFD-221801

Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS)

GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing

NodeB

298 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS)

MRFD-221802

GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)

GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)(Per NodeB)

NodeB

299 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)

MRFD-221501

IP-Based Multimode CoTransmission on BS side (NodeB)

None

None

300 Configuring IP-Based Multi-Mode CoTransmission on Base Station Side (NodeB)


51


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




MRFD-221504

TDM-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB)

Multi Mode BTS Transmission Sharing

NodeB

301 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB)

MRFD-221505

Bandwidth sharing of MBTS Multimode CoTransmission (NodeB)

the number of NodeBs with Bandwidth sharing of MBTS Multimode CoTransmission function enabled

NodeB

None

MRFD-221601

Multi-mode BS Common Reference Clock(NodeB)

None

None

302 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB)

MRFD-221602

Multi-mode BS Common IPSec (UMTS)

Co-IPSec Between GSM,UMTS and LTE (UMTS)

NodeB

303 Multimode BS Common IPSec(UMTS)

MRFD-221703

2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS)

2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS) (Per NodeB)

NodeB

304 Configuring 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS)


52


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Feature ID

Feature Name




MRFD-221803

Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)

Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)

NodeB


MRFD-221804

GSM Power Control on Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency gap (UMTS)

GSM Power Control on Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency gap (UMTS)

NodeB



53


3

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

Overview of Configurations on the CME

About This Chapter This section provides an overview of the configuration on the CME. The CME is a configuration tool on GUIs assisting you to effectively configure the data about wireless NE features. You can reconfigure configuration parameters by using the configuration expresses provided by the CME to activate or deactivate specified features. Feature activation and deactivation are mainly performed on the configuration expresses on the CME. This part introduces the operations on the configuration expresses and you need to understand the operations before activating or deactivating features. 3.1 Introduction to Configuration Methods This section describes how to configure the features of one or multiple NEs at a time by using the CME. 3.2 Configuring Device Data This section describes how to configure device data on the device panel. 3.3 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Parameters This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for UMTS global parameters. 3.4 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iub Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iub interfaces. 3.5 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-CS Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-CS interfaces. 3.6 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PS Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-PS interfaces. 3.7 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iur Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iur interfaces. 3.8 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-BC Interfaces Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


54



This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-BC interfaces. 3.9 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PC Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-PC interfaces. 3.10 Introduction to the Configuration Express for the (U)Iur-g Interface This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for the (U)Iur-g interface. 3.11 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Gi Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Gi interfaces. 3.12 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Radio Parameters This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for UMTS global radio parameters. 3.13 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Cells This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for UMTS cells. 3.14 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Neighboring UMTS Cells This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for neighboring UMTS cells. 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified RNCs in batches. 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified logical NodeBs in batches. 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches This section describes how to modify the data about multiple physical NodeBs in batches. 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified UMTS cells in batches. 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified RNC external cells in batches. 3.20 Modifying UMTS Channel Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified UMTS channels in batches. 3.21 Introduction to the Object Group Configuration This section describes how to search for external cells in an object group and configure them.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


55



3.1 Introduction to Configuration Methods This section describes how to configure the features of one or multiple NEs at a time by using the CME.

Introduction to Configuration Methods The CME enables you to configure NE features in both single and batch modes. For details, see Table 3-1. Table 3-1 Introduction to configuration methods Config uratio n Metho d

Characteristics

Single configu ration

Configures parameters for only one object (for example, a base station or a cell) each time. The CME provides configuration expresses and device panels for various types of data to configure one object. l The CME displays a navigation tree in the left pane and a table in the right pane. The navigation tree shows managed objects (MOs) while the table shows the parameters of the MOs and parameter values. After selecting an MO in the navigation tree, you can configure its values in the table. l The device panel is displayed on a GUI, allowing you to directly configure data for devices such as cabinet, subrack, and board.

Batch modific ation center

Applies the configuration data about an object (for example, a base station or a cell) to other objects. NOTE This method is applicable to scenarios where the parameters for multiple objects need to be configured the same.

For example, after setting the VAMOSSWITCH parameter for cell 1 to ON, you can use the batch modification function to set the VAMOSSWITCH parameters for other specified cells to ON at a time. By doing this, you do not need to configure the parameters for these cells one by one.

Introduction to Data Configuration Procedures Before using the CME to configure features, you need to be familiar with basic operations on the CME. For details, see CME Guidelines in the M2000 Help. The procedures for using the CME to activate or deactivate features are as follows: 1.

Synchronize the data in the current data area with the data on the live network.

2.

Create a planned data area and copy the data in the current data area to the planned data area for configuration.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


56



3.

Modify the parameters according to the planned data.

4.

After configuring data, export the data as scripts.

5.

Deliver the exported scripts to the live network for the configuration data to take effect on NEs.

3.2 Configuring Device Data This section describes how to configure device data on the device panel. Right-click a BSC to be configured in the Main View navigation tree in the left pane, and choose Device Panel from the shortcut menu. The NE device panel is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1 Device panel

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


57



Operatio n

Operation description

Add

l In the upper-right part of the device panel window, click Add Cabinet. l Right-click an empty subrack on the device panel window, and choose Add Subrack from the shortcut menu. l Right-click the empty slots on the panels of each subrack, and choose the required board types from the shortcut menu.

Delete

l Right-click a cabinet to be deleted, and choose Delete Cabinet from the shortcut menu. l Right-click a subrack to be deleted, and choose Delete Subrack from the shortcut menu. l Right-click a board to be deleted, and choose Delete Board from the shortcut menu.

View or modify

Right-click a device to be viewed or modified, and choose Property to view or modify the device.

3.3 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Parameters This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for UMTS global parameters. The configuration express provides a window for configuring RNC-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-2. Figure 3-2 Configuration express for UMTS global parameters

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


58



Configuration Guidance 1.

In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > RNC in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring UMTS global parameters is displayed.

2.

In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3. TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.

3.

In area 3, configure the data.

3.4 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iub Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iub interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-3. Figure 3-3 Configuration express for Iub interfaces

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


59




In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iub in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Iub interfaces is displayed.

2.

In area 2, select a NodeB to be configured.

3.

In area 3, select an object to be configured in the navigation tree Properties. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 4. TIP


4.

In area 4, configure the parameters.

3.5 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-CS Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-CS interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-4. Figure 3-4 Configuration express for Iu-CS interfaces


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iu-CS in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Iu-CS interfaces is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60


2.




3.


3.6 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PS Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-PS interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-5. Figure 3-5 Configuration express for Iu-PS interfaces


In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iu-PS in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Iu-PS interfaces is displayed.

2.



Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


61


3.



3.7 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iur Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iur interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-6. Figure 3-6 Configuration express for Iur interfaces


In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iur in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Iur interfaces is displayed.

2.



3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



62



3.8 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-BC Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-BC interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-7. Figure 3-7 Configuration express for Iu-BC interfaces


In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iu-BC in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Iu-BC interfaces is displayed.

2.



3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



63



3.9 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PC Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-PC interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-8. Figure 3-8 Configuration express for Iu-PC interfaces


In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iu-PC in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Iu-PC interfaces is displayed.

2.



3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



64



3.10 Introduction to the Configuration Express for the (U) Iur-g Interface This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for the (U)Iur-g interface. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-9. Figure 3-9 Configuration express for the (U)Iur-g interface


In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iur-g in the Transport navigation tree. The configuration express window for configuring (U)Iur-g interfaces is displayed.

2.



3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



65



3.11 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Gi Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Gi interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-10. Figure 3-10 Configuration express for Gi interfaces


In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Gi in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Gi interfaces is displayed.

2.



3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



66



3.12 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Radio Parameters This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for UMTS global radio parameters. The configuration express provides a window for configuring BSC-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-11. Figure 3-11 Configuration express for UMTS global radio parameters


In area 1, right-click a UMTS NE to be configured in the Main View navigation tree, and choose UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express from the shortcut menu. The express window for configuring UMTS global radio parameters is displayed.

2.



3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



67



3.13 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Cells This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for UMTS cells. The configuration express provides a window for configuring cell-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-12. Figure 3-12 Configuration express for UMTS cells


In area 1, right-click a UMTS cell in the Main View navigation tree, and choose UMTS Cell Configuration Express from the shortcut menu. The express window for configuring UMTS cells is displayed.

2.

(Optional)In area 2, select a cell to be configured.

3.

In area 3, select an object to be configured in the navigation tree Properties. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 4. TIP


4.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



68



3.14 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Neighboring UMTS Cells This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for neighboring UMTS cells. The configuration express provides a window for cell-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-13. Figure 3-13 Configuration express for neighboring UMTS cells


In area 1, right-click a UMTS cell in the Main View navigation tree, and then choose UMTS Neighboring Cell Configuration Express. The express window for configuring neighboring UMTS cells is displayed.

2.

(Optional)Select a source cell in area 2.

3.

Select the object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree in area 3.

4.

Select the corresponding Template and NE in area 4. Select one or multiple required neighboring cells, and click Add. The information about the neighboring cell is displayed in area 5.

5.

(Optional) Right-click the neighboring cell selected in area 5, and choose Modify NCell Relationship from the shortcut menu to modify the information about the neighboring cell.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


69



3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified RNCs in batches.

Procedure Step 1 In the configuration window, select a data record and click objects is displayed.

. The dialog box for selecting

Step 2 Select RNCs to be modified in batches. Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed. Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches. NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can change parameter values as required. The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified RNCs in batches.

Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts batch modification. After modification, the CME displays the results. Step 6 Click Finish. ----End

3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified logical NodeBs in batches.



Step 2 Click Add. Select the mode for adding NodeBs. For details, see Introduction to the Object Selection Modes. Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed. Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches. NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can change parameter values as required. The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified NodeBs in batches.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


70




3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches This section describes how to modify the data about multiple physical NodeBs in batches.

Procedure Step 1 In the Main View navigation tree in the left pane of the planned data area, right-click a UMTS NE, and choose CM Express > UMTS Application > Physical NodeB Management > Modify Physical NodeB Parameters in Bulk (M2000 Client Mode) or UMTS Application > Physical NodeB Management > Modify Physical NodeB Parameters in Bulk (CME Client Mode) from the menu bar. The Modify Physical NodeB Parameters in Bulk dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select an object to be modified and click Next. The data about the object for all physical NodeBs in the planned data area is displayed in the lower part of the window. Select one or multiple records, and click

.

Step 3 Click Next, and modify the parameters value of the selected object. Step 4 Click Finish. The CME starts to modify the parameter value of the selected object. Step 5 After the modification is complete, click Finish to exit the wizard. After the automatic modification is complete, the CME displays a message, indicating whether the modification is successful. If the modification fails, you need to locate and solve the problem based on the displayed information. ----End

3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified UMTS cells in batches.



Step 2 Select cells to be modified in batches. If you need to...

Then...

Modify all cells under an NE in batches

Select BY NE from the Select mode drop-down list and select NEs in the NE list.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


71



If you need to...

Then...

Modify specified cells under an NE in batches

Select BY Cell from the Select mode drop-down list, click Add, and select the mode for adding cells based on site requirements. For details, see Introduction to the Object Selection Modes.

Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed. Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches. NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can change parameter values as required. The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified cells in batches.


3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified RNC external cells in batches.



Step 2 Select RNC external cells to be modified in batches. If you need to...

Then...

Modify all RNC external cells under an Select BY NE from the Select mode drop-down NE in batches list and select NEs in the NE list.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


72



If you need to...

Then...

Modify specified RNC external cells under an NE in batches

The following uses RNC 2G external cell as an example. Select BY GSMCELL from the Select mode drop-down list, click Add, and select the mode for adding RNC external cells based on site requirements. For details, see Introduction to the Object Selection Modes. NOTE l If you want to modify RNC 3G external cells, the Select mode drop-down list displays BY NRNCCELL. l If you want to modify RNC LTE external cells, the Select mode drop-down list displays By LTECELL.


The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can change parameter values as required. The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified RNC external cells in batches.


3.20 Modifying UMTS Channel Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified UMTS channels in batches.



Step 2 Select cells to be modified in batches. If you need to...

Then...

Modify all cells under an NE in batches

Select BY NE from the Select mode drop-down list and select NEs in the NE list.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


73



If you need to...

Then...

Modify specified cells under an NE in batches

Select BY Cell from the Select mode drop-down list, click Add, and select the mode for adding cells based on site requirements. For details, see Introduction to the Object Selection Modes.


The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can change parameter values as required. The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified cells in batches.


3.21 Introduction to the Object Group Configuration This section describes how to search for external cells in an object group and configure them. Figure 3-14 shows the window for configuring external cells. Figure 3-14 Window for configuring external cells

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


74




In area 1, select the BSC to be configured in the Main View navigation tree.

2.

In area 2, select the external cell to be configured in the Object Group navigation tree. TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be set on the Search tab page. This helps quickly locate parameters.

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



75


4 Activating the UMTS License

4

Activating the UMTS License

About This Chapter In the case of certain UMTS features, a license control item is defined for each feature. The license control item of a feature must be activated before the configuration and use of the feature. The license control items related to the RNC can be activated on the M2000 or RNC LMT, whereas those related to the NodeB can be activated only on the M2000. 4.1 Activating the BSC6900 License This section describes how to activate the BSC6900 license. 4.2 Allocating a license to Telecom Operators When multiple telecom operators share one RAN, they can also share the resources defined in a NodeB license after you allocate the license to the telecom operators. 4.3 Allocating a License to NodeBs After uploading a NodeB license file of a RAN to the M2000 server, you need to allocate the license to the NodeBs in the RAN. Then you can activate the license for it to take effect.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


76



4.1 Activating the BSC6900 License This section describes how to activate the BSC6900 license.

Prerequisites l

The LMT is started and you have logged in to the BSC6900.

l

The BSC6900 is in service.

Procedure Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ESN and record the Equipment Serial Number (ESN) of the BSC. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command DLD LICENSE to download the license file from the FTP server to the \ftp\license directory of the main area directory of the OMU. Step 3 Run the LST LICENSE command and enter the filename of the license to be activated to query the file information. If...

Then...

The file information complies with the information of Go to Step 4. the file that you apply for, The file information does not comply with the information of the file that you apply for,

Exit the task and contact Huawei.

Step 4 Run the LST CFGMODE command to query the BSC6900 configuration status. If the BSC6900 is ineffective, run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command to switch it to the effective state. Step 5 Run the ACT LICENSE command to activate the license. Step 6 If the primary operator and secondary operators exist, run the SET LICENSE command to active the license for the primary operator first and then for secondary operators. If multiple secondary operators exist, run the SET LICENSE command repeatedly. Step 7 Run the BSC6900 MML command CMP LICENSE to check whether the running license on the host is consistent with that on the OMU. If...

Then...

If the running license on the host is consistent with that End the task or go to Step 8. on the OMU If the running license on the host is inconsistent with that on the OMU

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


End the task and contact Huawei.

77



Step 8 In the case of high traffic, run the SET LICENSECTRL command to enable the license control function of the BSC6900 to enter the grace protection period. ----End

4.2 Allocating a license to Telecom Operators When multiple telecom operators share one RAN, they can also share the resources defined in a NodeB license after you allocate the license to the telecom operators.

Prerequisites You have uploaded a valid NodeB license file to the M2000 server.

Procedure Step 1 Choose License > NE License Management > NodeB License Management. The NodeB License Management window is displayed. Step 2 From the navigation tree in the left pane of the NodeB License Management window, select an RNC node whose NodeB license file is already uploaded to the M2000 server. Step 3 Right-click a license, and then choose License Distributed to Operator from the shortcut menu. Step 4 In the License Distributed to Operator window, set available functions and resources for each telecom operator, and then click OK. ----End

4.3 Allocating a License to NodeBs After uploading a NodeB license file of a RAN to the M2000 server, you need to allocate the license to the NodeBs in the RAN. Then you can activate the license for it to take effect.

Prerequisites You have uploaded a valid NodeB license file to the M2000 server.

Procedure Step 1 Choose License > NE License Management > NodeB License Management. The NodeB License Management window is displayed. Step 2 From the navigation tree in the left pane of the NodeB License Management window, select an RNC node whose NodeB license file is already uploaded to the M2000 server. Step 3 Optional: In the lower part of the license information area, click the tab of a telecom operator. If a RAN is shared by multiple telecom operators, you can allocate a NodeB license to them by referring to 4.2 Allocating a license to Telecom Operators. The license allocation information about all the NodeBs related to the telecom operator is displayed in a list. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


78



Step 4 Double-click a NodeB to which you need to allocate the license, or right-click the NodeB and choose Modify from the shortcut menu. Then, set available resources and functions for the NodeB. NOTE

l You can set a function control item to either 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the function is not enabled while 1 indicates that the function is enabled. l You can hold down Ctrl or Shift to select multiple NodeBs at a time. Right-click the selected NodeBs, and then choose Modify from the shortcut menu to set a control item value to all the selected NodeBs. l If a control item is unavailable in the Modify dialog box, it indicates that the control item is not supported by NodeBs. To view the values indicating that the control item is not supported by NodeBs, click the status description on the right in the Modify dialog box. For descriptions of the values, see Parameter Description in the dialog box. l When setting a certain control item, you can click Clear to clear the preset values in the column of the control item. l You can click Settings in the Modify dialog box to add or delete one or multiple control items to be set.

Step 5 Perform operations according to license allocation policies. After a NodeB license file is uploaded to the M2000, you can allocate the license to NodeBs immediately. You can also create a scheduled task for delivering preset license allocation information to NodeBs at a certain non-busy hour. You can allocate an inactive license to NodeBs. After an inactive license is allocated to NodeBs, it is activated automatically. If you want to ...

Then ...

Allocate a license to NodeBs immediately 1. In the license information area, right-click a license record, and then choose Distribute from the shortcut menu. 2. In the displayed Message dialog box, click Yes. You can click Details to view the license allocate information. Deliver license allocation information to NodeBs on a scheduled basis

1. In the license information area, right-click a license record, and then chooseLicense Distribute Task from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, select the license record, and then click . The Task Management window is displayed. 2. Set the parameters of the scheduled task for delivering license allocation information.

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


79


5


Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010510 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature does not depend on other features.

l

License – This feature is not under license control.

Context This feature enables RRC connection establishment and release and RAB assignment for services of different rates, so as to meet different QoS requirements. This feature is fundamental to service provision.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCESTCAUSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Channel Type and Rate of RRC Setup Cause Configuration > RRC Connection Establish Channel Type And Bit Rate; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the channel type and bit rate corresponding to a specific RRC connection establishment cause. NOTE

Do not set Channel type for RRC establishment to FACH. Set Switch for RRC established on E_FACH to OFF.

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Verification Procedure Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80



1.

Start Iub interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 5-1 Figure 5-1 Iub Interface Trace dialog box

2.

Establish a service on the UE. Among the traced Iub data, view the dCH-ID in the DCH-Specific-FDD-Item IE in the NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ message. The result shows that the ID of the transport channel that carries signaling is 32.

3.

View the transmissionTimeInterval and nrOfTransportBlocks IEs in the ulTransportFormatSet IE associated with the DCH whose dCH-ID value is 32. – If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 40, you can infer that an RRC connection is established for a 3.4 kbit/s service. – If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 20, you can infer that an RRC connection is established for a 6.8 kbit/s service. – If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 10 and the maximum value of nrOfTransportBlocks is 1, you can infer that an RRC connection is established for a 13.6 kbit/s service. – If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 10 and the maximum value of nrOfTransportBlocks is 2, you can infer that an RRC connection is established for a 27.2 kbit/s service.

4.

l

Release the service on the UE, and perform Uu interface tracing. If you find an RRC_RRC_CONN_REL_CMP message in the traced data, you can infer that the RRC connection is released.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example //Activating 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


81



//set the channel type and bit rate corresponding to a specific RRC connection establishment cause SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST, SigChType=DCH_3.4K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF; SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST, SigChType=DCH_6.8K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF; SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST, SigChType=DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF; SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST, SigChType=DCH_27.2K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


82


6


Configuring Conversational QoS Class This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010501 Conversational QoS Class.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The UE and the CN support the conversational class.

Context Based on QoS requirements, 3GPP defines four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive, and background. They differ in their sensitivity to delay. The conversational class is highly sensitive to the delay and therefore has a high requirement on real-time transmission. The conversational class has the following fundamental characteristics: l

Preservation of the time relationships between information entities in a stream and limitation of the transmission delay and delay jitter within an acceptable range.

l

Conversational pattern (stringent requirement on the delay).

Conversational services are applicable in both the CS and PS domains. Most typical applications of the conversational class are voice services and videophone services in the CS domain and VoIP services in the PS domain. Huawei RAN supports the following basic types of conversational services: l

CS AMR speech services at the rates of 12.2 kbit/s, 10.2 kbit/s, 7.95 kbit/s, 7.4 kbit/s, 6.7 kbit/s, 5.9 kbit/s, 5.15 kbit/s, and 4.75 kbit/s

l

CS transparent data services (conversational class) at the rates of 64 kbit/s, 56 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, and 28.8 kbit/s

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


83



l

PS bidirectional symmetric voice services at the rates of 64 kbit/s, 42.8 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, and 8 kbit/s

l

Activation Procedure

Procedure 1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CS voice channel type and VOIP channel type to DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH).

Verification Procedure 1.

Initiate Iub interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1 Iub interface trace dialog box

2.

Establish a conversational service on the UE. Check the DPC (that is, the source) of the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message among the traced Iu data to determine whether the service is a CS service or PS service.

3.

View the trafficClass IE in the rRB-Parameters IE of the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message to verify that the traffic class is conversational.

4.

View the maxBitrate and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message. – If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric bidirectional, then the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlink rate of the conversational service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of the service. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission uses asymmetric rates. – If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Symmetric bidirectional, then the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the rate applicable in both the uplink and the downlink. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission uses symmetric rates. – If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directional downlink, then the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the downlink rate of the conversational service. In this case, the uplink rate of the service is 0. – If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directional Uplink, then the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the uplink

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


84



rate of the conversational service. In this case, the downlink rate of the service is 0. 5.

l

View the guaranteedBitRate (the guaranteed bit rate of the conversational service) and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message by following the same rules as those for viewing maxBitrate.



----End

Example //Activating conversational QoS class SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: CSVoiceChlType=DCH, VoipChlType=DCH;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


85



7

Configuring Streaming QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010502 Streaming QoS Class.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The UE and CN support streaming services.

Context Based on QoS requirements, there are four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive, and background. QoS indicates the sensitivity of services to the delay. The streaming class is a relatively recent development in data communications, which raises a number of new requirements in both telecommunication and data communication systems. The transmission of streaming services must follow the time sequence of information entities . The streaming class has the following features: l

The time sequence of information entities in a stream is not changed.

l

Streaming services are applicable in both the CS and PS domains. The most typical applications of the streaming class are fax services in the CS domain and streaming video services in the PS domain.

Streaming services are real-time services, such as audio and video programs. They are transmitted in only one direction and serve individual users.

Procedure l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Activation Procedure Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the HSDPA/HSUPA rate threshold for streaming services. If the assigned rate of a streaming service is lower than this threshold, the streaming service is set up on R99 channels. NOTE

In the tests on 384 kbit/s streaming services, the settings of the thresholds cannot ensure that the services are set up on R99 services. In this case, you can disable the HSDPA and HSUPA capabilities of the cell to enable the streaming services to be set up on R99 channels.

l

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters. Set ACTSTATUS to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to disable the HSDPA capability of the cell.

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell. Set Cell HSUPA state to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to disable the HSUPA capability of the cell.


Start Iu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 7-1

Figure 7-1 Iu Interface Trace dialog box

2.

Use a UE to set up a streaming service. Check the DPC (that is, the source) of the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message among the traced Iu data to determine whether the service is a CS service or PS service.

3.

Check the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message and check that the value of the trafficClass information element (IE) in rRB-Parameters is streaming.

4.

View the maxBitrate and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message. Expected result: – If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric bidirectional, the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlink rate of the streaming service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of the service.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


87



– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Symmetric bidirectional, the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the rate in both the uplink and the downlink. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission use the same rate. – If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directional downlink, the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the downlink rate of the streaming service. In this case, the uplink rate of the service is 0. – If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directional Uplink, the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the uplink rate of the streaming service. In this case, the downlink rate of the service is 0. 5.

l

View the guaranteedBitRate (the guaranteed bit rate of the streaming service) and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message by following the same rules as those for the maxBitrate IE.



----End

Example //Activating Streaming Class QoS SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlStrThsOnHsdpa=D384, UlStrThsOnHsupa=D384; DEA UCELLHSDPA: CellId=1; DEA UCELLHSUPA: CellId=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


88



8

Configuring Interactive QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010503 Interactive QoS Class.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The UE and CN support interactive services.

Context Based on QoS requirements, there are four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive, and background. QoS indicates the sensitivity of services to the delay. The interactive class is a typical data communication solution. It is characterized by the request/ response pattern of end users. For example, a person or an entity at the destination sends a data request to a remote server and expects a response message within a specific time. In this situation, the Round Trip Time (RTT) is one of the key attributes of the interactive class. Another characteristic is that the packets should be transparently transferred at a low Bit Error Rate (BER). In summary, the interactive class has the following fundamental characteristics: request/ response pattern and preservation of the payload. Interactive services are applicable in the PS domain and not applicable in the CS domain. The most typical application of the interactive class is web browsing. Huawei RAN supports the following types of interactive services: PS bidirectional symmetric or asymmetric interactive services at the rates of 384 kbit/s, 285 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, and 8 kbit/s.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


89



Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the HSDPA/HSUPA rate threshold for interactive services. If the assigned rate of an interactive service is lower than this threshold, the interactive service is set up on R99 channels.




2.

Use a UE to set up an interactive service. Check the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message and check that the value of the trafficClass information element (IE) in rRB-Parameters is interactive.

3.

View the maxBitrate and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message. Expected result: – If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric bidirectional, the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlink rate of the interactive service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of the service. – If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Symmetric bidirectional, the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the rate in both the uplink and the downlink. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission use the same rate.

l



----End

Example //Activating Interactive QoS Class SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D13900, UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa=D5440;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


90



9

Configuring Background QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010504 Background QoS Class.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The UE and CN support this feature.

Context Based on QoS requirements, there are four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive, and background. QoS indicates the sensitivity of services to the delay. A typical type of background service is data services. One of the characteristics of the background class is that the destination does not expect data within a specific time, and therefore the background class is delay-insensitive. Another characteristic is that the packets should be transparently transferred at a low Bit Error Rate (BER). In summary, the background class has the following fundamental characteristics: destination not expecting data within a specific time and preservation of the payload. Background services are applicable in the PS domain and not applicable in the CS domain. The most typical applications of the background class are download and emails. Huawei RAN supports the following types of background services: PS bidirectional symmetric or asymmetric background services at the rates of 384 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, and 8 kbit/s.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


91



Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the HSDPA/HSUPA rate threshold for background services. If the assigned rate of a background service is lower than this threshold, the background service is set up on R99 channels.




2.

Use a UE to set up a background service. Check the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message and check that the value of the trafficClass information element (IE) in rRB-Parameters is background.

3.

View the maxBitrate and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message. Expected result: – If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric bidirectional, the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlink rate of the background service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of the service. – If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Symmetric bidirectional, the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the rate in both the uplink and the downlink. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission use the same rate.

l



----End

Example //Activating Background QoS Class SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D13900, UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa=D5440;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


92


10 Configuring Emergency Call

10

Configuring Emergency Call

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021104 Emergency Call.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature grants higher priority to emergency calls so that they are preferentially processed, compared to normal calls.

CAUTION If the license of the AMR-WB service is not activated on a RNC, ensure that AMR-WB is not enabled for this RNC on the CS core network side. Otherwise, both the AMR-NB services and emergency calls cannot be set up for the UE supporting AMR-WB.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure This feature need not be activated.

l


l

Use a UE to initiate an emergency call.. The emergency call is successfully established.

Deactivation Procedure This feature need not be deactivated.

----End Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


93



11

Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010506 RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The NEs in the core network must support selective configuration of the maximum bit rate (MBR) and guaranteed bit rate (GBR).

l


l


Context This feature enables the BSC6900 to initiate Iu renegotiation on the MBR and GBR of PS realtime services to reduce the rate of real-time services.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable the cell-level LDR algorithm. In this step, set Cell LDC algorithm switch to UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm), DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm), and CELL_CREDIT_LDR (Credit LDR Algorithm).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to enable the NodeB-level LDR algorithm. In this step, set NodeB LDC algorithm switch to IUB_LDR(IUB LDR Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94



Algorithm), LCG_CREDIT_LDR(LCG Credit LDR Algorithm), and NODEB_CREDIT_LDR(NodeB Credit LDR Algorithm).

l

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-level LDR trigger threshold. In this step, set UL/DL LDR Trigger threshold and DL State Trans Hysteresis threshold according to the network plan.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBLDR (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set the NodeBlevel LDR credit spreading factor (SF) reserved threshold. In this step, set Ul LDR Credit SF reserved threshold and Dl LDR Credit SF reserved threshold according to the network plan.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the NodeB credit LDR threshold for the local cell. In this step, set Ul LDR Credit SF reserved threshold and DL LDR Credit SF reserved threshold according to the network plan.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set LDR period timer length according to the network plan.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable QoS renegotiation on real-time services. In this step, set DL LDR first action to QOSRENEGO.


Establish a PS streaming service.

2.

Trigger LDR in the cell according to the cell LDR threshold specified in the activation procedure.

3.

If RAB MODIFY REQUEST is traced on the Iu interface, this feature has been activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to disable the cell-level LDR algorithm. In this step, deselect UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm), DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm), and CELL_CREDIT_LDR(Credit LDR Algorithm) from the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-down list box.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to disable the NodeB-level LDR algorithm. In this step, deselect IUB_LDR(IUB LDR Algorithm), Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95



LCG_CREDIT_LDR(LCG Credit LDR Algorithm), and NODEB_CREDIT_LDR(NodeB Credit LDR Algorithm) from the NodeB LDC algorithm switch drop-down list box. ----End

Example /*Activating RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface*/ //Enabling the cell-level LDR algorithm MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch= UL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_LDR-1&CELL_CREDIT_LDR-1; //Enabling the NodeB-level LDR algorithm MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NODEB1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-1&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-1&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-1; //Enable QoS renegotiation on real-time services MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, DlLdrFirstAction=QoSRenego; /*Deactivating RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface*/ //Disabling the cell-level LDR algorithm MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch= UL_UU_LDR-0&DL_UU_LDR-0&CELL_CREDIT_LDR-0; //Disabling the NodeB-level LDR algorithm MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NODEB1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-0&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-0&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


96



12

Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210604 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – In receive diversity mode, the NodeB should provide sufficient RF channels and demodulation resources to meet the requirements for the number of antenna diversities.

l


l


Context The 2-Antenna Receive Diversity is an effective approach of reducing signal attenuation by using two antennas to receive a signal at the reception end, where two received signals are combined after certain processing.

Procedure l


l


l

Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Sector; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Antenna Magnitude to 2. Run the NodeB MML command LST SEC to query the value of Antenna Magnitude. Expected result: Antenna Magnitude is 2.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


97



Example //Activation procedure ADD SEC: STN=1, SECN=0, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, ANTM=2, DIVM=COMMON_MODE, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1N=R0A, ANT2SRN=60, ANT2N=R0B; //Verification procedure LST SEC: STN=1, SECN=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


98


13


Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010205 Cell Digital Combination and Split.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only DBS3800/DBS3900 supports this feature, RRU3801c cannot support this feature. – Each RRU is configured with only one RX antenna. – It is not recommended that distributed sectors and non-distributed sectors are configured on an RRU chain. – If distributed sectors are configured, one CPRI port supports a maximum of four cascaded RRUs, a maximum of four RRUs share one cell, and a maximum of three distributed cells are supported. – One BBU supports combination of uplink digital signals on only one CPRI port. A maximum of four RRUs share one cell. – In consideration of delay requirements, the remote distance of fiber optic cables for the RRUs in a cell and with the same coverage should be smaller than four kilometers. – RF modules, RRU3828 and RRU3829 can only support a maximum of four carriers when they are implemented for Cell Digital Combination and Split.

l


l


Context The feature enables multiple sectors to use the resources in the same cell, which improves system spectrum efficiency and resource utilization. Compared with the analog combination and split, the digital combination and split can provide higher capacity and wider coverage without bringing additional noises or signal losses. Cell coverage can be adjusted simply through software to adapt to actual traffic distribution and changes, which improves CE resource utilization and operation benefits. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


99



Procedure l

l

l


Run the NodeB MML command ADD RRUCHAIN (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click TOPO > Add RXU Chain; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an RRU chain. In this step, set Topo Type to CHAIN.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD RRU (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > TOPO > Right click RXU CHAIN > Add RXU Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an RRU. In this step, set a group of RRUs in consecutive numbering to the RRUs to be used by the distributed sector.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Sector; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a sector. In this step, set Sector Type to DIST_SECTOR(DIST_SECTOR).

4.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add a local cell. In this step, set Sector Type to DIST_SECTOR (DIST_SECTOR).


Run the NodeB MML command LST SEC. In this step, check that Sector Type is set to DIST_SECTOR(DIST_SECTOR).

2.

Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL. In this step, check that Sector Type is set to DIST_SECTOR(DIST_SECTOR).


----End

Example 1.

NodeB V200R014 //Activation procedure ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, BM=COLD, HSN=2, HPN=0; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU, RS=UO; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=1, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=1, RT=MRRU, RS=UO; ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR, SRNB=60, SRNE=61; ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=100, STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR, RRUMODE=SYNC, ULFREQ=9610, DLFREQ=10560, HISPM=FALSE; //Verification procedure LST SEC: STN=0, SECN=1; LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=100;

2.

NodeB V100R014 //Activation procedure ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HSN=0, HPN=0; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU; ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR, SRNB=60, SRNE=61; ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=100, STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR, BBPOOLTYPE=GEN_POOL, RRUMODE=SYNC, ULFREQ=9610, DLFREQ=10560, HISPM=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


100


13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split //Verification procedure LST SEC: STN=0, SECN=1; LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=100;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


101



14

Configuring UE State in Connected

Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010202 UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH).

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The Iu-PS activity factor is already modified. The Iu-PS activity factor can be modified by running the ADD TRMFACTOR (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Factor Table; CME batch modification center: not supported) and MOD ADJMAP (CME single configuration: IUPS Configuration Express > IP Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) commands. The recommended value of the Iu-PS activity factor is 10%. NOTE

If there are excessive users in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state, a large amount of bandwidth on the Iu-PS interface is consumed though such users do not have data to transmit. Adjusting the Iu-PS activity factor can prevent PS service admission failures due to the increase in the number of UEs in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state.

– The Fast Dormancy procedure of the UE must comply with 3GPP TS 25.331 CR3483. – UEs must support associated states.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


102



Context Huawei RAN supports four states of UEs in connected mode: CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, and CELL_FACH. This feature helps save radio resources efficiently.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure A UE can directly enter the CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH state. It can enter the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state only through state transition from CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH. The settings of state transition are as follows: 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_F2U_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to enable state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer and Cell Reselection Timer to appropriate values.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANS (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > UE State Translating Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell Reselection Counter Threshold to an appropriate value. NOTE

l This feature involves the parameter settings of state transition from CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH to CELL_PCH or URA_PCH. For the parameter settings of other types of state transition, see 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control. l For the parameter settings related to fast dormancy, see 175 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy.

l

Verification Procedure This feature cannot be verified separately. The state of a UE changes when it requests different services. This is referred to as state transition. For details, see 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control.

l


----End Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


103



Example //Activating UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH) //Enabling status transition (CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH/URA_PCH) SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_F2U_SWITCH-1; //(Optional) Enabling state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeF2PStateTransTimer=65535, CellReSelectTimer=180; //Setting the parameters related to this feature SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=9;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


104



15

Configuring Paging UE in Idle,

CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010301 Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1).

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context In paging type 1, the UTRAN sends a paging message to the UE in idle mode, CELL_PCH state, or URA_PCH state through the paging control channel (PCCH).

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch set to DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH, DRA_HSUPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH and DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter Reserved parameter 1 to RSVDBIT1_BIT21 (Reserved Parameter 1 Bit 21). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105



3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer to 10

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Interactive service T1 and Background service T1 to 1800.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMFACTOR (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Factor Table; CME batch modification center: not supported) and MOD ADJMAP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to modify the Iu-PS activation factor. The recommended value is 10%. NOTE

l After this feature is activated, number of UEs in CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state will increase sharply. These UEs consume a large number of Iu-PS resources although there is no service data transmission. l You can adjust the Iu-PS activation factor to avoid the PS admission failure due to increasing number of UEs in CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state.

l

l

l

Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in Idle Mode) 1.

On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.

2.

Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, Trace Mode and Save File. Then, click Submit.

3.

Power on UE1 and UE2, and camp on CELL1. Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE1 message should be displayed on the Trace Data tab page.

Commissioning Procedure (Paging a UE in CELL_PCH State) 1.


2.

On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive.

3.

Establish an R99 PS service on UE1. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_DCH.

4.

Do not send any data from UE1 for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform UE1 transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH.

5.

Do not send any data from UE1 for another while. Then, the network side should perform UE1 transition to CELL_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_PCH.

6.

Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE1 message should be displayed.

Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in URA_PCH) 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106



2.

Repeat step 3 through step 5 described in section "Paging a UE in URA_PCH" to perform UE1 transition to CELL_PCH. Cause UE1 to perform a cell reselection between CELL1 and CELL2. Cause UE1 to perform another cell reselection after the Cell Reselection Timer[s] expires. Search for the last RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message in trace data. The value of rrcstateindicator IE should be URA_PCH.

3.

Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE1 message should be displayed. NOTE

For details about how to enable UE transition to CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state, see 14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH).

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect RSVDBIT1_BIT21 (Reserved Parameter 1 Bit 21) from the Reserved parameter 1 drop-down list box.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer to 65535. When this parameter is set to 65535, the FACH-to-PCH state transition is disabled.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Interactive service T1and set Background service T1 to 20.

----End

Example // Activation Procedure //Setting the FACH/E_FACH-tO-PCH state transition timer for BE services SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeF2PStateTransTimer=10; //Setting the PS inactive period detection timer for RNC SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=1800, PsInactTmrForBac=1800; //Adding an activation factor ADD TRMFACTOR: FTI=1, REMARK="Iu-PS", PSCONVDL=10, PSCONVUL=10, PSSTRMDL=10, PSSTRMUL=10, PSINTERDL=10, PSINTERUL=10, PSBKGDL=10, PSBKGUL=10; //Modifying the mapping between activation factor and adjacent node MOD ADJMAP: ANI=1, ITFT=IUPS, FTI=1; //Enabling the cell update during CS service setup SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT21-0; // Deactivation Procedure

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


107



//Setting the FACH/E_FACH-tO-PCH state transition timer for BE services SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeF2PStateTransTimer=65535; //Setting the PS inactive period detection timer for RNC SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=20, PsInactTmrForBac=20; //Disabling the cell update during CS service setup SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT21-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


108


16


Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010302 Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2).

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context In paging type 2, the UTRAN sends a paging message to the UE in CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH state through the DCH or FACH.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


(Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the RNC-oriented PS BE service state transition switch.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer[s] to 30s.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109



Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set inactivity detection timers for PS services. l

l

l

Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in CELL_DCH State) 1.


2.

Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, Trace Mode and Save File. Then, click Submit.

3.


4.


Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in CELL_FACH State) 1.


2.

Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File, and then click Submit. The Trace Data tab page is displayed.

3.


4.


5.

Do not send any data from UE1 for 30 seconds. Then, you can view that the network side performs UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message. The value of rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH.

6.




----End

Example //Activating paging type 2 SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1; SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=30; SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=1440, ProtectTmrForInt=20, PsInactTmrForBac=1440, ProtectTmrForBac=20;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


110



17

Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021101 Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature does not depend on the hardware.

l


l


Context This feature allows dynamic rate adjustment and UE state transition triggered by various reasons. This improves the quality of services and increases resource utilization.

Procedure l

Activating DCCC 1.

To activate the DCCC algorithm, perform the following steps: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH.

2.

To activate traffic-based BE service rate adjustment, perform the following steps: a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABDCCCMC to set the following event 4A and 4B parameters: – Direction – Event4AThd – Event4BThd – TimetoTrigger4A

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


111



– TimetoTrigger4B – PendingTime4A – PendingTime4B b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set the following RNClevel DCCC algorithm parameters: – DcccStg – UlRateUpAdjLevel – UlRateDnAdjLevel – DlRateUpAdjLevel – DlRateDnAdjLevel – UlDcccRateThd – DlDcccRateThd – UlMidRateCalc – DlMidRateCalc – UlMidRateThd – DlMidRateThd

3.

To activate throughput-based BE service rate adjustment, perform the following steps: a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_THROUGHPUT_DCCC_SWITCH.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC. In this step, set DCH Throu Meas Period and HSUPA DCCC strategy.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABDCCCMC to set the following event 4B parameters for the DCH: – Period Amount to trigger 4B on DCH – Period Amount after trigger 4B on DCH

4.

To activate link-stability-based BE service rate adjustment, perform the following steps: a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT to set the RNC-level QoS enhancement algorithm parameters. The parameters for ensuring link stability are: – QOS Switch for BE Traffic – First Action for BE Uplink QOS – Second Action for BE Uplink QOS – Third Action for BE Uplink QOS – Wait Timer for BE Uplink Rate – First Action for BE Downlink QOS – Second Action for BE Downlink QOS – Third Action for BE Downlink QOS – Indicator for BE Uplink QOS Event – Srnc Parameter for BE Downlink RLC QOS – DRNC Parameter for BE Downlink RLC QOS

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


112



– Measurement of 6A1 Switch – Measurement of 5A Switch – Measurement of 6D Switch b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUALITYMEAS to set the RNClevel QoS measurement parameters. The parameters for ensuring link stability are: – BE Trigger Time 6A1 – BE Trigger Time 6B1 – BE Trigger Time 6A2 – BE Trigger Time 6B2 – BE Trigger Time 6D – UL Measurement Filter Coefficient – DL TCP Measurement Filter Coefficient – BE Trigger Time of Event E – BE Reporting Period Unit for Event E – BE Event E Reporting Period or BE Event E Reporting Period minute – BE Trigger Time of Event F – BE Reporting Period Unit for Event F – BE Event F Reporting Period or BE Event F Reporting Period minute

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set the cell-level Call Admission Control (CAC) algorithm parameters. The parameters for ensuring link stability are: – Max UL TX power of interactive service – Max UL TX power of background service NOTE

The BSC6900 defines default values for Max UL TX power of interactive service and Max UL TX power of background service. Retain the default values in normal situations.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLRLPWR to set the cell-level downlink transmit power parameters.

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLQUALITYMEAS to set the cell-level QoS measurement parameters. The parameters for ensuring link stability are: – BE Trigger Time 6A1 – BE Trigger Time 6B1 – BE Trigger Time 6A2 – BE Trigger Time 6B2 – BE Trigger Time 6D – BE Trigger Time of Event E – BE Reporting Period Unit for Event E – BE Event E Reporting Period – BE Trigger Time of Event F

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


113



– BE Reporting Period Unit for Event F – BE Event E Reporting Period NOTE

The BSC6900 defines default values for the preceding parameters. Retain the default values in normal situations.

f.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABQUALITYMEAS to set the following typical parameters for QoS measurement: – Uplink Event 6A1 Relative Threshold – Uplink Event 6A2 Relative Threshold – Uplink Event 6B1 Relative Threshold – Uplink Event 6B2 Relative Threshold – Statistic Block Number for 5A Event – Event 5A Threshold – Event 5A Interval Block Number – Event Ea Relative Threshold – Event Eb Relative Threshold

g.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABRLC to set Radio Link Control (RLC) parameters for a typical Radio Access Bearer (RAB). The parameters for ensuring link stability are: – Re-TX monitor period – Event A threshold – Hysteresis of Event A – Event A pending time after trigger – Filter Coefficient of RLC Retransmission Ratio NOTE

The BSC6900 defines default values for the preceding parameters. Retain the default values in normal situations.

h.

i.

j.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Link stability control for BE services is implemented through Inter-frequency handover. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHOCOMM. In this step, set Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch to INTERFREQ.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH.

To configure inter-RAT handover for the link stability of BE services, perform the following steps: a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHOCOMM. In this step, set Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch to INTERRAT and Inter-RAT PS Handover Switch to ON.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH.

To configure inter-frequency handover and inter-RAT handover for the link stability of BE services, perform the following steps: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114



k.

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHOCOMM. In this step, set Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch to SIMINTERFREQRAT and Inter-RAT PS Handover Switch to ON.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH and HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set the following RNClevel DCCC algorithm parameters: – Uplink Full Coverage Bit Rate – Downlink Full Coverage Bit Rate

l.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLDCCC to set the following cell-level DCCC algorithm parameters: – Uplink Full Coverage Bit Rate – Downlink Full Coverage Bit Rate NOTE

For details about the settings of measurement control parameters, see 110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage.

5.

Activating basic-congestion-based BE service rate adjustment a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUSERGBR to set the guaranteed bit rates (GBRs) for gold, silver, and copper users requesting interactive and background services.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET to set HSUPA Uplink Rate Adjust Set.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set the following RNClevel DCCC algorithm parameters: – DCCC Rate Up Fail Time Threshold – DCCC Rate Up Fail Monitor Time length – DCCC Rate Up Fail Penalty Time Length

l

Activating the UE state transition algorithm 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, turn on the following switches of Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch: – DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH – DRA_PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH – DRA_F2U_SWITCH – DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH – DRA_HSUPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH NOTE

The HSDPA state transition license must be activated before the HSDPA state transition switch is turned on.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANS to set the measurement control parameters of the UE state transition algorithm.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER to set the timer parameters of the UE state transition algorithm. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115



4. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set Low Activity Bit Rate Threshold.

Activating always online 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER to set the following timer parameters for checking the low activity of PS users: – Conversational service T1 – Streaming service T1 – Interactive service T1 – Background service T1 – IMS signal T1 – Conversational service T2 – Streaming service T2 – Interactive service T2 – Background service T2 – IMS signal T2

l

Verifying DCCC 1.

Traffic-based BE service rate adjustment Set up an R99 BE service. Check whether the information element (IE) trafficVolumeMeasurement exists in the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message traced on the Uu interface, as shown in Figure 17-1. In addition, check whether the value of the IE periodicalOrEventTrigger is eventTrigger (1), as shown in Figure 17-2. Figure 17-1 IE trafficVolumeMeasurement

Figure 17-2 IE periodicalOrEventTrigger

2.

Throughput-based BE service rate adjustment a.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor window. In the Monitor tab page, double-click UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. Create UL Throughput Bandwidth and DL Throughput Bandwidth monitoring tasks. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116



b.

3.

Set up an R99 BE service and maintain the service without data operations. In the Connection Performance Monitoring tab page, you can view the bandwidth reduction in UL Throughput Bandwidth.

Link-stability-based BE service rate adjustment Set up an R99 BE service. Check whether the value of measurementQuantity in the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message traced on the Uu interface is ue-TransmittedPower (0), as shown in Figure 17-3. In addition, check whether the value of the IE periodicalOrEventTrigger is eventTrigger (1), as shown in Figure 17-4. Figure 17-3 IE measurementQuantity

Figure 17-4 IE periodicalOrEventTrigger

4.

l

Basic-congestion-based BE service rate adjustment a.

On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor window. In the Monitor tab page, double-click UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. Create UL Throughput Bandwidth and DL Throughput Bandwidth monitoring tasks.

b.

Set up an R99 BE service. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLCHK to check the cell congestion status on the Uu interface (the cell is in the basic congestion state). You can view the bandwidth decrease in UL Throughput Bandwidth in the Connection Performance Monitoring tab page.

Verifying the UE state transition algorithm Set up an R99 BE service and maintain the service without data operations. Check whether the value of rrc-StateIndicator in the traced RRC_RB_RECFG message is cell-FACH (1), as shown in Figure 17-5. Figure 17-5 IE rrc-StateIndicator

l

Verifying always online Set up an R99 BE service and maintain the service without data operations. The message RRC_RB_REL is not traced on the Uu interface.

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Deactivation Procedure Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn off the related switches.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH.

----End

Example //Activating DCCC //Activating the DCCC algorithm SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-1; //Activating traffic-based BE service rate adjustment MOD UTYPRABDCCCMC: RabIndex=1, Direction=DOWNLINK, Event4aThd=D1024, Event4bThd=D16, TimetoTrigger4A=D240, PendingTime4A=D4000, TimetoTrigger4B=D2560, PendingTime4B=D4000; SET UDCCC: UlDcccRateThd=D64, DlDcccRateThd=D64, DcccStg=RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_DCH, UlRateUpAdjLevel=3_Rates, UlRateDnAdjLevel=3_Rates, UlMidRateCalc=HAND_APPOINT, UlMidRateThd=D128, DlRateUpAdjLevel=3_Rates, DlRateDnAdjLevel=3_Rates, DlMidRateCalc=HAND_APPOINT, DlMidRateThd=D128; //Activating throughput-based BE service rate adjustment SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_THROUGHPUT_DCCC_SWITCH-1; SET UDCCC: HsupaDcccStg=RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH, DchThrouMeasPeriod=100; MOD UTYPRABDCCCMC: RabIndex=1, Direction=UPLINK, Event4bThd=D64, DchThrouTimetoTrigger4B=2, DchThrouPendingTime4B=16; SET UUESTATETRANS: E2FThrouMeasPeriod=30; //Activating link-stability-based BE service rate adjustment //Setting the QoS-related parameters SET UQOSACT: BEQosPerform=YES, BeUlAct1=RateDegrade, BeUlAct2=InterFreqHO, BeUlAct3=InterRatHO, BeDlAct1=RateDegrade, BeDlAct2=InterFreqHO, BeDlAct3=InterRatHO, BeUlEvTrigInd=SINGLE, SrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch=YES, DrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch=YES, BeUlQos6A1McSwitch=YES, BeUlQos5AMcSwitch=YES, BeUlQos6DMcSwitch=YES; SET UQUALITYMEAS: UlBeTrigTime6A1=D640, UlBeTrigTime6B1=D2560, UlBeTrigTime6A2=D1280, UlBeTrigTime6B2=D1280, UlBeTrigTime6D=D240, UlMeasFilterCoef=D19, DlMeasFilterCoef=D1, DlBeTrigTimeE=64, ChoiceRptUnitForBeE=TEN_MSEC, TenMsecForBeE=480, DlBeTrigTimeF=64, ChoiceRptUnitForBeF=TEN_MSEC, TenMsecForBeF=480; MOD UCELLRLPWR: CellId=1, CNDOMAINID=CS_DOMAIN, MAXBITRATE=12200, RLMAXDLPWR=-30, RLMINDLPWR=-180, DLSF=D128; MOD UTYPRABQUALITYMEAS: RabIndex=1, UlThd6a1=1, UlThd6a2=5, UlThd6b1=1, UlThd6b2=5, StaBlkNum5A=500, Thd5a=280, HangBlockNum5a=512, ThdEa=2, ThdEb=2; MOD UTYPRABRLC: RabIndex=1, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_DCH, OppositeTrchType=TRCH_DCH, DelayClass=1, RlcMode=AM, AmRlcCfgPara=FLOWCONTROL_PARA, TimeToMoniter=6000, MoniterPrd=1000, ReTransRatioFilterCoef=1, EventAThred=160, TimeToTriggerA=2, PendingTimeA=1; //Configuring inter-frequency handover for the link stability of BE services MOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, InterFreqRATSwitch=INTERFREQ, CoexistMeasThdChoice=COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ, CSServiceHOSwitch=OFF, PSServiceHOSwitch=OFF; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1; //Configuring inter-RAT handover for the link stability of BE services MOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, InterFreqRATSwitch=INTERRAT, CoexistMeasThdChoice=COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ, CSServiceHOSwitch=OFF, PSServiceHOSwitch=ON; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; //Setting the DCCC algorithm parameters

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


118



SET UDCCC: UlFullCvrRate=D64, DlFullCvrRate=D64; MOD UCELLDCCC: CellId=1, UlFullCvrRate=D64, DlFullCvrRate=D64; //Activating basic-congestion-based BE service rate adjustment SET UUSERGBR: TrafficClass=INTERACTIVE, THPClass=High, BearType=R99, UserPriority=GOLD, UlGBR=D16, DlGBR=D16; SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET: EdchRateAdjustSet=RATE_144KBPS-1&RATE_384KBPS-1&RATE_1280KBPS-1; SET UDCCC: FailTimeTh=4, MoniTimeLen=60, DcccUpPenaltyLen=30; //Activating the UE state transition algorithm SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1&DRA_PS_B E_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_F2U_SWITCH1; SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=9, D2F2PTvmThd=D64, D2FTvmTimeToTrig=D5000, D2FTvmPTAT=D1000, F2PTvmTimeToTrig=D5000, F2PTvmPTAT=D16000, BeF2DTvmThd=D1024, BeF2DTvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeH2FTvmThd=D64, BeH2FTvmTimeToTrig=D5000, BeH2FTvmPTAT=D1000, BeF2HTvmThd=D1024, BeF2HTvmTimeToTrig=D0, E2FThrouMeasPeriod=30, E2FThrouThd=8, E2FThrouTimeToTrig=2, E2FThrouPTAT=4, BeF2ETvmThd=D1024, BeF2ETvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeF2CpcHTvmThd=D1024, BeF2CpcHTvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeF2CpcETvmThd=D1024, BeF2CpcETvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeEFach2DTvmThd=D1024, BeEFach2DTvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeEFach2HTvmThd=D1024, BeEFach2HTvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeEFach2CpcTvmThd=D1024, BeEFach2CpcTvmTimeToTrig=D0, FastDormancyF2DHTvmThd=D3k; SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: CellReSelectTimer=180, BeD2FStateTransTimer=5, BeF2PStateTransTimer=5, BeH2FStateTransTimer=5, BeE2FStateTransTimer=5, BeCpc2FStateTransTimer=5, BeD2EFachStateTransTimer=5, BeH2EFachStateTransTimer=5, BeCpc2EFachStateTransTimer=5; SET UDCCC: LittleRateThd=D64; //Activating always online SET UPSINACTTIMER:PsInactTmrForInt=240, ProtectTmrForInt=10, PsInactTmrForBac=240, ProtectTmrForBac=10, PsInactTmrForCon=240, ProtectTmrForCon=10,PsInactTmrForStr=240, ProtectTmrForStr=10, PSInactTmrForImsSig=3600, ProtectTmrForImsSig=10; //Deactivating DCCC SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


119



18

Configuring Integrity Protection

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011401 Integrity Protection.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature protects the network and user data from being listened and modified illegally.

Procedure l


l

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUIA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Security Mode Configuration > Integrity Protection Algorithm; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable the RNC to support the integrity protection algorithm.


On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Iu Interface Trace. The Iu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.

2.

Keep UE1 and UE2 in idle mode in CELL1.

3.

Use UE2 to call UE1.

4.

The messages RANAP_SECURITY_ MODE_COMMAND and RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMPLETE should be displayed. The chosenIntegrityProtectionAlgorithm IE of the latter message indicates the integrity protection algorithm.


120



1.


----End

Example //Activating integrity protection SET UUIA: IntegrityProtectAlgo=UIA1-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


121



19

Configuring Encryption

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011402 Encryption.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context The encryption algorithms supported by Huawei RAN include UEA0 and UEA1.

Procedure l


l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUEA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Security Mode Configuration > Encryption Algorithm; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the RNC to support the encryption algorithm.



2.


3.

Use UE2 to call UE1.

4.

The messages RANAP_SECURITY_ MODE_COMMAND and RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMPLETE should be displayed. The chosenEncryptionAlgorithm IE of the latter message indicates the encryption algorithm.

5.

End the calling. UE1 and UE2 return to the idle mode. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122



6.

l

The messages RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMMAND and RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMPLETE should be displayed. The chosenEncryptionAlgorithm IE of the latter message indicates the encryption algorithm.



----End

Example //Activating encryption SET UUEA: EncryptionAlgo=UEA0-1&UEA1-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


123


20


Configuring Open Loop Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020501 Open Loop Power Control.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature enables BSC6900 to roughly estimate path loss based on power measurement results, network parameter settings, and QoS requirements. Based on the estimation results, BSC6900 sets the initial transmit power for a UE and a NodeB before connection is established between them.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure Activate open loop power control on the downlink DPCH. 1.

This feature does not need to be activated on the downlink DPCH.

Activate open loop power control on the uplink DPCH. 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the parameters related to uplink DPCH power control.


124


20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control NOTE

l The BSC6900 uses the Default Constant Value parameter to calculate the power offset on the uplink DPCCH (DPCCH_Power_offset). Based on the calculation result, the UE calculates the initial transmit power on the uplink DPCCH (DPCCH_Initial_Power). l The formula for calculating DPCCH_Power_offset is: DPCCH_Power_offset = Primary CPICH DL TX power + UL interference + Default Constant Value. Where, DPCCH_Power_offset indicates the initial transmit power offset on the DPCCH, Primary CPICH DL TX power indicates the downlink transmit power on the P-CPICH, UL interference indicates the uplink interference, and Default Constant Value is the value of Default Constant Value. l The formula for calculating DPCCH_Initial_Power is: DPCCH_Initial_Power = DPCCH_Power_offset - CPICH_RSCP. Where, CPICH_RSCP indicates the received signal code power (RSCP) that the UE measures on the P-CPICH. An excessively small value of DPCCH_Power_offset may lead to uplink synchronization failures at the cell edge during initial link establishment, which affects uplink coverage. An excessively great value of DPCCH_Power_offset may lead to instantaneous interference on uplink signal reception, which affects the uplink receiving performance. For details, see 3GPP TS 25.331.

Activate open loop power control on the uplink PRACH. 1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UPRACHUUPARAS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > PRACH Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set the parameters related to the PARCH to appropriate values.

Verification Procedure Verify open loop power control on the downlink DPCH 1.

Use UE 2 to establish a conversation with UE 1.

2.

The message NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ on the Iub interface shows the value of the IE initialDL-transmissionPower. This value is used for the downlink DPCH open loop power control.

Verify open loop power control on the uplink DPCH 1.

Check the IE dpcch-PowerOffset, whose value is the same as that of DPCCH Power Offset, under the IE ul-DPCH-PowerControlIonfo contained in the RRC message Radio Bearer Setup, as shown in Figure 20-1. Based on the dpcch-PowerOffset value, the UE can further calculate the initial transmit power on the uplink DPCCH (DPCCH_Initial_Power) and perform uplink open loop power control. Figure 20-1 ul-DPCH-PowerControlIonfo IE

Verify open loop power control on the uplink PRACH 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Check whether the IE constantValue whose value is -20 is contained in the RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE5 message by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface. If the message contains this IE, parameters configured for the UE take effect. After obtaining values of these parameters, the UE calculates the initial transmit power and performs open look power control on the uplink PARCH. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125


l




----End

Example //Activating open loop power control on the uplink DPCH SET UFRC: DefaultConstantValue=-22; //Activating open loop power control on the uplink PRACH MOD UPRACHUUPARAS: CellId=111, PhyChId=1, Constantvalue=-20, PowerRampStep=2, PreambleRetransMax=20;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


126


21


Configuring Downlink Power Balance

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020502 Downlink Power Balance.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context In soft handover, error codes in a TPC command may lead to downlink transmit power drift. The downlink power balance feature solves the problem of power imbalance between links, thereby achieving best gain in soft handover. The greater the downlink transmit power drift, the smaller the macro diversity gain. Downlink power balance adjusts power drift and improves performance of soft handover.

Procedure l


l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Control Switch to PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH.


On the BSC6900 LMT, choose Trace > UMTS Services and double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.

2.

Set Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then click Submit.

3.

Move a UE from cell 1 to cell 2 to ensure that the UE performs a soft handover. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127



4.

Check whether the active cell set update is complete in the traced Uu-interface messages. Figure 21-1 shows the expected result.

Figure 21-1 RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message traced in Uu interface message tracing

5.

Start Iub interface message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. Check the value of the information element dedicatedMeasurementType in the NBAP_DEDIC_MEAS_INIT_REQ message. Expected result: the value of dedicatedMeasurementType is transmitted-codepower(2) shown in Figure 21-2.

Figure 21-2 Information element dedicatedMeasurementType

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH to 0.

----End

Example //Activating downlink power balance SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating downlink power balance SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


128


22


Configuring Outer Loop Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020503 Outer Loop Power Control.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context Outer loop power control guarantees the service quality by adjusting the target SIR of inner loop power control. Outer loop power control is performed on the DCHs carrying the same RRC connection. When the moving speed of a UE or the multi-path environment changes, the target SIR needs to be adjusted to ensure a desirable service quality. Otherwise, the service quality may be bad or will accordingly lead to severe interference and power waste. The legacy OLPC algorithm enables the target SIR to quickly increase but slowly decrease, therefore leading to a waste of uplink power. The optimized OLPC algorithm rapidly adjusts the target SIR in any of the following scenarios: service setup, service reconfiguration, burst interference, and status switching between insufficient UE transmit power and sufficient UE transmit power. By doing so, the average uplink target SIR is reduced and the uplink power consumption is decreased.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Activating outer loop power control 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129



Parameters in Batches) to activate outer loop power control. In this step, select the PC_OLPC_SWITCH check box under the PcSwitch parameter. 2.

Optional: Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABOLPC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > Typical RAB OLPC Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set the parameters related to outer loop power control based on the network plan.

– Activating optimized outer loop power control NOTE

You need to activate outer loop power control before activating optimized outer loop power control.

l

1.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to activate optimized outer loop power control. In this step, select the PC_OLPC_FASTDOWN_OPTIMIZE_SWITCH check box under the PcSwitch parameter.

2.

Optional: Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOLPC (CME single configuration: UMTS radio global Configuration Express > RNC-Oriented OLPC Algorithm Parameters Configuration > RNC-Oriented OLPC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set SIRtargetDownSpeed to an appropriate value.

3.

Optional: Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABOLPC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > Typical RAB OLPC Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set RefSIRtarget for a DCH to an appropriate value.

Verification Procedure – Verifying outer loop power control 1.

On the BSC6900 LMT main page, click Monitor. In the Monitor Navigation Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. In this dialog box, set Monitor Item to OLPC, Monitor Period to OLPC, IMSI to an appropriate value, and Carrier Info to Main Carrier. Then, click Submit to start tracing.

2.

Use a UE to initiate an AMR or R99 service.

3.

Check whether the target SIR in OLPC has changed. If the target SIR has changed, this feature has been activated.

– Verifying optimized outer loop power control

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

On the BSC6900 LMT main page, click Monitor. In the Monitor Navigation Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. In this dialog box, set Monitor Item to OLPC, Monitor Period to OLPC, IMSI to an appropriate value, and Carrier Info to Main Carrier. Then, click Submit to start tracing.

2.

Use a UE to initiate an AMR or R99 service. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130



3.

l

When the service is successfully set up, check whether the adjustment value of the target SIR is the same as the specified value in each OLPC period. If they are the same, this feature has been activated.

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivating outer loop power control 1.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate outer loop power control. In this step, clear the PC_OLPC_SWITCH check box under the PcSwitch parameter.

– Deactivating optimized outer loop power control 1.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate optimized outer loop power control. In this step, clear the PC_OLPC_FASTDOWN_OPTIMIZE_SWITCH check box under the PcSwitch parameter.

----End

Example //Activating Outer Loop Power Control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_SWITCH-1; //Setting the parameters related to outer loop power control MOD UTYPRABOLPC: RabIndex=11, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_DCH, DelayClass=1, BLERQuality=-20; //Deactivating Outer Loop Power Control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_SWITCH-0; //Activating optimized outer loop power control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_FASTDOWN_OPTIMIZE_SWITCH-1; //Setting the step of uplink target SIR adjustment SET UOLPC: SIRtargetDownSpeed=10; //Setting the reference target SIR for a DCH MOD UTYPRABOLPC: RabIndex=5, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_DCH, DelayClass=1, RefSIRtarget=107; //Deactivating optimized outer loop power control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_FASTDOWN_OPTIMIZE_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


131


23


Configuring Inner Loop Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020504 Inner Loop Power Control.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context Inner loop power control is also known as fast close loop power control. It is applied for dedicated channels only. It is used to adjust the transmit power based on the feedback from the physical layer of the peer end. The UE and Node B can adjust transmit power according to the SIR sent by each other. In this way, radio link fading can be reduced.

Procedure l


l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

The feature does not need to be activated.


Click the Monitor on the BSC6900 LMT main page. On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. In the displayed dialog box, set Monitor Item to UL SIR and UE Tx Power, and enter the corresponding IMSI. And then click Submit to initiate the trace.

2.

UE 1 calls UE 2. UE 2 rings, answers and starts the conversation.

3.

Observe the variation of UL SIR and UE Tx Power in the UL SIR and UE Tx Power Connection Performance Monitoring window.

4.

UE 1 moves in the cell to change radio link quality.

5.

When you move UE 1 away from the cell center, UE_1 transmit power increases. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132



6.

When you move UE_1 towards cell center, UE_1 transmit power decreases.

Figure 23-1 UL SIR Tracing

Figure 23-2 UE Tx Power Tracing

l



----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


133



24

Configuring Admission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020101 Admission Control.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Uplink power admission algorithm 4 introduced in RAN14.0 is based on the actual service load, which is reported by the NodeB. However, some boards cannot support the measurement of the service load. – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE do not support uplink power admission algorithm 4. – The DBS3800 does not support uplink power admission algorithm 4. – If the 3900 series base station is configured with the WBBPa board or the RRU3801C 20W, uplink power admission algorithm 4 is not supported. In other configurations, the algorithm is supported.

l


l


Context This feature enables the BSC6900 to perform admission control on UEs requesting R99 services by considering the status of various resources. It helps ensure the QoS and optimize the allocation of system resources.

Procedure l


Activating code resource admission Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


134



Cell Parameters in Batches) with Dl handover credit and code reserved SF set to an appropriate value. 2.

3.

4. l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Activating power resource admission a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select associated cell-oriented power admission control algorithms from the Cell CAC algorithm switch dropdown list, and select an appropriate algorithm from both the Uplink CAC algorithm switch and Downlink CAC algorithm switch drop-down lists according to the network plan.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set power resource admission parameters to appropriate values.

Activating NodeB credit resource admission a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH from the CAC algorithm switch drop-down list to turn on the NodeB-level CE admission switch.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CRD_ADCTRL (Credit Admission Control Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list to turn on the NodeB-level credit admission switch.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set UL handover credit reserved SF to an appropriate value.

Activating Iub resource admission This feature does not need to be activated.

Verification Procedure The procedure for verifying downlink admission control on R99 non-real-time PS services based on the number of equivalent subscribers is as follows: 1.

Enable a UE in the idle state to camp on CELL_A11.

2.

Set the PS service type to interactive on the HLR.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set DL total equivalent user number of CELL_A11 to 1.

4.

Connect the UE to a laptop through the USB port and initiate a PS service. Expected result: The UE fails to initiate the PS service. In the Iu Interface Trace window, an RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNBMENT_RESP message sent from the RNC to the CN is displayed, containing the cause value no-radio-resources-available-intarget-cell. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135



5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set DL total equivalent user number of CELL_A11 to 80.

6.

Connect the UE to a laptop through the USB port and initiate a PS service. Expected result: The data service is set up successfully.

l


Deactivating code resource admission This feature does not need to be deactivated.

2.

Deactivating power resource admission Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Uplink CAC algorithm switch and Downlink CAC algorithm switch to ALGORITHM_OFF.

3.

4.

Deactivating NodeB credit resource admission a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH from the CAC algorithm switch drop-down list.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect CRD_ADCTRL (Credit Admission Control Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list.

Deactivating Iub resource admission This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example //Activating code resource admission MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, UlNonCtrlThdForAMR=75, UlNonCtrlThdForNonAMR=75, UlNonCtrlThdForOther=60, DlConvAMRThd=80, DlConvNonAMRThd=80, DlOtherThd=75, UlNonCtrlThdForHo=80, DlHOThd=85, UlCellTotalThd=83, DlCellTotalThd=90, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SF32; //Activating power resource admission MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_SECOND; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-1&HSDPA_GBP_MEAS-1&HSDPA_PBR_MEAS-1; MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, MaxHsdpaUserNum=64, MaxUlTxPowerforConv=24, MaxUlTxPowerforInt=24; //Activating NodeB credit resource admission SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-1; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-1; MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, UlHoCeResvSf=SF16; //Deactivating power resource admission MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


136



//Deactivating NodeB credit resource admission SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-0; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


137



25

Configuring Load Measurement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020102 Load Measurement.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – In RAN14.0, the load measurement of total uplink services is introduced, and the dependencies on NodeB are as follows: – The BTS3812, BTS3812E and BTS3812AE do not report the actual service load. – The DBS3800 does not report the actual service load. – If the 3900 series base station is configured with the WBBPa board or the RRU3801C 20W, the actual service load is not reported. In other configurations, the actual service load is reported.

l


l


Context This feature is used to measure the load for the load control feature.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


The function of measurement on RTWP, TCP, and non-HSPA power is always activated. Therefore, this feature does not need to be activated.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select HSDPA_PBR_MEAS(HSDPA PBR Meas Algorithm) and HSUPA_PBR_MEAS(HSUPA PBR Meas Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list to activate the cell-level load measurement for HSDPA and HSUPA. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138


l

l


3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set load monitoring parameters, including the uplink/downlink load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm trigger/release thresholds and uplink/downlink overload congestion (OLC) algorithm trigger/release thresholds to appropriate values.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Monitoring Parameter Configuration > LDM Algorithm Parameters of RNC; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set parameters associated with load measurement, report period, and smoothing filter length according to the network plan.


On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor page. In the Monitor navigation tree, double-click UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring, and create tasks of monitoring Cell DL Carrier TX Power and RTWP.

2.

Check whether the uplink full-bandwidth RX power of the cell is displayed in the RTWP monitoring window.

3.

Check whether the downlink carrier TX power is displayed in the Cell DL Carrier TX Power monitoring window.


The measurement on RTWP, TCP, and non-HSPA power has been activated and cannot be deactivated.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect HSDPA_PBR_MEAS(HSDPA PBR Meas Algorithm) and HSUPA_PBR_MEAS(HSUPA PBR Meas Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list to deactivate the cell-level load measurement for HSDPA and HSUPA.

----End

Example //Activating load measurement MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_PBR_MEAS-1&HSUPA_PBR_MEAS-1; MOD UCELLLDM: CellId=1, UlLdrTrigThd=55, UlLdrRelThd=45, DlLdrTrigThd=70, DlLdrRelThd=60, UlOlcTrigThd=95, UlOlcRelThd=85, DlOlcTrigThd=95, DlOlcRelThd=85, HsupAuRetrnsLdTrigThd=70, HsupAuRetrnsLdRelThd=50; SET ULDM: UlBasicCommMeasFilterCoeff=D6, ChoiceRprtUnitForUlBasicMeas=TEN_MSEC, TenMsecForUlBasicMeas=100, DlBasicCommMeasFilterCoeff=D6; //Deactivating load measurement MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_PBR_MEAS-0&HSUPA_PBR_MEAS-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


139



26

Configuring Load Reshuffling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020106 Load Reshuffling.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature provides multiple load reshuffling policies for a cell in the basic congestion state to decrease the cell load and increase the access success rate. The load reshuffling policies are inter-frequency load handover, code reshuffling, BE service rate reduction, uncontrolled realtime traffic QoS renegotiation, CS domain inter-RAT load handover, PS domain inter-RAT load handover, downsizing the bit rate of AMR voice, and MBMS power downgrading.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure NOTE

The following section provides the related parameters and commands. The parameter settings depend on the network plan.

1.

Enable the related load reshuffling algorithms. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, turn on the following switches of Cell LDC algorithm switch: – UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm): UL UU load reshuffling algorithm

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


140



– DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm): DL UU load reshuffling algorithm – CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm): Code reshuffling algorithm – CELL_CREDIT_LDR(Credit LDR Algorithm):Credit reshuffling algorithm b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, turn on the following switches of NodeB LDC algorithm switch: – IUB_LDR(IUB LDR Algorithm): NodeB Iub reshuffling algorithm – NODEB_CREDIT_LDR(NodeB Credit LDR Algorithm): NodeB-level credit reshuffling algorithm – LCG_CREDIT_LDR(LCG Credit LDR Algorithm): cell-group-level credit reshuffling algorithm

2.

Set the related thresholds. – Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set LDR thresholds (UL/DL LDR Trigger/release threshold and DL State Trans Hysteresis threshold). – Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set code LDR threshold (Cell LDR SF reserved threshold) and LDR actions. – Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBLDR (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set the cellgroup-level or NodeB-level LDR thresholds (Ul/DL LDR Credit SF reserved threshold). – Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-level credit LDR thresholds (Ul/DL LDR Credit SF reserved threshold).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the LDR period (LDR period timer length).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable the functions used in the LDR actions. – Inter-frequency load handover

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


141



Set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH and HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH. – BE service rate reduction Set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH. – Uncontrolled real-time traffic QoS renegotiation Set PS Rate Negotiation Switch to PS_BE_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH. – CS domain inter-RAT load handover Set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH. – PS domain inter-RAT load handover Set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH. – Downsizing the bit rate of AMR voice Set CS Algorithm Switch to CS_AMRC_SWITCH. l

l

Verification Procedure The following section takes R99 non-real-time data services as examples to verify BE service rate reduction in the basic congestion state. 1.

Enable a UE in idle mode to camp on CELL_A11.

2.

On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor tab page. In the Monitor Navigation Tree tab page, double-click UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. In the displayed dialog box, create a Cell DL Throughput monitoring task.

3.

Connect the UE to a laptop through the USB port and initiate a data service. Check the rb-mappinginfo information element (IE) contained in the RRC_RB_SETUP message traced over the Uu interface. The value of rrc-Stateinditator is CELL_DCH.

4.

Use the UE to log in to the FTP server and then start FTP downloading. Data downloading is normal.

5.

To simulate the scenario where power load reaches 75%, run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM. The RRC_RB_RECFG message is displayed in the Uu Interface Trace dialog box. In the Cell DL Throughput of the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box, you can view the downlink RB rate decrease configured on the RNC.

6.

To stop simulating power load, run the NodeB MML command STP DLSIM. In the Uu Interface Trace dialog box, the RRC_RB_RECFG message is displayed. In the Cell DL Throughput of the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box, you can view the downlink RB rate increase configured on the RNC.


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the following switches from Cell LDC algorithm switch: – UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm): UL UU load reshuffling algorithm – DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm): DL UU load reshuffling algorithm – CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm): Code reshuffling algorithm – CELL_CREDIT_LDR(Credit LDR Algorithm):Credit reshuffling algorithm

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142



Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the following switches from NodeB LDC algorithm switch: – IUB_LDR(IUB LDR Algorithm): NodeB Iub reshuffling algorithm – NODEB_CREDIT_LDR(NodeB Credit LDR Algorithm): NodeB-level credit reshuffling algorithm – LCG_CREDIT_LDR(LCG Credit LDR Algorithm): cell-group-level credit reshuffling algorithm ----End

Example //Activating Load Reshuffling //Enabling load reshuffling algorithms MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_LDR-1&CELL_CODE_LDR-1&CELL_CREDIT_LDR1; MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="nodeb1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-1&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-1&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-1; //Setting load reshuffling thresholds MOD UCELLLDM: CellId=100, UlLdrTrigThd=55, UlLdrRelThd=45, DlLdrTrigThd=70, DlLdrRelThd=60, UlOlcTrigThd=95, UlOlcRelThd=85, DlOlcTrigThd=95, DlOlcRelThd=85, DlLdTrnsHysTime=1000; //Setting code reshuffling thresholds MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=100, DlLdrFirstAction=CodeAdj, DlLdrSecondAction=InterFreqLDHO, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8; //Setting NodeB-level credit reshuffling thresholds MOD UNODEBLDR: NodeBName="nodeb1", UlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8, DlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8; //Setting cell-level credit reshuffling thresholds MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=100, UlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8, DlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8; //Setting load reshuffling period SET ULDCPERIOD: LDRPERIODTIMERLEN=10; //Turning on load reshuffling function switches SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PsSwitch=PS_BE_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH-1,DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-1,CsSwitch=C S_AMRC_SWITCH-1, HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_I NTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating Load Reshuffling MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-0&DL_UU_LDR-0&CELL_CODE_LDR-0&CELL_CREDIT_LDR0; MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="nodeb1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-0&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-0&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


143



27

Configuring Overload Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020107 Overload Control.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature provides load adjustment means to quickly lower the load in overloaded cells.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable the air interface OLC algorithm. Select the UL_UU_OLC(Uplink UU OLC Algorithm) and DL_UU_OLC(Downlink UU OLC Algorithm) check boxes under the parameter Switch for Cell Load Control.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to enable the OLC algorithm. Select the IUB_OLC(IUB OLC Algorithm) check box under the parameter NodeB LDC algorithm.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144



Cell Parameters in Batches) to set UL OLC trigger threshold, DL OLC trigger threshold, UL OLC release threshold, and DL OLC release threshold.

l

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the OLC period (OLC period timer value).

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLOLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Overload Congestion Control Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter related to OLCrelated actions.


Run the following BSC6900 MML commands to verify whether the activation is successful. – LST UCELLALGOSWTICH – LST UCELLLDM – LST UNODEBALGOPARA – LST ULDCPERIOD – LST UCELLOLC NOTE

Consult Huawei engineers about the verification solution to obtain professional technical support. NOTE

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to dienable the air interface OLC algorithm. Clear the UL_UU_OLC(Uplink UU OLC Algorithm) and DL_UU_OLC(Downlink UU OLC Algorithm) check boxes under the parameter Switch for Cell Load Control.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to disenable the OLC algorithm, Clear the IUB_OLC(IUB OLC Algorithm) check box under the parameter NodeB LDC algorithm.

----End

Example //Activating Overload Control MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_OLC-1&DL_UU_OLC-1; MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NodeB1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_OLC-1; SET ULDCPERIOD: OlcPeriodTimerLen=3000; ADD UCELLOLC: CellId=111; //Deactivating Overload Control MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


145



NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_OLC-0&DL_UU_OLC-0; MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NodeB1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_OLC-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


146



28

Configuring Code Resource Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020108 Code Resource Management.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature provides downlink code tree allocation and reshuffling. Through this, the code resources can be rationally allocated, therefore increasing the utilization efficiency of the resources.

Procedure l


The code allocation function is always activated. The activation procedure applies to only the code reshuffling function.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches), and then enable the required LDR algorithm switches for resources (CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm)) through setting the Cell LDC algorithm switch parameter.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147



Parameters in Batches) to set code LDR threshold (Cell LDR SF reserved threshold) and set CodeAdj(Code adjust) as one of the DL LDR actions. 3.

l

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the length of LDR period (LDR period timer length).


Enable the UE in the idle state to camp on CELL_A11.

2.

Set the PS service type to interactive on the HLR.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR with Cell LDR SF reserved threshold set to SF8 and Max user number for code adjust to 1.

4.

Connect the UE to a laptop on the USB port and enable the UE to initiate a data service. Expected result: Services are set up on the DCH successfully. You can view the rbmappinginfo information element (IE) in the RRC_RB_SETUP message traced over the Uu interface. In the Cell Code Tree Monitor window, you can view that the service occupies code SF32(4).

5.

Enable the UE to log in to the FTP Internet server and then enable FTP download.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLCHK to check the cell health status. The status of cell code congestion is displayed as basic congestion.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV URESERVEOVSF to release the service that occupies code SF32(1).

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLCHK to check the cell health status. The status of cell code congestion is displayed as not congested.


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches), and then deactivate the required LDR algorithm switches for resources (CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm)) through setting the Cell LDC algorithm switch parameter.

----End

Example //Activating Code Resource Management MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=CELL_CODE_LDR-1; MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, DlLdrFirstAction=CodeAdj, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8; SET ULDCPERIOD: LdrPeriodTimerLen=10; //Verifying Code Resource Management MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8, MaxUserNumCodeAdj=1; DSP UCELLCHK: CHECKSCOPE=CELLID, CELLID=111; RMV URESERVEOVSF: CellId=111, DLOVSFSF=SF32, DLCODENO=1; //Deactivating Code Resource Management MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=CELL_CODE_LDR-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


148



29

Configuring Potential User Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020105 Potential User Control.

Prerequisites l


l


l

License – The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context This feature reduces system load by modifying cell selection and reselection parameters. In this way, the cell where the UE camps can be controlled based on cell load.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to select PUC(Potential User Control Algorithm) from the Switch for Cell Load Control drop list to enable the cell-oriented PUC algorithm.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to specify the period of potential user control. In this step, set PUC period timer length to an appropriate value.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLPUC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented PUC Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149



Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-oriented PUC algorithm parameters. l


Configure two cells CELL_A11 and CELL_A12 as inter-frequency neighboring cells on the NodeB.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLPUC to change the potential user control threshold for CELL_A11.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to simulate a situation where the cell has a high load. The following messages can be traced on the Iub interface: the NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_REQ from the RNC to the NodeB, and the NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_RSP message responded by the NodeB. The updated system information can be traced on the Uu interface. The value of the Sintersearch signaling element (IE) of the SIB3 of CELL_A11 decreases, and the values of the Qoffset1s,n and Qoffset2s,n IEs of the SIB11 of CELL_A11 increase.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLPUC to change the potential user control threshold for CELL_A12.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to simulate a situation where CELL_A12 has a high downlink load. The following messages can be traced on the Iub interface: the NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_REQ message from the RNC to the NodeB, and the NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_RSP response message from the NodeB. The updated system information can be traced on the Uu interface. The value of the Sintersearch IE of the SIB3 of CELL_A11 decreases, and the values of the Qoffset1s,n and Qoffset2s,n IEs of the SIB11 of CELL_A11 increase.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the PUC(Potential User Control Algorithm) check box under the parameter Cell LDC algorithm switch.

----End

Example //Activating Potential User Control MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=PUC-1; SET ULDCPERIOD: PucPeriodTimerLen=1800; ADD UCELLPUC: CELLID=1, SPUCLIGHT=45, SPUCHEAVY=70, SPUCHYST=5, OFFSINTERLIGHT=-2, OFFSINTERHEAVY=2, OFFQOFFSET1LIGHT=-4, OFFQOFFSET2LIGHT=-4, OFFQOFFSET1HEAVY=4, OFFQOFFSET2HEAVY=4; //Deactivating Potential User Control MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=PUC-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


150



30

Configuring Cell Barring

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021102 Cell Barring.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context If the cell barring feature is enabled, cells can be barred either automatically or manually to facilitate operators' maintenance when the cells are running improperly.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Setting automatic cell barring

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST and BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST from the Process switch dropdown list.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UIUTIMERANDNUM (CME single configuration: IUPS Configuration Express > CN > IU Timers And Counter for CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable interruption protection by specifying CN protection timer. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151



– Setting manual cell barring

l

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCALLCELLBLK (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > The Parameters for Quickly Blocking all the Cells in the RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure parameters related to barring of all cells served by an RNC in a network.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPALLCELLBLK (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > The Parameters for Quickly Blocking all the Cells of the Designated Operator in the RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure parameters related to operator-specific barring of all cells in a network.

Verification Procedure – Block the PS domain or the PS domain is disconnected, which prevents UEs from being admitted to PS services. Perform the following steps to verify whether this feature is activated: NOTE

Perform the same verification procedure when blocking the CS domain or the CS domain is disconnected.

1.

Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu Message Type, select RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE1.

2.

View whether information element (IE) information of the PS domain is contained in the traced messages. Expected result: PS domain IE information is not contained, as shown in Figure 30-1.

Figure 30-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


152



– Block CS and PS domains, CS and PS domains are disconnected, or block the CS domain and turn on BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST. Perform the following steps to verify whether this feature is activated: 1.


2.

View whether IE information related to CS and PS domains is contained in the traced messages. Expected result: The IE information is not contained, as shown in Figure 30-2.


– Bar PS services of UEs served by an operator. Perform the following steps to verify whether this feature is activated: NOTE

Perform the same verification procedure when barring CS services of UEs served by an operator.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.


2.

View whether IE information related to CS and PS domains is contained in the traced messages. Expected result: The IE information is not contained, as shown in Figure 30-3. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153




l

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivating automatic cell barring 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST and BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST from the Process switch dropdown list.

– Deactivating manual cell barring

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV URNCALLCELLBLK (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > The Parameters for Quickly Blocking all the Cells in the RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove parameters related to barring of all cells served by an RNC in a network.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCNOPALLCELLBLK (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > The Parameters for Quickly Blocking all the Cells of the Designated Operator in the RNC; CME


154



batch modification center: not supported) to remove parameters related to operatorspecific barring of all cells in a network. ----End

Example //Activating Cell Barring SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH SET UIUTIMERANDNUM: CnOpIndex=0, //Deactivating Cell Barring SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

= SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST-1; = BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST-1; CNId=0, StateIndTmr=20000; = SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST-0; = BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST-0;


155


31


Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021301 Shared Network Support in Connected Mode. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – CN must support this feature. When the Iur interface is used, the RNC connected over the interface must also support this feature.

Context This feature enables the RAN and CN together to perform UE access restriction in specified location areas.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


For the CS service, configure two SNAs (for example, SNA1 and SNA2) on the MSC.

2.

For the PS service, run the MML command ADD SNA on the SGSN to add SNA, SNA1, and SNA2.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLACINFO to modify the RACs of CELL1 and CELL2.

4.

Set up a cell. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration Guide.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command to turn on the soft handover switch. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156



6. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command to enable the SNA function.

Verifying the SNA Function of the CS Service 1.


2.


3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command to disable the SNA function.

4.

Use UE1 to call UE2. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1 should be displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESS information IE.

5.

Move UE1 to CELL2 to trigger soft handover. The RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message from the RNC to UE1 and the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message from UE1 to the RNC should be displayed in Uu trace data.

6.

End the calling. UE1 and UE2 return to the idle mode in CELL1.

7.


8.

Add a mapping relation between IMSI of UE1 and SNA1 on the MSC.

9.

Use UE1 to call UE2. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1 should be displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESS information IE. NOTE

CELL2 belongs to SNA2 but not SNA1. Therefore, the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message sent from the RNC to UE1 on the Uu interface should indicate that CELL2 is not in the monitoring cell.

10. Move UE1 to CELL2, which will not trigger soft handover because UE1 does not belong to SNA_2. 11. End the calling. UE1 and UE2 return to the idle mode in CELL1. l

Verifying the SNA Function of the PS Service 1.

Run the MML command ADD SNA on the SGSN to add SNA information.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command to disable the SNA function.

3.

Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1.

4.

Establish a PS service on UE1. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1 should be displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESS information IE.

5.

Move UE1 to CELL2 to trigger soft handover. The RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message from the RNC to UE1 and the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message from UE1 to the RNC should be displayed in Uu trace data.

6.

End the PS service of UE1. UE1 returns to the idle mode in CELL1.

7.


8.

Establish a PS service on UE1. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1 should be displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESS information IE.

9.

CELL2 belongs to SNA2 but not SNA1. Therefore, the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message sent from the RNC to UE1 on the Uu interface should indicate that CELL2 is not in the monitoring set.

10. Move UE1 to CELL2, which will not trigger soft handover because UE1 does not belong to SNA_2. 11. End the PS service of UE1. UE1 returns to the idle mode in CELL1. l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


157



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to disable the SNA function.

----End

Example //Adding two SNAs (for example, SNA1 and SNA2) on the MSC ADD LOCNOLAI: LOCNONAME="SNA_1", LAI="460020001"; ADD LOCSNA: LOCNONAME=" SNA_1", SNAC=1; ADD SNAGRPCODE: SNAGRPN="1", SNAC=1; ADD LOCNOLAI: LOCNONAME="SNA_2", LAI="460020002"; ADD LOCSNA: LOCNONAME=" SNA_2", SNAC=2; ADD SNAGRPCODE: SNAGRPN="2", SNAC=2; //Activating the SNA function of the CS Service MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=1, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1; MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=2, LAC=2, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=2; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1; //Verifying the SNA function of the CS Service SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1; ///Add a mapping relation between IMSI and SNA1 on the MSC ADD IMSIGRP: IMSIPRE=K'460071104008338, MCCMNC1=K'46002, SNAGRPN1="1"; MOD RNC: RNCID=1, CAPABILITY=SNA-1; //Deactivating the SNA function SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0; //Adding two SNAs (for example, SNA1 and SNA2) on the SGSN ADD SNA: PLMN="46002", LAC="1", SNAC=1; ADD SNA: PLMN="46002", LAC="2", SNAC=2; //Activating the SNA function of the PS Service MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=1, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1; MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=2, LAC=2, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=2; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1; //Adding SNA information on the SGSN ADD SNAA: BEGIMSI="460071104008338", ENDIMSI="460071104008338", PLMN="46002", SNAC=1; //Verifying the SNA function of the PS Service SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating the SNA function SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


158



32

Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020201 Intra NodeB Softer Handover.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature enables softer handover within a NodeB. Intra-NodeB softer handover is one type of soft handover. To perform softer handover, multiple RLs need to be established. In this way, the uplink resources of a cell in the same uplink resource group can be fully shared. In contrast to soft handover, softer handover does not consume additional transmission resources on the Iub interface. Therefore, softer handover can provide higher combination gain and require less transmission resources on the Iub interface. Softer handover may occur within the same uplink resource group.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH under HandOver Switch to enable soft handover.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UHOCOMM (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159



Configuration > RNC Oriented Handover Algorithm Common Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Softer handover combination indicator switch to MAY or MUST.

l

l

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Intrafrequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an intra-frequency neighboring cell.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTRAFREQHO (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Intra-frequency Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter related to handover.



2.

Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then, click Submit.

3.

UE is in idle mode and camps on the CELL1.

4.

UE initiates PS Dial-up, and service is set up successfully.

5.

UE moves from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Data, it can be observed RNC sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message to UE and UE sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message to RNC.

6.

The data transmission remains normal while UE is moving to CELL2.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UHOCOMM (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Handover Algorithm Common Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Softer handover combination indicator switch to MUST_NOT.

----End

Example //Activating Intra NodeB Softer Handover SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1; SET UHOCOMM: DivCtrlField=MAY; ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=202, CellId=2381, NCellRncId=203, NCellId=3291, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE; SET UINTRAFREQHO: FilterCoef=D3, IntraFreqMeasQuantity=CPICH_EC/NO, PeriodMRReportNumfor1C=D16, ReportIntervalfor1C=D4000; //Deactivating Intra NodeB Softer Handover SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


160


33


Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020202 Intra RNC Soft Handover.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context Intra-RNC soft handover is one type of soft handover. To implement intra-RNC soft handover, multiple RLs need to be established between NodeBs or within a NodeB. Intra-NodeB softer handover and intra-RNC soft handover differ in the place where macro diversity combining is performed. For intra-RNC soft handover, macro diversity combining, which is in selective mode, is performed within the RNC. In such a case, each RL on the Iub interface carries transmission data independently. Compared with intra-NodeB softer handover, the intra-RNC soft handover can be applied to more scenarios.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable soft handover.

2.


3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTRAFREQHO (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161



Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Intra-frequency Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter related to handover. l

l



2.


3.

Both UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on the CELL1.

4.

UE1 calls UE2, and the conversation clear.

5.

UE1 moves from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Data, it can be observed that RNC1 sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message to UE1, and UE1 sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message to RNC1.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Softer handover combination indicator to disable the soft handover.

----End

Example //Activating Intra RNC Soft Handover SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1; ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=202, CellId=2381, NCellRncId=203, NCellId=3291, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE; SET UINTRAFREQHO: FilterCoef=D3, IntraFreqMeasQuantity=CPICH_EC/NO, PeriodMRReportNumfor1C=D16, ReportIntervalfor1C=D4000; //Deactivating Intra RNC Soft Handover SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


162


34


Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020203 Inter RNC Soft Handover.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The Iur interface is configured between adjacent RNCs.

Context Inter-RNC soft handover is one type of soft handover. To implement inter-RNC soft handover, multiple RLs need to be established between different RNCs. In such a case, macro diversity combining is performed by the SRNC connected through the Iur interface. The SRNC sends the DRNC the radio link establishment signaling over the Iur interface. Based on the signaling, the DRNC establishes a radio link in the new NodeB. Other procedures are similar to those of intraRNC soft handover. This feature enables telecom operators to provide seamless connection services to subscribers. Inter-RNC soft handover has wider application scenario than soft handover in other forms, as it can be applied to the RNCs connected through the Iur interface.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable soft handover.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163



modification center: not supported) or MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable cross-Iur soft handover.

l

l

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a neighboring RNC cell.

4.


5.




2.


3.

Both UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on the CELL1.

4.

UE1 calls UE2, and the conversation clear.

5.

UE1 moves from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Data, it can be observed that RNC1 sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message to UE1, and UE1 sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message to RNC1.


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable the cross-Iur soft handover.

----End

Example //Activating Inter RNC Soft Handover SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1; MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-1&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1; ADD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=1, CellId=2381, CellHostType=SINGLE_HOST, CellName="2222", CnOpGrpIndex=0, PScrambCode=256, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNUplinkInd=TRUE, UARFCNUplink=9750, UARFCNDownlink=10700, TxDiversityInd=FALSE, LAC=2506, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, QqualminInd=FALSE, QrxlevminInd=FALSE, MaxAllowedUlTxPowerInd=FALSE, UseOfHcs=NOT_USED, CellCapContainerFdd=EDCH_SUPPORT-1, EFachSupInd=FALSE; ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=1, CellId=221, NCellRncId=2, NCellId=222, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE; //Deactivating Inter RNC Soft Handover MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-0&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


164



35

Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020301 Intra Frequency Hard Handover.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context When hard handover is performed, the existing connection is interrupted before new connection is set up. Intra-frequency hard handover is performed between cells on the same frequency.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select HO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH from the HandOver switch list.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Intrafrequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an intra-frequency or inter-RNC neighboring cell.

3.

If cross-Iur hard handover is required, add the neighboring RNC and neighboring RNC cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165



batch modification center: not supported) to add a neighboring RNC. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a neighboring RNC cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Intra-frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the neighboring cell relations. 4.

l

l




2.


3.

Both UE1 and UE2 are subscribed in HLR to support speech service.

4.

4. Both UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on the CELL1.

5.

UE1 calls UE2, and the conversation is clear.

6.

UE1 moved from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Date, it can be observed RRC_MEAS_RPRT message with 1D event that UE1 sends to RNC1.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deselect HO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH from the Handover switch list.

----End

Example //Activating Intra Frequency Hard Handover SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1; ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=111, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=211, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE; ADD UNRNC: NRncId =2, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-0&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0, HHOTRIG=ON, SERVICEIND=SUPPORT_CS_AND_PS, IurExistInd=TRUE, DPX=1, RNCPROTCLVER=R5, STATEINDTMR=20, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS; ADD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=2, CellId=311, CellHostType=SINGLE_HOST, CellName="311", CnOpGrpIndex=0, PScrambCode=256, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNUplinkInd=TRUE, UARFCNUplink=9750, UARFCNDownlink=10700, TxDiversityInd=FALSE, LAC=H'2506, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, QqualminInd=FALSE, QrxlevminInd=FALSE, MaxAllowedUlTxPowerInd=FALSE, CellCapContainerFdd=EDCH_SUPPORT-1, EFachSupInd=FALSE; ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=111, NCellRncId=2, NCellId=311, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


166



//Deactivating Intra Frequency Hard Handover SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


167



36

Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010801 Intra RNC Cell Update.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context Cell update is mainly used to update the UE information on the network side when the UE location or behavior is changed. Intra-RNC cell update means cell update within the RNC.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the RNC-oriented PS BE service state transition switch.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameters BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer[s] and BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer[s] to 30s and 60s respectively.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168



batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set inactivity detection timers for PS services.

l

l

l

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCONNMODETIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE Timers and Constants Configuration > UE Timers And Constants in Connected Mode; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the periodic cell update timer to 5 minutes.

5.

Set CELL1 and CELL2 of the RNC as intra-frequency neighboring cells. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration Guide.

Verifying Cell Update Triggered by Cell Reselection 1.

Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.

2.


3.


4.


5.

Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_DCH.

6.

Do not send any data from UE for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH.

7.

Cause the UE to reselect a new cell so as to trigger cell update. The UE should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of cell reselection, and the RNC should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE.

Verifying Cell Update Triggered by Uplink Data Transmission 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Do not send any data from UE1 for another while. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to CELL_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_PCH.

7.

Use the UE to transmit data so as to trigger cell update. The UE should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of uplinkdatatransmission, and the RNC should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE.

Verifying Periodic Cell Update 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169



Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer[s] to 65535. For example, SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeF2PStateTransTimer=65535;

l

2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.

Do not send any data from the UE for five minutes so as to trigger periodic cell update. The UE should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of periodiccellupdate, and the RNC should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE.


None

----End

Example //Activating intra-RNC cell update SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1; SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=30, BeF2PStateTransTimer=60; SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0; SET UCONNMODETIMER: T305=D5;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


170



37

Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010802 Inter RNC Cell Update.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The Iur interface is configured between adjacent RNCs.

Context Cell update is mainly used to update the UE information on the network side when the UE location or behavior is changed. Inter-RNC cell update means cell update between RNCs.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the RNC-oriented PS BE service state transition switch.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer to 30s.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171



Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set inactivity detection timers for PS services. 4.

Configure intra-frequency neighboring cells controlled by different BSC6900s. For details, see the Configuring an Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the parameter IUR CCH support flag to ON. NOTE

IUR CCH support flag is also turned on neighboring BSC6900.

l

l

Verifying Cell Update Triggered by Cell Reselection 1.


2.


3.

Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL.

4.


5.


6.


7.

Cause the UE to perform cell reselection from local cell to intra-frequency neighboring cell so as to trigger cell update. The UE should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE message to neighboring BSC6900, with the cell update cause of cell reselection, and local BSC6900 should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE.



----End

Example //Activating inter-RNC cell update SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1; SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=30; SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0; MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, SuppIurCch=YES;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


172



38

Configuring Intra RNC URA Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010901 Intra RNC URA Update.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context The UTRAN registration area (URA) update procedure updates the URA of a UE when an RRC connection exists and the location of the UE is known on the URA level in the UTRAN. IntraRNC URA update means URA update within the RNC.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLACINFO (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set CELL1 and CELL2 as the intra-frequency neighboring cells that belong to the same location area, route area, and service area.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLURA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell URA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure CELL1 and CELL2 to make them belong to different URAs.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH from Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173



the Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch drop-down list to turn on the RNCoriented PS BE service state transition switch.

l

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_F2U_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to to enable state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the Cell Reselection Timer, BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer, and BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer parameters to 60s, 10s, and 10s respectively.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set inactivity detection timers for PS services.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCONNMODETIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE Timers and Constants Configuration > UE Timers And Constants in Connected Mode; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the periodic cell update timer to 5 minutes.

8.

Configure intra-frequency neighboring cells. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration Guide.

Verifying URA Update Triggered by URA Reselection 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.

When the DRA_F2U_SWITCH switch is on or off, the state transition of UE is different. – If the switch is off: Do not send any data from the UE for another while. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to CELL_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_PCH. Make the UE perform a cell reselection between CELL1 and CELL2. Make UE1 perform another cell reselection after the Cell Reselection

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


174



Timer[s] expires. Search for the last RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message in trace data. The value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be URA_PCH. – If the switch is on: Do not send any data from the UE for another while. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to URA_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be URA_PCH. 8.

l

Verifying Periodic URA Update 1.

l

Keep the UE in URA_PCH state. Perform another cell reselection between CELL1 and CELL2 so as to trigger URA update. The UE should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of changeofURA, and the RNC should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE. Do not send any data from the UE for five minutes, to trigger periodic URA update. The UE should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of URA reselection, and the RNC should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE.



----End

Example //Activating intra-RNC URA update //Configring the cell information MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=111, LAC=1, SAC=1, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1; MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=121, LAC=1, SAC=1, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1; ADD UCELLURA: CellId=111, URAId=0; ADD UCELLURA: CellId=121, URAId=1; //Enabling status transition (CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH/URA_PCH) SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1; //(Optional) Enabling state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_F2U_SWITCH-1; //Setting the parameters related to this feature SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=65535, CellReSelectTimer=180; SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: CellReSelectTimer=60, BeD2FStateTransTimer=10, BeF2PStateTransTimer=10; SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=1; SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0; SET UCONNMODETIMER: T305=D5;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


175



39

Configuring Inter RNC URA Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010902 Inter RNC URA Update.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The Iur interface is configured between adjacent RNCs.

Context Inter-RNC URA update means URA update between RNCs.

Procedure l


Configure the Iur interface. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration Guide.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLURA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell URA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure CELL1 and CELL2 to make them belong to different URAs. NOTE

Cell1 belongs to RNC_1, Cell2 belongs to RNC_2.

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

On the RNC1 side, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176



Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the RNC-oriented PS BE service state transition switch.

l

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_F2U_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to to enable state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the Cell Reselection Timer, BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer, and BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer parameters to 60s, 10s, and 10s respectively.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANS (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > UE State Translating Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter Cell Reselection Counter Threshold to 1.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set inactivity detection timers for PS services.

8.

Configure intra-frequency neighboring cells. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration Guide.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the setup of command channels on the Iur interface.



2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.

When the DRA_F2U_SWITCH switch is on or off, the state transition of UE is different. – If the switch is off: Do not send any data from the UE for another while. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to CELL_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


177



CELL_PCH. Make the UE perform a cell reselection between CELL1 and CELL2. Make UE1 perform another cell reselection after the Cell Reselection Timer[s] expires. Search for the last RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message in trace data. The value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be URA_PCH. – If the switch is on: Do not send any data from the UE for another while. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to URA_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be URA_PCH. 8.

l

Keep the UE in URA_PCH state. Perform another cell reselection between CELL1 and CELL2 so as to trigger URA update. The UE should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of CHANGE OF URA, and the RNC should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE.



----End

Example //Activating inter-RNC URA update //Configring the cell information ADD UCELLURA: CellId=111, URAId=0; ADD UCELLURA: CellId=121, URAId=1; //Enabling status transition (CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH/URA_PCH) SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1; //(Optional) Enabling state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_F2U_SWITCH-1; //Setting the parameters related to this feature SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: CellReSelectTimer=60, BeD2FStateTransTimer=10, BeF2PStateTransTimer=10; SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=1; SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0; MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, SuppIurCch=YES; MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, SuppIurCch=YES;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


178



40

Configuring Direct Signaling

Connection Re-establishment (DSCR) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021400 Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR).

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context During a DSCR procedure, the RNC autonomously releases the RRC connection carrying nonreal-time RABs and then immediately requests the UE to re-establish an RRC connection for service setup. The RRC connection re-establishment procedure is triggered by an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message with the cause value of Directed Signaling Connection re-establishment sent from the RNC to the UE. A routing area update follows the RRC connection re-establishment immediately. The DSCR feature is supplementary to the feature WRFD-020605 SRNS Relocation Introduction Package. When the Iur resources are insufficient or SRNS relocation fails, the DSCR feature ensures uninterrupted PS services. Only background and interactive services support this feature. The DSCR re-establishes a service through the routing area update procedure. Therefore, this feature is applicable only to PS services.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179



modification center: not supported). In this step, set Handover Type for PS BE Traffic to CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_DSCR. NOTE

The default value of Handover Type for PS BE Traffic is CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC. You can modify the value according to the actual requirements.

l

2.

If the Iur interface exists, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the switches related to SRNS relocation.

3.

If the UE is not in the CELL_DCH state, run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the DSCR switch for the DRNC.


Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 40-1 and Figure 40-2.

Figure 40-1 Uu interface tracing dialog box

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


180



Figure 40-2 RRC CONNECTION RELEASE

l

2.

Use the UE to establish a PS BE service. Perform a handover by adding a cell under the DRNC and then removing the source cell.

3.

View the RRC_RRC_CONN_REL message traced on the Uu interface. Check the value of the IE releaseCause in the rrcConnectionRelease of the message. If the value is Directed Signaling Connection re-establishment, this feature has been activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Handover Type for PS BE Traffic to CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC.

----End

Example //Activating Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR) MOD UNRNC: NRncId=20, PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_DSCR; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: SrnsrSwitch=SRNSR_DSCR_IUR_RESRCE_SWITCH-1&SRNSR_DSCR_LOC_SEPRAT_SWITCH-1 &SRNSR_DSCR_PROPG_DELAY_SWITCH-1&SRNSR_DSCR_SEPRAT_DUR_SWITCH-1; SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=DRNC_DIRECT_DSCR-1; //Deactivating Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR) MOD UNRNC: NRncId=20, PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


181


41


Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-140102 CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls. For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – UEs of Release 8 or later support PS handovers from LTE to UMTS and CSFB from LTE to UMTS. In addition, the message sent to the MME carries an emergency call indicator. – The eNodeB supports PS handovers from LTE to UMTS and CSFB from LTE to UMTS. In addition, the handover request sent to the RNC carries CSFB High Priority. – The CN supports PS handovers from LTE to UMTS and CSFB from LTE to UMTS. In addition, the INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST message sent from the MME to the eNodeB carries CS Fallback High Priority.

Context In the CS Fall Back (CSFB) process for an LTE emergency call, a UE can initiate an emergency call on the UMTS network only after the PS service has been admitted to the UMTS network. This feature ensures the success of PS admission by decreasing the PS service rate or performing resource preemption.



182



1.

Configure the data on the LTE side, including setting the neighbor relationships between cells. For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor. If the LTE equipment is provided by Huawei, see the LTE document CS Fallback Parameter Description.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select HO_L2U_EMGCALL_SWITCH under HandOver Switch to enable this feature.

l

Verification Procedure After this feature is activated, the incoming LTE-to-UMTS PS handover success rate caused by LTE emergency calls increases.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear HO_L2U_EMGCALL_SWITCH under HandOver Switch to disable this feature.

----End

Example //Activating CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch= HO_L2U_EMGCALL_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch= HO_L2U_EMGCALL_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


183



42

Configuring NodeB Clock

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501 NodeB Clock.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Ensure that a clock link is available before configuring the LINE clock source. – Ensure that the GPS card is configured before configuring the GPS card clock source. – Ensure that the USCU is configured before configuring the BITS clock source. – The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support the GPS clock input. – The BTS3902E cannot support GPS and BITS clock.

l


l


Context In normal operation, the base station needs to track an external clock to calibrate its main clock frequency. The synchronization of the base station clock provides the basis for the frame synchronization. The base station can work in multiple clock synchronization modes: l

Synchronization with the Iub clock (default mode)

l

Synchronization with GPS

l

Synchronization with the BITS clock

l

Synchronization with the IP clock

l

Synchronization with the synchronous Ethernet clock (NodeB V200R014)

l

Synchronization with the multi-mode sharing clock (NodeB V200R014)

l

Synchronization with the PTP clock (NodeB V100R014)

In addition to the preceding synchronization modes, the MBTS internal clock can work in freerun mode to keep the MBTS running. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


184



Procedure l

NodeB V200R014 Activation Procedure 1.

Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Clock Source > System Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the working mode of the reference clock source. Table 42-1 Parameters Clock Synchronization Modes

Parameter Name

Parameter Value


Selected Clock Source

LINECLK(Line Clock)


GPS(GPS Clock)


BITS(BITS Clock)


IPCLK(IP Clock)

Synchronization with the synchronous Ethernet clock

SYNCETH(SyncEth Clock)

Synchronization with the multi-mode sharing clock

PEERCLK(Peer Clock)


Run the NodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT to query the status of the current clock source. Expected result: The value of Current Clock Source State is Normal.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Clock Source > System Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the working mode of the reference clock source.


185



Table 42-2 Parameters Clock Synchronization Modes

Parameter Name

Parameter Value


Clock Source Type

LINE(LINE clock source)


GPSCARD(GPS card clock source)


BITS(BITS clock source)


IPCLK(IP clock source)

Synchronization with the PTP clock

PTP(PTP clock source)



Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End

Example l

NodeB V200R014 //Activation procedure //Synchronization with the Iub clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=LINECLK; //Synchronization with the GPS clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0; //Synchronization with the BITS clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS; //Synchronization with the IP clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK; //Synchronization with the synchronous Ethernet clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=SYNCETH; //Synchronization with the multi-mode sharing clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PEERCLK; //Verification procedure DSP CLKSTAT: SN=7;

l

NodeB V100R014 //Activation procedure //Synchronization with the Iub clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=LINE; //Synchronization with the GPS clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPSCARD; //Synchronization with the BITS clock

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


186


42 Configuring NodeB Clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS; //Synchronization with the IP clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK; //Synchronization with the PTP clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PTP; //Verification procedure DSP CLKSTAT:;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


187


43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface

43

Configuring Dynamic AAL2

Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030104 Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – BTS3902E does not support this feature.

l


l


l

Others – The RAN is based on ATM transmission.

Context In ATM transmission mode, the ATM Adaptation Layer type 2 (AAL2) path is used to carry the user plane data on the Iub/Iur/Iu-CS interface. The AAL2 path is provided according to service type (conversational, streaming, interactive, and background) and bearer type (R99, HSDPA, and HSUPA). Physical bandwidth resources are dynamically allocated to delay-sensitive services and delay-insensitive services, which improves the utilization of transmission links on the Iub interface.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node, IUR Configuration Express > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node, IUCS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an adjacent node. Set the parameter Adjacent Node Type to IUB, IUR, or IUCS, and the parameter Transport Type to ATM. If the node is the lowest leaf node of the switching network, set the parameter Is Root Node to YES; otherwise, set the parameter Is Root Node to NO. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188


43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface NOTE

For an adjacent node on the Iur or Iu-CS interface, the parameter Adjacent Node Type of its upperlevel hub node must be NNI_AAL2SWITCH; for an adjacent node on the Iub interface, the parameter Adjacent Node Type of its upper-level hub node must be UNI_AAL2SWITCH.

2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path, IUCS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path, IUR Configuration Express > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an AAL2 path. The parameters CARRYVPI and CARRYVCI must be consistent with those of the AAL2 path configured on the peer end.


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AAL2PATH to query the status of the AAL2 path on the Iub interface. Expected result: The value of Operation state is Available.

l

2.

In the Iub/Iu-CS ATM transmission scenario, a UE in idle state camps on CELL1 and the control plane is correctly configured. Originate the speech and data services. If the service access is normal, the AAL2 path on the Iub/Iu-CS interface is set up successfully.

3.

Optional: In the ATM transmission scenario on the Iur interface, a UE in idle state camps on CELL1 and the control plane is correctly configured. Originate a cross-Iur handover. If the handover is successful, the AAL2 path on the Iur interface is set up successfully.


----End

Example //Activating Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface //Adding an adjacent node ADD ADJNODE: ANI=2, NAME="MSC1", NODET=IUCS, TRANST=ATM, IsROOTNODE=YES, DPX=1; //Adding an AAL2 path ADD AAL2PATH: ANI=2, PATHID=1, CARRYT=UNI, CARRYF=1, CARRYSN=14, CARRYUNILNKN=0, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=12, VCI=126, TXTRFX=111, RXTRFX=111, AAL2PATHT=R99; //Verifying Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface DSP AAL2PATH: ANI=2, PATHID=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


189



44

Configuring Permanent AAL5

Connections for Control Plane Traffic

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030105 Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The equipment data has been configured for the ATM transmission on the Iub/Iu/Iur interface. NOTE

For details about how to configure the equipment data, see section Configuring the Equipment Data of the BSC6900UMTS Initial Configuration Guide.

Context In the RAN in ATM transmission mode, AAL5 connections are used to bear the Iub/Iur/Iu signaling and the Iub OAM traffic. As specified by 3GPP, User-Network Interface SAAL (UNISAAL) is used for control-plane connections on the Iub interface and Network-Network Interface SAAL (NNI-SAAL) is used for control-plane connections on the Iur/Iu interface. AAL5 connections on the Iub/Iur/Iu interface are all set up by configuring Signaling ATM adaptation layer (SAAL) links.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SAALLNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link, IUCS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link, Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190



IUR Configuration Express > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an SAAL link. If the interface is Iub, set the parameter Interface type to UNI. If the interface is Iu or Iur, set Interface type to NNI. 2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNCP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > NCP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a NodeB Control Port (NCP) link.

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCCP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > CCP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a Communication Control Port (CCP) link. NOTE

An SAAL link can carry only one NCP or CCP link. Therefore, choose to perform step 2 or step 3 based on the actual situation.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SAALLNK to query the status of the SAAL link. Expected result: The value of SAAL link state is AVAILABLE.

l

Deactivation Procedure NOTE

An SAAL link can carry only one NCP or CCP link. Therefore, choose to remove the NCP or CCP link carried by the SAAL link, based on the actual situation.

1.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UNCP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > NCP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the NCP link carried by the SAAL link.

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCCP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > CCP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the CCP link carried by the SAAL link.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SAALLNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link, IUCS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link, IUR Configuration Express > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the SAAL link.

----End

Example //Activating Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic ADD SAALLNK: SRN=1, SN=2, SAALLNKN=10, CARRYT=UNI, CARRYSRN=0, CARRYSN=14, CARRYUNILNKN=2, CARRYVPI=10, CARRYVCI=55, TXTRFX=100, RXTRFX=100, SAALLNKT=UNI; ADD UCCP: NODEBNAME="NodeB1", PN=0, CARRYLNKT=SAAL, SAALLNKN=10; //Verifying Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic DSP SAALLNK: SRN=1, SN=2, SAALLNKN=10; //Deactivating Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic RMV UCCP: NODEBNAME="NodeB1", PN=0; RMV SAALLNK: SRN=1, SN=2, SAALLNKN=10;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


191


45


Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030106 Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context With the Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth (AAL2 CAC) feature, admission requests are accepted or rejected selectively. This feature maximizes the usage of transmission resources in addition to ensuring the QoS.

Procedure l

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set parameters to appropriate values. For example, set Service type to NRTVBR, Peak cell rate to 100, and Sustainable cell rate to 80.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an ATM Adaptation Layer type 2 (AAL2) path. In this step, set TXTRFX and RXTRFX in accordance with the settings in step 1.


192


l


1.

Assume that the verification is based on the preceding parameter settings and the peer end is configured with the corresponding AAL2 path link. Originate a PS interactive service. If the data rate is 64 kbit/s, the UE successfully accesses the network.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AAL2PATH to view that the used bandwidth of the path is about 37 kbit/s, which is the admission bandwidth of the control plane.

3.

Originate a PS interactive service. If the data rate is 128 kbit/s, the UE fails to access the network.


----End

Example //Activation procedure ADD ATMTRF: TRFX=100, ST=NRTVBR, UT=CELL/S, PCR=100, SCR=80; ADD AAL2PATH: ANI=0, PATHID=10, CARRYT=UNI, CARRYF=1, CARRYSN=14, CARRYUNILNKN=0, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=12, VCI=126, TXTRFX=100, RXTRFX=100, AAL2PATHT=R99;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


193


46

46 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes

Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature "WRFD-05030107 CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes".

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context Huawei RAN supports service type of ATM : l

Constant Bit Rate (CBR)

l

Real time Variable Bit Rate (rt-VBR)

l

Non-real time Variable Bit Rate (nrt-VBR)

l

Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR)

l

Enhanced unspecified Bit Rate (UBR+)

Configuring UBR+ QoS Class feature, please refer to Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class. The traffic volume on the VCC depends on the parameters (SCR, PCR, and CDVT) associated with each type of ATM service. Generally, rt-VBR is applicable to delay-sensitive services and nrt-VBR is applicable to delay-insensitive services. In addition, UBR and nrt-VBR are applicable to None Delay Sensitive service mapping on the HSDPA/HSUPA. It is recommended for configuring service type of ATM shown as Figure 46-1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


194


46 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes

Figure 46-1 Service type of ATM

Procedure l


l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an ATM traffic record. To add more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ATMTRF to query the ATM traffic configuration. The expected result is that the query result is consistent with the configuration information.


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) to delete an ATM traffic record. To delete more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly.

----End

Example //Activating CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes ADD ATMTRF: TRFX=105, ST=CBR, UT=CELL/S, PCR=1000; //Verifying CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes LST ATMTRF: TRFX=105; Deactivating CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes RMV ATMTRF: TRFX=105;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


195


47 Configuring F5

47

Configuring F5

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030110 F5. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – VCL CC is applicable to the AEUa, AOUa, AOUc, UOIa(ATM), and UOIc boards of the BSC6900. – VCL PM is applicable to the AOUc and UOIc boards of the BSC6900. – Only BSC6900 does not support the latency detection based on IE LB. – Only 3900 series Base Station supports the passive detection based on IE LB. – BTS3902E does not support this feature.

l


l


Context This feature supports: l

ATM CC provides E2E continuity detection on the VCL.

l

PM function provides performance monitoring on the VCL.

l

It is recommended to activate VCL CC before activating VCL PM.

l


Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT VCLCC to activate the VCL CC or loopback function for a link. To activate the function for multiple links, run this command repeatedly. There are three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH, and IPOAPVC.


196


47 Configuring F5

2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT VCLPM to activate the VCL PM function for a link. To activate the function for multiple links, run this command repeatedly. There are three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH, and IPOAPVC.


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP VCLCC to query the CC result of a VCL. – If the VCL CC is activated and the PVC is functional, the SINK activated state and SOURCE activated state are UP, and LOC, AIS, and RDI alarm state is normal. – If the loopback is activated and the PVC is functional, the loopback query result is UP, and LOC, AIS, and RDI alarm state is normal.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP VCLPM to query the PM result of a VCL. – If the VCL PM is activated, the SINK activated state and SOURCE activated state are PM_UP, and PM Active Fail Alarm is Normal.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA VCLCC to deactivate the VCL CC or loopback function for a link. To deactivate the function for multiple links, run this command repeatedly. There are three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH, and IPOAPVC.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA VCLPM to deactivate the VCL PM for a link. To deactivate the function for multiple links, run this command repeatedly. There are three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH, and IPOAPVC.

----End

Example //Activating F5 ACT VCLCC: LNKT=SAALLNK, ACT VCLPM: LNKT=SAALLNK, //Verifying F5 DSP VCLCC: LNKT=SAALLNK, DSP VCLPM: LNKT=SAALLNK, //Deactivating F5 DEA VCLCC: LNKT=SAALLNK, DEA VCLPM: LNKT=SAALLNK,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0, VCLTYPE=CC; SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0; SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0; SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0; SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0; SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0;


197



48

Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature "WRFD-050305 UBR+ ATM QoS Class".

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The basic information about the BSC6900 is configured. For details, see the Configuring the Basic Data.

Context Huawei RAN supports the UBR+ ATM service class. UBR+ is the enhanced UBR feature. It adds the Minimum Desired Cell Rate (MDCR) indication. UBR+ is particularly applicable to the OAM channels over the Iub interface. The MDCR of UBR+ ensures the reliability of the OAM connection in case of transmission channel congestion, and the BE service of the UBR+ fully utilizes transmission bandwidth.

Procedure l


l


l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the MML command ADD ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an ATM traffic record of the UBR+ class. To add more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly. Run the MML command LST ATMTRF to query the ATM traffic configuration. Expected result: The query result is consistent with the configuration information.


198



1.

Run the MML command RMV ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) to delete an ATM traffic record of the UBR+ class. To delete more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly.

----End

Example //Adding UBR+ ATM QoS Class ADD ATMTRF: TRFX=105, ST=UBR_PLUS, UT=CELL/S, MCR=100; //Verifying UBR+ ATM QoS Class LST ATMTRF: TRFX=105; //Deactivating UBR+ ATM QoS Class RMV ATMTRF: TRFX=105;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


199



49

Configuring Link Aggregation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210103 Link Aggregation.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature applies only to 3900 series base stations excluding the BTS3902E. – This feature is only supported on BSC6900.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – In the earlier versions than RAN13.0, trunk group configuration cannot support IP PM.

l


l

Others – This feature requires the support from peer transmission devices, such as switches and base stations. – This feature supports IP networking, layer 2 (L2) networking, and layer 3 (L3) networking.

Context This feature enables multiple FE or GE ports to be bound to form a logical port. This provides high bandwidth for end-to-end transmission, achieves load sharing across these FE or GE ports, and improves the transmission reliability.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Activate Link Aggregation on the BSC6900.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a device IP address to a board.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRK (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Link Aggregation; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an Ethernet link aggregation group. In Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200



this step, set the Trunk group work mode to LOAD_SHARING(Load sharing), set the Aggregation Mode to STATIC_LACP when the peer end supports the LACP protocol or set the Aggregation Mode to MANUAL_AGGREGATION when the peer end does not support the LACP protocol, and set the Flow control switch to ON(ON). 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRKLNK (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Link Aggregation; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a specified physical port to an Ethernet link aggregation group. NOTE

If the Ethernet link aggregation group is configured with multiple physical ports, repeat this step until all the required physical ports are configured.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRKIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Trunk IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP address to an Ethernet link aggregation group. When multiple virtual local area network (VLAN) gateways are planned, run this command for each IP address you want to add.

– Activate Link Aggregation on the NodeB.

l

1.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add a device IP address to an Ethernet port. In this step, set Port Type to ETHTRK(Ethernet Trunk).

2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD ETHTRK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Ethernet Trunk; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an Ethernet link aggregation group.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD ETHTRKLNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Ethernet Trunk > Ethernet Trunk Member; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a member port to an Ethernet link aggregation group. When multiple member ports need to be added, run this command for each port you want to add.

Verification Procedure – Verify the effect of Link Aggregation on the BSC6900. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHTRK to query whether an Ethernet link aggregation group is available. NOTE

Expected result: If the value of Status of ETHTRK is UP in the command output, the Ethernet link aggregation group is available.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

2.

Set the IP address of the peer NE to be on the same network segment as the IP address for the Ethernet link aggregation group. For example, set the IP address of the peer NE to 16.16.16.2.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP to check the IP communication between the local and peer ends.


201


49 Configuring Link Aggregation NOTE

Expected result: If this command is executed and the command output indicates that no packet loss occurs, the Ethernet link aggregation group has been successfully configured.

– Verify the effect of Link Aggregation on the NodeB.

l

1.

Run the NodeB MML commandDSP ETHTRK to query whether an Ethernet link aggregation group is available.

2.

Run the NodeB MML commandDSP ETHTRKLNK to query whether a member port of an Ethernet link aggregation group is available.

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivate Link Aggregation on the BSC6900. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV ETHTRKIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Trunk IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an IP address from an Ethernet link aggregation group. If the removal fails, perform operations as prompted.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV ETHTRK (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Link Aggregation; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an Ethernet link aggregation group.

– Deactivate Link Aggregation on the NodeB. 1.

Run the NodeB MML commandRMV DEVIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a device IP address.

2.

Run the NodeB MML commandRMV ETHTRK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Ethernet Trunk; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an Ethernet link aggregation group.

----End

Example //Activating Link Aggregation on the BSC6900 ADD DEVIP: SRN=2, SN=26, DEVTYPE=LOGIC_IP, IPADDR="10.171.35.123"; ADD ETHTRK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, LACPMODE=MANUAL_AGGREGATION, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON; ADD ETHTRKLNK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, TRKLNKSN=26, TRKLNKPN=2, WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, PORTPRI=101; ADD ETHTRKLNK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, TRKLNKSN=27, TRKLNKPN=2, WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, PORTPRI=102; ADD ETHTRKIP: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="126.126.126.1", MASK="255.255.255.0"; /Activating Link Aggregation on the NodeB //Adding a device IP address to an Ethernet port ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETHTRK, PN=0, IP="192.168.2.24", MASK="255.255.255.0"; //Adding an Ethernet link aggregation group and adding a member port to an Ethernet link aggregation group ADD ETHTRK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0; ADD ETHTRKLNK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0, PN=0, PRI=255, FLAG=YES;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


202



//Deactivating Link Aggregation on the BSC6900 //Removing active/standby Ethernet link aggregation groups RMV ETHTRKIP: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, IPINDEX=0; RMV ETHTRK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2; //Deactivating Link Aggregation on the NodeB //Removing a device IP address from an Ethernet port RMV DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETHTRK, PN=0, IP="192.168.2.24"; //Removing an Ethernet link aggregation group RMV ETHTRK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


203



50

Configuring Flow Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040100 Flow Control.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – NodeB RRC link priority based flow control is depended on WMPT and WBBP boards.

l


l


Context Flow control is implemented by regulating the input transmission rate. This mechanism is called feedback flow control mechanism. The flow control measures are as follows: l

Board flow control

l

Control-plane load sharing

l

User-plane load sharing

l

Flow control based on RRC request queuing

l

Flow control based on MPU load

l

Flow control based on traffic growth

l


Procedure – Activating board flow control 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCSW (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control Management > Flow Control Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to switch on the flow control and related flow control items. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCCPUTHD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control Management > Flow Control Threshold of CPU Usage; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to configure the CPU usage threshold for each flow control item according to the network plan. NOTE

l Flow control is triggered when the CPU usage exceeds the related threshold. l The CPU usage thresholds must meet the following condition: 100 ≥ Critical threshold ≥ Threshold for a flow control item ≥ Restore threshold for a flow control item l The critical threshold is of the highest priority. That is, other thresholds take effect only when the CPU usage is lower than the critical threshold. l The flow control based on the packet usage and that based on the CPU usage are independent. The system limits the flow to the lower one allowed by these two flow control algorithms.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCMSGQTHD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control Management > Flow Control Threshold of Message Queue Usage; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to configure the packet usage threshold for each flow control item according to the network plan. NOTE

l Flow control is triggered when the packet usage exceeds the related threshold. l The packet usage thresholds must meet the following condition: 100 ≥ Critical threshold ≥ Threshold for a flow control item ≥ Restore threshold for a flow control item l The critical threshold is of the highest priority. That is, other thresholds take effect only when the packet usage is lower than the critical threshold. l The flow control based on the packet usage and that based on the CPU usage are independent. The system limits the flow to the lower one allowed by these two flow control algorithms.

– Activating control-plane load sharing 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Process switch to RNC_SHARE_SWITCH to switch on load sharing.

2.

(Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCTRLPLNSHAREPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control Management > Control Plane RRC Sharing Parameter; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Control Plane Sharing Out Threshold to 40 so that the control-plane load sharing function can be triggered easily. The default value of Control Plane Sharing Out Threshold is 50. NOTE

l If the CPU usage is higher than this threshold and lower than the overload threshold, new calls will be assigned to other SPUs. Overload threshold is set by the MML command SET SHARETHD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control Management > Load Sharing Threshold of SPU Board; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). l Max capability middle load> Max capability normal load> Sharing out capability middle load.

– Activating user-plane load sharing Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


205



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUSERPLNSHAREPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Signaling Configuration > Typical SRB HSUPA Power Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Percentage of User Plane Sharing Out threshold according to the network plan. Inter-subrack user-plane load sharing is triggered when the user plane load on one subrack exceeds this threshold.

– Activating flow control based on RRC request queuing 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select RSVDBIT14 in Reserved parameter 1.

– Activating flow control based on MPU load 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select RSVDBIT1_BIT19 in Reserved parameter 1.

– Activating flow control based on traffic growth 1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCALLSHOCKCTRL (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Traffic Volume Control Parameter Configuration > Call Shock Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CELL_LEVEL in Call Shock Control Switch to switch on the celllevel flow control based on traffic growth.

Verification Procedure – Verifying board flow control 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST FCSW to query the state of the flow control switch.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST FCCPUTHD to query the CPU usage threshold for flow control.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST FCMSGQTHD to query the packet usage threshold for flow control.

– Verifying control-plane and user-plane load sharing 1.

On the LMT, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > CPU/DSP Usage Monitoring to observe the CPU usage of each subsystem. If the CPU usage of each subsystem is almost the same, load sharing takes effect.

– Verifying flow control based on RRC request queuing 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCACALGOSWITCH to query the state of the switch for flow control based on RRC request queuing.

– Verifying flow control based on MPU load 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST URRCTRLSWITCH to query the state of the switch for flow control based on MPU load.

– Verifying flow control based on traffic growth Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


206



1. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCALLSHOCKCTRL to query the state of the switch for flow control based on traffic growth.

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivating board flow control 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCSW (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control Management > Flow Control Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to switch off flow control.

– Deactivating control-plane load sharing 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deselect RNC_SHARE_SWITCH in Process switch.

– Deactivating user-plane load sharing 1.

User-plane load sharing does not need to be deactivated.

– Deactivating flow control based on RRC request queuing 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect RSVDBIT14 in Reserved parameter 1.

– Deactivating flow control based on MPU load 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect RSVDBIT1_BIT19 in Reserved parameter 1.

– Deactivating flow control based on traffic growth 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCALLSHOCKCTRL (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Traffic Volume Control Parameter Configuration > Call Shock Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect CELL_LEVEL in Call Shock Control Switch.

----End

Example //Activating board flow control //Switching on XPU load control SET FCSW: BRDCLASS=XPU, FCSW=ON, PRINTSW=ON, TRACESW=ON, PMSW=ON, LOGSW=ON; //Setting CPU usage threshold for DPU flow control SET FCCPUTHD:BRDCLASS=DPU, SMWINDOW=6, FDWINDOW=2, CTHD=95, PRINTCTHD=60, PRINTRTHD=50, TRACECTHD=60, TRACERTHD=50, LOGCTHD=60, LOGRTHD=50; //Setting packet usage threshold for DPU flow control SET FCMSGQTHD: BRDCLASS=DPU, SMWINDOW=9, CTHD=95, PRINTCTHD=60, PRINTRTHD=50, TRACECTHD=60, TRACERTHD=50, LOGCTHD=60, LOGRTHD=50;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


207



//Activating control-plane load sharing SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=RNC_SHARE_SWITCH-1; SET UCTRLPLNSHAREPARA: CtrlPlnSharingOutThd=40; SET SHARETHD: BT=XPU, SMRRCCONNCCPUTHD=80, SMRRCCONNRCPUTHD=70, CRRCCONNCCPUTHD=80, CRRCCONNRCPUTHD=70, LRRCCONNCCPUTHD=80, LRRCCONNRCPUTHD=70, SMRRCCONNCMSGTHD=80, SMRRCCONNRMSGTHD=70, CRRCCONNCMSGTHD=80, CRRCCONNRMSGTHD=70, LRRCCONNCMSGTHD=80, LRRCCONNRMSGTHD=70; //Activating user-plane load sharing SET UUSERPLNSHAREPARA: UserPlnSharingOutThd=90; //Activating RRC Shaping and Queuing SET UCACALGOSWITCH:RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT14-1; //Activating flow control based on MPU load SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT19-1; //Activating flow control based on traffic growth SET UCALLSHOCKCTRL: CallShockCtrlSwitch=CELL_LEVEL-1; //Verifying board flow control LST FCSW: LstFormat=VERTICAL; LST FCCPUTHD: LstFormat=VERTICAL; LST FCMSGQTHD: LstFormat=VERTICAL; //Verifying flow control based on RRC request queuing LST UCACALGOSWITCH: LstFormat=VERTICAL; //Verifying flow control based on MPU load LST URRCTRLSWITCH: LstFormat=VERTICAL; //Verifying flow control based on traffic growth LST UCALLSHOCKCTRL: LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; //Deactivating board flow control SET FCSW: BRDCLASS=XPU, FCSW=OFF; //Deactivating control-plane load sharing SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=RNC_SHARE_SWITCH-0; //Deactivating flow control based on RRC request queuing SET UCACALGOSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT14-0; //Deactivating flow control based on MPU load SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT19-0; //Deactivating flow control based on traffic growth SET UCALLSHOCKCTRL: CallShockCtrlSwitch=CELL_LEVEL-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


208



51

Configuring BOOTP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031100 BOOTP. In ATM transport mode, the NodeB can automatically set up the OM channel with the BSC6900 by using the BOOTSTRAP Protocol (BOOTP) function.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The transmission equipment is in the connected state. – BOOTP applies only to ATM networking scenarios.

l


l


Context This feature enables NodeB to set up the OM channel to the RNC automatically without configuration data. The maintenance staff can download the data and software to the NodeB through the OM channel at the far end. The feature decreases the operation and maintenance costs and enhances the network maintainability and maintenance quality. NodeB will automatically set up the OM channel using the BOOTP protocol. In addition, NodeB monitors the OM channel. When the OM channel is broken, NodeB can rebuild it.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the logical IP address for the interface board of the BSC6900. This IP address serves as the local address of the IPoA at the BSC6900.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPOAPVC (CME single configuration: IUPS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > IPoA PVC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the IPoA PVC for bearing the OM channel.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEBIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > NodeB IP Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209



Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the IP address for the OM channel of the NodeB. l

Verification Procedure If the BOOTP configurations at the BSC6900 are completed but no configuration at the NodeB and the NodeB can be maintained on the M2000, it indicates that the NodeB has successfully set up the OM channel by using the BOOTP feature.

l


----End

Example //Activation procedure ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=14, DEVTYPE=IPOA_CLIENT_IP, IPADDR="131.131.131.132", MASK="255.255.255.0"; ADD IPOAPVC: IPADDR="131.131.131.132", PEERIPADDR="131.131.131.131", CARRYT=IMA, CARRYIMAGRPN=0, CARRYVPI=83, CARRYVCI=80, TXTRFX=100; ADD UNODEBIP: NODEBID=0, NBTRANTP=ATMTRANS_IP, NBATMOAMIP="131.131.131.131", NBATMOAMMASK="255.255.255.0", ATMSRN=0, ATMSN=14;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


210



52

Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031101 NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The transmission equipment is in the connected state. – DHCP applies only to IP networks. – Only 3900 series base stations support DHCP+AACP.

l


l


l

Others – If NodeB self-discovery uses the DHCP+AACP scheme – VLANs are used to separate NodeBs to be deployed from other network devices not required. – VLAN detection and IP path detection must be disabled on the M2000 to prevent interference during AACP detection. – the deployment list of NodeBs to be commissioned must be ready. For details, see the NodeB Commissioning Guide. – A bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) session failure results in a NodeB automatic deployment failure. Therefore, the BFD function must be disabled on the gateway side if it is enabled on the NodeB side. – The IP path ping function must be disabled on the RNC side during NodeB automatic deployment. Otherwise, when the ping message sent by the RNC reaches the gateway, the gateway sends an ARP request to the NodeB, disturbing the AACP detection process and resulting in a NodeB automatic deployment failure. – AACP and DHCP messages can be processed through port 67 or 68. Ports 67 and 68 must be enabled for the firewall in the radio network.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


211



– M2000 should support NodeB Auto Deployment function.

Context l

If the configuration file is incorrect, DHCP enables NodeBs to establish OM channels for NodeB remote maintenance.

l

The configuration is not required on the NodeB. If the hub NodeB is used, the configuration on the hub NodeB is required. The configuration is required on the DHCP server, for example, BSC6900 and M2000. Following takes BSC6900 for example.

l

Data Preparation – PPP/MLPPP networking Parameter Name

Recommended Parameter Settings

Source

NodeB ID

-

Network plan

NodeB DHCP Server IP Address

It is set to the IP address of the M2000 server by default. If there are several DHCP servers, the IP addresses need to be added manually.

NodeB AACP Server IP Address

It is set to the IP address of the M2000 server.

– Ethernet networking

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name


Source

NodeB ID

-

Network plan

NodeB DHCP Server IP Address

It is set to the IP address of the M2000 server by default. If there are several DHCP servers, the IP addresses need to be added manually.

NodeB Next Hop IP Address to DHCP Server

It is set to the gateway IP address of the M2000 server by default. If there are several DHCP servers, the IP addresses need to be added manually.

NodeB AACP Server IP Address

It is set to the IP address of the M2000 server.

NodeB Next Hop IP Address to AACP Server

It is set to the gateway IP address of the M2000 server.


212



Parameter Name


Interface subnet mask of the NodeB

Interface subnet mask of the NodeB

Source

Procedure l

l

l

Activation Procedure (NodeB Self-Discovery Based on DHCP) 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEBESN (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > NodeB Electronic Serial Number; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the NodeB ESN in response to the DHCP request reported by the NodeB.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEBIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > NodeB IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the IP address for the OM channel of the NodeB. When the BSC6900 makes a response to the DHCP request, it sends the IP address to the NodeB.

3.

Optional: If the Hub NodeB is used and the DHCP function is used for NodeB selfdiscovery, the following configurations are required. a.

Run the NodeB MML command SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Transport Management > DHCP Relay Switch; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable DHCP relaying of the NodeB.

b.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD DHCPSVRIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Transport Management > DHCP Server IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the IP address of the DHCP server so that lower-level NodeBs can automatically obtain the IP address of the DHCP server through DHCP.

Activation Procedure (NodeB Self-Discovery Based on DHCP+AACP) 1.

Optional: Run the NodeB MML command SET NODEBRSVP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > NodeB Reserved Para; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, select RSVDBIT29(Reserved Switch 29) under Reserved Parameter 1.

2.

On the M2000 client, Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment. Right-click the import the deployment list, and choose Task Setting from the shortcut menu. The Task Settings dialog box is displayed.

3.

Select Use AACP during Auto Discovery to use AACP for NodeB automatic deployment, Click OK to start NodeB automatic deployment.

Verification Procedure Check the status of NodeB automatic deployment in either of the following ways: – On the deployment list of the M2000

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Click Show Executing Information on the Deployment List tab page.

2.

View the information displayed in the Description column. If Execution Succeed is displayed, AACP-based NodeB automatic deployment is successful. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213



If AACP detection timed out is displayed, AACP-based NodeB automatic deployment fails. – On the topology view of the M2000 Choose Topology > Main Topology to view the Main Topology tab page. If is displayed beside a NodeB on the Main Topology tab page, the NodeB failed to be deployed. l


If the DHCP+AACP function is used for NodeB self-discovery, Run the NodeB MML command SET NODEBRSVP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > NodeB Reserved Para; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, clear RSVDBIT29(Reserved Switch 29) under Reserved Parameter 1.

----End

Example //Activation procedure //NodeB Self-Discovery Based on DHCP //Operations on the BSC6900 side ADD UNODEBESN: NODEBID=0, NBLB1="020GKV1082000126", USENBLB2=Disable, NODEBPT=ETH/TRUNK, PTIP="131.131.131.132", PTIPMASK="255.255.255.0"; ADD UNODEBIP: NODEBID=0, NBTRANTP=IPTRANS_IP, NBIPOAMIP="131.131.131.131", NBIPOAMMASK="255.255.255.0", IPSRN=0, IPSN=18, IPLOGPORTFLAG=NO; //(Optional) Operations on the NodeB side //Enabling DHCP relaying of the NodeB SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH: ES=ENABLE; //Adding the IP address of the DHCP server ADD DHCPSVRIP: DHCPSVRIP="13.13.13.13"; //NodeB Self-Discovery Based on DHCP+AACP SET NODEBRSVP: REVDPARA1=RSVDBIT29-1; //Deactivation procedure SET NODEBRSVP: REVDPARA1=RSVDBIT29-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


214


53


Configuring License Control for Urgency This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040300 License Control for Urgency. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only BSC6900 supports this feature.

l


l


Context

CAUTION This feature is enabled only in scenarios where the traffic volume increases abruptly, for example, in a disaster. It can be enabled only three times for each R version by BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL and it can be enabled only fifteen times by WRFD-040202 RNC Node Redundancy and it is valid only for seven days each time. After this function is enabled, a network can reach its maximum capacity that is supported by the hardware. This documentation describes the procedure of enabling the feature by BSC6900 MML command .

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


On the BSC6900 side: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to ON(ON).

2.

On the NodeB V200R014 side: Run the NodeB MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch State to ON. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215



3. l

On the NodeB V100R014 side: Run the NodeB MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to ON(ON).


On the BSC6900 Side a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LICUSAGE to view resource items of the license. Expected result: All the resource items reach their maximum values.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LICENSECTRL to query the setting of Grace Protection Period Switch State. Expected result: Values of Remaining Grace Protection Times and Remaining Grace Protection Days are displayed and the value of Grace Protection Period Switch State is ON.

2.

On the NodeB V200R014 side or NodeB V100R014 side a.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP LICENSE to view resource items of the license. Expected result: All the resource items reach their maximum values.

b.

Run the NodeB MML command LST LICENSECTRL to query the setting of Grace Protection Period Switch State. Expected result: Values of Remaining Grace Protection Times and Remaining Grace Protection Days are displayed and the value of Grace Protection Period Switch State is ON.

l


On the BSC6900 Side: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to OFF(OFF).

2.

On the NodeB V200R014 Side: Run the NodeB MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch State to OFF.

3.

On the NodeB V100R014 Side: Run the NodeB MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


216


54


Configuring Intelligently Out of Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031000 Intelligently Out of Service.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context Insufficient battery voltage or NodeB reset may lead to service disruption. When the preceding problems occur, this feature enables the NodeB to automatically reduce the pilot transmit power and hand over the UE to other cells, preventing service disruption.

Procedure l

l


Run the NodeB MML command SET SMTHPWRSWTCH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Basic Information > Smooth Power Change Function Switch; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Smooth Power Change Function Switch to OPEN(Open).

2.

Run the NodeB MML command SET SMTHPWRPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Basic Information > Smooth Power Change Function Switch; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Smart default step (0.5dB) and Smart default time ratio(100ms).


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command LST SMTHPWRSWTCH. In this step, check whether Smooth Power Change Function Switch is set to OPEN. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217



2. l

Run the NodeB MML command LST SMTHPWRPARA. In this step, check whether Smart default step(0.5dB) and Smart default time ratio(100ms) are set correctly.


----End

Example //Activation procedure SET SMTHPWRSWTCH: SWITCH=OPEN; SET SMTHPWRPARA: STEP=10, PERIOD=1; //Verification procedure LST SMTHPWRSWTCH:; LST SMTHPWRPARA:;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


218


55 Configuring OCNS

55

Configuring OCNS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031200 OCNS (Orthogonal Channel Noise Simulator). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context With the OCNS feature, multiple downlink analog channels are set up on the Uu interface to simulate the interference of multiple codes. In this way, the simulated downlink load test of a cell can be performed.

Procedure l


Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to start downlink load simulation. In this step, set Local Cell ID and Load Ratio (%). NOTE

l This command can be successfully executed only when the corresponding logical cell exists. l The downlink network load simulation uses the channelization codes from 112 to 127 whose SF = 128. l If you start the downlink network load simulation, it is advised to reserve the channelization codes in the RNC. l After starting the DL load simulation, new service can not be built in the channel resource occupied by the simulation.

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


219


55 Configuring OCNS

1.

l

Run the NodeB MML command DSP DLSIM to query the downlink load simulation result. In this step, specify Local Cell ID. The execution result displayed on the LMT shows the simulated load rate.


Run the NodeB MML command STP DLSIM to stop the downlink load simulation. In this step, specify Local Cell ID.

----End

Example //Activation procedure STR DLSIM: LOCELL=1, LR=80; //Verification procedure DSP DLSIM: LOCELL=1; //Deactivation procedure STP DLSIM: LOCELL=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


220


56


Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031400 Power Off the Equipment Level by Level.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Cabinets providing AC input power such as APM30, APM100, and APM200. These cabinets can be used for outdoor NodeBs.

l


l


Context After the mains supply is cut off, the NodeB powers off devices by level when certain DC voltage thresholds are reached. Intelligent shutdown of RF units and NodeBs can prolong the working time of the system by making efficient use of the available storage batteries.

Procedure l

NodeB V200R014 Activation Procedure

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD PMU (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board > PMU Porperty > Power Monitoring Unit; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Load Shutdown Flag to ENABLE(Enable) and set Load Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) if needed.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD BATTERY (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board > Battery Property > Battery; CME batch modification center: not Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221



supported). In this step, set Low Voltage Shutdown Flag to ENABLE and set Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) if needed. Verification Procedure 1.

Run the NodeB MML command LST PMU and query the values of Load Shutdown Flag and Load Shutdown Voltage(0.1V).

2.

Run the NodeB MML command LST BATTERY and query the values of Low Voltage Shutdown Flag and Shutdown Voltage(0.1V).

Deactivation Procedure

l

1.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD BATTERY (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board > Battery Property > Battery; CME batch modification center: not supported) and set Low Voltage Shutdown Flag to DISABLE(Disable).

2.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD PMU (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board > PMU Porperty > Power Monitoring Unit; CME batch modification center: not supported) and set Load Shutdown Flag to DISABLE(Disable).


Run the NodeB MML command SET SDPA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > PMU Board > PMU Property > PMU Shutdown Parameter; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Load Shutdown Flag to ENABLE(Enable), set Load Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) if needed, set Low Voltage Shutdown Flag to ENABLE (Enable), set Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) if needed.


Run the NodeB MML command LST SDPA, query the values of Load Shutdown Flag and Load Shutdown Voltage(0.1V),, query the values of Low Voltage Shutdown Flag and Shutdown Voltage(0.1V),.


Run the NodeB MML command SET SDPA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > PMU Board > PMU Property > PMU Shutdown Parameter; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Load Shutdown Flag to DISABLE(Disable), and set Low Voltage Shutdown Flag to DISABLE(Disable).

----End

Example l

NodeB V200R014 //Activation procedure MOD PMU: CN=1, PTYPE=APM30, LSDF=ENABLE, LSDV=430; MOD BATTERY: CN=1, LVSDF=ENABLE, SDV=360; //Verification procedure LST PMU: CN=1; LST BATTERY: CN=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


222


56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level //Deactivation procedure MOD BATTERY: CN=1, LVSDF=DISABLE; MOD PMU: CN=1, PTYPE=APM30, LSDF=DISABLE;

l

NodeB V100R014 //Activation procedure SET SDPA: CN=1, LSDF=ENABLE, LSDV=440, LVSDF=ENABLE, SDV=360, CSLSDF=DISABLE; //Verification procedure LST SDPA: CN=1; //Deactivation procedure SET SDPA: CN=1, LSDF=DISABLE, LVSDF=DISABLE, CSLSDF=DISABLE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


223



57

Configuring Solar Power Device Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031500 Solar Power Device Management.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only 3900 series base stations support the feature.

l


l


Context As green energy, solar power is being gradually introduced for supplying power for the NodeB. This feature enables the NodeB to communicate with a solar controller through the 485 serial port, therefore managing a solar power device, which makes the NodeB an eco-friendly base station.

Procedure l


Run the NodeB MML command ADD PMU (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Add PMU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a PMU. In this step, set Power System Type to SC48200.

2.

Optional: If a diesel generator is required, run the NodeB MML command ADD DIESELGEN (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board > PMU Property > Diesel Generator; CME batch modification center: not supported). – Set Intelligent Control Flag to ENABLE(Enable).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


224



– Set Rated Power(0.1kVA) based on the rated power specified on the nameplate of the diesel generator. l

l


Run the NodeB MML command DSP PMU to query the configuration information about the PMU. Expected result: The value of Power System Type is SC48200.

2.

Optional: Run the NodeB MML command LST DIESELGEN to query the configuration information about the diesel generator. Expected result: The value of Intelligent Control Flag is ENABLE.


Run the NodeB MML command RMV DIESELGEN (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board > PMU Property > Diesel Generator; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a dieselgen.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV PMU (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board > Dlete PMU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a PMU.

----End

Example //Activation procedure ADD PMU: CN=0, PTYPE=SC48200, MPN=0, LSDF=ENABLE; ADD DIESELGEN: CN=0, ICF=ENABLE, POWER=500; //Verification procedure DSP PMU: CN=0; LST DIESELGEN: CN=0; //Deactivation procedure RMV DIESELGEN: CN=0; RMV PMU: CN=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


225



58

Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The base station is connected to the Antenna Line Device (ALD) normally. – The BTS3902E cannot support this feature.

l


l


l

Others – The TMA is loaded with basic software for its normal operation.

Context The gain range supported by the Smart Tower-Mounted Amplifier (STMA) varies with models and vendors.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD ANTENNAPORT to set ALD Power Switch to ON.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan the Device Name, Vendor Code and Serial No..

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD TMA to add a TMA.

4.

Optional: If the device supports TMA gain, run the NodeB MML command MOD TMASUBUNIT to set the TMA gain. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226


58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) NOTE

It is recommended that you query the gain range supported by the STMA using the NodeB MML command DSP TMADEVICEDATA before adjusting the gain.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD RXBRANCH to modify the RX channel of an RRU.


Run the NodeB MML command DSP TMA to query the dynamic information about a TMA.



Run the NodeB MML command SET ALDPWRSW to set Power Supply Switch to ON(On).

2.

Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan Device Name, Vendor Code and Serial No..

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD ALD to add a TMA.

4.

Optional: If the device supports TMA gain, run the NodeB MML command SET TMAGAIN to set the TMA gain. NOTE

It is recommended that you query the gain range supported by the STMA using the NodeB MML command DSP TMAFUN before adjusting the gain.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command SET RXATTEN to set the attenuation of the RX channel.


Run the NodeB MML command LST TMAGAIN to query the TMA gain.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command LST RXATTEN to query the RX attenuation value.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End

Example l

NodeB V200R014 //Activation procedure MOD ANTENNAPORT: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, PN=R0A, PWRSWITCH=ON; SCN ALD: CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0; ADD TMA: DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="TMA1", CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0, SUBUNITNUM=1; MOD TMASUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1, CONNPN=R0A, MODE=NORMAL, GAIN=48; MOD RXBRANCH: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RXNO=0, ATTEN=0; //Verification procedure DSP TMA: DEVICENO=0;

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

NodeB V100R014 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227


58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) //Activation procedure SET ALDPWRSW: CN=0, SRN=60, CASE=REGULAR, AST=TMA12DB_ONLY_NON_AISG, PSP=R0A, PWRSW=ON; SCN ALD: CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A; ADD ALD: NAME="test", CASE=REGULAR, DEVTP=STMA, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A, SUBUNIT=1; SET TMAGAIN: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A, GAIN=48; SET RXATTEN: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RXNO=0, ATTEN=0; //Verification procedure LST TMAGAIN: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


228



59

Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The base station is connected to a remote electrical tilt (RET) antenna properly. – The remote control unit (RCU) is compatible with the RET antenna. The RCU is loaded with a configuration file designated for the RET antenna. – The RCU is loaded with the basic software. – This feature is supported by the all types of BTSs except for the BTS3600C and BTS3002E. – The BTS3902E cannot support this feature.

l


l


Context With this feature activated, users can remotely adjust the tilt of an RET antenna to optimize network performance. l

Calibrating the RET antenna may affect its coverage for a short period of time.

l

Calibrating an RET antenna takes up to 4 minutes.

l

NodeB V200R014

Procedure Activation Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Optional: If the antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command MOD ANTENNAPORT. In this step, set ALD Power Switch to ON. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229



2.

Optional: If the RET antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command MOD RETPORT. In this step, set ALD Power Switch to ON.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to obtain the ESN of an ALD.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD RET to add an RET antenna. NOTE

For vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command CLB RET to calibrate the RET antenna.

6.

Optional: Run the NodeB MML command MOD RETSUBUNIT to modify parameters concerning an RET antenna subunit.

7.

Optional: Run the NodeB MML command MOD RETDEVICEDATA to modify parameters concerning the attributes of an RET device.

8.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD RETTILT to modify the tilt of the RET antenna.


Optional: If the antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command DSP ANTENNAPORT to query the power switch status for the port. Expected result: ALD Actual Power Switch is ON.

2.

Optional: If the RET antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command DSP RETPORT to query the power switch status for the port. Expected result:ALD Actual Power Switch is ON.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP RET to query information about the RET antenna.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP RETSUBUNIT to query the dynamic information on an RET antenna subunit and an RET antenna's tilt.



Run the NodeB MML command SET ALDPWRSW. In this step, set Power Supply Switch to ON.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to obtain the ESN of an ALD.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD ALD to add an antenna device. NOTE

For vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command CLB ANT to calibrate the antenna device.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command SET ANTTILT to set the tilt of antenna device.


Run the NodeB MML command DSP ANTCON to query the power switch status for the antenna port. Expected result: Power Supply Switch Run Status is ON.

2. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command DSP ANTTILT to query the tilt of the RET antenna. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230



Expected result: Current Tilt (0.1 degree) is set to the specified value. Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End

Example l

NodeB V200R014 //Activation procedure MOD ANTENNAPORT: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, PN=R0A, PWRSWITCH=ON; SCN ALD:; ADD RET: DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="RET1", CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0, RETTYPE=SINGLE_RET, POLARTYPE=SINGLE, SCENARIO=REGULAR; CLB RET: OPMODE=SUBUNIT, DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1; MOD RETSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1; MOD RETDEVICEDATA: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1; MOD RETTILT: RETCLASS=RET, OPMODE=DEVICENO, DEVICENO=0, TILT=45; //Verification procedure DSP ANTENNAPORT:; DSP RET: DEVICENO=0; DSP RETSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1;

l

NodeB V100R014 //Activation procedure SET ALDPWRSW: CN=0, SRN=60, CASE=REGULAR, AST=RET_ONLY_COAXIAL, PSP=R0A, PWRSW=ON; SCN ALD:; ADD ALD: NAME="test", CASE=REGULAR, DEVTP=SINGLE_RET, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A; CLB ANT: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A, DEVTP=SINGLE_RET; SET ANTTILT: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A, DEVTP=SINGLE_RET, TILT=20; //Verification procedure DSP ANTCON:; DSP ANTTILT: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


231



60

Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-060003 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context l

The introduction of the feature enables UMTS900 and GSM900 to share the same antenna.

l

This feature helps to share an antenna in the same band and decreases the uplink division loss. After SASU900 is applied, there is no uplink division loss, and the gain is expected to be between 0 dB and 12 dB.

l

NodeB V200R014

Procedure Activation Procedure

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD ANTENNAPORT to set ALD Power Switch to ON.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan antenna devices and obtain the serial number of the SASU.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD SASU to configure the SASU and set the antenna DC power switch state of the SASU.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD SASUSUBUNIT to set the SASU working mode and the gain of the SASU. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

232



Verification Procedure

l

1.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP SASU to query the antenna DC power switch state of the SASU.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP SASUSUBUNIT to query the SASU working mode and the gain of the SASU.


Run the NodeB MML command SET ALDPWRSW to turn on the power supply switch of the SASU (Same band Antenna Sharing Unit) port.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan antenna devices and obtain the serial number of the SASU.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD ALD to configure the SASU.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUMODE to set the SASU working mode.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUGAIN to set the gain of the SASU.

6.

Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUDCSW to set the antenna DC power switch state of the SASU.

7.

Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUDCLD to set the DC load of the SASU.


Run the NodeB MML command LST ALD to query the configuration information about the SASU.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUMODE to query the SASU working mode.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUGAIN to query the gain of the SASU.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUDCSW to query the antenna DC power switch state of the SASU.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUDCLD to query the DC load of the SASU.

Deactivation Procedure This feature need not be deactivated. ----End

Example l

NodeB V200R014 //Activation procedure MOD ANTENNAPORT: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, PN=R0A, PWRSWITCH=ON, THRESHOLDTYPE=UER_SELF_DEFINE, UOTHD=1000, UCTHD=1050, OOTHD=1200, OCTHD=1150; SCN ALD: CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0; ADD SASU: DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0, DCSWITCH=UMTS; MOD SASUSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1, MODE=NORMAL, BSGAIN=12, UMTSGAIN=12, DCLOAD=20; //Verification procedure DSP SASU: DEVICENO=0; DSP SASUSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0;

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

NodeB V100R014 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233


60 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz) //Activation procedure SET ALDPWRSW: CN=0, SRN=60, CASE=REGULAR, AST=CUSTOM, PSP=R0A, PWRSW=ON, UOTHD=1000, UCTHD=1050, OOTHD=1200, OCTHD=1150; SCN ALD: CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A; ADD ALD: NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", CASE=REGULAR, DEVTP=SASU, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A; SET SASUMODE: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", MODE=BYPASS; SET SASUGAIN: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", CHTP=UMTS, GAIN=12; SET SASUDCSW: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", DCSWITCH=UMTS; SET SASUDCLD: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", DCLOAD=20; //Verification procedure LST ALD:; LST SASUMODE: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G"; LST SASUGAIN: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G"; LST SASUDCSW: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G"; LST SASUDCLD: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G";

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


234


61


Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010617 VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature depends on the UE capability and the IP multimedia subsystem (IMS).

l

Dependencies on Other Features – In the case of VoIP over HSPA, the following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA and WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA. – In the case of VoIP over HSPA+, the WRFD-010686 CPC-DTX/DRX feature has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE should support VoIP. – CN should support IP multimedia subsystem (IMS).

Context VoIP services can be carried on the DCH or HSPA. When VoIP services are carried on the DCH, a large quantity of resources are consumed. When VoIP services are carried on the HSPA, the system capacity significantly increases. When the Robust Header Compression (RoHC) technique is used, the data transmission efficiency of VoIP services is greatly improved.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


235



NOTE

l Data configurations on the BSC6900 and NodeB are required to activate the VoIP over HSPA/HSPA + feature. l To increase the transmission efficiency of VoIP services, it is recommended that the WRFD-011501 PDCP Header Compression (RoHC) feature be activated. l In the case of HSUPA, it is recommended that the non-scheduling transmission mode be used. In the case of HSDPA, it is recommended that the Enhanced Proportional Fair (EPF) algorithm be activated. The purpose is to reduce the delay of VoIP services.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VOIP channel type to HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH) and IMS channel type to HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH).

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable the RoHC algorithm. In this step, select the CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel Configuration Strategy Switch.

3.

Optional: If VoIP services need to use the WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI feature, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch. Go to Step 4.

4.

Optional: a.

If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:b (WBBPb) and Enhanced Base Band Card (EBBC) boards, it is recommended that 10 ms HSUPA TTI be set for VoIP services. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service.

b.

If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:d (WBBPd) and Enhanced Base Band Card REV:d (EBBCd) boards, either 10 ms or 2 ms HSUPA TTI can be set for VoIP services. a.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

To set 10 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches)


236



to select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service. b.

l

1)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the EDCH_TTI_2ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service.

2)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select the DRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

5.

Optional: To use the WRFD-01061404 HSUPA 2ms/10ms TTI HO feature, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

6.

To configure the EPF scheduling strategy, run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Scheduling Method to EPF (Enhanced PF).


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

To set 2 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, do as follows:

In the Navigation Tree pane on the BSC6900 LMT, click the Trace tab. In the displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On the unfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu Interface Trace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP and RRC_RB_RECFG as shown in Figure 61-1 to trace Uu interface signaling messages.


237




2.

Analyze the traced messages. – If data shown in Figure 61-2 is traced on the Uu interface, the UE is in the CELL_DCH state. – If data shown in Figure 61-3 is traced on the Uu interface, VoIP services are carried on HSPA/HSPA+. Figure 61-2 UE in CELL_DCH state

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


238



Figure 61-3 VoIP services carried on HSPA/HSPA+

3.

If VoIP services are carried on HSPA or HSPA+, trace the RRC_RB_SETUP or RRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface to check the type of carried TTI, as shown in Figure 61-4. Figure 61-4 Type of TTI carried in the message

l


The services admitted before deactivation of this feature are not affected. The services admitted after the deactivation will not use this feature.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH) check box under the parameter VOIP channel type, and select the DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH) check box under the parameter IMS channel type.

----End

Example //Activating VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+ //Operations on the BSC6900 side //Configuring VoIP/IMS to be carried on the E-DCH in the uplink and HSDSCH in the downlink SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: VoipChlType=HSPA, ImsChlType=HSPA;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


239



//Enabling the RoHC algorithm SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH-1; //Enabling the HSUPA 2 ms scheduling algorithm SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1; //Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 10 ms TTI SET UFRC: VoipHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_10ms; //Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 2 ms TTI SET UFRC: VoipHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_2ms; //Turning off the switch of saving CE resources SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH-1; //Enabling dynamic adjustment of TTI reconfiguration for CS voice services SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH-1; //Setting the EPF scheduling strategy on the NodeB side SET MACHSPARA: SM=EPF; /*Deactivating VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+*/ //Operations on the BSC6900 side SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: VoipChlType=DCH, ImsChlType=DCH;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


240


62


Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061703 Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: – WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package have been configured before this feature is activated for VoIP over HSPA. – WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package and WRFD-010686 CPC- DTX/DRX have been configured before this feature is activated for VoIP over HSPA+. – Other Prerequisites – The UE should support VoIP. – CN should support IP multimedia subsystem (IMS).

l


Context RAN10.0 supports VoIP over HSPA. To ensure the QoS of VoIP carried over HSPA, the nonscheduling method is used for the HSUPA scheduling, and the delay-sensitive (DS) scheduling algorithm is used for optimized HSDPA scheduling.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241



Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Scheduling Method to EPF(Enhanced PF). l


l

Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA to query the configuration result.


Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Scheduling Method to MAXCI(Max C/I), RR(Round Robin), or PF(PF).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0, SM=EPF; //Verification procedure LST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0; //Deactivation procedure SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0, SM=PF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


242


63


Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010618 IMS Signaling over HSPA.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – CN should support the signaling indication at Iu interface.

Context IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) signaling over HSPA can shorten the setup delay of IMS services like VoIP to save network resources for the operator.

Procedure l


l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set IMS channel type to HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH). In the Navigation Tree pane on the BSC6900 LMT, click the Trace tab. In the displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On the unfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu Interface Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

243



Trace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP and RRC_RB_RECFG as shown in Figure 63-1 to trace Uu interface signaling messages. Figure 63-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

2.

Analyze the traced messages. – If data shown in Figure 63-2 is traced on the Uu interface, the UE is in the CELL_DCH state. – If data shown in Figure 63-3 is traced on the Uu interface, VoIP services are carried on HSPA/HSPA+. Figure 63-2 UE in CELL_DCH state

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


244



Figure 63-3 VoIP services carried on HSPA/HSPA+

3.

If VoIP services are carried on HSPA or HSPA+, trace the RRC_RB_SETUP or RRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface to check the type of carried TTI, as shown in Figure 63-4. Figure 63-4 Type of TTI carried in the message

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set IMS channel type to DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH).

----End

Example //Activating IMS Signaling over HSPA. SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: ImsChlType=HSPA; //Deactivating IMS Signaling over HSPA. SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: ImsChlType=DCH;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


245


64


Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011501 PDCP Header Compression (RoHC).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The UE supports this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-010619 CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE should support the ROHC compression function.

Context PDCP header compression (RoHC) mainly applies to VoIP services to reduce IP overhead. This feature provides an IP header compression mechanism, which aims to save the bandwidth over the Uu interface, thereby reducing occupancy of radio resources.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel configuration strategy switch. Select the following parameters in the Compatibility Switch list box: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246



– CMP_RAB_5_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH – CMP_RAB_6_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH – CMP_RAB_7_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH – CMP_RAB_8_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH – CMP_RAB_9_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH l


On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Service, and double-click Uu Interface Trace to display the Uu Interface Trace window.

2.

Set Cell config, Uu Message Type, and Save File, and then click Submit.

3.

Enable the UE to establish VoIP services.

4.

Check the rb-InformationSetupList message in the traced data: – If this message contains the IE headerCompressionInfoList, as shown in Figure 64-1, this feature has been activated. – If this message does not contain the IE headerCompressionInfoList, this feature has not been activated. Figure 64-1

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel configuration strategy switch. Disable the following switches in the Compatibility Switch list box: – CMP_RAB_5_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH – CMP_RAB_6_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH – CMP_RAB_7_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


247



– CMP_RAB_8_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH – CMP_RAB_9_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH ----End

Example //Activating PDCP Header Compression (RoHC) SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH-1, CmpSwitch=CMP_RAB_5_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-1&CMP_RAB_6_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-1&CMP_RAB _7_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-1&CMP_RAB_8_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-1&CMP_RAB_9_CFG_ROHC_SWITC H-1; //Deactivating PDCP Header Compression (RoHC) SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH-0, CmpSwitch=CMP_RAB_5_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-0&CMP_RAB_6_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-0&CMP_RAB _7_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-0&CMP_RAB_8_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-0&CMP_RAB_9_CFG_ROHC_SWITC H-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


248


65


Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA + This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010619 CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: – WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA, and WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA, in the case of CS voice over HSPA. – WRFD-010686 CPC-DTX/DRX, in the case of CS voice over HSPA+.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE is of 3GPP Release 8 or higher and CS voice services are capable of being carried on HSPA/HSPA+.

Context The implementation of CS voice services over HSPA is introduced in 3GPP Release 8. In the case of CS voice services over HSPA, uplink CS voice packets are carried on the E-DCH and downlink CS voice packets are carried on the HS-DSCH. CS Voice over HSPA is intended for CS conversational AMR and AMR WB. CS streaming services are still carried on the DCH. The IMS for VoIP services is not required because the CS voice services over HSPA are carried on the CS domain of the CN.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


249



NOTE

l Data configurations on the BSC6900 and NodeB are required to activate the CS Voice over HSPA/ HSPA+. l In the case of HSUPA, it is recommended that the non-scheduling transmission mode be used, which does not need to be configured. In the case of HSDPA, it is recommended that the Enhanced Proportional Fair (EPF) algorithm be activated. The purpose is to reduce the delay of CS voice services.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to configure the uplink EDCH and downlink HSDSCH as the channels carrying HSPA CS services. In this step, select the HSPA(UL EDCH,DL HSDSCH) check box under the parameter CS voice channel type.

2.

Optional: If CS voice services need to be carried on the 2 ms Transmission Time Interval (TTI), run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch. Go to Step 3.

3.

Optional: Configure the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service. a.

If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:b (WBBPb) and Enhanced Base Band Card (EBBC) boards, it is recommended that 10 ms HSUPA TTI be set for VoIP services. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service.

b.

If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:d (WBBPd) and Enhanced Base Band Card REV:d (EBBCd) boards, either 10 ms or 2 ms HSUPA TTI can be set for VoIP services. a.

To set 10 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service.

b.

To set 2 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, do as follows: 1)

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15


250



Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the EDCH_TTI_2ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service. 2)

l

4.

Optional: If the dynamic adjustment of CS voice services over HSUPA from 2 ms TTI to 10 ms TTI is required, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

5.

To configure the EPF scheduling strategy, run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Scheduling Method to EPF (Enhanced PF).


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select the DRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

In the Navigation Tree pane on the BSC6900 LMT, click the Trace tab. In the displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On the unfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu Interface Trace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP and RRC_RB_RECFG as shown in Figure 65-1 to trace Uu interface signaling messages.


251




2.

Analyze the traced messages. – If data shown in Figure 65-2 is traced on the Uu interface, the UE is in CELL_DCH state. – If the data traced on the Uu interface is displayed, as shown in Figure 65-3, CS voice services are carried on HSPA/HSPA+. Figure 65-2 UE in CELL_DCH state

Figure 65-3 CS voice services carried on HSPA/HSPA+

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

If CS voice services are carried on HSPA or HSPA+, trace the RRC_RB_SETUP or RRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface to check the type of carried TTI, as shown in Figure 65-4.


252



Figure 65-4 Type of TTI carried in the message

l


The services admitted before deactivation of this feature are not affected. The services admitted after the deactivation will not use this feature.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH) check box under the parameter CS voice channel type.

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Operations on the BSC6900 side //Configuring CS voice services to be carried on the EDCH in the uplink and HS-DSCH in the downlink SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: CSVoiceChlType =HSPA; //Enabling the HSUPA 2 ms scheduling algorithm SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1; //Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 10 ms TTI SET UFRC: VoipHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_10ms; //Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 2 ms TTI SET UFRC: CSVoiceHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_2ms; //Turning off the switch of saving CE resources SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH-1; //Enabling dynamic adjustment of TTI reconfiguration for CS voice services SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH-1; //Setting the EPF scheduling strategy on the NodeB side SET MACHSPARA: SM=EPF; /*Deactivating CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+*/ //Operations on the BSC6900 side SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: CSVoiceChlType=DCH;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


253


66


Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010613 AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The CN supports associated specifications.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE supports associated specifications. – The AMR-WB function is enabled on the MSC and UMG. – The UE must have the corresponding support capability. – The CN must have the corresponding support capability.

Context This feature provides AMR-WB services, which help improve the QoS of voice services when resources are sufficient.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


254



CAUTION l If the license of the AMR-WB service is not activated on a RNC, ensure that AMR-WB is not enabled for this RNC on the CS core network side. Otherwise, both the AMR-NB services and emergency calls cannot be set up for the UE supporting AMR-WB. l If the license of the AMR-WB service is enabled on a RNC, ensure that AMR-WB is enabled for this RNC on the CS core network side. Otherwise, the AMR-WB service cannot be set up. l This feature is an integrated solution. To enable this feature, specific parameters must be configured based on the actual network conditions. Contact Huawei for technical support. l Do not configure relevant parameters without the assistance of Huawei technical personnel; otherwise, the network capacity and KPI values may be affected.

Procedure l

l

l


Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UAMRCWB to set the RNClevel speech rates for the gold, silver, and bronze users.

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLAMRCWB to set celllevel speech rates for the gold, silver, and bronze users.


Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UAMRCWB to query the AMRWB speech rates of the gold, silver, and bronze users.

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELLAMRCWB to query the AMR-WB speech rates for the gold, silver, and bronze users.

3.

On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor tab page, choose Monitor > Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring, and create a task of AMR Mode.

4.

Enable the AMR-WB function on UE1 and UE2, and enable the UEs to camp on the cell CELL_A11.

5.

Use UE1 to initiate a voice call to UE2. The call is successfully established and the voice is clear.

6.

Check the AMR mode on the LMT and verify that the downlink rate of UE1 reaches the specified value.

Deactivation Procedure Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to deactivate the license controlling this feature. NOTE

After deactivating the license controlling this feature, a WB-AMR cannot establish WB and NB services. If the WB rate for the RNC is disabled, a WB-AMR UE still can establish NB services.

----End

Example //Activating AMR-WB //Setting RNC-level parameters for the WB-AMR speech rate control (WBAMRC) algorithm

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


255



SET UAMRCWB: GoldMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, SilverMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, CopperMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K; //Setting cell-level parameters for the WB-AMRC algorithm ADD UCELLAMRCWB: CellId=111, GoldMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, SilverMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, CopperMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K; //Deactivating AMR-WB SET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, FUNCTIONSWITCH2=WBAMR-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


256



67

Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020701 AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – If this feature is to be applied to Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band (AMR WB), this feature depends on WRFD-010613 AMR-WB.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE supports TFC control processing.

Context This feature enables the adjustment of AMR/AMR-WB speech rates triggered by multiple factors. This ensures uninterrupted services, expands the service coverage area, and reduces the cell load.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CS Algorithm Switch to CS_AMRC_SWITCH.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > QOS Parameter Configuration > Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

257



RNC-Oriented QoS Enhancement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the QoS switches for AMR services. 3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUALITYMEAS (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > QOS Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented QoS quality measurement parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) or MOD UTYPRABQUALITYMEAS (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > QoS link Stability Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the parameters for RNC-level AMR and AMR-WB speech rate control based on link stability.

4.

Optional: Set the parameters for AMR and AMR-WB speech rate control. – Set the AMR speech rate control parameters. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > the connectionoriented algorithm parameters of an RNC; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT4 check box under parameter CORRM Algorithm Reserved Switch 0 to enable NB-AMRC. NOTE

Select the RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT4 check box to disable NB-AMRC when there are some NB-AMRC compatibility problems.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UAMRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > AMRC Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented AMRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the RNC-level AMR speech rate control parameters.

– Set the AMR-WB speech rate control parameters. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > the connectionoriented algorithm parameters of an RNC; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT3 check box under parameter CORRM Algorithm Reserved Switch 0 to enable WB-AMRC. NOTE

Select the RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT3 check box to disable WB-AMRC when there are some WB-AMRC compatibility problems.

b.

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UAMRCWB (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > AMRC Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented Wideband AMRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the RNC-level AMR-WB speech rate control parameters.


258



1.

On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor tab page. In the Monitor tab page, doubleclick UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. In the displayed dialog box, set Monitor Item to AMR Mode and specify IMSI.

2.

On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Trace tab page. In the Trace tab page, double-click UMTS Services > Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed dialog box, specify the RNC ID and the Cell ID, as shown in Figure 67-1.

Figure 67-1 Uu interface tracing

3.

Two test UEs supporting AMR WB are available and camp on the cell named CELL_A11. Use UE A to call UE B. The call is established.

4.

Check whether the following information elements (IEs) are contained in the traced RRC_MEAS_CTR message, as shown in Figure 67-2. – event6a – event6b

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


259



Figure 67-2 IEs contained in RRC_MEAS_CTRL

5.

Place UE B in the center of the cell, and move UE A towards or away from UE B. Check whether the AMR mode changes during performance monitoring, as shown in Figure 67-3. Figure 67-3 AMR mode

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC


260



Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CS Algorithm Switch to CS_AMRC_SWITCH. ----End

Example //Activating AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CsSwitch=CS_AMRC_SWITCH-1; SET UQOSACT: AMRQosPerform=YES, UlQosAmrAdjSwitch=YES, UlQosWAmrAdjSwitch=YES, DlQosAmrAdjSwitch=YES, DlQosWAmrAdjSwitch=YES; MOD UTYPRABQUALITYMEAS: RabIndex=1, UlThd6a1=1, UlThd6a2=5, UlThd6b1=1, UlThd6b2=5, StaBlkNum5A=500, Thd5a=280, HangBlockNum5a=512, ThdEa=2, ThdEb=2; //Setting the AMR speech rate control parameters SET UCORRMPARA: ReservedSwitch0=RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT4-0; SET UAMRC: GoldMaxMode=NBAMR_BITRATE_6.70K, SilverMaxMode=NBAMR_BITRATE_6.70K, CopperMaxMode=NBAMR_BITRATE_6.70K; //Setting the AMR-WB speech rate control parameters SET UCORRMPARA: ReservedSwitch0=RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT3-0; SET UAMRCWB: GoldMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, SilverMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, CopperMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K; //Deactivating AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CsSwitch=CS_AMRC_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


261



68

Configuring TFO/TrFO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011600 TFO/TrFO.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The CN node supports this feature. – The UE supports this feature.

Context This feature helps implement the functions of TFO/TrFO by identifying the Iu user plane (IuUP) V2 core network (CN) and processing related services. This feature can prevent speech quality deterioration caused by the interpretation between different coder and decoders (CODECs). The TrFO can also save the transmission resources. If the TFO function is enabled on the GSM side, the AMRC rate adjustment function must enabled together with this feature on the UMTS side to enable communications between GSM and UMTS users to support the TFO function. To fully utilize this function, it is good practice to enable the AMRC rate adjustment function on both UMTS users in a conversation.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

262



Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the IuUP V2 switch to support TFO/TrFO. Select CS_IUUP_V2_SUPPORT_SWITCH from the CS Algorithm Switch drop-down list. l

l


Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT.

2.

Enable UE1 to call UE2. UE2 answers and starts a conversation with UE1. When UE1 moves to the cell edge, you can view the RRC TFC CTRL message indicating rate reduction sent from RNC to UE1 over the Uu interface. This indicates that this feature is activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn off the IuUP switch. Deselect CS_IUUP_V2_SUPPORT_SWITCH from the CS Algorithm Switch drop-down list.

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CsSwitch=CS_IUUP_V2_SUPPORT_SWITCH-1; //Deactivation procedure SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CsSwitch=CS_IUUP_V2_SUPPORT_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


263



69

Configuring AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140201 AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature has the following impact on the NodeB hardware: – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULPd board. – The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board. – The 3900 series base station must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board. – Currently, for baseband boards, only the EULPd, EBBCd, WBBPd and WBBPf boards support the PLVA feature. When the EULPd, EBBCd, WBBPd or WBBPf board is inserted together with the other types of baseband boards, AMR services cannot obtain the PLVA gain if the AMR services are set up on the other types of baseband boards.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – None

l


Procedure l

Activation Procedure After the license is activated, this feature has been activated.

l

Verification Procedure The VS.PLVA.User counter informs operators of the number of UEs using this feature. Verify that the value of the counter VS.PLVA.User is not 0. A non-zero value indicates that this feature takes effect.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


264


l


Deactivation Procedure None

----End

Example None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


265



70

Configuring Cell Broadcast Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011000 Cell Broadcast Service.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The UE is capable of receiving cell broadcast messages.

Context This feature supports the standard cell broadcast procedure specified in the related protocol and therefore helps the cell broadcast center (CBC) implement cell broadcast services.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure External CBCs are deployed in an ATM or IP network. The ATM network is used as an example in this document.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV URNCCBCPUID (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > ATM Transport > RNC Broadcast Message Main CPUID; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable the configuration of the built-in CBC.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCBPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Iu-BC Interface Configuration > RNC Cell Broadcast Message Para; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn off CB Switch. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

266



3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > ATM Transport > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the device IP address of the interface board.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPOAPVC (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > ATM Transport > IPoA PVC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an Internet Protocol over ATM (IPoA) permanent virtual circuit (PVC). NOTE

The IP address is the device IP address (DEVIP) of the interface board. The peer IP address is the IP address for interconnection between serving GPRS support node (SGSN) and RNC. The VPI and VCI must be the same as those configured on the SGSN. To query the specific settings, run the LST IPOA command on the SGSN maintenance terminal.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > ATM Transport > IP Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a route from the interface board to the CBC. The route passes the IP address of the SGSN.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCBSADDR (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > ATM Transport > CBS Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the CBS socket IP address.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCTCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > CTCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the common traffic channel (CTCH) to a cell. NOTE

To set up a CTCH on FACH5, run the following commands: DEA ADD ADD ACT

USCCPCH: CellId=0, PhyChId=8; UFACHLOCH: CellId=0, TrChId=5; USCCPCHTFC: CellId=0, PhyChId=8, CTFC=7; USCCPCH: CellId=0, PhyChId=8;

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLCBSDRX (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Broadcast Service > Cell CBS DRX Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to add the CBS discontinuous reception (DRX) scheduling parameter.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLCBSSAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Broadcast Service > Cell CBS SAC; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a CBS area.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLCBS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Broadcast Service > Cell CBS. Set Cell CBS state to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the CBS function of the cell. l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Check whether the CBS function works properly. a.

Ping the CBS IP address of the RNC on the CBC. If the ping operation is successful, it indicates that the data transmission from CBC to RNC is normal.

b.

Ping the CBC IP address on the RNC. The source IP address is the device IP address, that is, the IP address of the CBS. PING IP: SRN=0, SN=16, Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

267



SIPADDR="12.12.12.12", DESTIP="11.11.11.11"; If the ping operation is successful, it indicates that the data transmission from RNC to CBC is normal. If the ping operation fails, check the configuration. c.

Check whether the CBS socket is connected properly. To do this, trace messages over the Iu interface and view whether the SABP_LOAD_QUERY is sent to the RNC, as shown in Figure 70-1.

Figure 70-1 Viewing the SABP_LOAD_QUERY message

d.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

As shown in Figure 70-2, the 0SABP_LOAD_QUERY_CMP message returned from the RNC contains the information element (IE) availablebandwidth.


268



Figure 70-2 Viewing the SABP_LOAD_QUERY_CMP message

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether the CBS function works, as shown in Figure 70-3. Figure 70-3 Viewing the CBS function

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Check the broadcast messages sent. a.

Use the MTC tool to send messages on the CBC. It is recommended that the time interval for sending messages be within 10s and the number of messages sent be more than two (0 indicates infinity).

b.

Trace messages on the Iu interface to check whether the SABP_WRITE_REPLACE message is sent to the RNC, as shown in Figure 70-4.


269



Figure 70-4 Viewing the SABP_WRITE_REPLACE message

c.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

As shown in Figure 70-5, the SABP_WRITE_REPLACE_CMP message returned from the RNC contains a broadcast message with the IE number-ofbroadcasts-completed.


270



Figure 70-5 Viewing the SABP_WRITE_REPLACE_CMP message

d.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Trace messages on the Uu interface to check whether the UU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message beginning with 01 is sent from the RNC, as shown in Figure 70-6.


271



Figure 70-6 Viewing the UU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Stop the RNC from sending broadcast messages. a.

On the CBC, select the message being sent and click delete.

b.

Trace messages on the Iu interface to check whether the SABP_KILL message is sent to the RNC, as shown in Figure 70-7.


272



Figure 70-7 Viewing the SAB_KILL message

c.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Trace messages on the Iu interface, as shown in Figure 70-8. The SABP_KILL_CMP message returned from the RNC contains the IE numberof-broadcast-completed.


273



Figure 70-8 Viewing the SABP_KILL_CMP message

d. l

It can be viewed from the Uu interface trace data that the RNC stops sending the UU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message beginning with 01.


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCBSADDR (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > ATM Transport > CBS Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable Cell Broadcast Service.

----End

Example //Activating Cell Broadcast Service //Configuring the license controlling Cell Broadcast Service SET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, CNOPERATORINDEX=1, FUNCTIONSWITCH1=CBS-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


274



//Removing the configuration of the built-in CBC RMV URNCCBCPUID: CnOpIndex=1; //Disabling the inner CBS function for the RNC SET URNCCBPARA: CBSwitch=OFF; //Configuring the device IP address of the interface board ADD DEVIP: SRN=5, SN=18, DEVTYPE=IPOA_CLIENT_IP, IPADDR="12.12.12.12", MASK="255.255.255.0"; //Configuring the IPoA PVC ADD IPOAPVC: IPADDR="12.12.12.12", PEERIPADDR="12.12.12.120", CARRYT=NCOPT, CARRYNCOPTN=0, CARRYVPI=255, CARRYVCI=32, TXTRFX=103, RXTRFX=103, PEERT=OTHER; //Configuring a route from the interface board to CBC ADD IPRT: SRN=5, SN=18, DSTIP="11.11.11.12", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", NEXTHOP="12.12.12.120", PRIORITY=HIGH, REMARK="SGSN_CBS"; //Configuring the CBS socket IP address ADD UCBSADDR: SRN=5, SN=2, CnOpIndex=1, RNCIPADDR="12.12.12.12", CBCIPADDR="11.11.11.11", CBCMASK="255.255.255.0"; //Configuring the CTCH for a cell ADD UCTCH: CellId=0, FachId=4; //Configuring the CBS DRX scheduling parameter ADD UCELLCBSDRX: CellId=0; //Configuring a CBS area ADD UCELLCBSSAC: CellId=0, CnOpIndex=1, CBSSAC=0, MsgInd=OFF; //Enabling the cell-level CBS ACT UCELLCBS: CellId=0;

//Deactivating Cell Broadcast Service //Removing the CBS socket IP address RMV UCBSADDR: CnOpIndex=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


275


71


Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011001 Simplified Cell Broadcast.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – OnlyBSC6900 supports this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature and the feature WRFD-011000 Cell Broadcast Service cannot be used together.

l


l

Others – The UE is capable of receiving cell broadcast messages.

Context This feature is used to send simple cell broadcast messages by running a BSC6900 MML command on the M2000 or BSC6900 LMT when the cell broadcast center (CBC) is not configured.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCBSADDR (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > IP Transport > CBS Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the IP address of the external CBC.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCCBCPUID (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > IP Transport > RNC Broadcast Message Main CPUID; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the SPU subsystem of the built-in CBC.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCBPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Iu-BC Interface Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

276



Configuration > RNC Cell Broadcast Message Para; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CB Switch to ON(ON) to enable the built-in CBC for the RNC.

l

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCTCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > CTCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the common traffic channel (CTCH) to a cell.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLCBSDRX (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Broadcast Service > Cell CBS DRX Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to add the CBS discontinuous reception (DRX) scheduling parameter.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLCBSSAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Broadcast Service > Cell CBS SAC; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a CBS area and a broadcast message.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLCBS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Broadcast Service > Cell CBS. Set Cell CBS state to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the CBS function for a cell.


Check whether the CBS function works properly. After activating the CBS function on the RNC, if the UU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message beginning with 01 is traced on the Uu interface, as shown in Figure 71-1, the CBS function works properly. Figure 71-1 UU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLCBS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Broadcast Service > Cell CBS. Set Cell CBS state to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable the CBS function for a cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCBPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Iu-BC Interface Configuration > RNC Cell Broadcast Message Para; CME batch modification Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

277



center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CB Switch to OFF(OFF) to turn off the CBS switch for the BSC6900. ----End

Example //Activating Simplified Cell Broadcast //Enabling the license controlling Simplified Cell Broadcast SET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, CNOPERATORINDEX=1, FUNCTIONSWITCH4=SIMPLE_CELL_BORADCAST-1; //Removing the IP address of an external CBS RMV UCBSADDR: CnOpIndex=1; //Configuring the SPU subsystem of the built-in CBC ADD URNCCBCPUID: CnOpIndex=1, SRN=0, SN=2, SSN=1; //Enabling the built-in CBC for the RNC SET URNCCBPARA: CBSwitch=ON, RepeatPeriod=10, RepeatNum=0; //Configuring the CTCH for a cell ADD UCTCH: CellId=0, FachId=4; //Configuring the CBS DRX scheduling parameter ADD UCELLCBSDRX: CellId=0; //Configuring a CBS area and a broadcast message ADD UCELLCBSSAC: CellId=0, CnOpIndex=1, CBSSAC=0, MsgInd=ON, MsgContent="welcome! it is cell 0"; //Enabling the CBS function for a cell ACT UCELLCBS: CellId=0;

//Verifying Simplified Cell Broadcast //Modifying the CBS configuration for a cell MOD UCELLCBSSAC: CellId=0, CnOpIndex=1, CBSSAC=0, MsgInd=ON, MsgContent="HELLO,SIMPLE CBS"; //Activating the CBS function for a cell ACT UCELLCBS: CellId=0;

//Deactivating Simplified Cell Broadcast //Disabling the CBS function for a cell DEA UCELLCBS: CellId=0; //Disabling the CBS function for the BSC6900 SET URNCCBPARA: CBSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


278



72

Configuring Warning of Disaster

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020127 Warning of Disaster.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-011001 Simplified Cell Broadcast.

l


Context With this feature, the Cell Broadcast Center (CBC) incorporated into the RNC informs all users in specified cells of the disaster information through message broadcasting in the shortest time, therefore minimizing the impact of the disaster. NOTE

Activating this feature requires operations on only the RNC.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


For detailed operations for activating license, see Activating the BSC6900 License.

2.

(Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCBSADDR (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > IP Transport > CBS Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the CBS configuration, if the operator configured the CBS function using external CBC.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCBPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Iu-BC Interface Configuration > RNC Cell Broadcast Message Para; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set CB switch and CTCH Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

279



switch of cell broadcast to ON. By doing this, the system can configure the disaster warning message and send the message to UEs. 4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCCBCPUID (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > IP Transport > RNC Broadcast Message Main CPUID; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the SPU subsystem for the built-in CBC.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCBSAREA (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Radio Basic Data Configuration > Simple Cell Broadcast Area; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the broadcast area. The broadcast area can be a LAC, a cell, or all cells under the RNC.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCBSMSG (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Radio Basic Data Configuration > Simplified CBS Message; CME batch modification center: not supported) or MOD UCBSMSG (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Radio Basic Data Configuration > Simplified CBS Message; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the broadcast message. NOTE

l When disasters (such as earthquakes, tsunamis, and hurricanes) occur, Set Geography Scope to CellImmediate, and set CBS Message Priority to High so that users can receive the message in time. l It is recommended to set Number of CBS Messages to a value greater than 3 to ensure that all UEs can receive the message.

l


Use a test UE to camp on the cell, and then activate the feature. Check whether the test UE can receive the disaster warning message. NOTE

A UE can receive this message only after it is enabled with the 3G broadcast message receiving function.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCBPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Iu-BC Interface Configuration > RNC Cell Broadcast Message Para; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set CTCH switch of cell broadcast to OFF.

----End

Example //Activating warning of disaster (The following procedure uses a cell as an example.) RMV UCBSADDR: CnOpIndex=0; SET URNCCBPARA: CBSwitch=ON, CTCHSwitch =ON; ADD URNCCBCPUID: CnOpIndex=1, SRN=0, SN=2, SSN=1; ADD UCBSAREA: AreaId=1, CnOpIndex=1, AreaType=CELL, CellId=22; ADD UCBSMSG: MsgIndex=0, MsgTypeId=1, GeographicalScope=CellImmediate, Priority=High, RepetPeriod=10, NumOfBrdcstReq=5, CodeType=English, AreaID=1, EmergencyType=Other, CBSMsg="Hurricane"; //Deactivating warning of disaster SET URNCCBPARA: CTCHSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


280



73

Configuring MBMS Introduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The existing PS domain functional entities (GGSN, SGSN, UTRAN, and UE) support the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) bearer service. – A new functional entity, that is, the broadcast multicast service centre (BM-SC) is added to provide a set of functions for the MBMS services. – The UE supports MBMS functions.

Context The MBMS feature is an important feature specified by 3GPP Release 6. When MBMS is enabled, point-to-multipoint multimedia services can be forwarded from one entity to multiple entities over a common channel. In this way, the resources can be shared.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

281



Configuration > MBMS Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set MBMS Control Switch to ON(ON). 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UMBMSSA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS SA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the MBMS service area according to the network plan.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLMBMSSA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > Relation Between Cell and SA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the mapping between the cell and the MBMS service area (SA) according to the network plan.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USCCPCHBASIC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > SCCPCH Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the SCCPCH according to the network plan.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UFACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > FACH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the FACH according to the network plan.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UFACHDYNTFS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > Dynamic TFS of FACH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the transport format set (TFS) of an FACH according to the network plan.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UFACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > FACH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a logical channel mapped to an FACH according to the network plan.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USCCPCHTFC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > TFC of SCCPCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the Calculated Transport Format Combination (CTFC) of an SCCPCH according to the network plan.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLMCCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > Configuration of the MCCH And MICH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the MCCH and the MICH for the cell according to the network plan.

10. Configure the cell-level MBMS parameters according to the network plan. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT USCCPCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > SCCPCH Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the configuration information of an SCCPCH.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLMBMS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > Cell MBMS Status. Set Cell MBMS state to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the MBMS configuration data for the cell.

11. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMTCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > SemiIssue 05 (2012-12-31)


282



Static Parameter of TF for FACH Carrying MTCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the MBMS service type and rate according to the network plan. 12. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in RNC Level; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the RNC-level parameters for the MBMS algorithm according to the network plan. l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE to query the MBMS status in the cell.

2.

Conduct a test to check whether the MBMS UE can receive the corresponding MBMS data successfully.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set MBMS Control Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example //Activation MBMS Introduction Package //Enabling the MBMS control switch SET UMBMSSWITCH: MbmsSwitch=ON; //Adding the MBMS service area ADD UMBMSSA: CnOpIndex=0, MbmsSaId=1; //Adding the mapping between the cell and the MBMS service area (SA) ADD UCELLMBMSSA: CellId=2, CnOpIndex=0, MbmsSaId=1; //Adding the SCCPCH ADD USCCPCHBASIC: CellId=2, PhyChId=11, ScrambCode=0, SlotFormat=D8, TFCIpresence=NOT_EXISTS, MbmsChInd=MCCH; //Adding the FACH ADD UFACH: CellId=2, PhyChId=11, TrChId=10, RateMatchingAttr=220, ToAWS=20, ToAWE=10, MaxFachPower=-10, MAXCMCHPI=D15, MINCMCHPI=D14, SIGRBIND=TRUE, ChCodingType=CONVOLUTIONAL; //Adding the transport format set (TFS) of an FACH ADD UFACHDYNTFS: CellId=2, TrChId=10, RLCSize=168, TFsNumber=D3, TbNumber1=0, TbNumber2=1, TbNumber3=2; //Adding a logical channel mapped to an FACH ADD UFACHLOCH: CellId=2, TrChId=10; //Adding the Calculated Transport Format Combination (CTFC) of an SCCPCH ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=2, PhyChId=11, CTFC=0;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=2, PhyChId=11, CTFC=1; //Adding the MCCH and the MICH for the cell ADD UCELLMCCH: CellId=2, MichId=19, PhyChIdforMcch=11, FachIdforMcch=10; //Activating the configuration information of an SCCPCH ACT USCCPCH: CellId=2, PhyChId=11; //Activating the MBMS configuration data for the cell ACT UCELLMBMS: CellId=100; //Setting the MBMS service type and rate SET UMTCH: ServiceType=STREAMING, ServiceBitRate=D128; //Setting the RNC-level parameters for the MBMS algorithm SET URNCMBMSPARA: MbmsTransMode=DYNAMIC;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


283



//Deactivation MBMS Introduction Package SET UMBMSSWITCH: MbmsSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


284


74


Configuring MBMS Admission Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061602 MBMS Admission Control.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context The admission criteria of Iub resources and credit resources for the Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service point-to-point/point-to-multipoint resource block (MBMS PtP/PtM RB) requests is the same as that for other services. The cell power resources are preferentially allocated to high-priority MBMS broadcasting services. Only the activation procedure of the resource admission on the Uu interface is provided in this section.

Procedure l


l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select MBMS_UU_ADCTRL(MBMS UU Load Admission Control Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm switch dropdown list to enable the MBMS admission control on the Uu interface and select a proper admission algorithm according to the network plan.


285



1.

2. l

Enable the MBMS admission algorithm, and then limit cell resources to ensure that the admission resources are insufficient. In this manner, the admission fails. An example is given as follows: a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URESERVEOVSF to reserve the downlink Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF) for the cell so that only 64 kbit/s services are supported in the cell.

b.

Originate a 256 kbit/s service. Check the messages traced on the Iu interface on the RNC side, which are the MBMS SESSION START message from the core network (CN) to the RNC and the MBMS SESSION START RSPPONSE message from the RNC to the CN.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE. If the parameter Reason of service setup failure is Access Failure, the MBMS admission algorithm takes effect.

Disable the MBMS admission algorithm, and the services are successfully admitted.


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect MBMS_UU_ADCTRL(MBMS UU Load Admission Control Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm switch dropdown list to disable the MBMS admission algorithm.

----End

Example //Activating MBMS Admission Control MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=MBMS_UU_ADCTRL-1, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST; //Verifying MBMS Admission Control ADD URESERVEOVSF: CellId=1, DLOVSFSF=SF32, DLCODENO=20; DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE: CellId=1; //Deactivating MBMS Admission Control MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=MBMS_UU_ADCTRL-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


286



75

Configuring MBMS Load Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061603 MBMS Load Control.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context The feature helps to lighten the cell load when the cell enters the congestion state and ensures the system stability. When the cell is in the basic congestion state and downlink congestion is detected, the power consumed by MBMS services is reduced.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm) and DL_UU_OLC(Downlink UU OLC Algorithm) from the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-down list to enable downlink load reshuffling and downlink overload congestion control on the Uu interface.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

287



Parameters in Batches) to set the congestion-relief action triggered by Load Reshuffling (LDR). 3.

l

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLOLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Overload Congestion Control Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the sequence and number of MBMS services to be released for Overload Control (OLC).


Originate an MBMS service on the BSC6900, and ensure that service data is sent.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM. Based on the current load of the cell, set the triggering thresholds for LDR and OLC. Ensure that the corresponding load control actions can be triggered.

3.

When the cell load exceeds the LDR threshold, the power of MBMS services is reduced in the cell. Check the maxFACH Power information element in the COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION REQUEST message on the Iub interface.

4.

When the cell load exceeds the OLC threshold, MBMS services are released.


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm) and DL_UU_OLC(Downlink UU OLC Algorithm) from the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-down list to disable downlink load reshuffling and downlink overload congestion control on the Uu interface.

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to remove the MBMS service power reduction from the LDR-triggered actions.

----End

Example //Activating MBMS Load Control //Enabling downlink load reshuffling and downlink overload congestion control on the Uu interface MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch= DL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_OLC-1; //Setting the first LDR-triggered action to power reduction of MBMS services MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=1, DlLdrFirstAction=MBMSDECPOWER; //Enabling the triggered OLC to release MBMS services on a one-by-one basis ADD UCELLOLC: CellId=1, SeqOfUserRel=MBMS_REL, MbmsOlcRelNum=1; //Verifying MBMS Load Control MOD UCELLLDM: CellId=1, DlLdrTrigThd=2, DlLdrRelThd=1, DlOlcTrigThd=2, DlOlcRelThd=1; //Deactivating MBMS Load Control MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch= DL_UU_LDR-0&DL_UU_OLC-0; MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=1, DlLdrFirstAction=NoAct;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


288


76


Configuring MBMS Transport Resource Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061605 MBMS Transport Resource Management.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The features WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context For the same MBMS session in the same Node B, a separate Iub transport bearer is established for each cell. An example is shown in the following figure assuming 3 cells in one Node B. Three copies of exact same MBMS session data are sent through the Iub from the CRNC to the Node B.

For details, see the Optional Feature Description of Huawei UMTS.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


289



Procedure l

Activation Procedure The feature does not need to be activated.

l


Use UEs to require an MBMS service in the two cells under the same NodeB.

2.

Check the signaling traced on the Iub interface. You may find two pairs of COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST/COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP RESPONSE messages. – The BROADCAST REFERENCE IEs in the two COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST messages are different. This indicates that the messages are from different Iub interfaces. – Both the COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP RESPONSE messages contain the TLA and Binding ID.

l


----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


290



77

Configuring Streaming Service on MBMS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061606 Streaming Service on MBMS.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package.

l


Context This feature enables the MBMS service to be carried on the PS streaming class, therefore ensuring QoS.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure This feature depends on MBMS basic functions. This feature can be activated only after MBMS basic functions are enabled. For details, see the section "Configuring MBMS Introduction Package". The parameters of streaming services have been configured by the RNC by default. This feature is used as long as the CN sends MBMS services in the form of PS streaming. No activation operation is needed.

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


291


l


1.

Use an MBMS-supportive UE to request an MBMS mobile television service and receive the corresponding data.

2.

The UE receives the data of the MBMS mobile television service successfully.

Deactivation Procedure This feature is used as long as MBMS is configured. There is no need to deactivate this feature.

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


292


78

78 Configuring 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS

Configuring 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061608 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature is related to four MBMS channel rates: 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, and 128 kbit/ s.

Procedure l


l

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE to query the MBMS status in the cell and the bandwidth of the MBMS service.

2.

Use an MBMS-supportive UE to request an MBMS service, the UE can receive the corresponding data successfully.


293


78 Configuring 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS

This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


294



79

Configuring MBMS Phase 2

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – UE should support the corresponding enhanced MBMS functions.

Context This feature supports the enhanced MBMS (PTP/PTM) to save cell resources. The MBMS phase 2 includes following features: l

WRFD-01066001 MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode

l

WRFD-01066002 MBMS P2P over HSDPA

l

WRFD-01066003 MBMS Admission Enhancement

l

WRFD-01066004 Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users

l


Procedure For details about activation procedures, see the following sections: – 80 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode – 81 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA – 82 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


295



– 83 Configuring Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users ----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


296


80


Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066001 MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context Compared with broadcast mode, it is a more efficient way to deploy the point-to-multipoint services, such as mobile TV. This feature can be activated only after MBMS basic functions are enabled. For details, see the section "Configuring MBMS Introduction Package". The CN specifies whether broadcast mode or enhanced broadcast mode is used for MBMS services. If the CN specifies the enhanced broadcast mode and the license for this mode is activated, then, enhanced broadcast mode is used. The MBMS transmission mode should be configured on the RNC. The MBMS transmission mode can be configured at the SA level, RNC level, or cell level. The cell level has the highest priority, while the RNC level has the lowest priority. That is, if the MBMS transmission mode is configured at both the RNC level and the cell level, the cell level configuration takes effect in the corresponding cell. The detailed process is as follows:

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


297



Procedure l

l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in RNC Level; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the transmission mode at the RNC level through the Mbms Transfer Mode parameter.

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USAMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in SA Level; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the transmission mode at the SA level through the Mbms Transfer Mode parameter.

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in Cell Level; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the transmission mode at the cell level through the Mbms Transfer Mode parameter.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in RNC Level; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the transfer threshold between PtP and PtM mode through the Counting Threshold and the Ptp To Ptm Offset parameters.


Use an MBMS-supportive UE to request an MBMS service and receive the corresponding data.

2.

Check MBMS SESSION START message traced on the Iu interface at the RNC. If the value of the MBMS Bearer Service Type IE is broadcast and the value of MBMS Counting Information IE is counting, the enhanced broadcast mode is configured.

3.

Use one or two MBMS-supportive UEs to receive the MBMS service, you can find that the DCH or HS-DSCH is used. Use three MBMS-supportive UEs to receive the MBMS service, you can find that the FACH is used.

Deactivation Procedure To deactivate this feature, switch off the license item of the feature.

----End

Example //Activating MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode SET URNCMBMSPARA: MbmsTransMode= DYNAMIC; ADD USAMBMSPARA: CnOpIndex=0, MbmsSaId=0, MbmsTransMode= DYNAMIC; ADD UCELLMBMSPARA: CellId=100, MbmsTransMode= DYNAMIC; SET URNCMBMSPARA: NCountingThd=2, NPtpToPtmOffset=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


298


81


Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066002 MBMS P2P over HSDPA.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The features WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package and WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context This feature enables Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service point-to-point (MBMS P2P) services to be carried on the HS-DSCH, saving cell resources.

Procedure l

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in RNC Level; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Mbms Transfer Mode to DYNAMIC.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Service Mapping Strategy Switch to MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH.


299


l


1.

Set up a 256 kbit/s MBMS streaming service.

2.

Use an MBMS-capable UE to request the MBMS service and receive the corresponding data.

Deactivation Procedure To deactivate this feature, switch off the license item of the feature.

----End

Example //Activating MBMS P2P over HSDPA SET URNCMBMSPARA: MbmsTransMode= DYNAMIC; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


300



82

Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066003 MBMS Admission Enhancement.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature provides different admission policies for Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service point-to-multipoint (MBMS PTM) services and MBMS point-to-point (MBMS PTP) services. MBMS PTP services use the same admission, preemption, and congestion criteria with normal services except MBMS HSDPA services. MBMS PTM services should be treated differently so that they do not occupy excessive resources to block non-MBMS connection admission. In addition, some resources should be reserved for MBMS PTM services.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUEUEPREEMPT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Queue Preempt Parameters Configuration > RNC Oriented Queue Preempt Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Mbms PreemptAlgoSwitch and Preempt algorithm switch to ON. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

301



2.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST URNCMBMSPARA to check the configuration.

2.

Enable a low-priority user to access the cell.

3.

Enable the admission algorithm, and then limit cell resources so that the admission resources in the cell are insufficient. In this case, the MBMS services successfully preempt common services. An example is given as follows:

4.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in RNC Level; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the preemption parameters for PTM services. The actual preemption capabilities are determined by both the settings of these parameters and the parameter settings sent by the CN. The parameter settings of PTP services are sent by the CN and do not need to be set manually.

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URESERVEOVSF to reserve the downlink OVSF for the cell so that only 64 kbit/s services are supported in the cell.

b.

Originate a 256 kbit/s service. Check the messages traced on the Iu interface on the RNC side, which are the MBMS SESSION START message from the CN to the RNC and the MBMS SESSION START RSPPONSE message from the RNC to the CN.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE. If the parameter Current State of Service Session is Setuping, the user connection is released due to preemption.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUEUEPREEMPT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Queue Preempt Parameters Configuration > RNC Oriented Queue Preempt Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Mbms PreemptAlgoSwitch to OFF.

----End

Example //Activating MBMS Admission Enhancement SET UQUEUEPREEMPT: PreemptAlgoSwitch=ON, MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch=ON; SET URNCMBMSPARA: MbmsTransMode=PTM, PtmPreemptSwitch=ON, PtmStrmPasiSwitch=ON, PtmNullStrmPasiSwitch=ON; //Verifying MBMS Admission Enhancement ADD URESERVEOVSF: CellId=1, DLOVSFSF=SF32, DLCODENO=20; DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE: CellId=1; //Deactivating MBMS Admission Enhancement SET UQUEUEPREEMPT: MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


302


83 Configuring Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users

83

Configuring Inter-Frequency

Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066004 Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package, WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2.

l


Context This feature enables the filtering and handover of a target cell based on the MBMS channel resources in the inter-frequency neighboring cells, therefore ensuring the continuity of the MBMS service.

Procedure l


l

Verification Procedure This feature does not need to be verified.

l


----End Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


303



84

Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010627 FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context This feature enables the FACHs that carry MBMS services to share transport resources over the Iub interface, thereby saving the Iub bandwidth.

Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MBMS Iub Sharing Switch to ON (ON).


Before turning on the transmission sharing switch, activate the MBMS services in two cells served by the same NodeB. View the tracing messages over the Iub interface. You may find two pairs of COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST/COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP RESPONSE messages, where the BROADCAST REFERENCE IEs in the two COMMON TRANSPORT

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


304



CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST messages are different. This indicates that the messages are transmitted over different Iub interfaces. 2.

l

Turn on the transmission sharing switch, activate the MBMS services in two cells served by the same NodeB, and view the tracing messages over the Iub interface. You may find two pairs of COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST/COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP RESPONSE messages, where the BROADCAST REFERENCE IEs in the two COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST messages are the same. This indicates that the messages are transmitted over the same Iub interface. This feature has been activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MBMS Iub Sharing Switch to OFF (OFF).

----End

Example //Activating FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS SET UMBMSSWITCH: MbmsSwitch=ON, MbmsIubSharingSwitch=ON; //Deactivating FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS SET UMBMSSWITCH: MbmsSwitch=ON, MbmsIubSharingSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


305


85 Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)

85

Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency

Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010626 MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion).

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others Prerequisites – UEs support this feature.

Context Frequency Layer Convergence (FLC) denotes the process where the UTRAN requests UEs to preferentially reselect to the frequency layer on which the MBMS service is intended to be transmitted. Frequency Layer Dispersion (FLD) denotes the process where the UTRAN redistributes UEs across frequencies. FLC helps users obtain the information about an MBMS service in real time. FLD reduces cell load after the MBMS service is finished. FLD is activated automatically after FLC takes effect, and is deactivated automatically after FLC is disabled. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


306



Procedure l


Two overlapping cells covered by multiple carriers must be enabled with MBMS. The cell using frequency F1 is in the SA of MBMS, and other cells using other frequencies are not in the SA of MBMS.

l

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLMCCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > Configuration of the MCCH And MICH; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flc Algo Switch to ON(ON).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the HO_ALGO_MBMS_FLC_SWITCH check box under the parameter HandOver Switch.


Configure an MCCH in an R99 cell and set an MBMS cell to the neighboring cell of the R99 cell.

2.

Make UEs camp on the R99 cell, activate the MBMS service, and accept the MBMS service. If UEs are reselected to the MBMS cell successfully and transmit and receive data normally, FLC is activated.

3.

Move UEs to the MBMS cell edge and terminate the MBMS service. If some UEs are reselected to the R99 cell, FLD is activated.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLMCCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > Configuration of the MCCH And MICH; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flc Algo Switch to OFF(OFF).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the HO_ALGO_MBMS_FLC_SWITCH check box under the parameter HandOver Switch.

----End

Example //Activating MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion) MOD UCELLMCCH: CellId=1, FlcAlgoSwitch=ON; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_MBMS_FLC_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


307



MOD UCELLMCCH: CellId=1, FlcAlgoSwitch=OFF; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_MBMS_FLC_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


308



86

Configuring MBMS over Iur

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010661 MBMS over Iur.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2 has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The neighboring RNC supports the MBMS feature. – The Point to Point (PTP) services are supported.

Context This feature extends the application scope of the MBMS service.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure This feature does not need to be activated. It takes effect after the feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package is activated.

l

Verification Procedure Initiate a softt handover by moving a UE that is in CELL_DCH state and receiving the MBMS data in PTP mode from the Serving RNC (SRNC) to the Drift RNC (DRNC). In this way, a Radio Link (RL) is established on the Iur interface. The cell to which the RL belongs performs the MBMS service in Point to Multipoint (PTM) mode. If at the time being the UE under the DRNC is receiving only MBMS data in PTM mode, this feature has been activated.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


309


l



----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


310


87


Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010662 Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2 has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context This feature enables dynamic adjustment of the transmit power of the MTCH based on the number of neighboring cells that are in PTM mode. It does not conflict with the maximum power and minimum power defined in the MBMS service. In addition, this feature depends on the MBMS service, because it introduces only power deviation.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure This feature does not need to be activated. Telecom operators only need to set the power adjustment threshold to an appropriate value. 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in RNC Level; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Combine Neighbour Cell Percent to an appropriate value based on the network plan. When the rate of Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

311



PTM applications in a cell in PTM mode reach the value of this parameter, this feature brings a combining gain. If Combine Neighbour Cell Percent is set to a small value, the transmit power of the MBMS SCCPCH in the cell decreases. l

l


Select two MBMS cells (cell A and cell B) that work in the same frequency. In cell A, configure only cell B as its intra-frequency neighboring cell. Apply the PTM mode in cell A and PTP mode in cell B.

2.

Use an MBMS-capable UE to initiate an MBMS service in cell A. View the NBAP_COMM_TRANSP_CH_SETUP_REQ message traced on the Iub interface to check the power of the FACH that carries the service.

3.

Set cell B to send MBMS data in the same channel in PTM mode. In this manner, the rate of the intra-frequency neighboring cells that apply the PTM mode exceeds the value of the preset Combine Neighbour Cell Percent.

4.

View the NBAP_COMM_TRANSP_CH_SETUP_REQ message traced on the Iub interface to check the power of the FACH that carries the service. Expected result: The power of the FACH that carries data of the MBMS channel decreases by 5 dB.


----End

Example //Setting the Power Adjusting Threshold SET URNCMBMSPARA: CombNCellPercent=50;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


312



88

Configuring MSCH Scheduling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010663 MSCH Scheduling.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature enables a UE to receive packets on the MTCH in Discontinuous Reception (DRX) mode, thereby reducing UE power consumption.

Procedure l


l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set both Msch Switch For NonMtchMulti Sccpch and Msch Switch For MtchMulti Sccpch to ON(ON).


Use an MBMS-capable UE to initiate an MBMS service and ensure that the UE can receive the MBMS data.

2.

Check messages traced on the Uu interface. If MSCH configuration information is found in the MBMS CURRENT CELL P-T-M RB INFORMATION, MBMS GENERAL INFORMATION, and MBMS NEIGHBOURING CELL P-T-M RB INFORMATION messages, this feature has been activated. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

313


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set both Msch Switch For NonMtchMulti Sccpch and Msch Switch For MtchMulti Sccpch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example //Activating MSCH scheduling SET UMBMSSWITCH: MbmsSwitch=ON, MschSwitchForNonMtchMulti=ON, MschSwitchForMtchMulti=ON; //Deactivating MSCH scheduling SET UMBMSSWITCH: MschSwitchForNonMtchMulti=OFF, MschSwitchForMtchMulti=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


314


89


Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010665 MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The BMSC on the CN side identifies the channel with a fixed Temporary Mobile Group Identity (TMGI) when delivering a program source.

Context This feature enables statistics on MBMS channels to help the operator obtain the audience rating of the MBMS channels.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure This feature does not need to be activated.

l

Verification Procedure Set the MBMS channels (a maximum of five MBMS channels can be set) on which statistics is to be performed. Then, send the TMGIs of these channels from the M2000 to the RNC. The RNC then measures the following channel-related counters:

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


315



– Average number of users in PTP mode – Average number of users in PTM mode – Time for channels remaining in PTM mode – TTime for channels remaining in PTP mode Based on the preceding counters, the average duration for which each UE is connected to a channel can be calculated. l


----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


316



90

Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020801 Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – If SAS-CENTRIC locating is required, SAS equipment has been configured.

l


l


l

Others Prerequisites – UE is needed to report the relevant measurement results. – CN is needed to trigger the location request. – The UE supports at least one of the following locating methods: – UE-assisted CELLID+RTT locating or UE-based CELLID+RTT locating in RNCCENTRIC mode – UE-assisted CELLID+RTT locating in the SAS-CENTRIC mode

Context The simplest CELLID + Round Trip Time (RTT) locating method is to directly use the geographical center of the coverage area of the reference cell as the locating result. To achieve high locating accuracy, the BSC6900 demands RTT measurement in all cells in the active set and requests the UE to perform locating measurement on the corresponding cells. By means of the two types of measurement, the BSC6900 calculates the time of arrival (TOA) of signal from the cell antenna to the UE. By multiplying the TOA by the velocity of light, the BSC6900 obtains the distance between a certain cell and the UE. If three TOA circles intersect, the BSC6900 can obtain the accurate location of the UE. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


317



Procedure l


Optional: If inter-RNC locating is required, the Iur interface needs to be configured. For details, see 94 Configuring LCS over Iur.

2.

Optional: If SAS-CENTRIC mode needs to be supported, the Iupc interface is required. For details, see 95 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Location Service Parameter Configuration > SMLC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameters of the SMLC algorithm. In this step, set UE Positioning Method, CELLID+RTT Method Type, and Location Working Mode to appropriate values.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USMLCCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > SMLC and IPDL > Cell SMLC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the following location information parameters of the cell: – Cell location configuration type – Geographical location information about the antenna: – Cell Antenna Latitude – Cell Antenna Altitude – Cell Antenna Longitude – Cell coverage information: – Cell Antenna Max Coverage – Cell Antenna Orientation – Cell Antenna Opening

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Initiate Iu, Iub, and Uu interface message tracing, as shown in Figure 90-1, Figure 90-2, and Figure 90-3 respectively.


318




Figure 90-2 Iub Interface Trace dialog box

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


319




2.

Use a UE to access the cell and enable the CN to send a locating request message.

3.

The message LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL and LOCATION REPORT are traced on the Iu interface, as shown in Figure 90-4 and Figure 90-5. Figure 90-4 LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


320



Figure 90-5 LOCATION REPORT

4.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

The messages traced on the Iub interface show that the procedure Dedicated Measurement Initiation is performed on all links in the active set and that the value of Dedicated Measurement Type is Round Trip Time, as shown in Figure 90-6 and Figure 90-7.


321



Figure 90-6 Dedicated Measurement Type

Figure 90-7 Round Trip Time

5.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

From the traced Uu interface messages, you can see the information about the UE RxTx time difference measurement, which is a type of internal measurement (if the UE supports UE Rx-Tx time difference type 2 measurement, the locating method for RxTx time difference type 2 measurement is adopted), as shown in Figure 90-8 and Figure 90-9.


322



Figure 90-8 UE Rx-Tx time difference

Figure 90-9 UE Rx-Tx time difference type 1

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Location Service Parameter Configuration > SMLC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the CELLID+RTT locating method. In this step, deselect the CELLID_RTT check box under parameter UE Positioning Method.

----End

Example //Activating Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS //Setting the parameters of the SMLC algorithm SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_CENTER-0&CELLID_RTT-1&OTDOA-0&AGPS-0, CELLIDRTTMethodType=UE_ASSISTED, ForcedSHOSwitch=OFF, IntraRelThdFor1A=2, IntraRelThdFor1B=2, TrigTime1A=D10, TrigTime1B=D10, SHOQualmin=-20, LcsWorkMode=RNC_CENTRIC; //Setting the location information parameters of the cell

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


323



ADD USMLCCELL: RNCId=2121, CellId=80, CellLocCfgType=CELL_ANTENNA, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, AntennaLatitudeDegree=78900, AntennaLongitudeDegree=6789, AntennaAltitudeMeter=4567, MaxAntennaRange=5678, AntennaOrientation=567, AntennaOpening=456, CellAverageHeight=6789; //Deactivating Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_CENTER-0&CELLID_RTT-0&OTDOA-0&AGPS-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


324



91

Configuring OTDOA Based LCS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020802 OTDOA Based LCS.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The corresponding NodeBs should be equipped USCU card with GPS function.

l


l


l

Others Prerequisites – UE is needed to report the relevant measurement results. – CN is needed to trigger the location request. – The UE supports at least one of the following positioning methods: – UE-based OTDOA positioning method – UE-assisted OTDOA positioning method

Context Huawei UTRAN supports IPDL-OTDOA location services. In this feature, the NodeB is configured with a GPS card and supports cell frame timing measurement. In addition, BSC6900 initiates and traces the SFN-SFN observed time difference measurement. BSC6900 calculates the relative time difference (RTD) of the cell related to positioning based on the latest measurement reports (MRs). After BSC6900 receives a LOCATON REPORT CONTROL message, it requests the UE to perform SFN-SFN observed time difference measurement if the IPDL-OTDOA positioning method is used. After receiving the corresponding MRs, BSC6900 calculates the location of the UE. For accurate location calculation, BSC6900 may request the NodeB to perform RTT measurement and request the UE to perform Rx-Tx time difference measurement. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


325



Procedure l


Optional: Configure the Iur interface if inter-RNC locating is required. For details, see 94 Configuring LCS over Iur.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Location Service Parameter Configuration > SMLC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the SMLC algorithm parameters. In this step, set UE Positioning Method and Location Working Mode to appropriate values. NOTE

Location Working Mode must be set to RNC_CENTRIC(RNC CENTRIC Mode).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USMLCCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > SMLC and IPDL > Cell SMLC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the location information about a cell. In this step, set the following parameters to appropriate values: – Cell Location Setting Type – Parameters associated with the geographical location information about the antenna system – Cell Antenna Longitude – Cell Antenna Latitude – Cell Antenna Altitude – Parameters associated with the cell coverage information – Cell Antenna Max Coverage – Cell Antenna Opening – Cell Antenna Orientation

4.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLGPSFRMTIMING (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > SMLC and IPDL > Cell GPS Frame Timing; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the parameters related to UTRAN GPS cell frame timing measurement. In this step, set Cell ID and GPS Frame Timing Active Flag to appropriate values.


Check whether the parameters required for positioning are correctly set. – Run the BSC6900 MML command LST USMLC to query SMLC algorithm parameter settings. – Run the BSC6900 MML command LST USMLCCELL to query the settings of the location parameters of a cell. – Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELLGPSFRMTIMING to query the parameter settings related to UTRAN GPS cell frame timing measurement.

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Location Service Parameter Configuration > SMLC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

326



3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the OTDOA-based location service. ----End

Example //Activating OTDOA Based LCS //Setting the parameters for the SMLC algorithm SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=OTDOA-1, OTDOAMethodType=UE_BASED, LcsWorkMode=RNC_CENTRIC; //Setting the location information parameters of the cell ADD USMLCCELL: RNCId=2121, CellId=80, CellLocCfgType=CELL_ANTENNA, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, AntennaLatitudeDegree=78900, AntennaLongitudeDegree=6789, AntennaAltitudeMeter=4567, MaxAntennaRange=5678, AntennaOrientation=567, AntennaOpening=456, CellAverageHeight=6789; //Setting parameters related to UTRAN GPS cell frame timing measurement ADD UCELLGPSFRMTIMING: CellId=80, StartFlag=ACTIVE; //Deactivating OTDOA Based LCS SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=OTDOA-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


327



92

Configuring A-GPS Based LCS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020803 A-GPS Based LCS. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – If GPS receiver is located at RNC,BSC6900 needs clock board such as GCGa to support this feature. – If GPS receiver is located at NodeB, NodeB should be equipped with USCU card with GPS function. – When the RNC-CENTRIC locating service is required: – If a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver is configured on the BSC6900 side, the BSC6900 must be configured with the General Clock Unit with GPS REV:a (GCGa) board. – If a GPS receiver is configured on the NodeB side, the NodeB must be configured with the Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit (USCU) and WCDMA GPS Receiving Unit (WGRU), and all the equipment (including the GPS antenna system) must be properly installed and connected. – When the SAS-CENTRIC locating service is required, the BSC6900 must be configured with a Stand-Alone SMLC (SAS) device. SMLC refers to Serving Mobile Location Center. NOTE

If A-GPS positioning is required, the GPS receiver does not need to be installed in BSC6900 side or NodeB side.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – NodeB V200R014 supports this feature while NodeB V100R014 does not support this feature.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


328



– The UE supports UE-based A-GPS positioning or UE-assisted A-GPS positioning or both. – The CN can send positioning requests. – UE is needed to report the relevant measurement results. – CN is needed to trigger the location request.

Context A-GPS positioning is an application of GPS positioning in the WCDMA network. In open areas, A-GPS positioning can provide high positioning sensitivity, shorten positioning time, and save power. The location information about the GPS receiver can be automatically searched by the GPS receiver itself or be configured by a user. l

If the accurate location information (to be provided by the surveying and mapping authorities) about the antenna of the GPS receiver can be obtained, it is recommended that the information be specified when the GPS receiver is being configured. In this way, the GPS receiver can quickly search for the satellite group in the area where it is located, and accurately calculate the differential GPS information.

l

If the accurate location information about the antenna of the GPS receiver cannot be obtained, the auto search mode can be selected.

l


Procedure NOTE

The BSC6900 and NodeB must be configured with the related data to activate this feature.

Activation Procedure on the BSC6900 Side 1.

Optional: If inter-RNC locating is required, configure the Iur interface by referring to 94 Configuring LCS over Iur.

2.

Optional: If the GPS positioning method in SAS-CENTRIC mode is required, configure the Iu-PC interface by referring to 95 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service.

3.

In RNC-CENTRIC mode, if a GPS receiver is configured on the BSC6900 side, run the BSC6900 MML command SET CLKTYPE to set the type of clock board to GCGa.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC to set the SMLC algorithm parameters. In this step, set UE Positioning Method and Location Working Mode to appropriate values.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USMLCCELL to set the parameters related to cell location information to appropriate values. – Cell Location Setting Type – Parameters associated with the geographical location information about the antenna system – Cell Antenna Longitude – Cell Antenna Latitude

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


329



– Cell Antenna Altitude – Parameters associated with the cell coverage information – Cell Antenna Max Coverage – Cell Antenna Opening – Cell Antenna Orientation 6.

In RNC-CENTRIC mode, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GPS to set the parameters related to the GPS receiver. In this step, set GPS ID, GPS type, GPS antenna latitude, GPS antenna longitude, and GPS antenna altitude to appropriate values.

7.

In RNC-CENTRIC mode, run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GPS to activate the specified GPS receiver. In this step, set AGPS ID and Type to appropriate values.

8.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command STR POSAVE with Maximum time for posave set to 12. Then, check the single point positioning results of the GPS receiver in the \bam\common\fam\smlc directory.

Activation Procedure for NodeB V200R014 NOTE

In RNC-CENTRIC mode, a GPS receiver can be configured on the NodeB side as required. If a GPS receiver is configured on the NodeB side, the NodeB must be configured with the USCU and WGRU, and all the equipment (including the GPS antenna system) must be properly installed and connected.

1.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD BRD to add a USCU board. – Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to appropriate values based on the actual location of the USCU board. – Set Board Type to USCU.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of the reference clock source.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD GPS to add a GPS clock link.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD GPSPOS to add a GPS receiver. – If Way to Get Position is set to USER_CONFIG(User Config), set Antenna Longitude, Antenna Latitude, and Antenna Altitude to appropriate values. – If Way to Get Position is set to SEARCH_WITH_DURATION(Search with duration), set Duration to an appropriate value. – If Way to Get Position is set to SEARCH_WITH_PRECISION(Search with precision), set Precision to an appropriate value.

l

Verification Procedure Verification Procedure on the BSC6900 Side 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Initiate Iu and Uu interface tracing, as shown in Figure 92-1 and Figure 92-2 respectively.


330



Figure 92-1 Iub interface tracing


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

2.

Make a UE access the network and enable the CN to send a positioning request.

3.

Over the Iu interface, you can view the Location Reporting Control and Location Report messages, as shown in Figure 92-3 and Figure 92-4.


331



Figure 92-3 LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


332



Figure 92-4 LOCATION REPORT

4.

The Uu interface tracing messages contain the information about A-GPS positioning measurement, as shown in Figure 92-5 and Figure 92-6. Figure 92-5 ue-positioning-GPS-AssistanceData

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


333



Figure 92-6 GPS-MeasurementParam

Verification Procedure for NodeB V200R014

l

1.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP BRD to query the status of the USCU board and status of the GPS receiver. In the command output displayed on the LMT, check whether the USCU board and the GPS receiver are normal.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP GPS to display the information of a GPS receiver, including receiver position, receiver version, receiver status, and receiver hardware information. In the command output displayed on the LMT, check whether the location of the GPS receiver is locked up and whether the operating state of the GPS receiver is normal.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC to deactivate the A-GPS location service. In this step, deselect the AGPS check box under parameter UE Positioning Method.

----End

Example /*Activating A-GPS Based LCS*/ /*Operations on the BSC6900 side* //Setting the type of clock board to GCGa SET CLKTYPE:CLKTYPE=GCGa; //Setting the parameters for the SMLC algorithm SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_CENTER-0&CELLID_RTT-0&OTDOA-0&AGPS-1, AGPSMethodType=UE_ASSISTED, UeAssAgpsAssDataSwitch=REFERENCE_TIME_FOR_GPS-1&REFERENCE_LOCATION_FOR_GP S-1&DGPS_CORRECT-0&GPS_NAVGMODEL-1&GPS_IONOSPHERIC_MODEL-1&GPS_UTC_MODEL1&GPS_ALMANAC-1&GPS_ACQ_ASSIST-1&GPS_REALTIME_INTEGRITY-1,LcsWorkMode=RNC _CENTRIC; //Setting the location information parameters of the cell ADD USMLCCELL: RNCId=2121, CellId=80, CellLocCfgType=CELL_ANTENNA, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, AntennaLatitudeDegree=78900, AntennaLongitudeDegree=6789, AntennaAltitudeMeter=4567, MaxAntennaRange=5678, AntennaOrientation=567, AntennaOpening=456, CellAverageHeight=6789; //Setting the parameters of the GPS receiver ADD GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=0, AGPSRECEIVERTYPE=RNC, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


334



LATITUDE=31243596, LONGITUDE=121590603, ALTITUDE=20; ADD GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=1, AGPSRECEIVERTYPE=NODEB, CellId=82, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, LATITUDE=31243596, LONGITUDE=121590603, ALTITUDE=20; //Activating the specified GPS receiver ACT GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=0, ACTTYPE=BOTH; /*Operations on the NodeB V200R014 side* SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0; ADD GPS: SN=0; MOD GPSPOS: WPOS=USER_CONFIG, LONG=160000000, LAT=80000000, ALT=900; //Deactivating A-GPS Based LCS SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_CENTER-0&CELLID_RTT-0&OTDOA-0&AGPS-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


335



93

Configuring LCS Classified Zones

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020804 LCS Classified Zones.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The core network (CN) supports this feature.

Context This feature defines a classified zone. Once the UE enters or exits the zone, the RNC automatically reports the service area identity (SAI) of the UE.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCZ (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Area Information Configuration > Classified Zone Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a classified zone.


336


93 Configuring LCS Classified Zones NOTE

l In this step, you need to set the parameters Cn Operator Index, Location Area Code, Service Area Code, and Classified Zone ID. More than one classified zone can be set for each operator. l Before running the ADD UCZ (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Area Information Configuration > Classified Zone Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) command, ensure that Location Area Code and Service Area Code are configured at the local RNC. Otherwise, the classified zone cannot be configured.

l


Initiate Iub interface message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 93-1. Figure 93-1 Iub Interface Trace dialog box

2.

Enable the UE to establish a service of any type. Move the UE from cell A (whose LAC and SAC are 9513 and 272 respectively) to cell B (whose LAC and SAC are 9514 and 273 respectively), to add cell B to the active set. – If a LOCATION REPORT message is displayed, this feature has been activated. – If the value of the information element (IE) "Cause" in the LOCATION REPORT message is "User Restriction Start Indication", the UE enters the classified zone. The SAI of the UE is also contained in the message, as shown in Figure 93-2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


337



Figure 93-2 LOCATION REPORT message

3.

Remove cell B from the active set by performing a handover or Serving Radio Network Subsystem (SRNS) relocation. – If a LOCATION REPORT message is displayed, this feature has been activated. – If the cause value of the LOCATION REPORT message is displayed as "User Restriction End Indication", the UE exits the classified zone. The SAI of the UE is also contained in the LOCATION REPORT message.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCZ (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Area Information Configuration > Classified Zone Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the classified zone from all operators at the RNC.

----End

Example //Activating LCS Classified Zone ADD UCZ: CnOpIndex=0, LAC=9513, SAC=272, CZ=0; ADD UCZ: CnOpIndex=0, LAC=9514, SAC=273, CZ=1; //Deactivating LCS Classified Zone RMV UCZ: CnOpIndex=0, CZ=0; RMV UCZ: CnOpIndex=0, CZ=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


338



94

Configuring LCS over Iur

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020805 LCS over Iur.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following feature has been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-020801 Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS or WRFD-020803 A-GPS Based LCS.

l


l

Others Prerequisites – The UE and the neighboring RNC (NRNC) support this feature. – This feature is used only in RNC-CENTRIC mode.

Context This feature enables Huawei RAN to provide location services (LCS) over the Iur interface, extending the LCS area. It enables exchange of cell information and GPS assistance information over the Iur interface.

Procedure l


In this procedure, you need to set the positioning method and add the geographical information about the cell at the RNC. For cell information exchange over the Iur interface, geographical information about a neighboring cell must be configured at the NRNC.

1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Location Service Parameter Configuration > SMLC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

339



3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the SMLC algorithm parameters, In this step, set UE Positioning Method and Location Working Mode. 2.

Configure cell information exchange over the Iur interface. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIURCOMMSCCP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > RNC Basic Configuration > Information of IUR Common SCCP Connection; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set the subrack number and slot number of the SPU subsystem that processes information exchange on the BSC6900.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USMLCCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > SMLC and IPDL > Cell SMLC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the parameters related to cell location information. The parameters include: – Cell location configuration type – Geographical location information about the antenna: – Cell Antenna Latitude – Cell Antenna Altitude – Cell Antenna Longitude – Cell coverage information: – Cell Antenna Max Coverage – Cell Antenna Orientation – Cell Antenna Opening and so on

3.

Configure GPS assistance information exchange. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIURCOMMSCCP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > RNC Basic Configuration > Information of IUR Common SCCP Connection; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set the subrack number and slot number of the SPU subsystem that processes information exchange on the BSC6900.

b.

For GPS information exchange over the Iur interface, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GPS (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Device Configuration > GPS Reference Receiver; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a GPS receiver to the NRNC. In this step, set GPS type to NRNC_RNC(Nearby RNC), indicating that the GPS receiver is installed at the NRNC. NOTE

l If a GPS receiver on the NRNC side is installed on the NodeB, set GPS type to NRNC_NODEB(NodeB in RNC). l Before adding a GPS receiver to the NRNC, ensure that the GPS receiver is installed at the NRNC. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GPS (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Device Configuration > GPS Reference Receiver; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the GPS receiver. In this step, set GPS type to RNC(Local RNC) (when the GPS receiver is installed at the RNC) or to NODEB(Local NodeB) (when the GPS receiver is installed at the NodeB).

c.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

If a GPS receiver needs to be configured on the BSC6900 side, run the BSC6900 MML command SET CLKTYPE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

340



Configuration Express > Device Configuration > Clock Board Type; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with the type of clock board in the BSC6900 set to GCGa.

l

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GPS (CME single configuration: UMTS GLOBAL Configuration Express > Device Configuration > GPS Reference Receiver. Set GPS Active Flag to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the GPS reference receiver.

e.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLGPSFRMTIMING (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > SMLC and IPDL > Cell GPS Frame Timing; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set parameters related to UTRAN GPS cell frame timing measurement to appropriate values. In this step, set Cell ID and GPS Frame Timing Active Flag.


Start Iur interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 94-1. Figure 94-1 Iur Interface Trace dialog box

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Check the information traced over the Iur interface. You can find an information exchange initiation procedure. In this procedure, the local RNC sends the NRNC an INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION REQUEST message, in which the value of Information Type is GPS Information or DGPS. The NRNC sends the local RNC INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION RESPONSE and INFORMATION REPORT messages, which contain GPS assistance data, as shown in Figure 94-2.


341



Figure 94-2 GPS assistance data carried in the INFORMATION REPORT message

NOTE

You can see INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION REQUEST and INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION RESPONSE messages only after the BSC6900 MML command ACT GPS is executed.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

3.

Establish a service, and then perform a soft handover over the Iur interface.

4.

Enable the CN to send a LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message with the cause "DIRECT".

5.

Check messages traced over the Iur interface. You can find an Information Exchange Initiation procedure. In this procedure, the local RNC sends the NRNC an INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION REQUEST message, in which the value of Information Type is UTRAN Access Point Position with Altitude, as shown in Figure 94-3. The NRNC sends the local RNC an INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION RESPONSE message, which contains geographical information about the neighboring cell over the Iur interface, as shown in Figure 94-4.


342



Figure 94-3 INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION REQUEST

Figure 94-4 INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION RESPONSE

6.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Check messages traced over the Iur interface. You can find DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST and DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION RESPONSE messages, as shown in Figure 94-5 and Figure 94-6 respectively. In the former message, the value of Dedicated Measurement Type is Round Trip Time.


343



Figure 94-5 DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST

Figure 94-6 DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION RESPONSE

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GPS (CME single configuration: UMTS GLOBAL Configuration Express > Device Configuration > GPS Reference Receiver. Set GPS Active Flag to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate the GPS receiver. Alternatively, run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GPS (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Device Configuration > GPS Reference Receiver; CME batch Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

344



modification center: not supported) to remove the GPS receiver from the NRNC. GPS information exchange over the Iur interface is thereby disabled. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UIURCOMMSCCP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > RNC Basic Configuration > Information of IUR Common SCCP Connection; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate LCS over Iur.

----End

Example /*Activating LCS over Iur*/ //Setting the positioning method SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_RTT-1&OTDOA-0&AGPS-0; /*Configuring cell information exchange over the Iur interface*/ ADD UIURCOMMSCCP: SRN=0, SN=1; ADD USMLCCELL: RNCId=29, CellId=1, CellLocCfgType=CELL_ANTENNA, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, AntennaLatitudeDegree=31245560, AntennaLongitudeDegree=121588234, AntennaAltitudeMeter=20, MaxAntennaRange=2000, AntennaOrientation=0, AntennaOpening=1200; CellAverageHeight=25; /*Configuring GPS assistance information exchange.*/ ADD UIURCOMMSCCP: SRN=0, SN=1; ADD GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=0, AGPSRECEIVERTYPE=NRNC_RNC, RNCID=1, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, LATITUDE=31245560, LONGITUDE=121588230, ALTITUDE=21; SET CLKTYPE: CLKTYPE=GCGa; ACT GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=0, ACTTYPE=BOTH; ADD UCELLGPSFRMTIMING: CellId=1, StartFlag=ACTIVE; //Deactivating LCS over Iur RMV GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


345



95

Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020807 Iupc Interface for LCS service.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – IP interface boards of the BSC6900 support this feature. – A Stand-Alone SMLC (SAS) is configured.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: – WRFD-020801 Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS has been configured if the operator employs the Cell ID+RTT algorithm. – WRFD-020803 A-GPS Based LCS has been configured if the operator employs the A-GPS algorithm.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE supports at least one of the following positioning methods: – UE-assisted CELLID+RTT – UE-based A-GPS – UE-assisted A-GPS – The global data is configured by performing the following procedure: 1.

Configuring the Basic Data

2.

Configuring the OSP and DSP

3.

Configuring the Area Information

4.

Configuring the M3UA Local and Destination Entities

– Physical layer data and data link layer data are configured by performing the following procedure: Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


346



1.

Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/ GOUc Board

2.

Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the PEUa Board

3.

Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUa/POUc Board

4.

Configuring the User Plane of the Iub Interface (over ATM)

Context Only IP transmission can be applied between the BSC6900 and the SAS. The transport network layer data on the Iupc interface needs to be configured at the BSC6900. When the BSC6900 is connected to multiple SASs through IP transmission, you need to configure this feature on each Iupc interface. One BSC6900 can be connected to a maximum of four SASs simultaneously. NOTE

Before configuring the Iupc interface data, familiarize yourself with Protocol Structure and Links on the Iupc Interface.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Signaling Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the destination signaling point (DSP) data that corresponds to the SAS.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML commands ADD M3LE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Signaling Configuration > M3UA Local Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) and ADD M3DE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Signaling Configuration > M3UA Destination Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the M3UA local entity (M3LE) and the M3UA destination entity (M3DE) that correspond to the SAS respectively.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK (CME single configuration: IUPC Configuration Express > IP Transport > SCTP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an SCTP link. To add multiple SCTP links, run this command for each SCTP link to be added. – If Signalling link mode is set to Server at the SAS, set Signalling link mode to CLIENT at the BSC6900. If Signalling link mode is set to CLIENT at the SAS, set Signalling link mode to Server at the BSC6900. – Set Application type to M3UA.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS (CME single configuration: IUPC Configuration Express > IP Transport > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA link set. – If Local entity type is set to M3UA_IPSP, set Work mode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP. – If Local entity type is set to M3UA_ASP and Destination entity type is set to M3UA_SP, set Work mode to M3UA_IPSP. If Local entity type is set to M3UA_ASP and Destination entity type is not set to M3UA_SP, set Work mode to M3UA_ASP.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


347


l


5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT (CME single configuration: IUPS Configuration Express > IP Transport > M3UA Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA route.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK (CME single configuration: IUPC Configuration Express > IP Transport > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA link. To add more M3UA links, run this command repeatedly.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USAS (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Radio Basic Data Configuration > Stand-alone SMLC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the SAS.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Location Service Parameter Configuration > SMLC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable SAS-CENTRIC positioning based on CELLID + RTT or AGPS. For details, see 90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS or 92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS.


l

Perform the verification procedures by referring to 90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS or 92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS.


Perform the deactivation procedures by referring to 90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS or 92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS.

----End

Example //Activating Iupc Interface for LCS Service //Adding the DSP data that corresponds to the SAS ADD N7DPC:DPX=4, SPDF=WNF, DPC=8345, STP=OFF, SLSMASK=B0000, NEIGHBOR=YES, NAME="SAS", DPCT=IUPC, PROT=ITUT, BEARTYPE=M3UA, SPX=4; //Adding the M3LE that corresponds to the SAS ADD M3LE:LENO=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, RTCONTEXT=4294967295, NAME="IUPC", SPX=4; //Adding the M3DE that correspond to the SAS ADD M3DE:DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=4, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, RTCONTEXT=4294967295, NAME="IUPC"; //Adding an SCTP link ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=SERVER, APP=M3UA, LOCIP1="10.10.10.10", PEERIP1="10.10.11.11", PEERPN=3000, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES; //Adding an M3UA link set ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, NAME="IUPC"; //Adding an M3UA route ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="IUPC"; //Adding an M3UA link ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, NAME="IUPC"; //Adding the SAS ADD USAS: CnOpIndex=0, SasId=0, Dpx=4; //Setting SMLC-related parameters SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_RTT-1, AGPSMethodType=UE_ASSISTED, LcsWorkMode=SAS_CENTRIC;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


348



96

Configuring Push to Talk

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020134 Push to Talk. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010688 Enhanced CELL_FACH, and WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA.

l

License – The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions. NOTE

The license must be activated by performing the following operation first: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to set Push To Talk (per PTT Active User) to an appropriate value.

l

Other Prerequisites – This feature requires support from the UE and CN.

Context This feature is a part of the end-to-end push to talk (PTT) solution. Implementation of the PTT solution requires support from the UE, RAN, CN, and PTT server. Huawei RAN can identify PTT services and implement techniques to reduce the delay in setting up calls of PTT services.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



349


l


1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, select the CFG_PTT_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel Configuration Strategy Switch.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC. In this step, set PTT ARP Priority, PTT ARP Preemption Capability, PTT ARP Preemption Vulnerability, and PTT ARP Queuing Allowed to the same values as those of ARP (allocation/retention priority) properties Priority Level, Preemption Capability, Preemption Vulnerability, and Queuing Allowed. The ARP properties are carried in the RNCAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message sent by the CN for PTT services during the second RAB assignment procedure. In addition, set PTT HSUPA TTI type to EDCH_TTI_10ms.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to turn on the switches PTT_EARLY_TRANS_SWITCH and PTT_SPEC_LI_SWITCH. In this step, clear the PTT_EARLY_TRANS_SWITCH_OFF and PTT_SPEC_LI_SWITCH_OFF check boxes under the parameter Process switch.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enable PTT UEs to switch to the DCH for access reattempts when HSPA resources are insufficient. In this step, select the RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT19 check box under the parameter CORRM Algorithm Reserved Switch 0.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA. In this step, select HSUPA(UL_EDCH,DL_DCH) from the Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB drop-down list.


Initiate Iu-interface message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT and check whether the CN has sent an RNCAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message. NOTE

The RNC identifies PTT services based on six information elements (IEs) in the RNCAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message. The six IEs are Traffic Class, Signaling Indication, Priority Level, Preemption Capability, Preemption Vulnerability, and Queuing Allowed. Services identified as PTT services are allocated a rate of 8 kbit/s.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, clear the CFG_PTT_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel Configuration Strategy Switch.

----End

Example //Activating Push to Talk SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH:CfgSwitch=CFG_PTT_SWITCH-1; SET UFRC:PTTArpPriorityLevel=1, PTTArpPreEmptCap=TRIGGER, PTTArpPreEmptVuln=NOT_PRE_EMPTABLE, PTTArpQueuingAllowed=ALLOWED, PTTHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_10ms; SET URRCTRLSWITCH:PROCESSSWITCH=PTT_EARLY_TRANS_SWITCH_OFF-0&PTT_SPEC_LI_SWIT CH_OFF-0; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH:ReservedSwitch0=RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT19-1; SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA:SrbChlType=HSUPA; //Deactivating Push to Talk SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH:CfgSwitch=CFG_PTT_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


350



97

Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The NBBI and the NULP do not support this feature.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE should have HSUPA capability.

Context This feature enables the system to process HSUPA services, therefore increasing the uplink rate and system throughput. It provides basic functions of HSUPA.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to add HSUPA functions of a cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell. Set Cell HSUPA state to Activated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to activate the HSUPA function of the cell. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

351



3.

Configure Iub transport for HSUPA. – In an ATM network: a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure new records of ATM traffic based on network planning requirements.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping) to query the transmission resource mapping.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set associated parameters according to the network plan. TX traffic record index and RX traffic record index of the AAL2 path to be added must be the same as those set in the ADD ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) command. In addition, AAL2 Path Type should be set according to the mapping between service types and AAL paths.

d.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > AAL2Path > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure an AAL2 path for HSDPA based on network planning requirements.

– In an IP network: a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ADJMAP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping) to query whether resource management mapping is configured for the adjacent node. – If configured, check the TRMMAP index of the adjacent node. – If not configured, run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping) to query the default TRMMAP ID used by the adjacent node based on the settings of Interface Type and Transport Type. For example, if Interface Type is set to Iub Interface, then TRMMAP ID is 1.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping) to check whether the IP path mapping to the HSDPA service is configured according to the TRMMAP ID used by the adjacent node. – If configured, no further action is required. – If not configured, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the IP path mapping to the HSUPA service.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


352


97 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package NOTE

To ensure that HSUPA services can be set up successfully, HSUPA services must be mapped to the corresponding AAL2 paths or IP paths. To avoid the affect on ongoing services, you can add new AAL2 paths or IP paths.

l


Ensure that the HSUPA function of the cell is activated. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to verify that the HSUPA function of the cell is activated.

2.

Establish a PS service. The IE E-DCH FDD information in the RL SETUP message on the Iub interface and the IE rb-mappinginfo in the RRC_RB_SETUP message on the Uu interface should indicate that the service has been set up and carried on the E-DCH.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell. Set Cell HSUPA state to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to deactivate the HSUPA function of the cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the HSUPA functions of a cell.

----End

Example //Activating HSUPA Introduction Package ADD UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111; ACT UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111; //Verifying HSUPA Introduction Package DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=111; //Deactivating HSUPA Introduction Package DEA UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111; RMV UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


353


98


Configuring HSUPA Admission Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061202 HSUPA Admission Control.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context This feature enables HSUPA and R99 services to simultaneously access the network by using the remaining uplink cell load and other resources, improving the utilization of system resources and ensuring QoS of admitted users.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Activating Power Resource Admission a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select an uplink Call Admission Control (CAC) algorithm through the parameter Uplink CAC algorithm switch and a downlink CAC algorithm through the parameter Downlink CAC algorithm switch.

b.

For HSUPA services, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

354



batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the corresponding admission algorithm switches from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list, such as HSUPA_PBR_MEAS(HSUPA PBR Meas Algorithm), HSUPA_EDCH_RSEPS_MEAS(HSUPA EDCH RSEPS Meas Algorithm), and HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSUPA UU Load Admission Control Algorithm). c.

2.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set power resource admission parameters.

Activating NodeB Credit Resource Admission a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CAC algorithm switch to NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH(NodeB Credit CAC Switch).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell CAC algorithm switch to CRD_ADCTRL(Credit Admission Control Algorithm) to turn on the cell-oriented credit resource admission switch.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the NodeB credit resource admission parameters Ul handover credit reserved SF and Dl handover credit and code reserved SF to appropriate values.

Activating Iub Resource Admission Iub resource admission is unconditionally performed and does not need to be activated. NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) or MOD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to modify the Iub bandwidth.

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


UE1 and UE2 are in idle state and camp on CELL_A11. CELL_A11 supports HSUPA.

2.


3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set the maximum number of HSUPA users supported by CELL_A11 to 1.

4.

Establish an HSUPA PS service on UE1, and then check the rb-mappinginfo information element in the RRC_RB_SETUP message traced over the Uu interface. The value of ul-TrCH-Type is e-dch. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

355



5.

Establish an HSUPA PS service on UE2, and then check the rb-mappinginfo information element in the RRC_RB_SETUP message traced over the Uu interface. The value of rrc-Stateinditator is CELL_DCH.

6.

Release all PS services.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set Maximum HSUPA user number of CELL_A11 to 20.

8.

Establish an HSUPA PS service on UE1 and UE2 respectively. Expected result: An HSUPA PS service is successfully established on UE1 and UE2 respectively.

9.

Run the following command to check whether Iub resource admission is activated. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH or DSP AAL2PATH to check whether any bandwidth is occupied.

l


To disable Power Resource Admission, do as follows: – Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-oriented power resource admission switches (Uplink CAC algorithm switch and Downlink CAC algorithm switch) to ALGORITHM_OFF.

2.

3.

To disable NodeB Credit Resource Admission, do as follows: a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the NodeB credit resource admission switch NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH(NodeB Credit CAC Switch) from the CAC algorithm switch drop-down list.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the cell-oriented credit resource admission switch CRD_ADCTRL(Credit Admission Control Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list.

Deactivating Iub Resource Admission Iub resource admission is unconditionally performed and does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example //Activating power resource admission MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_SECOND; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL-1&HSUPA_PBR_MEAS-1&HSUPA_EDCH_RSEPS_MEAS -1; MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, MaxUlTxPowerforConv=24, MaxUlTxPowerforInt=24, MaxHsupaUserNum=20;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


356



//Activating NodeB credit resource admission SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-1; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-1; MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, UlHoCeResvSf=SF16, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SF32; //Deactivating power resource admission MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF; //Deactivating NodeB credit resource admission SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-0; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


357



99

Configuring HSUPA Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061203 HSUPA Power Control.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The features WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context This feature increases the system power efficiency, reduces the uplink and downlink interference, and improves the system capacity by controlling the power on HSUPA physical channels.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set E-AGCH HPC Parameters, E-RGCH HPC Parameters for Service Radio Links Set, and E-HICH HPC Parameters for Service Radio Links Set to YES.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set E-AGCH Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

358



HPC Mode, E-RGCH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links Set, and E-HICH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links Set to FOLLOW_TPC.

l

3.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set E-AGCH Power Offset(0.25dB), E-RGCH Power Offset for Service Radio Links Set (0.25dB), E-HICH Power Offset for Service Radio Links Set(0.25dB), and EHICH Power Offset for Single Radio Link(0.25dB) to appropriate values according to the network plan.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABHSUPAPC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > Typical RAB HSUPA Power Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to modify power control parameters related to HSUPA services. In this step, set E-RGCH 2-Index-Step Threshold to 9 and ERGCH 3-Index-Step Threshold to 12.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABOLPC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > Typical RAB OLPC Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, change the number of target retransmissions for large and small retransmissions related to HSUPA services according to the network plan.


On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor page. Then, double-click Connection Performance Monitoring under UMTS Monitoring. In the displayed dialog box, select OLPC and specify the IMSI.

2.

Use an HSUPA-capable UE to set up a PS service over the enhanced DCH (E-DCH).

3.

Move the UE between the cell center and the cell edge.

4.

View the monitor items related to the number of E-DCH retransmissions in the OLPC area. The values of the monitor items change with UE movement.

5.

View the power change on each HSUPA channel. – If static power control is used, the channel power remains unchanged. – If dynamic power control is used: – When the UE is moving away from the antenna, the transmit power of the EAGCH increases. – When the UE is moving towards the antenna, the transmit power of the EAGCH decreases.

l



----End

Example //Activating HSUPA Power Control //Setting the power control mode SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=111, EAGCHPCPARA=YES, SERGCHPCPARA=YES, SEHICHPCPARA=YES; SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=111, EAGCHPCMOD=FOLLOW_TPC, SERGCHPCMOD=FOLLOW_TPC, SEHICHPCMOD=FOLLOW_TPC; SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=111, EAGCHPWROFFSET=142, SERGCHPWROFFSET=100,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


359



SEHICHPWROFFSET=96, SRLEHICHPWROFFSET=88; //Modifying power control parameters related to HSUPA services MOD UTYPRABHSUPAPC: RabIndex=48, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_EDCH_2MS, Ul16QamInd=FALSE, UlL2EnhanceInd=FALSE, EdPwrInterpolationInd=FALSE, ERgch2IndStpThs=9, ERgch3IndStpThs=12, UlEcBoostingInd=FALSE; //Changing the number of target retransmissions for large and small retransmissions related to HSUPA services MOD UTYPRABOLPC: RabIndex=48, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_EDCH_2MS, DelayClass=1, EdchTargetLittleRetransNum=12, EdchTargetLargeRetransNum=20;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


360



100

Configuring HSUPA Mobility Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061204 HSUPA Mobility Management.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature enables an HSUPA-capable UE to be handed over to an R99 cell or another HSUPA cell. This feature also enables an HSUPA-capable UE to change cells with a small probability of service interruption.

Procedure l


The methods of activating intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-RAT handovers are the same for HSUPA users and R99 users. For the activation procedures for configuring HSUPA Mobility Management, see the following sections: – 35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover – 236 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage – 237 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS – 247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


361



– 269 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage – 270 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS – 275 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service – 276 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load 2.

Verification Procedure None.

3.


----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


362



101

Configuring HSUPA DCCC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061208 HSUPA DCCC.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The features WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context HSUPA DCCC can dynamically adjust the minimum spreading factor (SF) code of HSUPA based on the user throughput and flexibly switch the UE state based on the user traffic, which improves the Channel Element (CE) resource utilization and system efficiency.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH from the Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch drop-down list.

2.

Optional: If the NodeB does not enable dynamic CE, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

363



3.

NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HSUPA Credit Consume Type to MBR. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Dynamic Channel Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented DCCC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH from the HSUPA DCCC Strategy drop-down list so that the data rate of HSUPA services on the EDCH can increase or decrease. NOTE

After the preceding optional step is performed, the data rate of HSUPA services on the EDCH can increase or decrease as required. If the data rate of HSUPA services on the EDCH is expected to increase only, select RATE_UP_ONLY_ON_EDCH from the HSUPA DCCC Strategy dropdown list.

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Dynamic Channel Control Parameter Configuration > HSUPA Rate Adjust Set; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HSUPA Uplink Rate Adjust Set to a data rate set for rate adjustment by the HSUPA DCCC algorithm. NOTE

The preceding optional step sets the available data rate set of the HSUPA DCCC algorithm. After the step is performed, HSUPA services can be of any data rate in the data rate set by using the HSUPA DCCC algorithm.

l

Verification Procedure 1. On the BSC6900 LMT, display the Monitor page. In the Monitor Navigation Tree, double-click UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. Select UL Throughput Bandwidth and DL Throughput Bandwidth respectively from the Monitor Item drop-down list to create two monitoring tasks. 2. Make the UE establish an HSUPA Best Effort (BE) service. After the service is established, layer 3 of the RNC sends an uplink throughput measurement control message to layer 2. 3. Upload a large file for a period of time. Then, view the RRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface and check that the data rate increases. In UL Throughput Bandwidth of Connection Performance Monitoring, the bandwidth increases. 4. Stop the data upload and wait for a period of time. Then, view the RRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface and check that the data rate decreases. In UL Throughput Bandwidth of Connection Performance Monitoring, the bandwidth decreases.

l

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH from the Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch drop-down list.

----End

Example //Activating HSUPA DCCC SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


364



MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NodeB1", HsupaCeConsumeSelection=MBR; SET UDCCC: HsupaDcccStg=RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH; SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET: EdchRateAdjustSet=RATE_8KBPS-0&RATE_16KBPS-0&RATE_32KBPS-0&RATE_64KBPS-0& RATE_128KBPS-1&RATE_144KBPS-0&RATE_256KBPS-1&RATE_384KBPS-0&RATE_608KBPS1&RATE_1280KBPS-0&RATE_2048KBPS-0&RATE_2720KBPS-0&RATE_5440KBPS-0&RATE_11 480KBPS-0; //Deactivating HSUPA DCCC SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch= DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


365



102

Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061211 20 HSUPA Users per Cell.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature enables a single HSUPA cell to serve a maximum of 20 HSUPA users simultaneously. After the maximum is reached, the cell attempts to establish services on DCHs to accommodate additional users.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSDPA UU Load Admission Control Algorithm) and HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSUPA UU Load Admission Control Algorithm) from the drop-down list of Cell CAC algorithm switch.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

366



Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Maximum HSUPA user number to 20. l


On the BSC6900 LMT, click Monitor. Then, double-click Cell Performance Monitoring in the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. In the displayed Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to Cell User Number.

2.

Use UEs to access the cell one by one. Then, make UEs establish PS services, for example, upload files through FTP. Expected result: Each UE establishes PS services successfully. – If the number of UEs is less than or equal to 20, uplink services are carried on HSUPA channels and downlink services are carried on HSDPA channels. – If the number of UEs is greater than 20, HSPA services of the excessive UEs are carried on R99 channels.

3.

View the maximum number of users indicated by the counter VS.HSUPA.UE.Max.Cell on the M2000. NOTE

The 20 HSUPA users referred to in this feature are of the SRB Over HSPA type.

l



----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Disabling the admission control function in an HSPA cell on the Uu interface MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-0&HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL-0; //Setting the maximum number of HSUPA users supported by the cell to 20 MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=111, MaxHsupaUserNum=20;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


367


103 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion

103

Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow

Control in Case of Iub Congestion

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061212 HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context By monitoring Iub transmission resources, this feature dynamically adjusts the uplink Uu throughput and thereby greatly improves resource utilization.

Procedure l

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH check box under the parameter PROCESSSWITCH.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > DPU Data Configuration > DPU Configuration Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HsupaTnlSwitch to ON(ON).


368


103 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion NOTE

l UE is in idle mode and supports the HSUPA and HSDPA functions. l The bandwidth between the BSC6900 and the NodeB is 1 MHz.

l

1.

UE is of HSUPA category 5 and is correctly registered at the HLR. That is, traffic class is set to background, the maximum bit rates are set to UL 2048 kbit/s and DL 7200 kbit/s.

2.

On the BSC6900 LMT, start Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth.

3.

The uplink throughput of UE is stable and is about 1M.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > DPU Data Configuration > DPU Configuration Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HsupaTnlSwitch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1; SET UDPUCFGDATA: HsupaTnlSwitch=ON; //Deactivation procedure SET UDPUCFGDATA: HsupaTnlSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


369


104 Configuring HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH)

104

Configuring HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061401 HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature does not depend on hardware.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

l


Context This feature enables the RAN to use the channel quality indicator (CQI) and HS-SCCH information reported by UEs as a reference, therefore effectively reducing the power consumption of the E-AGCH.

Procedure l


Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Mac-e parameters with the following parameter settings: – E-AGCH HPC Parameters is set to YES(YES). – E-AGCH HPC Mode is set to CQI_BASED(Tx Pwr Ctr based on CQI) or HSSCCH_BASED(Tx Pwr Ctr based on HS-SCCH).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


370


104 Configuring HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH)

– E-AGCH Power Offset(0.25dB), E-AGCH Max Power(0.1dB), and E-AGCH Min Power(0.1dB) are set to values that comply with the data plan. l


Use an HSUPA-capable UE to perform PS services over the E-DCH.

2.

Move the UE and observe power changes on each channel carrying HSUPA services. Expected result: – When the UE moves away from the antenna, the transmit power of the E-AGCH increases. – When the UE moves towards the antenna, the transmit power of the E-AGCH decreases.

l


Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set E-AGCH HPC Parameters to NO(NO).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET MACEPARA: SCHEDULEPARA=NO, EAGCHPCPARA=YES, EAGCHPCMOD=CQI_BASED, EAGCHPWROFFSET=100, MAXAGCHPOWER=100, MINAGCHPOWER=-200, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO; //Deactivation procedure SET MACEPARA: SCHEDULEPARA=NO, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


371



105

Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware – This feature does not depend on the BSC6900 hardware. – Dependencies on NodeB Hardware – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE need to configure EBBI board, EBOI board, EDLP or EDLPd board. – The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb,WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE should have the capability of HSUPA Category 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9.

Context This feature enables a single user to obtain a higher uplink throughput and a shorter delay.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

372



Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch.

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Rate Threshold of Streaming Services on 2ms TTI of HSUPA and Ratethreshold of BE on 2ms TTI of HSUPA to appropriate values based on the network plan.

3.

Configure SRB over HSPA by referring to 119 Configuring SRB over HSUPA.

4.

Optional: If the single-user peak-rate improvement algorithm of HSUPA 2 ms TTI is to be enabled, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > the connection-oriented algorithm parameters of an RNC; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the PERFENH_HSUPA_TTI2_ENHANCE_SWITCH check box under the parameter Performance Enhancement Switch.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to verify that the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box is selected.

2.

Use an HSPA-capable UE to establish an HSUPA service. If the RRC_RB_SETUP message shown in Figure 105-1 is traced on the Uu interface, an HSUPA service with 2 ms TTI has been set up on the E-DCH. Figure 105-1 HSUPA service with 2 ms TTI carried on the E-DCH

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch.

2.

Optional: If the single-user peak-rate improvement algorithm of HSUPA 2 ms TTI is to be deactivated, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > the connection-oriented algorithm parameters of an RNC; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

373



PERFENH_HSUPA_TTI2_ENHANCE_SWITCH check box under the parameter Performance Enhancement Switch. ----End

Example //Activating HSUPA 2ms TTI SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1; SET UFRC: StreamHsupa2msTtiRateThs=D64, BeHsupa2msTtiRateThs=D64; //Configuring SRB over HSPA SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSPA; //Configuring single-user peak-rate improvement algorithm of HSUPA 2 ms TTI SET UCORRMPARA: PerfEnhanceSwitch=PERFENH_HSUPA_TTI2_ENHANCE_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating HSUPA 2ms TTISET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-0; //Deactivating single-user peak-rate improvement algorithm of HSUPA 2 ms TTI SET UCORRMPARA: PerfEnhanceSwitch=PERFENH_HSUPA_TTI2_ENHANCE_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


374



106

Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061404 HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware – This feature does not depend on the BSC6900 hardware. – Dependencies on NodeB Hardware – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE is configured with the EBBI, EBOI, EULP, or EULPd board. – The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb ,WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2 has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context This feature enables smooth handovers for HSUPA users between 2 ms TTI capable cells and 10 ms TTI capable cells, aiming to maximize HSUPA resource utilization. When this feature is used, the factors such as the radio environment, CE resource usage, and user throughput rate are considered. This feature contains three functions: Dynamic TTI Adjustment for a Single Voice Service over HSUPA, Differentiation-based Dynamic TTI Adjustment for a Single BE Service over HSUPA, and Admission-CE-based Dynamic TTI Adjustment for a Single BE Service over HSUPA. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


375



Procedure l

Activation Procedure This feature is license controlled. It takes effect after its license is activated.

l


l


----End

Example None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


376



107

Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061405 HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware – This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. – Dependencies on NodeB Hardware – The BTS3812E , BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE should be configured with the EBBI, EBOI, EULP or EULPd board, the downlink services can only be set up on EBBI, EBOI, EDLP. – For BBU3806, the downlink services can only be set up on EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BBU3900 should be configured with the WBBPb ,WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – CN support the uplink speed of 5.74 Mbit/s (or more) . – The UE is of HSUPA category 6, 7, 8, or 9.

Context This feature enables the HSUPA rate at the MAC layer to reach a maximum of 5.74 Mbit/s.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


377



Procedure l


Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the TRM mapping table based on the network plan. The TRM mapping table contains the mapping relationship between the transmission mode and the service type. NOTE

The BSC6900 provides a default TRM mapping table. Use an appropriate mapping policy when configuring the TRM mapping table. For example, if Transport Type is set to ATM, all HSUPA services, including signaling services, must be carried by AAL2PATH that supports HSUPA services.

l

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable HSUPA services to use the 2 ms TTI. In this step, set Service Mapping Strategy Switch to MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable SRBs to be carried on HSUPA channels. In this step, set Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB to HSUPA(UL_EDCH,DL_DCH).


Use an HSPA-capable UE to establish a PS service on the E-DCH and HS-DSCH.

2.

Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. The RRC_RB_SETUP message shows that the 2 ms TTI is used in the uplink and the maximum channelization code IE is 2SF2+2SF4.

3.

The real-time monitoring result of UL Throughput & Bandwidth on the BSC6900 side shows that the bandwidth is 5440 kbit/s and that upload through FTP is normal.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to prohibit the 2 ms TTI from being used on HSUPA channels. In this step, deselect the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the Service Mapping Strategy Switch parameter.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to prohibit SRBs from being carried on HSPA channels. In this step, set Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB to DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH).

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


378



Example //Activating HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1; SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSUPA; //Deactivating HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-0; SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=DCH;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


379



108

Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010632 Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature allows PS streaming services to be carried on E-DCHs, thereby increasing the utilization of cell resources.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

380



UL streaming traffic threshold on HSUPA to an appropriate value. The default value is 256 kbit/s. l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH. Ensure that the MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch is selected.

2.

Use the UE to establish a PS service.

3.

Expected result: The traffic type in the RAB assignment message is streaming, and the RB setup message traced on the Uu interface indicates that the PS service is established on an E-DCH.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch.

----End

Example //Activating Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH-1; SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: UlStrThsOnHsupa=D256; //Deactivating Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


381



109

Configuring HSUPA over Iur

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010635 HSUPA over Iur.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The neighboring RNC supports this feature.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The neighboring RNC must support HSUPA over Iur too.

Context This feature enables HSUPA services to be carried on the Iur interface so that continuous HSUPA services can be provided for UEs moving between BSC6900s.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to configure a neighboring RNC's cell with the E-DCH function. In this step, set Cell Capability Container to an appropriate value.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure data about the neighboring RNC. In Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

382



this step, set Hsupa cap ind over IUR for NRNC to ON to enable HSUPA services to be carried on the Iur interface. l


Verify that the feature HSUPA over Iur has been activated by performing the following operations: – Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UNRNC to query the configuration of the neighboring RNC. – Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UEXT3GCELL to query the configuration of the neighboring RNC's cell.

2.

Verify that an HSUPA service has been established on the Iur interface by performing the following operations: – Configure the neighboring RNC and its cell with the HSUPA function. – Establish an HSUPA service under the serving RNC. – Add a cross-Iur soft handover link. – If the RNSAP_RL_SETUP_REQ message traced on the Iur interface contains HSUPA-related information elements, an HSUPA service has been set up successfully.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Hsupa cap ind over IUR for NRNC to OFF.

----End

Example //Activation procedure MOD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=2, CellId=2, CellCapContainerFdd=EDCH_SUPPORT-1&EDCH_2SF4_SUPPORT-1&EDCH_HARQ_IR_COMBI N_SUPPORT-1; MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-1&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1, ServiceInd=SUPPORT_CS_AND_PS, IurExistInd=TRUE, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, Dpx=2, IurHsupaSuppInd=ON; //Deactivation procedure MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, IurHsupaSuppInd=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


383



110

Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010690 TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2 has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context This feature dynamically adjusts transmission time intervals (TTIs) based on UE transmit power and uplink service throughput. The TTI of UEs in the cell center is switched to 2 ms to increase the service rate, whereas the TTI of UEs at the cell edge is switched to 10 ms to expand the coverage.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the switch for this feature. In this step, select the DRA_DCCC_SWITCH and the DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

384



2.

Optional: If the Uplink Enhanced L2 feature is used, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_L2_OPT_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. NOTE

DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_L2_OPT_SWITCH can be selected only when DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH has been selected.

l


In the Navigation Tree pane on the BSC6900 LMT, click the Trace tab. In the displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On the unfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu Interface Trace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP and RRC_RB_RECFG to trace Uu interface signaling messages, as shown in Figure 110-1. Figure 110-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

2.

Adjust the distance between the UE and the NodeB to trigger a switching of the TTI from 2 ms to 10 ms.

3.

Analyze the traced messages shown in Figure 110-2 and Figure 110-3. The TTI has switched from 2 ms to 10 ms.


385



Figure 110-2 2 ms TTI

Figure 110-3 10 ms TTI

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn off the switch for this feature. In this step, deselect the DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

----End Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


386



Example //Activating TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage //Turning on the switch for the feature TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1&DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_INIT_SEL_SWITCH-1 ; //Turning on the switch for TTI L2+ for BE services based on coverage SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_L2_OPT_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage //Turning off the switch for the feature TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


387



111

Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010641 HSUPA Adaptive Transmission.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware – This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. – Dependencies on NodeB Hardware – The BTS3812E and BTS3812AE should be configured with the EBBI, EBOI, EULP or EULPd board. – The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l


l


Context Considering cell uplink power load, CE resources, and limited uplink coverage, this feature enables the BTS to adjust the target number of uplink retransmissions to increase the throughput per user and cell uplink capacity.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

To enable the message containing NodeB private interface data to be transmitted to the NodeB over the Iub interface, run the BSC6900 MML command SET Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

388



URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Process switch to NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH.

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select PC_HSUPA_HARQNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITCH from the Power Control Switch drop-down list to activate HSUPA Adaptive Transmission.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command SET ADPRETRANSSWTCH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > ADPRETRANSSWTCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate HSUPA Adaptive Transmission on the NodeB side.


Enable the UE to establish an HSUPA BE service. Then, check whether the NBAP_RL_RECFG_PREP message over the Iub interface carries the target number of HSUPA adaptive retransmissions, as shown in Figure 111-1. Figure 111-1 IE information

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect PC_HSUPA_HARQNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITCH from the Power Control Switch drop-down list to deactivate HSUPA Adaptive Transmission.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command SET ADPRETRANSSWTCH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > ADPRETRANSSWTCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate HSUPA Adaptive Transmission on the NodeB side.

----End

Example //Activating HSUPA Adaptive Transmission (BSC6900 MML command) SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


389



SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_HARQNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITCH-1; //Activating HSUPA Adaptive Retransmission (NodeB MML command) SET ADPRETRANSSWTCH: SWITCH =OPEN; //Deactivating HSUPA Adaptive Transmission (BSC6900 MML command) SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_HARQNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITCH-0; //Deactivating HSUPA Adaptive Retransmission (NodeB MML command) SET ADPRETRANSSWTCH: SWITCH=CLOSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


390



112

Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE Resource Management.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

l


Context To improve utilization efficiency of channel element (CE) resources, Huawei RAN introduces the Dynamic CE Resource Management feature. This feature helps to quickly adjust CE allocation by considering the Guaranteed Bit Rate (GBR) and the actual rate of a UE. During preemption of CE resources, this feature is used to allocate CE resources in a reasonable way, therefore ensuring preemption fairness.

Procedure l


l

The feature does not need to be activated.


Start Tracing Messages on the Iub Interface on BSC6900 LMT and check whether the value of dynamic-CE-Switch-Private in NBAP_AUDIT_RSP is 1. If the value is 1, it indicates the feature is activated. Else, it indicates the feature is not activated. When the value of dynamic-CE-Switch-Private is 1, see Figure 112-1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


391



Figure 112-1 dynamic-CE-Switch-Private

l


Set NodeB license control item the number of NodeBs with dynamic CE function enabled to 0 on M2000 client . Details see Allocating a License to NodeBs.

----End

Example None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


392



113

Configuring HSUPA FDE

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010692 HSUPA FDE.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware – This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. – Dependencies on NodeB Hardware – The BTS3812E/BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULPd board. – The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board. – The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

l


Context HSUPA FDE equalizes the spectrum in the frequency domain on the HSUPA E-DPDCH through the UL receiver of the NodeB, therefore suppressing the inter-path interference on the EDPDCH. In this manner, the SNR on the EDPDCH is increased and the UL system capacity of the HSUPA network is expanded. The rate of HSUPA services is also increased in multipath environment. NOTE

For UEs of category 6 and category 7 at a transmission rate higher than 2 Mbit/s, the feature brings notable gains if multipath channels are used in the uplink.



393



1.

l


l

Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to modify the local cell. In this step, set FDE to TRUE. Run the NodeB MML command DSP LOCELL to query the configuration information about the local cell. Expected result: The value of FDE MODE is ENABLED.


Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to modify the local cell. In this step, set FDE to FALSE.

----End

Example //Activation procedure MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, FDE_MODE=TRUE; //Verification procedure DSP LOCELL: LOCELL=1; //Deactivation procedure MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, FDE_MODE=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


394



114

Configuring Adaptive Configuration

of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010712 Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context As the HSPA/HSPA+ becomes an increasingly popular mainstream technology, uplink system performance needs to be enhanced to adapt to the ever-refreshed HSUPA peak rate. Based on the changes in subscriber behaviors and network status, this feature adaptively configures the parameters related to power control on the optimum uplink data channel, increasing the HSUPA system capacity. NOTE

l This feature applies only to HSUPA Best Effort (BE) services whose Transmission Timing Interval (TTI) is 10 ms. l This feature is applicable to the scenarios where dynamic channel configuration control (DCCC) takes effect and the scenarios where dynamic channel element (CE) takes effect (DCCC does not take effect). l This feature is highly dependent on parameter settings. The relevant parameters must retain the default values. This feature may fail to take effect if these parameter settings are changed.



395



CAUTION Before activating this feature, check the settings of the following two parameters: if Reference E-TFCI Index1 is set to 4 and Reference E-TFCI Power Offset1 is set to 12, you are advised to set Reference E-TFCI Power Offset1 to 8. 1.

2.

Activation Procedure in the Scenario Where DCCC Takes Effect a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH check box under the parameter Power Control Switch, and clear the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable HSUPA DCCC. In this step, select the DRA_DCCC_SWITCH and DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH check boxes under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

c.

(Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Dynamic Channel Control Parameter Configuration > HSUPA Rate Adjust Set; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select adjustable rates for EDCH. In this step, select RATE_128KBPS, RATE_256KBPS, RATE_608KBPS, and RATE_2048KBPS check boxes under the parameter HSUPA UpLink Rate Adjust Set.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Initial rate of HSUPA BE traffic to D256.

e.

Disable dynamic CE on the NodeB side.

Activation Procedure in the Scenario Where Dynamic CE Takes Effect a.

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH check box under the parameter Power Control Switch.



396


114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA NOTE

l In dynamic CE scenarios, the service rate assigned by the core network (CN) is 2048 kbit/s, and the BSC6900 configures the Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) power offset (PO) based on the realtime service rate. In the scenarios where DCCC takes effect, the actual service rate is variable, and the BSC6900 configures the HARQ PO based on the realtime service rate. l The HARQ PO is one of the variable that determines the power offset on the E-DPDCH compared with the DPCCH.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UTYPRABHSUPAPC to check the parameters related to power offset for typical services. Figure 114-1 shows an interactive BE service with the CN-assigned rate of 2048 kbit/s, whose Service parameter index is set to 55, Traffic Subflow Index to 0, Transport channel type to TRCH_EDCH_10MS, and the Ul 16QAM Used Indication, Ul enhanced L2 Used Indication, EdPower Interpolation Priority Used Indication, and UL EDPCCH Boosting Indication parameters all set to FALSE. As shown in Figure 114-1, HARQ PO for Large Retransmission is set to 0, HARQ PO for small Retrans at Low Speed is set to 4, and HARQ PO for small Retrans at High Speed is set to 0. Figure 114-1 PO parameters of typical services

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Establish a PS interactive BE service over HSUPA, for example, upload files to the FTP server. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

397


114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA NOTE

l In multi-user scenarios where the target load is limited and the realtime service rate of a single user is lower than a low-rate threshold (such as 150 kbit/s), the user is in the small retransmission state at a low speed. The HARQ PO is the value of HARQ PO for small Retrans at Low Speed. l If the realtime service rate of a single user is higher than a high-rate threshold (such as 300 kbit/ s), the user is in the small retransmission state at a high speed. The HARQ PO is the value of HARQ PO for small Retrans at High Speed.

3.

Check the realtime rate of the new BE service and the CN-assigned rate by referring to Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth, as shown in Figure 114-2.

Figure 114-2 Rate of the new BE service

4.

Verification Procedure in the Scenario Where DCCC Takes Effect a.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Check the uplink throughput and bandwidth by referring to Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth. The data rate of the HSUPA service when accessing the network is 256 kbit/s. Trace messages over the Uu interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface. The value of the HARQ PO in the RRC_RB_SETUP message shows that the user is in the small retransmission state at a high speed. The HARQ PO is equal to the value of HARQ PO for small Retrans at High Speed, as shown in Figure 114-3.


398



Figure 114-3 HARQ PO (4) of a UE for small retransmission at a low speed (256 kbit/s)

b.

After the file upload on the FTP is complete, check the uplink data rate of the UE by referring to Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth. When the data rate is 608 kbit/s, check the value of HARQ PO in the RRC_RB_RECFG message by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface. The HARQ PO changes from HARQ PO for small Retrans at High Speed for 256 kbit/s to that for 608 kbit/s, as shown in Figure 114-4. Figure 114-4 HARQ PO (0) of a UE for small retransmission at a high speed

5.

Verification Procedure in the Scenario Where Dynamic CE Takes Effect a.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Trace messages over the Uu interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface. The value of the HARQ PO in the RRC_RB_SETUP message Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

399



shows that the user is in the small retransmission state at a high speed when accessing the network. The HARQ PO is equal to the value of HARQ PO for small Retrans at High Speed, as shown in Figure 114-5. Figure 114-5 HARQ PO (0) of a UE for small retransmission at a high speed

b.

Simulate a situation that the uplink load is limited by changing the target uplink load to 10%. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSUPA. In this step, set Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor to 10. After the uplink load is limited, check the uplink throughput and bandwidth by referring to Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth. HARQ PO reconfiguration is triggered when the uplink throughput of the UE is lower than the low-rate threshold. Check the value of HARQ PO in the RRC_RB_RECFG message by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface. The HARQ PO changes from HARQ PO for small Retrans at High Speed to HARQ PO for small Retrans at Low Speed, as shown in Figure 114-6. Figure 114-6 HARQ PO (4) of a UE for small retransmission at a low speed

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


400



c.

If the feature WRFD-010641 HSUPA Adaptive Transmission takes effect, use another UE to perform a PS interactive service with an uplink rate of 2048 kbit/ s and downlink rate of 7200 kbit/s in the cell. There is a possibility that the UE switches from small retransmission state to large retransmission state if the cell load increases to a certain value. Check the HARQ PO in the RRC_RB_RECFG message by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface. The HARQ PO changes from HARQ PO for Small Retrans at Low Speed to HARQ PO for Large Retransmission, as shown in Figure 114-7. Figure 114-7 HARQ PO (0) of a UE for large retransmission at a low speed

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn off the switch for this feature. In this step, clear the PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH check box under the parameter Power Control Switch.

----End

Example //Activation procedure in the scenario where DCCC takes effect SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH-1; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-1&DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1; SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET: EdchRateAdjustSet=RATE_128KBPS-1&RATE_256KBPS-1&RATE_608KBPS-1&RATE_2048K BPS-1; SET UFRC: HsupaInitialRate=D256; //Activation procedure in the scenario where dynamic CE takes effect SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


401



//Verification procedure LST UTYPRABHSUPAPC: QueryType=QUERY_BY_PROPERTY, CNDomainId=PS_DOMAIN, TrafficClass=INTERACTIVE, MaxBitRate=256000, TrchType=TRCH_EDCH_10MS, Ul16QamInd=FALSE, UlL2EnhanceInd=FALSE, EdPwrInterpolationInd=FALSE, UlEcBoostingInd=FALSE; //Verification procedure in the scenario where dynamic CE takes effect MOD UCELLHSUPA: CellId=x, MaxTargetUlLoadFactor=10 //Deactivation procedure SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


402



115

Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020136 Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware – This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. – Dependencies on NodeB Hardware – The BTS3812E and BTS3812AE should be configured with the HBBI, EBBI, HULP, EBOI, EULP, or EULPd board. The downlink services can only be set up on the EBBI, EBOI, or EDLP board. – The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

l


Context In commercial networks, the uplink data transmission of HSUPA at some sites is affected randomly by strong external interference. When a site is strongly interfered, the HSUPA throughput of the site is significantly reduced and user experience is affected. This feature can eliminate the strong external interference and maintain high HSUPA throughput, improving user experience. NOTE

This feature is not proposed for multi-RRU cells.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


403



Procedure l


Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Mac-e parameters. a.

Set the MAC-e Schedule Para to YES(YES).

b.

Set the Anti-Interference Scheduling Switch to ON(ON).

c.

Own Cell UL Load Ratio. – In indoor coverage scenarios, the recommended value is 90. – In non-indoor coverage scenarios, the recommended value is 60.

d.

It is recommended that Min UL Cover Load Threshold(dB) be set to 13. NOTE

If Local Cell ID is not specified, the Mac-e scheduling parameters of all local cells under the NodeB will be set.

CAUTION If the following conditions are met, step 2 is not required, and the configuration ends. l On the RNC side, UL_UU_OLC(Uplink UU OLC Algorithm) is not selected for Switch for Cell Load Control. l On the RNC side, ALGORITHM_OFF or ALGORITHM_SECOND is selected for Uplink CAC algorithm switch. 2.

l

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell CAC algorithm switch to RTWP_RESIST_DISTURB(RTWP Resist Disturb Switch).


Run the NodeB MML command DSP LICENSE to display license information. Exception result: the value of Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA Function (per Cell) is bigger than 0.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA to set Mac-e parameters. – Set the MAC-e Schedule Para to YES(YES). – Set the Anti-Interference Scheduling Switch to OFF(OFF).

3.

Make interference. For example: Run the NodeB MML command SET DESENS, set Desensitization Intensity to 6.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

4.

Use a UE to carry out HSUPA upload task.

5.

Select Service > Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell RTWP from the navigation tree in Maintenance tab on NodeB LMT, as shown in Figure 115-1. The column 1-3 indicates the state of this feature disabled. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

404



Figure 115-1 Cell RTWP (feature disabled)

6.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA to set Mac-e parameters. a.

Set the Anti-Interference Scheduling Switch to ON(ON).

b.

Own Cell UL Load Ratio – In indoor coverage scenarios, the recommended value is 90. – In non-indoor coverage scenarios, the recommended value is 60.

c.

It is recommended that Min UL Cover Load Threshold(dB) be set to 13. NOTE

If Local Cell ID is not specified, the Mac-e scheduling parameters of all local cells under the NodeB will be set.

7.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Select Service > Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell RTWP from the navigation tree in Maintenance tab on NodeB LMT, as shown in Figure 115-1. The column 1-3 indicates the state of this feature enabled. If the values of column 1-3 in Figure 115-1 are bigger than the values of 1-3 in Figure 115-2, it indicates the feature has been enabled.


405



Figure 115-2 Cell RTWP (feature enabled)

l


Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Mac-e parameters. – Set the MAC-e Schedule Para to YES(YES). – Set the Anti-Interference Scheduling Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, OUTERSYSINTERSCHSW=ON, OWNCELLULLOADRATIO=60, LOADTHRESH4MINULCOV=13, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO; (Optional)MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CELLID=0, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=RTWP_RESIST_DISTURB-1; //Verification procedure DSP LICENSE:; SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, OUTERSYSINTERSCHSW=OFF, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO; SET DESENS: LOCELL=0, DI=6; SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, OUTERSYSINTERSCHSW=ON, OWNCELLULLOADRATIO=60, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO; //Deactivation procedure SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, OUTERSYSINTERSCHSW=OFF, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


406


116 Configuring Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation

116

Configuring Dual-Threshold

Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020137 Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware – This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.

l

Dependencies on NodeB Hardware – The BTS3812E/AE must be configured with EULPd baord, and all users of the cell should be estabilished in one EULPd board. – The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board. – The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPd board in the UL resource pool which support IC feature, and slot 2 or 3 needs to be configured with at least one WBBPd board. – The RRU3801C 20W and the MTFU for the BTS3812E and BTS3812AE do not support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package – WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation

l


Context This feature is applicable in cells enabled with the WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation feature. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


407



Procedure l


Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Mac-e parameters. – Set the MAC-e Schedule Para to YES. – Set the Max Target RoT Difference Before and After IC to 2.

2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches), set UL IC LDC Optimized Switch in the specified cell to ON(ON).


Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA to set Mac-e parameters. Set Max Target RoT Difference Before and After IC to 0.

2.

Use multi users to carry out upload service.

3.

Select Service > Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell RTWP from the navigation tree in Maintenance tab on NodeB LMT, as shown in Figure 116-1. The column 1-3 indicates the state of this feature disabled, the column 1-4 indicates the state of this feature enabled. If the value of column 1-4 is less than the value of column 1-3, it indicates HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation feature has been enabled. Figure 116-1 Cell RTWP 1

4.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA to set Mac-e parameters. Set Max Target RoT Difference Before and After IC to 2.

5.

Check the Cell RTWP window. If the value of column 1-4 is less than the value of column 1-3, and the values of column 1-4 and column 1-3 increase by 10, it indicates dual-threshold scheduling with HSUPA interference cancellation feature has been enabled. NOTE

The prerequisite of the foregoing result is the cell power limit does not over.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


408



Figure 116-2 Cell RTWP 2

6. l

Run the BSC6900 MML commandLST UCELLCAC, check that UL IC LDC Optimized Switch is set to ON(ON).


Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Mac-e parameters. Set Max Target RoT Difference Before and After IC to 0.

2.

Reallocate the license of this feature on M2000 LMT, and set Allocated to 0.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches), set UL IC LDC Optimized Switch in the specified cell to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Operations at the NodeB SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, MAXDELTAOFTARGETROT=2, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO; //Operations at the RNC MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=1, UlIcLdcOptSwitch=ON; //Verification procedure //Operations at the NodeB SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, MAXDELTAOFTARGETROT=0, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO; SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, MAXDELTAOFTARGETROT=2, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO; //Operations at the RNC LST UCELLCAC: CellId=1; //Deactivation procedure //Operations at the NodeB SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, MAXDELTAOFTARGETROT=0, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


409



//Operations at the RNC MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=1, UlIcLdcOptSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


410



117



Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features must be configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

l


Context This feature enables a single HSUPA cell to serve a maximum of 60 HSUPA users simultaneously. After the maximum number of users is reached, the cell attempts to establish services on DCHs to accommodate additional users.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Code Number for E-RGCH/E-HICH to appropriate value.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Maximum HSUPA user number to 60. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

411


l



On the BSC6900 LMT, click Monitor. Then, double-click UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring in the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. In the displayed Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to Cell User Number.

2.

Use UEs to access the cell one by one. Then, make UEs establish PS services, for example, upload files through FTP. Expected result: Each UE establishes PS services successfully. – If the number of UEs is less than or equal to 60, uplink services are carried on HSUPA channels and downlink services are carried on HSDPA channels. – If the number of UEs is greater than 60, HSPA services of the excessive UEs are carried on R99 channels.

3.

View the maximum number of HSUPA users indicated by the counter VS.HSUPA.UE.Max.Cell on the M2000. NOTE


l



----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Allocating code resources to E-RGCHs MOD UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111, ErgchEhichCodeNum=3; //Setting the maximum number of HSUPA users to 60 MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=111, MaxHsupaUserNum=60;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


412



118

Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware – This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. – Dependencies on NodeB Hardware – The BTS3812E or BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULPd board, the downlink service cannot be estabilished on HBBI/HDLP/NDLP, and the IC effect cannot be shared between BB boards. – The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board and the IC effect can be shared between the BB boards. – The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board, and only if slot 2 or 3 is configured with at least one WBBPd or WBBPf board, IC effect can be shared between the WBBPd or WBBPf boards. – WBBPd/WBBPf is needed for 3900 series NodeB to support HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation. If the inter-board sharing IC need to be supported, the WBBPd/WBBPf should be configured in the UL resource pool which used for interboard sharing IC, and at least 1 WBBPd/WBBPf should be configured in slot 2 or 3.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


413



Context

CAUTION Activate this feature when the traffic volume in a cell is low. The reason is that the cell must be deactivated before this feature is activated; after the cell is deactivated, the services in this cell are disrupted. Interference Cancellation (IC) is performed to cancel the interference caused by the uplink high rate E-DPDCH data of other users, improving the demodulation signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) and increasing the uplink capacity of the UMTS network. NOTE

l For 3900 series base stations, the WBBPd/WBBPf must be configured on slot 2 or slot 3 on the BBU3900 to support the uplink data IC integrated interference cancellation function. The uplink resource group must contain the WBBPd/WBBPf. Therefore, cell of the group can support the IC feature. For details, see Adding a Baseband Board to a 3900 Series Base Station. l If the DBS3800 is configured with two EBBCd boards, it is recommended that two uplink resource groups be allocated to the two boards separately. In this way, both the boards support HSUPA uplink interference cancellation. For details about how to configure the active and standby BTSs, see Adding an EBBC or EBBCd. l If the BTS3812E or BTS3812AE is configured with two EULPd boards, it is recommended that two uplink resource groups be allocated to the two boards separately. In this way, both the boards support HSUPA uplink interference cancellation. For details about how to configure the active and standby BTSs, see Adding a Baseband Board to the BTS3812E or BTS3812AE.

Procedure l

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


If the UMTS cell has been activated, run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the cell.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to modify the local cell. In this step, set IC to TRUE.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to activate the cell.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command SET RESALLOCRULE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > RESALLOCRULE; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Auto Rebuild Cell Switch to ON(ON) and set Cs User Number Threshold and Ps User Number Threshold. If the number of CS users or the number of PS CELL_DCH users in the downlink resource group is equal or smaller than the corresponding threshold, the local cells are reestablished automatically.


414



1.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP LOCELL to query the status of a specified local cell. Expected result: The value of IC MODE is ENABLED.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command LST RESALLOCRULE. Expected result: The value of Auto Rebuild Cell Switch is ON.

3.

Select Service > Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell RTWP from the navigation tree in Maintenance tab on NodeB LMT, as shown in Figure 118-1. The column 1-3 indicates the state of this feature disabled, the column 1-4 indicates the state of this feature enabled. If the value of column 1-4 is less than the value of column 1-3, it indicates the feature has been enabled. Figure 118-1 Cell RTWP 1

l


Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to modify the local cell. In this step, set IC to FALSE.

----End

Example //Activation procedure DEA UCELL: CellId=1; MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, IC_MODE=TRUE; ACT UCELL: CellId=1; SET RESALLOCRULE: SW=ON, CSUSERNUM=0, PSUSERNUM=0; //Verification procedure DSP LOCELL: LOCELL=1; LST RESALLOCRULE:; //Deactivation procedure MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, IC_MODE=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


415



119

Configuring SRB over HSUPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – BSC6900 – This feature does not depend on the hardware. – Requirements for the NodeB – The 38XX series NodeB supports this feature, and the EBBI, EBOI, EULP or EULPd, EBBC or EBBCd is required. – The 3900 series NodeB supports this feature, and the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf is required.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package feature must be configured before this feature is configured.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The transmission mapping to support SRB over HSUPA has been configured.

Context This feature provides high signaling rate and shortens call setup delay. Compared with the function of carrying SRBs on DCHs, this feature saves code resources and reduces cell load.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

416



modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB to HSUPA(UL_EDCH,DL_DCH) or HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH). NOTE

If the feature is effective in the case of RRC connection establishment, set Effective Flag of Signaling RB Channel Type to TRUE.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UFRCCHLTYPEPARA to query whether the SRBs are carried over HSUPA.

2.

Use a UE with the HSPA function to set up an RRC connection on the enhanced DCH (E-DCH). View the RRC_RRC_CONN_SETUP message from the Uu interface trace data. If the EDCH information is contained in the message, this feature is activated.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB to DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH) and Effective Flag of Signaling RB Channel Type to FALSE.

----End

Example //Activating SRB over HSUPA SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSUPA, SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag=TRUE; //Verifying SRB over HSUPA LST UFRCCHLTYPEPARA:; //Deactivating SRB over HSUPA SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=DCH, SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


417



120

Configuring Control Channel

Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140202 Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2). Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation is short for CCPIC.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The 3900 series base station (except for BTS3902E) must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board. – To support inter-board IC, the WBBPd or WBBPf board must be configured for the uplink resource group that supports inter-board IC. In addition, at least one WBBPd or WBBPf board must be configured in slot 2 or 3. – It is recommended that the WBBPa or WBBPb board be replaced with a WBBPd or WBBPf board to fully utilize CCPIC (Phase 2). Assume that a WBBPa or WBBPb board and a WBBPd or WBBPf board are inserted into one BBU to form a UL resource group. To share the CCPIC gains of the WBBPd or WBBPf board when NodeB IC Mode is set to FULL_IC(All board can share IC gain), UEs with their data channel carried on the WBBPa or WBBPb board must set up another DPCCH on the WBBPd or WBBPf board for power control. Of the UEs, those with their downlink services carried on an HSDPA channel must set up another HS-DPCCH on the WBBPd or WBBPf board. The extra channels consume extra processing resources, reducing the total number of users supported by the system.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-010210 Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (CCPIC) has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Others Prerequisites – None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


418



Context l

Precautions – Gains from CCPIC (Phase 2) and Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA may decrease. – If CCPIC (Phase 2) is enabled, gains from Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA decrease. – If Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA is enabled, gains from CCPIC (Phase 2) decrease. – System throughput is always greater when CCPIC (Phase 2) is enabled together with Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA, as compared with when CCPIC (Phase 2) is not enabled together with Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA or none of the features is enabled. – Gains from CCPIC (Phase 2) and HSUPA Adaptive Transmission may decrease. – If CCPIC (Phase 2) is enabled, gains from HSUPA Adaptive Transmission decrease. – If HSUPA Adaptive Transmission is enabled, gains from CCPIC (Phase 2) decrease. – System throughput is always greater when CCPIC (Phase 2) is enabled together with HSUPA Adaptive Transmission, as compared with when CCPIC (Phase 2) is not enabled together with HSUPA Adaptive Transmission or none of the features is enabled. – The cell throughput decreases for 5 to 10 seconds and all UEs carried on a WBBPa or WBBPb board experience call drops when the following conditions are true: – A WBBPd or WBBPf board and the WBBPa or WBBPb board are inserted into one BBU to form a UL resource group. – The setting for ICMODE changes when the CCPIC (Phase 2) feature is enabled.

l

Data Preparation – Scenario 1: No WBBPa or WBBPb board is configured for a base station. The configuration is not required. – Scenario 2: A WBBPa or WBBPb board is configured for a base station. The WBBPa or WBBPb board cannot benefit from CCPIC (Phase 2) gains by default. Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Source

IC_MODE

ICMODE

PART_IC(Old board can not share IC gain)

Network plan

– Scenario 2: A WBBPa or WBBPb board is configured for a base station. The WBBPa or WBBPb board cannot benefit from CCPIC (Phase 2) gains.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Source

IC_MODE

ICMODE

FULL_IC(All board can share IC gain)

Network plan


419



Procedure l

Activation Procedure After the license is activated, this feature has been activated. NOTE

Even if all prerequisites are ready, CCPIC (Phase 2) may not be available temporarily to the cell to avoid interruption of ongoing services. To ensure that the cell can be adjusted to support CCPIC (Phase 2), the Auto Rebuild Cell Switch must be set to ON(ON).

1.

Run the NodeB MML command SET RESALLOCRULE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > RESALLOCRULE; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Auto Rebuild Cell Switch to ON(ON) and set Cs User Number Threshold and Ps User Number Threshold. If the number of CS users or the number of PS CELL_DCH users in the downlink resource group is equal or smaller than the corresponding threshold, the local cells are reestablished automatically.

2.

Select operations as configured. – Scenario 1: The configuration ends. – Scenario 2: Run the NodeB MML command SET ICMODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Basic Information > Radio Management > ICMODE; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set NodeB IC Mode to PART_IC(Old board can not share IC gain). – Scenario 3: Run the NodeB MML command SET ICMODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Basic Information > Radio Management > ICMODE; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set NodeB IC Mode to FULL_IC(All board can share IC gain).

l

Verification Procedure Check whether the CCPIC (Phase 2) feature has been activated by using the RNC or NodeB LMT. If the base station is configured with the RRU3801C, the following verification mode does not apply. NOTE

Observe the activation when there are a large number of UEs because CCPIC (Phase 2) gain is obvious only when there are a large number of UEs.

– On the RNC LMT: 1.

On the RNC LMT, click Monitor, choose Cell Performance Monitoring > RTWP, enter the cell ID, and click Submit.

2.

Check whether a valid value is displayed for Cell measured RTWP After First Stage Interference Cancellation. Expected result: A valid value is displayed, indicating that the CCPIC (Phase 2) feature is functioning properly. When there are a large number of UEs, Cell measured RTWP After First Stage Interference Cancellation is smaller than Cell Measured RTWP. The RTWP decrease further indicates that this feature has been activated. Figure 120-1 shows the RTWP monitoring result displayed on the RNC LMT.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


420



Figure 120-1 Cell-level RTWP monitoring on the RNC LMT

– On the NodeB LMT: 1.

On the NodeB LMT, click Maintenance, choose Service > Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell RTWP.

2.

Check whether a valid value is displayed for Cell measured RTWP After First Stage interference cancellation. Expected result: A valid value is displayed, indicating that the CCPIC (Phase 2) feature is functioning properly. When there are a large number of UEs, Cell measured RTWP After First Stage interference cancellation is smaller than Cell measured RTWP. The RTWP decrease further indicates that this feature has been activated. Figure 120-2 shows the RTWP monitoring result displayed on the NodeB LMT.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


421



Figure 120-2 Figure 7-3 Cell-level RTWP monitoring on the NodeB LMT

l


----End

Example //Activation procedure SET RESALLOCRULE: SW=ON, CSUSERNUM=0, PSUSERNUM=0; //Scenario 2 SET ICMODE: ICMODE=PART_IC; //Scenario 3 SET ICMODE: ICMODE=FULL_IC;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


422



121

Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – NDLP and NBBI in the NodeB do not support this feature.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE is HSDPA-capable.

Context High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) is one of the important features defined in 3GPP specifications. HSDPA can significantly increase the downlink peak rate per user, shorten the round trip delay, and expand the system capacity. This feature package provides the basic functions of HSDPA to meet the requirements for test or trial operation of HSDPA services.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHSDPA to set HSDPA-related parameters based on the network plan.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLHSDPA to activate this feature.

3.

Configure Iub transport for HSDPA. – In an ATM network:

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


423



a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMTRF to configure new records of ATM traffic based on network planning requirements.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP to query the transmission resource mapping.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH to set associated parameters according to the network plan. TX traffic record index and RX traffic record index of the AAL2 path to be added must be the same as those set in the ADD ATMTRF command. In addition, AAL2 Path Type should be set according to the mapping between service types and AAL paths.

d.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH to configure an AAL2 path for HSDPA based on network planning requirements.

– In an IP network: a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ADJMAP to query whether resource management mapping is configured for the adjacent node. – If configured, check the TRMMAP index of the adjacent node. – If not configured, run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP to query the default TRMMAP ID used by the adjacent node based on the settings of Interface Type and Transport Type. For example, if Interface Type is set to Iub Interface, then TRMMAP ID is 1.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP to check whether the IP path mapping to the HSDPA service is configured according to the TRMMAP ID used by the adjacent node. – If configured, no further action is required. – If not configured, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to configure the IP path mapping to the HSDPA service.

NOTE

To ensure that HSDPA services can be set up successfully, HSDPA services must be mapped to the corresponding AAL2 paths or IP paths. To avoid the affect on ongoing services, you can add new AAL2 paths or IP paths.

l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether this feature is activated. If HSDPA Operational State is set to Enabled, this feature has been activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSDPA to deactivate this feature.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether the HSDPA feature is deactivated. If HSDPA Operational State is set to Disabled, this feature has been deactivated.

----End

Example // Setting HSDPA-related parameters ADD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=3000, AllocCodeMode=Automatic, HsPdschMaxCodeNum=4, HsPdschMinCodeNum=1, CodeAdjForHsdpaSwitch=ON; //Activating HSDPA Introduction Package ACT UCELLHSDPA: CellId=3000; //Configuring Iub transport for HSDPA //ATM network

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


424



ADD ATMTRF: TRFX=118, ST=RTVBR, UT=KBIT/S, PCR=5150, SCR=5149, REMARK="5Mfor-HSDPA"; ADD AAL2PATH: ANI=10, PATHID=2, CARRYT=IMA, CARRYF=1, CARRYSN=0, CARRYIMAGRPN=1, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=13, VCI=71, TXTRFX=118, RXTRFX=118, AAL2PATHT=HSPA; //Adding an AAL2 path ADD AAL2PATH: PATHID=2, SN=12, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, VPI=13, VCI=71, ST=RTVBR, PCR=5150, SCR=5149, RCR=5150, NT=LOCAL, PAT=H_NRT; //IP network ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=1, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP,PATHT=BE, IPADDR="80.1.1.1", PEERIPADDR="10.161.0.1", PEERMASK="255.255.255.0", TXBW=1000, RXBW=1000; //Verifying HSDPA Introduction Package DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=3000, LstFormat=VERTICAL; //Deactivating HSDPA Introduction Package DEA UCELLHSDPA: CellId=3000; DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=3000, LstFormat=VERTICAL;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


425



122

Configuring 15 Codes per Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061001 15 Codes per Cell.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package.

l


Context This feature provides code resources occupied by Huawei HSDPA services. An HS-PDSCH can use up to 15 SF16 codes in a cell.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Code Number for HS-SCCH to 1.


426


122 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell NOTE

l The BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) fails to be executed when HSDPA is activated. Therefore, run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters. Set ACTSTATUS to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to deactivate HSDPA before configuring this feature and run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters. Set ACTSTATUS to Activated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to reactivate HSDPA after configuring this feature. l The BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) fails to be executed when CELL-FACH enhancement is activated. Therefore, run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLEFACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Enhanced FACH parameters. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to deactivate enhanced CELLFACH before configuring this feature and Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLEFACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Enhanced FACH parameters. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to reactivate enhanced CELL-FACH after configuring this feature. l By default, the number of HS-SCCH codes for each cell is 4. If the default number is used, the HS-PDSCH can use only 14 SF16 codes. To enable the HS-PDSCH to use all 15 SF16 codes, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the value of Code Number for HS-SCCH to 1.

2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Allocate Code Mode to Manual(Manual) and Code Number for HS-PDSCH to 15.


Initialize UMTS monitoring on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 122-1. Click Submit. A real-time monitoring window is displayed. Figure 122-1 Cell Performance Monitoring

2.

Check whether 15 SF16 codes are occupied by the HS-PDSCH in the Cell Performance Monitoring window. Expected result: The HS-PDSCH occupies 15 SF16 codes.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


427


l




----End

Example //Verifying 15 Codes per Cell MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=1, HsScchCodeNum=1; MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=1, AllocCodeMode=Manual, HsPdschCodeNum=15;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


428


123 Configuring Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex

123

Configuring Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061018 Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature enables the allocation of different codes in the same TTI to different users or the multiplexing of the same code in different TTIs for different users to increase the code resource utilization and system throughput.

Procedure l


l


l


----End Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


429


124 Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF)

124

Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ &

Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061009 HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF).

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context Huawei provides multiple HSDPA scheduling algorithms such as maximum C/I (MAXCI), round-robin (RR), proportional fair (PF), and Enhanced Proportional Fair (EPF).Before the HSDPA feature is enabled, HARQ must be enabled and HSDPA scheduling algorithms must be set.

Procedure l


l HSDPA H-ARQ is activated automatically without any configuration. l This section describes how to set Max C/I, RR, and PF scheduling algorithms. For details on how to set the EPF scheduling algorithm, see the description of the feature WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR.

1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

430


124 Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF)

3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter Scheduling Method to MAXCI(Max C/I Algorithm), RR(Round Robin Algorithm) or PF(PF Algorithm). l


l

Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA to query the settings of the parameter Scheduling Method.


----End

Example //Activation procedure SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0, SM=MAXCI; //Verification procedure LST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


431



125

Configuring HSDPA Static Code

Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061005 HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context This feature provides two code allocation strategies: HSDPA static code allocation and RNCcontrolled dynamic code allocation. When R99 and HSDPA services co-exist, this feature enables full use of channelization code resources to expand system capacity.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allocate Code Mode to Manual or Automatic. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

432



– If Allocate Code Mode is set to Manual, set Code Number for HS-PDSCH to specify the number of HS-PDSCH codes. – If Allocate Code Mode is set to Automatic, set Code Max Number for HSPDSCH to specify the maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes and set Code Min Number for HS-PDSCH to specify the minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes. l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELLHSDPA to query code allocation mode.

2.

On the BSC6900 LMT, click to display Cell Performance Monitoring. Set Monitor Item to Cell Code Tree Monitor and click Submit. The Cell Performance Monitoring tab page is displayed.

3.

View the number of codes allocated to the HS-PDSCH in the cell. If Allocate Code Mode is set to Manual, the monitoring window of cell code tree usage shows that the number of codes allocated to the HS-PDSCH remains unchanged. If Allocate Code Mode is set to Automatic, the monitoring window of cell code tree usage shows that the number of codes allocated to the HS-PDSCH varies with service access requests in the cell. For example, the number of codes allocated to the HS-PDSCH increases with the increase of HSDPA access requests and decreases with the decrease of HSDPA access requests.


----End

Example //Activating HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=11, AllocCodeMode=Manual, HsPdschCodeNum=5, HsScchCodeNum=4; MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=11, AllocCodeMode=Automatic, HsPdschMaxCodeNum=5, HsPdschMinCodeNum=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


433



126

Configuring HSDPA Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061004 HSDPA Power Control.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is configured.

l


Context After an HSDPA service is introduced, the total downlink transmit power of each cell is classified into common channel power, dedicated physical channel (DPCH) power, and power of HSDPA physical channels (HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH). To achieve high HSDPA performance, power resources except those reserved for common channels are dynamically allocated to DPCHs and HSDPA physical channels. For R99 services, the DPCH power can be adjusted by means of inner-loop and outer-loop power control. HSDPA channel power resources can be dynamically allocated and adjusted among users by using the NodeB scheduling algorithm. HS-PDSCH power is controlled by the transport format and resource combination (TFRC) algorithm and therefore does not require power control. This feature enables operators to configure the appropriate power control mode of the HS-SCCH, increasing the power efficiency and system capacity and improving the user experience.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Activating the adaptive HS-SCCH power control based on the channel quality indicator (CQI) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

434



2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allocate Code Mode to Manual, Code Number for HS-PDSCH to 5, and Code Number for HSSCCH to 1.

b.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HS-SCCH Power Control Method in CELL DCH state to CQI.

Activating the fixed HS-SCCH power control a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allocate Code Mode to Manual, Code Number for HS-PDSCH to 5, and Code Number for HSSCCH to 1.

b.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HS-SCCH Power Control Method in CELL DCH state to FIXED.


2.

l

a.

Verifying the adaptive HS-SCCH power control based on the CQI a.

Use an HSUPA-capable UE to set up a PS service over the HS-SCCH.

b.

Move the UE between the cell center and the cell edge to view the power change on HS-SCCHs. Expected result: The HS-SCCH power changes with the CQI.

Verifying the fixed HS-SCCH power control a.

Use an HSUPA-capable UE to set up a PS service over the HS-SCCH.

b.

Move the UE between the cell center and the cell edge to view the power change on the HS-SCCH. Expected result: The HS-SCCH power remains unchanged.


----End

Example //Activating HSUPA Power Control //Setting the adaptive HS-SCCH power control based on the CQI MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=111, AllocCodeMode=Manual, HsPdschCodeNum=5, HsScchCodeNum=1; SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=111, HSSCCHPWRCMINDCH=CQI, HSSCCHFERTRGTINDCH=10; //Setting the fixed HS-SCCH power control MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=111, AllocCodeMode=Manual, HsPdschCodeNum=5,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


435



HsScchCodeNum=1; SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=111, HSSCCHPWRCMINDCH=FIXED, SCCHPWR=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


436



127

Configuring HSDPA Admission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061003 HSDPA Admission Control.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature implements admission control over HSDPA users in the aspects such as the number of HSDPA users, remaining power resources, Iub interface resources, and service rate thresholds. This feature can ensure the QoS of existing HSDPA users while fully utilizing the resources.

Procedure l


Activate power resource admission. – Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Uplink CAC algorithm switch and Downlink CAC algorithm switch according to the network planning. – For HSDPA services, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


437



batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select related admission algorithms in the Cell CAC algorithm switch parameter. The available admission algorithms are HSDPA_GBP_MEAS(HSDPA GBP Meas Algorithm), HSDPA_PBR_MEAS (HSDPA PBR Meas Algorithm), and HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSDPA UU Load Admission Control Algorithm). – Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set power resource admission related parameters and the maximum number of HSDPA users. NOTE

If HSDPA_PBR_MEAS(HSDPA PBR Meas Algorithm) is selected in Cell CAC algorithm switch, set Hsdpa streaming PBR threshold and HSDPA best effort PBR threshold in this step.

2.

Activate NodeB credit resource admission. – Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH in CAC algorithm switch. – Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CRD_ADCTRL(Credit Admission Control Algorithm) in Cell CAC algorithm switch.

3.

Activate Iub interface resource admission. The Iub interface resource admission is mandatory and is activated automatically. NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) or MOD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to change the Iub interface bandwidth.

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Enable two UEs UE1 and UE2 in idle mode to camp on the test cell, and the test cell must support HSDPA.

2.

On the HLR, set PS service type to background or interactive.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set the maximum number of HSDPA users to 1.

4.

Use UE1 to initiate an HSDPA PS service. After the service is set up successfully, check the RRC_RB_SETUP message over the Uu interface. You can view that the new-H-RNTI IE is under the rb-mappinginfo IE, and the value of the dlTransportChannel-Type IE is hsdsch.

5.

Use UE2 to initiate an HSDPA PS service. The service should fail to set up. Check the RRC_RB_SETUP message over the Uu interface. You can view that the new-HRNTI IE is not under the rb-mappinginfo IE, and the value of the dlTransportChannel-Type IE is dch. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

438


l


6.

Release all the PS services.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set Maximum HSDPA user number of the test cell to 64.

8.

Use UE1 and UE2 to initiate an HSDPA PS service. Expected result: Services are set up successfully on UE1 and UE2.


Deactivate power resource admission. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Uplink CAC algorithm switch and Downlink CAC algorithm switch to ALGORITHM_OFF.

2.

Deactivate NodeB credit resource admission. – Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH in Cell CAC algorithm switch. – Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CRD_ADCTRL(Credit Admission Control Algorithm) in Cell CAC algorithm switch.

3.

Deactivate Iub interface resource admission. The Iub interface resource admission is mandatory and does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example //Activating power resource admission MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_SECOND; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-1&HSDPA_GBP_MEAS-1&HSDPA_PBR_MEAS-1; MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, HsdpaStrmPBRThd=70, HsdpaBePBRThd=30, MaxHsdpaUserNum=64, MaxUlTxPowerforConv=24, MaxUlTxPowerforInt=24; //Activating NodeB credit resource admission SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-1; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-1; MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, UlHoCeResvSf=SF16, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SF32; //Deactivating power resource admission MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF; //Deactivating NodeB credit resource admission SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-0; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


439



128

Configuring Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061020 Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware – Only BSC6900 support this feature. – Dependencies on NodeB Hardware – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE should be configured with the EULP, EBBI, EBOI or EULPd board. – The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package – WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

l


Context l

The NodeB detects HSPA services with low traffic, such as gaming services and instant messaging services (such as MSN).

l

The NodeB enables low traffic services to obtain more resources based on the scheduling and flow control principles of HSPA, which reduces delay in low traffic services.

l


Procedure

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


440



1.

l


l

Run the NodeB MML command SET UEQOSENHANCEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > UEQOSENHANCEPARA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the burst packet sizes of the gold, silver, and copper users according to the actual conditions. Run the NodeB MML command LST UEQOSENHANCEPARA to query the burst packet sizes of the gold, silver, and copper users.


Run the NodeB MML command SET UEQOSENHANCEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > UEQOSENHANCEPARA; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set the burst packet sizes of the gold, silver, and copper users to 0. NOTE

When the burst packet size of a user is set to 0, it indicates that the NodeB stops identifying the low traffic services of the user.

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET UEQOSENHANCEPARA: ULGOLDUEBPS=10, ULSILVERUEBPS=11, ULCOPPERUEBPS=12, DLGOLDUEBPS=13, DLSILVERUEBPS=14, DLCOPPERUEBPS=15; //Verification procedure LST UEQOSENHANCEPARA:; //Deactivation procedure SET UEQOSENHANCEPARA: ULGOLDUEBPS=0, ULSILVERUEBPS=0, ULCOPPERUEBPS=0, DLGOLDUEBPS=0, DLSILVERUEBPS=0, DLCOPPERUEBPS=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


441



129

Configuring HSDPA Flow Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061010 HSDPA Flow Control.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context For each MAC-hs queue, HSDPA Flow Control calculates the pre-allocated Iub bandwidth based on the Uu transmission rate and the amount of data buffered in the NodeB. The Uu transmission rate of the MAC-hs queue is determined by the scheduling algorithm. For each MAC-hs queue, if the Iub transmission rate is higher than the Uu transmission rate, the data packets are buffered. Too much data buffered in the NodeB leads to transmission delay and even packet loss. Therefore, each MAC-hs queue should not have too much data buffered in the NodeB. However, it should retain a certain amount of data to prevent wasting the Uu resources due to not having data to transmit. The procedure for HSDPA Flow Control is briefly described as follows: 1.

The NodeB measures the buffered data amount of each MAC-hs queue and the average Uu transmission rate.

2.

The NodeB estimates the buffering time based on the measurements.

3.

The NodeB adjusts the Iub bandwidth pre-allocated to the MAC-hs queue.

l


Procedure

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


442



1.

Run the NodeB MML command SET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > ATMPort > HSDPA Flow Control > HSDPA Flow Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the parameter Flow Control Switch to enable the NodeB HSDPA flow control function. The adaptive flow control algorithm is recommended. There are four types of HSDPA flow control algorithm as follows: – When Flow Control Switch is set to STATIC_BW_SHAPING, the NodeB does not adjust the available bandwidth for HSDPA users based on delay and packet loss on the Iub interface. Then, subtracting Iub bandwidth used by R99 from Iub bandwidth configured, the NodeB performs Iub shaping and distributes flow to HSDPA users. – When Flow Control Switch is set to DYNAMIC_BW_SHAPING, the NodeB adjusts the available bandwidth for HSDPA users based on delay and packet loss on the Iub interface. Then, considering the data rate on the air interface, the NodeB performs Iub shaping and distributes flow to HSDPA users. – When Flow Control Switch is set to NO_BW_SHAPING, the NodeB does not adjust the bandwidth based on delay and packet loss on the Iub interface. The NodeB reports the conditions about the air interface to the RNC, and then the RNC allocates the bandwidth. – When Flow Control Switch is set to BW_SHAPING_ONOFF_TOGGLE, the flow control policy for the ports of the NodeB is either DYNAMIC_BW_SHAPING or NO_BW_SHAPING in accordance with the congestion detection mechanism of the NodeB. This flow control algorithm is recommended.

l


Choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring on the BSC6900 LMT. Create UL Throughput Bandwidth and DL Throughput Bandwidth tasks.

2.

Assume that the current Iub bandwidth is 4 MHz and the bandwidth usage is 80%. Enable an HSDPA-capable UE1 to access the network and originate a PS service. Record the throughput of UE1. Expected result: The throughput of UE1 is 3.2 Mbps.

3.

Enable an HSDPA-capable UE2 to access the network (with the same configuration as UE1) and originate a download service. Record the throughput of the two UEs. Expected result: The throughput of UE1 decreases after UE2 accesses the network. When the throughput of the two UEs is stable, the total bandwidth of the two UEs is 4 MHz. If user priority, service type and Security Parameter Index (SPI) of the two UEs are the same, the final ratio of the two UEs' throughput is 1:1.

l

Deactivation Procedure You can deactivate the current algorithm by selecting one of the other flow control algorithms.

----End Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


443



Example //Activating HSDPA Flow Control and setting the flow control mode to adaptive flow control SET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA: SRN=0, SN=6, BEAR=ATM, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, PN=0, SWITCH= BW_SHAPING_ONOFF_TOGGLE, TD=2, DR=1, ITM=TERRESTRIAL;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


444



130

Configuring HSDPA Mobility Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061006 HSDPA Mobility Management.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature enables an HSDPA-capable UE to be handed over to an R99 cell or another HSDPA cell. This feature also enables an HSDPA-capable UE to change cells with a small probability of service interruption.

Procedure l


The methods of activating intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-RAT handovers are the same for HSDPA users and R99 users. For details, see the following sections: – 35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover – 236 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage – 237 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS – 247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


445



– 269 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage – 270 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS – 275 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service – 276 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load l

Verification Procedure None

l


----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


446


131 Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28

131

Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061002 HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature can provide proper HSDPA services for the UEs of category 1 to category 28.

Procedure l


l


l


----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


447


132 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation

132

Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010629 DL 16QAM Modulation.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE should have the capability of HSDPA besides Category 11 and Category 12:category 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28.

Context Compared with QPSK, 16QAM is a higher-order downlink data modulation scheme. This feature enables the peak rate on the Uu interface to reach 14.4 Mbit/s. l

The HS-PDSCH is used to carry the HS-DSCH data. The HS-PDSCH may use QPSK or 16QAM modulation symbols.

l

When the UE is in poor radio environment, the transmission can adopt the low-order QPSK modulation mode and small transport blocks to ensure communication quality.

l

When the UE is in good radio environment, the transmission can adopt the high-order 16QAM modulation mode and large transport blocks to achieve high peak rate.

l

The UE of category 10 can support a maximum of 15 HS-PDSCH codes and 16QAM modulation mode. The supported peak rate on the air interface can reach 14.4 Mbit/s.

l


Procedure

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


448


132 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation NOTE

HSDPA Introduction Package must be activated before activating this feature. For the method of activating HSDPA Introduction Package, see the section "Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package."

1.

l

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set 16QAM Switch to OPEN(open).

Verification Procedure NOTE

l For the 16QAM modulation of the HSDPA UE, the NodeB license control item must be enabled. l As defined in 3GPP 25.306, the UE in category 8 can support both QPSK and 16QAM modulation schemes. Only 16QAM modulation, however, enables the throughput of category 8 UE to reach 5 Mbit/s. NOTE

Only in case of good environment quality of the channel, the throughput of category 8 UE can reach 5 Mbit/s.

Perform the following steps to check whether the download rate can reach 5 Mbit/s.

l

1.

Use the UE to start a PS interactive service of DL 7200 kbit/s. The PS service is carried on the HS-DSCH. The UE keeps in Cell-DCH state.

2.

Start FTP (10 threads) to download given files, which are larger than 1 GB. By monitoring the DL throughput and bandwidth, you find that the PS downloading service is normal and the bit rate is higher than 5 Mbit/s.


Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set 16QAM Switch to CLOSE(close).

----End

Example //Activating procedure SET MACHSPARA: CME16QAMSW=OPEN; //Deactivating procedure SET MACHSPARA: CME16QAMSW=CLOSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


449



133

Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010631 Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature implements dynamic code allocation on the NodeB side. The NodeB adjusts the allocation of code resources in each TTI according to available code resources and scheduling algorithms. This feature can further improve the utilization of code resources.

Procedure l


HSDPA Introduction Package must be activated before activating this feature. For the method of activating HSDPA Introduction Package, see the section "Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package."

1.

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Dynamic Code Switch to OPEN(open).


450



1.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set Dynamic Code Switch to CLOSE(close).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA. – set Allocate Code Mode to Manual. – set Code Number for HS-PDSCH to 5.

3.

Use a UE that belongs to category 8 or is capable of higher HSDPA performance to download 200 MB files from the FTP server in the serving cell.

4.

Select Service > Trace Management > Interface Trace Task > User from the navigation tree in Maintenance tab on NodeB LMT, select (DL)Hsdpa User Enhanced Schedule Data message, as shown in Figure 133-1.

Figure 133-1 User Tracing

5.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

To query the ucMaxPdschCodeNum is 5, as shown in Figure 133-2.


451



Figure 133-2 Message Browser

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

6.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set Dynamic Code Switch to OPEN(open).

7.

Trace (DL)Hsdpa User Enhanced Schedule Data message, ucMaxPdschCodeNum is less than the value of 5, it indicates the feature has been enabled. as shown in Figure 133-3.


452



Figure 133-3 Message Browser

l


Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Dynamic Code Switch to CLOSE(close).

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Operations on the NodeB side SET MACHSPARA: DYNCODESW=OPEN; //Verification procedure //Operations on the NodeB side SET MACHSPARA: DYNCODESW=CLOSE; //Operations on the BSC6900 side MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=0, AllocCodeMode=Manual, HsPdschCodeNum=5; //Operations on the NodeB side SET MACHSPARA: DYNCODESW=OPEN; //Deactivation procedure //Operations on the NodeB side SET MACHSPARA: DYNCODESW=CLOSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


453


134 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package

134

Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – UE should support the functions connected with HSDPA Enhanced package.

Context HSDPA enhanced package is introduced on the basis of WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package, and provides enhancement features to meet the QoS and HSDPA network requirements. Related features include: l

WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR

l

WRFD-01061111 HSDPA State Transition

l

WRFD-01061112 HSDPA DRD

l

WRFD-01061113 HS-DPCCH Preamble Support

l

For details about activate, verify, and deactivate procedures, see the following sections:

Procedure – 135 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR – 136 Configuring HSDPA State Transition – 137 Configuring HSDPA DRD Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


454


134 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package NOTE

HS-DPCCH Preamble Support does not need to be activated, verified, or deactivated.

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


455



135

Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context The operator can set different QoS parameters such as priority, weight, and Guaranteed Bit Rate (GBR) for different users. Based on the QoS parameters, the Enhanced Proportional Fair (EPF) algorithm can accurately allocate resources by proportion. This feature allows different users to obtain accurate differentiated experiences.

Procedure l


l


l

Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA to check that Scheduling Method is set to EPF.


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Scheduling Method to EPF(Enhanced PF).


456



Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Scheduling Method to an option other than EPF(Enhanced PF). ----End

Example //Activation procedure SET MACHSPARA: SM=EPF; //Verification procedure LST MACHSPARA; //Deactivation procedure SET MACHSPARA: SM=PF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


457



136

Configuring HSDPA State Transition

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061111 HSDPA State Transition.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context l

This feature enables the switching between the DCH and HS-DSCH and makes it possible for UEs to enjoy high-speed services.

l

This feature also enables a UE with an ongoing BE service or streaming service to move to the CELL_FACH state to save system resources when the UE does not have data transmission for a long period.

l


Procedure 1.

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH and DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH check boxes under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.


458



1.

Log in to the BSC6900 LMT and initiate Uu interface message tracing.

2.

Set up an HSDPA BE service, and do not perform any data operation for a period of time. Then, search for the RRC_RB_RECFG in the traced Uu interface message. Check the traced data to ensure that the value of the IE rrc-StateIndicator is cell-FACH (1), as shown in Figure 136-1. Figure 136-1 RRC_RB_RECFG message

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH and DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH check boxes under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

----End

Example //Activating HSDPA State Transition SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating HSDPA State Transition SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-0&DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


459



137

Configuring HSDPA DRD

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061112 HSDPA DRD.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features must be configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package.

l


Context This feature enables HSDPA-suitable services to be established on the HS-DSCH cell as much as possible if a UE is HS-DSCH capable, achieving better service performance.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Direct retry switch to DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH or DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH according to the network plan. NOTE

The DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH and the DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH can be turned on at the same time according to the network plan.

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


460



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to check whether DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH or DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH is set to ON. Expected result: The value of DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH or DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH is ON.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UINTERFREQNCELL to query the interfrequency neighboring cells of cell 1 and whether Blind handover flag is set to TRUE. If Blind handover flag is set to FALSE, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UINTERFREQNCELL. In this step, set Blind Handover Flag of cell 2 (inter-frequency neighboring cell of cell 1) to TRUE. If Blind handover flag is set to TRUE, go to Step 3.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA. In this step, set DL BE traffic threshold on HSDPA to an appropriate value.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set Maximum HSDPA user number of cell 1 to 0.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step, set HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSDPA UU Load Admission Control Algorithm) to Cell CAC algorithm switch.

6.

Enable the UE in cell 1 to originate a PS FTP download service. The value of Maximum HSDPA user number in cell 1 is 0; therefore, the UE is handed over to cell 2 by using directed retry. The Uu message tracing or the UE CDT tracing shows that the RRC_RB_RECFG/RRC_RB_SETUP message is sent to the UE in cell 1 and the RRC_RB_RECFG_CMP/RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP message is sent to the RNC in cell 2. NOTE

This feature also supports the following scenario: If a UE in an R99 cell (cell 1) originates HSDPA streaming services or BE services, the UE can camp on an HSDPA cell (cell 2) through directed retry. In this scenario, cell 2 is the inter-frequency neighboring cell for blind handover of cell 1 and admission to cell 2 is allowed.

l


The feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example //Activating HSDPA DRD SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch= DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch= DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH-1; //Verifying HSDPA DRD MOD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=1, CellId=1, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=2, BlindHoFlag=TRUE; SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D384; MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=1, MaxHsdpaUserNum=0; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


461



138

Configuring HS-DPCCH Preamble Support

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061113 HS-DPCCH Preamble Support.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Dependency on RNC – This feature does not depend on the RCN hardware. – Dependency on NodeB – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE must be configured with EBBI board, EBOI board, EULP or EULPd board. – The BBU3806 needs to configure EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BBU3900 needs to configure WBBPb ,WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features must be configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package.

l


l

Others – The UE should have the capability of HSDPA Category 6 (or later) and support this feature.

Context This feature enables the transmission of dedicated preamble subframes before ACK/NACK subframes are transmitted on the HS-DPCCH, improving transmission reliability.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


462



Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) or Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HARQ Preamble Capability Indication to Mode1.


Start UE message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, and verify the value of the information element (IE) harq-Preamble-Mode contained in the message RRC_RRC_CONN_SETUP. The expect result: The value of the information element (IE) harq-Preamble-Mode is 1. As shown in Figure 138-1. Figure 138-1 harq-Preamble-Mode

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

463



HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) or Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HARQ Preamble Capability Indication to Mode0. ----End

Example //Activation Procedure ADD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=0, MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=0, //Deactivation Procedure ADD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=0, MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=0,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

HsdpcchPreambleSwitch=Mode1; HsdpcchPreambleSwitch=Mode1; HsdpcchPreambleSwitch=Mode0; HsdpcchPreambleSwitch=Mode0;


464



139

Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010630 Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package.

l


Context This feature enables the streaming services to be mapped onto the HS-DSCH, which improves the utilization of cell resources.

Procedure l


l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH from the drop-down list Service mapping strategy switch. Initiate Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 139-1.


465




l

2.

Establish an HSDPA streaming service on the UE. To check whether the establishment is successful, view the RRC_RB_SETUP message and check whether the dlTransportChannelType in the rb-MappingInfo information element (IE) is set to hsdsch in the Uu interface trace data.

3.

Check whether the service can receive the data successfully.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to clear MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH from the drop-down list Service mapping strategy switch.

----End

Example //Activating Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


466



140

Configuring HSDPA over Iur

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010651 HSDPA over Iur.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The neighboring RNC supports this feature.

Context This feature enables HSDPA services to be carried on the Iur interface and provides continuous HSDPA services for UEs moving between BSC6900s.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to configure the neighboring RNC's cell with HSDSCH and Fractional-Dedicated Physical Control Channel (F-DPCH). In this step, select the HSDSCH support indicator and F-DPCH support indicator check boxes under the parameter Cell Capability Container.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

467



modification center: not supported). In this step, set Hsdpa cap ind over IUR for NRNC to ON. l


Verify that the feature HSDPA over Iur has been activated by performing the following operations: – Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UNRNC to query the configuration of the neighboring RNC. – Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UEXT3GCELL to query the configuration of the neighboring RNC's cell.

2.

Verify that an HSDPA service has been set up by performing the following operations: – Configure the neighboring RNC and its cell with the HSDPA function. – Establish an HSDPA service under the serving RNC. – The serving cell changes to a cell under the neighboring RNC. – If the RNSAP_RL_SETUP_REQ message traced on the Iur interface contains HSDPA-related information elements, an HSDPA service has been set up successfully.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Hsdpa cap ind over IUR for NRNC to OFF.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the HSDSCH support indicator and F-DPCH support indicator check boxes under the parameter Cell Capability Container.

----End

Example //Activating HSDPA over Iur MOD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=1, CellId=1, CellCapContainerFdd=HSDSCH_SUPPORT-1&FDPCH_SUPPORT-1; MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, IurHsdpaSuppInd=ON; //Deactivating HSDPA over Iur MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, IurHsdpaSuppInd=OFF; MOD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=1, CellId=1, CellCapContainerFdd=HSDSCH_SUPPORT-0&FDPCH_SUPPORT-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


468



141

Configuring SRB over HSDPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Requirement for the BSC6900 – This feature does not depend on the hardware. – Requirements for the NodeB – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE is configured with the EBBI, EBOI, or EDLP board. – The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or wBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package feature must be configured before this feature is configured.

l


l

Others – The UE complies with the specifications of 3GPP Release 6 or higher versions and supports fractional DPCH (F-DPCH) or E-FDPCH.

Context Using F-DPCH multiplexing, this feature enables downlink signaling radio bearers (SRBs) of multiple users to be carried over HSDPA. This helps reduce downlink code resource consumption and call setup delay. During radio access bearer (RAB) setup, SRBs can be carried over HSDPA only when all the downlink services of the UE are carried on the HSDPA channels. During radio resource control (RRC) connection setup, this feature can be activated by performing the following operations: Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


469



Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB to HSDPA (UL_DCH,DL_HSDSCH) or HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the phase at which this feature is activated by means of the Effective Flag of Signaling RB Channel Type parameter. NOTE

l If Effective Flag of Signaling RB Channel Type is set to False, this feature is activated during RAB setup. Recommended Value is False. l If Effective Flag of Signaling RB Channel Type is set to TRUE, this feature is activated during RRC connection setup.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the E_F_DPCH is activated by means of the Cell Hspa Enhanced function switch parameter. NOTE

l If Cell Hspa Enhanced function switch is set to E_F_DPCH_ON, E_F_DPCH is enabled. l If Cell Hspa Enhanced function switch is set to E_F_DPCH_OFF, E_F_DPCH is disabled.

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Log in to the BSC6900 LMT to enable Uu interface tracing. In the displayed dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP, as shown in Figure 141-1.


470




2.

To verify whether this feature is activated , view the information element (IE) dlTransportChannelType and rb-Identity in the RRC_RB SETUP message from the Uu interface trace data. – If the value of dl-TransportChannelType is hsdsch, as shown in Figure 141-2, and the value of rb-Identity is less than or equal to 4, as shown in Figure 141-3, this feature is activated. Figure 141-2 Value of the dl-TransportChannelType IE

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


471



Figure 141-3 Value of the rb-Identity IE

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB to HSUPA or DCH.

----End

Example //Activating SRB over HSDPA //Setting the type of channel on which SRBs are preferably carried with SrbChlType set to HSDPA SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSDPA; //Setting the type of channel on which SRBs are preferably carried with SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag set to False SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag=False; //setting the E_F_DPCH function MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaEnhSwitch=E_F_DPCH_ON; //Deactivating SRB over HSDPA //Setting the type of channel on which SRBs are preferably carried with SrbChlType set to DCH SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=DCH;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


472



142

Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-030010 CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3812E and BTS3812AE are configured with the EBBI, EBOI, or EDLP board. – The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l


l


Context With this feature, the NodeB can dynamically select the optimum BLER target value based on the channel quality fluctuation of HSDPA users. The NodeB then adjusts the Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) accordingly, improving user throughput and cell throughput.

Procedure l


l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CQI Adjust Algorithm Switch of non-Conversational Service to CQI_ADJ_BY_DYN_BLER(CQI Adjusted by Dynamic BLER).


473



1.

l

Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA. In this step, check that CQI Adjust Algorithm Switch of non-Conversational Service is set to CQI_ADJ_BY_DYN_BLER.


Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CQI Adjust Algorithm Switch of non-Conversational Service to NO_CQI_ADJ(Not CQI Adjust Algorithm).

----End

Example //Activating CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0, CQIADJALGOFNONCON=CQI_ADJ_BY_DYN_BLER; //Verifying CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target LST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0; //Deactivating CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target SET MACHSPARA: CQIADJALGOFNONCON=NO_CQI_ADJ;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


474



143

Configuring MIMO Prime

This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-030011 MIMO Prime.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature is supported only by the 40W RRU3801C, RRU3804, RRU3806, RRU3808, WRFU, RRU3805, WRFUd, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3928, RRU3929, MRFUd, MRFUe, as well as the RRU3908 V1 operating in 850 MHz, 900 MHz, and 1900 MHz. – For RF modules providing only one transmit channel, two such RF modules need to be interconnected to support this feature. – Two RF units, each with a TX channel, are configured. – The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board. – The BTS3812E/AE does not support this feature. – The DBS3800 does not support this feature. – RRU3908 V2 and MRFU V2 modules support this feature from RAN14.0.0

l


l


Context l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

MIMO Prime can increase the capacity of the cell in which MIMO has not been implemented by 5% to 10%. The increase in the overall cell throughput helps to greatly improve the experience of users in medium and bad radio conditions. MIMO Prime is applicable to various services such as HSDPA and 64QAM, whereas it does not have any special requirement for the capabilities of UEs and will not affect the performance of UEs that do not support MIMO.


475



Procedure l

l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate cells.

2.

On the NodeB, remove the old local cell and establish a new local cell. Run the NodeB MML command RMV LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the local cell

b.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add a local cell. In this step, set Support VAM to TRUE(TRUE), Two Tx Way to FALSE.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MIMO Prime Switch to OPEN(open).

4.



Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL. In this step, check that Support VAM is TRUE(TRUE), Two Tx Way is FALSE.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA. In this step, check that MIMO Prime Switch is set to Open.

3.

Observe the counters VS.APCPhase0CQI.MEAN and VS.APCCQI.MEAN. Before this feature is activated, the values of both counters are 0. After this feature is activated, the values of both counters differ from 0.


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate cells.

2.

On the NodeB, remove the old local cell and establish a new local cell.

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

a.

a.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the local cell

b.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add a local cell. In this step, set Support VAM to FALSE(FALSE).


476



Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MIMO Prime Switch to CLOSE(close). 4.


----End

Example //Activating MIMO Prime //Operations at the BSC6900 //Deactivating a cell DEA UCELL: CellId=1; //Operations at the NodeB //Removing a local cell RMV LOCELL: LOCELL=1; //Adding a local cell and setting Two Tx Way and VAM ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=FALSE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ULFREQ=9845, DLFREQ=10795, MXPWR=460, HISPM=FALSE, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=TRUE; //Activating MIMO Prime SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1, MIMOPRIMESW=OPEN; //Operations at the BSC6900 ACT UCELL: CellId=1; //Verifying MIMO Prime LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=1; LST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0; //Deactivating MIMO Prime //Operations at the BSC6900 //Deactivating a cell DEA UCELL: CellId=1; //Operations at the NodeB //Removing a local cell RMV LOCELL: LOCELL=1; //Adding a local cell and setting Two Tx Way and VAM ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=FALSE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ULFREQ=9845, DLFREQ=10795, MXPWR=460, HISPM=FALSE, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=FALSE; SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1, MIMOPRIMESW=CLOSE; //Operations at the BSC6900 ACT UCELL: CellId=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


477



144

Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-030004 Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI, EBOI, EULP+EDLP, or EULPd+EDLP boards. Downlink services must be established on the EBBI, EBOI, or EDLP board. – The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. Downlink services must be established on the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board. Downlink services must be established on the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The features WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package have been configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context PS BE services carried on an HSPA channel use typical rate rather than the CN-assigned rate as the maximum rate, leading to inconsistent between the CN-assigned rate and the actual rate. This feature enables the users to apply the CN-assigned rate rather than the typical rate when they are different. l

Precautions – None

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Data Preparation Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

478



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

PS Rate Negotiation Switch

PsSwitch

The HSPA_ADPTIVE _RATE_ALGO_S WITCH should be selected.

Network plan

Procedure l


l

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable this feature. In this step, select the HSPA_ADPTIVE_RATE_ALGO_SWITCH check box under the parameter PS Rate Negotiation Switch.


Before the feature is activated, the CN assigns a non-typical rate for a PS BE service to be carried on an HSPA channel. Check the real rate. The PS BE service is set up successfully on an HSPA channel with a typical rate.

2.

After the feature is activated, the CN assigns a non-typical rate for a PS BE service to be carried on an HSPA channel. Check the real rate. The PS BE service is set up successfully on an HSPA channel with the assigned rate.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to disable this feature. In this step, clear the HSPA_ADPTIVE_RATE_ALGO_SWITCH check box under the parameter PS Rate Negotiation Switch.

----End

Example //Activating Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate //Enabling Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PsSwitch=HSPA_ADPTIVE_RATE_ALGO_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate //Disabling Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PsSwitch=HSPA_ADPTIVE_RATE_ALGO_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


479



145

Configuring HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140221 HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware – This feature does not depend on the BSC6900 hardware.

l

Dependencies on NodeB Hardware – All 3900 series base stations support this feature. To support this feature, the 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board. – All DBS3800 series base stations support this feature. To support this feature, the DBS3800 series base stations must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BTS3812E/BTS3812A/BTS3812AE supports this feature. To support this feature, the BTS3812E/BTS3812A/BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI, EDLP or EBOI board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature depends on the following features: – WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package – WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package

l


l

Others Prerequisites – As recommended, GBRs have been configured on the RNC for all BE services.

Context l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Developed on the basis of the EPF algorithm, this feature considers UE locations as the criterion for adjusting HSDPA scheduling weights. This feature gives more scheduling opportunities to UEs close to the NodeB and increases the cell throughput on the downlink. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

480


l


Precautions – With this feature, HSDPA UEs at cell edges have fewer scheduling opportunities and the cell throughput at cell edges drops. If GBRs are not configured for BE services, HSDPA UEs at cell edges may have to wait a long time before they can get scheduling opportunities. As a result, traffic radio bearers (TRBs) are more likely to reset and the call drop rate increases. The magnitude of this impact depends on factors such as UE distribution and service distribution in the cell. It is recommended that GBRs be configured for BE services to ensure network performance.

Procedure l


l


l

Run the NodeB MML commandSET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Scheduling Method to EPF_LOC(Location based EPF) and set Location Weight. Run the NodeB MML commandLST MACHSPARA. If the command output shows that the value of Scheduling Method is EPF_LOC(Location based EPF), this feature has been activated for the cell.


Run the NodeB MML commandSET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Scheduling Method to a value except EPF_LOC(Location based EPF).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1, SM=EPF_LOC, LOCWEIGHT=1; //Deactivation procedure SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1, SM=EPF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


481



146

Configuring Adaptive Adjustment of

HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140222 Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – None

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature depends on WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

l

License – None

Context l

With this feature, the target number of retransmissions can shift between two preset values. In scenarios where a small target number of retransmissions are desired on the E-DCH, the larger one between the two preset values is used as the target number of retransmissions. When the uplink load on the cell is not restricted and the UE rate is above a specific threshold, the smaller one between the two preset values is used as the target number of retransmissions. This improves the UE throughput. When the uplink load on the cell is restricted again and the UE rate falls below another threshold, the larger one between the two preset values is again used as the target number of retransmissions to raise the uplink throughput of the cell.

l

This feature is only intended for non-DC-HSUPA UEs.

l

This feature provides two algorithms for configuring the small target number of retransmissions: algorithm for selecting an initial small target number of retransmissions for HSUPA UEs and algorithm for adaptively adjusting the small target number of retransmissions for HSUPA UEs.

l


l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


482



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Power Control Switch

PcSwitch

The PC_OLPC_SWIT CH, PC_HSUPA_LIT RETNUM_INIT_ SEL_SWITCH and PC_HSUPA_LIT RETNUM_AUTO _ADJUST_SWIT CH should be selected.

Network plan

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with PC_OLPC_SWITCH under Power Control Switch selected to enable outer-loop power control. NOTE

You need to activate outer loop power control before activating the adaptive adjustment of HSUPA small target retransmissions.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with PC_HSUPA_LITRETNUM_INIT_SEL_SWITCH and PC_HSUPA_LITRETNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITCH under Power Control Switch selected to activate the algorithm for selecting an initial small target number of retransmissions for HSUPA UEs. NOTE

When configuring the parameter Alter Edch Little Target Number of E-DCH PDU retransfer, the default value for this parameter is recommended. An inappropriate value for this parameter may lead to decreased cell throughput. For services with a 5.44 Mbit/s MBR and a 2 ms transmission time interval (TTI), the default value of this parameter is 0.02. For other services with a 2 ms TTI, the default value of this parameter is 0.01. For services with a 10 ms TTI, the default value of this parameter is 0.1.

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


On the BSC6900 LMT main page, click Monitor. In the Monitor Navigation Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed.

2.

In this dialog box, set Monitor Item to OLPC,and then click Submit. Check the average number of transmissions on the E-DCH. If the following conditions are met, this feature has been activated. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

483



– If there are multiple HSUPA UEs, the uplink load of the cell is limited and the average number of transmissions on the E-DCH is close to the larger value between EdchTargetLittleRetransNum and EdchAltTarLittleRetransNum. – If there are multiple HSUPA UEs, the uplink load of the cell is unlimited and the average number of transmissions on the E-DCH is close to the smaller value between EdchTargetLittleRetransNum and EdchAltTarLittleRetransNum. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with PC_HSUPA_LITRETNUM_INIT_SEL_SWITCH and PC_HSUPA_LITRETNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITCH under Power Control Switch cleared to deactivate the algorithm for selecting an initial small target number of retransmissions for HSUPA UEs.

----End

Example //Activating Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_SWITCH-1; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch= PC_HSUPA_LITRETNUM_INIT_SEL_SWITCH-1&PC_HSUPA_LITRETNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITC H-1; //Deactivating Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch= PC_HSUPA_LITRETNUM_INIT_SEL_SWITCH-0&PC_HSUPA_LITRETNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITC H-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


484



147

Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010680 HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – BSC6900 – This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. – NodeB – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE should be configured with the EBBI, EBOI or EDLP board. – The BBU3806 should be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BBU3900 should be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board. – For the RF part, the RF module of Node B supports one TX channel each, and two interconnected RF modules can provide two TX channels to support 2 x 2 MIMO.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature: – WRFD-010684 2 x 2 MIMO or WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA – WRFD-010650 HSDPA 13.976 Mbps per User

l


l

Other Prerequisites – CN support user rate of 28Mbit/s or above. – The UE category must support cat16, cat18(or later).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


485



Context This feature enables the theoretical HSPA+ MIMO rate per user to reach a maximum of 28 Mbps. This feature enhances the user experience for high-speed data services.

Procedure l


l


l

Enable a UE in a 2 x 2 MIMO cell to download a 500 MB file from the FTP server. Then, detect the download transmission rate. At this time, the UE initiates BE services in the 2 x 2 MIMO cell and the RNC establishes services on the 2 x 2 MIMO.


----End

Example None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


486



148



Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware – This feature does not depend on the BSC6900 hardware. – Dependencies on NodeB Hardware – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE are configured with the EBBI, EBOI, or EDLP board. – The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010683 Downlink 64QAM, WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE category must support cat 14,18,20,24 or 28. – CN support user rate of 21Mbit/s or above.

Context This feature enables the theoretical HSPA+ 64QAM rate per user to reach a maximum of 21 Mbps. It provides users with high-speed data services.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


487



Procedure l


l


l

Use the UE in a 64QAM cell to download a 500 MB file from the FTP server. Then, check the downloading rate.


----End

Example None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


488



149

Configuring Downlink Enhanced L2

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The UE is of 3GPP R7 or later and supports this feature.

Context The Downlink Enhanced L2 feature eliminates contradictions between high-rate transmission that requires a large PDU size and cell-edge coverage that requires a small PDU size by using flexible Protocol Data Unit (PDU) sizes. This feature enables dynamic adjustment of the PDU size. This improves transmission efficiency on the Iub and Uu interfaces and increases the celledge throughput and coverage radius. This feature is a prerequisite for the features DL 64QAM, 2x2 MIMO, and Enhanced CELL_FACH.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the RNCHuawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

489



level downlink layer 2 enhancement parameters. In this step, set Cell_DCH DL L2 enhance max PDU size and Cell_FACH L2 enhance max PDU size. 2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell Hspa Plus function switch to DL_L2ENHANCED(Cell DL L2ENHANCED Function Switch) to turn on the cell-level layer 2 enhancement switch.


Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 149-1. Figure 149-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

2.

Use the UE to establish an HSDPA service. Check whether the value of the IE dlTransportChannelType in the rb-MappingInfo of the RRC_RB_SETUP message is hsdsch.

3.

View the value of the IE dL RLC PDU size in the RRC_RB_SETUP message. – If the value of the IE dL RLC PDU size is flexibleSize, as shown in Figure 149-2, this feature has been activated. – If the value of the IE dL RLC PDU size is fixedSize, this feature is not activated.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


490



Figure 149-2 Value of the IE dL RLC PDU size

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect DL_L2ENHANCED(Cell DL L2ENHANCED Function Switch) from the Cell Hspa Plus function switch dropdown list box.

----End

Example //Activating Downlink Enhanced L2 //Enabling the cell-level downlink L2 enhancement MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=DL_L2ENHANCED-1; //Deactivating Downlink Enhanced L2 //Disabling the cell-level downlink L2 enhancement MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=DL_L2ENHANCED-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


491



150



Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only BSC6900 supports this feature. – It is recommended that the BSC6900 be configured with the Data Processing Unit REV:e (DPUe) board to support more peak-rate users. – On the NodeB side: – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI, EBOI or EDLP board. – The BBU3806 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – BBU3806 is configured with the Enhanced Base Band Card (EBBC) or Enhanced Base Band Card REV:d (EBBCd) board. – In the case of BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE, the NodeB Enhanced HSDPA Supported Baseband Processing and Interface Unit (EBBI) , NodeB Enhanced HSDPA Supported Baseband Processing and Optical Interface Unit (EBOI), or NodeB Enhanced Downlink Processing Unit (EDLP) board is configured. In addition, the uplink service cannot be established on the NodeB HSDPA supported Baseband processing and Interface Unit (HBBI) or NodeB HSUPA supported Uplink Processing Unit (HULP) board. – BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board. – For the RF part which supports only one TX channel, two interconnected RF modules can provide two TX channels to support 2 x 2 MIMO. In terms of RF modules including 2 Tx channels, no additional RF modules is required for 2*2MIMO.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: – WRFD-010689 HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbit/s per User plus WRFD-010696 DCHSPA plus WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package, or WRFD-010689 HSPA + Downlink 21Mbit/s per User plus WRFD-010680 HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbit/s per

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


492



User plus WRFD-010693 DL 64QAM+MIMO plus WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package. l


l

Other Prerequisites – CN needs to support sending RAB assignment with relate data rate. – The UE should support category of 21(or later), that is, category: 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, or 28..

Context As indicated in 3GPP Release 8, the downlink peak rate per user reaches up to 42 Mbit/s by using the 2x2 MIMO+64QAM or 64QAM+DC-HSDPA technologies and by using enhanced functions of the related NEs.

Procedure l


l

This feature does not need to be activated.


Set the BE service rate of the UE at the Home Location Register (HLR) to 42 Mbit/ s.

2.

Enable a UE in an HSDPA cell to download a 500 MB file from the FTP server. Then, check whether the download transmission rate is 42 Mbit/s. If yes, this feature has been activated. At this time, the UE initiates BE services in the HSDPA cell and the BSC6900 establishes services on the HS-DSCH.

3.

Start Monitoring DL Throughput and Bandwidth on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 150-1. Figure 150-1 Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box

The connection performance monitoring result indicates that the BSC6900 assigns a 42.1 Mbit/s bandwidth to the UE, that is, this feature has been activated. l



----End Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


493



Example None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


494



151

Configuring Downlink 64QAM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010683 Downlink 64QAM.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE need to configure EBBI board, EBOI board or EDLP board. – The BBU3806 needs to be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BBU3900 needs to be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package – WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE category must support 64QAM. That is, the UE must belong to category 13,14,17,18,19,20,23, 24, 27, 28, as specified by the 3GPP protocols.

Context The 16QAM modulation scheme, which was introduced in 3GPP R5 specifications, provides a higher peak rate per user and system capacity than Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK). The 64QAM modulation scheme, which was introduced in 3GPP R7 specifications, provides a higher peak rate per user and system capacity than the 16QAM modulation scheme.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


495



Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CFG_HSDPA_64QAM_SWITCH from the Channel Configuration Strategy Switch list. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to configure preferential use of 64QAM. – Set Preferred MIMO or 64QAM character to 64QAM. – Set HSPA Technologies Retried by UEs to 64QAM. NOTE

l If the switch parameter is set to 64QAM, the network preferentially configures 64QAM for the UE. Otherwise, the network preferentially configures MIMO for the UE. l Before commissioning the feature, you need to set the switch parameter to 64QAM. After the commissioning, you can set the parameter according to the actual network planning. l For UEs to 3GPP R7 specifications, MIMO and 64QAM cannot be used together.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to turn on the cell-level 64QAM switch and enhanced downlink layer 2 function switch. In this step, select 64QAM(Cell 64QAM Function Switch) and DL_L2ENHANCED(Cell DL L2ENHANCED Function Switch) from the Cell Hspa Plus function switch list.

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to set neighboring BSC6900 cell support 64QAM. Set parameter Cell Capability Container and select HSPAPLUS_DL_64QAM_SUPPORT (downlink 64QAM support indicator). NOTE

In a hard handover or soft handover over Iur, when the serving cell is relocated under the DRNC, this function is enabled so that the serving cell continues to support 64QAM. Otherwise, the serving cell does not support 64QAM. In this case, the actual physical capabilities of the cell under DRNC support 64QAM.

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

As Figure 151-1 shows, start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT.


496



Figure 151-1 Uu interface tracing

2.

Establish an HSDPA service on the UE. Check the RRC_RB_SETUP message and check that the value of the dl-TransportChannelType information element in rbMappingInfo is hsdsch.

3.

In the Uu interface tracing data, check the value of the dl-64QAM-Configured information element under dl-HSPDSCH-Information in the RRC_RB_SETUP message. – If the value of dl-64QAM-Configured is true as Figure 151-2 shows, you can infer that this feature has been activated. – Otherwise, you can infer that this feature has not been activated. Figure 151-2 Checking the dl-64QAM-Configured information element

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell


497



Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect 64QAM(Cell 64QAM Function Switch) from the Cell Hspa Plus function switch list. 2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to cancel neighboring BSC6900 cell support 64QAM. Set parameter Cell Capability Container and deselect HSPAPLUS_DL_64QAM_SUPPORT (downlink 64QAM support indicator).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_64QAM_SWITCH-1; SET UFRC: MIMOor64QAMSwitch=64QAM, RetryCapability=64QAM-1; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=64QAM-1&DL_L2ENHANCED-1; (Optional)MOD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=0, CellId=0, CellCapContainerFdd=HSPAPLUS_DL_64QAM_SUPPORT-1; //Deactivation procedure MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=64QAM-0; (Optional)MOD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=0, CellId=0, CellCapContainerFdd=HSPAPLUS_DL_64QAM_SUPPORT-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


498



152

Configuring 2x2 MIMO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010684 2x2 MIMO. Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) is a multi-antenna technology, which enables multiple antennas to receive and transmit data. This increases the data transmission rate.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI, EBOI, or EDLP board. – The BBU3806 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BBU3900 must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board. – For the RF part, the RF module of NodeB supports one TX channel each and two interconnected RF modules can provide two TX channels to support 2 x 2 MIMO. – 20W RRU3801c can only support MIMO by using together with the same module (20W RRU3801c).

l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package – WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2 – WRFD-010629 DL 16QAM Modulation

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE is of HSDPA category 15 or higher, that is, category 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, or 28.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


499



Context

CAUTION Before enabling this feature in an activated cell, you need to: l Deactivate the cell. This will interrupt services in the cell. Therefore, enable the feature when the traffic of the cell is light. l Ensure that there are sufficient baseband resources on the baseband processing board. Otherwise, this feature cannot be activated. 2x2 MIMO is introduced to HSDPA in 3GPP R7. To support this feature, the NodeB use two antennas to transmit signals, and UEs use two antennas to receive signals. When 2x2 MIMO is enabled, the theoretical peak rate of HSDPA users increases from 14 Mbit/s to 28 Mbit/s.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the BSC6900-level MIMO algorithm switch. In this step, set Channel Configuration Strategy Switch to CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_SWITCH.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set common parameters among the fundamental resource configuration (FRC) parameters. In this step, set Preferred MIMO or 64QAM character to MIMO. NOTE

l MIMO and 64QAM cannot be enabled together for UEs of 3GPP R7. l If Preferred MIMO or 64QAM character is set to MIMO, MIMO is preferentially configured for the UE. l Before verifying the feature, set Preferred MIMO or 64QAM character to MIMO. After the verification, set this parameter to a proper value according to the network plan.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) turn on the cell-level MIMO switch and enhanced L2 function switch. In this step, set Cell Hspa Plus function switch to MIMO, DL_L2ENHANCED(Cell DL L2ENHANCED Function Switch), and UL_L2ENHANCED(Cell UL L2ENHANCED Function Switch).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the cell.

5.

Configure the related data on the NodeB according to the MIMO hardware configuration scheme. The following procedure takes the RRU3804 as an example to Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

500



describe how to configure data for the change from one RRU3804 to two cascading RRU3804s.

6.

7.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

a.

Optional: Run the NodeB MML command ADD RRUCHAIN (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click TOPO > Add RXU Chain; CME batch modification center: not supported) to create an RRU chain.

b.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD RRU (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > TOPO > Right click RXU CHAIN > Add RXU Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an RRU to the chain.

On the NodeB, modify Diversity Mode of the sector and Two Tx Way of the cell. a.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the local cell.

b.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV SEC (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Sector; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the sector.

c.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Sector; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a sector. In this step, set Diversity Mode to COMMON_MODE and configure the antenna data based on the MIMO hardware deployment scheme.

d.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add a local cell. In this step, set Two Tx Way to TRUE and configure the antenna data based on the MIMO hardware deployment scheme.

Modify the transmit diversity mode of a cell on the BSC6900. a.

Optional: If UPRACH exists, run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UPRACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > PRACH Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the PRACH.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPRACHBASIC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > PRACH Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add PRACH basic information.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPRACHTFC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > TFC of PRACH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add TFC of PRACH.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPRACHASC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > PRACH ASC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add ASC Of PRACH.

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPRACHACTOASCMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > AC-ASC Mapping Information of PRACH; CME batch Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

501



modification center: not supported) to Add AC-ASC mapping information of PRACH. f.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPRACHSLOTFORMAT (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > Slot Format of PRACH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add slot format of PRACH.

g.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > RACH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add RACH.

h.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URACHDYNTFS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > Dynamic TFS of RACH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add dynamic TFS of RACH.

i.

Optional: If AICH exists, run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UAICH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > AICH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove AICH.

j.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UAICH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > AICH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add AICH. Set STTD Indicator to TRUE.

k.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UPRACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > PRACH Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate PRACH.

l.

Optional: If an SCCPCH exists, run the BSC6900 MML command RMV USCCPCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > SCCPCH Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the SCCPCH.

m. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USCCPCHBASIC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > SCCPCH Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an SCCPCH. In this step, set STTD Indicator to TRUE.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

n.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USCCPCHTFC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > TFC of SCCPCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the Calculated Transport Format Combination (CTFC) of an SCCPCH.

o.

Optional: If a PICH exists, run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UPICH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > PICH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the PICH.

p.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPICH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > PICH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a PICH. In this step, set STTD Indicator to TRUE.

q.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UFACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > FACH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a FACH.

r.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UFACHDYNTFS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

502



> Dynamic TFS of FACH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the transport format set (TFS) of the FACH. s.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UFACHLOCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > Logical Channel Mapped to FACH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a logical channel mapped to the FACH.

t.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > PCH; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying UMTS Channel Parameters in Batches) to add a PCH.

u.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPCHDYNTFS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > Dynamic TFS of PCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the transport format set (TFS) of the PCH.

v.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT USCCPCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > SCCPCH Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the SCCPCH.

w.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the transmit diversity mode of an MIMO-enabled cell to STTD. – Set TX Diversity Indication to TRUE. – Set STTD Support Indicator to STTD_Supported. – Set CP1 Support Indicator to CP1_not_Supported. – Set DPCH Tx Diversity Mode for Other User to STTD. – Set DPCH Tx Diversity Mode for MIMO User to STTD. – Set FDPCH Tx Diversity Mode for Other User to STTD. – Set FDPCH Tx Diversity Mode for MIMO User to STTD.

l

8.


9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLMIMO (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell MIMO status. Set Cell MIMO state to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the MIMO-related parameter settings.


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 152-1.


503




2.

Use the UE to establish an HSDPA service. Check whether the value of the information element (IE) dl-TransportChannelType in the rb-MappingInfo of the RRC_RB_SETUP message is hsdsch.

3.

In the traced Uu interface data, check whether the RRC_RB_SETUP message contains the IE mimoParameters. – If the RRC_RB_SETUP message contains the IE mimoParameters, as shown in Figure 152-2, this feature has been activated. – If the RRC_RB_SETUP message does not contain the IE mimoParameters, as shown in Figure 152-2, this feature is not activated. Figure 152-2 IE mimoParameters

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

504



Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the cell. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLMIMO (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell MIMO status. Set Cell MIMO state to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate the MIMO-related parameter settings.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV USCCPCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > SCCPCH Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the SCCPCH.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TX Diversity Indication to FALSE.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear MIMO(Cell MIMO Function Switch) from the HspaPlusSwitch drop-down list.

6.


----End

Example l

NodeB V200R014 //Activation procedure //Operations on the BSC6900 side //Turning on the BSC6900-level MIMO algorithm switch SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_SWITCH-1; //Setting MIMO as the preferred function SET UFRC: MIMOor64QAMSwitch=MIMO; //Enabling the cell-level MIMO and L2 enhancement MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: HspaPlusSwitch=MIMO-1&DL_L2ENHANCED-1; //Deactivating the HSDPA cell DEA UCELL: CellId=1; //Activation operation RMV UPRACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4; ADD UPRACHBASIC: CellId=1, PreambleSignatures=SIGNATURE0-1&SIGNATURE1-1&SIGNATURE2-1&SIGNATURE31&SIGNATURE4-1&SIGNATURE5-1&SIGNATURE6-1&SIGNATURE7-1, RACHSubChNo=SUBCHANEL0-1&SUBCHANEL1-1&SUBCHANEL2-1&SUBCHANEL3-1&SUBCH ANEL4-1&SUBCHANEL5-1&SUBCHANEL6-1&SUBCHANEL7-1&SUBCHANEL8-1&SUBCHANEL 9-1&SUBCHANEL10-1&SUBCHANEL11-1, Constantvalue=-20, PowerRampStep=3; ADD UPRACHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, CTFC=0, PowerOffsetPpm=-3, GainFactorBetaC=13, GainFactorBetaD=15; ADD UPRACHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, CTFC=1, PowerOffsetPpm=-2, GainFactorBetaC=10, GainFactorBetaD=15; ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC0; ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC1; ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC2, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


505


152 Configuring 2x2 MIMO ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC3, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9; ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC4, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9; ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC5, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9; ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC6, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9; ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC7, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9; ADD UPRACHACTOASCMAP: CellId=1, PhyChId=4; ADD UPRACHSLOTFORMAT: CellId=1, SlotFormatNum=D4; ADD URACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, TrChId=1; ADD URACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, RLCSize=168, TFsNumber=D1, TbNumber1=1; ADD URACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, RLCSize=360, TFsNumber=D1, TbNumber1=1; ADD UAICH: CellId=1, PRACHPhyChId=4, PhyChId=6, STTDInd=TRUE; ACT UPRACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4; RMV USCCPCH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8; ADD USCCPCHBASIC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, ScrambCode=0, STTDInd=TRUE, SlotFormat=D8, TFCIpresence=EXISTS; ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=0; ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=1; ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=2; ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=3; ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=4; ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=6; ADD UPICH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, STTDInd=TRUE; ADD UFACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, TrChId=4, ToAWS=20, ToAWE=10, SigRbInd=FALSE, ChCodingType=CONVOLUTIONAL; ADD UFACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, TrChId=5, RateMatchingAttr=220, ToAWS=30, ToAWE=10, MaxCmchPi=D13, MinCmchPi=D0, ChCodingType=TURBO; ADD UFACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, TrChId=4, RLCSize=168, TFsNumber=D3; ADD UFACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, TrChId=5, RLCSize=168, TFsNumber=D2; ADD UFACHLOCH: CellId=1, TrChId=4; ADD UPCH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8; ADD UPCHDYNTFS: CellId=1, RLCSize=240, TFsNumber=D2; ACT USCCPCH:CELLID=1, PHYCHID=8; MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=TRUE, STTDSupInd=STTD_Supported, CP1SupInd=CP1_not_Supported, DpchDivModforOther=STTD, FdpchDivModforOther=STTD, DpchDivModforMIMO=STTD, FdpchDivModforMIMO=STTD; //Activating a cell ACT UCELL: CellId=1; //Activating the MIMO-related parameter settings ACT UCELLMIMO: CellId=1; //Operations on the NodeB side ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, BM=COLD, HSN=2, HPN=0; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, ALMPROCSW=OFF; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=1, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, ALMPROCSW=OFF; //Removing a local cell and a sector RMV LOCELL: LOCELL=1; RMV SEC: STN=0, SECN=2; //Adding a sector and setting the transmit diversity mode ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, ANTM=2, DIVM=COMMON_MODE, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1N=R0A, ANT2SRN=61, ANT2N=R0A; //Adding a local cell and setting 2-way transmit diversity ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=TRUE,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


506


152 Configuring 2x2 MIMO SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ANT2N=ANTA, ULFREQ=9845, DLFREQ=10795, MXPWR=460, HISPM=FALSE, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=FALSE; //Deactivation procedure DEA UCELL: CellId=1; DEA UCELLMIMO: CellId=1; RMV UPRACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4; RMV USCCPCH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8; MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=FALSE; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=MIMO-0; ACT UCELL: CellId=1;

l

NodeB V100R014 //Activation procedure //Activation procedure //Operations on the BSC6900 side //Turning on the BSC6900-level MIMO algorithm switch SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_SWITCH-1; //Setting MIMO as the preferred function SET UFRC: MIMOor64QAMSwitch=MIMO; //Enabling the cell-level MIMO and L2 enhancement MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: HspaPlusSwitch=MIMO-1&DL_L2ENHANCED-1; //Deactivating the HSDPA cell DEA UCELL: CellId=1; //Activation operation RMV UPRACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4; ADD UPRACHBASIC: CellId=1, PreambleSignatures=SIGNATURE0-1&SIGNATURE1-1&SIGNATURE2-1&SIGNATURE31&SIGNATURE4-1&SIGNATURE5-1&SIGNATURE6-1&SIGNATURE7-1, RACHSubChNo=SUBCHANEL0-1&SUBCHANEL1-1&SUBCHANEL2-1&SUBCHANEL3-1&SUBCH ANEL4-1&SUBCHANEL5-1&SUBCHANEL6-1&SUBCHANEL7-1&SUBCHANEL8-1&SUBCHANEL 9-1&SUBCHANEL10-1&SUBCHANEL11-1, Constantvalue=-20, PowerRampStep=3; ADD UPRACHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, CTFC=0, PowerOffsetPpm=-3, GainFactorBetaC=13, GainFactorBetaD=15; ADD UPRACHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, CTFC=1, PowerOffsetPpm=-2, GainFactorBetaC=10, GainFactorBetaD=15; ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC0; ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC1; ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC2, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9; ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC3, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9; ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC4, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9; ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC5, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9; ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC6, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9; ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC7, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9; ADD UPRACHACTOASCMAP: CellId=1, PhyChId=4; ADD UPRACHSLOTFORMAT: CellId=1, SlotFormatNum=D4; ADD URACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, TrChId=1; ADD URACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, RLCSize=168, TFsNumber=D1, TbNumber1=1; ADD URACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, RLCSize=360, TFsNumber=D1, TbNumber1=1; ADD UAICH: CellId=1, PRACHPhyChId=4, PhyChId=6, STTDInd=TRUE; ACT UPRACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4; RMV USCCPCH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8; ADD USCCPCHBASIC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, ScrambCode=0, STTDInd=TRUE, SlotFormat=D8, TFCIpresence=EXISTS; ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


507


152 Configuring 2x2 MIMO ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=1; ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=2; ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=3; ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=4; ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=6; ADD UPICH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, STTDInd=TRUE; ADD UFACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, TrChId=4, ToAWS=20, ToAWE=10, SigRbInd=FALSE, ChCodingType=CONVOLUTIONAL; ADD UFACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, TrChId=5, RateMatchingAttr=220, ToAWS=30, ToAWE=10, MaxCmchPi=D13, MinCmchPi=D0, ChCodingType=TURBO; ADD UFACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, TrChId=4, RLCSize=168, TFsNumber=D3; ADD UFACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, TrChId=5, RLCSize=168, TFsNumber=D2; ADD UFACHLOCH: CellId=1, TrChId=4; ADD UPCH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8; ADD UPCHDYNTFS: CellId=1, RLCSize=240, TFsNumber=D2; ACT USCCPCH:CELLID=1, PHYCHID=8; MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=TRUE, STTDSupInd=STTD_Supported, CP1SupInd=CP1_not_Supported, DpchDivModforOther=STTD, FdpchDivModforOther=STTD, DpchDivModforMIMO=STTD, FdpchDivModforMIMO=STTD; //Activating a cell ACT UCELL: CellId=1; //Activating the MIMO-related parameter settings ACT UCELLMIMO: CellId=1; //Operations on the NodeB side ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HSN=0, HPN=0; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, ALMPROCSW=OFF; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=1, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, ALMPROCSW=OFF; //Removing a local cell and a sector RMV LOCELL: LOCELL=1; RMV SEC: STN=0, SECN=2; //Adding a sector and setting the transmit diversity mode ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, ANTM=2, DIVM=COMMON_MODE, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1N=R0A, ANT2SRN=61, ANT2N=R0A; //Adding a sector and setting the transmit diversity mode (assuming that DBS3800 is used) ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=TRUE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ANT2N=ANTB, ULFREQ=9630, DLFREQ=10580, MXPWR=430, HISPM=FALSE, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=FALSE; //Deactivation procedure DEA UCELL: CellId=1; DEA UCELLMIMO: CellId=1; RMV UPRACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4; RMV USCCPCH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8; MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=FALSE; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=MIMO-0; ACT UCELL: CellId=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


508


153 Configuring Downlink 64QAM+MIMO

153

Configuring Downlink 64QAM +MIMO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010693 DL 64QAM+MIMO.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The 3900 series base station supports 64QAM+MIMO when the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board is configured. – In the case of the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and DBS3900, the WBBPb1, WBBPb2, WBBPb3, WBBPb4, or WBBPd1 board needs to be configured. – In the case of the BTS3812E and BTS3812AE, the EBBI or EDLP board needs to be configured. – Two RRUs (for example RRU3804) with single TX channels, or one RRU (for example the RRU3805 or RRU3808) with a dual TX channel needs to be configured. – The HBBI and HDLP of the BTS3812E AND BTS3812AE do not support 64QAM +MIMO. To support 64QAM+MIMO, the EBBI or EDLP must be configured. – The BBU3806 of the DBS3800 does not support 64QAM+MIMO. To support 64QAM +MIMO, the EBBC or EBBCd board must be configured.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-010684 2×2 MIMO – WRFD-010683 Downlink 64 QAM

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE is of category 19, 20 as specified by the 3GPP specifications.

Context In 3GPP Release 8, MIMO and 64QAM can be used in combination to increase the peak throughput of a single user. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


509



With 64QAM+MIMO, the peak throughput of a single user can reach 42Mbit/s, compared to 28Mbit/s with MIMO or 21Mbit/s with 64QAM only. NOTE

l The SRB, CS service, IMS signaling, and PS conversational services are not carried on MIMO, 64QAM, or MIMO+64QAM because the data flow is small and the gain is insignificant. l The PS streaming service, PS interactive service, PS background service, and the combined services with previous services can be carried on MIMO+64QAM.

Data Planning Parameter

Example

Source

Local Cell ID

1

Network planning

Cell ID

1

Network planning

DL streaming traffic threshold on HSDPA

D64

Network planning

DL BE traffic threshold on HSDPA

D64

Network planning

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to modify a local cell. In this step, set DL 64QAM MIMO to TRUE.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the following three BSC6900-level switches: In this step, select CFG_HSDPA_64QAM_SWITCH, CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_SWITCH, and CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_WITH_64QAM_SWITCH from the Channel Configuration Strategy Switch list.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to configure preferential use of 64QAM+MIMO. In this step, select MIMO_64QAM from the Prefered MIMO_64QAM or DC_HSDPA character list.

4.

Optional: If the streaming service needs to use HSDPA, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step,


510



select MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH from the Service Mapping Strategy Switch list.

l

l

5.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set DL streaming traffic threshold on HSDPA and DL BE traffic threshold on HSDPA according to the actual network planning.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to turn on the following four cell-level switches: In this step, select 64QAM(Cell 64QAM Function Switch), MIMO(Cell MIMO Function Switch), DL_L2ENHANCED(Cell DL L2ENHANCED Function Switch), and 64QAM_MIMO(Cell 64QAM+MIMO Function Switch) from the Cell Hspa Plus function switch list.


Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to query the configuration information of the local cell. In this step, set Query Mode to LOCALCELL(Query Localcell by ID) and then specify Local Cell ID. The execution result displayed on the LMT shows the DL 64QAM+MIMO capability.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELLALGOSWITCH to verify the configuration result of the cell algorithm switch.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to verify the configuration result of the connection-oriented algorithm switch.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLCHK to check that the cell supports 64QAM+MIMO.


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to turn off the cell-level 64QAM+MIMO switch. In this step, deselect 64QAM_MIMO(Cell 64QAM+MIMO Function Switch) from the Cell Hspa Plus function switch list.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn off the BSC6900-level 64QAM+MIMO switch. In this step, deselect CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_WITH_64QAM_SWITCH from the Channel Configuration Strategy Switch list.

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Operations on the NodeB side MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, DL64QAM_MIMO=TRUE; //Operations on the BSC6900 side SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_64QAM_SWITCH-1&CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_SWITCH-1&CFG_HSDPA_MIMO

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


511



_WITH_64QAM_SWITCH-1; SET UFRC: MIMO64QAMorDCHSDPASwitch=MIMO_64QAM; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH-1; SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlStrThsOnHsdpa=D64, DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D64; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=64QAM-1&MIMO-1&DL_L2ENHANCED-1&64QAM_MIMO-1; //Verification procedure //Operations on the NodeB side LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=1; //Operations on the BSC6900 side LST UCELLALGOSWITCH:CellId=1; LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH: LstFormat=VERTICAL; DSP UCELLCHK:CellId=1; //Deactivation procedure //Operations on the BSC6900 side MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=64QAM_MIMO-0; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_WITH_64QAM_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


512



154

Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010698 HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Dependencies on NodeB for uplink 16QAM+E-DPCCH boosting: – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULPd board. – The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board. – The 3900 series base station must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board. – Dependencies on NodeB for DC-HSUPA: – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULP or EULPd board. – The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The 3900 series base station must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – For uplink 16QAM+E-DPCCH boosting, – WRFD-010694 UL 16QAM – WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2 – WRFD-010697 E-DPCCH Boosting – For DC-HSUPA, – WRFD-140204 DC-HSUPA – WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


513


l


Others – The UE must support E-DPCCH boosting. The UE must be of HSUPA category 7, 8, or 9. – The CN must support an uplink data rate of 11.5Mbit/s or above.

Context With the original HSUPA peak rate of 5.74 Mbps, the UE increases its uplink peak rate to 11.5 Mbps by using the technologies introduced in 3GPP Release 7, including 16QAM and E-DPCCH Boosting.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


To enable the SRB to carry over HSUPA, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB set to HSUPA(UL_EDCH,DL_DCH).

2.

To enable the 2 ms TTI switch, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with Service Mapping Strategy Switch set to MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH.

3.

To enable the switch for RNC-level UL 16QAM, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with Channel Configuration Strategy Switch set to CFG_HSUPA_16QAM_SWITCH.

4.

To enable the algorithm switch for RNC-level E-DPCCH Boosting, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with Channel Configuration Strategy Switch set to CFG_EDPCCH_BOOSTING_SWITCH.

5.

To enable the switch for cell-level UL 16QAM, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) with Cell Hspa Plus function switch set to UL_16QAM(Cell UL 16QAM Function Switch) .

6.

To enable the switch for cell-level UL Layer 2 Improvement, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) with Cell Hspa Plus function switch set to UL_L2ENHANCED(Cell UL L2ENHANCED Function Switch). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

514


l


7.

To enable cell-level Boosting, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) with Cell Hspa Plus function switch set to EDPCCH_BOOSTING(Cell E-DPCCH Boosting Function Switch).

8.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) with UL_16QAM set to TRUE, UL_L2ENHANCED to TRUE, and EDPCCH_BOOSTING to TRUE.


Enable a UE of 3GPP Release 7 or later versions and supporting UL 16QAM to access the network and to establish PS services on the E-DCH and HS-DSCH.

2.

Create a task under UL Throughput and Bandwidth on the BSC6900 LMT. Upload by FTP is normal. Ideally, the uplink throughput of the UE in MAC layer can reach 11.5 Mbps.

l


To disable the switch for RNC-level UL 16QAM, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with Channel Configuration Strategy Switch deselect to CFG_HSUPA_16QAM_SWITCH .

2.

To disable the switch for cell-level UL 16QAM, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) with Cell Hspa Plus function switch deselect to UL_16QAM(Cell UL 16QAM Function Switch) .

----End

Example /* Activating the HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbps per User feature*/ //Enabling the SRB to carry over HSUPA SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSUPA; //Enabling the 2ms TTI switch SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1; //Enabling the switch for RNC-level UL 16QAM SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSUPA_16QAM_SWITCH-1; //Enabling the algorithm switch for RNC-level Boosting SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch= CFG_EDPCCH_BOOSTING_SWITCH-1; //Enabling the switch for cell-level UL 16QAM MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1,HspaPlusSwitch=UL_16QAM-1; //Enabling the switch for cell-level UL Layer 2 Improvement MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=UL_L2ENHANCED-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


515



//Enabling the algorithm switch for cell-level Boosting MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch= EDPCCH_BOOSTING-1; //Setting the UL Layer 2 Improvement, UL 16QAM, and Boosting functions MOD LOCELL: CellId=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, UL_L2+=TRUE, UL_16QAM=TRUE, Boosting=TRUE; /* Deactivating the HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbps per User feature*/ //Disabling the switch for RNC-level UL 16QAM SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSUPA_16QAM_SWITCH-0; //Disabling the switch for cell-level UL 16QAM MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1,HspaPlusSwitch=UL_16QAM-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


516



155

Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010703 HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Requirements on BSC6900 Hardware – The DPUe is required to support this feature. – The FG2a (for the GE interface), FG2c (for the GE interface), GOUa, or GOUc serve as the interface boards. – Requirements on NodeB Hardware – The BTS3812AE/BTS3812E and DBS3800 cannot provide the downlink peak rate of 84 Mbit/s per user. – To support this feature, 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPd, WBBPb3, WBBPb4 or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features must be configured before this feature is activated: – WRFD-010689 HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbit/s per User – WRFD-010693 DL 64QAM+MIMO – WRFD-010699 DC-HSDPA+MIMO

l


l

Others – The UE must be of category 28 to support 84 Mbit/s in the downlink, according to 3GPP Release 9. – The Iub interface uses IP transmission mode rather than ATM or STM-1 transmission mode. – Downlink 64QAM

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


517



– CN support user rate of 84Mbit/s or above.

Context This feature improves the maximum downlink rate of a single user to 84 Mbit/s using 64QAM, MIMO, and DC-HSDPA, and users can experience high-speed data services.

Procedure l


l


Set the BE service rate of a UE at the Home Location Register (HLR) to 84 Mbit/s.

2.

Enable the UE in an HSDPA cell to download a 1024 MB file from the FTP server. Check whether the download transmission rate is close to 84 Mbit/s. If yes, this feature has been activated. In this case, the UE will originate BE services in the HSDPA cell, and the BSC6900 will establish services on the HS-DSCH.

3.

On the BSC6900 LMT, start Monitoring DL Throughput and Bandwidth, as shown in Figure 155-1.

Figure 155-1 Connection performance monitoring result

The connection performance monitoring result indicates that the bandwidth the BSC6900 assigns to the UE is close to 84 Mbit/s bandwidth to the UE. That is, this feature has been activated. l


----End

Example None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


518



156

Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010699 DC-HSDPA+MIMO.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The HBBI and HDLP boards in the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE do not support the DCHSDPA+MIMO feature. To support this feature, the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI and EDLP boards. – To support DC-HSDPA+MIMO, the DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd boards. In addition, the maximum capability of the DBS3800 is DC+MIMOx1. That is, only one frequency in a dual cell (DC) group can be configured with MIMO. – 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf boards.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features must be configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA and WRFD-010684 2×2 MIMO.

l


l

Others – This feature is dependent on the UE capability (class 25, 26, 27, and 28 on the HSDSCH). – Differentiated Service Management.

Context Introduced in the R9 protocol, the DC-HSDPA+MIMO feature combines the DS-HSDPA feature in the R8 protocol and the MIMO feature in the R7 protocol. This feature allows two inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring carriers under a NodeB that use the same frequency band to simultaneously transmit HSDPA data to a UE.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


519



Procedure l


To enable the algorithm switch for RNC-level DC-HSDPA+MIMO, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with Channel Configuration Strategy Switch set to CFG_HSDPA_DCMIMO_SWITCH and CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_SWITCH.

2.

Optional: if HSDPA is required for streaming services, you need to enable the algorithm switch for streaming services carried over HSDPA: run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with Service Mapping Strategy Switch set to MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with HSPA Technologies Retried by UEs set to DCMIMO_HSDPA.

4.

To set the HSDPA threshold for downlink streaming services and for downlink BE services, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with DL streaming traffic threshold on HSDPA and DL BE traffic threshold on HSDPA set to appropriate values according to the network plan.

5.

To enable the switch for cell-level DC-HSDPA+MIMO and the algorithm switch for DL Layer2 Improvement, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) with Cell Hspa Plus function switch set to DL_L2ENHANCED and DCMIMO_HSDPA. NOTE

You are advised to enable the switch for cell-level DC-HSDPA+MIMO and the algorithm switch for DL Layer2 Improvement on two cells of the DC-HSDPA cell group.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

6.

To add the HSDPA parameters for a cell, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) with related parameters set to appropriate values according to the network plan.

7.

To enable the switch for cell-level DC-HSDPA+MIMO, run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) or MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) with DC+MIMO set to TRUE on the NodeB. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

520


l


8.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML commandACT UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters. Set ACTSTATUS to Activated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to activate the HSDPA function for a cell.

9.

Optional: When the DC-HSDPA+MIMO feature is used, you need to activate the Configure HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User feature by referring to Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User if the downlink throughput of a single user is expected to reach 84 Mbit/s.


To check the number of online DC-HSDPA+MIMO users, query the counter VS.HSDPA.UE.Mean.CAT25.28 to obtain the average number of HSDPA users of CAT25 to CAT28 in a cell, and query the counter VS.HSDPA.UE.Max.CAT25.28 to obtain the maximum number of HSDPA users of CAT25 to CAT28 in a cell.

2.

To check DC-HSDPA+MIMO service setup, query the counter VS.HSDPA.RAB.DCMIMO.AttEstab to obtain the number of DC-HSDPA-MIMO RAB setup attempts on the primary carrier in a DC group, and query the counter VS.HSDPA.RAB.DCMIMO.SuccEstab to obtain the number of successful DCHSDPA-MIMO RAB setups on the primary carrier in a DC group.

3.

To check DC-HSDPA+MIMO call drops, query the counter VS.HSDPA.RAB.DCMIMO.NormRel to obtain the number of DC-HSDPA-MIMO RABs normally released on the primary carrier in a DC group, and query the counter VS.HSDPA.RAB.DCMIMO.AbnormRel to obtain the number of DC-HSDPAMIMO RABs abnormally released on the primary carrier in a DC group (including RF Failure).

4.

Enable UE tracing, and establish HSPA BE services to check whether the RADIO BEARER SETUP message over the Uu interface carries dlSecondaryCellInfoFDD and secondaryCellMIMOparameters. – If the RADIO BEARER SETUP message over the Uu interface carries dlSecondaryCellInfoFDD and secondaryCellMIMOparameters, as shown in Figure 156-1, the feature has been activated. – If the RADIO BEARER SETUP message over the Uu interface does not carry dlSecondaryCellInfoFDD or secondaryCellMIMOparameters, the feature has not been activated. Figure 156-1 RADIO BEARER SETUP message

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


521


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect CFG_HSDPA_DCMIMO_SWITCH and CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_SWITCH from the Channel Configuration Strategy Switch drop-down list to disable the algorithm switch for RNC-level DC-HSDPA+MIMO on the RNC.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect DCMIMO_HSDPA(Cell DCHSDPA Combined with MIMO Function Switch) from the Cell Hspa Plus function switch drop-down list to disable the algorithm switch for cell-level DCHSDPA+MIMO on the RNC.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set DC+MIMO to FALSE to disable the algorithm switch for DC-HSDPA+MIMO on the NodeB.

----End

Example /*Activating DC-HSDPA+MIMO*/ //Enabling the algorithm switch for RNC-level DC-HSDPA+MIMO SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_DCMIMO_SWITCH-1&CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_SWITCH-1; //(Optional) Enabling the algorithm switch for streaming services over HSDPA If HSDPA is required for streaming services SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH-1; //Enabling the retried switch for DC-HSDPA+MIMO SET UFRC: RetryCapability=DCMIMO_HSDPA-1; //Setting HSDPA thresholds for downlink streaming services and for downlink BE services SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlStrThsOnHsdpa=D64, DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D64; //Enabling the switch for cell-level DC-HSDPA+MIMO and the algorithm switch for DL Layer2 Improvement MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=64QAM-1&MIMO-1&DL_L2ENHANCED-1&64QAM_MIMO-1&DC_HSDPA-1&DCM IMO_HADPA-1 //Adding the HSDPA parameters for a cell ADD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=1, AllocCodeMode=Automatic, CodeAdjForHsdpaSwitch=ON; //Activating the DC-HSDPA+MIMO function on the NodeB MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, DC_MIMO=TRUE; //Activating the HSDPA function for a cell ACT UCELLHSDPA: CellId=1; /*Deactivating DC-HSDPA+MIMO*/ //Disabling the algorithm switch for RNC-level DC-HSDPA+MIMO SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_DCMIMO_SWITCH-0; //Disable the switch for cell-level DC-HSDPA+MIMO MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=DCMIMO_HSDPA-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


522



//Disable the switch for DC-HSDPA+MIMO on the NodeB MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, DC_MIMO=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


523



157

Configuring UL 16QAM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010694 UL 16QAM.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – In the case of the 3900 series base station, the WBBPd or WBBPf board needs to be configured. – In the case of the DBS3800, the EBBCd board needs to be configured. – In the case of the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE, the EULPd board needs to be configured. – For the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE, the uplink resource groups are set up on the EULPd board, and the downlink cells are set up on the EBBI or EDLP board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The CN supports the "peak rate per user" introduced by UL 16QAM. – The UE must be of category 7, category 9.

Context l

This feature can help increase the system capacity in the uplink so that HSUPA users can obtain a higher peak rate.

l

It is recommended that the feature WRFD-010692 HSUPA FDE be activated to help increase the data throughput on the Uu interface.

l


Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

524



batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to modify a local cell. In this step, set UL 16QAM to TRUE.

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches), Select the UL_16QAM(Cell UL 16QAM Function Switch) check box under the parameter Cell Hspa Plus function switch.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches), Select the CFG_HSUPA_16QAM_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel Configuration Strategy Switch.


Run the NodeB MML command DSP LOCELL to query the configuration information of the local cell.

2.

As Figure 157-1 shows, start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. Figure 157-1 Uu Interface tracing

3.

Use the UE to perform a dialing test of the PS service. Ensure that an HSUPA service is established.

4.

Analyze the trace messages. In the Uu interface trace data, view the EDCH information information element (IE) in the RRC_RB_SETUP message. – As shown in Figure 157-2, if the EDCH information IE contains the indicator of uplink 16QAM, you can infer that this feature has been activated. – If the EDCH information IE does not contain the indicator of uplink 16QAM, you can infer that this feature has not been activated.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


525



Figure 157-2 Indication of uplink 16QAM

l


Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to modify the local cell. In this step, set UL_16QAM to FALSE.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches), Clear the UL_16QAM(Cell UL 16QAM Function Switch) check box under the parameter Cell Hspa Plus function switch.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches), Clear the CFG_HSUPA_16QAM_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel Configuration Strategy Switch.

----End

Example //Activation procedure MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, UL_16QAM=TRUE; ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=UL_16QAM-1; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSUPA_16QAM_SWITCH-1; //Verification procedure DSP LOCELL: LOCELL=1; //Deactivation procedure MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, UL_16QAM=FALSE; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=UL_16QAM-0; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSUPA_16QAM_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


526



158

Configuring UL Layer 2 Improvement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010695 UL Layer 2 Improvement.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – In the case of the BTS3900, BTS3900A, or DBS3900, the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:b (WBBPb) board (including WBBPb1, WBBPb2, WBBPb3, and WBBPb4) or the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:d (WBBPd) board (including WBBPd1 or WBBPd2) is configured. – For BBU3806,EBBC or EBBCd is needed. – For BBU3900, WBBPb ,WBBPd or WBBPf is needed. – For BTS3812E and BTS3812AE, EBBI/EBOI/EULP/EULPd is needed.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package feature has been configured before this feature is activated. – WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 8 (or later) to support the feature.

Context This feature enables the radio link layer to use a flexible Protocol Data Unit (PDU) size for data transmission based on the radio transmission environment on the Uu interface. l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

When the UE is located at the cell edge, data is transmitted in a small PDU size, reducing the bit error rate (BER) caused by power limitation and improving the data transmission efficiency. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

527



l

When the UE is located in the cell center, data is transmitted in a large PDU size, meeting the high-speed data transmission requirement and increasing the data transmission efficiency. As a result, the effective throughput of the entire system is increased.

l


Procedure 1.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set parameters related to UL Layer 2 Improvement at the BSC6900 level. In this step, set Cell_DCH UL L2 enhance max RLC PDU size and Cell_DCH UL L2 enhance min RLC PDU size to appropriate values. NOTE

Generally, use the default values of Cell_DCH UL L2 enhance max RLC PDU size and Cell_DCH UL L2 enhance min RLC PDU size of the BSC6900.

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable UL Layer 2 Improvement at the cell level. In this step, select the DL_L2ENHANCED(Cell DL L2ENHANCED Function Switch) check box under the parameter Cell Hspa Plus function switch.

3.

NodeB V100R014: Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to enable UL Layer 2 Improvement at the cell level. In this step, set UL_L2+ to TRUE.

4.

NodeB V200R014: Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to enable UL Layer 2 Improvement at the cell level. In this step, set UL L2 Enhanced to TRUE.


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 158-1.


528




2.

Use an UE to establish an HSUPA service. NOTE

The type of services that use this feature is limited by the HSUPA rate threshold.

3.

In the Uu interface tracing data, check the value of the information element (IE) rlcPDU-Size in the RRC_RB_SETUP message. – If the value of the IE rlc-PDU-Size is flexibleSize, as shown in Figure 158-2, this feature has been activated. – If the value of the IE rlc-PDU-Size is fixedSize, this feature is not activated. Figure 158-2 Value of the IE rlc-PDU-Size

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


529



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to disable UL Layer 2 Improvement at the cell level. In this step, deselect the DL_L2ENHANCED(Cell DL L2ENHANCED Function Switch) check box under the parameter Cell Hspa Plus function switch.

2.

NodeB V100R014: Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to disable UL Layer 2 Improvement at the cell level. In this step, set UL_L2+ to FALSE.

3.

NodeB V200R014: Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to disable UL Layer 2 Improvement at the cell level. In this step, set UL L2 Enhanced to FALSE.

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Turning on the cell-level switch for UL Layer 2 Improvement on the BSC6900 side MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=UL_L2ENHANCED-1; //Enabling UL Layer 2 Improvement at the cell level on the NodeB side //NodeB V100R014 MOD LOCELL: CellId=1, UL_L2+=TRUE; //NodeB V200R014 MOD LOCELL: CellId=1, UL_L2PLUS=TRUE; //Deactivation procedure //Turning off the cell-level switch for UL Layer 2 Improvement on the BSC6900 side MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: HspaPlusSwitch=UL_L2ENHANCED-0; //Disabling UL Layer 2 Improvement at the cell level on the NodeB side// NodeB V100R014 MOD LOCELL: CellId=1, UL_L2+=FALSE; //NodeB V200R014 MOD LOCELL: CellId=1, UL_L2PLUS=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


530



159

Configuring DC-HSDPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – For 3900 series base station, BBU3900 needs to be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf. – For DBS3800 base station, the BBU3806 needs to be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd. – The BTS3812E or BTS3812AE needs to be configured with the EBBI or EDLP board, and the UL baseband resources of DC-HSDPA cells cannot be carried on the HBBI or HULP board. They can be carried on the EBBI or EDLP board. – For the BSC6900, DPUe boards are recommended because the downlink 42 Mbit/s throughput of DC-HSDPA users may be affected if the BSC6900 is configured with DPUb boards.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package – WRFD-010629 DL 16QAM Modulation – WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2

l

License – The license controlling this feature has been activated.

l

Other Prerequisites – The UEs must belong in categories 21 or later(category 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28), as specified by the 3GPP specifications.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


531



Context

CAUTION Activate this feature when the traffic volume in a cell is low. The reason is that the cell must be deactivated before this feature is activated; after the cell is deactivated, the services in this cell are disrupted. Dual Cell-HSDPA (DC-HSDPA) allows an UE to establish downlink connections simultaneously to two inter-frequency co-coverage cells that are configured with consecutive frequencies and controlled by one NodeB. The two cells can schedule the UE simultaneously, therefore increasing the downlink peak throughput of the UE. The gain of downlink throughput is higher when the UE is located at the cell edge. NOTE

l The CS service, IMS signaling, SRB signaling, or PS conversational service is carried on a single carrier instead of DC-HSDPA because the amount of data is small and the gain is insignificant when DCHSDPA is used. l The BE or streaming service can be carried over the DC-HSDPA. The BE/streaming combined service is carried over the DC-HSDPA preferentially.

Data Configuration Plan Parameters

Example

Source

ID of local cell 1

1

Network planning

ID of local cell 2

2

Network planning

Cell ID

1 and 2

Network planning

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set NodeB Protocol Version to R9.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCNNODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Core Network > UMTS CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set CN protocol version to R8.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the logical cell of local cell 1.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

532



Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the logical cell of local cell 2. 5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CFG_HSDPA_DC_SWITCH from the Channel Configuration Strategy Switch list.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Preferred MIMO_64QAM or DC_HSDPA character to DC_HSDPA. NOTE

If the switch parameter is set to DC_HSDPA, the network preferentially configures DC_HSDPA for the UE. Set this parameter to DC_HSDPA before the verification. After the verification is complete, set this parameter according to actual network planning.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select DC_HSDPA from the Cell Hspa Plus function switch list.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information) to query the parameter Time Offset (TCELL) of the two cells. Ensure that the parameter is set to the same value.

9.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to change the time offset of a cell.

10. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DLDUALCELLGRP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Other Information > DLDUALCELLGRP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a DC group of local cell 1 and local cell 2. In this step, set First Local Cell ID and Second Local Cell ID respectively to the ID of local cell 1 and local cell 2. 11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to activate the logical cell of local cell 1. 12. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to activate the logical cell of local cell 2. l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


533



1.

Click Uu Interface Trace on the LMT, as shown in Figure 159-1.

Figure 159-1 Uu Interface Trace dialogue box

2.

For cells with Cell DC-HSDPA Function Switch turned on, trace RRC_RB_SETUP messages on the Uu interface.

3.

Perform dialing tests on FTP services for a UE to ensure that data is transmitted on HSDPA channels.

4.

On the Trace tab page of the LMT, check whether RRC_RB_SETUP messages contain the dl-SecondaryCellInfoFDD information element. – If the dl-SecondaryCellInfoFDD information element is contained, as shown in Figure 159-2, it indicates that the feature is activated. – If the dl-SecondaryCellInfoFDD information element is not contained, it indicates that the feature is not activated. Figure 159-2 RRC_RB_SETUP message

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


534



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect CFG_HSDPA_DC_SWITCH from the Channel Configuration Strategy Switch list.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the logical cell of local cell 1.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV DLDUALCELLGRP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Other Information > DLDUALCELLGRP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the DC-HSDPA cell group. NOTE

To remove a DC-HSDPA cell group, you only need to remove one local cell in the group.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to activate the logical cell of local cell 1.

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Modify the protocol version of the NodeB and CN MOD UNODEB: IDTYPE=BYID, NodeBId=0, NodeBProtclVer=R9; MOD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=0, CNId=0, CNDomainId=PS_DOMAIN, CNProtclVer=R8; //To deactivate cells, run the following command repeatedly: DEA UCELL: CellId=1; DEA UCELL: CellId=2; //Setting channel configuration strategy switch SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_DC_SWITCH-1; //Setting preferred MIMO_64QAM or DC_HSDPA character SET UFRC: MIMO64QAMorDcHSDPASwitch= DC_HSDPA; //Setting Cell Hspa Plus function switch MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=DC_HSDPA-1; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=2, HspaPlusSwitch=DC_HSDPA-1; //Querying the parameter Time Offset (TCELL) of the cell LST UCELL: LstType=ByCellId, CellId=1; LST UCELL: LstType=ByCellId, CellId=2; //Modifying the time offset of the cell MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=2, TCell=CHIP512; //Configuring local cell 1 and local cell 2 as a DC-HSDPA cell group ADD DLDUALCELLGRP: FIRSTLOCELL=1, SECONDLOCELL=2; //Activating the cells ACT UCELL: CellId=1; ACT UCELL: CellId=2; //Deactivation procedure //To set Channel Configuration Strategy Switch, run the following command: MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=DC_HSDPA-0; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=2, HspaPlusSwitch=DC_HSDPA-0; //To deactivate cell, run the following command: DEA UCELL: CellId=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


535



DEA UCELL: CellId=2; //To remove the DC-HSDPA cell group, run the following command: RMV DLDUALCELLGRP: FIRSTLOCELL=1, SECONDLOCELL=2; //To activate cell, run the following command: ACT UCELL: CellId=1; ACT UCELL: CellId=2;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


536



160

Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/ s per User

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140203 HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature has the following impact on the RNC hardware: – The DPUb or DPUe board must be configured. – In IP transmission mode, the GOUa, FG2A, POUc, FG2c or GOUc board must be configured. The following table briefly describes the boards: Board Name Description FG2a

8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV:a

GOUa

2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:a

FG2c

12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c

GOUc

4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:c

POUc

4-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c Supporting IP over E1/T1 over SDH/SONET

– This feature has the following impact on the NodeB hardware: – In addition to the DPUb or DPUe board, the GOUa, FG2a, POUc, FG2c, or GOUc board must be configured on the RNC. – All 3900 series base stations support this feature. The WBBPd or WBBPf board must be configured on these base stations. – All DBS3800 series base stations support this feature. The EBBCd board must be configured on these base stations. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


537



– The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE support this feature. The EULPd board must be configured on these base stations. Downlink services must be established on the EBBI, EBOI or EDLP board. – When 4-way receive diversity is used, only 3900 series base stations (except the BTS3902E) support this feature. – The uplink peak rate of 23 Mbit/s is applicable only to IP transmission scenarios. The NodeB connects to the transmission equipment through the Ethernet port on the transmission board. – The UE must support E-DPCCH Boosting and DC-HUSPA. The UE must be of HSUPA UE category. – The CN is of 3GPP Release 7 or later to support a maximum uplink rate of 23 Mbit/ s or higher, which is promised at service subscription time. l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: – WRFD-010694 UL 16QAM – WRFD-010697 E-DPCCH Boosting – WRFD-140204 DC-HSUPA – WRFD-010698 HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User

l


l

Other Prerequisites – To support a peak rate of 23 Mbit/s of a single UE, the IP over Iub transmission is used and the uplink bandwidth is greater than 25 Mbit/s. – On the NodeB side, run the SET ETHPORT or ADD ETHPORT command to set Maximum Transmission Unit to 1500 or above. The default value of this parameter is 1500. – The transmission network carried on the Iub interface supports the maximum transmission unit (MTU) of greater than 1500 bytes. On the NodeB, the ping operation is performed, with PING Packet Size set to 2990. If the ping operation succeeds, the transmission network meets the requirements. – The UE must support E-DPCCH Boosting and DC-HUSPA.The UE must be of HSUPA UE category 9. – The CN is of 3GPP Release 7 or later to support a maximum uplink rate of 23 Mbit/s or higher, which is promised at service subscription time.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure After the license is activated, this feature has been activated.

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Enable a DC-HSUPA UE supporting 16QAM to access the network and to establish PS services on the E-DCH and HS-DSCH.

2.

On the BSC6900 LMT, start Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth, as shown in Figure 160-1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

538



Figure 160-1 Performance monitoring result

Expected result: The bandwidth is 23 Mbit/s, and FTP uploading is normal. The feature has been activated. l


----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


539



161

Configuring DC-HSUPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140204 DC-HSUPA.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature has the following impact on the NodeB hardware: – All 3900 series base stations support this feature. The WBBPd or WBBPf board must be configured on these base stations. – All DBS3800 series base stations support this feature. The EBBCd board must be configured on these base stations. – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE configured with the EBBI, EBOI, EULP, or EULPd board support this feature. Downlink services must be established on the EBBI, EBOI or EDLP board. – When 4-way receive diversity is used, only 3900 series base stations (except the BTS3902E) support this feature. – The uplink peak rate of 23 Mbit/s is applicable only to IP transmission scenarios. The NodeB connects to the transmission equipment through the Ethernet port on the transmission board. In addition to the DPUb or DPUe board, the GOUa, FG2a, POUc, FG2c, or GOUc board must be configured on the RNC.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: – WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2 – WRFD-010695 UL Layer 2 Improvement – WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA – WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA – WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA – WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE Resource Management

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


540



– To support a peak rate of 11.5 Mbit/s of a single UE, the license for the feature WRFD-010698 HSPA+ Uplink 11.5 Mbit/s per User must be activated. – To support a peak rate of 23 Mbit/s of a single UE, the license for the feature WRFD-140203 HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User must be activated. l

Other Prerequisites – Two DC-HSUPA cells must be on intra-band adjacent carriers that provide the same coverage. – Two adjacent carriers are available and DC-HSDPA has been configured in the downlink. – To support a peak rate of 23 Mbit/s of a single UE, the IP over Iub transmission is used and the uplink bandwidth is greater than 25 Mbit/s. – On the NodeB side, run the SET ETHPORT or ADD ETHPORT command to set Maximum Transmission Unit to 1500. The default value of this parameter is 1500. – The UE must comply with 3GPP Release 9 or later. – The UE must be of HSUPA UE category 8 or 9. – Category-8 UEs support only DC-HSUPA+QPSK. Their peak rate is 11.5 Mbit/s. – Category-9 UEs support DC-HSUPA+16QAM. Their peak rate is 23 Mbit/s.

Context Before DC-HSUPA is configured, DC-HSDPA must be configured in cells. For details, see 159 Configuring DC-HSDPA.

Procedure l


Run the NodeB MML command ADD ULDUALCELLGRP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > Other Information > ULDUALCELLGRP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure cells in a DC-HSUPA carrier group.

2.

To enable the DC-HSUPA algorithm on the RNC, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CFG_HSUPA_DC_SWITCH under Channel Configuration Strategy Switch.

3.

To configure the cell capability on the RNC, Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select DC_HSUPA(Cell DC-HSUPA Function Switch) under Cell Hspa Plus function switch. NOTE

DC-HSUPA must be enabled for the two cells. Logical cells corresponding to the local cells on the NodeB must be configured.

4.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

To configure DC-HSUPA periodic retry capability, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

541



Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select DC_HSUPA under HSPA Technologies Retried by UEs. 5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB to HSPA (UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH).

6.

Enable the HSUPA TTI Selection feature or algorithm of coverage-based BE service fallback from E-DCH to DCH. – If the HSUPA TTI Selection feature has been activated on the RNC, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select DRA_BASE_ADM_CE_BE_TTI_L2_OPT_SWITCH, DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_L2_OPT_SWITCH, and DRA_BASE_RES_BE_TTI_L2_OPT_SWITCH under Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. – If the HSUPA TTI Selection feature has not been activated on the RNC. In this step, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable the algorithm of coverage-based BE service fallback from E-DCH to DCH. In this step, select RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT7 under CORRM Algorithm Reserved Switch 0.

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

In the Navigation Tree pane on the RNC LMT, click the Trace tab. In the displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On the unfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu Interface Trace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP to trace Uu interface signaling messages of DC-HSUPA cells, as shown in Figure 161-1.


542




2.

Perform dialing tests on FTP services for a DC-HSUPA UE and ensure that HSUPA services have been set up.

3.

On the Trace tab page of the BSC6900 LMT, check whether the RRC_RB_SETUP messages contain the ul-SecondaryCellInfoFDD information element (IE). If the IE is contained, the DC-HSUPA feature has been activated, as shown in Figure 161-2. Figure 161-2 Message Explanation

l


Deactivating the DC-HSUPA feature decreases cell uplink throughput.

1.

Disable the DC-HSUPA algorithm on the RNC. – To disable the DC-HSUPA feature of the entire RNC, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear CFG_HSUPA_DC_SWITCH under Channel Configuration Strategy Switch. – To disable the DC-HSUPA feature of a specified cell, Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


543



Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear DC_HSUPA(Cell DC-HSUPA Function Switch) under Cell Hspa Plus function switch. 2.

Optional: Run the NodeB MML command RMV ULDUALCELLGRP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > Other Information > ULDUALCELLGRP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a carrier group.

----End

Example //Activation procedure ADD ULDUALCELLGRP: FIRSTLOCELL=0, SECONDLOCELL=2; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSUPA_DC_SWITCH-1; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=DC_HSUPA-1; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=2, HspaPlusSwitch=DC_HSUPA-1; SET UFRC: RetryCapability=DC_HSUPA-1; SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSPA; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_BASE_ADM_CE_BE_TTI_L2_OPT_SWITCH-1&DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_L2 _OPT_SWITCH-1&DRA_BASE_RES_BE_TTI_L2_OPT_SWITCH-1; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: ReservedSwitch0=RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT7-1; //Deactivation procedure //Deactivating the DC-HSUPA feature of the entire RNC SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSUPA_DC_SWITCH-0; //Deactivating the DC-HSUPA feature of a specified cell MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=DC_HSUPA-0; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=2, HspaPlusSwitch=DC_HSUPA-0; //(Optional) Removing a NodeB carrier group RMV ULDUALCELLGRP: FIRSTLOCELL=0, SECONDLOCELL=2;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


544



162

Configuring Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010688 Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – HBBI and HDLP on BTS3812E/BTS3812AE do not support this feature, EBBI, EDLP is needed. – BBU3806 does not support this feature, EBBC or EBBCd is needed. – 3900 series NodeB: WBBPa does not support this feature, and WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board are needed.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE must be Release 7 (or later) UE and support this feature.

Context This feature enables the FACH to be carried on the HS-DSCH. Based on this feature, the UE can receive data at a higher rate in CELL_FACH state.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to select E_FACH(Cell E_FACH Function Switch) and Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

545



DL_L2ENHANCED(Cell DL L2ENHANCED Function Switch) from the dropdown list Cell Hspa Plus function switch.

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to add HUDPA parameters of a cell.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLEFACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Enhanced FACH parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to add enhanced CELL_FACH state parameters of a cell.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters. Set ACTSTATUS to Activated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to activate HSDPA feature.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLEFACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Enhanced FACH parameters. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to activate this feature.


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether EFACH is available. The value of Status of EFACH is EFACH available.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to clear E_FACH(Cell E_FACH Function Switch) and DL_L2ENHANCED(Cell DL L2ENHANCED Function Switch) from the dropdown list Cell Hspa Plus function switch.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLEFACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Enhanced FACH parameters. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to deactivate this feature.

----End

Example //Activating Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, HspaPlusSwitch=E_FACH-1&DL_L2ENHANCED-1; ADD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=11, AllocCodeMode=Automatic, CodeAdjForHsdpaSwitch=ON; ADD UCELLEFACH: CellId=11; ACT UCELLHSDPA: CellId=11; ACT UCELLEFACH: CellId=11; //Deactivating Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, HspaPlusSwitch=E_FACH-0&DL_L2ENHANCED-0; DEA UCELLEFACH: CellId=11;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


546


163 Configuring Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier

163

Configuring Performance

Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010700 Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature is only supported by 40W RRU3801C, RRU3804, RRU3806, RRU3808, WRFU, RRU3805, WRFUd, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3928, RRU3929, MRFUd, MRFUe and 850M/900M/1900M RRU3908V1. – The BTS3812E/AE cannot support this feature. – The RRU3908 V2 and MRFU V2 modules support this feature from RAN14.0.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package – WRFD-010685 Enhanced L2 – WRFD-010684 2x2 MIMO

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE must be support 2x2 MIMO. – The UE is of category 15, 16, 17, 18, as specified by the 3GPP protocols.

Context

CAUTION Before enabling the feature in an existing cell, you need to deactivate the cell. This, however, will interrupt services in the cell. Therefore, you should enable the feature when the traffic of the cell is low.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


547



The feature adopts MIMO in Primary/Secondary common Pilot (PSP) mode, Virtual Antenna Mapping (VAM), and Intelligent Interference Control (ICC), improving performance of MIMO and HSDPA co-carrier. Data Planning Parameters

Example

Source

Site Number

0

Network plan

Sector number

2

Network plan

Local cell ID

1

Network plan

Cell ID

1

Network plan

SCPICH ID

5

Network plan

Transmit power of SCPICH [0.1 dB]

0

Network plan

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate MIMO cells.

2.

On the NodeB, remove the old local cell and establish a new local cell. a.


b.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add a local cell. In this step, set VAM to TRUE (TRUE), TTW to TRUE and Precoding Weight Set Restriction Switch to TRUE.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set IIC Switch to OPEN(open).

4.

Configure the PSP function on the BSC6900 side. – Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to modify the cell basic information. In this step, set TX Diversity Indication to FALSE. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USCPICH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > SCPICH;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


548



CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying UMTS Channel Parameters in Batches) to add a secondary common pilot channel (SCPICH). 5.

l

l



Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL. In this step, check that VAM is TRUE.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA. In this step, check that IIC Switch is OPEN.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST USCPICH. In this step, check that an SCPICH is already configured.


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate MIMO cells.

2.

On the NodeB, remove the old local cell and establish a new local cell. a.


b.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add a local cell. In this step, set VAM to FALSE (FALSE) and TTW to FALSE.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set IIC Switch to CLOSE(close).

4.

Disable the PSP function on the BSC6900 side. – Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV USCPICH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > SCPICH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a secondary common pilot channel (SCPICH).

5.


----End

Example l

NodeB V200R014 //Activation procedure (using an RRU with only one transmit channel as an example) //Operations at the BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


549


163 Configuring Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier //Deactivating an MIMO cell DEA UCELL: CellId=1; //Operations at the NodeB //Removing a local cell RMV LOCELL: LOCELL=1; //Adding a local cell and setting Two Tx Way and VAM ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=TRUE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ULFREQ=9845, DLFREQ=10795, MXPWR=460, HISPM=FALSE, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=TRUE, PRECDWSRSW=TRUE; //Turing on the IIC switch SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1, IICSW=OPEN; //Operations at the BSC6900 //Configuring the PSP function MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=FALSE; ADD USCPICH: CellId=1, ScpichPhyId=5, ScpichPower=0; //Activating a cell ACT UCELL: CellId=1; //Verification procedure //Operations at the NodeB //Checking parameter settings of VAM of the local cell LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=1; //Checking whether IIC switch is turned on LST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1; //Operations at the BSC6900 //Checking configuration information about an SCPICH LST USCPICH: CellId=1; //Deactivation procedure //Operations at the BSC6900 //Deactivating an MIMO cell DEA UCELL: CellId=1; //Operations at the NodeB //Removing a local cell RMV LOCELL: LOCELL=1; //Adding a local cell and setting VAM ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=FALSE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ULFREQ=9845, DLFREQ=10795, MXPWR=460, HISPM=FALSE, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=FALSE; //Turing off the IIC switch SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1, IICSW=CLOSE; //Operations at the BSC6900 //Removing an SCPICH RMV USCPICH: CellId=1; //Activating a cell ACT UCELL: CellId=1;

l

NodeB V100R014 //Activation procedure (using an RRU with only one transmit channel as an example) //Operations at the BSC6900 //Deactivating an MIMO cell DEA UCELL: CellId=1; //Operations at the NodeB //Removing a local cell RMV LOCELL: LOCELL=1; //Adding a local cell and setting Two Tx Way and VAM (assuming that DBS3800 is used)

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


550


163 Configuring Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=TRUE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ULFREQ=9845, DLFREQ=10795, HISPM=FALSE, MXPWR=460, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=TRUE, PRECDWSRSW=TRUE; //Turing on the IIC switch SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1, IICSW=OPEN; //Operations at the BSC6900 //Configuring the PSP function MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=FALSE; ADD USCPICH: CellId=1, ScpichPhyId=5, ScpichPower=0; //Activating a cell ACT UCELL: CellId=1; //Verification procedure //Operations at the NodeB //Checking parameter settings of VAM of the local cell LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=1; //Checking whether IIC switch is turned on LST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1; //Operations at the BSC6900 //Checking configuration information about an SCPICH LST USCPICH: CellId=1; //Deactivation procedure //Operations at the BSC6900 //Deactivating an MIMO cell DEA UCELL: CellId=1; //Operations at the NodeB //Removing a local cell RMV LOCELL: LOCELL=1; //Adding a local cell and setting VAM (assuming that DBS3800 is used) ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=FALSE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ULFREQ=9845, DLFREQ=10795, HISPM=FALSE, MXPWR=460, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=FALSE; //Turing off the IIC switch SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1, IICSW=CLOSE; //Operations at the BSC6900 //Removing an SCPICH RMV USCPICH: CellId=1; //Activating a cell ACT UCELL: CellId=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


551


164 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX

164

Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010686 CPC - DTX /DRX.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware – This feature does not depend on the hardware. – Dependencies on NodeB Hardware – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE is configured with the EBBI, EBOI, EULP/EULPd (supporting DTX), and EDLP (supporting DRX) boards. – The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features must be configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA and WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE is of 3GPP Release 7 or later and supports this feature.

Context This feature is related to DTX and DRX. It can reduce the interference between UEs, improve the HSPA+ user capacity per cell and save the battery consumption of the UE.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

552



Parameters in Batches). In this step, select DTX_DRX(Cell DTX_DRX Function Switch) from the Cell Hspa Plus function switch drop-down list.

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CFG_HSPA_DTX_DRX_SWITCH from the Channel Configuration Strategy Switch drop-down list.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH) from the Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB drop-down list.


Create a Uu tracing task on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 164-1.

Figure 164-1 Uu interface tracing task

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

2.

Use an HSPA-capable UE to establish a new service.

3.

Check whether the following IEs are included in the RRC_RB_SETUP message, as shown in Figure 164-2.


553



Figure 164-2 IE information

– dtx-drx-TimingInfo – dtx-drx-Info l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect DTX_DRX(Cell DTX_DRX Function Switch) from the Cell Hspa Plus function switch drop-down list.

----End

Example //Activating CPC - DTX /DRX MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=0, HspaPlusSwitch=DTX_DRX-1; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSPA_DTX_DRX_SWITCH-1; SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSPA; //Deactivating CPC - DTX /DRX MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=0, HspaPlusSwitch=DTX_DRX-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


554


165 Configuring CPC - HS-SCCH less operation

165

Configuring CPC - HS-SCCH less operation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010687 CPC - HS-SCCH less operation.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA, WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE must be Release-7 (or later) to support this feature.

Context This feature supports the HS-SCCH less operation function. With this feature, UE can receive data from HS-PDSCH without sending data on HS-SCCH. This increases the capacity of downlink data services.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

555



CFG_HSPA_HSSCCH_LESS_OP_SWITCH in the Channel configuration strategy switch parameter to switch on the HS-SCCH less operation function. 2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select HS_SCCH_LESS_OPERATION(Cell HS_SCCH LESS OPERATION Function Switch) in the Cell Hspa Plus function switch parameter to activate the HS-SCCH less operation function at the cell level.


Use an HSPA-supportive UE to initiate a PS service. The service is carried on E-DCH and HS-DSCH. NOTE

How to make the service on E-DCH, see section 97 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package.

2.

Check the RRC_RB_SETUP message traced over the Uu interface. You can find the hs-scch-LessInfo IE which contains the parameters related to CPC-HSSCCH less operation, as shown in Figure 165-1.

Figure 165-1 RRC_RB_SETUP Information

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


556



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect CFG_HSPA_HSSCCH_LESS_OP_SWITCH in the Channel configuration strategy switch parameter to switch off the HS-SCCH less operation function.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect HS_SCCH_LESS_OPERATION (Cell HS_SCCH LESS OPERATION Function Switch) in the Cell Hspa Plus function switch parameter to deactivate the HS-SCCH less operation function at the cell level.

----End

Example //Activating CPC-HS-SCCH Less operation SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSPA_HSSCCH_LESS_OP_SWITCH-1; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=0, HspaPlusSwitch=HS_SCCH_LESS_OPERATION-1; //Deactivating CPC-HS-SCCH Less operation SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSPA_HSSCCH_LESS_OP_SWITCH-0; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=0, HspaPlusSwitch=HS_SCCH_LESS_OPERATION-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


557


166 Configuring E-DPCCH Boosting

166

Configuring E-DPCCH Boosting

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010697 E-DPCCH Boosting.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3812E/BTS3812AE is configured with the Enhanced NodeB HSPA supported Uplink Processing unit REV:d (EULPd) board, and the downlink services cannot be set up on HBBI/HDLP/NDLP board. – The DBS3800 is configured with the Enhanced Base Band Card REV:d (EBBCd) board. – 3900 series base stations are configured with WBBPd or WBBPf boards.

l


l


l

Others – The UE is of 3GPP Release-7 or later and supports this feature. – CN supports data bit rate of 11.5Mbit/s or above.

Context An E-DCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) is used for channel estimation to improve the estimation accuracy when the HSUPA service data is demodulated. In this way, the requirement for Dedicated Physical Control Channel (DPCCH) power is lowered, increasing the HSUPA service rate.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



558


166 Configuring E-DPCCH Boosting NOTE

When this feature is enabled together with the feature WRFD-010694 Uplink 16QAM, you are advised to configure the network bandwidth over the Iub interface to 16 Mbit/s or higher if ATM transmission is applied and to 15 Mbit/s or higher if IP transmission is applied.

1.

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Configure the bandwidth over the Iub interface in ATM transmission mode. a.

Configure the type of primary and secondary paths required by various services: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, specify TRMMAP ID, set Interface Type to IUB (Iub Interface) and Transport Type to ATM(ATM), and specify SRB primary path and SRB secondary path.

b.

Add an activation factor table: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMFACTOR (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Factor Table; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, specify Factor table index and Remark, and change the activation factor.

c.

Add the TRM mapping to an adjacent node: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJMAP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Interface Type to IUB (Iub Interface) and Transport Type of the adjacent node and interface type to ATM(ATM), and specify Gold user TRMMAP index, Silver user TRMMAP index, Bronze user TRMMAP index, and Factor table index.

d.

Add ATM traffic records corresponding to the type of the primary and secondary paths set in 1.1 (you are advised to configure the network bandwidth over the Iub interface to 16 Mbit/s or higher): Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, specify Traffic index, Service type, Rate unit, and Peak cell rate.

e.

Add an AAL2 path: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, specify TX traffic record index and RX traffic record index.

Configure the bandwidth over the Iub interface in IP transmission mode. a.

Configure the type of primary and secondary paths required by various services: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, specify TRMMAP ID, set Interface Type to IUB (Iub Interface) and Transport Type to IP(IP), and specify SRB primary path and SRB secondary path.

b.

Add an activation factor table: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMFACTOR (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Factor Table; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, specify Factor table index and Remark, and change the activation factor.

c.

Add the TRM mapping to an adjacent node: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJMAP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

559



Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Interface Type to IUB (Iub Interface) and Transport Type of the adjacent node and interface type to IP (IP), and specify Gold user TRMMAP index, Silver user TRMMAP index, Bronze user TRMMAP index, and Factor table index.

3.

d.

Add an IP path (you are advised to configure the network bandwidth over the Iub interface to 15 Mbit/s or higher): Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, specify Interface Type, Transport Type, IP path type, Forward Bandwidth, and Backward Bandwidth.

e.

Optional: Set the mapping from the PHB to the DSCP based on the service type: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET PHBMAP (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Board > Mapping Table Between PHB And DSCP; CME batch modification center: not supported).

Configure the E-DPCCH Boosting function. a.

Turn on the E-DPCCH Boosting algorithm switch: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Channel Configuration Strategy Switch to CFG_EDPCCH_BOOSTING_SWITCH.

b.

Optional: If streaming services are to be enabled with E-DPCCH Boosting, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Service Mapping Strategy Switch to MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH to ensure that streaming services are carried over HSUPA.

c.

Set the rate threshold for BE services and streaming services carried over HSUPA: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, specify UL streaming traffic threshold on HSUPA and UL BE traffic threshold on HSUPA.

d.

Optional: Configure HSUPA-related parameters for a cell: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). NOTE

Retain the default values of Code Number for E-AGCH, Code Number for E-RGCH/ E-HICH, Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor, and Target Non-serving E-DCH to Total E-DCH Power Ratio.

e.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Activate the HSUPA function for a cell: Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

560



Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell. Set Cell HSUPA state to Activated; CME batch modification center: No supported).

l

f.

Enable the E-DPCCH Boosting function for a cell: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell Hspa Plus function switch to EDPCCH_BOOSTING(Cell E-DPCCH Boosting Function Switch).

g.

Turn on the E-DPCCH Boosting retry algorithm switch: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HSPA Technologies Retried by UEs to EDPCCH_BOOSTING.

h.

Enable the E-DPCCH Boosting function for a cell on the NodeB side: Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches).


Establish PS BE HSUPA services with the uplink rate higher than 1 Mbit/s.

2.

Trace messages over the Uu interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface to check whether the RRC_RB_SETUP message carries the e-TFC-BoostInfo information element (IE) that includes the e-TFCI-Boost and delta-T2TP fields, as shown in Figure 166-1. Figure 166-1 Tracing messages over the Uu interface

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Trace messages over the Iub interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the Iub Interface to check whether the NBAP_RL_RECFG_PREP message carries the eTFCI-Boost-Information IE that includes the e-TFCI-BetaEC-Boost and uLDelta-T2TP fields, as shown in Figure 166-2.


561



Figure 166-2 Tracing messages over the Iub interface

– If the messages described in the preceding two steps carry the corresponding IEs, the E-DPCCH Boosting function has taken effect. – If either of the messages described in the preceding two steps does not carry the corresponding IEs, the E-DPCCH Boosting function has not taken effect. l


To disable the E-DPCCH Boosting function of all cells under the BSC6900, do as follows: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the CFG_EDPCCH_BOOSTING_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel Configuration Strategy Switch.

2.

To disable the E-DPCCH Boosting function in a single cell, do as follows: a.

Method 1: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the EDPCCH_BOOSTING(Cell E-DPCCH Boosting Function Switch) check box under the parameter Cell Hspa Plus function switch to disable the E-DPCCH Boosting function in a cell on the BSC6900 side.

b.

Method 2: Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to disable the E-DPCCH Boosting function in a cell on the NodeB side.

----End

Example /*Activating E-DPCCH Boosting */ /*Configuring the network bandwidth over the Iub interface in ATM

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


562



transmission mode*/ //Configuring the type of the primary and secondary paths required by various services ADD TRMMAP: TMI=15, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=ATM, SRBPRIPATH=RT_VBR, SRBSECPATH=UBR; //Adding an activation factor table ADD TRMFACTOR: FTI=20, REMARK="Iub"; //Adding the TRM mapping to an adjacent node ADD ADJMAP: ANI=4, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=ATM, CNMNGMODE=SHARE, TMIGLD=15, TMISLV=15, TMIBRZ=15, FTI=20; //Adding ATM traffic records corresponding to the type of the primary and secondary paths required by various services ADD ATMTRF: TRFX=150, ST=RTVBR, UT=KBIT/S, PCR=16000, SCR=15000; ADD ATMTRF: TRFX=151, ST=UBR, UT=KBIT/S, PCR=16000; //Adding AAL2 paths ADD AAL2PATH:ANI=4, PATHID=1, CARRYT=IMA, CARRYF=2, CARRYSN=14, CARRYIMAGRPN=0, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=7, VCI=71, TXTRFX=150, RXTRFX=150, OWNERSHIP=LOCAL, TIMERCU=10, TRMLOADTHINDEX=0, AAL2PATHT=SHARE; ADD AAL2PATH:ANI=4, PATHID=2, CARRYT=IMA, CARRYF=2, CARRYSN=14, CARRYIMAGRPN=0, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=7, VCI=72, TXTRFX=151, RXTRFX=151, OWNERSHIP=LOCAL, TIMERCU=10, TRMLOADTHINDEX=0, AAL2PATHT=SHARE; /*Configuring the network bandwidth over the Iub interface in IP transmission mode*/ //Configuring the type of the primary and secondary paths required by various services ADD TRMMAP: TMI=16, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, SRBPRIPATH=AF11, SRBSECPATH=AF12; //Adding an activation factor table ADD TRMFACTOR: FTI=21, REMARK="Iub"; //Adding the TRM mapping to an adjacent node ADD ADJMAP: ANI=0, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, CNMNGMODE=SHARE, TMIGLD=16, TMISLV=16, TMIBRZ=16, FTI=21; //Adding IP paths ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=2, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, PATHT=AF11, IPADDR="1.1.1.2", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.1", PEERMASK="255.255.255.255", TXBW=45000, RXBW=30000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED; ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=2, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, PATHT=AF12, IPADDR="1.1.1.2", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.1", PEERMASK="255.255.255.255", TXBW=45001, RXBW=30001, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED; //(Optional) Setting the mapping from the PHB to the DSCP SET PHBMAP: SRN=0, SN=14, PHB=AF11, DSCP=40; SET PHBMAP: SRN=0, SN=14, PHB=AF12, DSCP=41; /*Configuring the E-DPCCH Boosting function*/ //Turning on the E-DPCCH Boosting algorithm switch SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch= CFG_EDPCCH_BOOSTING_SWITCH-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


563



//(Optional) Setting streaming services to ensure that they are carried over HSUPA SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH-1; //Setting the rate threshold for BE services and streaming services carried over HSUPA SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: UlStrThsOnHsupa=D64, UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa=D64; //Configuring the HSUPA function for a cell ADD UCELLHSUPA: CellId=1, EagchCodeNum=1, ErgchEhichCodeNum=1, MaxTargetUlLoadFactor=75, NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio=0; //Activating the HSUPA function for a cell ACT UCELLHSUPA: CellId=1; //Enabling the E-DPCCH Boosting function for a cell MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch= EDPCCH_BOOSTING-1; //Turning on the E-DPCCH Boosting retry algorithm switch SET UFRC: RetryCapability=EDPCCH_BOOSTING-1; //Enabling the E-DPCCH Boosting function in a cell on the NodeB side MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, BOOST=TRUE; /*Deactivating E-DPCCH Boosting */ //Disabling the E-DPCCH Boosting function in all cells on the RNC side SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch= CFG_EDPCCH_BOOSTING_SWITCH-0; //Disabling the E-DPCCH Boosting function in a cell on the BSC6900 side MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch= EDPCCH_BOOSTING-0; //Disabling the E-DPCCH Boosting function in a cell on the NodeB side MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, BOOST=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


564



167

Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010701 Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Dependencies on the NodeB: – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULPd, EBBI, EBOI or EULP board. The downlink services must be set up on the EBBI, EBOI, or EULP board. The E-AI is not supported. – The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. The downlink services must be set up on the EBBC or EBBCd board. To support the E-AI, the DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board. – The 3900 series base station must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board. The downlink services must be set up on the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board. To support the E-AI, the 3900 series base station must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features must be configured before this feature is activated: – WRFD-010688 Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH – WRFD-010695 UL Layer 2 Improvement

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE must be Release-8 (or later) UE and support uplink for CELL_FACH enhancement state.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


565



Context This feature enables the random access channel (RACH) to be mapped onto the E-DCH Dedicated Physical Data Control Channel (E-DPDCH). With this feature, UEs in the CELL_FACH state can transmit uplink data at higher rates.

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UERACHBASIC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > ERACH Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add basic information about the Enhanced RACH (ERACH) function, namely Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH in a cell. In this step, set TTI for Common E-DCH.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLERACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > ERACH Function. Set Cell ERACH state to Activated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to activate this feature.

3.

Run the NodeB MML commandMOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to enable the UL L2 Enhanced and the ERACH function. In this step, set the UL L2 Enhanced to TRUE, and set the ERACH to TRUE.


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether the ERACH is available.


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLERACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > ERACH Function. Set Cell ERACH state to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate this feature.

----End

Example //Activating Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH ADD UERACHBASIC: CellId=11, CommonEdchTTISelect=TTI_10MS; ACT UCELLERACH: CellId=11; MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=11, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, UL_L2PLUS=TRUE, ERACH=TRUE; //Verifying Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=11; //Deactivating Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH DEA UCELLERACH: CellId=11;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


566



168

Configuring 96 HSDPA Users per Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010653 96 HSDPA Users per Cell.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – In order to support this feature, EBBI, EBOI, EULP, EULPd is needed for BTS3812E and BTS3812AE. – EBBC, EBBCd is needed for BBU3806. – WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf is needed for BBU3900.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010623 64 HSDPA Users per Cell and WRFD-010686 CPC-DTX/DRX.

l


Context This feature enables an HSDPA cell to serve a maximum of 96 users performing VoIP or other low-rate services, increasing capacity of voice services or other low-rate services.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to stop reserving uplink and downlink credit resources by setting UL handover credit reserved SF and DL handover credit and code reserved SF to SFOFF(SFOFF), and setting Maximum HSDPA user number to 96. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

567


l




2.

Use UEs to access the cell successively and then establish PS services, for example, download files through FTP. Expected result: Each UE establishes PS services successfully. – If the number of UEs is less than or equal to 96, uplink services are carried on HSUPA channels and downlink services are carried on HSDPA channels. – If the number of UEs is greater than 96, HSPA services of the excessive UEs are carried on R99 channels.

3.

Check the maximum number of users through the counter VS.HSDPA.UE.Max.Cell on the M2000. NOTE

The 96 HSDPA users referred to in this feature are of the SRB Over HSPA type.

l



----End

Example /*Activating 96 HSDPA Users per Cell*/ //Stop reserving uplink and downlink credit resources and setting the maximum number of HSDPA users to 96 MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=111, MaxHsdpaUserNum=96, UlHoCeResvSf=SFOFF, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SFOFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


568



169



Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – In order to support this feature, EBBI, EBOI, EULP, EULPd is needed for BTS3812E and BTS3812AE. – EBBC, EBBCd is needed for BBU3806. – WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf is needed for BBU3900.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010634 60 HSUPA Users per Cell and WRFD-010653 96 HSDPA Users per Cell.

l


Context This feature enables an HSUPA cell to serve a maximum of 96 users performing VoIP or other low-rate services, increasing the capacity of voice services or other low-rate services per cell.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Code Number for E-AGCH and Code Number for E-RGCH/E-HICH to appropriate values. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

569



2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to stop reserving uplink and downlink credit resources by setting UL handover credit reserved SF and DL handover credit and code reserved SF to SFOFF(SFOFF), and setting Maximum HSUPA user number to 96.



2.

Use UEs to access the cell successively and then establish PS services, for example, upload files through FTP. Expected result: Each UE establishes PS services successfully. – If the number of UEs is less than or equal to 96, uplink services are carried on HSUPA channels and downlink services are carried on HSDPA channels. – If the number of UEs is greater than 96, HSPA services of the excessive UEs are carried on R99 channels.

3.

Check the maximum number of users indicated by the counter VS.HSUPA.UE.Max.Cell on the M2000. NOTE


l



----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Allocating code resources to E-AGCHs and E-RGCHs MOD UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111, EagchCodeNum=1, ErgchEhichCodeNum=6; //Stopping reserving uplink and downlink credit resources and setting the maximum number of HSUPA users to 96 MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=111, MaxHsupaUserNum=96, UlHoCeResvSf=SFOFF, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SFOFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


570



170

Configuring 128 HSDPA Users per Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010654 128 HSDPA Users per Cell.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The feature is only available for 3900 series NodeB, 3900 series NodeB (except BTS3902E) requires WBBPd2/WBBPd3 board which is one type of WBBPd or WBBPf.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010653 96 HSDPA Users per Cell and WRFD-010670 128 HSUPA Users per Cell.

l


Context This feature can increase the capacity of voice services in a cell, especially in cells with VoIP users or a large number of low-rate users. This feature enables an HSDPA cell to serve a maximum of 128 users performing VoIP or other low-rate services. Note that these users must adopt the CPC-DTX/DRX mode.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to stop reserving uplink and downlink credit resources and set the maximum number of HSDPA users per cell to 128. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

571


l




2.

Use UEs to access the cell successively and then establish PS services, for example, download files through FTP. Expected result: Each UE establishes PS services successfully. – If the number of UEs is less than or equal to 128, uplink services are carried on HSUPA channels and downlink services are carried on HSDPA channels. – If the number of UEs is greater than 128, HSPA services of the excessive UEs are carried on R99 channels.

3.

Check the maximum number of users through the counter VS.HSDPA.UE.Max.Cell on the M2000. NOTE

The 128 HSDPA users referred to in this feature are of the SRB Over HSPA type.

l



----End

Example /*Activating 128 HSDPA Users per Cell*/ //Stop reserving uplink and downlink credit resources and setting the maximum number of HSDPA users to 128 MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=111, MaxHsdpaUserNum=128, UlHoCeResvSf=SFOFF, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SFOFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


572



171



Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The feature is only available for 3900 series NodeB, 3900 series NodeB (except BTS3902E) requires WBBPd2/WBBPd3 board which is one type of WBBPd or WBBPf.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010639 96 HSUPA Users per Cell and WRFD-010654 128 HSDPA Users per Cell.

l


Context This feature can increase the capacity of voice services in a cell with a large number of low-rate users, such as VoIP users. This feature enables an HSUPA cell to serve a maximum of 128 users performing VoIP or other low-rate services. Note that these users must adopt the CPC-DTX/DRX mode.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to allocate code resources to E-AGCHs and ERGCHs. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

573



2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to stop reserving uplink and downlink credit resources and set the maximum number of HSUPA users to 128.



2.

Use UEs to access the cell successively and then establish PS services, for example, upload files through FTP. Expected result: Each UE establishes PS services successfully. – If the number of UEs is less than or equal to 128, uplink services are carried on HSUPA channels and downlink services are carried on HSDPA channels. – If the number of UEs is greater than 128, HSPA services of the excessive UEs are carried on R99 channels.

3.

Check the maximum number of users indicated by the counter VS.HSUPA.UE.Max.Cell on the M2000. NOTE


l



----End

Example /*Activating 128 HSUPA Users per Cell*/ //Stop reserving uplink and downlink credit resources and setting the maximum number of HSUPA users to 128 MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=111, MaxHsupaUserNum=128, UlHoCeResvSf=SFOFF, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SFOFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


574



172

Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010704 Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI, EBOI, and EDLP boards. In addition, the uplink service cannot be established on the HBBI or HULP board. – In DBS3800, the BBU3806 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board. – BTS RF modules support only one transmission channel. MIMO requires interconnection of two RF modules.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features must be configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA and RFD-010684 2×2 MIMO.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – In 2×2 MIMO mode, two RF units must be interconnected. – The UE has the HSDPA Category21 or higher capability, including HSDPA category 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, and 28.

Context DC-HSDPA and MIMO can achieve gains under different conditions. DC-HSDPA ensures a comparatively high throughput for the UEs when few HSDPA-capable UEs camp on a cell that has a light load. MIMO ensures a comparatively high throughput for the UEs when a large number of HSDPA-capable UEs camp on an overloaded cell. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


575



When one or two carriers in DC-HSDPA networking support MIMO, Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection dynamically selects DC-HSDPA or MIMO for newly accessing UEs, based on the current number of HSDPA-capable UEs and downlink load of the carriers that support MIMO. This ensures an optimum service bearing mode.

Procedure l

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Turn on the DC/MIMO dynamic selection algorithm switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with CFG_DC_MIMO_DYNAMIC_SELECT_SWITCH selected in the Channel Configuration Strategy Switch drop-down list.

2.

Turn off the RNC-oriented DC+MIMO algorithm switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with CFG_HSDPA_DCMIMO_SWITCH deselected in the Channel Configuration Strategy Switch drop-down list.

3.

Optional: Turn on the HSDPA algorithm switch for streaming services if HSDPA is required for streaming services. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH selected in the Service Mapping Strategy Switch drop-down list.

4.

Set HSDPA thresholds for downlink streaming services and HSDPA thresholds for downlink BE services. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with DL streaming traffic threshold on HSDPA and DL BE traffic threshold on HSDPA set to appropriate values based on network planning.


Set the TX power threshold and HSDPA user number threshold of the secondary cell for the DC/MIMO dynamic selection algorithm. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC with DL TX Power Threshold of Secondary Cell and Threshold of HSDPA Users in Secondary Cell set to appropriate values.

2.

Have a UE access the secondary cell and initiate an HSDPA service.

3.

Query the DL power load of the secondary cell covered by the DC carrier group. On the BSC6900 LMT, choose Monitor > Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring and select Cell DL Carrier TX Power in the Monitor Item: drop-down list.

4.

Check whether the value of the IE dl-TransportChannelType in the rb-MappingInfo of the RRC_RB_SETUP message is hsdsch. Expected result: As shown in Figure 172-2, the RRC_RB_SETUP message in the Uu tracing result contains the mimoParameters IE when the downlink power of the Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

576



secondary cell covered by the DC carrier group is greater than or equal to DL TX Power Threshold of Secondary Cell set in Step 1 and the number of HSDPA users is greater than or equal to Threshold of HSDPA Users in Secondary Cell set in Step 1. The RRC_RB_SETUP message in the Uu tracing result contains the dlSecondaryCellInfoFDD IE when the downlink power of the secondary cell covered by the DC carrier group is smaller than DL TX Power Threshold of Secondary Cell set in Step 1 and the number of HSDPA users is smaller than Threshold of HSDPA Users in Secondary Cell set in Step 1. Figure 172-1 mimoParameters message

Figure 172-2 dl-SecondaryCellInfoFDD IE

l


Turn off the DC/MIMO dynamic selection algorithm switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with CFG_DC_MIMO_DYNAMIC_SELECT_SWITCH deselected in the Channel Configuration Strategy Switch drop-down list.

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Turning on the DC/MIMO dynamic selection algorithm switch SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_DC_MIMO_DYNAMIC_SELECT_SWITCH-1; //Turning off the RNC-oriented DC+MIMO algorithm switch SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_DCMIMO_SWITCH-0; //(Optional) Enabling the HSDPA algorithm switch for streaming services if HSDPA is required for streaming services SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


577



//Setting the HSDPA threshold for downlink streaming services and HSDPA threshold for downlink BE services SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlStrThsOnHsdpa=D64, DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D64; //Verification procedure SET UFRC: SecCellTcpThd=10, SecCellHUserNumThd=1; //Deactivation procedure SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_DC_MIMO_DYNAMIC_SELECT_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


578


173 Configuring Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier

173

Configuring Traffic-Based

Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010713 Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE must be of HS-DSCH category 21, 22, 23, 24 to support DC-HSDPA or HSDSCH category 25, 26, 27, 28 to support DC-HSDPA+MIMO.

Context For a user that uses DC-HSDPA/DC-HSDPA+MIMO in the downlink and DCH/SC-HSUPA in the uplink, the feature has the following functions: l

Disables the downlink secondary carrier function when the downlink traffic is light but the buffer has been occupied by a large amount of data. In this case, the user becomes a singlecarrier user.

l

Re-activate the downlink secondary carrier function when the buffer can accommodate a large amount of data and throughput is high. In this case, the user becomes a dual-carrier user.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


579


173 Configuring Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier

Procedure l


Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set the Mac-hs scheduling parameters with the DC HSDPA Cell Act Deact Switch set to ON (ON). NOTE

If the Mac-hs scheduling parameters of two DC-HSDPA cells must be set, set DC HSDPA Cell Act Deact Switch to ON(ON) for each cell.

l

l


Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA to query the Mac-hs scheduling parameters. Check whether the Secondary DC HSDPA Cell Act Deact Switch is turned on.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, clear DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH, DRA_HSUPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH, and DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH from the Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch list.

3.

Use a DC-HSDPA UE to perform PS services in a DC-HSDPA cell. Do not upload or download data after required connections are established. Five seconds later, the UE becomes an SC UE, which indicates that the feature has been activated.


Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set the Mac-hs scheduling parameters with the Secondary DC HSDPA Cell Act Deact Switch set to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1, SECCELLACTDEASW=ON; SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=2, SECCELLACTDEASW=ON; //Verification procedure LST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1; LST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=2; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-0&DRA_HSUPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-0&D RA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-0; //Deactivation procedure SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1, SECCELLACTDEASW=OFF; SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=2, SECCELLACTDEASW=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


580



174

Configuring Enhanced DRX

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010702 Enhanced DRX. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – NodeB: – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE is configured with the EULPd, EBBI, EBOI, or EULP board. – The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – Configurations of other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010688 Enhanced CELL_FACH.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE must be of 3GPP Release-8 or later and support Enhanced DRX. – HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbit/s per User

Context The enhanced discontinuous reception (DRX) feature enables UEs in the enhanced downlink for CELL_FACH state to receive the HS-SCCH discontinuously. After this feature is enabled, the RAN and UEs in the enhanced downlink for CELL_FACH state transmit and receive data at a specified time. The UE detects the HS-SCCH at regular intervals instead of detecting the HS-SCCH continuously. When there is no data to transmit, the UE shuts down the receiver. As a result, the power consumption of the UE decreases.



581



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to select E_DRX(Enhanced Discontinous Reception Function Switch) for Cell Hspa Plus function switch.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether enhanced downlink for CELL_FACH is activated. If the enhanced downlink for CELL_FACH is already activated, run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLEFACH to deactivate enhanced downlink for CELL_FACH. If enhanced downlink for CELL_FACH is not activated, go to Step 3. NOTE

The BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLEDRX fails to be executed in an active cell enabled with enhanced downlink for CELL_FACH. Therefore, you need to deactivate enhanced downlink for CELL_FACH before configuring the related parameters.

l

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLEDRX to set parameters related to enhanced DRX based on network planning requirements.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLEFACH to activate this feature.


Start Uu Interface Trace on the LMT to trace messages on the Uu interface.

2.

If the UE is not enabled with enhanced uplink for CELL_FACH, the information element DRX Interruption by HS-DSCH data in the system information message SIB5/5bis should be set to TRUE, as shown in Figure 174-1. If the UE is enabled with enhanced uplink for CELL_FACH, the information element Common E-DCH system info is carried in the system information message SIB5/5bis. Figure 174-1 Information element in the system information message of enhanced DRX

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

3.

Start Cell Trace on the LMT to trace messages of a cell.

4.

When the UE is in the enhanced downlink for CELL_FACH state, the RNC carries the E-DRX indication in the HS-DSCH DATA FRAME type2 to the NodeB on the DCCH or DTCH. If enhanced DRX is enabled, you can view that the E-DRX bit is 1 in Cell Trace, as shown in Figure 174-2. If enhanced DRX is not enabled, the EDRX bit is 0.


582



Figure 174-2 Indication sent from the RNC to the NodeB on the DCCH or DTCH

5.

If the UE is enabled with enhanced uplink for CELL_FACH, the HS-DSCH DATA FRAME type2 carries New IE Flag, H-RNTI, and E-RNTI, which can be viewed in Cell Trace, as shown in Figure 174-3. Figure 174-3 HS-DSCH DATA FRAME type2

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to deselect E_DRX(Enhanced Discontinous Reception Function Switch) for Cell Hspa Plus function switch.

----End

Example //Activating enhanced DRX MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, HspaPlusSwitch=E_DRX-1; DEA UCELLEFACH: CellId=11; ADD UCELLEDRX: CellId=11, EDRXT321=EDRXT321_100, EDRXCycle=EDRXCYCLE_8, EDRXBurst=EDRXBURST_1, EDRXInterruptbyHSDSCHData=INTERRUPTION_CFG; ACT UCELLEFACH: CellId=11; //Deactivating enhanced DRX MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, HspaPlusSwitch=E_DRX-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


583



175

Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020500 Enhanced Fast Dormancy. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l


l


The license must be activated by performing the following operation first: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to set Fast Dormancy Enhancement-per PS Active User to an appropriate value.

l

Other Prerequisites It is good practice to maintain load balancing among all frequencies in the network when using this feature, if the network is a service-layered network as follows and RSVDBIT1_BIT29 of the Reserved parameter 1 in the SET URRCTRLSWITCH command is set to 0, in order to reduce the call drops for UEs in the CELL_FACH state that support fast dormancy, Wait RB reconfiguration response timer and RL restoration timer in the SET USTATETIMER command need to be set to 11000 and 15000 respectively. – Frequency F1 carries R99 services. – Frequency F2 carries HSPA services. – F2 does not allow UEs in the idle, CELL_FACH, or CELL_PCH state to camp on.

Context As the number of smartphones keeps increasing in mobile networks, the networks face signaling storms produced by these UEs. With rich experience in network optimization, Huawei provides Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


584



a comprehensive end-to-end solution to respond to network challenges based on network characteristics. This feature is a component of the comprehensive solution. Deploying this feature only cannot solve the signaling storm problem produced by smartphones. Operators should use this feature together with professional services to optimize the quality of service of the entire network.

CAUTION l Consult Huawei engineers about the comprehensive solution to obtain professional technical support. l Huawei engineers will recommend appropriate parameter settings for this feature based on the network conditions. l Do not configure the parameters related to this feature without Huawei professional technical support. Inappropriate parameter settings may lead to network failures. Always on line can be provided for PS services of intelligent UEs to improve user experience. Always on line, however, will increase the power consumption of intelligent UEs. To prolong UE battery life, the Fast Dormancy feature is introduced. When there is no PS data transfer, the UE will send a signaling connection release indication (SCRI) message to request the BSC6900 to release the RRC connection and move the UE state to IDLE mode, CELL_PCH, or URA_PCH. If this feature is not enabled, the BSC6900 will move the UE state to IDLE mode after the BSC6900 receives an SCRI message from the UE or the UE inactivity timer expires. If UEs are frequently switched between RRC connected states and IDLE mode, signaling storms occur. If this feature is enabled, the BSC6900 will move the UE to the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state instead of the IDLE mode under either of the following conditions, reducing signaling processing costs: l

The BSC6900 receives an SCRI message from the UE.

l

The CELL_FACH/CELL_DCH inactivity timer on the BSC6900 expires.

l

Activation Procedure (The UE supporting fast dormancy is a Pre-Release 8 UE)

Procedure

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to enable the feature Enhanced Fast Dormancy at the BSC6900-level. In this step, select the FAST_DORMANCY_SWITCH under PROCESSSWITCH.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET URRCTRLSWITCH to select the RNC_PS_QUERY_UE_IMEI_SWITCH under PROCESSSWITCH2.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to enable cell update during CS service setup. In this step, clear the RSVDBIT1_BIT21 check box under Reserved Parameter 1.


585


175 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy NOTE

After this feature is enabled, the number of CELL_DCH-to-CELL_FACH (D2F) procedures performed increases.Set this parameter when a UE in the CELL_FACH state sets up a CS service associated with cell reselection. The switch RSVDBIT1_BIT21 specifies whether to allow cell update during CS service setup. When the switch is turned on, for UEs that are establishing AMR services and shifting from the CELL_FACH state to the CELL_DCH state, the RNC stops establishing AMR services to handle cell update if the RNC receives from the UEs a cell update message containing the cause value "cell reselection."

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to enable the state transition from CELL_PCH or URA_PCH to CELL_DCH triggered by FACH congestion. In this step, clear the RSVDBIT1_BIT20 check box under Reserved Parameter 1. NOTE

After this feature is enabled, the FACH will carry a large amount of data, which may lead to FACH congestion. Therefore, it is recommended that a new SCCPCH be added. For details about how to handle FACH congestion in other methods, see section "FACH Congestion Control" in the Flow Control in the RAN Feature Documentation.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER to set the value of the CELL_DCH, CELL_FACH, and CELL_PCH inactivity timer respectively. – The recommended value of the FAST DORMANCY USER T1 in CELL_DCH is 5 seconds. – The recommended value of the FAST DORMANCY USER T1 in CELL_FACH is 5 seconds. – The recommended value of the FAST DORMANCY USER T1 in CELL_PCH is 1800 seconds. NOTE

This document provide the recommended value of the FAST DORMANCY USER T1 in CELL_DCH, the FAST DORMANCY USER T1 in CELL_FACH, and the FAST DORMANCY USER T1 in CELL_PCH.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANS. In this step, set Fast Dormancy User FACH/E_FACH2DCH/HSPA 4A Threshold to D1024.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to enable the Type Allocation Code (TAC) match function. In this step, select the FD_TAC_MATCH_SWITCH under PROCESSSWITCH.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD UIMEITAC to set the value of the TAC to add the IMEI TACs of smartphones to the whitelist, set the The function of the TAC to Fast_Dormancy, and set the Fast Dormancy Switch to ON.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMFACTOR and MOD ADJMAP to change the Iu-PS activity factor. The recommended value of the Iu-PS activity factor is 10%. If the configured Iu-PS activity factor is smaller than 10%, retain the configured value. NOTE

After this feature is enabled, the number of UEs in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state increases sharply. UEs in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state consume a large number of Iu-PS bandwidth resources although they do not transmit any data. Adjusting the Iu-PS activity factor can prevent PS service admission failures due to the increase in the number of UEs in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


586



CAUTION The Iu-PS activity factor of all services must be set to an appropriate value. Otherwise, a large number of PS service setups fail, and the CPU usage of the SPU boards increases sharply. l

Activation Procedure (The UE supporting fast dormancy is a Release 8 or later Release UE) 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to enable the feature Enhanced Fast Dormancy at the BSC6900-level. In this step, select the FAST_DORMANCY_SWITCH under PROCESSSWITCH.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCONNMODETIMER to set the value of the Timer 323. NOTE

If the UE supporting fast dormancy is a Release 8 or later Release UE, you need to set timer 323 after enabling fast dormancy. When the network supports the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH, it is good practice to set timer 323 to 120s. When the network does not support CELL_PCH or URA_PCH, it is good practice to set timer 323 to 10s.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to enable cell update during CS service setup. In this step, clear the RSVDBIT1_BIT21 check box under Reserved Parameter 1. NOTE

After this feature is enabled, the number of CELL_DCH-to-CELL_FACH (D2F) procedures performed increases. Set this parameter when a UE in the CELL_FACH state sets up a CS service associated with cell reselection. The switch RSVDBIT1_BIT21 specifies whether to allow cell update during CS service setup. When the switch is turned on, for UEs that are establishing AMR services and shifting from the CELL_FACH state to the CELL_DCH state, the RNC stops establishing AMR services to handle cell update if the RNC receives from the UEs a cell update message containing the cause value "cell reselection."

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to enable the state transition from CELL_PCH or URA_PCH to CELL_DCH triggered by FACH congestion. In this step, clear the RSVDBIT1_BIT20 check box under Reserved Parameter 1. NOTE

After this feature is enabled, the FACH will carry a large amount of data, which may lead to FACH congestion. Therefore, it is recommended that a new SCCPCH be added. For details about how to handle FACH congestion in other methods, see section "FACH Congestion Control" in the Flow Control in the RAN Feature Documentation.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER to set the value of the CELL_DCH, CELL_FACH, and CELL_PCH inactivity timer respectively. – The recommended value of the FAST DORMANCY USER T1 in CELL_DCH is 5 seconds. – The recommended value of the FAST DORMANCY USER T1 in CELL_FACH is 5 seconds. – The recommended value of the FAST DORMANCY USER T1 in CELL_PCH is 1800 seconds.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


587


175 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy NOTE

This document provide the recommended value of the FAST DORMANCY USER T1 in CELL_DCH, the FAST DORMANCY USER T1 in CELL_FACH, and the FAST DORMANCY USER T1 in CELL_PCH.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANS. In this step, set Fast Dormancy User FACH/E_FACH2DCH/HSPA 4A Threshold to D1024.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to enable the Type Allocation Code (TAC) match function. In this step, select the FD_TAC_MATCH_SWITCH under PROCESSSWITCH.

8.

Optional: To enable this feature only for UEs of Release 8 or later versions on the live network, Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV UIMEITAC to remove the TAC values for these UEs.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMFACTOR and MOD ADJMAP to change the Iu-PS activity factor. The recommended value of the Iu-PS activity factor is 10%. If the configured Iu-PS activity factor is smaller than 10%, retain the configured value. NOTE

After this feature is enabled, the number of UEs in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state increases sharply. UEs in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state consume a large number of Iu-PS bandwidth resources although they do not transmit any data. Adjusting the Iu-PS activity factor can prevent PS service admission failures due to the increase in the number of UEs in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state.

CAUTION The Iu-PS activity factor of all services must be set to an appropriate value. Otherwise, a large number of PS service setups fail, and the CPU usage of the SPU boards increases sharply. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LICUSAGE to query the state of the license for this feature. If the result shown in Figure 175-1 is returned, the license for this feature has been configured.

Figure 175-1 Status of the Enhanced Fast Dormancy license

2.

Initiate Uu interface message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT.

3.

Use a smartphone whose IMEI TAC has been added into whitelist to set up a PS service in the CELL_DCH state. For example, use the smartphone to browse a Web page. If the RRC_RB_SETUP message shown in Figure 175-2 is traced, the UE is in the CELL_DCH state.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


588



Figure 175-2 UE in the CELL_DCH state

4.

Keep the UE in IDLE mode for 10 seconds and perform no operation after a Web page is opened. If the RRC_RB_RECFG message shown in Figure 175-3 is traced, the UE will move from the CELL_DCH state to the CELL_FACH state and then to the CELL_PCH state.

Figure 175-3 State transition to the CELL_PCH state

5.

Use the UE to continue PS services such as web page browsing. Cell update or channel reconfiguration occurs. Check the RRC_CELL_UPDATE message as shown in Figure 175-4 and Figure 175-5.

Figure 175-4 Cell update

Figure 175-5 Channel reconfiguration

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


589



– To deactivate this feature for all UEs on the live network, Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET URRCTRLSWITCH. In this step, clear FAST_DORMANCY_SWITCH under Process switch parameter to turn off the BSC6900-level switch for enhanced fast dormancy. – To deactivate this feature only for UEs of versions earlier than Release 8 on the live network, Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV UIMEITAC to remove the TAC values for these UEs. – To deactivate this feature only for UEs of Release 8 or later versions on the live network, Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET UCONNMODETIMER. In this step, set Timer 323 to INVALID. NOTE

If this feature must be deactivated when the SPUa or SPUb board is being reset, do as follows: 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET CFGDATAINEFFECTIVE to set the subrack to ineffective mode. 2. Run the MML commands to deactivate this feature. For details, see the script in the example. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE to set the subrack to effective mode.

----End

Example //Activating Fast Dormancy Enhancement (The UE supporting fast dormancy is a Pre-Release 8 UE) //Enabling the Enhanced Fast Dormancy feature at the BSC6900 level SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=FAST_DORMANCY_SWITCH-1; //Set the PS IMEI Request Switch SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH2=RNC_PS_QUERY_UE_IMEI_SWITCH-1; //Enabling cell update during CS service setup SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT21-0; //Enabling the state transition from CELL_PCH or URA_PCH to CELL_DCH triggered by FACH congestion SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT20-0; //Setting the value of the CELL_DCH inactivity timer to 5 seconds SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForFstDrmDch=5; //Setting the value of the CELL_FACH inactivity timer to 5 seconds SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForFstDrmFach=5; //Setting the value of the CELL_PCH inactivity timer to 1800 seconds SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForPreFstDrm=1800; //Setting the traffic threshold of event 4A during the state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_DCH to D1024 SET UUESTATETRANS: FastDormancyF2DHTvmThd=D1024; //Enabling the IMEI Type Allocation Code (TAC) match function SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=FD_TAC_MATCH_SWITCH-1; //Adding the IMEI TACs of smartphones to the whitelist ADD UIMEITAC: TAC_FUNC=Fast_Dormancy, TAC=01177600, Description="Smart

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


590



Phone", FastDormancy=ON; //Changing the Iu-PS activity factor ADD TRMFACTOR: REMARK="Smart Phone", CSCONVDL=10, CSCONVUL=10, CSSTRMDL=10, CSSTRMUL=10, PSCONVDL=10, PSCONVUL=10, PSSTRMDL=10, PSSTRMUL=10, PSINTERDL=10, PSINTERUL=10, PSBKGDL=10, PSBKGUL=10, HDVOICEDL=10, HDCONVDL=10, HDSTRMDL=10, HDINTERDL=10, HDBKGDL=10, HUVOICEUL=10, HUCONVUL=10, HUSTRMUL=10, HUINTERUL=10, HUBKGUL=10;

//Activating Enhanced Fast Dormancy (The UE supporting fast dormancy is a Release 8 or later Release UE) //Enabling the Enhanced Fast Dormancy feature at the BSC6900 level SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=FAST_DORMANCY_SWITCH-1; //Set the Timer 323 SET UCONNMODETIMER: T323=D120; //Enabling cell update during CS service setup SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT21-0; //Enabling the state transition from CELL_PCH or URA_PCH to CELL_DCH triggered by FACH congestion SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT20-0; //Setting the value of the CELL_DCH inactivity timer to 5 seconds SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForFstDrmDch=5; //Setting the value of the CELL_FACH inactivity timer to 5 seconds SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForFstDrmFach=5; //Setting the value of the CELL_PCH inactivity timer to 1800 seconds SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForPreFstDrm=1800; //Setting the traffic threshold of event 4A during the state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_DCH to D1024 SET UUESTATETRANS: FastDormancyF2DHTvmThd=D1024; //Enabling the IMEI Type Allocation Code (TAC) match function SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=FD_TAC_MATCH_SWITCH-1; //Deleting the IMEI TACs of smartphones from the whitelist RMV UIMEITAC: TAC_FUNC=Fast_Dormancy, TAC=01177600; //Changing the Iu-PS activity factor ADD TRMFACTOR: REMARK="Smart Phone", CSCONVDL=10, CSCONVUL=10, CSSTRMDL=10, CSSTRMUL=10, PSCONVDL=10, PSCONVUL=10, PSSTRMDL=10, PSSTRMUL=10, PSINTERDL=10, PSINTERUL=10, PSBKGDL=10, PSBKGUL=10, HDVOICEDL=10, HDCONVDL=10, HDSTRMDL=10, HDINTERDL=10, HDBKGDL=10, HUVOICEUL=10, HUCONVUL=10, HUSTRMUL=10, HUINTERUL=10, HUBKGUL=10; //Deactivating Fast Dormancy Enhancement //Deactivating Enhanced Fast Dormancy for all UEs on the live network SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=FAST_DORMANCY_SWITCH-0; //Deactivating Enhanced Fast Dormancy only for UEs of versions earlier than Release 8

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


591



RMV UIMEITAC: TAC_FUNC=Fast_Dormancy, TAC=01177600; //Deactivating Enhanced Fast Dormancy only for UEs of Release 8 or later versions SET UCONNMODETIMER: T323=INVALID;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


592



176

Configuring Voice Service

Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140205 Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature enables the radio network controller (RNC) to identify weak reception UEs based on the International Mobile Station Equipment Identity (IMEI) and to configure dedicated power control and handover parameters for them. Based on the parameter settings, weak reception UEs obtain a high downlink power control threshold in weak coverage areas and perform handovers at the designated threshold. This prevents frequent compressed mode measurement and call drops caused by signal quality fluctuations and improves user experience of CS voice services. l


l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Data Preparation


593



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Process Control Switch 2

PROCESSSWITC H2

l If the core network (CN) has not enabled the ID REQUEST function, select the RNC_CS_QU ERY_UE_IME I_SWITCH check box on the RNC side.

Network plan

l If the CN has enabled the ID REQUEST function and the query type is IMEI, clear the RNC_CS_QU ERY_UE_IME I_SWITCH check box on the RNC side. l If the RNC_CS_QU ERY_UE_IME I_SWITCH check box is selected on the RNC side, be sure to select the SEND_MSG_ NULL_SWIT CH check box under Process Control Switch 4 when the CN verifies the serial numbers of direct transfer messages. The function of the TAC

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

TAC_FUNC

Set this parameter to Special_User_Enhance.


Network plan

594


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Special User Function Switch

SpecUserFunctionSwitch

SPECUSER_AM R_HOENHANCE _SWITCH and SPECUSER_AM R_PWRENHANC E_SWITCH should be selected.

Network plan

DL Pwr Cong Thres for Spec User Enhance

SpecUserPwrEnDlPwrTrigTh d

Use the recommended value.

Network plan

CN domain ID

CNDomainId

Set this parameter to CS_DOMAIN.

Network plan

Max bit rate of service

MaxBitRate


Network plan

RL Max DL TX power

RlMaxDlPwr


Network plan

Max DL RL Power For Spec User

SpecUserRlMaxDlPwr


Network plan

Delay in Reporting 2D for Special UEs

SpecUserHystFor2 D

The parameter is RNC level, use the recommended value.

Network plan

Ec/N0 Threshold for Reporting 2D

SpecUserCSThd2D EcN0


Network plan

Ec/N0 Threshold for Reporting 2F

SpecUserCSThd2F EcN0


Network plan

RSCP Threshold for Reporting 2D

SpecUserCSThd2D RSCP


Network plan

Delay in Reporting 2D for Special UEs

SpecUserHystFor2 D

The parameter is cell level, use the recommended value.

Network plan


595



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Ec/N0 Threshold for Reporting 2D

SpecUserCSThd2D EcN0


Network plan

Ec/N0 Threshold for Reporting 2F

SpecUserCSThd2F EcN0


Network plan

RSCP Threshold for Reporting 2D

SpecUserCSThd2D RSCP


Network plan

RSCP Threshold for Reporting 2F

SpecUserCSThd2F RSCP


Network plan

Procedure l


Optional: Enable the CS international mobile equipment identity (IMEI) acquisition function on the BSC6900. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the RNC_CS_QUERY_UE_IMEI_SWITCH check box under Process Control Switch 2. NOTE

l If CS IMEI acquisition has been enabled on the CN, skip this step. l Before enabling CS IMEI acquisition, ensure that the CN checks the serial number of direct transfer messages. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, turn on the SEND_MSG_NULL_SWITCH switch. l After enabling CS IMEI acquisition, check for the compatibility issue between the BSC6900 and the CN. When there is a compatibility issue, enabling CS IMEI acquisition results in CS service setup failures.

2.

Enable differentiated power control and differentiated handover for smartphones, and configure the Type Allocation Code (TAC) of the smartphone. a.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIMEITAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > RNC Basic Configuration > IMEI TAC; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set The function of the TAC to Special_User_Enhance, and select the SPECUSER_AMR_HOENHANCE_SWITCH and Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

596



SPECUSER_AMR_PWRENHANCE_SWITCH check boxes under Special User Function Switch. 3.

Set the parameters related to differentiated power control and handover for smartphones based on the network plan. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the parameters related to cell load monitoring. In this step, set DL Pwr Cong Thres for Spec User Enhance to an appropriate value based on the network plan.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLRLPWR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Radio Link Power Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the parameters related to the radio link (RL) transmit power in the cell. In this step, set CN domain ID to CS_DOMAIN, and set Max bit rate of service, RL Max DL TX power, and Max DL RL Power For Spec User to appropriate values based on the network plan.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UHOCOMM (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Handover Algorithm Common Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the RNC-level parameters related to differentiated handover for smartphones. In this step, set Delay in Reporting 2D for Special UEs, Ec/N0 Threshold for Reporting 2D, Ec/N0 Threshold for Reporting 2F, RSCP Threshold for Reporting 2D, and RSCP Threshold for Reporting 2F to appropriate values based on the network plan.

d.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHOCOMM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented Handover Common Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-level parameters related to differentiated handover for smartphones. In this step, set Delay in Reporting 2D for Special UEs, Ec/N0 Threshold for Reporting 2D, Ec/N0 Threshold for Reporting 2F, RSCP Threshold for Reporting 2D, and RSCP Threshold for Reporting 2F to appropriate values based on the network plan. NOTE

To enable this feature in a specified cell, run the ADD UCELLHOCOMM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented Handover Common Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) command to set the differentiated handover parameters for the cell.

l

Verification Procedure Verifying inter-RAT handovers of a special UE based on parameters

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Choose a special UE whose IMEI TAC is configured on the BSC6900 to start UE tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. Obtain the IMEI of the UE.

2.

Use the UE to set up a CS call in a cell enabled with this feature.

3.

Check the traced UE signaling messages: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

597



– Check the value of usedFreqThreshold under the IE event2d contained in the RRC_MEAS_CTRLd message. If the value of usedFreqThreshold is the same as the value of RSCP Threshold for Reporting 2D in the MML command SET UHOCOMM, this feature has been activated. – Check the value of usedFreqThreshold under the IE event2f contained in the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message. If the value of usedFreqThreshold is the same as the value of RSCP Threshold for Reporting 2F in the MML command SET UHOCOMM, this feature has been activated. Figure 176-1 usedFreqThreshold IE diagram

Verifying power enhancement for the special UE 1.

Choose a special UE whose IMEI TAC is configured on the BSC6900 to start Iub tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. Obtain the IMEI of the UE.

2.

Use the UE to set up a CS call in a cell enabled with this feature.

3.

Check the traced messages:

– Check the value of maxDl-Power under the IE Nbap-Msg contained in the NBAP_RL_RECFG_PREP message. If the value of the IE maxDl-Power is the same as the value of Max DL RL Power For Spec User in the MML command MOD UCELLRLPWR, this feature has been activated.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


598



Figure 176-2 maxDl-Power IE diagram

l


Disable differentiated power control and differentiated handover for smartphones. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UIMEITAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > RNC Basic Configuration > IMEI TAC; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set The function of the TAC to Special_User_Enhance, and clear the SPECUSER_AMR_HOENHANCE_SWITCH and SPECUSER_AMR_PWRENHANCE_SWITCH check boxes under SpecUserFunctionSwitch.

b.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear the RNC_CS_QUERY_UE_IMEI_SWITCH check box under Process Control Switch 2.

----End

Example //Activating Voice Experience Improvement for Smartphones //Enabling CS IMEI acquisition SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH2=RNC_CS_QUERY_UE_IMEI_SWITCH-1; //Enabling differentiated power control and differentiated handover for smartphones and setting the TAC of the smartphone ADD UIMEITAC: TAC_FUNC=Special_User_Enhance, TAC=12345, Description="Smart Phone", SpecUserFunctionSwitch=SPECUSER_AMR_HOENHANCE_SWITCH-1&SPECUSER_AMR_PWREN HANCE_SWITCH-1; //Setting the parameters related to cell load monitoring

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


599



ADD UCELLLDM: CellId=1, SpecUserPwrEnDlPwrTrigThd =80; //Setting the parameters related to RL transmit power in the cell MOD UCELLRLPWR: CellId=1, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, MaxBitRate=12200, RlMaxDlPwr=0, SpecUserRlMaxDlPwr =30; //Setting the RNC-level parameters related to differentiated handover for smartphones SET UHOCOMM: SpecUserHystFor2D=6, SpecUserCSThd2DEcN0=-13, SpecUserCSThd2FEcN0=-10, SpecUserCSThd2DRSCP=-93, SpecUserCSThd2FRSCP=-90; //Setting the cell-level parameters related to differentiated handover for smartphones ADD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, SpecUserHystFor2D =6, SpecUserCSThd2DEcN0=-13, SpecUserCSThd2FEcN0=-10, SpecUserCSThd2DRSCP =-93, SpecUserCSThd2FRSCP=-90; //Deactivating Voice Experience Improvement for Smartphones //Disabling CS IMEI acquisition SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH2=RNC_CS_QUERY_UE_IMEI_SWITCH-0, PROCESSSWITCH4=SEND_MSG_NULL_SWITCH-0; //Disabling differentiated power control and differentiated handover for smartphones MOD UIMEITAC: TAC_FUNC=Special_User_Enhance, TAC=12345, Description="Smart Phone", SpecUserFunctionSwitch=SPECUSER_AMR_HOENHANCE_SWITCH-0&SPECUSER_AMR_PWREN HANCE_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


600



177

Configuring Layered Paging in URA_PCH

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140206 Layered Paging in URA_PCH.

Prerequisites l

Dependency on Other Features – This feature does not depend on other features.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The URA_PCH state has been enabled and CellReSelectCounter in the SET UUESTATETRANS (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > UE State Translating Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) command has been specified to enable UEs to easily enter the URA_PCH state. – Before the feature activation, it is recommended that Enhanced Fast Dormancy be activated and parameters related to the D2F state transition be configured to enable smartphones to enter the URA_PCH state if possible.

Context Due to the rapid rise of smart phone use in recent years, paging messages have been increasing. Conventionally, paging messages are sent to the entire UTRAN registration area (URA). Once Layered Paging in URA_PCH is activated, paging messages are first sent to the last camped-on cell of the UEs in the URA_PCH state and the neighboring cells of the last camped-on cell. When necessary, these messages will be sent to the URA. This reduces the number of paging messages and the possibility of PCH congestion, eliminates the need for manually dividing URAs, and reduces the number of URA updates. l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Precautions Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

601



– None. l

Data Preparation Paramet er Name

Parame ter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

Process Control Switch

PROCE SSSWIT CH: URAPC H_LAY ERED_ PAGIN G_NRT _SWITC H

This switch must be turned on.

Network plan

URAPC H_LAYE RED_PA GING_R T_SWIT CH

PROCE SSSWIT CH: URAPC H_LAY ERED_ PAGIN G_RT_S WITCH

It is recommended that this switch not Network plan be turned on if users are highly sensitive to the delay in real-time services.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, – Select the URAPCH_LAYERED_PAGING_RT_SWITCH check box under the PROCESSSWITCH parameter to enable Layered Paging in URA_PCH for real-time services. – Select the URAPCH_LAYERED_PAGING_NRT_SWITCH check box under the PROCESSSWITCH parameter to enable Layered Paging in URA_PCH for non-real-time services.

l

Verification Procedure Check the value of the counter VS.Paging1.Att1.URA.RealTime.Cell or VS.Paging1.Att1.URA.NonRealTime.Cell on the M2000. If either counter is set to a value other than 0, this feature has been activated.

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

602



– Clear the URAPCH_LAYERED_PAGING_RT_SWITCH check box under the PROCESSSWITCH parameter to disable Layered Paging in URA_PCH for realtime services. – Clear the URAPCH_LAYERED_PAGING_NRT_SWITCH check box under the PROCESSSWITCH parameter to disable Layered Paging in URA_PCH for non-real-time services. ----End

Example //Enabling Layered Paging in URA_PCH for real-time services SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=URAPCH_LAYERED_PAGING_RT_SWITCH-1; //Enabling Layered Paging in URA_PCH for non-real-time services SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=URAPCH_LAYERED_PAGING_NRT_SWITCH-1; //Disabling Layered Paging in URA_PCH for real-time services SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=URAPCH_LAYERED_PAGING_RT_SWITCH-0; //Disabling Layered Paging in URA_PCH for non-real-time services SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=URAPCH_LAYERED_PAGING_NRT_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


603



178

Configuring Web browsing acceleration

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020132 Web browsing acceleration. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on RNC hardware – NIUa board is required.

l

Dependencies on NodeB Hardware – BTS3812E and BTS3812AE series base stations are configured with EBBI or EDLP boards. HBBI and HDLP boards do not support this feature. – DBS3800 series base stations are configured with EBBC or EBBCd boards. The HBBU board does not support this feature. – 3900 series base stations are configured with WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf boards. The WBBPa board does not support this feature. – The Network Intelligence Unit REV:a (NIUa) board is ready. The NIUa board can be housed in the same slot as the DPUb or DPUe board. For details of inserting a NIUa board, see Inserting a Board.

l


l


The license must be activated by performing the following operation first: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to set PPS Active Users to an appropriate value.

Context This feature enables the RNC to identify web browsing services by parsing packets and thereby to preferentially allocate higher bandwidth to these services. As a result, web browsing services take shorter time and the user experience is improved. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


604



Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a NIUa board. In this step, set the Board Class to NIU, and set the Board Type to NIUa.

2.

Set the initial Scheduling Priority Indicator (SPI) weight on the BSC6900 LMT. – If the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is turned on, run the BSC6900 MML command SET USPIWEIGHT to configure weight of each SPI. In this step, set Scheduling Priority Indicator and SPI Weight to appropriate values based on the network plan. – If the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is not turned on, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC to set Default SPI Weight to an appropriate value based on the network plan.

l

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH. In this step, select the NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH check box under the parameter Process switch.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIPSERVICEQOS. In this step, set the Traffic Type to HTTP, and set the Traffic Priority to HIGH.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA. In this step, set Scheduling Priority Weight for High PRI Service, Scheduling Priority Weight for Middle PRI Service, and Scheduling Priority Weight for Low PRI Service to appropriate values based on the network plan.


l

Verify that the value of the counter VS.IuPS.BytesPayldHTTP.Rx is not 0. If it is not 0, this feature has been activated.



----End

Example //Activating Web Browsing Acceleration //ADD a NIUa Board ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=NIU, BRDTYPE=NIUa, SN=8, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0; //Setting the initial SPI weight value if the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is turned on SET USPIWEIGHT: SPI=4, SPIWEIGHT=10; //Setting the initial SPI weight value if the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is not turned on SET UFRC: DefaultSPIWeight=10; //Turning on the switch for a NodeB private interface SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1; //Adding the priority mapping of HTTP services

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


605



ADD UIPSERVICEQOS: CnOpIndex=0, TrafficType=HTTP, TrafficPriority=HIGH; //Setting scheduling priority weight that corresponds to services of each priority SET UDPUCFGDATA: ServPriAdjCoefHigh=100, ServPriAdjCoefMiddle=10, ServPriAdjCoefLow=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


606



179

Configuring P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020133 P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Dependencies on RNC Hardware – NIUa board is required. – Dependencies on NodeB Hardware – BTS3812E and BTS3812AE series base stations are configured with EBBI or EDLP boards. HBBI and HDLP boards do not support this feature. – DBS3800 series base stations are configured with EBBC or EBBCd boards. The HBBU board does not support this feature. – 3900 series base stations are configured with WBBPb or WBBPd boards. The WBBPa board does not support this feature. – The Network Intelligence Unit REV:a (NIUa) board is ready. The NIUa board can be housed in the same slot as the DPUb or DPUe board. For details of inserting a NIUa board, see Inserting a Board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature does not depend on other features. NOTE

The license must be activated by performing the following operation first: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to set PPS Active Users to an appropriate value.

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


607



Context This feature restricts point to point service (P2P) traffic during busy hours, thereby improving the user experience of other delay-sensitive services and reducing operating costs. During nonbusy hours, P2P downloads are not restricted, thereby improving the user experience of P2P users and full utilizing network resources.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a NIUa board. In this step, set the Board Class to NIU, and set the Board Type to NIUa.

2.

Set the initial Scheduling Priority Indicator (SPI) weight on the BSC6900 LMT. – If the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is turned on, run the BSC6900 MML command SET USPIWEIGHT to configure weight of each SPI. In this step, set Scheduling Priority Indicator and SPI Weight to appropriate values based on the network plan. – If the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is not turned on, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC to set Default SPI Weight to an appropriate value based on the network plan.

l

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH. In this step, select the NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH check box under the parameter Process switch.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIPSERVICEQOS to add the priority mapping of P2P services.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA to set scheduling priority weight that corresponds to services of each priority to appropriate values.


l

Verify that the value of the counter VS.IuPS.BytesPayldP2P.Rx is not 0. If it is not 0, this feature has been activated.



----End

Example //Activating P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour //ADD a NIUa Board ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=NIU, BRDTYPE=NIUa, SN=8, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0; //Setting the initial SPI weight value if the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is turned on SET USPIWEIGHT: SPI=4, SPIWEIGHT=10; //Setting the initial SPI weight value if the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is not turned on

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


608



SET UFRC: DefaultSPIWeight=10; //Turning on the switch for a NodeB private interface SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1; //Adding the priority mapping of P2P services ADD UIPSERVICEQOS: CnOpIndex=0, TrafficType=P2P, TrafficPriority=LOW; //Setting scheduling priority weight that corresponds to services of each priority SET UDPUCFGDATA: ServPriAdjCoefHigh=100, ServPriAdjCoefMiddle=10, ServPriAdjCoefLow=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


609


180 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers

180

Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020116 Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers means that among multiple carriers, the carrier bearing HSPA service can dynamically share the unused power resource of another carrier. This function increases the utilization of the power amplifier as well as the HSPA service rate of the cell. For asymmetrical power configuration, the carrier with higher emitting power cannot share the unused power resource of the carrier with lower emitting power.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command ADD PAGRP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Other Information > PAGRP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a power sharing group.


610


180 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers NOTE

l Dynamic spectrum sharing cannot be configured with dynamic power sharing. l A power sharing group consists of a source local cell and a destination local cell. l The source local cell must support only R99 services, and the destination local cell must support HSDPA services. l The source local cell and the destination local cell must use the same RF module and be configured with the same maximum power. l The maximum rate of idle power that the source local cell is allowed to share with the destination local cell is recommended to set to default value. This rate is based on the configured maximum transmit power of the source local cell. l The rate of idle power that must be reserved for the source local cell. This rate is based on the configured maximum transmit power of the source local cell. Reserving the idle power for the source local cell helps avoid power fluctuation in the source local cell caused by power sharing that is not timely.

l

l


Before configuring the power sharing group, increase the load in the destination local cell to 90% by means of load simulation.

2.

Use multiple HSDPA UEs to perform high-speed downloading in the destination local cell. Check the throughput of the destination local cell.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD PAGRP to add a power sharing group.

4.

Check the throughput of the destination local cell after the power sharing group is configured. If the throughput is greatly increased after the power sharing group is configured, you can infer that the feature is enabled.


Run the NodeB MML command RMV PAGRP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Other Information > PAGRP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the power sharing group.

----End

Example //Activation procedure ADD PAGRP: SLOCELL=1, DLOCELL=2, MAXSHRTO=50, SHMGN=10; //Deactivation procedure RMV PAGRP: DLOCELL=2;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


611



181

Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020117 Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context l

The power consumption evaluation of the products in mobile networks shows that the devices, particularly the base stations, in the radio access network are the principal contributor of power consumption and CO2 emissions when they are functioning.

l

If multiple carriers are used in the same coverage area, Huawei provides operators with adaptive carrier power management to reduce power consumption. The traffic volume varies with time. For example, a base station in the Central Business District (CBD) has a higher traffic volume in the daytime, which requires more than one carrier to serve all the subscribers; the traffic volume becomes low from midnight to early morning of the next day. From RAN10.0 on, during an idle period that is configurable by operators, the RNC dynamically shuts down the carriers on which there is no service and uses the other carriers in the same area. The carriers will be turned on again when the traffic on the other carriers becomes congested or when the idle period ends. This reduces power consumption.

l


Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > RNC_Lever Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

612



Cell Dynamic ShutDown Parameter Configuration > Cell Dynamic Shutdown Parameters in RNC; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch For RNC, Period Judge Timer Length for Cell Dynamic Open, and Protect Timer Length for Cell Dynamic ShutDown to appropriate values. 2.

Assume that the cell ID is 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Dynamic Shutdown Parameters) to check whether Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch is turned on. – If Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch is turned off, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Dynamic Shutdown Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to turn on Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch, specify the shutdown period, and set the following parameters to appropriate values. – Cell Dynamic ShutDown Type – Cell Dynamic ShutDown Total User number Threshold – Cell Dynamic ShutDown Hsdpa User number Threshold – Cell Dynamic ShutDown Hsupa User number Threshold – Cell Dynamic ShutDown Neighbour Cell Load Remain threshold NOTE

Default values of the above parameters are recommended.

– If Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch is turned on, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Dynamic Shutdown Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to modify the related parameters. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Interfrequency Neighboring Cell) to check whether an inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell is configured for cell 1. Assume that the ID of the inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell is 2. – This feature takes effect only when cell 2 is served by the same NodeB as cell 1. – If the neighboring cell is not configured, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Inter-frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell. In this step, set Blind Handover Flag to TRUE. – If the neighboring cell is configured, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Inter-frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Blind Handover Flag to TRUE.

4.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell CAC algorithm switch to HSDPA_GBP_MEAS(HSDPA GBP Meas Algorithm). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

613


181 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load NOTE

This feature takes effect only when the GBP measurement switch for the inter-frequency cocoverage neighboring cell is turned on.

l


Start alarm browsing on the BSC6900 LMT.

2.

Ensure that the total number of users in cell 1 and cell 2 is 0. Alternatively, set up two inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cells where no user is admitted.

3.

At a time during the period specified by running the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN (for example, 09:10): – If an ALM-22202 UMTS Cell Unavailable is reported at cell 1 with the cause value of cell dynamic shutdown, this feature has been activated. – If this alarm is not reported or is reported but the cause value is not cell dynamic shutdown, this feature is not activated.

4.

l

Check whether this feature is activated by viewing the counter VS.DynOpen.CellSetup and check whether this feature is deactivated by viewing the counter VS.DynClose.CellDel on the M2000.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > RNC_Lever Cell Dynamic ShutDown Parameter Configuration > Cell Dynamic Shutdown Parameters in RNC; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate this feature at the RNC. In this step, set Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch For RNC to OFF(switch off).

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Dynamic Shutdown Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate this feature for cell 1.

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Turning on the RNC-level switch for dynamic shutdown SET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA: DynCellShutDownSwitch=ON; //Turning on the cell-level switch for dynamic shutdown ADD UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN: CellId=1, DynShutdownSwitch=ON_1, StartTime1=08&59, EndTime1=10&59, DynShutDownType=CONDITIONALSHUTDOWN; //Adding inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cells for the cell where this feature is activated (cell 1 and cell 2 in the following command are served by the same NodeB) ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=110, CellId=1, NCellRncId=110, NCellId=2, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, NPrioFlag=FALSE, InterNCellQualReqFlag=FALSE; //Turning on the GBP measurement switch for an inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=2, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_GBP_MEAS-1, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST; /*Deactivation procedure*/ //Deactivating Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load at the RNC SET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA: DynCellShutDownSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


614



//Deactivating Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load for cell 1 RMV UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN: CellId=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


615



182

Configuring Energy Efficiency Improved

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020118 Energy Efficiency Improved.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – MTRU of the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE does not support this feature. – The RRU3801C of the NodeB does not support this feature. – Other RF modules support this feature.

l


l


Context l

Based on the high efficient power amplification techniques, power amplification parameters can be dynamically adjusted to further improve the power amplification efficiency under low load. The NodeB adjusts the Power Amplifier (PA) bias voltage based on the output power that varies with the traffic load, improving the PA efficiency and reducing the static PA power consumption.

l

When there is no HSDPA service, the NodeB supports this function as long as the license is activated.

l

When there are HSDPA services, the NodeB does not support this function by default. If this function is required, perform the following activation operations.

l


Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command SET OPTDYNADJPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

616



Information > Radio Management > OPTDYNADJPARA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set dynamic voltage adjustment parameters. – Set Dynamic Voltage Adjustment Switch to ON. – Set Start Time and End Time as required. l


l

Run the NodeB MML command LST OPTDYNADJPARA to query the dynamic voltage adjustment parameters. In the command output, check that Dynamic Voltage Adjustment Switch is set to ON, which indicates that the function is activated. Check that Start Time and End Time are set to the required values.


Run the NodeB MML command SET OPTDYNADJPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > OPTDYNADJPARA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set dynamic voltage adjustment parameters. In this step, set Dynamic Voltage Adjustment Switch to OFF.

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET OPTDYNADJPARA: DYNADJSWITCH=ON, DYNADJSTARTTIME=0, DYNADJENDTIME=6; //Verification procedure LST OPTDYNADJPARA:; //Deactivation procedure SET OPTDYNADJPARA: DYNADJSWITCH=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


617



183

Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020119 Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3902E doesn't support this feature.

l


l


Context In case of mains failure, the backup power system starts to operate. In this case, this feature can implement hierarchical carrier shutdown based on the shutdown duration and cell priority.

Procedure l


Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) with Local Cell ID and Sector Type specified in order to set reserved cells. For the cells that need to provide services continuously during the level-1 shutdown period, set Reserved Cell to TRUE. NOTE

It is recommended that at least one cell be reserved for a sector. In case of mains failure, the reserved cell continues to provide services for the users in this sector.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


618



2.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOWPOWERPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Equipment Management > NODEB; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the intelligent power shutdown switch with the NodeB ISD Switch set to ENABLE. Set Level 1 power off Delay (s) and Level 2 power off Delay (s) based on the backup capability of the batteries.

3.

Optional: If you need to use the smooth power change function, run the NodeB MML command SET SMTHPWRSWTCH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Basic Information > Smooth Power Change Function Switch; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the intelligent power shutdown switch with the Smooth Power Change Function Switch set to OPEN. NOTE

Before a cell is shut down, the smooth power change function reduces the TX power of the PCPICH so that the services in the cell are handed over to neighboring cells. This prevents service disruption due to abrupt cell shutdown.


Run the NodeB MML command LST LOWPOWERPARA to query the configuration information about the intelligent power shutdown switch. On the LMT, check whether the NodeB ISD Switch is set to ENABLE, and whether the Level 1 power off Delay (s) and Level 2 power off Delay (s) are set correctly.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to query the configuration information about local cells. Check whether the value of Reserve Cell of each local cell is correct.

3.

Optional: If the smooth power change function is already used, run the NodeB MML command LST SMTHPWRSWTCH to check whether the intelligent power shutdown switch is turned on. If the Smooth Power Change Function Switch is set to OPEN, it indicates that this function is enabled.


l

Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOWPOWERPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Equipment Management > NODEB; CME batch modification center: not supported) to turn off the intelligent power shutdown switch with the NodeB ISD Switch set to DISABLE.


Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) with Local Cell ID and Sector Type specified in order to set reserved cells. For the cells that need to provide services continuously during the level-1 shutdown period, set Reserved Cell to TRUE. NOTE

It is recommended that at least one cell be reserved for a sector. In case of mains failure, the reserved cell continues to provide services for the users in this sector.

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command SET ITELSHUTDOWN (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

619



Information > More Information > NODEB; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the intelligent power shutdown switch with the ISD SWITCH set to ENABLE. Set LEVEL1 DELAY and LEVEL2 DELAY based on the backup capability of the batteries. 3.

Optional: If you need to use the smooth power change function, run the NodeB MML command SET SMTHPWRSWTCH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Basic Information > Smooth Power Change Function Switch; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the intelligent power shutdown switch with the Smooth Power Change Function Switch set to OPEN. NOTE

Before a cell is shut down, the smooth power change function reduces the TX power of the PCPICH so that the services in the cell are handed over to neighboring cells. This prevents service disruption due to abrupt cell shutdown.


Run the NodeB MML command LST ITELSHUTDOWN to query the configuration information about the intelligent power shutdown switch. On the LMT, check whether the NodeB ISD Switch is set to ENABLE, and whether the Level 1 power off and Level w power off are set correctly.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to query the configuration information about local cells. Check whether the value of Reserve Cell of each local cell is correct.

3.

Optional: If the smooth power change function is already used, run the NodeB MML command LST SMTHPWRSWTCH to check whether the intelligent power shutdown switch is turned on. If the Smooth Power Change Function Switch is set to OPEN, it indicates that this function is enabled.


Run the NodeB MML command SET ITELSHUTDOWN (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > More Information > NODEB; CME batch modification center: not supported) to turn off the intelligent power shutdown switch with the ISD Switch set to DISABLE.

----End

Example l

NodeB V200R014 //Activation procedure MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, RSV=TRUE; MOD LOWPOWERPARA: ISD=ENABLE, LEVEL1=60, LEVEL2=120; SET SMTHPWRSWTCH: SWITCH=OPEN; //Verification procedure LST LOWPOWERPARA:; LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=1; LST SMTHPWRSWTCH:; //Deactivation procedure MOD LOWPOWERPARA: ISD=DISABLE;

l

NodeB V100R014 //Activation procedure MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, RSV=TRUE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


620


183 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup SET ITELSHUTDOWN: ISD=ENABLE, LEVEL1=60, LEVEL2=120; SET SMTHPWRSWTCH: SWITCH=OPEN; //Verification procedure LST ITELSHUTDOWN:; LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=1; LST SMTHPWRSWTCH:; //Deactivation procedure SET ITELSHUTDOWN: ISD=DISABLE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


621



184

Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020122 Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature guarantees the data rate for only DCH and high-priority HSDPA users. For lowpriority HSDPA users, only Guaranteed Bit Rate (GBR) is guaranteed. If the remaining bandwidth of neighboring cells can meet the preceding requirements for rate, this feature can be enabled to reduce the power consumption, and therefore increase profits of operators.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > RNC_Lever Cell Dynamic ShutDown Parameter Configuration > Cell Dynamic Shutdown Parameters in RNC; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch for RNC to ON(switch on).

2.

Assume that the cell ID is 2003. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

622



Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Dynamic Shutdown Parameters) to check whether Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch is set to ON for this cell.

3.

4.

a.

If Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch is set to OFF, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Dynamic Shutdown Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch to ON_1(switch on1), specify First Cell Dynamic ShutDown Interval Start Time, First Cell Dynamic ShutDown Interval End Time, set Cell Dynamic ShutDown Type to QOSSHUTDOWN(QosShutDown), and specify High-Priority Scheduling Indicator.

b.

If Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch is turned on, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Dynamic Shutdown Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to modify the settings of the preceding parameters to the specified settings.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Interfrequency Neighboring Cell) to check whether cell 2003 is configured with an interfrequency co-coverage neighboring cell. Assume that the ID of the inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell is 2004. a.

This feature takes effect only when cell 2004 is under the same NodeB as cell 2003.

b.

If the neighboring cell is not configured, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Inter-frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell. In this step, set Blind Handover Flag to TRUE.

c.

If the neighboring cell is configured, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Inter-frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Blind Handover Flag set to TRUE.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell CAC algorithm switch to HSDPA_GBP_MEAS(HSDPA GBP Meas Algorithm). NOTE

This feature takes effect only when the GBP measurement switches of both cell 2003 and cell 2004 are turned on.

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Start alarm browsing on the BSC6900 LMT.

2.

Ensure that the total number of users in cell 2003 and cell 2004 is 0. Alternatively, add two inter-frequency co-coverage cells that have bidirectional neighboring cell relationships, and these cells do not carry any services.

3.

At a time during the period specified in the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN (for example, 09:10): Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

623



– If the alarm ALM-22202 UMTS Cell Unavailable is reported at cell 2003 with a cause of cell dynamic shutdown, this feature has been activated. – If the alarm is not reported or is reported at cell 2003 but the cause is not cell dynamic shutdown, this feature has not been activated. 4.

l

You can also view whether the feature is activated by checking certain counters on the M2000: If the value of the counter VS.DynOpen.CellSetup is not 0, the feature is activated; If the value of the counter VS.DynClose.CellDel is not 0, the feature is not activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > RNC_Lever Cell Dynamic ShutDown Parameter Configuration > Cell Dynamic Shutdown Parameters in RNC; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate this feature for the RNC. In this step, set Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch for RNC to OFF(switch off).

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Dynamic Shutdown Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Cell ID to 2003 to deactivate this feature for cell 2003.

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Turning on the cell dynamic shutdown switch for the RNC SET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA: DynCellShutDownSwitch=ON; //Turning on the cell dynamic shutdown switch ADD UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN: CellId=2003, DynShutdownSwitch=ON_1, StartTime1=11&50, EndTime1=11&55, DynShutDownType=QOSSHUTDOWN, HighPriSPI=SPI11-1&SPI12-1&SPI13-1; //Adding an inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell (cell 2004) to a cell (cell 2003) whose TRXs are shut down (cells 2003 and 2004 are under the same NodeB) ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=110, CellId=2003, NCellRncId=110, NCellId=2004, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, NPrioFlag=FALSE, InterNCellQualReqFlag=FALSE; //Turning on the GBP measurement switches for a cell (cell 2003)and its inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell (cell 2004) ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=2003, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_GBP_MEAS-1, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST; ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=2004, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_GBP_MEAS-1, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST; /*Deactivation procedure*/ //Deactivating Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS for the RNC SET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA: DynCellShutDownSwitch=OFF; //(Optional) Deactivating Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS for cell

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


624



2003 RMV UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN: CellId=2003;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


625



185

Configuring Intelligent Power Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020121 Intelligent Power Management.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only when DBS3900, BTS3900AL or BTS3900A is used with APM30 and battery.

l


l


Context With this feature, certain Power Supply Units (PSUs) can be powered on or off according to the power consumption of the NodeB, reducing the power consumption.

Procedure l


l


l

Run the NodeB MML command LST PSUISS to check whether the PSU Intelligent Shutdown Switch is set to ENABLE(ENABLE).


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command SET PSUISS (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Equipment Management > PSU Intelligent Shutdown Switch; CME batch modification center: not supported) with the PSU Intelligent Shutdown Switch set to ENABLE (ENABLE).

Run the NodeB MML command SET PSUISS (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Equipment Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

626



Management > PSU Intelligent Shutdown Switch; CME batch modification center: not supported) with the PSU Intelligent Shutdown Switch set to DISABLE (DISABLE). ----End

Example //Activation procedure SET PSUISS: PSUISS=ENABLE; //Verification procedure LST PSUISS:; //Deactivation procedure SET PSUISS: PSUISS=DISABLE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


627



186

Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature WRFD-021311 MOCN Introduction Package.

l


Context This feature enables multiple operators to share the same set of RAN equipment but have their own independent cells. The same set of RAN equipment can provide different operators with rich and differentiated services.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operators Sharing Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set RAN Sharing Support to YES to turn on the RAN sharing switch.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERATOR (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > CN Operator; CME batch modification center: not supported) twice to add the primary and secondary operators respectively. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

628



3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERGROUP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > CN Operator Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) twice to add an operator group respectively for the primary and secondary operators.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Signaling Configuration > OSP; CME batch modification center: not supported) for multiple times to add OSPs for primary and secondary operators. NOTE

Primary and secondary operators can have their own OSPs for the same BSC6900. l Primary and secondary operators can share the same Network ID when required. l When primary and secondary operators share the same Network ID, they must use the same OSP code bits but different OSP code[Whole Number]. l When primary and secondary operators do not share Network ID, they can have different values for OSP code bits.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Signaling Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) for multiple times to add DSPs for primary and secondary operators.

6.

Configure Iu data for the primary and secondary operators.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNNODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Core Network > UMTS CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) for multiple times to add CN nodes for the primary operator.

8.

Configure Iub data and add a dedicated cell. NOTE

l There are two types of RAN sharing: l NodeBs are independently deployed by operators. l NodeBs are shared by operators and cells are not shared by operators. l After adding a cell or changing the UARFCN, you need to verify that the UARFCN used by the cell is in the allowed range of the NodeB license. If the UARFCN is not in the allowed range of the NodeB license, you must issue a new NodeB license on the M2000.

l

Verification Procedure If the CNs of the primary and secondary operators are working properly, dedicated cells can be set up for these operators, and the IDs of these operators can be displayed on the UE, this feature has been activated.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operators Sharing Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set RAN Sharing Support to NO to turn off the RAN sharing switch.

----End

Example //Activating RAN Sharing Introduction Package

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


629



//Setting the sharing mode for the operators SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedIntraRat=NO, InterPlmnHoAllowedInterRat=YES; //Adding a primary operator ADD UCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=PRIM, CnOperatorName="PRIM", MCC="502", MNC="10", CnOpIndex=0; //Adding a secondary operator ADD UCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=SEC, CnOperatorName="SEC", MCC="310", MNC="30", CnOpIndex=1; //Adding an operator group for the primary operator ADD UCNOPERGROUP: CnOpGrpIndex=0, CnOpGrpName="PRIM", CnOpNum=ONE, CnOpIndex1=0; //Adding an operator group for the secondary operator ADD UCNOPERGROUP: CnOpGrpIndex=1, CnOpGrpName="SEC", CnOpNum=ONE, CnOpIndex1=1; //Adding the OSP for the primary operator ADD OPC: NAME="PRIM", SPX=0, NI=INT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=111; //Adding the OSP for a secondary operator ADD OPC: NAME="SEC", SPX=1, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT24, SPDF=WNF, SPC=222; //Adding DSPs for the primary operator ADD N7DPC: NAME="PRIMCS", DPX=0, SPX=0, BEARTYPE=M3UA; ADD N7DPC: NAME="PRIMPS", DPX=1, SPX=0, BEARTYPE=M3UA; //Adding DSPs for a secondary operator ADD N7DPC: NAME="PRIMCS", DPX=2, SPX=1, BEARTYPE=M3UA; ADD N7DPC: NAME="PRIMPS", DPX=3, SPX=1, BEARTYPE=M3UA;

SPDF=WNF, DPC=333, DPCT=IUCS, SPDF=WNF, DPC=444, DPCT=IUPS, SPDF=WNF, DPC=555, DPCT=IUCS, SPDF=WNF, DPC=666, DPCT=IUPS,

//Adding CN nodes for the primary operator ADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=0, CNId=0, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, Dpx=0, CNProtclVer=R99, SupportCRType=CR527_NOT_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=60000, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, RTCPSwitch=ON, RTCPBWRatio=1, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF; ADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=0, CNId=1, CNDomainId=PS_DOMAIN, Dpx=1, CNProtclVer=R99, SupportCRType=CR527_NOT_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=60000; //Adding CN nodes for a secondary operator ADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=2, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, Dpx=2, CNProtclVer=R99, SupportCRType=CR527_NOT_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=60000, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, RTCPSwitch=ON, RTCPBWRatio=1, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF; ADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=3, CNDomainId=PS_DOMAIN, Dpx=3, CNProtclVer=R99, SupportCRType=CR527_NOT_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=60000; //Adding a cell ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CELLID=1, CELLNAME="Cell1", BANDIND=BAND1, PeerIsValid=VALID, PeerCellId=100, CnOpGrpIndex=0, UARFCNUPLINK=9612, UARFCNDOWNLINK=10562, PSCRAMBCODE=0, TCELL=CHIP256, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CFGRACIND=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00, SpgId = 6, URANUM=D8, URA1=1, URA2=2, URA3=3, URA4=4, URA5=5, URA6=6, URA7=7, URA8=8,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


630



NODEBNAME="NodeB1", LOCELL=0, SUPBMC=FALSE, MAXTXPOWER=430, PCPICHPOWER=330;

//Deactivating RAN Sharing Introduction Package //Setting the sharing mode for the operators SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=NO;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


631



187

Configuring Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02130401 Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operators Sharing Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set RAN Sharing Support to YES to turn on the RAN sharing switch.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERATOR (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > CN Operator; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the primary and secondary operators.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERGROUP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > CN Operator Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) twice to add an operator group respectively for the primary and secondary operators.

4.

Configure Iu data for the primary and secondary operators. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

632



5.

Configure Iub data and add a dedicated cell. NOTE

There are two types of RAN sharing: l NodeBs are independently deployed by operators. l NodeBs are shared by operators and cells are not shared by operators.

l

Verification Procedure Use a UE to access cells 1000 and 1001. If the network access is successful, carriers are exclusively used by the operators.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operators Sharing Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set RAN Sharing Support to NO to turn off the RAN sharing switch.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELL (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click UMTS cell > Delete Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove all cells configured for the operator.

----End

Example //Activating Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator //Configuring basic information about the BSC6900 SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedIntraRat=NO, InterPlmnHoAllowedInterRat=YES; //Adding a primary operator ADD UCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=PRIM, CnOperatorName="PRIM", MCC="502", MNC="10", CnOpIndex=0; //Adding a secondary operator ADD UCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=SEC, CnOperatorName="SEC", MCC="310", MNC="30", CnOpIndex=1; //Adding an operator group for the primary operator ADD UCNOPERGROUP: CnOpGrpIndex=0, CnOpGrpName="PRIM", CnOpNum=ONE, CnOpIndex1=0; //Adding an operator group for the secondary operator ADD UCNOPERGROUP: CnOpGrpIndex=1, CnOpGrpName="SEC", CnOpNum=ONE, CnOpIndex1=1; //Adding dedicated cell 1 ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CELLID=1, CELLNAME="Cell1", BANDIND=BAND1,PeerIsValid=VALID, PeerCellId=100, CnOpGrpIndex=0,UARFCNUPLINK=9612, UARFCNDOWNLINK=10562, PSCRAMBCODE=0, TCELL=CHIP256, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CFGRACIND=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00, SpgId = 6,URANUM=D8, URA1=1, URA2=2, URA3=3, URA4=4, URA5=5, URA6=6, URA7=7, URA8=8, NODEBNAME="NodeB1", LOCELL=0, SUPBMC=FALSE, MAXTXPOWER=430, PCPICHPOWER=330; //Adding dedicated cell 2 ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CELLID=2, CELLNAME="Cell2", BANDIND=BAND1,PeerIsValid=VALID, PeerCellId=100, CnOpGrpIndex=1,UARFCNUPLINK=9622, UARFCNDOWNLINK=10572, PSCRAMBCODE=0,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


633



TCELL=CHIP256, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CFGRACIND=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00, SpgId = 6,URANUM=D8, URA1=1, URA2=2, URA3=3, URA4=4, URA5=5, URA6=6, URA7=7, URA8=8, NODEBNAME="NodeB1", LOCELL=0, SUPBMC=FALSE, MAXTXPOWER=430, PCPICHPOWER=330;

//Deactivating Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator //Turning off the RAN sharing switch SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=NO; //Removing a dedicated cell RMV UCELL: CellId=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


634



188

Configuring Flexible Network Architecture

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02130402 Flexible Network Architecture.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package.

l


Context This feature can meet the networking requirements of different operators.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure For information on activating the Iu Flex feature, see 227 Configuring Iu Flex. For information on activating the Cell Broadcast Service feature, see 70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service. For information on activating the RAN Sharing feature, see 186 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package.

l

Verification Procedure For information on verifying the Iu Flex feature, see 227 Configuring Iu Flex. For information on verifying the Cell Broadcast Service feature, see 70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


635



For information on verifying the RAN Sharing feature, see 186 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package. l

Deactivation Procedure For information on deactivating the Iu Flex feature, see 227 Configuring Iu Flex. For information on deactivating the Cell Broadcast Service feature, see 70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service. For information on deactivating the RAN Sharing feature, see 186 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package.

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


636



189

Configuring Mobility Control and Service Differentiation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD02130403 Mobility Control and Service Differentiation.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature supports the configuration of different service support for multiple operators to meet their individual requirements.

Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operators Sharing Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the parameter RAN Sharing Support to YES. Then, set the parameters Intra RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed and Inter RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed to YES.

Verification Procedure The cells that belong to different operators can be configured as intra-frequency, interfrequency, or inter-RAT neighboring cells.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


637


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operators Sharing Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the parameter RAN Sharing Support to YES. Then, set the parameters Intra RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed and Inter RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed to NO.

----End

Example //Activating Mobility Control and Service Differentiation SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedIntraRat=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedInterRat=YES; //Deactivating Mobility Control and Service Differentiation SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedIntraRat=NO, InterPlmnHoAllowedInterRat=NO;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


638



190

Configuring Independent License Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02130404 Independent License Control. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context This feature enables operators to have their own network capacity and optional features, thereby meeting different service and operation requirements.

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to configure a license for the primary operator.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to configure a license for the secondary operator.


l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


639



This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End

Example //Activating Independent License Control SET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, CNOPERATORINDEX=0, CsErlang=30000, FUNCTIONSWITCH1=PDCP-1; SET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=NO, CNOPERATORINDEX=1, CsErlang=20000;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


640


191 Configuring RAN Sharing Phase 2

191

Configuring RAN Sharing Phase 2

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021305 RAN Sharing Phase 2.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The features WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context This feature provides independent Iub transmission resource management for multiple telecom operators to ensure the QoS of their respective users.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure For information on activating this feature, see 192 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control.

l


l


----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


641



192

Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02130501 Dedicated Iub Transmission Control.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. The feature WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package has been activated.

l


Context This feature provides separate admission control policies for operators that share the same port, thereby ensuring the basic bandwidth available for each operator and improving bandwidth efficiency when the Iub resources are idle.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Activating Dedicated Iub Transmission Control in ATM mode 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPSEPINFO (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Separate Information for Operators; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the separate information for operators, including the bandwidth admission ratio and load thresholds for each operator, and set Transport Type to ATM.


642


192 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control NOTE

This feature can be enabled for one to four operators as required. The bandwidth ratios and load thresholds for these operators need to be separately configured. Note that the sum of the bandwidth ratios for all valid operators must be 100%.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD FRALNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Fractional ATM Link; CME batch modification center: not supported), ADD UNILNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > UNI Link; CME batch modification center: not supported), or ADD IMAGRP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > IMA Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a physical port. Set Operator Separated Flag to ON (ON). In addition, on the links carried on the physical port, set Index of Separate Information for Operators.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB (CME single configuration: Main View > Right Click RNC > Create Logical NodeB; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a NodeB. In this step, set Sharing Type Of NodeB to RANSHARING(RAN Sharing).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an adjacent node.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an AAL2 path.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a TRM mapping table. NOTE

The BSC6900 provides a default TRM mapping table. This step is executed only when different TRM mapping policies are required.

– Activating Dedicated Iub Transmission Control in IP mode 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPSEPINFO (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Separate Information for Operators; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the separate information for operators, including the bandwidth admission ratio and load thresholds for each operator, and set Transport Type to IP(IP). NOTE

This feature can be enabled for one to four operators as required. The bandwidth ratios and load thresholds for these operators need to be separately configured. Note that the sum of the bandwidth ratios for all valid operators must be 100%.

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > PPP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) or ADD MPGRP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > MP Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a physical port, or run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPLOGICPORT (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

643



IP Logical Port; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a logical port. Set Operator Separated Flag to ON(ON), and set Index of Separate Information for Operators on the links carried on the physical port. NOTE

If this feature is activated on the physical port, this feature is only enabled on the physical port. If this feature is activated on the logical port, this feature is only enabled on the logical port. You can enable this feature on both the physical port and logical port based on the network plan.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB (CME single configuration: Main View > Right Click RNC > Create Logical NodeB; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a NodeB. In this step, set Sharing Type Of NodeB to RANSHARING(RAN Sharing).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an adjacent node.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP path.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a TRM mapping table. NOTE

The BSC6900 provides a default TRM mapping table. This step is executed only when different TRM mapping policies are required.

7.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJMAP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the TRM mapping to the adjacent node. In this step, set Resource Management Mode to SHARE(Sharing) or EXCLUSIVE(EXCLUSIVE). If you set Resource Management Mode to EXCLUSIVE(EXCLUSIVE), you are advised to add a TRM mapping to the adjacent node for each operator. Otherwise, the operator cannot admit services.

Verification Procedure Assume that networks of operators A and B are enabled with the RAN sharing feature. 1.

Choose Monitor > Transport Resource RealTime Monitoring on the LMT. Specify the parameters related to the physical port that is shared by operators A and B and specify operator indexes. Then, check whether the bandwidth occupied by each operator meets the conditions specified by the predefined bandwidth ratio parameters. NOTE

The verification procedures for this feature are the same for the ATM mode and IP mode.

l

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivating Dedicated Iub Transmission Control in ATM mode 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD FRALNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Fractional ATM Link; CME batch modification center: not supported), MOD UNILNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > UNI Link; CME batch modification center: not supported), or MOD IMAGRP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

644



IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > IMA Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) as required. In this step, set Operator Separated Flag to OFF (OFF). – Deactivating Dedicated Iub Transmission Control in IP mode 1.

If a physical port is added, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD PPPLNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > PPP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) or MOD MPGRP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > MP Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set Operator Separated Flag to OFF(OFF); if a logical port is added, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPLOGICPORT (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Logical Port; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set Operator Separated Flag to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example //Activation procedure Activate Dedicated Iub Transmission Control in ATM mode ADD OPSEPINFO: OPSEPINDEX=0, OPCOUNT=TWO, TYPE=ATM, OPINDEX1=0, BWRATIO1=40, OPINDEX2=3, BWRATIO2=60; ADD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=26, BT=AEUa, IMAGRPN=0, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, OPSEPFLAG=ON, OPSEPINDEX=0; ADD UNODEB: NodeBName="NodeB1", NodeBId=1, SRN=0, SN=0, SSN=1, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, HostType=SINGLEHOST, SharingType=RANSHARING; ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="NodeB1", NODET=IUB, NODEBID=1, TRANST=ATM, IsROOTNODE=YES, SAALLNKN=20; ADD AAL2PATH: ANI=1, PATHID=10, CARRYT=ATMLOGICPORT, CARRYF=0, CARRYSN=26, CARRYVPN=10, VPI=2, VCI=50, TXTRFX=111, RXTRFX=111, AAL2PATHT=SHARE; ADD TRMMAP: TMI=14, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=ATM; ADD ADJMAP: ANI=1, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=ATM, CNMNGMODE=SHARE, TMIGLD=14, TMISLV=14, TMIBRZ=14, FTI=0; Activate Dedicated Iub Transmission Control in IP mode ADD OPSEPINFO: OPSEPINDEX=0, OPCOUNT=TWO, TYPE=IP, OPINDEX1=0, BWRATIO1=40, OPINDEX2=3, BWRATIO2=60; ADD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, MPGRPN=0, MPTYPE=MCPPP, BORROWDEVIP=NO, LOCALIP="11.11.11.12", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="11.11.11.13", MHF=LONG, PPPMUX=Disable, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, ERRDETECTSW=OFF, ANTIERRFLAG=OFF, OPSEPFLAG=ON, OPSEPINDEX=0; ADD UNODEB: NodeBName="NodeB1", NodeBId=1, SRN=0, SN=0, SSN=1, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, IPTRANSAPARTIND=NOT_SUPPORT, HostType=SINGLEHOST, SharingType=RANSHARING; ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="NodeB1", NODET=IUB, NODEBID=1, TRANST=IP; ADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="11.11.11.12", PEERIPADDR="11.11.11.13", TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED; ADD TRMMAP: TMI=14, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP; ADD ADJMAP: ANI=1, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, CNMNGMODE=SHARE, TMIGLD=14, TMISLV=14, TMIBRZ=14, FTI=0; //Deactivation procedure Deactivate Dedicated Iub Transmission Control in ATM mode MOD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=26, BT=AEUa, IMAGRPN=0, OPSEPFLAG=OFF; Deactivate Dedicated Iub Transmission Control in IP mode

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


645



MOD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, MPGRPN=0, OPSEPFLAG=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


646



193

Configuring IMSI Based Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021303 IMSI Based Handover.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context With this feature, configuring SNA-related information on the RNC is supported. This enables the UTRAN to limit UE mobility when the CN does not support the shared network area (SNA) function.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the RNCAP_IMSI_HO_SWITCH check box under the parameter PROCESSSWITCH.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ULASNAMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Radio Basic Data Configuration > Mapping of LAC to SNA; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set PLMN to 46000, LAC to 1234, and SNAC to 1.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIMSISNAMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Radio Basic Data Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

647



Configuration > Mapping of IMSI to SNA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IMSI-to-SNA mapping relationship. In this step, set The start of IMSI to 460071234000000, The end of IMSI to 460071234500000, PLMN to 46000, and SNAC to 1. l


Use the UE with the IMSI of 460071234000006 to access the cell with the LAC of H'1234. The UE is admitted to the cell.

2.

Use the UE with the IMSI of 460071234000006 to access the cell with the LAC of H'1235. The UE is rejected by the cell. In this case, you can view the RRC CONNECTION REJECT message on the Uu interface. NOTE

The restrictions on cell update, UTRAN registration area (URA) update, handovers, relocations, and handling COMMON ID messages are the same as that on RRC connection request.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ULASNAMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Radio Basic Data Configuration > Mapping of LAC to SNA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a mapping relationship between LAC and SNA.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UIMSISNAMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Radio Basic Data Configuration > Mapping of IMSI to SNA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a mapping relationship between IMSI and SNA.

----End

Example //Activating IMSI-Based Handover //Enabling IMSI Handover SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=RNCAP_IMSI_HO_SWITCH-1; //Adding PLMN, LAN, and SNAC ADD ULASNAMAP: MCC="460", MNC="00", LAC=H'1234, SNAC=1; //Adding the PLMN and SNAC of the SNA ADD UIMSISNAMAP: ImsiMin = "460071234000000", ImsiMax = "460071234500000", MCC="460", MNC="07", SnaExistInd=TRUE,SNAC=1;

//Deactivating IMSI-Based Handover //Removing a mapping relationship between IMSI and SNA RMV ULASNAMAP: MCC="460", MNC="00", LAC=1234, SNAC=1; //Removing a mapping relationship between IMSI and SNA RMV UIMSISNAMAP: ImsiMin="460071234000000", ImsiMax="460071234500000", MCC="460", MNC="07", SnaExistInd=TRUE, SNAC=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


648



194

Configuring MOCN Introduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021311 MOCN Introduction Package. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package.

l


Context Multi-Operator Core Network (MOCN) was introduced in 3GPP Release 6. It enables multiple operators to share the network and therefore reduces the CAPEX and OPEX. The MOCN feature has no requirement for the RNC, NodeB, and UE hardware. It is applicable to all categories of UEs. For details about MOCN, see 3GPP TS 23.251.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERATOR to add a primary operator. In this step, set Cn Operator Name, MCC, MNC, and Cn Operator Index to appropriate values.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERATOR to add a secondary operator. In this step, set Cn Operator Name, MCC, MNC, and Cn Operator Index to appropriate values. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

649



3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to activate the license for the primary operator.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to activate the license for the secondary operator.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERATOR to add a common operator. NOTE

If the MOCN operator has applied for a new PLMN, a common operator needs to be configured. If the MOCN operator does not apply for a new PLMN, a common operator does not need to be configured.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERGROUP to add an operator group. NOTE

When no common operator is configured, set the common operator index (CnOpIndex1) of the operator group to the default value 255.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE to set the sharing mode for the operators. Set RAN Sharing Support to NO. Set MOCN Support to YES. Set Intra RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed, Inter RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed, Default CnOperator, and Mocn Control Switch to appropriate values based on the network plan.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORCFGPARA to set parameters for the primary operator.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORCFGPARA to set parameters for the secondary operator.

10. Configure Iu interface transmission data between the BSC6900 and the primary and secondary operators' CNs by referring to Configuring Interface Data. 11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNNODE to add a CN node for the primary operator. 12. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNNODE to add a CN node for the secondary operator. 13. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP to add a mapping between Network Resource Identifiers (NRIs) and CN nodes. NOTE

The mapping between NRIs and CN nodes needs to be configured based on the network plan. If a CN node is configured with multiple NRIs, repeat this step until all the required mapping relationships are configured.

14. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB to add an MOCN NodeB. In this step, set Sharing Type Of NodeB to MOCN and set other parameters based on the network plan. 15. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB to add a dedicated NodeB. 16. Configure the area information by referring to Configuring the Area Information. NOTE

Location areas must be the same for the primary and secondary operators.

17. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP to add an MOCN cell. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


650


194 Configuring MOCN Introduction Package NOTE

A cell is a dedicated cell if its operator group is configured with only one operator.

18. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT3GCELL to add a neighboring RNC cell. l


Register supporting UEs and non-supporting UEs in MOCN cells of the primary and secondary operators. The UEs are registered successfully and properly initiate CS and PS services. NOTE

The MOCN network has two types of UEs: l Supporting UE: supports the MOCN feature. In an MOCN network, the RNC broadcasts the PLMNs of the operators through system information messages (the Multiple-PLMN list IE). Supporting UEs interpret such PLMN information or notify the RNC of their selected PLMNs through initial direct transfer messages. Supporting UEs support 3GPP Release 6. l Non-supporting UE: does not support the MOCN feature. Non-supporting UEs cannot interpret the PLMN information in system information messages.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELL to remove the MOCN cell.

2.

Add a cell not enabled with the MOCN feature by referring to Configuring the Cell Data. NOTE

Deactivating the MOCN feature interrupts services. Therefore, perform the deactivation operations early in the morning when the traffic is light.

----End

Example //Configuring MOCN Introduction Package //Adding a primary operator ADD UCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=PRIM, CnOperatorName="PrimOp", MCC="302", MNC="221", CnOpIndex=0; //Adding a secondary operator ADD UCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=SEC, CnOperatorName="SecOp", MCC="302", MNC="640", CnOpIndex=1; //Adding a common operator ADD UCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=COMM, CnOperatorName="Common", MCC="302", MNC="580", CnOpIndex=5; //Activating the license for the primary operator SET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, CNOPERATORINDEX=0, FUNCTIONSWITCH2=ENHANCEDIUFLEX-1, FUNCTIONSWITCH4=MOCN_PACKAGE-1; //Activating the license for the secondary operator SET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=NO, CNOPERATORINDEX=1, FUNCTIONSWITCH2=ENHANCEDIUFLEX-1, FUNCTIONSWITCH4=MOCN_PACKAGE-1; //Adding an operator group ADD UCNOPERGROUP: CnOpGrpIndex=0, CnOpGrpName="ShareCnOpGrp", CnOpNum=TWO, CnOpIndex1=0, CnOpIndex2=1, CnOpIndexComm=5;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


651



//Setting the sharing mode for the operators SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=NO, MOCNSupport=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedIntraRat=NO, InterPlmnHoAllowedInterRat=NO, DefaultCnOp=255, MocnControlSwitch=COMM_MOCN_NRI_GLOBAL_CONFIG_MODE_SWITCH-1&COMM_MIB_MULT I_PLMN_LIST_ALLOWED_SWITCH-1; //Setting parameters for the primary operator SET UOPERATORCFGPARA: CnOpIndex=0, CsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX_MOCN, PsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX_MOCN, CSNRILength=7, PSNRILength=10, NullNRI=0; //Setting parameters for the secondary operator SET UOPERATORCFGPARA: CnOpIndex=1, CsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX_MOCN, PsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX_MOCN, CSNRILength=7, PSNRILength=10, NullNRI=1; //Adding CN node 10 for the primary operator ADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=0, CNId=10, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, Dpx=3, CNProtclVer=R5, SupportCRType=CR529_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=65535, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, RTCPSwitch=OFF, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF; //Adding CN node 20 for the primary operator ADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=0, CNId=20, CNDomainId=PS_DOMAIN, Dpx=3, CNProtclVer=R5, SupportCRType=CR529_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=65535, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, RTCPSwitch=OFF, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF; //Adding CN node 11 for the secondary operator ADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=11, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, Dpx=3, CNProtclVer=R5, SupportCRType=CR529_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=65535, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, RTCPSwitch=OFF, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF; //Adding CN node 21 for the secondary operator ADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=21, CNDomainId=PS_DOMAIN, Dpx=3, CNProtclVer=R5, SupportCRType=CR529_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=65535, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, RTCPSwitch=OFF, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF; //Adding the mapping between CN node 10 and an NRI for the primary operator ADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP: CnOpIndex=0, CNId=10, NRI=10; //Adding the mapping between CN node 20 and an NRI for the primary operator ADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP: CnOpIndex=0, CNId=20, NRI=20; //Adding the mapping between CN node 11 and an NRI for the secondary operator ADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=11, NRI=100; //Adding the mapping between CN node 21 and an NRI for the secondary operator ADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=21, NRI=600; //Adding an MOCN NodeB ADD UNODEB: NodeBName="NodeB1", NodeBId=1, SRN=0, SN=0, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, IPTRANSAPARTIND=SUPPORT, HostType=SINGLEHOST, SharingType=MOCN; //Adding a dedicated NodeB ADD UNODEB: NodeBName="NodeB2", NodeBId=2, SRN=0, SN=0,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


652



TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, IPTRANSAPARTIND=SUPPORT, HostType=SINGLEHOST, SharingType=DEDICATED, CnOpIndex=0; //Adding a location area for the primary operator ADD ULAC:CNOPINDEX=0, LAC=H'7208, PLMNVALTAGMIN=1, PLMNVALTAGMAX=256; //Adding a location area for the secondary operator ADD ULAC:CNOPINDEX=1, LAC=H'7208, PLMNVALTAGMIN=1, PLMNVALTAGMAX=256; //Adding an MOCN cell ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=1, CellName="Cell1", PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=0, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNDownlink=10562, PScrambCode=0, TCell=CHIP256, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00, SpgId=6, URANUM=D8, URA1=1, URA2=2, URA3=3, URA4=4, URA5=5, URA6=6, URA7=7, URA8=8, NodeBName="NodeB1", LoCell=0, SupBmc=FALSE; //Adding a neighboring RNC cell ADD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=RNC1, CellId=1, CellHostType=SINGLE_HOST, CellName="Cell1", CnOpGrpIndex=0, PScrambCode=0, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNUplinkInd=TRUE, UARFCNUplink=9750, UARFCNDownlink=10700, TxDiversityInd=FALSE, LAC=h'2506, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, QqualminInd=FALSE, QrxlevminInd=FALSE, MaxAllowedUlTxPowerInd=FALSE, UseOfHcs=NOT_USED, CellCapContainerFdd=EDCH_SUPPORT-1, EFachSupInd=FALSE;

//Deactivating MOCN Introduction Package //Removing an MOCN cell RMV UCELL: CellId=1; //Adding a cell not enabled with the MOCN feature ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=1, CellName="Cell1", PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=1, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNDownlink=10562, PScrambCode=0, TCell=CHIP256, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00, SpgId=6, URANUM=D8, URA1=1, URA2=2, URA3=3, URA4=4, URA5=5, URA6=6, URA7=7, URA8=8, NodeBName="NodeB1", LoCell=0, SupBmc=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


653



195

Configuring Carrier Sharing by Operators

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02131101 Carrier Sharing by Operators.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-021311 MOCN Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Others – The CN supports the MOCN feature.

Context This feature enables multiple operators to share the same carrier.

Procedure l


l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click NodeB > Add UMTS Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MOCN cell so that multiple operators can share the same carrier. Check whether the MOCN introduction package is effective based on the message traced on the Uu interface. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

654



– If a cell is configured for only one operator, the system information message of the cell does not contain the information element (IE) multiplePLMN-List. – If a cell is configured with multiple operators but is not configured with a common operator, the system information message of the cell contains the PLMN of only the first operator, and the value of the IE multiplePLMN-List is TRUE. – If a cell is configured with multiple operators and a common operator, the system information message of the cell contains the IE multiplePLMN-List, broadcasting all PLMNs of the MOCN cell. As shown in Figure 195-1, the system information message broadcasts PLMN 302580 of the common operator. As shown in Figure 195-2, the field PLMN Identity in the system information message contains the IE multiplePLMN-List. This IE contains the PLMNs (302221 and 302640) of two operators. Figure 195-1 PLMN Identify field in the MIB message

The IE Multiple PLMN List contains the PLMNs (302221 and 302640) of the actual operators.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


655



Figure 195-2 Multiple PLMN List IE in the MIB message

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELL (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click UMTS cell > Delete Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the MOCN cell.

----End

Example //Configuring Carrier Sharing by Operators ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=0, LAC=H'7208, SupBmc=FALSE; //Deactivating Carrier Sharing by Operators RMV UCELL: CellId=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


656



196

Configuring Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02131102 Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature enables operators to independently control a NodeB or cell when the MOCN feature is enabled.

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB (CME single configuration: Main View > Right Click RNC > Create Logical NodeB; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a dedicated NodeB.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click NodeB > Add UMTS Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a dedicated cell.


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Check whether this feature has been activated based on the master information block (MIB) message traced on the Uu interface. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

657



As shown in Figure 196-1, the MIB message of the dedicated cell contains the operator information (302640). Figure 196-1 PLMN Identify IE in the MIB message

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELL (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click UMTS cell > Delete Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the dedicated cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB; CME batch modification center: not supported) to change a dedicated NodeB into a shared NodeB.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click NodeB > Add UMTS Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a shared cell.

----End

Example //Activating Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


658



//Adding a dedicated NodeB ADD UNODEB: NodeBName="1", NodeBId=1, SRN=0, SN=0, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, HostType=SINGLEHOST, SharingType=DEDICATED, CnOpIndex=0; //Adding a dedicated cell ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=1, CellName="1", PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=0, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNDownlink=10562, PScrambCode=0, TCell=CHIP0, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, SpgId=1, URANUM=D1, URA1=0, NodeBName="1", LoCell=1, SupBmc=FALSE; //Deactivating Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators //Removing a dedicated cell RMV UCELL: CellId=1; //Changing a dedicated NodeB into a shared NodeB MOD UNODEB: NodeBId=1, SharingType=MOCN; //Adding a shared cell ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=1, CellName="1", PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=1, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNDownlink=10562, PScrambCode=0, TCell=CHIP0, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, SpgId=1, URANUM=D1, URA1=0, NodeBName="1", LoCell=1, SupBmc=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


659



197

Configuring MOCN Mobility Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02131103 MOCN Mobility Management.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature is applicable to different MOCN mobility strategies. This feature enables the BSC6900 to determine whether to hand over a UE to a target cell based on the ID of the operator to which the UE belongs and the PLMN ID of the target cell. By default, the BSC6900 allows inter-RAT cross-PLMN handovers. You can prohibit this type of handover by running the command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operators Sharing Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported).

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operators Sharing Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set MOCN Support, Intra RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed, and Inter RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed to YES. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

660


l



l

When the cross-PLMN handover switch is turned on, check whether UEs can perform cross-PLMN handovers, relocations, and cell updates. If UEs can perform crossPLMN handovers, relocations, and cell updates, this feature has been activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operators Sharing Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set MOCN Support to YES, Intra RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed to NO, and Inter RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed to NO.

----End

Example //Activating MOCN Mobility Management SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=NO, MOCNSupport=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedIntraRat=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedInterRat=YES; //Deactivating MOCN Mobility Management SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=NO, MOCNSupport=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedIntraRat=NO, InterPlmnHoAllowedInterRat=NO;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


661



198

Configuring MOCN Load Balance

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02131104 MOCN Load Balance.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature enables multiple operators to achieve load balance and network fairness.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operators Sharing Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set MOCN Support to YES. NOTE

In this step, set Default CnOperator to 255. The BSC6900 selects operators in Round Robin mode.

l


l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UOPERATORSHARINGMODE to query the parameter settings of the feature MOCN Load Balance. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

662



Configuration > RNC Operators Sharing Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set MOCN Support to YES and Default CnOperator to 0. The BSC6900 preferentially selects the default operator (operator 0). ----End

Example //Activating MOCN Load Balance SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: MOCNSupport=YES, DefaultCnOp=255; //Deactivating MOCN Load Balance SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: MOCNSupport=YES, DefaultCnOp=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


663



199

Configuring Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02131106 Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The CN supports this feature. During initial registration of a roaming UE, the UE selects the same operator for CS and PS services, and the IMSI is carried to the RNC.

Context When roaming UEs of one operator move to the area served by the RNC that is shared among multiple operators using the Multi-Operator Core Network (MOCN), the RNC routes the UEs to CN nodes that belong to different operators according to the preset ratio if the UEs are under the roaming agreement with these operators.

Procedure l


Assume that operator1 and operator2 share the same RNC by using the MOCN and operator A signs a roaming agreement with the two operators.

1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

To add operator A to the roaming relation list of operator1, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UROAMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

664



Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > UROAM MAP; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set MCC for operator A to 460, MNC to 09, Cn Operator Index for operator1 to 1, Cn Operator Group Index for operator1 to 1, and Capability of Roaming Operator to an appropriate value according to the network plan, such as 30. 2.

To add operator A to the roaming relation list of operator2, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UROAMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > UROAM MAP; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Cn Operator Index for operator2 to 2, Cn Operator Group Index to 1, and Capability of Roaming Operator to an appropriate value according to the network plan, such as 70. NOTE

After the parameter settings are complete, the UEs that belong to operator A are distributed to operator1 and operator2 according to the preset ratio (30:70). If operator B also signs a roaming agreement with operator1 and operator2, the roaming UE distribution ratio for operator B must be set to the same as that for operator A when operator B is added to the roaming relation lists of the two operators.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UROAMMAP to query the roaming capacity of operator A. Expected result: Capability of Roaming Operator for operator1 is set to 30, and Capability of Roaming Operator for operator2 is set to 70.

2.

When UEs belonging to operator A roam to the RNC shared by operator1 and operator2 by using the MOCN for a long measurement period, view the performance counter VS.ROAM.MOCN.NUM on the M2000. Expected result: The roaming UEs of operator A are routed to CN nodes of operator1 and operator2 in a preset proportion of 30:70. NOTE

UEs of the non-supporting UE type do not support network sharing, as defined in the feature WRFD-02131101 Carrier Sharing by Operators. This feature is not applicable to UEs of the supporting UE type (supporting network sharing).

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UROAMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > UROAM MAP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove operator A from the roaming relation list of operator1.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UROAMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > UROAM MAP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove operator A from the roaming relation list of operator2.

----End

Example /*Activating Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion*/ //Adding operator A serving roaming UEs to the roaming relation list of operator1 ADD UROAMMAP: MCC="460", MNC="09", CnOpIndex=1, CnOpGrpIndex = 1,AvailRoamCap =30;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


665



//Adding operator A serving roaming UEs to the roaming relation list of operator2 ADD UROAMMAP: MCC="460", MNC="09", CnOpIndex=2, CnOpGrpIndex = 1,AvailRoamCap =70; /*Deactivating Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion*/ //Removing operator A serving roaming UEs from the roaming relation list of operator1 RMV UROAMMAP: MCC="460", MNC="09", CnOpIndex=1, CnOpGrpIndex = 1; //Removing operator A serving roaming UEs from the roaming relation list of operator2 RMV UROAMMAP: MCC="460", MNC="09", CnOpIndex=2, CnOpGrpIndex = 1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


666



200

Configuring MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140223 MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only the 3900 series base stations configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-021311 MOCN Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context This feature provides a mechanism for predefining the percentage of cell resources available to UEs of each operator involved in the MOCN cell. This feature helps prevent the UEs of an operator from occupying excessive cell resources. If the MOCN cell has idle resources, the UEs of each operator can use more resources than their predefined resource percentage. If the MOCN cell is congested, the RNC performs preemption and congestion control on the operator whose actual resource percentage has exceeded the predefined value. By doing so, the RNC keeps resource usage of each operator in the MOCN cell during busy hours close to their respective predefined resource percentage. You are not advised to use this feature with WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA. That is because enabling DC-HSDPA affects power measurement accuracy. l


l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


667



– Scenario 1: Using cell resources based on the HSDPA power percentages for MOCNenabled operators in a cell Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Iub Private Interface Switch

IubPrivateInterfaceSwitch

PSCRR_OpInde x_INCLUDED and RL_OpIndex_IN CLUDED should be selected.

Network plan

Cell CAC algorithm switch

NBMCacAlgoSwi tch

HSDPA_GBP_M EAS should be selected.

Network plan

Non-HSPA Power Threshold for GBP-based Preemption

NonHPwrForGBP Preemp


Network plan

Cell ID

CellId

This parameter should be set according to the network plan.

Network plan

CN Operator index

CnOpIndex


Network plan

HSDPA Power Availability Percentage

DPAAvaiPwrRati o


Network plan

Demarcation Preemption Switch

DemarcPreemptSwitch

MOCN_DEMAR C_PREEMPT_G BP should be selected.

Network plan

Function Switch1

FuncSwitch1

CELL_MOCN_ DEMARCATIO N_SWITCH should be selected.

Network plan

Resource Allocate Method

RSCALLOCM

Set this parameter to POWERCODE_ BAL.

Network plan

– Scenario 2: Using cell resources based on the R99 SF percentages for MOCN-enabled operators in a cell

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


668



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Cell ID

CellId


Network plan

CN Operator index

CnOpIndex


Network plan

DL R99 SF Availability Percentage

DLAvaiSFRatio


Network plan

Demarcation Preemption Switch

DemarcPreemptSwitch

MOCN_DEMAR C_PREEMPT_S F should be selected.

Network plan

Switch for Cell Load Control

NBMLdcAlgoSwi tch

CELL_CODE_L DR should be selected.

Network plan

R99 SC LDR User Selection

NbmSFLdcUeSel Switch

NBM_SF_LDC_ DEMARC should be selected.

Network plan

Function Switch1

FuncSwitch1

CELL_MOCN_ DEMARCATIO N_SWITCH should be selected.

Network plan

Resource Allocate Method

RSCALLOCM

Set this parameter to POWERCODE_ BAL.

Network plan

Procedure l

Activation Procedure Configuration on the RNC side – Using cell resources based on the HSDPA power percentages for MOCN-enabled operators in a cell 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select PSCRR_OpIndex_INCLUDED (Switch for carrying operator indexes in the PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION REQUEST Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

669



message) under Iub Private Interface Switch to enable the Physical Shared Channel Reconfiguration Request message to carry the operator index. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select RL_OpIndex_INCLUDED (Switch for carrying operator indexes in the RADIO LINK message) under Iub Private Interface Switch to enable the Radio Link Setup Request message to carry the operator index.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select HSDPA_GBP_MEAS(HSDPA GBP Meas Algorithm) under Cell CAC algorithm switch to enable the HSDPA GBP test.

4.

Optional: If a neighboring RNC exists, Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, select PLMNID_INCLUDED (Switch for Carrying PLMN ID) under Iur Private Interface Switch to turn on the Iur-interface proprietary IE switch with PLMN ID included.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Non-HSPA Power Threshold for GBP-based Preemption to according to the network plan.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLMOCNDPAPOWERDEMAR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell-Oriented Operator HSDPA Power Availability Percentage Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell Index, Cn Operator Index, and HSDPA Power Availability Percentage to configure the HSDPA power percentage for an operator of an operator group in a cell.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select MOCN_DEMARC_PREEMPT_GBP under Demarcation Preemption Switch to enable preemption based on HSDPA power percentages of operators in a cell.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLLICENSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell License Resource/Function Item; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CELL_MOCN_DEMARCATION_SWITCH(Cell MOCN Demarcation Switch) under Function Switch1 to activate the license for MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation for operators in a cell.

– Using cell resources based on the R99 SF percentages for MOCN-enabled operators in a cell Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


670



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLMOCNSFDEMAR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell-Oriented Operator DL R99 SF Availability Percentage Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell Index, Cn Operator Index, and DL R99 SC Availability Percentage.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select MOCN_DEMARC_PREEMPT_SF under Demarcation Preemption Switch to enable preemption based on R99 SF percentages of operators in a cell.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm) under Switch for Cell Load Control to enable the cell-level code LDR algorithm.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select NBM_SF_LDC_DEMARC (Select UEs of Operator R99 SC Exceeding Largest Amount) under R99 SC LDR User Selection to enable the cell-level congestion control function based on R99 SF percentages. By doing so, the UEs of the operator whose actual R99 SF percentage has exceeded the predefined value can be preempted.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLLICENSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell License Resource/Function Item; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CELL_MOCN_DEMARCATION_SWITCH(Cell MOCN Demarcation Switch) under Function Switch1 to activate the license for MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation for operators in a cell.

Configuration on the NodeB side 1.

l

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches).In this step, set Resource Allocate Method to POWERCODE_BAL(Balance between Code and Power).

Verification Procedure – Using cell resources based on the HSDPA power percentages for MOCN-enabled operators in a cell 1.

Start the Iub-interface message tracing task. Check whether the NBAP_PHY_SHARED_CH_RECFG_REQ message carries the mOCNOperator-Hsdpa-Operator-Index-private IE and the mOCN-Operator-Hsdpa-PwrRatio-private IE. If yes, the feature based on the HSDPA power percentage has been activated.

– Using cell resources based on the R99 SF percentages for MOCN-enabled operators in a cell Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


671



1.

l

View the following counters of operators on the M2000: VS.RAB.SFOccupy.MAX.SharedOperator0, VS.RAB.SFOccupy.SharedOperator0, VS.RAB.SFOccupy.MAX.SharedOperator1, VS.RAB.SFOccupy.SharedOperator1, VS.RAB.SFOccupy.MAX.SharedOperator2, VS.RAB.SFOccupy.SharedOperator2, VS.RAB.SFOccupy.MAX.SharedOperator3, VS.RAB.SFOccupy.SharedOperator3, VS.HSDPAPwrRatio.SharedOperator0, VS.HSDPAPwrRatio.SharedOperator1, VS.HSDPAPwrRatio.SharedOperator2, VS.HSDPAPwrRatio.SharedOperator3. If any value of these counters is not 0, the feature based on the R99 SF percentage has been activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLLICENSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell License Resource/Function Item; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear CELL_MOCN_DEMARCATION_SWITCH(Cell MOCN Demarcation Switch) under Function Switch1 to deactivate the license for MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation for operators in a cell.

----End

Example //Activating MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation Configuration on the RNC side Using cell resources based on the HSDPA power percentages for MOCN-enabled operators in a cell SET URRCTRLSWITCH: IubPrivateInterfaceSwitch=PSCRR_OpIndex_INCLUDED-1; SET URRCTRLSWITCH: IubPrivateInterfaceSwitch=RL_OpIndex_INCLUDED-1; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=0, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_GBP_MEAS-1; MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, IurPrivateInterfaceSwitch=PLMNID_INCLUDED-1; MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=1, NonHPwrForGBPPreemp=40; ADD UCELLMOCNDPAPOWERDEMAR: CellId=1, CnOpIndex=0, DPAAvaiPwrRatio=10; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, DemarcPreemptSwitch=MOCN_DEMARC_PREEMPT_GBP-1; ADD UCELLLICENSE: CellId=1, FuncSwitch1=CELL_MOCN_DEMARCATION_SWITCH-1; Using cell resources based on the R99 SF percentages for MOCN-enabled operators in a cell ADD UCELLMOCNSFDEMAR: CellId=1, CnOpIndex=0, DLAvaiSFRatio=10; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, DemarcPreemptSwitch=MOCN_DEMARC_PREEMPT_SF-1; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=CELL_CODE_LDR-1; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NbmSFLdcUeSelSwitch=NBM_SF_LDC_DEMARC; ADD UCELLLICENSE: CellId=1, FuncSwitch1=CELL_MOCN_DEMARCATION_SWITCH-1; Configuration on the NodeB side SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0, RSCALLOCM=POWERCODE_BAL; //Deactivating MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation MOD UCELLLICENSE: FuncSwitch1=CELL_MOCN_DEMARCATION_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


672



201

Configuring HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure).

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context Based on speed estimation, the BSC6900 hands over fast-moving UEs to low-priority cells to reduce the number of handovers, and hands over slow-moving UEs to high-priority cells to increase network capacity.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HoSwitch to the following parameter value. – HO_ALGO_HCS_SPEED_EST_SWITCH – HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH – HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


673



– HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH – HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH In this step, set ReservedSwitch0 to RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT5. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHCS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HCS Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Use of HCS to USED.

3.

Set the HCS parameters for different types of neighboring cells as follows: – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Intrafrequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an intra-frequency neighboring cell and set the HCS parameters. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Interfrequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an inter-frequency neighboring cell and set the HCS parameters. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > GSM Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an interRAT GSM neighboring cell and set the HCS parameters.

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

4.

For the cells whose HCS parameters have been set, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHCSHO (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented HCS Handover Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set SpdEstSwitch to ON.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UHCSHO (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented HCS HO Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the RNClevel HCS parameters according to network plan.


If the moving speed of a UE is higher than the fast-moving handover threshold (the number of 1D events reported by the UE in the specified period reaches the preset number), an inter-frequency or inter-RAT HCS handover is triggered.

2.

If the moving speed of a UE is lower than the slow-moving handover threshold (the number of 1D events reported by the UE in the specified period is smaller than the slow-moving handover threshold), slow-moving HCS handover measurement is triggered, and a slow-moving inter-frequency or inter-RAT HCS handover is performed.

3.

If a measurement-based inter-frequency or inter-RAT handover is triggered, check whether compressed mode is started by using a RRC_PH_CH_RECFG message on the Uu interface on the BSC6900 LMT. If compressed mode is started, this feature is activated.

4.

If an inter-frequency blind handover is triggered, check whether the handover is triggered by using a RRC_PH_CH_RECFG message on the Uu interface on the BSC6900 LMT. If the handover is triggered by using the message, this feature is activated. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

674



5.

l

If an inter-RAT blind handover is triggered, check whether 3G-to-2G handovers are performed on the Uu and Iu interfaces on the BSC6900 LMT. If 3G-to-2G handovers are performed, this feature is activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect HO_ALGO_HCS_SPEED_EST_SWITCH from the HoSwitch parameter.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHCS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HCS Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Use of HCS to NOT_USED.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHCSHO (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented HCS Handover Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set SpdEstSwitch to OFF.

----End

Example /*Activating HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure).*/ //Set HandOver Switch SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_HCS_SPEED_EST_SWITCH-1&HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1&HO _INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_CS _OUT_SWITCH-1, ReservedSwitch0=RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT5-0; //Set HCS cell to Use of HCS ADD UCELLHCS: CellId=11, UseOfHcs=USED; //Add an intra-frequency neighboring cell ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=11, NCellRncId=9, NCellId=100, SIB11Ind=TRUE, IdleQoffset1sn=0, IdleQoffset2sn=0, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE; //Add an inter-frequency neighboring cell ADD UINTERFREQNCELL:RncId=1, CellId=11, NCellRncId=9, NCellId=100, CIOOffset=0, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, HOCovPrio=1, BlindHOFlag=FALSE, NPrioFlag=FALSE; //Add a GSM inter-RAT neighboring cell ADD U2GNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=11, GSMCellIndex=0, CIOOffset=0, Qoffset1sn=0, Qrxlevmin=-50, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, TempOffset1=D3, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, BlindHOPrio=30, NPrioFlag=FALSE; //Set Algorithm Switch for UE Speed Estimation ADD UCELLHCSHO: CellId=11, SpdEstSwitch=ON; //Deactivating HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure). SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_HCS_SPEED_EST_SWITCH-0; MOD UCELLHCS: CellId=11, UseOfHcs=NOT_USED; MOD UCELLHCSHO: CellId=11, SpdEstSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


675



202

Configuring One Tunnel

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020111 One Tunnel.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The SGSN, GGSN and S-GW need to support the feature One Tunnel. – The control plane of the Iu-PS interface has been configured. For details in IP pool networking, see Configuring the Control Plane of the Iu-PS Interface (over IP), For details in IP path networking, see Configuring the Control Plane of the Iu-PS Interface (over Transmission Resource Pool).

Context The feature One Tunnel is available between the RNC and the GGSN and between the RNC and the S-GW. This feature improves the efficiency of processing PS traffic and prevents the capabilities of the SGSN from becoming the bottleneck under heavy PS traffic. The network plan specifies which tunnel to be configured.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


676



Figure 202-1 Networking diagram

NOTE

l In IP pool networking, you do not need to activate or deactivate this feature. Related configurations are included in initial configuration. IP pool networking does not consider whether the peer NE is the SGSN, GGSN, or S-GW. Instead, only an Iu-PS adjacent node needs to be configured. This operation is mandatory in the section that describes how to configure user-plane data over the Iu-PS interface in BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration Guide. For details, see Configuring the User Plane of the Iu-PS Interface (over Transmission Resource Pool). l In IP path networking, this feature needs to be configured. This section describes about how to activate and deactivate this feature.

l

Precautions – You are advised to configure this feature during off-peak hours because configuring this feature involves transmission mode reconfiguration which interrupts services.

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Data Preparation Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Adjacent Node Type

NODET

Set this parameter to IUPS.

Network plan

Transport Type

TRANST

Set this parameter to IP.

Network plan

SGSN FLAG

SGSNFLG

Set this parameter to NO(GGSN or SGW).

Network plan


677



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Peer IP address

PEERIPADDR

Set this parameter to GGSN IP address or S-GW IP address, and this parameter should not be the same as the local address.

Network plan

Procedure l


Run the MML command ADD ADJNODE (CME single configuration: IUPS Configuration Express > IP Transport > Adjacent Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add basic information about the adjacent nodes. In this step, set parameters as follows: – Set Adjacent Node Type to IUPS so that the node type is set to Iu PS. – Set Transport Type to IP so that the transport type is IP. – Set SGSN FLAG to NO. Depending on the configured adjacent node, set the parameter to GGSN or S-GW.

2.

Run the MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: IUPS Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP path. In this step, set the PEERIPADDR parameter to the IP address of the GGSN or S-GW.

3.

Optional: If layer 3 networking is deployed between the BSC6900 and the peer node, run the MML command ADD IPRT (CME single configuration: IUPS Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP path. NOTE

l On the SGSN, GGSN, or S-GW side, you can run associated commands to check whether the feature One Tunnel is supported.

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

On the BSC6900 LMT, start signaling tracing over the Iu interface. For details, see Tracing Messages on the Iu Interface.


678



Figure 202-2 Setting Iu interface tracing

2.

Use a UE to start a PS service.

3.

In the Iu interface tracing data, check the information element transportLayerAddress in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message. Figure 202-3 Iu interface tracing

4.

If the value of the information element transportLayerAddress is the IP address configured for the GGSN or S-GW during transmission resources configuration, this feature has been activated.

Figure 202-4 IP address configured for the GGSN or S-GW

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


679


l



Run the MML command RMV ADJNODE (CME single configuration: IUPS Configuration Express > IP Transport > Adjacent Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the corresponding adjacent node.

----End

Example //Activation procedure: //Adding an adjacent node ADD ADJNODE: ANI=0, NAME="S-GW NAME", NODET=IUPS, TRANST=IP, ISIPPOOL=NO, SGSNFLG=NO; /Adding an IP path for the adjacent node ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=1, ITFT=IUPS, PATHT=BE, IPADDR="80.1.1.1", PEERIPADDR="10.161.0.1", PEERMASK="255.255.255.0", TXBW=1000, RXBW=1000; //Adding a layer 3 route to this adjacent node ADD IPRT: SRN=0, SN=14, DSTIP="10.161.0.1", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", NEXTHOP="80.1.1.10", PRIORITY=HIGH, REMARK="TO S-GW ROUTE"; //Deactivation procedure: RMV ADJNODE: ANI=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


680



203

Configuring Overbooking on ATM Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050405 Overbooking on ATM Transmission.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The backpressure and VP shaping mechanism depends on the ATM interface board on RNC like AOUa/UOIa/AEUa/AOUc/UOIc. – The BTS3902E cannot support this feature.

l


l


Context This feature improves the resource usage and provides a method for greatly saving OPEX on ATM transmission, especially on Iub interface, when deploying HSDPA services. Other strategies applied in overbooking are as follows: l

RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion control

l

Backpressure-based downlink congestion control

l

VP shaping

l


Procedure – Activating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion control Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


681



batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the flow control switch. – For R99 BE services, select DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH in Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. – For HSDPA BE services, select DRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH in Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. – Activating backpressure-based downlink congestion control 1.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PORTFLOWCTRLPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Port Flow Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Port protocol type to ATM and set other flow control parameters.

2.

Turn on the flow control switch of physical port based on your configuration. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMAGRP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > IMA Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flow control switch to ON. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNILNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > UNI Link; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flow control switch to ON. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD FRALNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Fractional ATM Link; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step: – Set Fractional link type to FRAATM. – Set Flow control switch to ON.

3.

Optional: When the logical port is configured, Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMLOGICPORT (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Logical Port; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step: – Set Type of the logic port to Leaf. – Set Flow control switch to ON.

– Activating VP shaping

l

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMLOGICPORT (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Logical Port; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Type of the logic port to Leaf and Flow control switch to ON.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a logical port. In this step, set Bearing type to ATMLOGICPORT.

Verification Procedure Take RNC configured with the AOU interface board as an example to describe how to verify backpressure-based flow control.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


682


l


1.

On the BSC6900 LMT, start downlink traffic and bandwidth tracing tasks on the Uu, Iub, and Iu interfaces.

2.

Register an R99 user UE1 in the HLR. Enable UE1 with streaming services and with both highest uplink rate and highest downlink rate of 384 kbit/s.

3.

Register an HSDPA user UE2 in the HLR. Enable UE2 with background services and with highest uplink rate of 384 kbit/s and highest downlink rate of 1450 kbit/s.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP to map R99 services to the highpriority queue and HSDPA services to the low-priority queue.

5.

All AAL2 paths of the RNC are carried on an IMA port (IMA port is configured to 1Mbit/s). Enable the port flow control when adding the IMA port.

6.

Enable UE1 and UE2 to stay in idle mode and camp on the test cell. The test cell must support HSDPA services.

7.

Use UE1 to perform PS streaming services, that is, use UE1 to download files from the FTP server. Expected result: The IMA port is not congested and UE1 downloads data at the highest rate.

8.

Use UE2 to perform PS BE services, that is, use UE2 to download files from the FTP server. Expected result: The IMA port is congested and the backpressure function is triggered. The downloading rate of UE2 decreases and that of UE1 remains unchanged. This is because R99 services have a higher priority.

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion control Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn off the flow control switch. – For R99 BE services, deselect DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH in Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. – For HSDPA BE services, deselect DRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH in Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. – Deactivating backpressure-based downlink congestion control

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IMAGRP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > IMA Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flow control switch to OFF.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNILNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > UNI Link; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flow control switch to OFF.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD FRALNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Fractional ATM Link; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flow control switch to OFF.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ATMLOGICPORT (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

683



> ATM Logical Port; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flow control switch to OFF. ----End

Example //Activating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH-1&DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWIT CH-1; //Activating backpressure-based downlink congestion control ADD PORTFLOWCTRLPARA: FCINDEX=10, PORTPROTYPE=ATM; MOD IMAGRP: SRN=1, SN=14, BT=AOUc, IMAGRPN=1, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, FCINDEX=100; ADD UNILNK: SRN=1, SN=14, UNILNKN=1, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, OPSEPFLAG=OFF; ADD FRALNK: SRN=1, SN=14, FRALNKN=12, E1T1PN=0, TSBITMAP=TS1-1, FRALNKT=FRAATM, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, OPSEPFLAG=OFF; ADD ATMLOGICPORT: SRN=1, SN=14, LPNTYPE=Leaf, BT=AOUc, LPN=0, CARRYT=ATMLOGICPORT, UPPERVP=0, TXBW=512, RXBW=512, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON; //Activating VP shaping ADD ATMLOGICPORT: SRN=1, SN=14, LPNTYPE=Leaf, BT=AOUc, LPN=0, CARRYT=ATMLOGICPORT, UPPERVP=0, TXBW=512, RXBW=512, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON; ADD AAL2PATH: ANI=0, PATHID=1, CARRYT=ATMLOGICPORT, CARRYF=0, CARRYSN=0, CARRYVPN=0, VPI=0, VCI=200, TXTRFX=150, RXTRFX=150, AAL2PATHT=HSPA; //Deactivating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH-0&DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWIT CH-0; //Deactivating backpressure-based downlink congestion control MOD IMAGRP: SRN=1, SN=14, BT=AOUc, IMAGRPN=1, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF, FCINDEX=100; MOD UNILNK: SRN=1, SN=14, UNILNKN=1, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF, OPSEPFLAG=OFF; MOD FRALNK: SRN=1, SN=14, FRALNKN=12, E1T1PN=0, TSBITMAP=TS1-1, FRALNKT=FRAATM, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF, OPSEPFLAG=OFF; MOD ATMLOGICPORT: SRN=1, SN=14, LPNTYPE=Leaf, BT=AOUc, LPN=0, CARRYT=IMA, CARRYIMAGRPN=1, TXBW=512, RXBW=512, RSCMNGMODE=SHARE, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


684


204 Configuring ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB

204

Configuring ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050105 ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3902E cannot support this feature.

l


l


Context This feature enables NodeB to provide the transmission convergence function in ATM mode. Thus, the convergence gain is achieved and the transmission line cost is reduced.

Procedure l


l


l

Run the NodeB MML command ADD TREELNKPVC (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > NetWork > TreeLink PVC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a tree link PVC. Run the NodeB MML command LST TREELNKPVC to query the tree link PVC.


Run the NodeB MML command RMV TREELNKPVC (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > NetWork > TreeLink PVC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the tree link PVC.

----End Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


685


204 Configuring ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB

Example l

NodeB V200R014 //Activation procedure ADD TREELNKPVC: NO=1, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VST=VC_SWITCH, SRCSRN=0, SRCSN=7, SRCSBT=BASE_BOARD, SRCPT=IMA, SRCPN=0, SRCVPI=7, SRCVCI=33, DSTSRN=0, DSTSN=5, DSTSBT=E1_COVERBOARD, DSTPT=IMA, DSTPN=1, DSTVPI=8, DSTVCI=33, RU=kbps, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1000, SCR=800; //Verification procedure LST TREELNKPVC:; //Deactivation procedure RMV TREELNKPVC: NO=1;

l

NodeB V100R014 //Activation procedure ADD TREELNKPVC: NO=1, VST=VC_SWITCH, SRCSRN=0, SRCSN=15, SRCSBT=BASE_BOARD, SRCPT=IMA, SRCPN=0, SRCVPI=7, SRCVCI=33, DSTSRN=0, DSTSN=12, DSTSBT=E1_COVERBOARD, DSTPT=IMA, DSTPN=1, DSTVPI=8, DSTVCI=33, RU=KBPS, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1000, SCR=800; //Verification procedure LST TREELNKPVC:; //Deactivation procedure RMV TREELNKPVC: NO=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


686


205 Configuring AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB

205

Configuring AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050106 AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – DBS 3800 does not support this feature. – BTS 3902E does not support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-050105 ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB must be configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context This feature enables Huawei NodeB to provide the AAL2 transmission convergence function in ATM mode. Thus, the convergence gain is achieved and the transmission line cost is reduced.

Procedure l

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2NODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > ALCAP > AAL2 Node; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add an AAL2 node. In this step, set Node Type to HUB(Switching Node).

2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2ADJNODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > ALCAP > AAL2 Adjacent Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an AAL2 adjacent node to the lower-level NodeB.


687


l

205 Configuring AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB

1.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP AAL2NODE to query the configuration of the AAL2 node.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP AAL2ADJNODE to query the configuration of the AAL2 adjacent node.


Run the NodeB MML command RMV AAL2ADJNODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > ALCAP > AAL2 Adjacent Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the AAL2 adjacent node.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV AAL2NODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > ALCAP > AAL2 Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an AAL2 node. In this step, set Node Type to HUB(Switching Node). NOTE

There is a relation between the AAL2 adjacent node and the AAL2 node. Therefore, you need to remove the AAL2 adjacent nodes first and then remove the AAL2 node. Note that the AAL2 node can be removed only after all the AAL2 adjacent nodes are removed. Otherwise, the command execution fails.

----End

Example //Activation procedure ADD AAL2NODE: NT=HUB, LN=1; ADD AAL2ADJNODE: ANI=1, ADDR="H'3912323232323232333333333333333333333333", LN=2; //Verification procedure DSP AAL2NODE:; DSP AAL2ADJNODE:; //Deactivation procedure RMV AAL2ADJNODE: ANI=1; RMV AAL2NODE: NT=HUB;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


688



206

Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – To use the IP header compression function on the Iub interface, the PEUa or POUa board is required. – Only the Dopra Linux OS supports the built-in firewall function for O&M. – Only the FG2c and GOUc boards of the BSC6900 support the built-in firewall function for interfaces. – Only the FG2a, GOUa, FG2c and GOUc boards of the BSC6900 support Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD). – Dependencies on base stations: – NUTI board is needed with BTS3812E/AE to support this feature. – Only the 3900 series NodeB supports inter-board ML-PPP.

l


l


Context This feature provides a new lub transmission solution for operators. Compared with ATM transmission, IP transmission reduces the transmission costs of HSDPA and HSUPA services. This feature enhances Iub transmission by introducing the following functions: BFD-based IP fault detection, built-in firewall on the RNC side, and built-in firewall on the NodeB side. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


689


l


If BFD-based IP fault detection is enabled, the BSC6900 triggers a port switchover, board switchover, or IP rerouting when detecting that the gateway or the peer entity becomes faulty. BFD can be classified into multi-hop BFD and single-hop BFD: – In multi-hop BFD, the IP addresses of the local and peer ports must be on different network segments. – In single-hop BFD, the IP addresses of the local and peer ports must be on the same network segment.

l

The built-in firewall on the RNC side safeguards IP Ethernet ports on interface boards and O&M ports against network attacks.

l

The built-in firewall on the NodeB side safeguards the Iub interface against network attacks during IP transmission.

l


Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ETHPORT to set the attributes of an Ethernet port. In this step, takes the FG2c board as an example.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHIP to add an IP address to the Ethernet port.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command STR IPCHK to configure the BFD check. In this step, set Check type to SBFD.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET IPGUARD to configure the built-in firewall function for an interface board. In this step, set Board type. to FG2c and ARP Learning Strict Switch to ON. NOTE

The FG2c and GOUc boards support both the invalid packet detection function and the ARP learning strict function. The FG2a and GOUa boards support only the ARP learning strict function.

5.

(Optional) Activate the built-in firewall function for O&M (only the Dopra Linux OS supports the built-in firewall function) by performing the following operations: Log in to the OMU through LMT locally or through Putty remotely. Run the Dopra Linux command iptables -A INPUT -s restricted IP -i Ethernet adapter -p transport protocol --dport restricted port -j DROP. Here, restricted IP refers to the IP address that needs to be prohibited or allowed, and it can be a single IP address or a network segment; Ethernet adapter is the name of the OMU external Ethernet adapter; transport protocol can be TCP or UDP; restricted port is the port to be prohibited. If -p transport protocol and --dport restricted port are not specified, all ports are disabled.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK to configure head compress for a PPP link. In this step, set Head compress to UDP/IP_HC(UDP/IP_HC). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP to configure head compress for a PPP link group. In this step, set Head compress to UDP/IP_HC(UDP/IP_HC). NOTE

Head compress must be configured on peer equipment.

7.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD PPPLNK to enable head compress for a PPP link. Run the NodeB MML command ADD MPGRP to enable head compress for a PPP link group.

8.

Activating the built-in firewall function on the NodeB. a.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command ADD ACL to add an access control list (ACL). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

690



b.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD ACLRULE to add a rule to the ACL. NOTE

Before adding a rule to an ACL, ensure that the ACL has already existed.

c. 9.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD PACKETFILTER to bind an ACL to a port so that packets received at the port are filtered by the ACL.

Optional: Activating layer 2 ACL packet filter. a.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD ACL to add an access control list (ACL).

b.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD ACLRULE to add a rule to the ACL. NOTE

The ACL used in layer 2 packet filter is an extended ACL. According to the ACL specifications, the ID of an extended ACL ranges from 4000 to 4999. Therefore, the ACL ID configured in layer 2 ACL packet filter must also range from 4000 to 4999.

c.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD PACKETFILTER to bind an ACL to a port so that packets received at the port are filtered by the ACL.

10. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command ADD FLOODDEFEND to activate flood attack prevention. 11. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command SET IPGUARD to activate ARP spoofing prevention. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHPORT to query the attributes of an Ethernet port.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ETHIP to query the IP address of the Ethernet port.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHK to query whether the Check state is UP.

4.

Start BFD-based IP fault detection. If a BFD fails, an alarm ALM-21346 IP Connectivity Check Failure is reported.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST IPGUARD to check whether the value of ARP Learning Strict Switch is ON.

6.

Built response messages to ARP requests and sent to interface boards. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ARP to query the ARP table of interface boards. If the information of interface boards in ARP table do not update, the ARP Learning Strict Switch is valid.

7.

If any invalid packet exists, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP INVALIDPKTINFO to query the detailed information.

8.

(Optional) Log in to the computer whose IP address is prohibited and check whether the prohibited services can be performed. Run the Dopra Linux command iptables L. All the filtering rules on the OMU will be listed, and check whether new rules are added successfully. – If port 80 is disabled, logging in to the BSC6900 LMT is prohibited. Check whether you can log in to the BSC6900 LMT on the PC whose port 80 is disabled. – If port 22 is disabled, the OMU cannot be logged in to remotely. Check whether you can log in to the BSC6900 OMU through Putty on the PC whose port 22 is disabled.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


691



– If port 21 is disabled, FTP services of the OMU cannot be used. Check whether you can connect to the FTP server of the BSC6900 OMU through an FTP client on the PC whose port 21 is disabled. 9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK or DSP MPGRP to query whether the Code compress type is UDP/IP_HC.

10. Run the NodeB MML command DSP PPPLNK or DSP MPGRP to check whether the compress state is enable. 11. Run the NodeB MML command LST ACL to check whether an ACL has been configured. 12. Run the NodeB MML command LST ACLRULE to check whether a rule has been added to the ACL. 13. Run the NodeB MML command DSP PACKETFILTER to check whether a port is bound to the ACL. 14. Run the NodeB MML command PING to use IP addresses that are not listed in the ACL to ping the port supporting the packet filtering function. If no response is received, the built-in firewall on the NodeB side has been activated. 15. Optional: To check whether layer 2 ACL packet filter has been activated, Run the NodeB MML command DSP PACKETFILTER to query the junk packets that have been filtered out. 16. Optional: To check whether flood attack prevention has been activated, Run the NodeB MML command DSP FLOODDEFEND to query the discarded attack packets. 17. Optional: To check whether malformed packet attack prevention and ARP spoofing prevention have been activated, Run the NodeB MML command DSP INVALIDPKTINFO to query the discarded attack packets. l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command STP IPCHK to stop the BFD.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET IPGUARD. In this step, set Board type to FG2c and ARP Learning Strict Switch to OFF.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ETHIP to remove an IP address from the Ethernet port.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ETHPORT. In this step, set Port type to FE.

5.

(Optional) Log in to the OMU through the LMT locally or through Putty remotely. Run the Dopra Linux command iptables -D INPUT -s restricted IP -i Ethernet adapter -p transport protocol --dport restricted port -j DROP. Here, restricted IP is the IP address that needs to be prohibited or allowed, and it can be a single IP address or a network segment; Ethernet adapter is the name of the OMU external Ethernet adapter; transport protocol can be TCP or UDP; restricted port is the port to be prohibited, and it is used together with the transport protocol. If -p transport protocol and --dport restricted port are not specified, all ports are disabled.

6.

(Optional) Run the Dopra Linux command iptables -L. All the filtering rules on the OMU will be listed, and check whether new rules are removed successfully.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD PPPLNK or MOD MPGRP. In this step, set Head compress to No_HC.

8.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV PPPLNK to remove a PPP link. Run the NodeB MML command RMV MPGRP to remove a PPP link group. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

692



9.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV PACKETFILTER to remove the binding relationship between the port and the ACL.

10. Run the NodeB MML command RMV ACLRULE to remove all the rules from the ACL. 11. Run the NodeB MML command RMV ACL to remove the ACL. 12. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command RMV PACKETFILTER to deactivate layer 2 ACL packet filter for a port. 13. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command RMV FLOODDEFEND to deactivate flood attack prevention. 14. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command SET IPGUARD with ARP Spoofing Check Switch and ARP Learning Strict Switch set to DISABLE(Disable) to deactivate ARP spoofing prevention. ----End

Example //Configuring the attributes of an Ethernet port and adding an IP address to the port SET ETHPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, PTYPE=GE, SPEED=AUTO; ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="10.171.35.123", MASK="255.255.255.0"; //Activating BFD-based IP fault detection on an interface board STR IPCHK: SRN=0, SN=14, CHKTYPE=SBFD, CARRYT=ETHPORT, PN=0, PEERIP="10.171.35.126"; //Activating the built-in firewall function on an RNC interface board SET IPGUARD: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, ARPLRNSTRICTSW=ON; //Activating the built-in firewall function for O&M on the RNC //For example, only the IP addresses on the 10.141.148.0 network segment is allowed to access the LMT iptables -A INPUT -s ! 10.141.148.0/255.255.255.0 -i bond1 -p tcp --dport 80 -j DROP //Activating IP head compress for a PPP link ADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=0, TSBITMAP=TS1-1, BORROWDEVIP=NO, LOCALIP="5.5.5.5", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="5.5.5.6", IPHC=UDP/IP_HC, PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF, OPSEPFLAG=OFF; //Activating IP head compress for a PPP link group ADD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, MPGRPN=0, MPTYPE=MCPPP, BORROWDEVIP=NO, LOCALIP="5.5.5.5", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="5.5.5.6", MHF=LONG, PPPMUX=Disable, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, ERRDETECTSW=OFF, ANTIERRFLAG=OFF, OPSEPFLAG=OFF; //Activating IP head compress for a PPP link on NodeB ADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=E1_COVERBOARD, AUTH=NONAUTH, TSN=TS1-1, IPHC=ENABLE; //Activating IP head compress for a PPP link group on NodeB ADD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=E1_COVERBOARD, AUTH=NONAUTH, IPHC=ENABLE; //Activating the built-in firewall function on the NodeB ADD ACL: ACLID=3000, ACLDESC="ACL_TEST"; ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1, PT=IP, SIP="192.168.1.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="10.10.1.101", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; ADD PACKETFILTER: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=0, ACLID=3000; //(Optional)Activating layer 2 ACL packet filter ADD ACL: ACLID=4000, ACLDESC="Acl Group is created"; ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=4000, VLANIDOP=OP_RANGE, VLANID1=100, VLANID2=105; ADD PACKETFILTER: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=0, FM=L2_ACL, ACLID2=4000; //(Optional)Activating flood attack prevention

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


693



ADD FLOODDEFEND: FLDTYPE=ARP, DFDSW=ENABLE, DFDTHD=512, ALMSW=ENABLE, ALMTHD=256; //(Optional)Activating ARP spoofing prevention SET IPGUARD: ARPSPOOFCHKSW=ENABLE, ARPSPOOFALMTHD=120, ARPLRNSTRICTSW=ENABLE; //Querying the attributes and IP address of an Ethernet port DSP ETHPORT: SRN=0, SN=14; LST ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0; //Verifying BFD-based IP fault detection DSP IPCHK: SRN=0, SN=14; //Verifying the built-in firewall function on an RNC interface board LST IPGUARD: SRN=0, SN=14; DSP ARP: SRN=0, SN=14; DSP INVALIDPKTINFO: SRN=0, SN=14; //Verifying IP head compress for a PPP link DSP PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=14, PPPLNKN=0; //Verifying IP head compress for a PPP link group DSP MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=14, MPGRPN=0; //Verifying IP head compress for a PPP link on NodeB DSP PPPLNK:; //Verifying IP head compress for a PPP link group DSP MPGRP:; //Verifying the built-in firewall function on the NodeB LST ACL: ACLID=3000; LST ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1; DSP PACKETFILTER:; PING: SN=7, SRCIP="192.168.1.1", DSTIP="192.168.2.2", CONTPING=DISABLE, APPTIF=YES, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=0; //(Optional) Verifying layer 2 ACL packet filter DSP PACKETFILTER:; //(Optional) Verifying flood attack prevention DSP FLOODDEFEND: FLDTYPE=ICMP; //(Optional) Verifying ARP apoofing prevention DSP INVALIDPKTINFO:; //Deactivating BFD-based IP fault detection STP IPCHK: SRN=0, SN=14, CHKN=0; //Deactivating the built-in firewall function on an RNC interface board SET IPGUARD: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, ARPLRNSTRICTSW=OFF; //Removing an IP address from an Ethernet port and modifying the attributes of the Ethernet port RMV ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=0; SET ETHPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, PTYPE=FE, PN=0; //Deactivating the built-in firewall function for O&M iptables -D INPUT -s ! 10.141.148.0/255.255.255.0 -i bond1 -p tcp --dport 80 -j DROP //Deactivating IP head compress for a PPP link MOD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC=No_HC; //Deactivating IP head compress for a PPP link group MOD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, MPGRPN=0, IPHC=No_HC; //Deactivating IP head compress for a PPP link on NodeB RMV PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=E1_COVERBOARD; //Deactivating IP head compress for a PPP link group on NodeB RMV MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=E1_COVERBOARD; //Deactivating the built-in firewall function on the NodeB RMV PACKETFILTER: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=0; RMV ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1; RMV ACL: ACLID=3000; //(Optional) Deactivating layer 2 ACL packet filter RMV PACKETFILTER: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=0, FM=L2_ACL; //(Optional) Deactivating flood attack prevention

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


694



RMV FLOODDEFEND: FLDTYPE=ARP; //(Optional) Deactivating ARP apoofing prevention SET IPGUARD: ARPSPOOFCHKSW=DISABLE, ARPLRNSTRICTSW=DISABLE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


695



207

Configuring Hybrid Iub IP Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050403 Hybrid Iub IP Transmission.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface.

l


l

Others – The RNC and NodeB support IP transmission. – The control-plane data and physical device data of the IP-based Iub interface is configured.

Context In hybrid IP transmission, real-time services and non-real-time services are transmitted on discrete paths to meet different requirements of services in the UMTS system. Two types of hybrid transmission are available: FE+E1/T1 and FE+FE.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB (CME single configuration: Main View > Right Click RNC > Create Logical NodeB; CME batch modification Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

696



center: not supported) to add a NodeB. In this step, set IUB Trans Bearer Type to HYBRID_IP_TRANS. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > Adjacent Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an adjacent node. In this step, set the parameter Adjacent Node Type to IUB and the parameter Transport Type to HYBIRD_IP.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP path. In this step, set the parameter Interface Type to IUB and the parameter Transport Type to HYBIRD_IP. NOTE

If IP Path Type is set to QOS or BE-EF, the path is a high-priority path and usually E1/T1 transmission is applied. If IP Path Type is set to LQ_QOS or LQ_BE-LQ_EF, the path is a low-priority path and usually FE transmission is applied.

l

l

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Interface Type to IUB and Transport Type to HYBIRD_IP.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJMAP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Interface Type to IUB, and Transport Type of the adjacent node and interface type and Interface type to HYBIRD_IP.


Use the UE to make a call. If the call is connected, you can infer that high-priority services can access the high-priority IP paths normally and low-priority services can access the low-priority IP paths normally.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHN to query the type of services carried in the IP path, and the forward bit rate and backward bit rate of the services.


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ADJMAP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the TRM mapping to the adjacent node on the Iub interface.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the transmission resource mapping on the Iub interface.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the IP path on the Iub interface.

----End

Example //Activating Hybrid Iub IP Transmission //Adding a NodeB

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


697



ADD UNODEB: NodeBName="test", NodeBId=115, SRN=0, SN=0, TnlBearerType=HYBRID_IP_TRANS, IPTRANSAPARTIND=SUPPORT, HostType=SINGLEHOST, SharingType=DEDICATED, CnOpIndex=0; //Adding an adjacent node ADD ADJNODE: ANI=115, NAME="test", NODET=IUB, NODEBID=115, TRANST=HYBRID_IP; //Adding an IP path ADD IPPATH: ANI=115, PATHID=115, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=HYBRID_IP, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="183.22.81.1", PEERIPADDR="22.22.22.23", TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED; //Adding another IP path ADD IPPATH: ANI=115, PATHID=116, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=HYBRID_IP, PATHT=LQ_QOS, IPADDR="165.11.81.1", PEERIPADDR="22.22.22.23", TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED; //Adding the transmission resource mapping ADD TRMMAP: TMI=115, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=HYBRID_IP, CCHPRIPATH=EF, CCHSECPATH=LQEF, SIPPRIPATH=EF, SIPSECPATH=LQEF, SRBPRIPATH=EF, SRBSECPATH=LQEF, VOICEPRIPATH=EF, VOICESECPATH=LQEF, CSCONVPRIPATH=AF42, CSCONVSECPATH=LQAF42, CSSTRMPRIPATH=AF42, CSSTRMSECPATH=LQAF42, PSCONVPRIPATH=AF42, PSCONVSECPATH=LQAF42, PSSTRMPRIPATH=AF42, PSSTRMSECPATH=LQAF42, PSINTHGHPRIPATH=AF21, PSINTHGHSECPATH=LQAF21, PSINTMIDPRIPATH=AF21, PSINTMIDSECPATH=LQAF21, PSINTLOWPRIPATH=AF21, PSINTLOWSECPATH=LQAF21, PSBKGPRIPATH=AF21, PSBKGSECPATH=LQAF21, HDSRBPRIPATH=EF, HDSRBSECPATH=LQEF, HDSIPPRIPATH=EF, HDSIPSECPATH=LQEF, HDVOICEPRIPATH=AF42, HDVOICESECPATH=LQAF42, HDCONVPRIPATH=AF42, HDCONVSECPATH=LQAF42, HDSTRMPRIPATH=AF42, HDSTRMSECPATH=LQAF42, HDINTHGHPRIPATH=LQBE, HDINTHGHSECPATH=BE, HDINTMIDPRIPATH=LQBE, HDINTMIDSECPATH=BE, HDINTLOWPRIPATH=LQBE, HDINTLOWSECPATH=BE, HDBKGPRIPATH=LQBE, HDBKGSECPATH=BE, HUSRBPRIPATH=EF, HUSRBSECPATH=LQEF, HUSIPPRIPATH=EF, HUSIPSECPATH=LQEF, HUVOICEPRIPATH=AF42, HUVOICESECPATH=LQAF42, HUCONVPRIPATH=AF42, HUCONVSECPATH=LQAF42, HUSTRMPRIPATH=AF42, HUSTRMSECPATH=LQAF42, HUINTHGHPRIPATH=LQBE, HUINTHGHSECPATH=BE, HUINTMIDPRIPATH=LQBE, HUINTMIDSECPATH=BE, HUINTLOWPRIPATH=LQBE, HUINTLOWSECPATH=BE, HUBKGPRIPATH=LQBE, HUBKGSECPATH=BE; //Adding the TRM mapping to the adjacent node ADD ADJMAP: ANI=115, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=HYBRID_IP, CNMNGMODE=EXCLUSIVE, CNOPINDEX=0, TMIGLD=115, TMISLV=115, TMIBRZ=115, FTI=0, LEIGLD=0, LEISLV=0, LEIBRZ=0; //Verifying Hybrid Iub IP Transmission DSP IPCHN: ANI=115, PATHID=115; //Deactivating Hybrid Iub IP Transmission //Removing the TRM mapping to the adjacent node RMV ADJMAP: ANI=115,ITFT=IUB,CNMNGMODE=EXCLUSIVE; //Removing the transmission resource mapping RMV TRMMAP: TMI=115; //Removing IP paths RMV IPPATH: ANI=115, PATHID=115; RMV IPPATH: ANI=115, PATHID=116;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


698



208

Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050404 ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – BSC6900 is configured with both ATM interface boards and IP interface boards. – BTS3902E does not support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface must be configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Others – The ATM/IP transmission link from the RNC to the NodeB is configured.

Context This feature allows NodeB to support the ATM/IP dual-stack transmission. Services with different QoS requirements can be carried on the links of different protocols. In addition, the transmission backup is also provided.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



699


208 Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB NOTE

When you allocate resources for ATM/IP dual stack-based transport on the Iub interface, take the following suggestions into consideration: l ATM transport, IP transport, or ATM/IP hybrid transport is applicable to control plane data. It is recommended that ATM/IP hybrid transport be applied to control plane data for security purposes. That is, the SAAL and SCTP links together carry an NCP or a CCP, and the SAAL link is the active link. l ATM transport, IP transport, or ATM/IP hybrid transport is applicable to user plane data. It is recommended that: l ATM transport be applied to signaling, voice services, CS conversational services, CS streaming services, PS conversational services, and PS streaming services. l IP transport be applied to PS interactive services, PS background services, HSDPA conversational services, HSDPA streaming services, HSDPA interactive services, HSDPA background services, HSUPA conversational services, HSUPA streaming services, HSUPA interactive services, and HSUPA background services. l Either ATM or IP transport is applicable to management plane data. It is recommended that IP transport be applied.

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB (CME single configuration: Main View > Right Click RNC > Create Logical NodeB; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a NodeB. In this step, set IUB Trans Bearer Type to ATMANDIP_TRANS.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Interface Type to IUB and Transport Type to ATM_IP.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an adjacent node. In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to IUB and Transport Type to ATM_IP. If the node is a leaf node, set Is Root Node to YES; otherwise, set Is Root Node to NO.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an AAL2 path.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP path. In this step, set Interface Type to IUB and Transport Type to IP.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJMAP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Interface Type to IUB and Transport Type of the adjacent node and interface type to ATM_IP.


Use a UE to make a call and perform FTP downloading. High-priority services (such as calls and web browsing) can be carried on ATM paths and low-priority services (FTP downloading) can be carried on IP paths.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to check the state of the IP path and whether any resources of the path are occupied.


700



Expected result: Operation state is Available, and some resources of the path are occupied. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AAL2PATH to check the state of the AAL2 path and whether any resources of the path are occupied. Expected result: Operation state is Available, and some resources of the path are occupied.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ADJMAP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the TRM mapping to the adjacent node.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the transmission resource mapping on the Iub interface.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the IP path on the Iub interface.

----End

Example //Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB //Adding a NodeB ADD UNODEB: NodeBName="test", NodeBId=115, SRN=0, SN=0, TnlBearerType=ATMANDIP_TRANS, IPTRANSAPARTIND=SUPPORT, HostType=SINGLEHOST, SharingType=DEDICATED, CnOpIndex=0; //Adding the transmission resource mapping ADD TRMMAP: TMI=115, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=ATM_IP; //Adding an adjacent node ADD ADJNODE: ANI=115, NAME="test", NODET=IUB, NODEBID=115, TRANST=ATM_IP, IsROOTNODE=YES, SAALLNKN=1; //Adding an AAL2 path ADD AAL2PATH: ANI=115, PATHID=115, CARRYT=UNI, CARRYF=1, CARRYSN=14, CARRYUNILNKN=0, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=12, VCI=126, TXTRFX=115, RXTRFX=115, AAL2PATHT=R99; //Adding an IP path ADD IPPATH: ANI=115, PATHID=115, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="183.22.81.1", PEERIPADDR="22.22.22.23", TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED; //Adding the TRM mapping to the adjacent node ADD ADJMAP: ANI=115, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=ATM_IP, CNMNGMODE=EXCLUSIVE, CNOPINDEX=0, TMIGLD=115, TMISLV=115, TMIBRZ=115, FTI=0, LEIGLD=0, LEISLV=0, LEIBRZ=0; //Verifying ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB DSP IPPATH: ANI=115, PATHID=115; DSP AAL2PATH: ANI=115, PATHID=115; //Deactivating ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB //Removing the TRM mapping to the adjacent node RMV ADJMAP: ANI=115,ITFT=IUB,CNMNGMODE=EXCLUSIVE; //Removing the transmission resource mapping RMV TRMMAP: TMI=115;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


701



//Removing the IP path RMV IPPATH: ANI=115, PATHID=115;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


702



209

Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050409 IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only the Dopra Linux OS supports the built-in firewall function for O&M. – Only the FG2c and GOUc boards of the BSC6900 support the built-in firewall function for interfaces. – Only the FG2a, GOUa, FG2c and GOUc boards of the BSC6900 support Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD).

l


l


Context This feature provides a new lu transmission solution for operators. Compared with ATM transmission, IP transmission can significantly reduce the transmission cost. This feature enhances Iu transmission by introducing the following functions: BFD-based IP fault detection and built-in firewall on the RNC side. l

If BFD-based IP fault detection is enabled, the BSC6900 triggers a port switchover, board switchover, or IP rerouting when detecting that the gateway or the peer entity becomes faulty. BFD can be classified into multi-hop BFD and single-hop BFD: – In multi-hop BFD, the IP addresses of the local and peer ports must be on different network segments. – In single-hop BFD, the IP addresses of the local and peer ports must be on the same network segment.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


703


l



Procedure Step 1 For configurations of Iu interface, see Initial Configuration Guide. ----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


704



210

Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050410 IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only the Dopra Linux OS supports the built-in firewall function for O&M. – Only the FG2c and GOUc boards of the BSC6900 support the built-in firewall function for interfaces. – Only the FG2a, GOUa, FG2c and GOUc boards of the BSC6900 support Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD).

l


l


l

Others Prerequisites – The neighboring RNC supports IP transmission on the Iur interface.

Context This feature provides a new lur transmission solution for operators. Compared with ATM transmission, IP transmission can significantly reduce the transmission cost. This feature enhances Iur transmission by introducing the following functions: BFD-based IP fault detection and built-in firewall on the RNC side. l

If BFD-based IP fault detection is enabled, the BSC6900 triggers a port switchover, board switchover, or IP rerouting when detecting that the gateway or the peer entity becomes faulty. BFD can be classified into multi-hop BFD and single-hop BFD: – In multi-hop BFD, the IP addresses of the local and peer ports must be on different network segments.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


705



– In single-hop BFD, the IP addresses of the local and peer ports must be on the same network segment. l


Procedure Step 1 For configurations of Iur interface, see Initial Configuration Guide. ----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


706


211 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission

211

Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050420 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The FG2a/FG2c, GOUa/GOUc, and POUc support FP multiplexing for BSC6900.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Others – The receive end of IP packets support FP mulptiplexing.

Context The FP MUX feature encapsulates multiple packets with the same source IP address, destination IP address, and DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) into one UDP/IP packet. This reduces the overhead of packet headers and therefore improves the transmission efficiency. FP MUX is a Huawei proprietary protocol. Both RNC and NodeB must support this feature.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable frame multiplexing on the Iub interface. In this step, set IP MUX Type to FPMUX. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

707


211 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission NOTE

You do not need to configure the number of packets for multiplexing, the BSC6900 selects proper subframes for multiplexing based on the length of subframes. Subframes that meet the following conditions are multiplexed into packets: 1. The total sending duration of subframes is smaller than Maximum Delay Time. 2. The length of the subframe is smaller than Max subframe length. 3. The total length of subframes plus eight is smaller than or equal to Maximum Frame Length.

2.

l

l

Run the NodeB MML command SET FPMUX (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Transport Management > FP Multiplexing Switch; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure FP multiplexing on the Iub interface on the NodeB side.


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPMUX to check IP packet multiplexing conditions.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command LST FPMUX to query the FP multiplexing condition of an IP path.


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable the FP multiplexing function for the IP path.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command SET FPMUX (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Transport Management > FP Multiplexing Switch; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable FP multiplexing on the NodeB side.

----End

Example //Acitvating FP MUX for IP Transmission on the RNC side ADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=FPMUX, ANI=1, PATHID=1, ISQOSPATH=NO, SUBFRAMELEN=352, MAXFRAMELEN=1031; //Acitvating FP MUX for IP Transmission on the NodeB side SET FPMUX: FPMUXSWITCH =ENABLE; //Verifying FP MUX for IP Transmission on the RNC side DSP IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=1; //Verifying FP MUX for IP Transmission on the NodeB side LST FPMUX:; //Deacitvating FP MUX for IP Transmission on the RNC side RMV IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=1; //Deacitvating FP MUX for IP Transmission on the NodeB side SET FPMUX: FPMUXSWITCH =DISABLE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


708



212

Configuring Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050422 Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – − The FG2a, FG2c, GOUa and GOUc support this feature for BSC6900.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface.

l


Context This feature enables the RNC to adjust the transmission bandwidth according to the packet loss ratio and jitter over links detected by the IP performance monitor (PM).

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Activating Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPLOGICPORT (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Logical Port; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Auto adjust bandwidth switch to ON, Max bandwidth and Min bandwidth to appropriate values.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a new IP PATH over the new logic port. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

709



3.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT IPPM (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IPPM; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the IP PM of the new IP PATH.


Log on the BSC6900 LMT. On the displayed monitoring navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring to create a task of logical port bandwidth monitoring. NOTE

l Configure monitoring parameters, select Logical Port Bandwidth for Monitor Item, and set the Subrack No. and Slot No. of the logical port. l Expected result: when the rate of packet discard and delay exceed the threshold (which can be set by running the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPLOGICPORT), you can obtain that the logic port bandwidth changes within the range defined by Max bandwidth and Min bandwidth.

l

Deactivating Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPLOGICPORT (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Logical Port; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Auto adjust bandwidth switch to OFF.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA IPPM (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IPPM; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate the IP PM.

----End

Example ADD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, BT=FG2a, LPN=0, CARRYT=ETHER, PN=0, RSCMNGMODE=SHARE, BWADJ=ON, MAXBW=100, MINBW=50, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, OPSEPFLAG=OFF; ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=1, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, PATHT=BE, IPADDR="80.1.1.1", PEERIPADDR="10.161.0.1", TXBW=100, RXBW=1000, CARRYFLAG=IPLGCPORT, LPNSN=14, LPN=0, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED; ACT IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=1, ISQOSPATH=NO, LOSTPKTDETECTSW=OFF; //Deactivating dynamic bandwidth control of Iub IP MOD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, BT=FG2a, LPN=0, BWADJ=OFF, CIR=100; DEA IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


710



213

Configuring Overbooking on IP Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050408 Overbooking on IP Transmission.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – BSC6900 IP interface boards (PEUa/FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc board) all support backpressure mechanism – FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/ in BSC6900 support LP shaping.

l


l


Context The transmission rate of UMTS services varies during the transmission. For example, the rate of a speech service is 12.2 kbit/s when someone is speaking and is low when no one is speaking. Overbooking on IP Transmission helps save transmission resources on the Iub interface, reducing the CAPEX and OPEX of the operator on transmission resources. This feature consists of the following algorithms: l

RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion control

l

Fast backpressure on interface boards

l

IP shaping

l


Procedure

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


711



– Activating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion control Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to switch on flow control. – For R99 BE services, select DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH in Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. – For HSDPA BE services, select DRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH in Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. – Activating backpressure-based downlink congestion control 1.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PORTFLOWCTRLPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Port Flow Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Port protocol type to IP and set other flow control parameters.

2.

Switch on flow control. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > PPP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flow control switch to ON.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > MP Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flow control switch to ON.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPLOGICPORT (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Logical Port; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flow control switch to ON.

– Activating IP shaping

l

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPLOGICPORT (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Logical Port; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flow control switch to ON(ON).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a logical port. In this step, set Bearing type to IPLGCPORT.

Verification Procedure Take the FE/GE-based IP transmission on the Iub interface as an example to describe how to verify backpressure-based downlink flow control.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

On the BSC6900 LMT, start downlink traffic and bandwidth tracing tasks on the Uu, Iub, and Iu interfaces.

2.

Register an R99 user UE1 in the HLR. Enable UE1 with streaming services and with both highest uplink rate and highest downlink rate of 384 Kbit/s. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

712



3.

Register an HSDPA user UE2 in the HLR. Enable UE2 with background services and with highest uplink rate of 384 Kbit/s and highest downlink rate of 1450 Kbit/s.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP to map R99 services to highpriority queue and HSDPA services to low-priority queue.

5.

All IP paths of the RNC are carried on a logical port. Enable the port flow control when adding the logical port.

6.

Enable UE1 and UE2 to stay in idle mode and camp on the test cell. The test cell must support HSDPA services.

7.

Use UE1 to perform PS streaming services, that is, use UE1 to download files from the FTP server. Expected result: The logical port is not congested and UE1 downloads data at the highest rate.

8.

Use UE2 to perform PS BE services, that is, use UE2 to download files from the FTP server. Expected result: The logical port is congested and the backpressure function is triggered. The downloading rate of UE2 decreases and that of UE1 remains unchanged. This is because R99 services have a higher priority.

l

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion control Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to switch off flow control. – For R99 BE services, deselect DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH in Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. – For HSDPA BE services, deselect DRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH in Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. – Deactivating backpressure-based downlink congestion control 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD PPPLNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > PPP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flow control switch to OFF.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD MPGRP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > MP Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flow control switch to OFF.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPLOGICPORT (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Logical Port; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flow control switch to OFF.

– Deactivating IP shaping 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to modify a logical port. In this step, set Bearing type to NULL(NULL). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

713



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPLOGICPORT (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Logical Port; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flow control switch to OFF(OFF).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a logical port. In this step, set Bearing type to IPLGCPORT.

----End

Example //Activating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH-1&DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWIT CH-1; //Activating backpressure-based downlink congestion control ADD PORTFLOWCTRLPARA: FCINDEX=10, PORTPROTYPE=IP; ADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=27, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, PPPLNKN=1, DS1=2, TSBITMAP=TS1-1, BORROWDEVIP=NO, LOCALIP="5.5.5.5",MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="5.5.5.6", PPPMUX=Enable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON; ADD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=27, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, MPGRPN=1, MPTYPE=MCPPP, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="9.9.9.99", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="9.9.9.98", MHF=LONG, PPPMUX=Disable, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, ERRDETECTSW=OFF; ADD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=27, BT=FG2a, LPNTYPE=Leaf, LPN=0, CARRYT=ETHER, PN=0, RSCMNGMODE=SHARE, BWADJ=OFF, CIR=1000, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON; //Activating IP shaping ADD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=27, BT=FG2a, LPNTYPE=Leaf, LPN=0, CARRYT=ETHER, PN=0, RSCMNGMODE=SHARE, BWADJ=OFF, CIR=1000, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON; ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=1, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, PATHT=BE, IPADDR="80.1.1.1", PEERIPADDR="10.161.0.1", PEERMASK="255.255.255.0", TXBW=1000, RXBW=1000, CARRYFLAG=IPLGCPORT, LPNSN=0, LPN=0, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED; //Deactivating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH-0&DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWIT CH-0 //Deactivating backpressure-based downlink congestion control MOD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=27, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, PPPLNKN=1, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF; MOD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=27, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, MPGRPN=1, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF; MOD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=27, BT=FG2a, LPN=0, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF; //Deactivating IP shaping MOD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=1, ITFT=IUB, CARRYFLAG=NULL; MOD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=27, BT=FG2a, LPN=0, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


714



214

Configuring IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050107 IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only 3900 series base stations support this feature. – BTS3902E doesn't support this feature.

l


l


Context This feature enables Huawei NodeBs to provide the transmission convergence function in IP mode, therefore increasing transmission efficiency and reducing transmission costs.

Procedure l


l


l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

On NodeBs locating on all leaf nodes and root nodes, run the NodeB MML command ADD IPRT (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPRoute > IP Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP route from the NodeB to the BSC6900 or M2000. Run the NodeB MML command DSP IPRT to query the configuration of the newly added IP route.


715



1.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV IPRT (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPRoute > IP Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the IP route.

----End

Example l

NodeB V200R014 //Activation procedure ADD IPRT: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="11.11.11.11", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="10.10.10.10"; //Verification procedure DSP IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7; //Deactivation procedure RMV IPRT: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="11.11.11.11", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="10.10.10.10";

l

NodeB V100R014 //Activation procedure ADD IPRT: SRN=0, SN=12, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="11.11.11.11", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="10.10.10.10"; //Verification procedure DSP IPRT:; //Deactivation procedure RMV IPRT: SRN=0, SN=12, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="11.11.11.11", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="10.10.10.10";

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


716



215

Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011500 PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507).

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The UE should support the compression function.

Context This feature complies with the header compression function of data packet as defined in RFC 2507. It enables the deletion of redundant information such as TCP/IP header. The system compresses the redundant protocol header before the data is transmitted on a link. In addition, the system can decompress the received data. This feature can decrease the throughput on the Uu interface and improve the efficiency of radio links.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select the CFG_PDCP_RFC2507_HC_SWITCH check box under the Channel configuration strategy switch parameter. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

717


l



Initiate UE tracing on the BSC6900 LMT.

2.

Establish a PS service on the UE. Observe the CRLC _SETUP_REQ message in the traced UE data. Check the bit1RfcInfo2507 IE in the following path in the message: pdcpSetupInfo> pdcpInfo> pdcpInfoBmp> bit1RfcInfo2507. – If the value of the bit1RfcInfo2507 IE is 1, you can infer that this feature has been activated. – If the value of the bit1RfcInfo2507 IE is 0, you can infer that this feature has not been activated.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to clear the CFG_PDCP_RFC2507_HC_SWITCH check box under the Channel configuration strategy switch parameter.

----End

Example //Activating PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507). SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC2507_HC_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507). SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC2507_HC_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


718



216

Configuring RNC Offload

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-012001 RNC Offload. With this feature, the RNC can send some PS service data directly to Internet over the offload Gi interface.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The Gi interface between the RNC and the Internet is supported only by the FG2c board and the GOUc board.

l


l


l

Others – The RNC supports the Network Address Translation (NAT) technology.

Context The RNC Offload function is applied by means of NAT. The RNC analyzes the uplink data flow, performs NAT on some service data, and then sends the service data to the Internet over the offload Gi interface. Figure 216-1 shows the offload Gi interface between the RNC and the Internet. Figure 216-1 Offload Gi interface

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


719



To enable data packets from the Internet to directly arrive at the RNC (instead of the GGSN), the source IP address of an uplink data packet must be changed to the public IP address of the offload Gi interface by means of NAT. In this way, the downlink data packets can flow into the UTRAN over the offload Gi interface. The RNC Offload function can be configured on the basis of IMEI, IMSI, cell, service type, Access Point Name (APN), and destination IP address.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an FG2c board.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ETHPORT (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click Board > Properties > Ethernet Port Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the Ethernet port attributes of the FG2c board.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHREDPORT (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click Board > Properties > Ethernet Red Port; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add two Ethernet ports as active and standby ports.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UGIPORT (CME single configuration: Gi Configuration Express > IP Transport > Gi port; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a Gi interface.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHIP (CME single configuration: Gi Configuration Express > IP Transport > Ethernet Port IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP address of the Gi interface.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT (CME single configuration: Gi Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a route from the Gi interface to the firewall.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNATRESPOOL (CME single configuration: Gi Configuration Express > IP Transport > NAT resource pool; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a NAT resource pool.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UNATSWITCH (CME single configuration: Gi Configuration Express > IP Transport > NAT function switch; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the NAT function.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UNATALG (CME single configuration: Gi Configuration Express > IP Transport > NAT function parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the Application Level Gateway (ALG) function for the protocols over the Gi interface.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UOFFLOAD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Local Break Out Configuration > Global SIPTO Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure RNC Offload for the operator. 11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UOFFLOADRAB (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Local Break Out Configuration > SIPTO RAB Restriction; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure RNC Offload based on user priority and service type. 12. (Optional) To configure RNC Offload based on IMEI, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UOFFLOAD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


720



Configuration Express > Local Break Out Configuration > Global SIPTO Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the TAC-level offload function. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UOFFLOADIMEITAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Local Break Out Configuration > TAC to Be Enabled with Offload; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the TAClevel offload function. For details about Type Allocation Code (TAC), see the MML command ADD UIMEITAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > RNC Basic Configuration > IMEI TAC; CME batch modification center: not supported). 13. (Optional) To configure RNC Offload based on APN, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UOFFLOADAPN (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Local Break Out Configuration > APN; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a registered APN for the operator. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UOFFLOAD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Local Break Out Configuration > Global SIPTO Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable RNC Offload based on APN. 14. (Optional) To configure RNC Offload based on IMSI, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UOFFLOADIMSI (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Local Break Out Configuration > SIPTO IMSI Range; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the range of IMSIs supporting RNC Offload. 15. (Optional) To configure RNC Offload based on the cell, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable RNC Offload for the cell. 16. (Optional) To configure RNC Offload based on the destination IP address, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UUNOFFLOADIP (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Local Break Out Configuration > Host IP Address/Host Network Segment That not Allow Visit in Offload Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the IP addresses or network segment that are not allowed to access the Internet using RNC Offload. l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


On the BSC6900 LMT, choose Monitor > UMTS monitoring, and then double-click Cell Performance Monitoring. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed.

2.

Set Monitor Item to Cell User Number, and then set Monitor Period and Cell ID. Click OK.

3.

Choose Monitor > Common Monitoring. Double-click Link Performance Monitoring. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed.

4.

Set Monitor Item to FE/GE, Subrack No. to 0, Slot No. to 14, Monitor Type to Port, and FE/GE Port No. to 0. Click OK.

5.

Power on a UE and enable the UE to camp on CELL1. Use the UE to initiate a PS service.

6.

Check the Cell User Number parameter. The number of UEs supporting RNC Offload in the cell changes from 0 to 1.

7.

The UE starts data transmission. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

721



8. l

Check the FE/GE parameter. The data throughput over the FE/GE port increases.


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UOFFLOAD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Local Break Out Configuration > Global SIPTO Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable RNC Offload for the operator.

----End

Example //Configuring the Gi interface ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=FG2c, SN=14, RED=YES, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0; SET ETHPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, PTYPE=GE, PN=0, SPEED=AUTO; ADD ETHREDPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0; ADD UGIPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, ISPSSHAREPORT=NO; ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="10.53.50.69", MASK="255.255.255.240"; ADD IPRT: SRN=0, SN=14, DSTIP="0.0.0.0", DSTMASK="0.0.0.0", NEXTHOP="10.53.50.68", PRIORITY=HIGH, REMARK="Gi"; //Configuring the NAT function ADD UNATRESPOOL: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, NATINDEX=0, STARTADDR="172.168.0.100", ENDADDR="172.168.0.101", MAXPN=65535, MINPN=10000; SET UNATSWITCH: NATSW=ON; SET UNATALG: PROTOCOLTYPE=FTP, ALGSW=ON, AGINGTIMER=600; //Activating RNC Offload ADD UOFFLOAD: CnOpIndex=0, OffloadSwitch=ON, NonDTRAB=PERMIT_OFFLOAD; ADD UOFFLOADRAB: CnOpIndex=0, UserPriority=GOLDEN_USER, OffloadService=STREAMING-1&INTERACTIVE-1&BACKGROUND-0; //Configuring RNC Offload based on IMEI MOD UOFFLOAD: CnOpIndex=0, RsvdPara1=LBO_IMEITAC_SWITCH-1; ADD UOFFLOADIMEITAC: TAC=12345678, Description="iphone"; //Configuring RNC Offload based on APN MOD UOFFLOAD: CnOpIndex=0, OffloadSwitch=ON, NonDTRAB=NOT_PERMIT_OFFLOAD, RegAPN=PERMIT_OFFLOAD; //Configuring RNC Offload based on IMSI ADD UOFFLOADIMSI: CnOpIndex=0, IMSIStart="000000000000000", IMSIEnd="999999999999999"; //Configuring RNC Offload based on the cell MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, OffloadSwitch=ON; //Configuring RNC Offload based on destination IP address ADD UUNOFFLOADIP: CnOpIndex=0, IpAddr="10.10.10.10", Mask="255.255.255.255"; //Deactivating RNC Offload MOD UOFFLOAD: CnOpIndex=0, OffloadSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


722



217

Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature WRFD-050412 UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature is supported only by the BSC6900 that is configured with the FG2a/GOUa/ FG2c/GOUc/POUc boards.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-050409 IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The CS CN element (MGW) supports UDP MUX. – The RTCP switch has been opened. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNNODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Core Network > UMTS CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the RTCP SWITCH to ON.

Context After IP transmission is introduced to the Iu-CS interface, UP packets, especially short packets like CS packets, cannot be transmitted efficiently after being encapsulated at the RTP, UDP, and IP layers. This feature helps solve this problem by using a UDP subheader shorter than UDP to encapsulate multiple RTP packets into a UDP. This reduces resources used by packet headers and therefore improves the efficiency of Iu-CS transmission.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


723



This feature supports UDP MUX, regardless of whether compression of RTP headers is enabled. After this feature is enabled, transmission efficiency can be increased by 30% to 40%, depending on the number of RTP packets that are encapsulated into a UDP.

Procedure l


Configure IP paths based on the network plan.

1.

l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX (CME single configuration: IUCS Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification center: not supported) or MOD IPMUX (CME single configuration: IUCS Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the Iu-CS UDP MUX function. In this step, set IP MUX Type to UDPMUX, and set Max subframe length[byte], Maximum Frame Length[byte], and Maximum Delay Time[ms] to appropriate values based on the network plan. To enable the UDP MUX function for multiple links, run this command for each of the links. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPMUX to query the application of UDP MUX for Iu Transmission. Check whether the feature has been activated based on the values of IPMUX Status, Number of MUX packets, and Number of MUX Subframes.


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX (CME single configuration: IUCS Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the IP MUX paths or run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPMUX (CME single configuration: IUCS Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set IP MUX Type to FPMUX.

----End

Example //Activating UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission ADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=UDPMUX, SUBFRAMELEN=352, MAXFRAMELEN=1031, FPTIMER=2; //Checking whether UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission has been activated for an IP MUX path of which the index is 1 DSP IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=1; //Deactivating UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission MOD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=FPMUX;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


724



218

Configuring Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140207 Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The GOUc and FG2c boards support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete.This feature depends on features WRFD-050409 IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface or WRFD-050410 IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The RNC can communicate with an interconnected NE by any route using their respective user-plane IP addresses. – Deploying this feature on RNC transmission ports that work in active/standby mode requires Huawei professional services.

Context With this feature, multiple Iu or Iur interface boards form a transmission resource pool. A network element (NE) interconnected with the RNC, such as a neighboring RNC (NRNC), the MGW, the SGSN, or the GGSN, can access all boards in this pool. This helps balance the load among these boards. l

Data Preparation See Data Preparation for Initial Configuration in the Initial Configuration Guide.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


725



Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Initial configuration scenarios – Iu-CS interface 1.

See Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2c/GOUc Board in the Initial Configuration Guide.

2.

See Configuring the Transmission Resource Pool in the Initial Configuration Guide.

3.

See Configuring the Control Plane of the Iu-CS Interface (over Transmission Resource Pool) in the Initial Configuration Guide.

4.

See Configuring the User Plane of the Iu-CS Interface (over Transmission Resource Pool) in the Initial Configuration Guide.

5.

See Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types and Transmission Resources for the Adjacent Node in the Initial Configuration Guide.

– Iu-PS interface 1.


2.


3.

See Configuring the Control Plane of the Iu-PS Interface (over Transmission Resource Pool) in the Initial Configuration Guide.

4.

See Configuring the User Plane of the Iu-PS Interface (over Transmission Resource Pool) in the Initial Configuration Guide.

5.


– Iur interface 1.


2.


3.

See Configuring the Control Plane of the Iur Interface (over Transmission Resource Pool) in the Initial Configuration Guide.

4.

See Configuring the User Plane of the Iur Interface (over Transmission Resource Pool) in the Initial Configuration Guide.

5.


NOTE

For details about the initial configuration on the CME, see Initial Configuration of the BSC6900 (V900R014) > BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration (V900R014) > Configuring the BSC6900 in the General Configuration Procedure > Configuring Iu-CS Interface Data (in Transmission Resource Pool Mode)/Configuring Iu-PS Interface Data (in Transmission Resource Pool Mode)/Configuring Iur Interface Data (in Transmission Resource Pool Mode) in the documentation CD-ROM of (For Customer) M2000-CME Product Documentation (V200R012)(HDX)-EN.

– Reconfiguration scenarios – Iu-CS interface Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


726



See Configuring the IP Pool Networking Mode on the Iu-CS Interface in the Reconfiguration Guide. – Iu-PS interface See Configuring the IP Pool Networking Mode on the Iu-PS Interface in the Reconfiguration Guide. – Iur interface See Configuring the IP Pool Networking Mode on the Iur Interface in the Reconfiguration Guide. l


Run the BSC6900 MML commandDSP ETHPORT to query the port rate and work mode. Expected result: Speed is 1000M and Duplex is FULL.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandDSP SRCIPRT to check whether the transmitted and received data over the source IP address uses an interface board in the same slot. – If the values of Number of Packets Sent and Number of Packets Received increase in the same slot, it indicates that the route priority on the RNC side is consistent with that on the peer router side. – If the value of Number of Packets Received increases in the active and standby slots, it indicates that an equal-cost route has been configured from the router to the RNC. In this case, change the route to active and standby routes. – If the slot where the value of Number of Packets Received increases is different from the slot where the value of Number of Packets Sent increases, it indicates that the route priority on the RNC side is inconsistent with that on the peer router side. In this case, change the route priority.

l

3.

Run the ping command and check for relevant alarms. Verify that the alarms ALM-21392 Adjacent Node IP Address Ping Failure, ALM-21393 Adjacent Node IP Path Ping Failure are not reported and ALM-21394 Transmission Resource Pool Ping Packet Loss.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandDSP IPPOOL. In this step, check the values of Send bit rate of the port[bps], Receive bit rate of the port[bps], Send bit rate load of the board, Receive bit rate load of the board, Send packets load of the board, and Receive packets load of the board for all egress ports corresponding to the source IP addresses in transmission resource pools. Verify that these values of the egress ports are close to each other.


----End

Example //Activation Procedure //Refer to the example of a typical configuration script in the Initial Configuration Guide. //Deactivation Procedure //Not involved.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


727



219

Configuring Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140208 Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The GOUc and FG2c boards support this feature. – For NodeBs, only the 3900 series base stations support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface.

l


l

Others – The RNC can communicate with an interconnected NE by any route using their respective user-plane IP addresses. – The requirements for the routers on the RNC side are as follows: – If the RNC boards work in active/standby mode, dynamic routing protocols such as Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) and Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (ISIS) must be configured on the RNC, and policy-based routing must be configured on routers. – Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) is configured for static routes on routers, configuring fast reroute (FRR) is recommended to implement second-level fast reroute. – Deploying this feature on RNC transmission ports that work in active/standby mode requires Huawei professional services.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


728



Context With this feature, multiple Iub interface boards form a transmission resource pool. Each NodeB interconnected with the RNC can access all boards in this pool. This helps balance the load among these boards. l

Data Preparation – Data preparation on the RNC side See Data Preparation for Initial Configuration in the Initial Configuration Guide. – Data preparation on the NodeB side – Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Service IP Type

SERVTYPE

None

Internal plan

IP Address

IP

None

Network plan

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Initial configuration scenarios – Configuration on the RNC side 1.


2.


3.

See Configuring the Control Plane of the Iub Interface (over Transmission Resource Pool) in the Initial Configuration Guide.

4.

See Configuring the User Plane of the Iub Interface (over Transmission Resource Pool) in the Initial Configuration Guide.

5.

See Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types and Transmission Resources in the Initial Configuration Guide.

6.

See Configuring the OM Channel over the Iub Interface (over Transmission Resource Pool) in the Initial Configuration Guide. NOTE

For details about the initial configuration on the CME, see Initial Configuration of the BSC6900 (V900R014) > BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration (V900R014) > Configuring the BSC6900 in the General Configuration Procedure > Configuring Iub Interface Data (in Transmission Resource Pool Mode) in the documentation CD-ROM of (For Customer) M2000-CME Product Documentation (V200R012)(HDX)-EN.

– Configuration on the NodeB side

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the NodeB MML commandADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add a device IP address.

2.

Run the NodeB MML commandADD SERVIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Basic Configuration > ServerIP > Service IP; CME batch modification center: not Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

729



supported) to add a service IP address. In this step, set Service IP Type to IUB and IP Address to the device IP address in step 1. 3.

Run the NodeB MML commandADD IPRT (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPRoute > IP Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP route.

4.

Run the NodeB MML commandADD SCTPLNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > SCTP > SCTP Link; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) twice to add two SCTP links for NCP and CCP, respectively.

5.

Run the NodeB MML commandADD IUBCP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > NBAP > NBIUBCP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an Iub control port. In this step, set Port Type to NCP.

6.

Run the NodeB MML commandADD IUBCP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > NBAP > NBIUBCP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an Iub control port. In this step, set Port Type to CCP.

7.

Run the NodeB MML commandSET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > ATMPort > HSDPA Flow Control > HSDPA Flow Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the parameters related to HSDPA flow control. In this step, set Hsdpa Switch to DYNAMIC_BW_SHAPING.

– For details about reconfiguration scenarios, see Configuring the IP Pool Networking Mode on the Iub Interface in the Reconfiguration Guide. l


Run the BSC6900 MML commandDSP ETHPORT to query the port rate and work mode. Expected result: Speed is 1000M and Duplex is FULL.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandDSP SRCIPRT to check whether the transmitted and received data over the source IP address uses an interface board in the same slot. – If the values of Number of Packets Sent and Number of Packets Received increase in the same slot, it indicates that the route priority on the RNC side is consistent with that on the peer router side. – If the value of Number of Packets Received increases in the active and standby slots, it indicates that an equal-cost route has been configured from the router to the RNC. In this case, change the route to active and standby routes. – If the slot where the value of Number of Packets Received increases is different from the slot where the value of Number of Packets Sent increases, it indicates that the route priority on the RNC side is inconsistent with that on the peer router side. In this case, change the route priority.

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the ping command and check for relevant alarms. Verify that the alarms ALM-21392 Adjacent Node IP Address Ping Failure, ALM-21393 Adjacent Node IP Path Ping Failure are not reported and ALM-21394 Transmission Resource Pool Ping Packet Loss. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

730


l


4.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandACT IPPOOLPM to activate performance detection for the transmission resource pools. Verify that the counters related to IP performance monitoring (IPPM) are in the normal value range and the alarm ALM-21395 Adjacent Node IP Path Excessive Packet Loss Rate is not reported.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandDSP IPPOOL. In this step, check the values of Send bit rate of the port[bps], Receive bit rate of the port[bps], Send bit rate load of the board, Receive bit rate load of the board, Send packets load of the board, and Receive packets load of the board for all egress ports corresponding to the source IP addresses in transmission resource pools. Verify that these values of the egress ports are close to each other.


----End

Example //Activation Procedure //Refer to the example of a typical configuration script in the Initial Configuration Guide. //Deactivation Procedure //Not involved.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


731



220

Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050104 Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature supports satellite transmission on the Iub interface, which is useful to cover remote areas, such as an island. When satellite transmission is applied over the Iub interface, the delay increases. The default setting of the SAAL/SCTP timer on the Iub interface can meet the satellite transmission requirements.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Satellite Trans Ind to TRUE, and set IUB Transport Delay to 600.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to activate a cell. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

732


l

l



Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether cell settings are successful.

2.

Establish an AMR service in the cell. The AMR service is established successfully and the speech quality is satisfactory.

3.

Establish a PS BE service in a cell. The service is established successfully and the data download rate is steady.


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Satellite Trans Ind to FALSE, and set IUB Transport Delay to 10.

----End

Example //Activating Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface MOD UNODEB: IDTYPE=BYID, NodeBId=1, TRANSDELAY=600, SATELLITEIND=TRUE; ACT UCELL: CellId=1; //Deactivating Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface DEA UCELL: CellId=1; MOD UNODEB: IDTYPE=BYID, NodeBId=1, TRANSDELAY=10, SATELLITEIND=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


733



221

Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050108 Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature solves the communication problems of base stations in remote areas, such as remote regions, islands, and deserts, where there is no transmission system or the terrestrial transmission system is difficult to deploy Satellite transmission may bring extra delay and therefore timers of signaling plane and user plane need to be adjusted to prevent transmission delay from causing data loss.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SAALLNK (CME single configuration: IUCS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) or MOD SAALLNK (CME single configuration: IUCS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add or modify the settings of SAAL links on the Iu interface. Modify the values of parameters associated with satellite transmission, as described in Table 221-1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

734



Table 221-1 Timers related to SAAL links of satellite transmission Parameter ID

Parameter Name

Default Value

Recommended Value

MPS

Management proving status

MPS_NEUTRAL

MPS_EMERGEN CY

CCTMR

Timer_CC{ms}

200

800

POLLTMR

Timer_Poll{ms}

100

300

IDLETMR

Timer_Idle{ms}

500

3000

RSPTMR

Timer_NoResponse{ms}

1500

3000

KEEPTMR

Timer_KeepAlive{ms}

100

1000

NOTE

In the signaling plane of the Iu interface, except that the timer of SAAL links is set to a smaller value, timers of other links are set to 1s or longer. The delay of satellite transmission is about 600 ms and therefore the settings of timers in other signaling planes do not need to be changed. Timers of links in the user plane of the Iu interface are also set to 1s or longer and do not need to be changed, either.

l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST SAALLNK to check whether the setting of the timer is modified correctly.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SAALLNK to query the status of SAAL links. The result shows that SAAL link state is AVAILABLE.


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD SAALLNK (CME single configuration: IUCS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to change associated parameters to the default values.

----End

Example //Activating Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface MOD SAALLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SAALLNKN=1, CARRYT=NCOPT, CARRYSRN=0, CARRYSN=14, CARRYNCOPTN=0, SAALLNKT=NNI, CCTMR=800, POLLTMR=300, IDLETMR=3000, RSPTMR=3000, KEEPTMR=1000;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


735


222 Configuring Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB

222

Configuring Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050501 Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – Huawei clock server should support this feature.

Context This feature provides a solution for clock synchronization in the all-IP network. The clock synchronization of the base station can be achieved for the operator without changing the existing data network and introducing additional QoS requirements for the transport network.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPCLKLINK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPCLKLNK > IP Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP clock link.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Clock Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

736



Source > System Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the working mode of the reference clock source. – Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual). – Set Selected Clock Source to IPCLK(IP Clock). Verification Procedure 1.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP IPCLKLINK to query the running status of all IP clock links. Expected result: The value of Link Available State is Available.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT to query the status of the system clock. Expected result: The value of Current Clock Source State is Normal.

Deactivation Procedure

l

1.

Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Clock Source > System Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the working mode of the reference clock source. Set Clock Working Mode to FREE(Free).

2.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV IPCLKLINK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPCLKLNK > IP Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a specified IP clock link.


Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPCLKLINK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPCLKLNK > IP Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP clock link.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Clock Source > System Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the working mode of the reference clock source. – Set System Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual). – Set Clock Source Type to IPCLK(IP clock source).


Run the NodeB MML command DSP IPCLKLINK to query the running status of all IP clock links. Expected result: The value of IP Clock Link Status is Normal.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT to query the status of the system clock. Expected result: The value of Current Clock Source State is Normal.


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


737



Source > System Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the working mode of the reference clock source. Set System Clock Working Mode to FREE(Free). 2.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV IPCLKLINK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPCLKLNK > IP Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a specified IP clock link.

----End

Example l

NodeB V200R014 //Activation procedure ADD IPCLKLINK: ICPT=HW_DEFINED, SN=7, CIP="82.0.1.107", SIP="82.0.1.128"; SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK, SYNMODE=OFF; //Verification procedure DSP IPCLKLINK:; DSP CLKSTAT: SN=7; //Deactivation procedure SET CLKMODE: MODE=FREE; RMV IPCLKLINK:;

l

NodeB V100R014 //Activation procedure ADD IPCLKLINK: SRN=0, SN=12, CIP="11.11.11.11", SIP="10.10.12.12", ICPT=HW_DEFINED; SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK, IPMODE=AUTO; //Verification procedure DSP IPCLKLINK: SN=12; DSP CLKSTAT:; //Deactivation procedure SET CLKMODE: MODE=FREE; RMV IPCLKLINK: SRN=0, SN=12;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


738



223

Configuring Synchronous Ethernet

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050502 Synchronous Ethernet.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only the BSC6900 supports this feature. – Only the 3900 series base stations support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on features WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface.

l


l

Others – The synchronous Ethernet technology requires that all the equipments on the clock relay path must support the synchronous Ethernet.

Context This feature provides the solution for clock synchronization in all-IP networking scenarios. It enables the clock extraction and recovery in the physical layer of the Ethernet.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the NodeB MML command ADD SYNCETH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Clock Source > Synchronous Ethernet Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a synchronous-Ethernet clock link.

2.


739



Source > System Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the working mode of the reference clock source. – Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual). – Set Selected Clock Source to SYNCETH(SyncEth Clock). l


l



Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Clock Source > System Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the working mode of the reference clock source. In this step, set Clock Working Mode to FREE(Free).

2.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV SYNCETH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Clock Source > Synchronous Ethernet Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a synchronous-Ethernet clock link.

----End

Example //Activation procedure ADD SYNCETH: SN=7, PN=0; SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=SYNCETH; //Verification procedure DSP CLKSTAT: SN=7:; //Deactivation procedure SET CLKMODE: MODE=FREE; RMV SYNCETH:;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


740



224

Configuring Ethernet OAM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050425 Ethernet OAM. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependency on RNC Hardware – Only BSC6900 supports this feature. – RAN11.0, BTS3812E/AE and DBS3800 can only support IEEE 802.1ag draft 7. 3900 series NodeB can support IEEE 802.3ah and IEEE 802.1ag draft 7. – RAN12.0, BTS3812E/AE, DBS3800, 3900 series NodeB can support both IEEE 802.3ah and IEEE 802.1ag draft 8.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on the Iub Interface, or WRFD-050409 IP Transmission Introduction on the Iu Interface, or WRFD-050410 IP Transmission Introduction on the Iur Interface.

l


Context With the evolution from WCDMA to IPRAN, the Ethernet transmission network is widely used. As a layer-2 protocols, the Ethernet OAM can report the status of the network on the data link layer. In this way, the Ethernet can be more efficiently monitored and managed. The Ethernet OAM functions include detection, notification, verification, and fault location functions. These faults include the hard faults (such as the link interruption) that can be detected on the physical layer or the soft faults (such as the fault of the memory or the bridge) that cannot be detected on the physical layer. The Ethernet OAM plays a significant role in cutting the CAPEX/OPEX cost and complies with the service level (SLA). The RAN supports two kinds of Ethernet OAM features, that is, the PPP Ethernet OAM feature defined by the 802.3ah and the E2E Ethernet OAM defined by 802.1ag. 1.

PPP Ethernet OAM The PPP Ethernet OAM complies with the IEEE 802.3ah protocol. It is the last-mile OAM solution. It implements the PPP maintenance of the Ethernet through detection, loopback,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


741



link monitoring, and fault detection and is not service, and it is not service-specific, as shown in Figure 224-1. Figure 224-1 PPP Ethernet OAM network

2.

E2E Ethernet OAM The E2E Ethernet OAM complies with IEEE 802.1ag draft 7 or IEEE 802.1ag draft 8. It is implemented based on services, maintenance domains, and E2E detection.

Procedure l

Activating the Ethernet OAM 3AH Function 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT EFMAH to activate the Ethernet OAM 3AH function. NOTE

The OAM 3AH function on peer equipment must be activated.

l

Activating the Ethernet OAM 1AG Function 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMD to add the Ethernet OAM maintenance domain (MD). The Ethernet OAM MD consists of bridges and maintenance equipment. Each MD is associated with a maintenance level. There are eight maintenance levels, that is level 0 to level 7.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMA to add the Ethernet OAM maintenance association (MA). Each MD can be divided into several MAs. Each MA corresponds to a service instance identified by the VLAN in the MD.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMEP to add an Ethernet OAM maintenance end point (MEP). You can add different local or remote maintenance points of different MEP types to the MA. NOTE

l The MEPID of the RemoteMep configured on the peer equipment must be consistent with the MEPID of the LocalMep configured on the local equipment. l MD, MA or MEP must be configured on the peer equipment when the MD, MA or MEP has be added on BSC6900.

4.

l

Verifying the Ethernet OAM 3AH Function 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT CFMCCMTST to activate the Ethernet OAM unidirectional connectivity detection between the local MEP and the remote MEP. Activate the Ethernet OAM 3AH function. The Alarm-21371 ETHOAM 3AH Detection Failure alarm is reported when Ethernet OAM detection fails. The Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

742



ALM-21345 Ethernet Link Fault alarm is report when Ethernet OAM detection is enable, because link on local end and peer end fails. 2.

l

l

Verifying the Ethernet OAM 1AG Function 1.

Activate the Ethernet OAM 1AG function. The running of the PING MAC and TRC MAC fails if the transmission between the local MEP and the remote MEP is faulty because the local MEP fails to receive the connectivity detection packet from the remote MEP.

2.

OAM 1AG function on the peer equipment must be activated, and the transmission is functional that the local MEP succeeds to receive the CCM packets from the peer MEP, the running of the PING MAC and TRC MAC succeeds.

Deactivating the Ethernet OAM 3AH Function 1.

l

Activate the Ethernet OAM 3AH loopback function. If the loopback succeeds, the Alarm-21374 ETHOAM 3AH Remote Loopback is reported due to service congestion.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA EFMAH to deactivate the Ethernet OAM 3AH function.

Deactivating the Ethernet OAM 1AG Function 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA CFMCCMTST to deactivate the Ethernet OAM unidirectional connectivity detection.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMD to delete the Ethernet OAM maintenance domain (MD).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMA to delete the Ethernet OAM maintenance association (MA).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMEP to delete the Ethernet OAM maintenance end point (MEP).

----End

Example //Activating the Ethernet OAM 3AG function ACT EFMAH: SRN=0, SN=18, PN=0; //Activating the Ethernet OAM 1AG function ADD CFMMD: SRN=0, SN=18, MDIDX=0, MDName="md0"; ADD CFMMA: SRN=0, SN=18, MDIDX=0, VLANID=2, MAIDX=0, MANAME="ma0"; ADD CFMMEP: SRN=0, MAIDX=0, MEPTYPE=LocalMep, MEPID=1, PORTTYPE=ETHER, SN=18, PN=0; ADD CFMMEP: SRN=0, MAIDX=0, MEPTYPE=RemoteMep, MEPID=11, SN=18; ACT CFMCCMTST: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, MEPID=1; //Verifying the Ethernet OAM 1AG function PING MAC: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, SRCMEPID=1, DESTMEPID=11; TRC MAC: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, SRCMEPID=1, DESTMEPID=11; //Deactivating the Ethernet OAM 3AG function DEA EFMAH: SRN=0, SN=18, PN=0; //Deactivating the Ethernet OAM 1AG function DEA CFMCCMTST: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, MEPID=1; RMV CFMMD: SRN=0, SN=18, MDIDX=0; RMV CFMMA: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0; RMV CFMMEP: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, MEPID=11; RMV CFMMEP: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, MEPID=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


743



225

Configuring RNC Node Redundancy

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-040202 RNC Node Redundancy.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature does not depend on hardware.

l


l


l

Others – The Iur, Iu-CS, Iub and Iu-PS interfaces have been configured. For details, see Configuring the Interfaces.

Context This feature improves the reliability and robustness of RAN and shortens the service interruption due to single-point failure in the RNC. In this way, the service quality is improved. With this feature, a NodeB can be connected to two RNCs and heartbeat detection is performed on the Iur interface between the two RNCs. When the primary RNC is faulty, the NodeB can be fast switched to the secondary RNC for service provisioning. The primary RNC and the secondary RNC form an RNC pool, as shown in Figure 225-1 and Figure 225-2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


744



Figure 225-1 Network topology not configured with RNC pool

Figure 225-2 Network topology configured with RNC pool

NOTE

l When the serving RNC is faulty, the maximum service capability (such as CS Erlang and PS throughput) decreases from the combined capability of two RNCs to the capability of one RNC. As a result, the processing specifications of the network decrease. l To activate this feature, data configurations related to this feature are required on the RNC and the NodeB. The CN and M2000 do not require data configurations specific to this feature. You can check the homing state of the NodeB on the M2000.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



745


225 Configuring RNC Node Redundancy NOTE

This document uses RNC202, RNC203, and NodeB1 as examples to describe the procedures. Assume that RNC202 and RNC203 are initially configured as the primary homing and secondary homing RNC of NodeB1 respectively.

1.

Data configurations on the primary homing RNC (RNC202) a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCPOOL (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Redundancy Backup Configuration > RNC Pool; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an RNC pool. In this step, set the parameters such as RncPool Index, RncPool Name, Supporting Auto-Rehoming Switch and so on.

CAUTION If the license is activated , the primary homing RNC is physically broken down and Supporting Auto-Rehoming Switch is set to OFF, the feature WRFD-040300 License Control for Urgency will be activated. WRFD-040300 License Control for Urgency can be enabled only fifteen times for each R version for this kind of reason.

2.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCPOOLMEMBER (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Redundancy Backup Configuration > RNC Pool Member; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the primary homing RNC (RNC203) to the RNC pool.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT URNCPOOL (CME single configuration: UMTS GLOBAL Configuration Express > Redundancy Backup Configuration > RNC Pool. Set active status to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the RNC node redundancy feature.

d.

Add a NodeB (NodeB1) of which the primary homing RNC is RNC202: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB (CME single configuration: Main View > Right Click RNC > Create Logical NodeB; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a NodeB of which the primary homing RNC is RNC202.

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click NodeB > Add UMTS Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the cell to the primary homing RNC and specify the peer cell ID under the secondary homing RNC.

f.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPOOLPRIMHOSTPOLICY (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Redundancy Backup Configuration > Re-host Policy; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the rehoming strategy of the NodeB.

Data configurations on the secondary homing RNC (RNC203) a.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCPOOL (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Redundancy Backup Configuration > RNC Pool; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an RNC pool. In this step, set the parameters such as RncPool Index, RncPool Name, Supporting Auto-Rehoming Switch and so on. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

746



CAUTION If the license is activated , the secondary homing RNC is physically broken down and Supporting Auto-Rehoming Switch is set to OFF, and the feature WRFD-040300 License Control for Urgency will be activated. WRFD-040300 License Control for Urgency can be enabled only fifteen times for each R version for this kind of reason.

3.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCPOOLMEMBER (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Redundancy Backup Configuration > RNC Pool Member; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the primary homing RNC (RNC202) to the RNC pool.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT URNCPOOL (CME single configuration: UMTS GLOBAL Configuration Express > Redundancy Backup Configuration > RNC Pool. Set active status to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the RNC node redundancy feature.

d.

Add a NodeB (NodeB1) of which the secondary homing RNC is RNC203: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB (CME single configuration: Main View > Right Click RNC > Create Logical NodeB; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a NodeB of which the secondary homing RNC is RNC203.

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click NodeB > Add UMTS Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the cell to the secondary homing RNC and specify the peer cell ID under the primary homing RNC.

Data configurations on the NodeB (NodeB1) side a.

b.

l

a.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > NBAP > NBIUBCP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an NCP link.

b.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > NBAP > NBIUBCP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a CCP link.

Configure information about the secondary homing RNC. a.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > NBAP > NBIUBCP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an NCP link.

b.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > NBAP > NBIUBCP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a CCP link.


Method 1: Verifying data configurations a.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Configure information about the primary homing RNC.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL on the RNC202 LMT. The query result shows that cell 1 is functional. Run the BSC6900 MML command Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

747



DSP UCELL on the RNC203 LMT. The query result shows that cell 2 is unavailable due to no control rights. b.

Perform an emulation test of the primary RNC fault. – Run the BSC6900 MML command RST UIU on RNC202 to make RNC202 become faulty. – If the BSC6900 recovers too fast after the BSC6900 MML command RST UIU is executed, you can remove the cable on the Iu-CS/Iu-PS interface instead.

c.

After RNC203 detects that RNC202 is faulty through the Iur interface, RNC203 takes over the NodeB and initiates cell2 reestablishment.

d.

(Optional) When the connection between the NodeB and the primary homing RNC is disconnected, the secondary homing RNC cannot obtain the NodeB control rights automatically. To solve this problem, run the BSC6900 MML command FOC UHOSTNODEB on the RNC203 LMT to manually switch over the NodeB control rights to the secondary homing RNC.

CAUTION Switching over NodeB control rights manually disrupts the ongoing services when the connection between the NodeB and the primary homing RNC is normal. e.

2.

On both the RNC203 LMT and the RNC202 LMT, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL. If the query result on the RNC203 LMT shows that cell 2 is operational and the query result on the RNC202 LMT shows that cell 1 is unavailable due to no control rights, this feature has been activated. Otherwise, this feature is not activated.

Method 2: Verifying services a.

Check whether the heartbeat between RNC202 and RNC203 is normal, as shown in Figure 225-3.

Figure 225-3 Normal heartbeat between RNC202 and RNC203

b.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Check that the cell under RNC202 is available, and then use the UE to establish a CS AMR service, as shown in Figure 225-4 and Figure 225-5.


748



Figure 225-4 NodeB control rights obtained by RNC202

Figure 225-5 CS AMR service set up successfully

3.

l

c.

Power off RNC202 when RNC203 works properly. RNC203 then takes over the NodeB control rights.

d.

When RNC202 restores normal services, it takes over the NodeB control rights again according to the rehoming strategy, and RNC203 releases the NodeB control rights.

Method 3: Verifying this feature on the M2000 a.

Create the RNCs and NodeB on the RNC POOL monitor of the M2000. When creating a NodeB, the M2000 checks the homing state of the NodeB. If the RNC is the secondary homing RNC of the NodeB, the NodeB cannot be created under that RNC.

b.

When the M2000 starts, it starts NE status subscribing. When the homing state of the NodeB changes, the RNC reports the NodeB homing state to the M2000. The M2000 then updates the network topology displayed in the RNC POOL monitor.


On RNC202 and RNC203, run the BSC6900 MML command DEA URNCPOOL (CME single configuration: UMTS GLOBAL Configuration Express > Redundancy Backup Configuration > RNC Pool. Set active status to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate the feature.

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


749



Example /*Activation procedure*/ /*Data configuration script on the primary homing RNC side*/ /*Configuring an RNC pool*/ ADD URNCPOOL: RncPoolIndex=0, RncPoolName="redundancy_RNCPOOL"; ADD URNCPOOLMEMBER: RncPoolIndex=0, NrncId=203; ACT URNCPOOL: RncPoolIndex=0; //Adding a dual-homing NodeBADD UNODEB: NodeBName="Redundancy_NODEB500", NodeBId=500, SRN=0, SN=0, SSN=1, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS,IPTRANSAPARTIND=NOT_SUPPORT, HostType=PRIMHOST, PeerRncId=203, PeerNodebId=500, SharingType=RANSHARING; //Setting cell parameters ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=1, CellName="Redundancy_NODEB500_00", PeerIsValid=VALID, PeerCellId=2, CnOpGrpIndex=0, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNDownlink=10668, PScrambCode=500, TCell=CHIP0, LAC=H'0046, SAC=H'0000, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00, SpgId=1, URANUM=D1, URA1=0, NodeBName="Redundancy_NODEB500", LoCell=500, SupBmc=FALSE; /*Data configuration script on the secondary homing RNC side*/ /*Configuring an RNC pool*/ ADD URNCPOOL: RncPoolIndex=0, RncPoolName="redundancy_RNCPOOL"; ADD URNCPOOLMEMBER: RncPoolIndex=0, NrncId=202; ACT URNCPOOL: RncPoolIndex=0; //Adding a dual-homing NodeB ADD UNODEB: NodeBName="Redundancy_NODEB500", NodeBId=500, SRN=0, SN=0, SSN=1, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, IPTRANSAPARTIND=NOT_SUPPORT, HostType=SECHOST, PeerRncId=202, PeerNodebId=500, SharingType=RANSHARING; //Setting cell parameters ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=2, CellName="Redundancy_NODEB500_00", PeerIsValid=VALID, PeerCellId=1, CnOpGrpIndex=0, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNDownlink=10668, PScrambCode=500, TCell=CHIP0, LAC=H'0046, SAC=H'0000, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00, SpgId=1, URANUM=D1, URA1=0, NodeBName="Redundancy_NODEB500", LoCell=500, SupBmc=FALSE; /*Data configuration script on the NodeB side*/ /*Configuring information about the primary homing RNC on the NodeB*/ /*Configuring NCP and CCP*/ ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=IPV4; ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=1; /*Configuring information about the secondary homing RNC on the NodeB*/ /*Configuring NCP and CCP*/ ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=2, BELONG=SLAVE; ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=3, BELONG=SLAVE; /*Verifying RNC Node Redundancy*///RNC202 DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=1; //RNC203 DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=2; //RNC202 RST UIU: CnOpIndex=0, CNDOMAINID= ALL_DOMAIN, RSTCNTYPE=ALL_NODES; //RNC202 DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


750



//RNC203 DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=2; //Deactivating RNC Node Redundancy //RNC202&RNC203 DEA URNCPOOL: RncPoolIndex=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


751



226

Configuring RRU Redundancy

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-040203 RRU Redundancy.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context RRU redundancy can improve the reliability and robustness of the RAN and shorten the duration of service disruption caused by an RRU failure, improving service quality.

Procedure l

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


If a cell is configured as a MIMO cell or a transmit diversity cell, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) or MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell Capability Auto Handle Switch to TX_DIVERSITY_ON_TO_OFF (TX diversity capability is on to off) or TX_DIVERSITY_OFF_TO_ON(TX diversity capability is off to on). Both the options can be selected.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to ensure the local cell uses two power amplifiers.


752


l


1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELLALGOSWITCH to check that Cell Capability Auto Handle Switch is set to TX diversity capability is on to off::ON or TX diversity capability is off to on::ON.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to query whether the local cell is configured with two power amplifiers.

Deactivation Procedure This feature need not be deactivated.

----End

Example //Activation procedure //When a cell is configured as a MIMO and transmit diversity cell, do as follows: ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_SECOND, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_SECOND, CellCapacityAutoHandleSwitch=TX_DIVERSITY_ON_TO_OFF-1&TX_DIVERSITY_OFF_TO _ON-1; //Or MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, CellCapacityAutoHandleSwitch=TX_DIVERSITY_ON_TO_OFF-1&TX_DIVERSITY_OFF_TO _ON-1; //Ensure that the local cell uses two power amplifiers. ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=0, STN=0, SECN=0, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, RADIUS=10000, HORAD=150, TTW=TRUE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ULFREQ=9610, DLFREQ=10560, MXPWR=430, HISPM=TRUE, SPR=250, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=FALSE;, //Verification procedure //Querying the cell algorithm switch LST UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1; //Checking whether the local cell is configured with two power amplifiers LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=10;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


753



227

Configuring Iu Flex

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021302 Iu Flex.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The MSC and the serving GPRS support node (SGSN) support this feature.

Context This feature allows one BSC6900 to connect to multiple MSCs and/or SGSNs, and these CS/ PS domain nodes can form different pools that serve the same pool area.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORCFGPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operator Configuration Information; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Feature Supporting Mode of CS Domain to SUPP_IUFLEX, set Feature Supporting Mode of PS Domain to SUPP_IUFLEX, and set Length of CS NRI in bits and Length of PS NRI in bits to appropriate values.

2.

Configure the Iu interface transmission between BSC6900 and multiple core networks (CNs) by referring to Configuring the Interfaces.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNNODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Core Network > UMTS CN Node; CME Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

754



batch modification center: not supported) to add multiple CN nodes for an operator according to the network plan. 4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Core Network > NRI And CN Node Mapping Information; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Cn Operator Index, CN node ID, and Network resource identity to configure the mapping relationships between NRI and CN nodes.

5.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIMSIIDNNSCNIDMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Core Network > IMSI Route Parameters and CN Node Mapping Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the mapping relationships between international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) ranges and CN nodes. After configuring the mapping relationships, the RNC routes the UE whose IMSI is within the IMSI range to the specified CN.

l

l


Enable the UE to access a cell and register in the cell.

2.

According to the mapping relationships between IMSI ranges and CN nodes and the load balance algorithm, the RNC selects a CN node for the UE, and the UE registers successfully.

3.

Then, if the UE initiates a service, the RNC routes the UE to the corresponding CN node according to the mapping relationships between NRI and CN nodes.


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UIMSIIDNNSCNIDMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Core Network > IMSI Route Parameters and CN Node Mapping Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove IMSI Route Parameters and CN Node Mapping Information (Keep Mapping of one CN Node).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UNRIGLBCNIDMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Core Network > NRI And CN Node Mapping Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove NRI and all of CN Node Mapping Information.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCNNODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Core Network > UMTS CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove CN Node (Keep one CN Node).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORCFGPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operator Configuration Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate this feature. In this step, set Feature Supporting Mode of CS Domain to SUPP_NONE, set Feature Supporting Mode of PS Domain to SUPP_NONE.

----End

Example //Activating Iu Flex //Configuring the RNC supporting Iu Flex with Length of CS NRI in bits and Length of PS NRI in bits set to appropriate values SET UOPERATORCFGPARA: CnOpIndex=1, CsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX, PsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX, CSNRILength=5, PSNRILength=5;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


755



//Configuring the first CN node ADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, Dpx=2, CNProtclVer=R6, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=1000, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF; //Configuring the second CN node ADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=18, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, Dpx=3, CNProtclVer=R6, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=1000, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF; //Configuring the mapping relationship between NRI and the first CN node ADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17, NRI=8; //Configuring the mapping relationship between NRI and the second CN node ADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=18, NRI=9; //Configuring the mapping relationship between the IMSI range and the first CN node ADD UIMSIIDNNSCNIDMAP: ImsiRtMin=0, ImsiRtMax=666, CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17; //Configuring the mapping relationship between the IMSI range and the second CN node ADD UIMSIIDNNSCNIDMAP: ImsiRtMin=667, ImsiRtMax=999, CnOpIndex=1, CNId=18;

//Deactivating Iu Flex RMV UIMSIIDNNSCNIDMAP: ImsiRtMin=667, ImsiRtMax=999, CnOpIndex=1, CNId=18; RMV UNRIGLBCNIDMAP: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=18, NRI=9; RMV UNRIGLBCNIDMAP: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17, NRI=8; RMV UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=18; SET UOPERATORCFGPARA: CnOpIndex=1, CsNriCfgMode=SUPP_NONE, PsNriCfgMode=SUPP_NONE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


756



228

Configuring Iu Flex Load

Distribution Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021306 Iu Flex Load Distribution Management.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-021302 Iu Flex has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The CN supports dynamic capacity management and load redistribution.

Context This feature enables load balancing and load redistribution among multiple CN nodes when Iu Flex is deployed. The BSC6900 supports dynamic and static management of CN capacity and status information.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Configuring load balancing in static capacity mode 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNNODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Core Network > UMTS CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Capability of CN Node to an appropriate value. The BSC6900 performs load balancing between CN nodes based on the configured CN capacities.

– Configuring load balancing in dynamic capacity mode Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


757



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORCFGPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operator Configuration Information; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step: – Set Feature Supporting Mode of CS Domain to SUPP_IUFLEX. – Set Feature Supporting Mode of PS Domain to SUPP_IUFLEX. – Set CS Information Update Switch to ON. – Set PS Information Update Switch to ON. NOTE

Load balancing in dynamic capacity mode takes effect only when the BSC6900 is connected to Huawei CN and the preceding switches related to Iu Flex are turned on.

– Configuring load redistribution based on NullNRI 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCNNODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Core Network > UMTS CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Status of CN Node to OFFLOAD.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORCFGPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operator Configuration Information; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set NullNRI VALUE to an appropriate value based on the network plan.

– Configuring load redistribution based on Block CN Node 1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCNNODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Core Network > UMTS CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Status of CN Node to NORMAL and select the RSVDBIT1_BIT1 check box under the parameter Reserved parameter 1.

Verification Procedure – Verifying load balancing in static capacity mode 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCNNODE to query the capacity ratio of CN nodes.

2.

Check the following performance counters on the M2000 to verify that the BSC6900 performs load balancing based on the preconfigured CN capacity: – Performance counters for CS service setup: – VS.IU.LdBalRtCS.IMSI – VS.IU.LdBalRtCS.InValidNRI – VS.IU.LdBalRtCS.IMEI – Performance counters for PS service setup: – VS.IU.Load.RoutePS.IMSI – VS.IU.Load.RoutePS.NRI – VS.IU.Load.RoutePS.IMEI

– Verifying load balancing in dynamic capacity mode 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCNNODE to query the capacity ratio of CN nodes. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

758



2.

On the BSC6900 LMT, choose Trace > UMTS Services to initiate Uu and Iu interface message tracing.

3.

Check the traced messages. If the CN sends the BSC6900 an INFORMATION TRANSFER INDICATION message, the dynamic CN capacity ratio is updated and used. If the CN does not send any INFORMATION TRANSFER INDICATION message to the BSC6900, the static CN capacity ratio is used.

4.

Check the following performance counters on the M2000 to verify that the BSC6900 performs load balancing based on the dynamic CN capacity ratio: – Performance counters for CS service setup: – VS.IU.LdBalRtCS.IMSI – VS.IU.LdBalRtCS.InValidNRI – VS.IU.LdBalRtCS.IMEI – Performance counters for PS service setup: – VS.IU.Load.RoutePS.IMSI – VS.IU.Load.RoutePS.NRI – VS.IU.Load.RoutePS.IMEI

– Verifying load redistribution based on NullNRI 1.


2.

Power off the UE. The PTMSI of the UE is assigned by SGSN1.

3.

Set SGSN1 to the OFFLOAD state and SGSN2 to the NORMAL state on the RNC.

4.

Set SGSN1 to the OFFLOAD state on SGSN1.

5.

Power on the UE and the UE makes an attach request. Check the traced Iu interface messages. The expected result is as follows: – The BSC6900 routes the RRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANSFER message to SGSN1 based on NULL NRI. The attach reception message from SGSN1 contains NULL NRI and non-broadcasting location areas. – After receiving the non-broadcasting location areas, the UE sends a new routing area update (RAU) request and contains NULL NRI in the RRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANSFER message. The BSC6900 routes the RRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANSFER message to SGSN2, of which the state is not OFFLOAD, based on NULL NRI.

– Verifying load redistribution based on Block CN Node 1.


2.

Power off the UE. The PTMSI of the UE is assigned by SGSN1.

3.

Set SGSN1 to the BLOCK state and SGSN2 to the NORMAL state on the RNC.

4.

Power on the UE and the UE makes an attach request. Check the RRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANSFER message traced on the Iu interface. Expected result: The RRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANSFER message contains NRI of SGSN1. The BSC6900 routes the RRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANSFER message to SGSN2 because SGSN1 is in the BLOCK state.

l

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivating load balancing in static capacity mode

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


759



Load balancing in static capacity mode does not need to be deactivated. – Deactivating load balancing in dynamic capacity mode 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORCFGPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operator Configuration Information; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set CS Information Update Switch to OFF and PS Information Update Switch to OFF.

– Deactivating load redistribution based on NullNRI 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCNNODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Core Network > UMTS CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Status of CN Node to NORMAL.

– Deactivating load redistribution based on Block CN Node 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCNNODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Core Network > UMTS CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Status of CN Node to NORMAL and deselect the RSVDBIT1_BIT1 check box under the parameter Reserved parameter 1.

----End

Example //Activating Iu Flex Load Distribution Management //Configuring Load balancing in static capacity mode ADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, Dpx=2, CNProtclVer=R6, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=1000, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF; //Configuring load balancing in dynamic capacity mode SET UOPERATORCFGPARA: CnOpIndex=1, CsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX, PsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX, CSNRILength=5, CsInfoUpdFlag=ON, PsInfoUpdFlag=ON; //Configuring load redistribution based on NullNRI MOD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, CNLoadStatus=OFFLOAD, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF; SET UOPERATORCFGPARA: CnOpIndex=1, CsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX, CSNRILength=5, NullNRI=31; //Configuring load redistribution based on Block CN Node MOD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN,CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF, RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT1-1; //Deactivating Iu Flex Load Distribution Management //Deactivating load balancing in dynamic capacity mode SET UOPERATORCFGPARA: CnOpIndex=1, CsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX, PsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX, CSNRILength=5, CsInfoUpdFlag=OFF, PsInfoUpdFlag=OFF; //Deactivating load redistribution based on NullNRI MOD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF; //Deactivating load redistribution based on Block CN Node

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


760



MOD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF, RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT1-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


761



229

Configuring Transmit Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010203 Transmit Diversity. Transmit diversity enables the NodeB to provide twice the number of RF DL channels compared with no transmit diversity.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – TX diversity requires the NodeB to provide two times RF channel resources compared with no TX diversity mode. In TX diversity mode, the UE must support diversity reception, STTD, TSTD, and CLD1.

l


l


l

Others – The UE must support diversity reception, STTD, TSTD, and CLD1.

Context l

The feature supports STTD, TSTD, and CLD1 to effectively improve the reception performance of the UE.

l

The transmit diversity feature improves terminal performance in special circumstances. Especially when multipath fading is not obvious and the UE is not moving fast, capacity and coverage can be significantly improved. The investment can be reduced while the same QoS is guaranteed. In this way, operators can reduce the CAPEX and the OPEX.

l


Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the transmit diversity mode. Transmit diversity mode consists of Space Time Transmit Diversity (STTD) mode and closed loop TX diversity mode 1 (CP1). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

762


l


Set TX Diversity Indication to TRUE.

b.

Set STTD Support Indicator to STTD_Supported.

c.

Set CP1 Support Indicator to CP1_Supported.

d.

Set Tx Diversity Mode for User to STTD or CP1. As specified in 3GPP TS 25.211, the FDPCH can only use the STTD mode.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Sector; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a sector. In this step, set Diversity Mode to COMMON_MODE(COMMON MODE) and configure the antenna data in line with the hardware deployment scheme.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add a sector. In this step, set Two Tx Way to TRUE and configure the antenna data in line with the hardware deployment scheme.


l

a.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP LOCELL to query the status of a specified local cell. Expected result: The value of Cell Transmit Diversity Status is Enabled.


----End

Example //Activation procedure MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=2, TxDiversityInd=TRUE, STTDSupInd=STTD_Supported, CP1SupInd=CP1_Supported, ClosedLoopTimeAdjustMode=OFFSET1, DpchDivModforOther=STTD, FdpchDivModforOther=STTD, DpchDivModforMIMO=STTD, FdpchDivModforMIMO=STTD, DivModforDCHSDPA=STTD; ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, ANTM=2, DIVM=COMMON_MODE, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1N=R0A, ANT2SRN=61, ANT2N=R0A; ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=TRUE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, ULFREQ=9700, DLFREQ=10650, MXPWR=430, HISPM=FALSE, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=FALSE; //Verification procedure DSP LOCELL: LOCELL=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


763


230 Configuring 4-Antenna Receive Diversity

230

Configuring 4-Antenna Receive Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010209 4-Antenna Receive Diversity.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The RX diversity requires the Node B to provide enough RF channels and demodulation resources that can match the number of diversity antennas. – BTS3902E can't support this feature.

l


l


Context l

Compared with 2-Antenna Receive Diversity, 4-Antenna Receive Diversity provides the NodeB with twice the number of RF UL channels. In this way, a bigger UL coverage gain can be obtained.

l

4-antenna Receive Diversity improves the receiver sensitivity and the uplink coverage, so that the CAPEX can be reduced.

l


Procedure

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Sector; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Antenna Magnitude to 4. Set Antenna Channel1 No., Antenna Channel2 No., Antenna Channel3 No., Antenna Channel4 No., their respective cabinet numbers, and subrack numbers.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD ULGROUP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > UL/DL BB Resource Group > ULGROUP; CME batch modification center: not supported). In Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

764


230 Configuring 4-Antenna Receive Diversity

this step, set Demodulation Work Mode to DEM_4_CHAN(4-Channels Demodulation Mode) or DEM_ECON_4_CHAN(Economical 4-Channels Demodulation Mode). l


l

Run the NodeB MML command LST SEC to check that the preceding parameters are correctly configured.


----End

Example l

NodeB V200R014 //Activation procedure ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=0, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, ANTM=4, ANT1CN=0, ANT1SRN=4, ANT1N=N0A, ANT2CN=0, ANT2SRN=4, ANT2N=N0B, ANT3CN=0, ANT3SRN=4, ANT3N=N1A, ANT4CN=0, ANT4SRN=4, ANT4N=N1B; ADD ULGROUP: ULGROUPN=0, DEMMODE=DEM_4_CHAN, SNE1=0; //Verification procedure LST SEC: STN=0, SECN=0;

l

NodeB V100R014 //Activation procedure ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=0, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, ANTM=4, ANT1SRN=2, ANT1N=N0A, ANT2SRN=2, ANT2N=N0B, ANT3SRN=2, ANT3N=N1A, ANT4SRN=2, ANT4N=N1B; ADD ULGROUP: ULGROUPN=0, DEMMODE=DEM_4_CHAN, SNE1=0; //Verification procedure LST SEC: STN=0, SECN=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


765



231

Configuring Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021308 Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – All types of baseband boards support this feature. However, only the WBBPb, WBBPd (3900 series NodeB), EBBI, EBOI, EULP, EULPd (BTS3812E/AE), and EBBC/ EBBCd/EBBM (DBS3800) support remote cell groups. – BTS3902E can't support this feature.

l


l


Context l

This feature enables the operator to use a few NodeBs to extend the cell coverage.

l

This feature extends the cell coverage to very remote areas with the fewest sites.

l


Procedure

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UAICH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > AICH; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set AICH Transmission Timing to 1.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPRACHBASIC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > PRACH Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, select available RACH sub channels in the cell from the RACH Sub Channel No. list.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

766



Information; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Max Transmit Power of Cell to the maximum cell transmit power that is configured on the NodeB side. 4.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD REMOTECELLGRP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Other Information > REMOTECELLGRP; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Remote Cell Group No and Remote Cell Group Name. In case of setting the remote cell to save boards, carry out Step 6. Otherwise, do not carry out Step 6.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Remote Cell Mode to TRUE and set Index of Remote Cell Group to the same value as that of Remote Cell Group No.

6.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UPRACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > PRACH Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported), set sub channel of every cell, select sub channel from RACH Sub Channel No.. NOTE

l Only 3 sub channels can be set for every cell, and no repeated sub channel exists. The 3 sub channels need to be fixed as follows: l sub-channel 0, sub-channel 1 and sub-channel 2 l sub-channel 4, sub-channel 5 and sub-channel 6 l sub-channel 8, sub-channel 9 and sub-channel 10 l When adding logical cell on BSC6900, the parameter Time Offset needs to be set to CHIP0, CHIP256 or CHIP512.

l

l


Run the NodeB MML command LST REMOTECELLGRP to check that the remote cell group is configured.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to check that the local cell is set to a remote cell and that Remote Cell Mode is set to TRUE.


----End

Example //Activation procedure //Configuration on the BSC6900 side ADD UAICH: CELLID=1; ADD UPRACHBASIC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, PreambleSignatures=SIGNATURE0-1, RACHSubChNo=SUBCHANEL0-1&SUBCHANEL1-1&SUBCHANEL2-1, Constantvalue=-23, PreambleRetransMax=20, PowerRampStep=2, CTFCSize=BIT2; MOD UCELL: CellId=2, MaxTxPower=430; ADD UPCPICH: CELLID=1, PHYCHID=2, PCPICHPOWER=330, MAXPCPICHPOWER=346, MINPCPICHPOWER=313; //Configuration on the NodeB side ADD REMOTECELLGRP: REMOTECELLGRPINDEX=1, REMOTECELLGRPNAME="test"; ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=1, SECN=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, CN1=0, SRN1=4, SN1=0, ULFREQ=9700, DLFREQ=10600, MXPWR=430, HISPM=FALSE,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


767



RMTCM=TRUE, RMTCGRPID=1, VAM=FALSE; Configuration on the BSC6900 side MOD UPRACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=0, RACHSubChNo=SUBCHANEL0-1&SUBCHANEL1-1&SUBCHANEL2-1; //Verification procedure LST REMOTECELLGRP: REMOTECELLGRPINDEX=1; LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


768



232

Configuring HSUPA Coverage

Enhancement at UE Power Limitation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020138 HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – There is no requirement for BSC6900or NodeB. – The UE supports this feature.

l


l


l

Others – The UE needs to support 3GPP Release 8 or later. It also needs to support improved EUL power control at UE power limitation.

Context Compared with the traditional power compression technology, this feature provides an enhanced power compression function. This feature optimizes the size of a data block and the E-DPDCH power offset, improving the HSUPA performance at cell edge.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

769



PC_HSUPA_COVER_EN_AT_POLIMIT_SWITCH check box from Power Control Switch to activate the feature. 2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABHSUPAPC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > Typical RAB HSUPA Power Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set Minimum Reduced E-DPDCH Gain Factor.

Verification Procedure Start Uu Interface Trace on the LMT to trace messages on the Uu interface. View the RRC_RB_SETUP message, as shown in Figure 232-1. If the e-DPDCH-info message contains the minReduced-E-DPDCH-GainFactor information element (IE), it indicates that this feature takes effect, and the BSC6900 sends the UE the transmit power of the data channel. Figure 232-1 Viewing the minReduced-E-DPDCH-GainFactor IE

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to clear PC_HSUPA_COVER_EN_AT_POLIMIT_SWITCH check box from Power Control Switch to deactivate the feature.

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Enabling the feature SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_COVER_EN_AT_POLIMIT_SWITCH-1; //Setting the Minimum Reduced E-DPDCH Gain Factor parameter MOD UTYPRABHSUPAPC:RABINDEX=0, SUBFLOWINDEX=0, TRCHTYPE=TRCH_EDCH_2MS, UL16QAMIND=FALSE, ULL2ENHANCEIND=FALSE, EDPWRINTERPOLATIONIND=FALSE, ULECBOOSTINGIND=FALSE, BETAEDMIN=4; //Deactivation procedure

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


770



//Disabling the feature SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_COVER_EN_AT_POLIMIT_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


771



233

Configuring Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021001 Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – For 4.6M~5M(including 4.6M), all the RF module can support this feature. – For 4.0M~4.6M(excluding 4.6M), only 850M/1900M RRU3804, 850M WRFU, MRFU V1/V2 and MRRU V1/V2, WRFUd, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3928, RRU3929, MRFUd, MRFUe can support this feature.

l


l


Context To help an operator adapt to insufficient frequency resources, Huawei supports flexible frequency spacing. In network planning, to address insufficient bandwidth resources, an operator can plan a frequency spacing that is lower than the frequency spacing in the case of 5.0 MHz UMTS carrier bandwidth. Accordingly, the effective bandwidth of the RRU or RFU carrier is adjusted so that the carrier works in a suitable status with suitable algorithms and parameters. In this way, network performance on a low- spacing frequency is optimized as much as possible. When deploying a UMTS site, one needs to adjust the minimal effective bandwidth of a UMTS carrier based on the GSM frequency configuration. Otherwise, TRX alarms may occur or network performance may deteriorate.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Before configuring the effective bandwidth of the carrier, run the NodeB MML command LST RRU (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

772



IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > RXU Topology) to check that an RRU is configured for the cell that requires setting of carrier effective bandwidth. If an RRU is not configured, run the NodeB MML command ADD RRU (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > TOPO > Right click RXU CHAIN > Add RXU Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an RRU. 2.

l

Run the NodeB MML command SET FREQBWH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > RUX Topology > Right click RRU > RXU Board Property > Radio Frequency Unit; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the minimal effective bandwidth of the RRU carrier (parameter: Frequency Min Bandwidth).

Verification Procedure Run the NodeB MML command LST FREQBWH to query the effective bandwidth of the RRU carrier and check the returned message.

l

If...

Then...

The effective bandwidth of the carrier matches the configuration.

The configuration succeeds.

The effective bandwidth of the carrier does not match the configuration.

The configuration fails.

Deactivation Procedure Run the NodeB MML command SET FREQBWH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > RUX Topology > Right click RRU > RXU Board Property > Radio Frequency Unit; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the RRU effective bandwidth to 5000 Hz so that the standard configuration of the system is restored.

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET FREQBWH: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, FMBWH=4200; //Verification procedure LST FREQBWH; //Deactivation procedure SET FREQBWH: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, FMBWH=5000;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


773



234

Configuring High Speed Access

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010206 High Speed Access.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – All boards of the 3900 series base stations support High Speed Access. – All boards of the DBS3800 support High Speed Access. – All boards, except the NBBI and NULP, of the BTS3812E and BTS3812AE support the high speed access feature.

l


l


Context The time-selective fading caused by the Doppler effect of a fast-moving UE increases the BER and affects the signals received by the NodeB. The high speed access feature provides the automatic frequency control (AFC) function for the uplink, reducing the Doppler effect and offering reliable services for the UE in high-speed movement. NOTE

l The local sectors, remote sectors and distributed sectors support the high speed access feature. l When the HULP, HBBI, HBBU, or WBBPa is configured to support the high speed access feature, the capability for the board to carry access channels decreases. Each board can support the access channels of only one cell. In addition, the board in a common four-channel demodulation mode does not support high speed access. l When the WBBPb, WBBPd, EBBI, EBOI, EULP, EULPd, EBBC, or EBBCd is configured to support the high speed access feature, the capability of the board does not decrease. The board supports high speed access in any demodulation mode.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


774



CAUTION To enable the high speed access feature in the cells carrying services, deactivate these cells, modify these cells, and then activate these cells. This process disrupts the ongoing services.

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the logical cell of local cell.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to modify the attributes of the specified local cell. In this step, set, High Speed Movement Mode to TRUE. Set Speed Rate as required.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to activate the logical cell of local cell.


l

Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to query the configuration information about the local cell. The query result is returned on the LMT. Check that the values of High Speed Movement Mode and Speed Rate match the configuration.


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the logical cell of local cell.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to modify the attributes of the local cell. In this step, set, High Speed Movement Mode to FALSE.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to activate the logical cell of local cell.

----End

Example //Activation procedure DEA UCELL: CellId=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


775



MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, HISPM=TRUE, SPR=400; ACT UCELL: CellId=1; //Verification procedure LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=1; //Deactivation procedure DEA UCELL: CellId=1; MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, HISPM=FALSE; ACT UCELL: CellId=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


776



235

Configuring Independent

Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021350 Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature supports only DBS3900 series base stations. – The WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board needs to be configured.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature is mutually exclusive to the following features: – WRFD-010203 Transmit Diversity – WRFD-010209 4-Way Receive Diversity – WRFD-010684 2x2 MIMO – WRFD-021308 Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km – WRFD-010701 Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH – WRFD-010692 HSUPA FDE – WRFD-020102 Load Measurement (based on the report of actual service load) – WRFD-140215 Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period – WRFD-140216 Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration

l


Context l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


777



– In multi-RRU cell scenarios, this feature reduces handovers between cells and increases cell capacity and cell throughput. – This feature cannot be used if a base station is configured with the feature transmit diversity, 4-Antenna Receive Diversity, or multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO). – This feature is suitable for high-speed scenarios, such as freeways, high-speed railways, and F1 racing arenas. l

Data Preparation – Configuring an uplink baseband resource group Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Date Source

Demodulation Work Mode

DEMMODE

Set this parameter to DEM_2_CHAN (2-Channels Demodulation Mode). This feature supports only 2-channel demodulation mode.

Network plan

Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Data Source

Sector Type

SECT

Set this parameter Network plan to MULTIRRU_SE CTOR (MULTIRRU_S ECTOR). This parameter value is for the exclusive use of the cell with this feature.

– Configuring a sector

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


778



Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Data Source

Antenna Magnitude

ANTM

Set this parameter based on the site conditions.

Network plan

l Set it to 2 in 1TX+2RX configuration. l Set it to 1 in the 1TX+1RX configuration. l Set it to 2 in the 1TX+1RX and 1TX+2RX hybrid configuration. RRU Number

RRUCOUNT

Number of RRUs used by the cell with this feature.

Network plan

Subrack No.of RRU1

RRU1SRN

Subrack number of Network plan RRU 1. Other RRUs have similar slot numbers.

– Configuring a local cell

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Data Source

Local Cell ID

LOCELL

None

Network plan

Sector Type

SECT

Set this parameter to MULTIRRU_SE CTOR (MULTIRRU_S ECTOR). The configured sector type must be consistent with that of the sector controlling the local cell.

Network plan


779


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Data Source

RRU Mode

RRUMODE

Set this parameter to SYNC(SYNC) when all RRUs of a sector are used. Set this parameter to UNSYNC (UNSYNC) when some RRUs of a sector are used and set other parameters to specify the number of RRUs to be used and their slots.

Network plan

High Speed Movement Mode

HISPM

Setting this parameter to TRUE(TRUE) is recommended if UEs move at 200 km/h or higher. This parameter must be set to FALSE(FALSE) in the case of indoor coverage.

Network plan

Speed Rate

SPR

A high parameter value indicates that a high moving speed of UEs is supported. If the moving speed of UEs exceeds this parameter value, network access performance will decrease sharply. If UEs move at different speeds in the coverage area, set this parameter to the highest moving speed of UEs.

Network plan


780



Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Data Source

Local Cell Radius

RADIUS

The parameter value cannot exceed 30 km when a cell is configured with this feature.

Network plan

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Scenario 1: 1TX+2RX configuration Figure 235-1 shows the hardware configuration of this scenario. The following procedure assumes that RRU 1 is installed at slot 60 and RRU 2 is at slot 61. Figure 235-1 1TX+2RX configuration

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Universal Satellite Control Unit; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a baseband processing board.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD ULGROUP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > UL/DL BB Resource Group > ULGROUP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an uplink resource group.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD DLGROUP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > UL/DL BB Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

781



Resource Group > DLGROUP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a downlink resource group. 4.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD RRUCHAIN (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click TOPO > Add RXU Chain; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an RRU chain.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD RRU (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > TOPO > Right click RXU CHAIN > Add RXU Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an RRU to the RRU chain.

6.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD SITE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Site; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a site.

7.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Sector; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a sector.

8.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add a local cell.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click NodeB > Add UMTS Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a cell.

– Scenario 2: 1TX+1RX configuration Figure 235-2 shows the hardware configuration of this scenario. The following procedure assumes that RRU 1 to RRU 3 are installed in slot 60 to 62, respectively. Figure 235-2 1TX+1RX configuration

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


782



1.


2.


3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD DLGROUP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > UL/DL BB Resource Group > DLGROUP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a downlink resource group.

4.


5.


6.


7.


8.


9.


– Scenario 3: 1TX+1RX and 1TX+2RX hybrid configuration Figure 235-3 shows the hardware configuration of this scenario. The following procedure assumes that RRU 1 to RRU 4 are installed in slot 60 to 63, respectively.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


783



Figure 235-3 1TX+1RX and 1TX+2RX hybrid configuration

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.


2.


3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD DLGROUP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > UL/DL BB Resource Group > DLGROUP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a downlink resource group.

4.


5.


6.


7.



784


235 Configuring Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell NOTE

If an RRU requires only one antenna, set the unused antenna to NULL for the RRU by running the ADD SEC (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Sector; CME batch modification center: not supported) command.

l

l

8.


9.



Run the NodeB MML command LST SEC to query configured sectors. Expected result: The value of Sector Type is MULTIRRU_SECTOR (MULTIRRU_SECTOR).

2.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP LOCELL to query the local cell. Expected result: The value of Local Cell Status is Local Cell Available.

3.

Optional: After the corresponding logical cell is activated, perform drive tests to check for coverage holes and weak coverage areas.

Deactivation Procedure Deactivate the corresponding logical cell on the RNC, and then remove the local cell and sector on the NodeB. After this feature is deactivated, the released resources, such as the RF components and baseband processing board, can be used for other cells. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate a specified logical cell on the RNC.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a specified local cell of the NodeB.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV SEC (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Sector; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a specified sector of the NodeB.

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Scenario 1: 1TX+2RX configuration ADD BRD: SN=3, BT=WBBP, WM=FDD, HCE=FULL; ADD ULGROUP: ULGROUPN=0, DEMMODE=DEM_2_CHAN, SNE1=3; ADD DLGROUP: DLGROUPN=0, SNE1=3; ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, BM=COLD, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=1, PS=0, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, RXNUM=2, TXNUM=1; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=1, PS=1, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, RXNUM=2, TXNUM=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


785



ADD SITE: STN=0, STNAME="Dongguan Station on Guangzhou-Shenzhen Express"; ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=0, SECT=MULTIRRU_SECTOR, ANTM=2, RRUCOUNT=2, RRU1SRN=60, RRU2SRN=61; ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=102001, STN=0, SECN=0, SECT=MULTIRRU_SECTOR, RRUMODE=SYNC, ULFREQ=10560, DLFREQ=9610, MXPWR=430, HISPM=TRUE, SPR=250; ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=1, CellName="Cell1", PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=1, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNDownlink=10562, PScrambCode=0, TCell=CHIP256, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00, SpgId=6, URANUM=D8, URA1=1, URA2=2, URA3=3, URA4=4, URA5=5, URA6=6, URA7=7, URA8=8, NodeBName="NodeB1", LoCell=102001, SupBmc=FALSE; //Scenario 2: 1TX+1RX configuration ADD BRD: SN=3, BT=WBBP, WM=FDD, HCE=FULL; ADD ULGROUP: ULGROUPN=0, DEMMODE=DEM_2_CHAN, SNE1=3; ADD DLGROUP: DLGROUPN=0, SNE1=3; ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, BM=COLD, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=1, PS=0, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, RXNUM=2, TXNUM=1; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=1, PS=1, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, RXNUM=2, TXNUM=1; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=62, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=1, PS=2, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, RXNUM=2, TXNUM=1; ADD SITE: STN=0, STNAME="Jinmao Building"; ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=0, SECT=MULTIRRU_SECTOR, ANTM=1, RRUCOUNT=3, RRU1SRN=60, RRU2SRN=61, RRU3SRN=62; ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=102001, STN=0, SECN=0, SECT=MULTIRRU_SECTOR, RRUMODE=SYNC, ULFREQ=10560, DLFREQ=9610, MXPWR=430, HISPM=FALSE; ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=1, CellName="Cell1", PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=1, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNDownlink=10562, PScrambCode=0, TCell=CHIP256, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00, SpgId=6, URANUM=D8, URA1=1, URA2=2, URA3=3, URA4=4, URA5=5, URA6=6, URA7=7, URA8=8, NodeBName="NodeB1", LoCell=102001, SupBmc=FALSE; //Scenario 3: 1TX+1RX and 1TX+2RX hybrid configuration ADD BRD: SN=3, BT=WBBP, WM=FDD, HCE=FULL; ADD ULGROUP: ULGROUPN=0, DEMMODE=DEM_2_CHAN, SNE1=3; ADD DLGROUP: DLGROUPN=0, SNE1=3; ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, BM=COLD, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=1, PS=0, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, RXNUM=2, TXNUM=1; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=1, PS=1, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, RXNUM=2, TXNUM=1; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=62, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=1, PS=2, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, RXNUM=2, TXNUM=1; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=63, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=1, PS=3, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, RXNUM=2, TXNUM=1; ADD SITE: STN=0, STNAME="Zone C in Tianfu Software Park"; ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=0, SECT=MULTIRRU_SECTOR, ANTM=2, RRUCOUNT=4, RRU1SRN=60, RRU1ANT2N=NULL, RRU2SRN=61, RRU2ANT2N=NULL, RRU3SRN=62, RRU4SRN=63; ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=102001, STN=0, SECN=0, SECT=MULTIRRU_SECTOR, RRUMODE=SYNC, ULFREQ=10560, DLFREQ=9610, MXPWR=430, HISPM=FALSE; ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=1, CellName="Cell1", PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=1, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNDownlink=10562, PScrambCode=0, TCell=CHIP256, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00, SpgId=6, URANUM=D8, URA1=1, URA2=2, URA3=3, URA4=4, URA5=5, URA6=6, URA7=7, URA8=8, NodeBName="NodeB1", LoCell=102001, SupBmc=FALSE; //Verification procedure LST SEC: STN=0, SECN=0; DSP LOCELL: LOCELL=102001; //Deactivation procedure DEA UCELL: CellId=1; RMV LOCELL: LOCELL=102001; RMV SEC: STN=0, SECN=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


786



236

Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020302 Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE supports relevant measurements and the handover procedure.

Context This feature introduces inter-frequency hard handover triggered by Active Set quality measurement event 2D or by Uplink Radio Link Qos or emergency blind handover triggered by event 1F.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH from the HandOver Switch dropdown list.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > InterHuawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

787



frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an inter-frequency neighboring cell. 3.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLINTERFREQHOCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented Coverage Based Inter-frequency Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) (cell level) or SET UINTERFREQHOCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Coverage Based Inter-frequency Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) (RNC level) to configure parameters related to coverage-based inter-frequency hard handover.


Attenuate signals in the current cell that the UE accesses to trigger reporting of event 2D by the UE.

2.

Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT.

3.

Check whether the RNC has sent the UE an RRC_MEAS_CTRL message and the traced message contains thresholds for triggering events 2D and 2F and the reporting mode.

4.

Check whether the RNC has sent the UE an RRC_MEAS_RPRT message and the traced message contains an event 2D measurement report shown in Figure 236-1. Figure 236-1 Event 2D measurement report

5.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

After the event 2D measurement report is reported, check whether the RNC has sent the UE an RRC_MEAS_CTRL message and the traced message contains the information element interFrequencyMeasurement, as shown in Figure 236-2.


788



Figure 236-2 Inter-frequency measurement control message

6.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

After the inter-frequency measurement control message is reported, check whether the RNC has sent the UE an RRC_PH_CH_RECFG message, and the UE has sent the RNC RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_CMP message, as shown in Figure 236-3 and Figure 236-4.


789



Figure 236-3 Physical channel reconfiguration message

Figure 236-4 Physical channel reconfiguration complete message

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH from HandOver Switch.

----End

Example //Activating Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1 ADD UINTERFREQNCELL:RncId=1, CellId=1, NCellRncId=9, NCellId=100, CIOOffset=0, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, HOCovPrio=1, BlindHOFlag=FALSE, NPrioFlag=FALSE; ADD UCELLINTERFREQHOCOV: CellId=1, InterFreqReportMode=PERIODICAL_REPORTING, InterFreqMeasTime=60; //Deactivating Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


790



237

Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020304 Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-020302 Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage must be configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context When the load of services is high in a cell and downlink QoS decreases, this feature enables the UE to be handed over to an inter-frequency cell, guaranteeing QoS requirements.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to activate the inter-frequency hard handover.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Interfrequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an inter-frequency neighboring cell.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLINTERFREQHOCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

791



Oriented Coverage Based Inter-frequency Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) (cell level) or SET UINTERFREQHOCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Coverage Based Inter-frequency Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) (BSC6900 level) to configure parameters related to DL-QoS-based inter-frequency hard handover.

l

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > QOS Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented QoS Enhancement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to activate interfrequency hard handover based on downlink QoS for BE services.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > QOS Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented QoS Enhancement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to activate interfrequency hard handover based on downlink QoS for AMR and AMR-WB services.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > QOS Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented QoS Enhancement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to activate interfrequency hard handover based on downlink QoS for VP services.


Log in to the BSC6900 LMT and start Uu Interface Trace.

2.

Ensure that the RNC sends to the NodeB an NBAP_DEDI_MEAS_INIT_REQ message, which carries the event E parameter, as shown in Figure 237-1. Figure 237-1 NBAP_DEDI_MEAS_INIT_REQ message

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


792


l


3.

Ensure that the NodeB reports to the RNC an NBAP_DEDI_MEAS_RPRT message, which carries the event E parameter.

4.

Ensure that the RNC sends to the UE an RRC_MEAS_CTRL message and starts inter-frequency measurement of the event or period type. Then, check that the corresponding traced message indicates that the RNC has sent the inter-frequency measurement control message to the UE.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > QOS Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented QoS Enhancement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate inter-frequency hard handover based on downlink QoS for BE services.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > QOS Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented QoS Enhancement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate inter-frequency hard handover based on downlink QoS for AMR and AMR-WB services.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > QOS Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented QoS Enhancement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate inter-frequency hard handover based on downlink QoS for VP services.

----End

Example //Activating Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1; ADD UINTERFREQNCELL:RncId=1, CellId=1, NCellRncId=9, NCellId=100, CIOOffset=0, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, HOCovPrio=1, BlindHOFlag=FALSE, NPrioFlag=FALSE; ADD UCELLQOSHO: CellId=111, DlRscpQosHyst=5, DLQosMcTimerLen=20, ULQosMcTimerLen=20; SET UQOSACT: BEQosPerform=YES, BeDlAct1=InterFreqHO; SET UQOSACT: AMRQosPerform=YES, DlQosAmrInterFreqHoSwitch=YES, DlQosWAmrInterFreqHoSwitch=YES; SET UQOSACT: VPQosPerform=YES, DlQosVpInterFreqHoSwitch=YES; //Deactivating Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS RMV UCELLQOSHO: CellId=111; SET UQOSACT: BEQosPerform=NO; or SET UQOSACT: BEQosPerform=YES, BeDlAct1=None, BeDlAct2=None, BeDlAct3=None; SET UQOSACT: AMRQosPerform=NO; or SET UQOSACT: AMRQosPerform=YES, DlQosAmrInterFreqHoSwitch=NO, DlQosWAmrInterFreqHoSwitch=NO; SET UQOSACT: VPQosPerform=NO; or SET UQOSACT: VPQosPerform=YES, DlQosVpInterFreqHoSwitch=NO;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


793



238

Configuring SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02060501 SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-020605 SRNS Relocation Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Others Prerequisites – The CN supports this feature. – Both the SRNC and the DRNC support this feature.

Context This feature supports the SRNS relocation procedure based on the standard Iu interface defined by 3GPP specifications. The static SRNS relocation procedure does not involve the UE and radio connections are not affected during the relocation. Therefore, static SRNS relocation is an optimal relocation mode.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address to an interface board.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPOAPVC to add an Internet Protocol over ATM (IPoA) permanent virtual circuit (PVC). In this step: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

794



– Set IP address to the device IP address of the interface board. – Set Peer IP address to the IP address of the serving GPRS support node (SGSN). – The VPI and VCI must be the same as those configured on the SGSN side. You can run the command LST IPOA on the SGSN maintenance terminal to query the settings of the VPI and VCI on the SGSN side. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT to add a route from the BSC6900 to the DRNC. In this step: – Set Subrack No. and Slot No. respectively to the subrack number and slot number of the Iu-PS interface board carrying the IP path. – Set Destination IP Address to the IP address of the DRNC on the Iu interface. – Set Forward route address to the IP address of the SGSN gateway.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path for static SRNS relocation. In this step: – Set Adjacent Node ID to the adjacent node ID of the SGSN. – Set Interface Type to IUR(Iur Interface). – Set Local IP address to the IP address of the SRNC on the Iu interface. – Set Peer IP address to the Iu IP address of the DRNC on the Iu interface.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT3GCELL to add a cell to the neighboring RNC.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL to add an intrafrequency neighboring cell.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, select the HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH check box under the parameter HandOver Switch and select the SRNSR_DSCR_PROPG_DELAY_SWITCH check box under the parameter SRNSR Algorithm Switch. NOTE

SRNS relocation can be triggered by Iur transmission resource optimization, location separation, delay optimization, and separation time. The preceding procedure takes delay optimization as an example to describe the data configuration.

l

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USRNSR. In this step, select the All service check box under the parameter SRNS Relocation-Allowed Traffic Type.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC. In this step, set SHO cross IUR trigger to an appropriate value based on the network plan, and set Handover Type for PS BE Traffic to CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC.


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

The following procedure takes SRNS relocation from SRNC (RNC1) to DRNC (RNC2) as an example. Initiate interface message tracing on both RNC1 LMT and RNC2 LMT. Configure Iu interface message tracing, as shown in Figure 238-1. Configure Iur interface message tracing, as shown in Figure 238-2.


795




Figure 238-2 Iur Interface Trace dialog box

Call drops do not occur during SRNS relocation if all the following messages are traced: – On the Iu interface of RNC1: – RNC1->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED – CN->RNC1 RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND – On the Iu interface of RNC2: – RNC2->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ – CN->RNC2 RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ_ACK – RNC2->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_DETECT – RNC2->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_COMPLETE – On the Iur interface between RNC1 and RNC2: – RNC1->RNC2: RNSAP_RELOCATION_COMMIT Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


796



– On the Iu interface of RNC1: – CN->RNC1 RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND – RNC1->CN RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, deselect the HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH check box under the parameter HandOver Switch and deselect the SRNSR_DSCR_PROPG_DELAY_SWITCH check box under the parameter SRNSR Algorithm Switch.

----End

Example //Activating SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved) //Adding a device IP address to an interface board ADD DEVIP:IPADDR="172.12.10.181", SRN=0, SN=24, MASK="255.255.255.0", DEVTYPE=IPOA_CLIENT_IP, MTU=1696; //Adding an Internet Protocol over ATM (IPoA) permanent virtual circuit (PVC) ADD IPOAPVC:IPADDR="172.12.10.181", PEERIPADDR="172.12.10.254", CARRYT=NCOPT, CARRYNCOPTN=0, CARRYVPI=182, CARRYVCI=50, TXTRFX=105, RXTRFX=105, PEERT=IUPS; //Adding an IP route from the BSC6900 to the DRNC ADD IPRT:SRN=0, SN=24, DSTIP="172.12.10.226", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", NEXTHOP="172.12.10.254", REMARK="Reloc route-RNC226", PRIORITY=HIGH; //Adding an IP path for static SRNS relocation ADD IPPATH:ANI=1, PATHID=3, IPADDR="172.12.10.181", PEERIPADDR="172.12.10.226", VLANFLAG=DISABLE, PATHT=EF, PEERMASK="255.255.255.255", TXBW=100000, RXBW=100000, PATHCHK=DISABLED, ITFT=IUPS, TRMLOADTHINDEX=2; //Adding a cell to the neighboring RNC ADD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=1, CellId=2, CellHostType=SINGLE_HOST, CellName="111", CnOpGrpIndex=0, PScrambCode=0, BandInd=Band2, UARFCNUplinkInd=TRUE, UARFCNUplink=12, UARFCNDownlink=412, TxDiversityInd=FALSE, LAC=1, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, QqualminInd=FALSE, QrxlevminInd=FALSE, MaxAllowedUlTxPowerInd=FALSE, UseOfHcs=NOT_USED, CellCapContainerFdd=DELAY_ACTIVATION_SUPPORT-0, OverLayMobilityFlag=FORBIDDEN, EFachSupInd=FALSE; //Adding an intra-frequency neighboring cell ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=111, NCellRncId=2, NCellId=311, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE; //Setting the BSC6900-level algorithm switch SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1, SrnsrSwitch=SRNSR_DSCR_PROPG_DELAY_SWITCH-1; //Setting the type of service that allows SRNS relocation SET USRNSR: SrnsRabCnDomainType=ALL; //Setting the type of service that allows cross-Iur handovers MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-1&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


797



PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC; MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-1&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1, PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC; //Deactivating SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved) //Setting the BSC6900-level algorithm switch SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-0, SrnsrSwitch=SRNSR_DSCR_PROPG_DELAY_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


798



239

Configuring SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02060502 SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The SRNC and the DRNC must support this feature simultaneously. – The CN must support this feature simultaneously.

Context When the Iur interface is unavailable, this feature enables the UE to move between RNCs. This feature is enabled when the Iur interface does not exist, or the resources for the connection setup on the Iur interface are insufficient.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



2.

UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on Cell 111. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

799


l


3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select HO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH and HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH from the HandOver switch list.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set HHO cross IUR trigger to ON and Handover Type for PS BE Traffic to CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC.


Initiate standard interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT to perform the verifying procedure. No call drops occur during the transition. You can view the transition procedure on the Iu interface tracing pane of RNC1, as shown in Figure 239-1. Take RNC1 as the SRNC, and RNC2 as the DRNC for example. When the Iur interface between RNC1 and RNC2 is unavailable, this feature enables the UE to move between RNCs.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


800



Figure 239-1 SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover

l


----End

Example //Activating SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover //Add an intra-frequency neighboring cell

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


801



ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=111, NCellRncId=2, NCellId=312, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHOFlag=FALSE, NPrioFlag=FALSE; //Select HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH and HO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH from the HandOver switch list SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1&HO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1; //Turn on HHO cross IUR trigger, and set Handover Type for PS BE Traffic to CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, HHOTRIG=ON, PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


802



240

Configuring SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02060503 SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-020605 SRNS Relocation Introduction Package.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The CN and the DRNC must support this feature simultaneously.

Context If the Iur interface supports the Iur-CCH, inter-RNC cell/URA update normally does not trigger the relocation. Instead, the relocation is triggered through the static relocation procedure. SNSR relocation triggered by cell/URA update is performed when the following conditions are met: l

The cell update is complete.

l

The source cell and target cell belong to different RNCs.

l

Between the RNCs exist the Iur interface. The interface does not support the CCH, or the Iur-CCH is not available.

The SNSR relocation can be triggered by cell reselection of UEs in the CELL_FACH, CELL_PCH, or URA_PCH state. The relocation is started after the Cell Update or URA Update message from the UE is forwarded from the target RNC to the source RNC over the Iur interface.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


803



Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the following switches in the Dynamic resource allocation switch parameter: – Set DRA_DCCC_SWITCH to 1. – Set DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH to 1. – Set DRA_PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH to 1.

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer to 10.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set IUR CCH support flag to NO and Handover Type for PS BE Traffic to CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC.


The Iur interface between RNC1 and RNC2 is working properly. On the HLR, set the UE to support background services.

2.

UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on Cell 111.

3.

Trigger state transition so that the UE transits to the CELL_FACH, CELL_PCH, or URA_PCH state.

4.

Initiate standard interface tracing on the RNC LMT to perform the verifying procedure as follows: If the following messages are displayed, you can infer that no call drops occur during the transition. – On the Iu interface tracing pane of RNC1 – RNC1->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED – CN->RNC1 RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND – On the Iu interface tracing pane of RNC2 – RNC2->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ – CN->RNC2 RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ_ACK – RNC2->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_COMPLETE – RNC2->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_DETECT – On the Uu interface tracing pane of RNC2 – UE->RNC2 URA_UPDATE/URA_UPDATE – RNC2->UE URA_UPDATE_CONFIRM/CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM – On the Iur interface tracing pane between RNC1 and RNC2 – RNC2->RNC1 UL_SIGNAL_TRANSF_IND

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


804



– RNC1->RNC2: RNSAP_RELOCATION_COMMIT l


----End

Example //Activating SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update. SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-1&DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_PS_NON_BE_ STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1; SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=10; MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, SuppIurCch=NO, PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


805



241

Configuring Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010615 Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2).

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The CN node and UE must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Context With the Multiple RAB feature, operators have relatively diversified choices of service solutions. If the Multiple RAB feature is enabled, a large quantity of services can be provided for the upper layers. Huawei products support the following solutions with more than one PS RAB: l

Combination of two PS services

l

Combination of one CS service and two PS services

l

Combination of three PS services

l

Combination of one CS service and three PS services

l

Combination of four PS services

l


Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

806



Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select the CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH check box under the Channel configuration strategy switch parameter. l


l

Details see the verification procedure of following features: 242 Configuring Combination of Two PS Services, 243 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services, 244 Configuring Combination of Three PS Services, 245 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services and 246 Configuring Combination of Four PS Services.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to clear the CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH check box under the Channel configuration strategy switch parameter.

----End

Example //Activating Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2). SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2). SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


807



242

Configuring Combination of Two PS Services

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061501 Combination of Two PS Services.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010615 Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2).

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE supports the combination of two PS services. – The CN node and UE must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Context With the Multiple RAB feature, operators have relatively diversified choices of service solutions.

Procedure l


l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select the CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH check box under the Channel configuration strategy switch parameter.


808


l


1.

Connect the UE to the portable computer so as to use the UE as a modem.

2.

Visit the Internet on the UE. Verify that web pages are displayed normally.

3.

On the portable computer, connect to an FTP server and download data. Verify that the data is downloaded normally.



----End

Example //Activating Combination of Two PS Services. SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating Combination of Two PS Services. SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


809



243

Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061502 Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE supports the combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services. – The CN node and UE must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.


Procedure l


l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



810


l


1.

Have two UEs ready: UE 1 and UE 2.

2.

Connect UE 1 to the portable computer so as to use the UE 1 as a modem.

3.

Visit the Internet on UE 1. Verify that web pages are displayed normally (a PS Service).

4.

On the portable computer, connect to an FTP server and download data. Verify that the data is downloaded normally (a PS Service).

5.

Use UE 2 to call UE 1. Verify that UE 1 rings and the speech quality is acceptable (a CS Service).



----End

Example //Activating Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services. SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services. SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


811



244

Configuring Combination of Three PS Services

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061503 Combination of Three PS Services.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE supports the Combination of Three PS Services. – The CN node and UE must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.


Procedure l


l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



812


l


1.

Connect UE to the portable computer so as to use the UE as a modem.

2.

Visit the Internet on UE. Verify that web pages are displayed normally.

3.

Visit the Multimedia service on the UE. Verify that this service is played normally.

4.




----End

Example //Activating Combination of Three PS Services. SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating Combination of Three PS Services. SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


813



245

Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061504 Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE supports the combination of one CS service and three PS services. – The CN node and UE have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.


Procedure l


l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



814


l


1.

Have two UEs ready: UE 1 and UE 2.

2.

Connect UE 1 to the portable computer so as to use the UE 1 as a modem.

3.

Visit the Internet on UE 1. Verify that web pages are displayed normally (a PS Service).

4.

Visit the Multimedia service on the UE 1. Verify that this service is played normally (a PS Service).

5.

On the portable computer, connect to an FTP server and download data. Verify that the data is downloaded normally (a PS Service).

6.

Use UE 2 to call UE 1. Verify that UE 1 rings and the speech quality is acceptable (a CS Service).



----End

Example //Activating Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services. SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services. SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


815



246

Configuring Combination of Four PS Services

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061505 Combination of Four PS Services.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010615 Multiple RAB Package.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE supports the combination of Four PS Services. – The CN node and UE have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Context RAN11.0 supports up to four PS RABs per user. A typical application of Multi-RAB is VoIP plus BE service where VoIP may need up to three RABs to transmit SIP signaling, Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) (voice), and Real-Time Control Protocol (RTCP) (media monitoring) respectively, as shown in Figure 246-1. Figure 246-1 VoIP service

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


816



RAN11.0 supports four PS RABs per user, and the service combination VoIP + BE is supported. Other service combination like 4PS BE is also supported.

Procedure l



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) command to set the VOIP channel type parameter to DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH). NOTE

The BSC6900 defines the default value of the VOIP channel type parameter. Retain the default value in normal situations.

l

l


Initiate Iu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT.

2.

Connect the UE to the portable computer so as to use the UE as a modem.

3.

Establish a VoIP service on the UE. View the "RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ" message traced on the Iu interface. If you find that the CN assigns three RABs at the same time, you can infer that the VoIP service is established successfully. (If RTCP is assigned, SIP signaling and RTP must be assigned at the same time.)

4.




----End

Example //Activating Combination of Four PS Services SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-1; SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: VoipChlType=DCH; //Deactivating Combination of Four PS Services SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


817



247

Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020103 Inter Frequency Load Balance.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The two optional features WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package have been configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context This feature enables some UEs in a cell to be handed over to the inter-frequency same-coverage cells if the cell is in the basic congestion state. The purpose is to reduce the load of this cell. l


l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source


NBMLdcAlgoSwit ch

The UL_UU_LDR, DL_UU_LDR and CELL_CODE_L DR should be selected.

Network Plan


818


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

load control algorithm switch

LdcSwitch

The NODEB_CREDI T_LDR_SWITCH and LCG_CREDIT_L DR_SWITCH should be selected.

Network Plan

NodeB LDC algorithm switch

NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch

The HO_ALGO_LDR _ALLOW_SHO_ SWITCH and HO_INTER_FRE Q_HARD_HO_S WITCH should be selected.

Network Plan

DrdOrLdrFlag

DrdOrLdrFlag

Set this parameter to TRUE

Network Plan

InterFreq Load Handover Method Selection

InterFreqLDHOMe thodSelection

In the case of measurementbased interfrequency load handovers, set this parameter to MEASUREHO or use the recommended value.

Network Plan

Code congestion select inter-freq indication

CodeCongSelInterFreqHoInd

Set this parameter to TRUE

Network Plan

LDR period timer length

LdrPeriodTimerLen


Network Plan

DL LDR second action

DlLdrSecondAction

Use the recommended value for a cell.

Network Plan

UL LDR first action

UlLdrFirstAction

Use the recommended value for a cell.

Network Plan

UL LDR first action

UlLdrFirstAction

Set this parameter to InterFreqLDHO for a NodeB.

Network Plan


819



Procedure l


Enable load reshuffling (LDR) algorithms. Enabling uplink load reshuffling on the Uu interface a.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm) check box under the parameter Switch for Cell Load Control.

Enabling downlink load reshuffling on the Uu interface a.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm) check box under the parameter Switch for Cell Load Control.

Enabling load reshuffling based on cell code resources a.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm) check box under the parameter Switch for Cell Load Control.

Enabling NodeB-level or cell group-level load reshuffling based on credit resources

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

a.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCALGOPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Configuration of Load Control; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the NodeB-level NODEB_CREDIT_LDR_SWITCH(NodeB Credit LDR Switch) or cell group-level LCG_CREDIT_LDR_SWITCH(Local Cell Group Credit LDR Switch) check box under the parameter load control algorithm switch.

b.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the NodeB-level NODEB_CREDIT_LDR(NodeB Credit LDR Algorithm) or cell group-level LCG_CREDIT_LDR(LCG Credit LDR Algorithm) check box under the parameter NodeB LDC algorithm switch.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable inter-frequency handover. In this command, select the HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH and HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH check boxes under the parameter HandOver Switch. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

820



3.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Inter-frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an inter-frequency neighboring cell supporting blind handover, or to add an inter-frequency neighboring cell supporting measurement by setting the parameter DrdOrLdrFlag to an appropriate value.

4.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLINTERFREQHONCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented None-Coverage Based Inter-frequency Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) (cell level) or SET UINTERFREQHONCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented None-Coverage Based Inter-frequency Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) (RNC level) to set parameters related to load-based interRAT hard handovers to appropriate values based on the network plan.

5.

For a load-based inter-frequency handover that is based on measurement, run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set InterFreq Load Handover Method Selection to MEASUREHO(MEASUREHO).

6.

Set LDR-related thresholds based on the network plan. – For uplink and downlink load reshuffling on the Uu interface, run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the following LDR-related thresholds: UL LDR trigger threshold, UL LDR release threshold, DL LDR trigger threshold, DL LDR release threshold, and DlLdTrnsHysTime. – For uplink and downlink load reshuffling on the Uu interface and load reshuffling based on cell code resources, run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the following LDR-related threshold: Cell LDR SF reserved threshold. – For NodeB-level or cell group-level load reshuffling based on credit resources, run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBLDR (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the following LDR-related threshold: UL LDR Credit SF reserved threshold.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

7.

For load reshuffling based on cell code resources, run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to allow inter-frequency handovers in cases of code resource congestion. In this step, set Code congestion select inter-freq indication to TRUE(TRUE).

8.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

821



Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the LDR period LDR period timer length to an appropriate value. 9.

For uplink and downlink load reshuffling on the Uu interface and load reshuffling based on cell code resources, run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the DL LDR second action and DL LDR first action and set other parameters related to the LDR action based on the network plan.

10. For NodeB-level or cell group-level load reshuffling based on credit resources, run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBLDR (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the InterFreqLDHO(inter-freq load handover) check box under the parameter UL LDR first action and set other parameters related to the LDR action based on the network plan. l


Run the following BSC6900 to check whether this feature has been activated. – LST UCELLALGOSWITCH – LST UCELLLDR – LST UCELLLDM – LST ULDCPERIOD – LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH – LST UINTERFREQNCELL – LST UCELLINTERFREQHONCOV (cell level) – LST UINTERFREQHONCOV (RNC level) – LST ULDCALGOPARA – LST UNODEBALGOPARA – LST UNODEBLDR

2.

l

Check the value of the counter VS.LCC.LDR.InterFreq (Number of UEs Performing Inter-Frequency Load Handovers in Basic Congestion for Cell). If the values is not 0, this feature has been activated.


Disabling load reshuffling algorithms Disabling uplink LDR on the Uu interface a.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear the UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm) check box under the parameter Switch for Cell Load Control.

Disabling downlink LDR on the Uu interface a.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

822



Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear the DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm) check box under the parameter Switch for Cell Load Control. Disabling load reshuffling based on cell code resources a.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear the CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm) check box under the parameter Switch for Cell Load Control.

Disabling NodeB-level or cell-level load reshuffling based on credit resources a.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCALGOPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Configuration of Load Control; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear the NodeB-level NODEB_CREDIT_LDR_SWITCH(NodeB Credit LDR Switch) or cell group-level LCG_CREDIT_LDR_SWITCH(Local Cell Group Credit LDR Switch) check box under the parameter load control algorithm switch.

b.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear the NodeB-level NODEB_CREDIT_LDR(NodeB Credit LDR Algorithm) or cell group-level LCG_CREDIT_LDR(LCG Credit LDR Algorithm) check box under the parameter NodeB LDC algorithm switch.

2.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to disable inter-frequency handover. In this command, clear the HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH and HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH check boxes under the parameter HandOver Switch.

3.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to prohibit inter-frequency handovers in cases of code resource congestion. In this step, set Code congestion select inter-freq indication to FALSE(FALSE).

4.

Restore the parameter settings modified in the activation procedure.

----End

Example //Activating Inter Frequency Load Balance MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_LDR-1&CELL_CODE_LDR-1&CELL_CREDIT_LDR1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


823



SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1; ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=11, CellId=111, NCellRncId=22, NCellId=222, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHoFlag=FALSE, NPrioFlag=FALSE, DrdOrLdrFlag=TRUE, InterNCellQualReqFlag=FALSE; ADD UCELLINTERFREQHONCOV: CellId=111, InterFreqFilterCoef=D3, Hystfor2C=6, TrigTime2C=D640, InterFreqCovHOThdEcN0=-16, InterFreqMeasTime=60, PeriodFor2C=4, AmntOfRpt2C=5; MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, InterFreqLDHOMethodSelection=MEASUREHO; MOD UCELLLDM: CellId=111, UlLdrTrigThd=55, UlLdrRelThd=45, DlLdrTrigThd=70, DlLdrRelThd=60, DlLdTrnsHysTime=1000; MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8; MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, CodeCongSelInterFreqHoInd=TRUE; SET ULDCPERIOD: LdrPeriodTimerLen=10; MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, DlLdrFirstAction=InterFreqLDHO, DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd=20, DlInterFreqHoBWThd=200000; SET ULDCALGOPARA: LdcSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_LDR_SWITCH-1&LCG_CREDIT_LDR_SWITCH-1; ADD UNODEBALGOPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, NodeBId=10, NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-1&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-1; MOD UNODEBLDR: IDTYPE=BYID, NodeBId=10, UlLdrFirstAction=InterFreqLDHO, UlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8, UlInterFreqHoCeLDRSpaceThd=SF8; //Deactivating Inter Frequency Load Balance MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-0&DL_UU_LDR-0&CELL_CODE_LDR-0&CELL_CREDIT_LDR0; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH-0&HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-0; MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, CodeCongSelInterFreqHoInd= FALSE; SET ULDCALGOPARA: LdcSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_LDR_SWITCH-0&LCG_CREDIT_LDR_SWITCH-0; MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, NodeBId=11, NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-0&LCG_CREDIT_LDR_SWITCH-0; MOD UNODEBLDR: IDTYPE=BYID, NodeBId=10, UlLdrFirstAction=NoAct;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


824



248

Configuring Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020114 Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC).

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – Only the UEs of R6 (or later) can support this function. – DSAC is a feature specified in 3GPP Release 6, and therefore only the UEs of Release 6 or later support this feature.

Context DSAC specifies the UE access restriction based on the domain type (CS, PS, or CS+PS). The feature can be triggered either manually or automatically.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

To activate manual DSAC, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLDSACMANUALPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > The Parameters of The Manually Triggered DSAC Algorithm in the Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

825



– To restrict the UE access to the CS domain, set Restriction for CS to TRUE; to restrict the UE access to the PS domain, set Restriction for PS to TRUE. – To set a fixed access restriction, set Restriction Type to RestrictionFixed and select the access classes (ACs) to be restricted from the drop-down list of AC Restriction Indicator. To set a flexible access restriction, set Restriction Type to RestrictionFlexible, and set Number of restrained AC every time, Range of restrained AC, and Interval of DSAC Restriction to appropriate values. 2.

To activate automatic DSAC, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDSACAUTOALGO (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > The Parameters of the Automatically Triggered DSAC Algorithm; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Switch for auto DSAC to ON. – To restrict the UE access to the CS domain, set Restriction for CS to TRUE; to restrict the UE access to the PS domain, set Restriction for PS to TRUE. – Set Number of restrained Access Class every time, Range of restrained Access Class, Access Class Restriction interval between Cells, and Interval length of Domain Specific Access Class Restriction to appropriate values.

l


Start Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu Message Type, select RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3.

2.

Check whether manual DSAC is activated by viewing the IE domainSpecificAccessRestrictionParametersForPLMNOfMIB in the SIB3 message traced on the Uu interface. – If the AccessClassBarred in the IE domainSpecificAccessRestrictionParametersForPLMNOfMIB exists, as shown in Figure 248-1, this feature has been activated. – If the AccessClassBarred in the IE domainSpecificAccessRestrictionParametersForPLMNOfMIB does not exist, this feature is not activated. Figure 248-1 DSAC activated

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

To deactivate manual DSAC, run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELLDSACMANUALPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

826



Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > The Parameters of The Manually Triggered DSAC Algorithm in the Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). 2.

To deactivate automatic DSAC, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDSACAUTOALGO (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > The Parameters of the Automatically Triggered DSAC Algorithm; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Switch for auto DSAC to OFF.

----End

Example //Activating DSAC ADD UCELLDSACMANUALPARA: CellId=223, CnOpIndex=0, CsRestriction=TRUE, PsRestriction=TRUE, RestrictionType=RestrictionFlexible, NumberOfACs=4, AcRange=AC0-1&AC1-1&AC2-1&AC3-1&AC4-1&AC5-1&AC6-1&AC7-1&AC8-1&AC9-1&AC100&AC11-0&AC12-0&AC13-0&AC14-0&AC15-0, AcRstrctIntervalLen=10; SET UDSACAUTOALGO: DsacAutoSwitch=ON, CsRestriction=TRUE, PsRestriction=TRUE, NumberOfACs=2, AcRange=AC0-1&AC1-1&AC2-1&AC3-1&AC4-1&AC5-1&AC6-1&AC7-1&AC8-1&AC9-1&AC100&AC11-0&AC12-0&AC13-0&AC14-0&AC15-0, AcIntervalOfCells=1, AcRstrctIntervalLen=10; //Deactivating DSAC RMV UCELLDSACMANUALPARA: CellId=223, CnOpIndex=0; SET UDSACAUTOALGO: DsacAutoSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


827



249

Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020160 Enhanced Multiband Management.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: – WRFD-020110 Multi Frequency Band Networking Management and WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package when traffic steering is implemented among inter-frequency cells – WRFD-020110 Multi Frequency Band Networking Management and WRFD-020103 Inter-Frequency Load Balance when load sharing is performed among inter-frequency cells – If a feature is not activated, the corresponding function is unavailable in the multifrequency band networking solution. Features can be configured according to operator requirements.

l


Context In a multiband network, the cells that work in different frequency bands have different coverage areas. In this case, blind handovers may lead to call drops. When this feature is enabled, handover decisions are made based on inter-frequency measurement results. This increases the handover success rate. In inter-frequency traffic steering, each cell is configured with the priority for carrying a type of service (R99 RT, R99 NRT, HSPA, and others). After the RAB is set up, inter-band measurement is performed to ensure that a UE accesses the cell with the highest priority. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


828



In inter-band load sharing, load reshuffling (LDR) may trigger a load-based inter-frequency handover after RAB setup. A target cell is selected based on the quality measurement of cells. Only the cell that meets the quality requirement is selected. Before RAN14.0, measurementbased inter-band handovers for inter-band load balancing are triggered only by basic congestion of power resources. In RAN14.0, inter-band handovers can also be triggered by basic congestion of uplink credit resources. This balances uplink credit resources between cell groups or NodeBs and increases uplink credit resource utilization. l


l


Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

MeasurementBased DRD Switch

BasedOnMeasHRe tryDRDSwitch

Set this parameter to ON.

Network plan

DrdOrLdrFlag

DrdOrLdrFlag

Set this parameter to TRUE.

Network plan

InterFreq Load Handover Method Selection

InterFreqLDHOMe thodSelection

Set this parameter to MEASUREHO.

Network plan

Aperiodic DRD Retry Switch

BlindDrdExceptHRetrySwitch


Network plan

DRD Measurement Period Retry Timer Length

HRetryTimerLength


Network plan

Inter-frequency Measure Periodical Measurement Report Period

PrdReportInterval


Network plan

Target Frequency RSCP Trigger Threshold

TargetFreqThdRscp


Network plan

Target Frequency EcNo Trigger Threshold

TargetFreqThdEcN 0


Network plan

DRD Measurement Failure Punish Periods

DrdFaiPenaltyPeriodNum


Network plan

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Configuring this feature based on traffic steering

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


829



1.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MML command SET UDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Measurement-Based DRD Switch to ON.

2.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MML command MOD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Inter-frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set DrdOrLdrFlag to TRUE (Send).

– Configuring this feature based on load sharing

l

1.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MML command MOD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Inter-frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set DrdOrLdrFlag to TRUE (Send).

2.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set InterFreq Load Handover Method Selection to MEASUREHO (MEASUREHO).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET UMCDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC Based Measurement DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set RNC-oriented DRD algorithm parameters.

Verification Procedure – Verifying this feature based on traffic steering 1.

Configure cells A and B. Cell A provides R99 services, and cell B provides HSPA services.

2.

Enable the UE to establish an R99 service in cell A. Use the UE to download a large file.

3.

View the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message transmitted on the Uu interface. You can find that this message contains inter-frequency measurement control information, as shown in Figure 249-1. Figure 249-1 IEs contained in RRC_MEAS_CTRL

4.

After the UE sends an inter-frequency measurement report, the UE is handed over to cell B if inter-frequency cell B meets the related threshold requirements.

– Verifying this feature based on load sharing

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Configure cells A and B. Both the cells provide R99 services.

2.

Enable the UE to establish an R99 service in cell A. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

830


l


3.

If a large number of users access cell A, cell A is congested. View the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message transmitted on the Uu interface. You can find that this message contains inter-frequency measurement control information.

4.

After the UE sends an inter-frequency measurement report, the UE is handed over to cell B if inter-frequency cell B meets the related threshold requirements.

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivating this feature based on traffic steering 1.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MML command SET UDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch to OFF.

– Deactivating this feature based on load sharing 1.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set InterFreqLDHOMethodSelection to BLINDHO(BLINDHO).

----End

Example //Configuring this feature based on traffic steering //Turning on the measurement-based DRD switch SET UDRD: BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=ON; //Turning on the measurement indication switch of an inter-frequency neighboring cell MOD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=2021, CellId=3000, NCellRncId=2021, NCellId=3002, DrdOrLdrFlag=TRUE;

//Configuring this feature based on load sharing //Turning on the measurement switch of an inter-frequency neighboring cell MOD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=2021, CellId=3000, NCellRncId=2021, NCellId=3002, DrdOrLdrFlag=TRUE; //Setting the load-based inter-frequency handover policy to measurementbased handover MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=3000, InterFreqLDHOMethodSelection=MEASUREHO;

//Deactivating this feature based on traffic steering //Turning off the measurement-based DRD switch SET UDRD: BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=OFF;

//Deactivating this feature based on load sharing

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


831



//Setting the load-based inter-frequency handover policy to blind handover MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=3000, InterFreqLDHOMethodSelection=BLINDHO;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


832



250

Configuring DRD Introduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – None

l


Context This feature supports DRD and redirection for users between inter-frequency/inter-RAT cells covering the same area. DRD Introduction Package includes five features: WRFD-02040001 Intra System Direct Retry, WRFD-02040002 Inter System Direct Retry, WRFD-02040003 Inter System Redirect, WRFD-02040004 Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup, and Inter-frequency Redirection Based on Distance. l

Precautions The following describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate inter-frequency redirection based on distance. For details about how to activate, verify, and deactivate the other features, see the corresponding feature activation guide. – 251 Configuring Intra System Direct Retry – 252 Configuring Inter System Direct Retry – 253 Configuring Inter-System Redirect – 254 Configuring Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Data Preparation


833



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Inter-freq Redirect Propa Delay Thres

InterFreqRedirDelayThd

10

Network plan (internal plan)

Inter-freq Redirection Factor of LDR

InterFreqRedirFactorOfLDR

50


Inter-freq Redirection Factor of Normal

InterFreqRedirFactorOfNorm

0


ReDirection target band indicator

RedirBandInd

DependOnNCell


Redirection Target UL Frequency Index

ReDirUARFCNUplinkInd

None

Network plan

Redirection target uplink UARFCN

ReDirUARFCNUplink

None

Network plan

Redirection target downlink UARFCN

ReDirUARFCNDo wnlink

None

Network plan

Procedure l

Activating Inter-frequency Redirection Based on Distance 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDISTANCEREDIRECTION (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented Delay Based RRC Redirection Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) for the RNC or ADD UCELLDISTANCEREDIRECTION (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > CellOriented Delay Based RRC Redirection Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) for a cell. In this step, turn on InterFreqRedirSwitch, set RedirBandInd based on the network plan, and set other parameters according to the prepared data. – If RedirBandInd is set to DependOnNCell, you do not need to set ReDirUARFCNUplinkInd, ReDirUARFCNDownlink, and ReDirUARFCNUplink. – If RedirBandInd is set to other values, set ReDirUARFCNUplinkInd, ReDirUARFCNDownlink, and ReDirUARFCNUplink based on the network plan. NOTE

Inter-frequency redirection based on distance does not select the inter-frequency neighboring cell under the DRNC as the target cell. DRD and redirection at RRC connection setup do not select the inter-frequency neighboring cell that uses a different frequency band from the cell where the RRC connection is to access.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


834


l


Verifying Inter-frequency Redirection Based on Distance 1.

Start Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu Message Type, select RRC_RRC_CONN_REJ.

2.

Move a UE to a position where it has a distance from the NodeB but can still detect pilot signals. Initiate a service using the UE, such as cs service. NOTE

The distance between the UE and the NodeB must be larger than InterFreqRedirDelayThd x 78.125 m/chip x 3 chips.

3.

View the Uu interface tracing data. – If the RRC CONNECTION REJECT message includes the redirectionInfo IE and this IE contains frequencyInfo (information about the cell), as shown in Figure 250-1, the RNC has redirected the UE to an inter-frequency neighboring cell and this feature has been activated. – If the RRC CONNECTION REJECT message does not include the redirectionInfo IE, this feature has not been activated. Figure 250-1 redirectionInfo IE

l

Deactivating Inter-frequency Redirection Based on Distance – To deactivate Inter-frequency Redirection Based on Distance at the RNC level, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDISTANCEREDIRECTION (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented Delay Based RRC Redirection Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn off InterFreqRedirSwitch. – To deactivate Inter-frequency Redirection Based on Distance at the cell level, Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLDISTANCEREDIRECTION (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > CellOriented Delay Based RRC Redirection Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to turn off InterFreqRedirSwitch.

----End

Example //Activating Inter-frequency Redirection Based on Distance SET UDISTANCEREDIRECTION: InterFreqRedirSwitch=ON, InterFreqRedirDelayThd=10, InterFreqRedirFactorOfLDR=50, InterFreqRedirFactorOfNorm=0, RedirBandInd=DependOnNCell; ADD UCELLDISTANCEREDIRECTION: CellId=1, InterFreqRedirSwitch=ON, InterFreqRedirDelayThd=10, InterFreqRedirFactorOfLDR=50, InterFreqRedirFactorOfNorm=0, RedirBandInd=DependOnNCell;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


835



//Deactivating Inter-frequency Redirection Based on Distance SET UDISTANCEREDIRECTION: InterFreqRedirSwitch =OFF; MOD UCELLDISTANCEREDIRECTION: CellId=1, InterFreqRedirSwitch =OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


836



251

Configuring Intra System Direct Retry

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02040001 Intra System Direct Retry.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context This feature supports inter-RAT directed retries during RRC connection or radio resource bearer (RAB) assignment.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Direct retry switch to DR_RRC_DRD_SWITCH, DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH, and DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, turn Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

837



on the RNC-level switches: Service Steering DRD Switch, Load balance DRD switch for DCH, Load balance DRD switch for HSDPA, Code Balancing DRD Switch, Uplink load balance DRD Switch for DC-HSDPA, Measurement-Based DRD Switch, and Device Type Steering DRD Switch. 3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, turn on the cell-level switches: Service Steering DRD Switch, Load balance DRD switch for DCH, Load balance DRD switch for HSDPA, Code Balancing DRD Switch, Uplink load balance DRD Switch for DC-HSDPA, and Device Type Steering DRD Switch.

CAUTION l If a cell is configured with both the RNC-level and cell-level parameters, the celllevel parameter settings take effect. Therefore, do not modify the parameters to default values when you are configuring the cell-level parameters. l Intra system direct retry does not select the inter-frequency neighboring cell under the DRNC as the target cell. DRD and redirection at RRC connection setup do not select the inter-frequency neighboring cell that uses a different frequency band from the cell where the RRC connection is to access. l


2.

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Method 1: Verifying this feature during RRC connection setup a.

Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. Use a UE to initiate a PS interactive service.

b.

The UE sends an RRC_RRC_CONNECT_REQ message from cell 1 to the BSC6900. The BSC6900 sends the UE an RRC_RRC_CONN_SETUP message containing the scrambling code of cell 2.

c.

The UE sends an RRC_RRC_CONNECT_SETUP_CMP message from cell 2 to the BSC6900. This indicates that this feature has been activated.

Method 2: Verifying this feature during radio bearer (RB) setup a.

Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. Use a UE to initiate a PS interactive service.

b.

The BSC6900 sends an RRC_RB_SETUP message from cell 1 to the UE. The UE sends an RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP message from cell 2 to the BSC6900. If the service is set up successfully in cell 2 and the data transmission is normal, this feature has been activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn off the RNC-level switches.

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

838



Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to turn off the cell-level switches. ----End

Example //Activating Intra System Direct Retry SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RRC_DRD_SWITCH-1&DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1&DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWI TCH-1; SET UDRD: ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=ON, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=ON, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=ON, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=ON, BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=ON, DPGDRDSwitch=ON; ADD UCELLDRD: CellId=10, ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=ON, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=ON, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=ON, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=ON, DPGDRDSwitch=ON; //Deactivating Intra System Direct Retry SET UDRD: ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=OFF, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=OFF, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=OFF, BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=OFF, DPGDRDSwitch=OFF; MOD UCELLDRD: CellId=10, ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=OFF, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=OFF, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=OFF, DPGDRDSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


839



252

Configuring Inter System Direct Retry

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02040002 Inter System Direct Retry.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature supports inter-RAT directed retries during RAB assignment.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Direct retry switch to DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH, DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH, and DR_INTER_RAT_DRD_SWITCH.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the RNC-level parameter Max inter-RAT direct retry number to a value other than Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

840



zero, and turn on the following RNC-level switches: Service Steering DRD Switch, Load balance DRD switch for DCH, Load balance DRD switch for HSDPA, Code Balancing DRD Switch, Uplink load balance DRD Switch for DCHSDPA, Measurement-Based DRD Switch, and Device Type Steering DRD Switch. 3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the cell-level parameter Max inter-RAT direct retry number to a value other than zero. Turn on the following cell-level switches: Service Steering DRD Switch, Load balance DRD switch for DCH, Load balance DRD switch for HSDPA, Code Balancing DRD Switch, Uplink load balance DRD Switch for DC-HSDPA, and Device Type Steering DRD Switch.

CAUTION If a cell is configured with both the RNC-level and cell-level parameters, the cell-level parameter settings take effect. Therefore, do not modify the parameters to default values when you are configuring the cell-level parameters. l

l


Start Iu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. Use a UE to initiate a PS interactive service.

2.

In the Iu Interface Trace dialog box, view the following procedure: a.

The core network (CN) sends a RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message to the BSC6900.

b.

The BSC6900 responds to the CN with a RAB_ASSIGNMENT_RSP message containing the cause value "direct retry."

c.

The BSC6900 sends the CN a RELOCATION REQUIRED message containing the cause value "direct retry."


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Max Inter-RAT direct retry number to 0. Turn off the RNC-level switches.

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Max inter-RAT direct retry number to 0. Turn off the cell-level switches.

----End

Example //Activating Inter System Direct Retry SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1&DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH-1&DR_INTER_RAT_D

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


841



RD_SWITCH-1; SET UDRD: DRMaxGSMNum=3, ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=ON, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=ON, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=ON, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=ON, BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=ON, DPGDRDSwitch=ON; ADD UCELLDRD: CellId=11, DRMaxGSMNum=3, ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=ON, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=ON, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=ON, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=ON, DPGDRDSwitch=ON; //Deactivating Inter System Direct Retry SET UDRD: DRMaxGSMNum=0, ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=OFF, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=OFF, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=OFF, BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=OFF, DPGDRDSwitch=OFF; MOD UCELLDRD: CellId=11, DRMaxGSMNum=0, ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=OFF, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=OFF, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=OFF, DPGDRDSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


842



253

Configuring Inter-System Redirect

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02040003 Inter System Redirect.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature allows inter-system redirection during RRC connection setup.

Procedure l

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Direct Retry Switch to DR_RRC_DRD_SWITCH.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set ConnectFailRrcRedirSwitch to Allowed_To_Inter_RAT.


843


l


1.

Start Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Use a UE to initiate an RRC connection setup request.

2.

The following procedure is traced on the Uu interface: a.

The UE sends an RRC_SETUP_REQ message.

b.

The BSC6900 responds with an RRC_CONN_REJ message, carrying GSMTargetCellInfo in the IE redirectioninfo.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set RRC redirect switch to OFF or Only_To_Inter_Frequency.

----End

Example //Activating Inter-System Redirect SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RRC_DRD_SWITCH-1; SET UDRD: ConnectFailRrcRedirSwitch=Allowed_To_Inter_RAT; //Deactivating Inter-System Redirect SET UDRD: ConnectFailRrcRedirSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


844



254

Configuring Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02040004 Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context With this feature, service steering and load sharing among different frequencies or bands are implemented during RAB setup based on the service type and cell load.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Interfrequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, add an inter-frequency cell by setting the related parameters according to the network plan.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USPG (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Radio Basic Data Configuration > Service Priority Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, add a service priority group and set the service priority of each type of service according to the network plan.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

845



Information; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the cell service priority by setting the related parameters according to the network plan.

l

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Direct Retry Switch to DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, turn on Service differential drd switch and Measurement-Based DRD Switch.


Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT.

2.

Use a UE in a cell to initiate a PS interactive service. This cell carries low-priority services. The target inter-frequency neighboring cell has light load and carries highpriority services. In the Uu Interface Trace dialog box, view the following procedure: – After the UE in a cell sends an RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP message, the BSC6900 sends an RRC_PH_CH_RECFG message to the UE. – The UE responds with an RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_CMP message. – The BSC6900 enters the compressed mode. – The UE in periodical mode sends an RRC_MEAS_CTRL message to the BSC6900 to measure the signal quality of the target cell. – The BSC6900 sends the UE an RRC_RB_RECFG message containing the primary scrambling code and frequency of the inter-frequency neighboring cell. – The UE sends an RRC_RB_RECFG_CMP message from the inter-frequency neighboring cell.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, turn off Service differential drd switch and Measurement-Based DRD Switch.

----End

Example //Activating Service Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=1, CellId=1, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=2, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, NPrioFlag=FALSE, DrdOrLdrFlag=TRUE, InterNCellQualReqFlag=FALSE; ADD USPG: SpgId=1, PriorityServiceForR99RT=2, PriorityServiceForR99NRT=2, PriorityServiceForHSDPA=2, PriorityServiceForHSUPA=2, PriorityServiceForExtRab=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


846



ADD USPG: SpgId=2, PriorityServiceForR99RT=1, PriorityServiceForR99NRT=1, PriorityServiceForHSDPA=1, PriorityServiceForHSUPA=1, PriorityServiceForExtRab=1; MOD UCELL: CellId=1, SpgId=1; MOD UCELL: CellId=2, SpgId=2; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1; SET UDRD: ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=ON, BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=ON; //Deactivating Service Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup SET UDRD: ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=OFF, BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


847



255

Configuring Measurement Based Direct Retry

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020402 Measurement Based Direct Retry.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context After a UE has successfully set up the RRC connection, the RNC instructs the UE to initiate inter-frequency or inter-system measurements. Upon receipt of a radio access bearer (RAB) assignment request from the CN, the RNC performs Directed Retry Decision (DRD) based on the measurement results. This feature increases the success rate of DRD and reduces the call drop rate caused by DRD with blind handovers.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD UCELLMBDRINTERFREQ (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented Inter-frequency Measurement Parameters for MBDR Algorithm; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MBDR Switch, Inter-freq Measure Quantity, and other parameters related to MBDR inter-frequency measurements. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

848



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET UNBMPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > NodeB Management Configuration > Algorithm Parameters Related to NodeB Configuration and Maintenance; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, select PERFENH_MBDR_LOADCOND_OPT_SWITCH under Performance Enhancement Switch.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET UCORRMPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > the connection-oriented algorithm parameters of an RNC; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select PERFENH_MBDR_TARCELLSEL_OPT_SWITCH under Performance Enhancement Switch, and preferentially select a cell with the optimum signal quality as the target cell. NOTE

When selecting the target cell after the MBDR algorithm is enabled, sort the candidate cells based on Inter-freq Measure Quantity of MBDR (by running the ADD UCELLMBDRINTERFREQ (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented Inter-frequency Measurement Parameters for MBDR Algorithm; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) command), and select a cell with the optimum signal quality as the target cell.

l

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD UCELLMBDRINTERRAT (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented Inter-RAT Measurement Parameters for MBDR Algorithm; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MBDR switch in the parameters related to MBDR inter-RAT measurements.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Interfrequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flag of MBDR Cell to TRUE(send), and set MBDR Cell Priority based on the network plan.


l

Congestion may occur when a large number of UEs access a cell. If a handover based on inter-frequency measurements is used to achieve load reshuffling (LDR), you can view the inter-frequency measurement control information on the Uu interface. After a UE sends the inter-frequency measurement report, the UE will be handed over to another cell.


Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD UCELLMBDRINTERFREQ (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented Inter-frequency Measurement Parameters for MBDR Algorithm; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to clear the MBDR Switch check box.

----End

Example //Activating the feature Measurement-based Direct Retry //Enabling the MBDR algorithm ADD UCELLMBDRINTERFREQ: CellId=1,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


849



InterFreqActiveType=CSAMR_INTERFREQ-1&CSNONAMR_INTERFREQ-1&PSR99_INTERFRE Q-1&PSHSPA_INTERFREQ-1, InterFreqReportMode=EVENT_TRIGGER; SET UNBMPARA: PerfEnhanceSwitch=PERFENH_MBDR_LOADCOND_OPT_SWITCH-1; SET UCORRMPARA: PerfEnhanceSwitch=PERFENH_MBDR_TARCELLSEL_OPT_SWITCH-1; //Setting the parameters related to cell-level MBDR inter-RAT measurements ADD UCELLMBDRINTERRAT: CellId=1, InterRatActiveType=CSAMR_INTERRAT-1; //Setting the MBDR cell flag of the inter-frequency neighboring cell and the MBDR cell priority ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=1, CellId=1, NCellRncId=2, NCellId=2, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHoFlag=FALSE, NPrioFlag=FALSE, MBDRFlag=TRUE, MBDRPrio=2, InterNCellQualReqFlag=FALSE; //Deactivating the feature Measurement-based Direct Retry //Disabling the MBDR algorithm MOD UCELLMBDRINTERFREQ: CellId=1, InterFreqActiveType=CSAMR_INTERFREQ-0&CSNONAMR_INTERFREQ-0&PSR99_INTERFRE Q-0&PSHSPA_INTERFREQ-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


850



256

Configuring Service Steering and

Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020120 Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The UE needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6 (or later) to support the feature.

Context With this feature, service steering and load sharing among different frequencies, bands, or radio access technologies (RATs) can be achieved during radio resource control (RRC) connection setup based on the service type and cell load.

Procedure l


The adaptive multirate (AMR) service that is redirected to an inter-RAT cell during RRC connection setup is used as an example.

1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

851



Parameters in Batches) to enable the RRC directed retry decision (DRD) function. In this step, set Direct Retry Switch to DR_RRC_DRD_SWITCH. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UREDIRECTION (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented RRC Redirection Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set RNC-level Traffic Type to AMR and Redirection Switch to ONLY_TO_INTER_RAT.

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLREDIRECTION (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell-level RRC Redirection Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set celllevel Traffic Type to AMR and Redirection Switch to ONLY_TO_INTER_RAT. NOTE

If a cell is configured with both the RNC-level and cell-level parameters, the cell-level parameter settings take effect.

l

l


Use a UE to send an RRC_SETUP_REQ message with the cause value "Originating Conversational Call."

2.

The BSC6900 responds with an RRC_CONN_REJ message. If "redirectioninfo" of the message contains "GSM-TargetCellInfo," this feature has been activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to disable the RRC DRD function.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UREDIRECTION (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented RRC Redirection Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Redirection Switch to an appropriate value to disable the RNC-level RRC DRD based on service steering.

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLREDIRECTION (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell-level RRC Redirection Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Redirection Switch to an appropriate value to disable the cell-level RRC DRD based on service steering.

----End

Example /*Activating Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup*/ /*Enabling the RRC DRD function*/ SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RRC_DRD_SWITCH-1; //Setting the RNC-level DRD switch SET UREDIRECTION: TrafficType=AMR, RedirSwitch=ONLY_TO_INTER_RAT,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


852



RedirFactorOfNorm=0, RedirFactorOfLDR=0, RedirBandInd=BAND1, ReDirUARFCNUplinkInd=FALSE, ReDirUARFCNDownlink=10713; //Setting the cell-level DRD switch MOD UCELLREDIRECTION: CellId=1, TrafficType=AMR, RedirSwitch=ONLY_TO_INTER_RAT, RedirFactorOfNorm=0, RedirFactorOfLDR=100, RedirBandInd=BAND1, ReDirUARFCNUplinkInd=FALSE, ReDirUARFCNDownlink=10563; /*Deactivating Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup*/ //Disabling the RRC DRD function SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RRC_DRD_SWITCH-0; //Setting the RNC-level DRD switch SET UREDIRECTION: TrafficType=PSHSPA, RedirSwitch=OFF; //Setting the cell-level DRD switch MOD UCELLREDIRECTION: CellId=100, TrafficType=PSHSPA, RedirSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


853



257

Configuring Uplink Flow Control of User Plane

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020124 Uplink Flow Control of User Plane.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context The Uplink Flow Control of User Plane feature is a Huawei proprietary feature. This feature detects uplink packet loss for R99 services by using private information elements (IEs) on the Iub interface. In addition, this feature controls uplink traffic by sending Transport Format Combination Control messages. By doing this, this feature prevents uplink packet loss caused by lack of flow control, and increases transmission efficiency.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Process switch to NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH.


854


257 Configuring Uplink Flow Control of User Plane NOTE

NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH controls all the functions that are achieved by using the private messages on the Iub interface. Turn on other related switches if flow control over the uplink user plane is required.

2.

l

Run the NodeB MML command SET R99FLOWCTRLSWTCH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > Locell Parameters > R99FLOWCTRLSWTCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to turn on the cell-level switch for uplink user plane flow control.


Start an Iub interface tracing task on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 257-1. Figure 257-1 Iub interface trace dialog box

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Establish an R99 BE service on the UE. Observe the NBAP_RL_RECFG_PREP message in the traced Iub data. Check the IE iE-Extensions in DCH-FDDInformationItem. If there is an IE trafficClass-Private, as shown in Figure 257-2, the feature at the BSC6900 has been activated.


855



Figure 257-2 TrafficClass-Private

l


Run the NodeB MML command SET R99FLOWCTRLSWTCH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > Locell Parameters > R99FLOWCTRLSWTCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to turn off the cell-level switch for uplink user plane flow control.

----End

Example //Activating Uplink Flow Control of User Plane SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1; SET R99FLOWCTRLSWTCH: SWITCH=OPEN, LOCELL=1; //Deactivating Uplink Flow Control of User Plane SET R99FLOWCTRLSWTCH: SWITCH=CLOSE, LOCELL=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


856



258

Configuring Intra Frequency Load Balance

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020104 Intra Frequency Load Balance.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature enables the change in cell load by adjusting the cell PCPICH power. For those UEs in soft handover state, this feature enables the intra-frequency neighboring cells to share the cell load by removing high load cell from the active set.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select INTRA_FREQUENCY_LDB(Intra Frequency LDB Algorithm) from the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-down list.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

857



Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Intra-frequency LDB period timer length to an appropriate value. 4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDB (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the following parameters associated with the celllevel intra-frequency load balancing (LDB) algorithm to appropriate values: – Cell overload threshold – Pilot power adjustment step – Cell under load threshold

5.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UPCPICHPWR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > PCPICH; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying UMTS Channel Parameters in Batches). In this step, set P-CPICH parameters associated with intrafrequency LDB, including Max transmit power of PCPICH and Min transmit power of PCPICH to appropriate values.

Verification Procedure To verify that the RNC can balance the cell load by adjusting the P-CPICH power of a cell, perform the following steps: 1.

On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor tab page. Create the task of monitoring PCPICH TxPower of CELL_A11.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to simulate high load in CELL_A11.

3.

In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box, check the pilot power of CELL_A11. Expected result: As the cell load increases, the pilot power periodically decreases. The actual pilot power must not be decreased to a level lower than the configured minimum pilot power.

4.

The NBAP_CELL_RECFG_REQ and NBAP_CELL_RECFG_RSP messages should be displayed in the Iub tracing result. In the NBAP_CELL_RECFG_REQ message, check whether the RNC has reduced the pilot power.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to stop simulating high load in CELL_A11.

6.

In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box, check the pilot power of CELL_A11. Expected result: As the cell load becomes normal, the pilot power periodically increases. The actual pilot power must not be increased to a level higher than the configured maximum pilot power.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect INTRA_FREQUENCY_LDB from the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-down list.

2.

Restore the parameter settings modified in the activation procedure.

----End Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


858



Example //Activating Intra Frequency Load Balance //Configuring intra-frequency neighboring cells ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=111, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=211, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE; //Enabling the cell-oriented intra-frequency LDB algorithm MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=INTRA_FREQUENCY_LDB-1; //Setting the intra-frequency LDB period SET ULDCPERIOD: IntraFreqLdbPeriodTimerLen=1800; //Setting parameters associated with the cell-oriented intra-frequency LDB algorithm to appropriate values MOD UCELLLDB: CellId=111, PCPICHPowerPace=2, CellOverrunThd=90, CellUnderrunThd=30; //Setting the P-CPICH associated parameters for intra-frequency LDB MOD UPCPICHPWR: CellId=111, MaxPCPICHPower=346, MinPCPICHPower=313; //Verifying Intra Frequency Load Balance STR DLSIM: LOCELL=111, LR=90; STP DLSIM: LOCELL=111; //Deactivating Intra Frequency Load Balance MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=INTRA_FREQUENCY_LDB-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


859



259

Configuring Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140211 Dynamic Target RoT Adjustment.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI, EBOI, EULP+EDLP, or EULPd+EDLP boards. Downlink cells must be set up on the EBBI, EBOI, or EDLP board. – The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board, and downlink cells must be set up on the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board. Downlink cells must be set up on the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

l


l

Others – This feature should be used with professional services.

Context l


l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Data Preparation


860



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Recomme nded Parameter Settings

Data Source

Switch for Dynamically Adjusting RoT

DynTgtRoTCtrlSwitch

ON

None

Interval for Deciding Whether to Adjust RoT

TgtRoTAdjPeriod

5

None

Step for Increasing RoT

TgtRoTUpAdjStep

10

None

Step for Decreasing RoT

TgtRoTDownAdjStep

20

None

Upper Limit for the Maximum Uplink Load Factor

UpLimitForMaxULTgtLdFactor

90

None

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD UCELLLICENSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell License Resource/Function Item; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select DYN_TGTROT_CTRL_SWITCH(Dynamic Target RoT Adjustment) under Function Switch1 to enable the license of dynamic target ROT adjustment for a specified cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MML command ADD UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) or MOD UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable Dynamic Target RoT Adjustment. In this step, set Switch for Dynamically Adjusting RoT to ON(ON).

Verification Procedure –

Check the related performance counters on the M2000. 1.

–

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

On the M2000, check the counter VS.HSUPA.TgtRoTInc or VS.HSUPA.TgtRoTDec. If the value of either counter is not 0, this feature has been activated.

Initiate message tracing on the LMT. 1.

On the Run the BSC6900 MML command LMT, click Trace and display the Iub Interface Trace dialog box. On the Basic tab page, select the NBAP check box under the Trace Type parameter. On the NBAP tab page, select the NBAP_COMM_MEAS_RPRT check box under the Message Type parameter. Then, click Submit to enter the Iub interface trace page.

2.

On the Iub interface trace page, check Message Type. If NBAP_COMM_MEAS_RPRT is displayed and the measurement type is uLTimeslot ISCP, this feature has been activated, as shown in Figure 259-1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

861



Figure 259-1 Iub message tracing

l


Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MML command MOD UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to disable Dynamic Target RoT Adjustment. In this step, set Switch for Dynamically Adjusting RoT to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example //Activating Dynamic Target RoT Adjustment ADD UCELLLICENSE: CellId=1, FuncSwitch1=DYN_TGTROT_CTRL_SWITCH-1; ADD UCELLHSUPA: CellId=1, DynTgtRoTCtrlSwitch=ON; //Deactivating Dynamic Target RoT Adjustment MOD UCELLHSUPA: CellId=1, DynTgtRoTCtrlSwitch= OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


862



260

Configuring CE Overbooking

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140212 CE Overbooking.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature has the following impact on the NodeB hardware: – The 3900 series base station must be configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd, or WBBPf board. – The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI, EBOI, or EULPd board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on features WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE Resource Management.

l


l

Others – This feature should be used with Huawei professional services.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


After the license is activated, this feature has been activated.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UALGORSVPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Reserved Parameters > System Level Reserved Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Reserved Switch 1 to RESERVED_SWITCH_1_BIT5.


863


260 Configuring CE Overbooking NOTE

The NodeB baseband board uses different processing specifications for users with different uplink bearer services, for example, HSUPA TTI 2 ms service,s HSUPA TTI 10 ms services, and R99 services. When multiple users access the network, l If this function is disabled, the system attempts to admit all new users using the highest service bearers supported by the terminal. In this way, accessed users occupy too many uplink processing specifications and therefore the total number of accessed users decreases. l If this function is enabled, the NodeB baseband board dynamically selects proper uplink service bearers for users to maximize the number of accessed users according to actual NodeB processing specifications.

l

Verification Procedure Verify that the value of the new counter VS.NodeB.ULCreditUsed.Mean, VS.NodeB.ULCreditUsed.Max or VS.NodeB.ULCreditUsed.Min is not 0. A non-zero value indicates that CE Overbooking takes effect.

l


----End

Example //Activation Procedure SET UALGORSVPARA:RsvSwitch1=RESERVED_SWITCH_1_BIT5-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


864



261

Configuring Intelligent Access Class Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140213 Intelligent Access Class Control.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature does not depend on Hardware.

l

Dependencies on other Features – This feature does not depend on other features.

l


l

Others – UEs must support access class control delivered in system information. – For UEs complying with 3GPP Release 5 and earlier releases, access class control cannot be performed on CS and PS services separately. If the access class of such a UE is barred, the UE can process neither CS nor PS services. – For UEs complying with 3GPP Release 6 and later releases, access class control can be performed on CS and PS services separately. Therefore, such a UE can process CS services while being barred from processing PS services.

Context This feature prevents a large number of UEs from sending RRC connection setup requests simultaneously. When the RNC determines that a cell is congested, the RNC restricts the access of UEs of more access classes. When the RNC determines that congestion is relieved in the cell, the RNC reduces the number of access classes on which access control is performed. This prevents excessive RRC connection setup requests from wasting Uu interface resources and RNC processing resources, relieves network congestion, and improves system stability. l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


865



– None. l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Parame ter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

Switch for Intelligen t Access Class Control

CongAC Switch

Turn on CongACSwitch for cells where this feature is planned to be activated.

Network plan

Cell Cong Thre with RRC or RAB Setup Req Rejection

CongRej TrigThd

Congestion trigger threshold of the RRC/RAB setup rejection rate. The smaller the parameter value, the more likely the network increases the number of barred ACs. The default value is recommended for this parameter. You can also set the value for this parameter based on your expectations on the network KPI.

Network plan

Cell Restore Thre with RRC or RAB Setup Req Rej

CongRej RelThd

Congestion release threshold of the RRC/RAB setup rejection rate. The smaller the parameter value, the less likely the network decreases the number of barred ACs. The default value is recommended for this parameter. You can also set the value for this parameter based on your expectations on the network KPI.

Network plan

Consideri ng RAB Rej Rate in Cell Cong Decision

CongOf RABRej RateSwi tch

If the RRC admission threshold is higher than the RAB admission threshold, there is a possibility that the RRC setup rejection rate is not high but the RAB setup rejection rate is high. In this case, system resources are wasted. To prevent this problem, you are advised to turn on CongOfRABRejRateSwitch so that the RAB setup rejection rate is considered during the cell congestion decision.

Network plan

Consideri ng UL Load in Cell Cong Decision

CongOf UlLoadS witch

Turn on this switch only when you want to take the uplink power load congestion as a necessary condition for increasing the number of barred ACs.

Network plan


866


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Paramet er Name

Parame ter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

UL Cell Power Load Threshol d For Cell Congesti on

UlLoad CongTri gThd

This parameter is valid only when CongOfUlLoadSwitch is set to ON. The default value is recommended for this parameter.

Network plan

UL Cell Power Load Thre For Cell Reso Restorati on

UlLoad CongRel Thd

This parameter is valid only when CongOfUlLoadSwitch is set to ON. The default value is recommended for this parameter.

Network plan

Consideri ng CPU Usage in Cell Cong Decision

CongOf CpuSwit ch

Turn on this switch only when you want to take the SPU CPU usage as a necessary condition for increasing the number of barred ACs.

Network plan

CPU Usage Threshol d for Cell Congesti on

CpuCon gTrigTh d

This parameter is valid only when CongOfCpuSwitch is set to ON. The default value is recommended for this parameter.

Network plan

CPU Usage Thre for Cell Resource Restorati on

CpuCon gRelThd

This parameter is valid only when CongOfCpuSwitch is set to ON. The default value is recommended for this parameter.

Network plan

Cell Congesti on Check Interval

CongCh eckPerio d

The default value is recommended for this parameter.

Network plan

Polling Interval for Access Control

ACPollP eriod


Network plan


867



Paramet er Name

Parame ter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

Range of Restricte d Access Classes

ACRstrc tRange

This parameter must be configured when CongACSwitch is set to ON. The value recommended for this parameter is AC0, AC1, AC2, AC3, AC4, AC5, AC6, AC7, AC8, or AC9. You are not advised to select AC10 for this parameter. If AC10 is indicated as barred in a cell, UEs from AC0 to AC9 and UEs without an IMSI are not allowed to initiate emergency calls in this cell.

Network plan

Max No. of PS Restricte d AC for R6 or Later

RstrctR6 PSMax ACNum


Network plan

Max No. of Restricte d Access Class for R5 or Early

RstrctR5 MaxAC Num


Network plan

Max No. of PS Restricte d AC for R6 or Later

RstrctR6 CSMax ACNum


Network plan

Procedure l

Activation Procedure Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLCONGACALGO (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Control Parameters for Intelligent Access; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, perform the following steps: 1.

Set CongACSwitch to ON.

2.

Set ACRstrctRange to an appropriate value.

3.

Optional: Perform the following operations based on the network plan: – If the radio access bearer (RAB) rejection rate needs to be considered during a congestion decision, set CongOfRABRejRateSwitch to ON, and set CongRejTrigThd and CongRejRelThd based on site requirements.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


868



– If uplink load needs to be considered during a congestion decision, set CongOfUlLoadSwitch to ON, and set UlLoadCongTrigThd and UlLoadCongRelThd based on site requirements. – If central processing unit (CPU) load needs to be considered during a congestion decision, set CongOfCpuSwitch to ON, and set CpuCongTrigThd and CpuCongRelThd based on site requirements. – Set CongCheckPeriod, ACPollPeriod, RstrctR5MaxACNum, RstrctR6CSMaxACNum, and RstrctR6PSMaxACNum based on site requirements. l

Verification Procedure The VS.AC.CongCtl.Time counter reflects feature effectiveness. If the value of the VS.AC.CongCtl.Time counter is not zero, this feature has taken effect.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCONGACALGO (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Control Parameters for Intelligent Access; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CongACSwitch to OFF.

----End

Example //Activating Intelligent Access Class Control for cell1 where the access class ranges from AC0 to AC9 ADD UCELLCONGACALGO: CellId=1, CongACSwitch=ON, ACRstrctRange=AC0-1&AC1-1&AC2-1&AC3-1&AC4-1&AC5-1&AC6-1&AC7-1&AC8-1&AC9-1 ; //Deactivating Intelligent Access Class Control for cell1 MOD UCELLCONGACALGO: CellId=1, CongACSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


869



262

Configuring Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140215 Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – To implement dynamic configuration of CQI feedback period based on the uplink load, the NodeB needs to reports actual service load. The reported value has the following requirements for the NodeB configuration: – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE do not support this feature. – The DBS3800 does not support this feature. – If the 3900 series base station is configured with the WBBPa board or the RRU3801C 20 W, this feature is not supported. In other configurations, this feature is supported. – To implement dynamic configuration of CQI feedback period based on CS+PS services or based on limited coverage, the NodeB does not require any dependency.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package. – This feature is not supported when WRFD-021350 Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell is enabled.

l


l

Dependencies on Others – This feature needs UE to suport HSDPA.

Context This feature considers the uplink load as the criterion for dynamically adjusting the channel quality indicator (CQI) feedback period for HSDPA UEs. The goal is to ensure high downlink rates when only a small number of HSDPA UEs are online and to increase the uplink capacity Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


870



when a large number of HSDPA UEs are online. For HSUPA UEs at cell edges or UEs engaged in CS/PS combined services, a longer CQI feedback period reduces the call drop rate and improves user experience. l


l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Function Switch1

FuncSwitch1

The DYN_CQI_ADJU ST should be selected.

Network Plan


PcSwitch

The PC_CQI_CYCLE _BASE_CELLLO AD_SWITCH, PC_CQI_CYCLE _BASE_COVER AGE_SWITCH and PC_CQI_CYCLE _BASE_CS_PLU S_PS_SWITCH should be selected.

Network Plan

CORRM Algorithm Reserved Switch 0

ReservedSwitch0

The RESERVED_SWI TCH_0_BIT5 or RESERVED_SWI TCH_0_BIT7 should be selected.

Network Plan

Load-based CQI Feedback Period

CQIFBckBaseCellLoad


Network Plan

Coverage-based CQI Feedback Period

CQIFBckBaseCoverage


Network Plan

Combined-ServiceSpecific CQI Feedback Period

CQIFBckBaseCsCombServ


Network Plan

UL Actual Load Trigger Threshold

UlActualloadTrigLdrThd


Network Plan


871



Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD UCELLLICENSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell License Resource/Function Item; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) or MOD UCELLLICENSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell License Resource/Function Item; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select DYN_CQI_ADJUST under Function Switch1 to enable the license of dynamic configuration of HSDPA CQI feedback period for a specified cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches), with the following parameter settings: – To enable the load-based algorithm for periodically selecting the CQI feedback period, select PC_CQI_CYCLE_BASE_CELLLOAD_SWITCH under the Power Control Switch parameter. – To enable the coverage-based algorithm for periodically selecting the CQI feedback period, select PC_CQI_CYCLE_BASE_COVERAGE_SWITCH under the Power Control Switch parameter. – To enable the algorithm based on CS/PS combined services for periodically selecting the CQI feedback period, select PC_CQI_CYCLE_BASE_CS_PLUS_PS_SWITCH under the Power Control Switch parameter.

3.

When enabling the coverage-based algorithm for periodically selecting the CQI feedback period, you need to run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches), with RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT5 or RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT7 selected under the CORRM Algorithm Reserved Switch 0 parameter to enable the algorithm for shifting BE services from HSUPA to R99 in the case of weak coverage or the coverage-based algorithm for BE services on E-DCHs to fall back to DCHs. NOTE

The coverage-based algorithm for periodically selecting the CQI feedback period depends on the algorithm for shifting BE services from HSUPA to R99 in the case of weak coverage or the coveragebased algorithm for BE services on E-DCHs to fall back to DCHs. That is, enable at least one of the two algorithms before enabling the coverage-based algorithm for periodically selecting the CQI feedback period.

4.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UHSDPCCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HS-DPCCH Power Control Configuration > RNC-Oriented HS-DPCCH Power Control Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) (RNC level), ADD UCELLHSDPCCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell-Oriented HS-DPCCH Power Control Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) (cell level), or MOD UCELLHSDPCCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

872



Express > Cell Parameters > Cell-Oriented HS-DPCCH Power Control Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) (cell level), with the Load-based CQI Feedback Period parameter set to the load-based CQI feedback period, the Coverage-based CQI Feedback Period parameter set to the coverage-based CQI feedback period and Combined-Service-Specific CQI Feedback Period set to the CQI feedback period for CS/PS combined services. NOTE

Set the preceding cell-level parameters separately based on the network plan only when the celllevel parameter values to be used are different from the RNC-level parameter values.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the value of UL Actual Load Trigger Threshold.

l

Verification Procedure Check the value of the counter VS.HSDPA.DynCfgAtt.LongCQI, which indicates the number of attempts to set a long CQI feedback period in the cell. If the value of this counter is not 0, this feature has been activated.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLICENSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell License Resource/Function Item; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear DYN_CQI_ADJUST under Function Switch1 to disable the license of dynamic configuration of HSDPA CQI feedback period for a specified cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches), with the following parameter settings: – To disable the load-based algorithm for periodically selecting the CQI feedback period, clear PC_CQI_CYCLE_BASE_CELLLOAD_SWITCH under the Power Control Switch parameter. – To disable the coverage-based algorithm for periodically selecting the CQI feedback period, clear PC_CQI_CYCLE_BASE_COVERAGE_SWITCH under the Power Control Switch parameter. – To disable the algorithm based on CS/PS combined services for periodically selecting the CQI feedback period, clear PC_CQI_CYCLE_BASE_CS_PLUS_PS_SWITCH under the Power Control Switch parameter.

----End

Example //Activating Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period ADD UCELLLICENSE: CellId=1, FuncSwitch1=DYN_CQI_ADJUST-1; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_CQI_CYCLE_BASE_CELLLOAD_SWITCH-1&PC_CQI_CYCLE_BASE_COVERAGE_S WITCH-1&PC_CQI_CYCLE_BASE_CS_PLUS_PS_SWITCH-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


873



SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: ReservedSwitch0=RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT7-1; SET UHSDPCCH: CQIFBckBaseCellLoad=D8, CQIFBckBaseCoverage=D8, CQIFBckBaseCsCombServ=D20; ADD UCELLLDM: UlActualloadTrigLdrThd=50; //Deactivating Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period MOD UCELLLICENSE: CellId=1, FuncSwitch1=DYN_CQI_ADJUST-0; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_CQI_CYCLE_BASE_CELLLOAD_SWITCH-0&PC_CQI_CYCLE_BASE_COVERAGE_S WITCH-0&PC_CQI_CYCLE_BASE_CS_PLUS_PS_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


874



263

Configuring Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140216 Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This features requires the NodeB to report the value of the uplink actual service load. The reported value has the following requirements for the NodeB configuration: – The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE do not support this feature. – The DBS3800 does not support this feature. – If the 3900 series base station is configured with the WBBPa board or the RRU3801C 20W, this feature is not supported. In other configurations, this feature is supported.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature is not supported when WRFD-021350 Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell is enabled.

l


Context This feature is designed for UEs whose services carried by DCHs are all BE services. When the uplink load on the cell causes congestion, this feature configures a large target BLER. This mechanism lowers the uplink load on the cell, increases the cell capacity, and reduces the possibility of call drops for cell edge users (CEUs). l


l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Data Preparation


875



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Function Switch1

FuncSwitch1

The DYN_BLER_PS should be selected.

Network Plan


PcSwitch

The PC_BLER_TAR GET_BASE_CEL LLOAD_SWITC H should be selected.

Network Plan

Uplink Target BLER for Heavily Loaded Cells

BlerTargetBaseCellLoad


Network Plan

UL Actual Load Trigger Threshold

UlActualloadTrigLdrThd


Network Plan

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLLICENSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell License Resource/Function Item; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) or MOD UCELLLICENSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell License Resource/Function Item; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select DYN_BLER_PS under Function Switch1,to enable the license of load-based uplink target BLER configuration for a specified cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches), with PC_BLER_TARGET_BASE_CELLLOAD_SWITCH under Power Control Switch selected. This operation enables the load-based algorithm for selecting the target BLER.

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOLPC (CME single configuration: UMTS radio global Configuration Express > RNC-Oriented OLPC Algorithm Parameters Configuration > RNC-Oriented OLPC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches), with Uplink Target BLER for Heavily Loaded Cells set to a large value.

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18


876



Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the value of UL Actual Load Trigger Threshold. 5.

Optional: To maximize the gain of the feature Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration, it is recommended that you activate the optimized outer loop power control. For details, see "Activating optimized outer loop power control" in 22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control.

l

Verification Procedure Check the value of the counter VS.ULBler.BE.Large, which indicates the number of attempts to set the target BLER when the uplink load on the cell causes congestion. If the value of this counter is not 0, this feature has been activated.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLICENSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell License Resource/Function Item; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear DYN_BLER_PS(Loadbased Uplink Target BLER Configuration) under Function Switch1, to disable the license of dynamic configuration of load-based uplink target BLER configuration for a specified cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches), with PC_BLER_TARGET_BASE_CELLLOAD_SWITCH under Power Control Switch cleared. This operation disables the load-based algorithm for selecting the target BLER.

----End

Example //Activate the feature Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration ADD UCELLLICENSE: CellId=1, FuncSwitch1=DYN_BLER_PS-1; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_BLER_TARGET_BASE_CELLLOAD_SWITCH-1; ADD UCELLLDM: UlActualloadTrigLdrThd=50; SET UOLPC: BlerTargetBaseCellLoad=-10; //Deactivate the feature Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration MOD UCELLLICENSE: CellId=1, FuncSwitch1=DYN_BLER_PS-0; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_BLER_TARGET_BASE_CELLLOAD_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


877



264

Configuring Inter-Frequency Load

Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140217 Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature does not depend on Hardware.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature depends on the feature WRFD-020110 Multi Frequency Band Networking Management in the inter-band networking scenario.

l


Context This feature balances the load among inter-frequency cells by triggering measurement-based inter-frequency handovers. With this feature, the RNC compares measurement results of uplink and downlink power resource, code resource, and channel element (CE) resource in a cell with load thresholds for the corresponding services. Based on the comparison result, the RNC selects the UEs and target cell for an inter-frequency handover. This feature supports load balancing between cells on the following frequencies. l

Intra-band frequencies

l

Inter-band frequencies

l

Inter-RNC frequencies

l

Inter-vendor frequencies

l

Frequencies between the macro network and the micro network

l

Precautions

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


878



– None l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Function Switch1

FuncSwitch1

The INTER_FREQ_L OAD_BALANCE _BASEON_CFG_ THD should be selected.

Network Plan


NBMLdcAlgoSwit ch

The UL_UU_CLB, DL_UU_CLB, CELL_CODE_C LB and CELL_CREDIT_ CLB should be selected.

Network Plan

NodeB LDC algorithm switch

NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch

The NODEB_CREDI T_CLB_SWITCH and LCG_CREDIT_C LB_SWITCH should be selected.

Network Plan

Candidate Flag of Cell for Inter-Freq Ho by CLB

CLBFlag

Set this parameter to TRUE.

Network Plan

Candidate Cell Priority in InterFreq HO by CLB

CLBPrio


Network Plan

Range of Target Cell Involved in CLB

CellLoadBalanceRange

ONLY_TO_INTR A_RNC, ONLY_TO_INTE R_RNC or BOTH_TO_INTR A_RNC_AND_IN TER_RNC should be selected.

Network Plan

Interval for InterFreq HO Decision in CLB

ClbPeriodTimerLen


Network Plan

SWH for Control No. of Half-SF Changed-SC Comp UE

NCovCMUserNumCtrlSwitch


Network Plan


879



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Threshold for No. of Half-SF Changed-SC Comp UE

CellSFCMUserNumThd


Network Plan

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD UCELLLICENSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell License Resource/Function Item; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) or MOD UCELLLICENSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell License Resource/Function Item; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, under FuncSwitch1, select INTER_FREQ_LOAD_BALANCE_BASEON_CFG_THD(Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Config Load Thd) to enable the license of CLB for a specified cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) or MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, under NBMLdcAlgoSwitch, select UL_UU_CLB to enable uplink Uu-interface load balancing, select DL_UU_CLB to enable downlink Uu-interface load balancing, select CELL_CODE_CLB to enable cell code resource load balancing, and select CELL_CREDIT_CLB to enable cell credit load balancing for a specified cell.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) or MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, under NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch, select NODEB_CREDIT_CLB_SWITCH(NodeB Credit CLB Algorithm) to enable NodeB credit load balancing and select LCG_CREDIT_CLB_SWITCH(Local Cell Group Credit CLB Algorithm) to enable local cell group credit load balancing for a specified NodeB.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Interfrequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) or MOD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Inter-frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set CLBFlag for the Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

880



inter-frequency neighboring cell of a specified cell to TRUE, and set CLBPrio based on the network plan. NOTE

The inter-frequency neighboring cell of intra-RNC whose CLBFlag is TRUE can be the target cell of an inter-frequency handover using CLB only after step 1 is performed.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLCLB (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell-Oriented Parameters for CLB interfreq Load Banlance Algorithm; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) or MOD UCELLCLB (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell-Oriented Parameters for CLB interfreq Load Banlance Algorithm; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the feature parameters for a specified cell. Based on the site requirements, set CellLoadBalanceRange to ONLY_TO_INTRA_RNC, ONLY_TO_INTER_RNC, or BOTH_TO_INTRA_RNC_AND_INTER_RNC to enable intra-RNC interfrequency load balancing, inter-RNC inter-frequency load balancing, or intra- and inter-RNC inter-frequency load balancing, respectively. Keep the default settings of other parameters, which are the thresholds for inter-frequency load balancing because of code resource, cell credit resource, and MaxUserNumforCLBIFHO.

6.

Optional: If CellLoadBalanceRange in step 5 is set to ONLY_TO_INTER_RNC or BOTH_TO_INTRA_RNC_AND_INTER_RNC, Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET UCLB (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Parameters for CLB interfreq Load Banlance Algorithm; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameters related to the cell load status of the neighboring RNC.

7.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set ClbPeriodTimerLen.

8.

Optional: If NODEB_CREDIT_CLB_SWITCH(NodeB Credit CLB Algorithm) or LCG_CREDIT_CLB_SWITCH(Local Cell Group Credit CLB Algorithm)is selected under NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch in step 3, Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD UNODEBCLB (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeBOriented Parameters for CLB interfreq Load Banlance Algorithm; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) or MOD UNODEBCLB (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB-Oriented Parameters for CLB interfreq Load Banlance Algorithm; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the feature parameters for a specified NodeB. Keep the default parameter settings, which are the thresholds for inter-frequency load balancing because of cell group credit resource and NodeB credit resource.

9.

Optional: If UL_UU_CLB or DL_UU_CLB is selected under NBMLdcAlgoSwitch in step 2, Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) or MOD Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

881



UCELLLDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the threshold for inter-frequency load balancing because of power resource for a specified cell. Keep the default parameter settings. 10. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET UCMCF (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Compression Mode Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented CMCF Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set NCovCMUserNumCtrlSwitch and CellSFCMUserNumThd. 11. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD UCELLMCLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > CellOriented Based Measurement Inter-frequency LDR Handover Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) or MOD UCELLMCLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell-Oriented Based Measurement Inter-frequency LDR Handover Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set UESpdOptSwitch. l

Verification Procedure Check the value of the counter VS.LCC.CLB.CS.InterFreq or VS.LCC.CLB.PS.InterFreq on the M2000. If the value is not 0, this feature has been activated successfully.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLICENSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell License Resource/Function Item; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear INTER_FREQ_LOAD_BALANCE_BASEON_CFG_THD under FuncSwitch1 to disable the license of the feature for a specified cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, under NBMLdcAlgoSwitch, clear UL_UU_CLB to disable uplink Uu-interface load balancing, clear DL_UU_CLB to disable downlink Uu-interface load balancing, clear CELL_CODE_CLB to disable cell code resource load balancing, and clear CELL_CREDIT_CLB to disable cell credit load balancing for a specified cell.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, under NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch, clear NODEB_CREDIT_CLB_SWITCH to disable NodeB credit load balancing and clear LCG_CREDIT_CLB_SWITCH to disable local cell group credit load balancing for a specified NodeB.

----End

Example /*Activating the feature WRFD-140217 Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold*/ Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


882



//Enabling the license of CLB for a specified cell ADD UCELLLICENSE: CellId=1, FuncSwitch1=INTER_FREQ_LOAD_BALANCE_BASEON_CFG_THD-1; or MOD UCELLLICENSE: CellId=1, FuncSwitch1=INTER_FREQ_LOAD_BALANCE_BASEON_CFG_THD-1; //Enabling uplink Uu-interface load balancing, downlink Uu-interface load balancing, cell code resource load balancing, and cell credit load balancing for a specified cell ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_CLB-1&DL_UU_CLB_1&CELL_CODE_CLB-1&CELL_CREDIT_CLB1, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF; or MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_CLB-1&DL_UU_CLB_1&CELL_CODE_CLB-1&CELL_CREDIT_CLB1; NOTE

NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch and NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch in the ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH command are the mandatory parameters,their values are based on site configurations. Take it as example ,they are set to ALGORITHM_OFF. //Enabling NodeB credit load balancing and local cell group credit load balancing for a specified NodeB ADD UNODEBALGOPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, NodeBId=1, NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CLB_SWITCH-1&LCG_CREDIT_CLB_SWITCH-1; or MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, NodeBId=1, NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CLB_SWITCH-1&LCG_CREDIT_CLB_SWITCH-1; //Setting the CLB priority for the inter-frequency neighboring cell of a specified cell ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=0, CellId=1, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=2, CLBFlag=TRUE, CLBPrio=1; or MOD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=0, CellId=1, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=2, CLBFlag=TRUE, CLBPrio=1; //Setting the CLB parameters for a specified cell ADD UCELLCLB: CellId=1, CellLoadBalanceRange=BOTH_TO_INTRA_RNC_AND_INTER_RNC; or MOD UCELLCLB: CellId=1, CellLoadBalanceRange=BOTH_TO_INTRA_RNC_AND_INTER_RNC;

/*Deactivating the feature WRFD-140217 Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold*/ //Disabling the license of CLB for a specified cell MOD UCELLLICENSE: CellId=1, FuncSwitch1=INTER_FREQ_LOAD_BALANCE_BASEON_CFG_THD-0; //Disabling uplink Uu-interface load balancing, downlink Uu-interface load balancing, cell code resource load balancing, and cell credit load balancing for a specified cell MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_CLB-0&DL_UU_CLB_0&CELL_CODE_CLB-0&CELL_CREDIT_CLB0; //Disabling NodeB credit load balancing and local cell group credit load balancing for a specified NodeB MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, NodeBId=1, NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CLB_SWITCH-0&LCG_CREDIT_CLB_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


883



265

Configuring Load Based GSM and

UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070004 Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BSC model is the BSC6900. – A GSM+UMTS dual-mode MS is required. – Interface board FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc should be configured to support Iur-g.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on features GBFD-511101 Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iurg, WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load or WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure).

l


l

Others – Both the 2G network and the 3G network are deployed. – IP transmission mode is used on the Iur-g interface. – A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured and the GSM cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the UMTS cell. – Data is negotiated and planned for the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface. For details you can refer to Configuring the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface. NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and the RNC sides are activated separately.

Context This feature is based on Huawei private information exchange mechanism over the Iur-g interface. With this feature, the traffic is distributed through the RRC redirection and load-based Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


884



handover from the 3G network to the 2G network on the basis of the service attributes and the load of the 2G networks when 3G cell enters LDR status. In this manner, the load is shared by the GSM network when the load of UMTS network is heavy.

Procedure l


Configuration on the RNC side a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBSC Comm-RRM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable the non-coverage-based handover. In this step, set Non-Coverage Handover Based on 2G Load Indication to ON(ON), Adjustment Coefficient of 2G Load Value to 1 and Load-base Handover Based on 3G2G Load Difference Indication to ON(ON).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable the inter-RAT handover. In this step, select HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH in the HandOver switch drop-down list box.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable UL and DL load reshuffling (LDR) on the Uu interface. In this step, select UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm) and DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm) in the Switch for Cell Load Control drop-down list box.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to configure LDR actions. In this step, set DL LDR first action and UL LDR first action to CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO (CS domain inter-rat should be load handover); set DL LDR second action and UL LDR second action to PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO(PS domain interrat should be load handover); set DL LDR third action and UL LDR third action to CSInterRatShouldNotLDHO(CS domain inter-rat should not be load handover); set DL LDR fourth action and UL LDR fourth action to PSInterRatShouldNotLDHO(PS domain inter-rat should not be load handover). NOTE

You need to configure UL and DL LDR actions according to the actual situation.

2.

Configuration on the BSC side a.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > InterRAT Handover Parameters; CME batch modification center: Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to activate MBSC Handover based on Load Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

885



Enhancement on the GSM side. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Connect State to YES(Yes).

l

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable inter-RAT handovers. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes) .

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > InterRAT Handover Parameters; CME batch modification center: Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient. Setting 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient to 10 is recommended.


l If the verification achieves the following results as expected, the configuration succeeds. Otherwise, the configuration fails.

1.

3G-to-2G Load Based Handover Enhancement

CAUTION The verification can be done when only the UMTS cell is in the basic congestion state. a.

Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in the UMTS cell. Trace signaling on the Iu interface on the LMT. RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message is reported. The RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message contains reduce-load-in-serving-cell. Trace signaling on the A interface on the LMT. Handover Request message is reported. The Handover Request message contains reduce-load-in-serving-cell. NOTE

After the verification, set the value of system to the value before the verification.

2.

l

2G-to-3G Load Based Handover Enhancement a.

Use the MS to initiate a call in the GSM cell, and the call is successfully established.

b.

When the GSM cell is in the basic congestion state, the MS hand over to 3G neighbor cell. Trace signaling on the A interface. Check that Assignment Request, Handover Required, and Handover Command messages are reported and cause in the Handover Required message is reduce-load-inserving-cell.


Configuration on the RNC side – Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBSC Comm-RRM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate MBSC Handover based on Load Enhancement on the UMTS side. In this step, set

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


886



Non-coverage handover based on 2G load Indication to OFF(OFF) and Loadbase handover based on 3G2G load difference Indication to OFF(OFF). 2.

Configuration on the BSC side For the deactivation procedure on the BSC side you can refer to GBFD-511101 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g.

----End

Example //Activating Handover based on Load Enhancement //Configuration on the RNC side /*Enabling the non-coverage-based handover*/ SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscNcovHoOn2GldInd=ON, LoadHoOn3G2GldInd=ON; /*Enabling the inter-RAT handover*/ SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; /*Enabling UL and DL load reshuffling (LDR) on the Uu interface*/ MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=0, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_LDR-1; /*Configuring LDR actions*/ MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=0, DlLdrFirstAction=CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, DlLdrSecondAction=PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, DlLdrThirdAction=CSInterRatShouldNotLDHO, DlLdrFourthAction=PSInterRatShouldNotLDHO, UlLdrFirstAction=CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, UlLdrSecondAction=PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, UlLdrThirdAction=CSInterRatShouldNotLDHO, UlLdrFourthAction=PSInterRatShouldNotLDHO; //Configuration on the BSC side /*Enabling the Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g*/ SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=YES; /*Enabling the inter-RAT handover*/ SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; /*Setting 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient*/ SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10; //Deactivating UMTS Handover based on Load Enhancement //Configuration on the RNC side SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscNcovHoOn2GldInd=OFF, LoadHoOn3G2GldInd=OFF; //Configuration on the BSC side SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=NO;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


887


266 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g

266

Configuring NACC(Network

Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070005 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on features WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage, WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service, WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load, GBFD-511102 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iurg between GSM and WCDMA, or WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure).

l


l

Others – UEs must support NACC procedure. – IP transmission mode is used on the Iur-g interface. – The MS supports NACC. – Both the 2G network and the 3G network are deployed. – A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured and the GSM cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the UMTS cell. – Data is negotiated and planned for the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface. For details you can refer to Configuring the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


888



NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and the RNC sides are activated separately.

Context With this feature, the network assisted cell change (NACC) procedure is performed through the internal information exchange mechanism of the MBSC. As a result, the interoperability of PS services between GSM cells and UMTS cells under the same MBSC does not involve the CN. In this manner, the time taken to perform the NACC procedure is shortened by about 680ms and therefore the handover delay is reduced. In addition, the NACC procedure does not require the support of the CN.

Procedure l


2.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable the NACC function. In this step, select HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH in the HandOver switch drop-down list box.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBSC Comm-RRM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable direct GERAN system information exchange. In this step, set GERAN System Information Exchange Switch to ON.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable the inter-RAT handover. In this step, select HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH in the HandOver switch drop-down list box.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable the inter-RAT cell to support indication of the RIM procedure. In this step, set Inter-RAT cell support RIM indicator to TRUE. If multiple neighboring cells are planned, repeat this step to enable the inter-RAT cell to support indication of the RIM for all the neighboring cells.

Configuration on the BSC side For the configuration on the BSC side you can refer to GBFD-511102 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


889


l

l



Trace Iur-g and Um interfaces on the LMT.

2.

Use a dual-mode MS to download data in the UMTS cell and then switch the MS to the GSM cell.

3.

Check that INFO_EXCHG_INIT_REQ and INFO_EXCHG_INIT_RSP messages are reported on the Iur-g interface. The value of informationTypeItem in the INFO_EXCHG_INIT_REQ message is nACC-Related-Data(8) and the INFO_EXCHG_INIT_RSP message contains nACC-Related-Data.



Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) on the RNC to deactivate NACC Procedure Optimization. In this step, deselect HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH in the HandOver switch drop-down list box.

----End

Example //Activating NACC Procedure Optimization //Configuration on the RNC side /*Enabling the NACC function*/ SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH-1; /*Enabling direct GERAN system information exchange*/ SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscReqGeranInfoSwitch=ON; /*Enabling the inter-RAT handover*/ SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; /*Enabling the inter-RAT cell to support indication of the RIM procedure*/ MOD UEXT2GCELL: GSMCellIndex=0, SuppRIMFlag=TRUE; //Configuration on the BSC side /*Allowing NACC-related information exchange on the Iur-g interface*/ MOD GNRNC: RNCINDEX=0, SPTINFOEXCHG=YES, INFOEXCHGLIST=NACCRELATED-1; /*Setting basic GPRS attributes of the GSM cell*/ SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=YES; //Deactivating NACC Procedure Optimization //Configuration on the RNC side SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


890



267

Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070006 GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on features GBFD-511103 GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g, WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package and WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service.

l


l

Others – 2G and 3G networks cover the same area. – IP transmission mode is used over the Iur-g interface. – A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured, and the GSM cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the UMTS cell. – Data is negotiated and planned for the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface. For details you can refer to Configuring the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface. NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and RNC sides are activated separately.

Context This feature implements RRC redirection and the load-based GSM/UMTS handover through the exchange of Huawei proprietary IE over the Iur-g interface. The Iur-g protocol stack complies Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


891



with the 3GPP specifications. With this feature, the traffic is distributed on the basis of the service handover indicator and the load of the GSM network and UMTS network during RRC connection setup or after RAB setup. In this way, a load balance is achieved between the GSM network and UMTS network.

Procedure l


2.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBSC Comm-RRM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable load balancing and set load difference thresholds. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load Balancing Switch to LOAD-BASED(LOADBASED), Load Difference Threshold Between 3G And 2G of CS Service to 10, PS Load Difference Threshold Between 3G And 2G of Ps Service to 30, and Adjustment Coefficient of 2G Load Value to 1.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable inter-RAT handover. In this step, select the HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH check boxes under the parameter HandOver switch.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > InterRAT Handover Parameters; CME batch modification center: Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to turn on the load balancing switch and set the load adjustment coefficient. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to Load-based(Load-based), and set 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient to 10.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CS 2G 3G Load Balance Delta Threshold to 110.


If the verification achieves the following results as expected, the configuration succeeds. Otherwise, the configuration fails.

1.

3G-to-2G Load Balancing

CAUTION The verification can be done when only the UMTS cell is in the basic congestion state.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


892



a.

The verification procedure consists of the RRC setup phase and the RAB connection phase. The verification in the latter phase involves CS speech services and PS data services. a.

Verifying that CS speech services in UMTS cell1 are handed over to GSM cell2 at the RRC setup phase 1)

b.

c.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in cell1. The call is successfully established. Initiate Uu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. The RRC_RRC_CONNECT_REQ and RRC_RRC_CONN_REJECT messages are reported, and the RRC_RRC_CONN_REJECT message contains GSMTargetCellInfo. That is, information about cell2 is contained, indicating that the MS accesses cell2.

Verifying that PS data services in UMTS cell1 are handed over to GPRS cell3 at the RAB connection phase 1)

Use the MS to browse the Internet.

2)

Initiate Uu-interface message tracing on the LMT. You can find that the messages RRC_RB_SETUP, RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP, RRC_MEAS_CTRL, and RRC_CELL_CHANGE_ORDER_FROM_UTRAN are reported, and that the value of InterRATEvent in the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message is event3c.

3)

Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find that the RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_REQ message is sent from the CN to the RNC and then the RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_RESP message is sent from the RNC to the CN.

4)

Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find that the RANAP_SRNS_DATA_FORWARD_COMMAND and RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND messages are sent from the CN to the RNC and then the RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE message is sent from the RNC to the CN.

5)

When the MS attempts to reselect cell3, Internet browsing is slightly affected. After the MS reselects cell3, Internet browsing returns to normal.

Verifying that CS speech services in UMTS cell1 are handed over to GSM cell2 at the RAB connection phase 1)

Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in cell1. The call is successfully established.

2)

Initiate Uu-interface tracing on the LMT. You can find that the messages RRC_RB_SETUP, RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP, RRC_MEAS_CTRL, and RRC_HO_FROM_UTRAN_CMD_GSM are reported, and that the value of InterRATEvent in the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message is event3c.

3)

Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find that the RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message is sent from the RNC to the CN and then the RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND and RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND messages are sent from the CN to the RNC.


893



4)

2.

Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find that the RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE message is sent from the RNC to the CN.

2G-to-3G Load Balancing

CAUTION The verification can be done when only the GSM cell is in the basic congestion state. a.

l

Use the MS to initiate a call in the GSM cell. The directed retry procedure is triggered so that the MS accesses the neighboring UMTS cell. The call is successfully established. Initiate A-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find that the Assignment Request, Handover Required, and Handover Command messages are reported and that the value of cause in the Handover Required message is directed-retry(13).



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBSC Comm-RRM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate MBSC load balancing. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load Balancing Switch to OFF(OFF).

Configuration on the BSC side For the deactivation procedure on the BSC side you can refer to GBFD-511103 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.

----End

Example //Activating Load Balancing Based on Iur-g //Configuration on the RNC side /*Enabling load balancing and setting load difference thresholds*/ SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=LOAD-BASED, Mbsc3G2GLdBlcCsDeltaThrd=10, Mbsc3G2GLdBlcPsDeltaThrd=30; /*Enabling inter-RAT handover*/ SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; //Configuration on the BSC side /*Enabling load balancing*/ SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=YES, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Load-based, G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10; /*Enabling inter-RAT handover*/ SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="0", INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; /*Setting load difference thresholds*/ SET OTHSOFTPARA: G2G3GLdBlcDeltaThrd=110; //Deactivating Load Balancing Based on Iur-g //Configuration on the RNC side SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=OFF; //Configuration on the BSC side

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


894



SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


895



268

Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070007 GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on features GBFD-511104 GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g, WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package and WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service.

l


l

Others – 2G and 3G networks cover the same area. – IP transmission mode is used over the Iur-g interface. – A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured, and the GSM cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the UMTS cell. – Data is negotiated and planned for the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface. For details you can refer to Configuring the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface. NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and RNC sides are activated separately.

Context This feature supports RRC redirection and GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover based on service. With this feature, services are steered on the basis of the service handover indicator, hierarchical Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


896



network planning, and the load of the GSM network and UMTS network when an MS accesses the network. Service steering enables UEs requesting speech or low-speed PS services to access the GSM network and those requesting high-speed PS services to access the UMTS network.

Procedure l


2.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBSC Comm-RRM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable traffic steering. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load Balancing Switch to SERVICE-BASED(SERVICE-BASED) and Adjustment Coefficient of 2G Load Value to 1.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable inter-RAT handover. In this step, select the HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH check boxes under the parameter HandOver switch.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHOCOMM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented Handover Common Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable inter-RAT CS handover. In this step, set Inter-RAT CS Handover Switch to ON. Run the ADD UCELLHOCOMM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented Handover Common Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) command to enable interRAT CS handover for each cell.

Configuration on the BSC side For the configuration on the BSC side you can refer to GBFD-511104 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.

l


The verification procedure of 3G-to-2G Traffic Steering

CAUTION The verification can be done when only the UMTS cell is in the basic congestion state. a.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in the UMTS cell. Initiate Iuinterface tracing on the LMT. You can find that the RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message is reported and the handover cause value in the message is resource-optimisation-relocation. Initiate A Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

897



interface tracing. You can find that the Handover Request message is reported and the handover cause value in the message is traffic.

CAUTION Ensure that the GSM cell is not in the congestion state. 2.

The verification procedure of 2G-to-3G Traffic Steering

CAUTION The verification can be done when only the GSM cell is in the basic congestion state. a.

l

Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in the GSM cell. Initiate CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber tracing on the LMT. You can find that the call is in GSM cell, and don't hand over to UMTS cell.



Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBSC Comm-RRM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate traffic steering. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load Balancing Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example //Activating 3G-to-2G traffic steering //Configuration on the RNC side /*Enabling traffic steering*/ SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=SERVICE-BASED; /*Enabling inter-RAT handover*/ SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; /*Enabling inter-RAT CS handover*/ ADD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, CSServiceHOSwitch=ON; //Configuration on the BSC side /*Enabling inter-RAT incoming BSC handover*/ SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Service-based; //Deactivating 3G-to-2G traffic steering //Configuration on the RNC side SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


898



269

Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE supports relevant measurements and the handover procedure.

Context This feature supports measurement-based inter-RAT handover triggered by event 2D or uplink UE QoS and urgent blind inter-RAT handover triggered by event 1F. This type of handover is applicable to inter-RAT interworking based on coverage or caused by moving UEs.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH from the HandOver Switch list.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > GSM Neighboring Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

899



Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an inter-frequency neighboring GSM cell.

l

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLINTERRATHOCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented Coverage Based Inter-rat Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) (cell level) or SET UINTERRATHOCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Coverage based Inter-rat Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) (RNC level) to configure parameters related to coverage-based inter-RAT handover to GSM.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABBASIC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > Basic Information for Typical Traffic Radio Access Bearer; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Service Handover Indicator to HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_NOT_BE_PERFORM.


Attenuate signals in the current cell that the UE accesses to trigger reporting of event 2D by the UE.

2.

Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu Message Type, select RRC_MEAS_RPRT.

3.

Check whether event 2D shown in Figure 269-1 has been reported in the traced messages. Figure 269-1 Event 2D measurement report

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

4.

Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu Message Type, select RRC_MEAS_CTRL.

5.

Check in the traced messages whether the RNC has sent the UE an inter-RAT measurement control message shown in Figure 269-2.


900




NOTE

l To verify the measurement-based inter-RAT handover triggered by uplink QoS of UEs, you need to Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT to turn on the QoS switches of different service types and attenuate the signals of the current cell. Check whether UEs send the uplink QoS measurement reports to the RNC. The verification steps are the same as those for event 2D. l The inter-RAT blind handover triggered by event 1F is a special application. You need to measure the pilot strength and quality scope of the best cell where the blind handover is to be triggered. Generally, the inter-RAT blind handover is not needed and therefore does not need to be verified.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate this feature.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELLINTERRATHOCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented Coverage Based Inter-rat Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) (cell level) or SET UINTERRATHOCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Coverage based Inter-rat Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) (RNC level) to remove or restore the parameters related to coverage-based inter-RAT handover to GSM.

----End

Example //Activating Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH:

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


901



HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; MOD UTYPRABBASIC: RabIndex=0, SHInd=HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_NOT_BE_PERFORM; //Deactivating Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-0&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


902



270

Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020309 Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The UE supports relevant measurements and the handover procedure.

Context When the load of voice and PS BE services is high in a cell and downlink QoS decreases, this feature enables the UE to be handed over to an inter-RAT cell, guaranteeing QoS requirements.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > GSM Neighboring Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

903



Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an inter-RAT neighboring cell.

l

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSHO (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > QOS Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented QoS Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set BSC6900-level parameters related to Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > QOS Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented QoS Enhancement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on QoS switches for different traffic classes.


Log in to the BSC6900 LMT and start Uu Interface Trace.

2.

Ensure that the RNC sends to the NodeB an NBAP_DEDI_MEAS_INIT_REQ message, which carries the event E parameter, as shown in Figure 270-1. Figure 270-1 NBAP_DEDI_MEAS_INIT_REQ message

l

3.

Ensure that the NodeB reports to the RNC an NBAP_DEDI_MEAS_RPRT message, which carries the event E parameter.

4.

Ensure that the RNC sends to the UE an RRC_MEAS_CTRL message and starts inter-frequency measurement of the event or period type. Then, check that the corresponding traced message indicates that the RNC has sent the inter-frequency measurement control message to the UE.


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > QOS Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented QoS Enhancement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

904



modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn off QoS switches for different traffic classes. ----End

Example //Activating Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; SET UQOSACT: BEQosPerform=YES, AMRQosPerform=YES, VPQosPerform=YES, BeDlAct1=InterRatHO, DlQosAmrInterRatHoSwitch=YES, DlQosWAmrInterRatHoSwitch=YES; //Deactivating Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-0&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-0; SET UQOSACT: BEQosPerform=NO, AMRQosPerform=NO, VPQosPerform=NO;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


905



271

Configuring Video Telephony

Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020307 Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – One or multiple of the following features must be configured before this feature is activated: – WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage – WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service – WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load – WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)

l


l

Others – The UE needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6 to support the feature. – The MSC needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6 to support the feature.

Context Before videophone services are handed over to the 2G system, this feature enables the fallback of video telephony to speech to ensure continuous calls. However, due to the limitation of UE and network support capability, the service may not be implemented. Therefore, Service Change and UDI Fallback (SCUDIF) is introduced in 3GPP Release 6 to provide the mechanism to provide the mechanism to fall back to speech without experiencing call drops in these scenarios.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


906



Procedure l

Activation Procedure The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

l


l

1.

Start Iu Interface Trace and Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT.

2.

After videophone services are established, check in the Uu Interface Trace dialog box that the UE sends to the BSC6900 an RRC_MEAS_RPRT message, which contains the 3A report.

3.

In the Iu Interface Trace dialog box, check that the BSC6900 sends an RAB_MODIFY_REQ message to the CN. In the RAB_MODIFY_REQ message, the value of the IE alternativeRABConfigurationRequest is alternative-RABconfiguration-Requested.


----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


907



272

Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – BSC should support NACC RIM (RAN Information Management) and PS handover procedure.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature is required only when one or several of the following inter-RAT handover features are introduced: – WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage – WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service – WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load – WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)

l


l

Others – UE should support NACC and PS handover procedure. – GSM BSC should support NACC RIM (RAN Information Management) and PS handover procedure. – SGSN supports NACC and PS handover procedure.

Context This feature provides the inter-RAT relocation procedure for NACC and PS services to shorten the interruption time of PS services caused by inter-RAT handover. The inter-RAT Handover Enhanced Package includes the following features: l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

WRFD-02030801 NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

908



l

WRFD-02030802 PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS

l

For details about how to activate, verify, and deactivate this feature, see the following sections:

Procedure

– 273 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) – 274 Configuring PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS ----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


909


273 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)

273

Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02030801 NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change).

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-020308 PS Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2.

l


l

Others – UE should support NACC procedure. – GSM BSC should support NACC RIM (RAN Information Management). – SGSN should support NACC procedure.

Context This feature supports the standard NACC procedure defined in 3GPP specifications. The NACC refers to Network Assisted Cell Change from UTRAN to GERAN, which is different from the normal cell change order procedure, because the network provides GERAN (P) SI for the UE.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


910


273 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)

Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to open the following switches in the HandOver switch parameter: – HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH – HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH – HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH NOTE

When PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH is ON, this switch no longer takes effect.

2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) (for new neighboring cell) or MOD UEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) (for the existing neighboring cell) to set Inter-RAT cell support RIM indicator to TRUE.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to check the settings of the PS inter-RAT handover, NACC, and Relocation switches.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UEXT2GCELL to check whether the interRAT neighboring cell supports the RIM procedure. NOTE

To implement this feature, the UE should support NACC. Therefore, the NACC-supportive UEs are required for activation.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH in the HandOver switch parameter to 0.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Inter-RAT cell support RIM indicator to FALSE.

----End

Example //Activating NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_ RELOCATION_SWITCH-0&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) MOD UEXT2GCELL: SuppRIMFlag=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


911



274

Configuring PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02030802 PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-020308 PS Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2.

l


l

Others – UE should support PS handover procedure. – GSM BSC should support PS handover procedure. – SGSN should support PS handover procedure.

Context This feature enables the relocation of PS services (including non-real-time PS services and realtime PS services) between systems. In inter-system handover scenarios, this feature can greatly improve user perception, especially for real-time PS services. The PS handover is different from NACC or normal cell change function, with which the relocation procedure between 3G and 2G is applied, just like the CS inter-system handover. With this feature, the service interruption for PS service inter-system handover is reduced by a great extent. In this feature, both the handover from UTRAN to GERAN and the handover from GERAN to UTRAN are supplied. If both the UE and the network support PS handover, handover between UTRAN and GERAN would be performed. Otherwise, either NACC or normal cell change order would be selected. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


912



Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to open the following switches in the HandOver switch parameter: – HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH – HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH

l

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a neighboring GSM cell to the UMTS coverage and to set the Inter-RAT cell support PS HO indicator parameter to TRUE.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > GSM Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a neighboring GSM cell for the UMTS cell.

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTERRATHOCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Coverage based Inter-rat Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set inter-RAT handover measurement related parameters.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to check the status of PS inter-RAT handover switch and the Relocation HO switch.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UEXT2GCELL to ensure the inter-RAT cell supports PS Handover.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UINTERRATHOCOV to check inter-RAT handover measurement related parameters.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH in the HandOver switch parameter to 0.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the SuppPSHOFlag parameter to FALSE.

----End Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


913



Example //Activating PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWI TCH-1; ADD UEXT2GCELL: GSMCellIndex=1, GSMCellName="GSMCELL1", NBscIndex=1, LdPrdRprtSwitch=ON, MCC="460", MNC="01", CnOpGrpIndex=1, LAC=1, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1, CID=1, NCC=1, BCC=1, BcchArfcn=512, RatCellType=GPRS, UseOfHcs=NOT_USED, SuppPSHOFlag=TRUE; ADD U2GNCELL: RNCId=1, CellId=100, GSMCellIndex=1; SET UINTERRATHOCOV: InterRatReportMode=PERIODICAL_REPORTING, FilterCoefOf2D2F=D4, InterRATFilterCoef=D6; //Deactivating PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH-0; MOD UEXT2GCELL: SuppPSHOFlag=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


914



275

Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature provides a mechanism for performing handover between GSM/GPRS and UMTS systems on the basis of services. This feature forwards appropriate services in a UMTS system to a GSM/GPRS system, balancing load between the two systems. This feature also prevents the handover from adversely affecting services based on service attributes.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH from the HandOver Switch list.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 2G External Cell; CME batch Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

915



modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a neighboring GSM cell.

l

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > GSM Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set neighbor relation with the neighboring GSM cell.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHOCOMM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented Handover Common Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set InterRAT CS handover switch or Inter-RAT PS handover switch to ON.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLINTERRATHONCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented None-Coverage Based Inter-rat Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) (cell level) or SET UINTERRATHONCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented None-Coverage based Inter-rat Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) (RNC level) to configure parameters related to non-coverage-based inter-frequency handover to GSM.


Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu Message Type, select RRC_MEAS_CTRL.

2.

After services are set up, view in the traced messages whether the RNC has sent the UE an inter-frequency measurement control message shown in Figure 275-1.


l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHOCOMM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

916



Oriented Handover Common Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set InterRAT CS handover switch or Inter-RAT PS handover switch to OFF. ----End

Example //Activating Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; ADD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=111, CSServiceHOSwitch=ON, PSServiceHOSwitch=ON; //Deactivating Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service MOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=111, CSServiceHOSwitch=OFF, PSServiceHOSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


917



276

Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – If this feature is used for HSDPA or HSUPA load control, the feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package or WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package has been configured correspondingly before this feature is activated.

l


Context This feature is an important part of Load Reshuffling (LDR). It enables some UEs in a UMTS cell to be blindly handed over to a GSM or GPRS cell to reduce the load of the UMTS cell.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to activate the inter-RAT handover. In this step, select the HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH check boxes under the parameter HandOver Switch.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

918



Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add the information about a GSM cell.

l

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > GSM Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the GSM cell as a neighboring cell of the UMTS cell.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the inter-RAT handover policy for the UMTS cell. In this step, set DL LDR fourth action to CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO(CS domain inter-rat should be load handover), DL LDR fifth action to PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO(PS domain inter-rat should be load handover), UL LDR fourth action to CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO(CS domain inter-rat should be load handover), and UL LDR fifth action to PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO(PS domain inter-rat should be load handover).

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLINTERRATHONCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented None-Coverage Based Inter-rat Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) (at the cell level) or SET UINTERRATHONCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented None-Coverage based Inter-rat Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) (at the RNC level) to configure parameters related to non-coverage-based inter-frequency handover to GSM.


Initiate Iu interface message tracing and Uu interface message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT.

2.

Use a UE in the UMTS cell to call another UE in the same cell. The call is set up successfully.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM to reduce the downlink LDR threshold. The following messages can be traced on the Iu interface: the RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message from the RNC to the CN, and the RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND message from the CN to the RNC. The following message can be traced on the Uu interface: the RRC_HO_FROM_UTRAN_CMD_GSM message from the RNC to the UE. The following messages can be traced on the Iu interface: the RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message from the RNC to the CN, the RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND message from the CN to the RNC, the RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND message from the CN to the RNC, and the RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE message from the RNC to the CN.

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the load-based handover. In this step, set DL Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

919



LDR fourth action, DL LDR fifth action, UL LDR fourth action, and UL LDR fifth action to NoAct. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the inter-RAT handover. In this step, deselect the HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH check boxes under the parameter HandOver Switch.

----End

Example //Activating Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; ADD UEXT2GCELL: GSMCellIndex=2, GSMCellName="2", NBscIndex=2, LdPrdRprtSwitch=OFF, MCC="460", MNC="07", CnOpGrpIndex=1, LAC=H'0012, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=H'01, CID=2, NCC=2, BCC=2, BcchArfcn=1000, RatCellType=GSM, UseOfHcs=NOT_USED; ADD U2GNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=2, GSMCellIndex=2, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, BlindHOPrio=1, NPrioFlag=FALSE; ADD UCELLLDR: CellId=1, DlLdrFourthAction=CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, DlLdrFifthAction=PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, UlLdrFourthAction=CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, UlLdrFifthAction=PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO; ADD UCELLINTERRATHONCOV: CellId=1; //Deactivating Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=1, DlLdrFourthAction=NoAct, DlLdrFifthAction=NoAct, UlLdrFourthAction=NoAct, UlLdrFifthAction=NoAct; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-0&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


920



277

Configuring Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature WRFD-020401 Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context If a UE initiates a CS voice call with a long distance to the antenna of a 3G cell, the UE may experience call drops when the UE moves out of the pilot polluted area. To solve this problem, the RAN redirects a UE to a GSM cell based on the distance threshold when the UE initiates an RRC connection setup request.

Procedure l


run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDISTANCEREDIRECTION (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented Delay Based RRC Redirection Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the BSC6900-level parameters. – Set Redirection Switch to ON. – Set Propagation delay threshold as specified in 3GPP TS 25.433

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


921



– Set Redirection Factor Of LDR and Redirection Factor Of Normal to appropriate values based on the network plan. 2.

run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLDISTANCEREDIRECTION (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell-Oriented Delay Based RRC Redirection Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-level parameters. – Set Redirection Switch to ON. – Set Propagation delay threshold as specified in 3GPP TS 25.433. – Set Redirection Factor Of LDR and Redirection Factor Of Normal to appropriate values based on the network plan. NOTE

If cell-level redirection parameters are set for a cell, the cell-level settings take effect. If no cell-level redirection parameters are set for the cell, the RNC-level settings take effect.

l


Initiate Uu interface message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 277-1.


2.

Simulate a scenario where pilot pollution occurs. Place the UE in a place where the UE is far away from the NodeB and pilot signals are strong. Then, use the UE to establish a CS voice call.

3.

Check the messages traced on the Uu interface. – As shown in Figure 277-2, if the RRC CONNECTION REJECT message contains the information element (IE) GSM-Targetcellinfo, the RAN has redirected the UE to the GSM network, and this feature has been activated.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


922



– If the RRC CONNECTION REJECT message does not contain the IE GSMTargetcellinfo, this feature is not activated. Figure 277-2 GSM-Targetcellinfo IE

l


run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDISTANCEREDIRECTION (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented Delay Based RRC Redirection Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate this feature in the BSC6900 level. In this step, set Redirection Switch to OFF.

2.

run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLDISTANCEREDIRECTION (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell-Oriented Delay Based RRC Redirection Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate this feature in the cell level. In this step, set Redirection Switch to OFF. NOTE

If cell-level redirection parameters are set for a cell, the cell-level settings take effect. If no cell-level redirection parameters are set for the cell, the RNC-level settings take effect.

----End

Example //Activating Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance //Activating this feature in the BSC6900 level SET UDISTANCEREDIRECTION: RedirSwitch=ON, DelayThs=100, RedirFactorOfLDR=70, RedirFactorOfNorm=60; //Activating this feature in the cell level ADD UCELLDISTANCEREDIRECTION: CellId=1, RedirSwitch=ON, DelayThs=100, RedirFactorOfLDR=80, RedirFactorOfNorm=60; //Deactivating Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance //Deactivating this feature in the BSC6900 level SET UDISTANCEREDIRECTION: RedirSwitch=OFF; //Deactivating this feature in the cell level MOD UCELLDISTANCEREDIRECTION: CellId=1, RedirSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


923



278

Configuring 3G/2G Common Load Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020310 3G/2G Common Load Management.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature is required only when one of the following features is available: – WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service – WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load – WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure) – WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package – WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2

l


l

Others – The CN supports this feature. – The BSS supports this feature.

Context The 3G/2G Common Load Management applies to inter-RAT handover and inter system direct retry. The load of source cell and target cell is considered during inter-RAT handover from 3G to 2G or from 2G to 3G and inter system direct retry.



924


l


1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable the inter-RAT handover. In this step, select HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH through the HandOver Switch.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTERRATHONCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented None-Coverage based Inter-rat Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable the 3G/2G common load management function. In this step, select the Send Load Info to GSM Ind and NCOV Reloc Ind Based on GSM Cell Load.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a GSM cell neighboring to the UMTS coverage.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UINTERRATHONCOV to check whether the parameters Send Load Info to GSM Ind and NCOV Reloc Ind based on GSM cell load are set to ON.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST U2GNCELL to ensure the inter-RAT neighboring cell for the GSM system is added correctly. NOTE

Consult Huawei engineers about the verification solution to obtain professional technical support.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTERRATHONCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented None-Coverage based Inter-rat Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter Send Load Info to GSM Ind to OFF and the parameter NCOV Reloc Ind based on GSM cell load to OFF.

----End

Example //Activating 3G/2G Common Load Management SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; SET UINTERRATHONCOV: SndLdInfo2GsmInd=ON, NcovHoOn2GldInd=ON; //Deactivating 3G/2G Common Load Management SET UINTERRATHONCOV: SndLdInfo2GsmInd=OFF, NcovHoOn2GldInd=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


925



279

Configuring Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020126 Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1. For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE supports both UMTS and LTE. – The LTE network supports this feature.

Context The feature Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1 provides the following functions: l

UMTS supports bidirectional cell reselection between a UMTS cell and an LTE cell.

l

UMTS supports PS handovers from an LTE cell to a UMTS cell.

l


Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLSIBSWITCH or MOD UCELLSIBSWITCH. In this step, set SIB Switch to SIB19. After the information about the frequencies of neighboring LTE cells is configured and SIB Switch is set to SIB19, the BSC6900 sends SIB19 messages to UEs. The

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


926



SIB19 message contains the neighboring LTE cell list and LTE cell reselection parameters. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLSELRESEL or MOD UCELLSELRESEL. In this step, set Absolute priority level of the serving cell to an appropriate value. Inter-RAT measurement is performed based on the settings of RSCP threshold for low-prio-freq measurement initiation and Ec/No threshold for low-prio-freq measurement initiation. The measurement result provides a reference to cell reselection.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLNFREQPRIOINFO or MOD UCELLNFREQPRIOINFO to configure the information about the frequencies of neighboring cells. The UE makes cell reselection decisions based on the configured information about the frequencies of neighboring cells.

l

4.

Configure the related data, such as the neighboring cell relationships between cells, on the LTE side. For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor. If the LTE equipment is provided by Huawei, see the LTE document Mobility Management in Connected Mode Parameter Description.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB or MOD UNODEB. In this step, set NodeB Protocol Version to R8 or the higher version.


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

In the Navigation Tree pane on the BSC6900 LMT, click the Trace tab. In the displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On the unfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu Interface Trace dialog box, select RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE19 to trace Uu interface SIB19 message.


927




2.

Analyze the traced messages. – If the SIB19 message has been traced on the Uu interface, as shown in Figure 279-2, this feature has been activated. – If the SIB19 message is not traced on the Uu interface, this feature is not activated. Figure 279-2 SIB message tracing

l


To deactivate this feature, you can either turn off the SIB19 switch or deactivate the license. l To deactivate this feature in a specific cell, you are advised to turn off the SIB19 switch. l To deactivate this feature in all cells under a BSC6900, deactivate the license. This method is not recommended.

1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSIBSWITCH. In this step, deselect the SIB19 check box under the parameter SIB Switch to turn off the SIB19 switch in a cell. After the switch is turned off, the BSC6900 stops sending SIB19 messages to UEs. In such a case, the configured absolute priority of the serving cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

928



and the configured information about the frequencies of neighboring cells become ineffective. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to deactivate the license controlling the feature Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1.

----End

Example //Activating Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1 MOD UCELLSIBSWITCH: CellId=1, SibCfgBitMap=SIB19-1; MOD UCELLSELRESEL: CellId=1, QualMeas=CPICH_ECNO, QrxlevminExtSup=FALSE, NonhcsInd=NOT_CONFIGURED, ThdPrioritySearch1=2, ThdPrioritySearch2=2; MOD UCELLNFREQPRIOINFO: CellId=1, EARFCN=1, NPriority=2, BlacklstCellNumber=D0; MOD UNODEB: NodeBId=1, NodeBProtclVer=R9; //Deactivating Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1 MOD UCELLSIBSWITCH: CellId=1, SibCfgBitMap=SIB19-0; SET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, FUNCTIONSWITCH5=LQW1ULM01-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


929



280

Configuring Service-Based PS

Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020129 Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – There is no requirement for BSC6900 and NodeB.

l


l


l

Others – The UE must support 3GPP Release 8 (Sept. 2008) or later. It also must support both UMTS and LTE. – The SGSN support this feature. – CN should support cooperation from UMTS to LTE. – The neighboring LTE cell has been configured. For details, see Configuring a Neighboring LTE Cell.

Context With this feature, the operator can choose to hand over the high-speed PS services from the UMTS network to the LTE network. This helps fully utilize the UMTS and LTE network resources, improving the user experience.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ULTECELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

930



External Cell Configuration > RNC LTE External Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set an LTE cell. In this step, set LTE Cell Supporting PS HO Indicator to NotSupport and set BlackCell List Flag to False.

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UU2LTEHONCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented Non-Coverage-Based UMTS-LTE Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set RNC-Oriented Non-Coverage-Based UMTS-LTE Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters. The BSC6900 sends these parameters to the UE by means of a measurement control message.

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLU2LTEHONCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell-Oriented Non-Coverage-Based UMTS-LTE Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-level non-coveragebased UMTS-to-LTE handover measurement parameters for a cell.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABBASIC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > Basic Information for Typical Traffic Radio Access Bearer; CME batch modification center: not supported) to modify the basic configuration of a typical radio access bearer (RAB). In this step, set EUTRANSHIND to HO_TO_EUTRAN_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select HO_LTE_PS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_LTE_SERVICE_PS_OUT_SWITCH from HandOver Switch drop list.

Verification Procedure Start Uu interface tracing on the LMT to trace messages on the Uu interface. View the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message, as shown in Figure 280-1. If the measurementCommand message contains the information element (IE) e-UTRAFrequencyInfo, this feature takes effect. The measurement control message sent by the BSC6900 contains the LTE cell information. After receiving the message, the UE measures the signal quality in the LTE cell. The measurement result serves as the basis for handover decision.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


931



Figure 280-1 Viewing the IE e-UTRA-FrequencyInfo

View the RRC_CONN_REL message, as shown in Figure 280-2. If in the message the rrcConnectionRelease message contains the IE EUTRA-TargetFreqInfo, the RRC connection release message carries the LTE cell information. After receiving this message, the UE is handed over to the LTE network and the UE reestablishes PS services in the LTE cell. Figure 280-2 Viewing the IE EUTRA-TargetFreqInfo

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deselect HO_LTE_SERVICE_PS_OUT_SWITCH from the HandOver Switch drop list.

----End

Example //Activation procedure /Configuring an LTE cell MOD ULTECELL: LTECellIndex=1, SuppPSHOFlag=NotSupport, BlackFlag=False;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


932



//Setting the parameters related to the RNC-oriented non coverage-based UMTS-to-LTE handover measurement algorithm SET UU2LTEHONCOV: LTEMeasTypOf3C=MeasurementQuantity, U2LTEFilterCoef=D6, U2LTEMeasTime=30, LTEMeasQuanOf3C=RSRP, Hystfor3C=2, TrigTime3C=D10, TargetRatThdRSRP=20, TargetRatThdRSRQ=30; //Setting the parameters related to the cell-oriented non coverage-based UMTS-to-LTE handover measurement algorithm ADD UCELLU2LTEHONCOV: CellId=1, LTEMeasTypOf3C=MeasurementQuantity, U2LTEFilterCoef=D6, U2LTEMeasTime=30, LTEMeasQuanOf3C=RSRP, Hystfor3C=2, TrigTime3C=D10, TargetRatThdRSRP=20, TargetRatThdRSRQ=30; //Modifying the basic configuration of a typical RAB MOD UTYPRABBASIC: RabIndex=1, EUTRANSHIND=HO_TO_EUTRAN_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM; //Enabling HO_LTE_PS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_LTE_SERVICE_PS_OUT_SWITCH SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_LTE_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_LTE_SERVICE_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; //Deactivation procedure //Disabling HO_LTE_SERVICE_PS_OUT_SWITCH SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_LTE_SERVICE_PS_OUT_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


933



281

Configuring Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140218 Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This BSC6900 supports this feature.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE must comply with 3GPP Release 8 or later and support UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers and LTE measurement. – The eNodeB and MME must support UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers. – The SGSN must support UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers.

Context With this feature, the operator can choose to hand over the high-speed PS services from the UMTS network to the LTE network. In this way, user experience is improved, and the network resources of UMTS and LTE are fully utilized. l


l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Data Preparation


934



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Inter-RAT cell support PS HO indicator

SuppPSHOFlag

Set this parameter to Support.

Network plan

BlackCell List Flag

BlackFlag

Set this parameter to False.

Network plan

Service-Based Handover to LTE Allowed

EUTRANSHIND

Set this parameter to HO_TO_EUTRA N_SHOULD_BE_ PERFORM.

Network plan

HandOver Switch

HoSwitch

The HO_LTE_PS_OU T_SWITCH and HO_LTE_SERVI CE_PSHO_OUT_ SWITCH should be selected.

Network plan

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ULTECELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC LTE External Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set an LTE cell. In this step, set LTE Cell Supporting PS HO Indicator to Support(Support) and set BlackCell List Flag to False.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UU2LTEHONCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented Non-Coverage-Based UMTS-LTE Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the RNC-level non-coverage-based UMTS-to-LTE handover measurement parameters. These parameter settings are to be delivered in the measurement control information by the BSC6900 to UEs.

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLU2LTEHONCOV (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell-Oriented Non-Coverage-Based UMTS-LTE Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-level non-coveragebased UMTS-to-LTE handover measurement parameters for a cell.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABBASIC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > Basic Information for Typical Traffic Radio Access Bearer; CME batch modification center: not supported) to allow the UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers. In this step, set Service-Based Handover to LTE Allowed to HO_TO_EUTRAN_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

935


l


5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select HO_LTE_PS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_LTE_SERVICE_PSHO_OUT_SWITCH under HandOver Switch to enable the service-based UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers.

6.

Optional: When the target LTE network is an MOCN and the PLMN of the primary operator is the same as the primary PLMN of the LTE cell or when the target LTE network is not an MOCN but the PLMNs of UMTS and LTE are different, the following configurations are required to implement UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERATOR (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > CN Operator; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, add the operator to which the target LTE network belongs to the operator list, and configure the operator information about the LTE network, such as OperatorType, CnOperatorName, MCC, MNC, and CnOpIndex.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERGROUP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > CN Operator Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, associate CnOpGrpIndex of the external cell with the operator of the target LTE network.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > RNC Operators Sharing Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, turn on the InterPlmnHoAllowedInterRat switch to support inter-PLMN interoperations.

Verification Procedure Start Iu interface message tracing on the LMT. View the RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message. If the value of ucChoice in the message is IU_RELOC_U2L, the feature has been activated.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear HO_LTE_SERVICE_PSHO_OUT_SWITCH under HandOver Switch to disable the service-based UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers.

----End

Example //Activating Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE //Configuring an LTE cell MOD ULTECELL: LTECellIndex=1, SuppPSHOFlag=Support, BlackFlag=False; //Setting the RNC-level non-coverage-based UMTS-to-LTE handover measurement parameters SET UU2LTEHONCOV: LTEMeasTypOf3C=MeasurementQuantity, U2LTEFilterCoef=D6, U2LTEMeasTime=30, LTEMeasQuanOf3C=RSRP, Hystfor3C=2, TrigTime3C=D10,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


936



TargetRatThdRSRP=20, TargetRatThdRSRQ=30; //Setting the cell-level non-coverage-based UMTS-to-LTE handover measurement parameters ADD UCELLU2LTEHONCOV: CellId=1, LTEMeasTypOf3C=MeasurementQuantity, U2LTEFilterCoef=D6, U2LTEMeasTime=30, LTEMeasQuanOf3C=RSRP, Hystfor3C=2, TrigTime3C=D10, TargetRatThdRSRP=20, TargetRatThdRSRQ=30; //Modifying the basic information about RAB of the typical service MOD UTYPRABBASIC: RabIndex=1, EUTRANSHIND=HO_TO_EUTRAN_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM; //Enabling the service-based UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_LTE_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_LTE_SERVICE_PSHO_OUT_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE ///Disabling the service-based UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_LTE_SERVICE_PSHO_OUT_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


937



282

Configuring Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-140224 fast CS fallback based on RIM. For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE must support flash CSFB in Release 9. – The mobility management entity (MME) and serving GPRS support node (SGSN) must support the RIM procedure in 3GPP release 9. If the core network (CN) is earlier than 3GPP release 9, it must support eNodeB ID conversion.

Context This feature enables the eNodeB to obtain and maintain the system information of the UMTS cell, including the ID of the target cell and convolutional code, through the RAN Information Management (RIM) procedure and sends the information to the UE in the RRC Connection Release message. This can reduce the access time when the UE is redirected from an LTE network to a UMTS network without reading system information, improving user experience. l


l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


938



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Process Control Switch 2

PROCESSSWITC H2

The FAST_CS_FB_B ASEDON_RIM_S WITCH should be deselected.

Network plan

Procedure l


Configure the data on the LTE side, including setting the neighbor relationships between cells. For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor. If the LTE equipment is provided by Huawei, see the LTE document CS Fallback Parameter Description.

2.

l

l


Trace the Iu-interface and UE signaling on the RNC LMT. Trace the S1 interface signaling (on the eNodeB LMT for Huawei eNodeBs) and the UE signaling (on the M2000 for Huawei eNodeBs).

2.

Verify that the Direct Information Transfer message that contains RANINFORMATION PDU REQUEST or RAN-INFORMATION PDU REPORT is transmitted over the Iu and S1 interfaces.

3.

Initiate a CS service in an LTE cell. Check the UE signaling and verify that the IE CellInfoListUTRA-FDD-r9 in the RRC Connection Release message contains the frequency, primary scrambling code, and system information (including MIB, SIB1, SIB3, SIB5, and SIB7) of the target UMTS cell.

4.

Check the UE log and measure the duration between the UE receiving an RRC Connection Release from the eNodeB and the UE sending an RRC Connection Request to the target UMTS cell. Verify that during this duration the UE does not read the system information of the target UMTS cell, and that this duration is shorter than the duration measured when Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM is disabled.

5.

Check the UE signaling and verify that the RNC sends the UE an RRC_RB_SETUP message that contains the IE rrc-StateIndicator and instructs the UE to move to the CELL_DCH state.


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select FAST_CS_FB_BASEDON_RIM_SWITCH under Process Control Switch 2 to enable this feature.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

939



FAST_CS_FB_BASEDON_RIM_SWITCH under Process Control Switch 2 to disable this feature. ----End

Example //Activating fast CS fallback based on RIM SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH2=FAST_CS_FB_BASEDON_RIM_SWITCH-0; //Deactivating fast CS fallback based on RIM SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH2=FAST_CS_FB_BASEDON_RIM_SWITCH-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


940



283

Configuring Queuing and Preemption

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010505 Queuing and Preemption.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature requires the CN to bring the information element allocation/retention priority (ARP) to BSC6900 during RAB assignment so that BSC6900 can obtain service priorities with RAB parameters.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features must be configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

l


l

Others – This feature need the CN bring the ARP IE to RNC during RAB assignment procedure so that RNC can get the service priority with those RAB parameters.

Context This feature supports queuing and preemption to implement service differentiation in congested networks, providing better service for high-priority users.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUEUEPREEMPT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Queue Preempt Parameters Configuration > RNC Oriented Queue Preempt Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

941



Batches) to turn on the queuing and preemption switches. In this step, set Preempt algorithm switch to ON and set Queue algorithm switch to ON. l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UQUEUEPREEMPT to check whether the queuing and preemption switches are turned on.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUEUEPREEMPT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Queue Preempt Parameters Configuration > RNC Oriented Queue Preempt Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn off the queuing and preemption switches. In this step, set Preempt algorithm switch to OFF and set Queue algorithm switch to OFF.

----End

Example //Activating Queuing and Preemption SET UQUEUEPREEMPT: PreemptAlgoSwitch=ON, QueueAlgoSwitch=ON; //Deactivating Queuing and Preemption SET UQUEUEPREEMPT: PreemptAlgoSwitch=OFF, QueueAlgoSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


942



284

Configuring Access Class Restriction

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021103 Access Class Restriction.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – BSC6900 supports NACC RAN Information Management (RIM) and PS handover. – The UE supports NACC and PS handover. – The CN SGSN supports NACC and PS handover.

l


l


Context When the cell or system is overloaded, this feature can restrict user access based on the allowed service class by broadcasting system information, controlling potential load requirements of the system.

Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UACALGO (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > AC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set AC Restriction Switch to ON and other parameters to appropriate values.

Verification Procedure – Verifying Access Class Restriction based on CPU overload 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Start Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

943



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST FCCPUTHD to query the settings of AC control threshold and AC restore threshold.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCCPUTHD. In this step, set AC control threshold and AC restore threshold to appropriate values.

4.

Enable a large number of UEs to access a cell until the CPU usage exceeds the AC restore threshold.

5.

Start Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT and select RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 as the message type. If the value of barred IE in the RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 message is 0, as shown in Figure 284-1, the feature has been activated. If the value is not 0, the feature is not activated.

Figure 284-1 RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 message

6.

Reduce the number of UEs in the cell until the CPU usage is lower than the AC restore threshold.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCCPUTHD. In this step, set AC control threshold and AC restore threshold to their original values.

– Verifying Access Class Restriction based on the access failure on the Iu interface

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH. In this step, set Process switch to SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST and BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step, set Cell CAC algorithm switch to SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST (System Info Update Switch for Iu Reset). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

944



3.

Start Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT and select RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 as the message to be traced. Interrupt the Iu-interface connection and wait for a period of time. If the traced RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 message indicates that the cell is barred, as shown in Figure 284-2, the feature has been activated. If the traced message does not indicate that the cell is barred, the feature is not activated.

Figure 284-2 RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 message

l

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RST UIU. In this step, set CN Domain ID to CS_DOMAIN.

5.

Start Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT and select RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 as the message to be traced. If the traced RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 message indicates that the cell is barred, as shown in Figure 284-2, the feature has been activated. If the traced message does not indicate that the cell is barred, the feature is not activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UACALGO (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > AC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set AC Restriction Switch to OFF.

----End

Example //Activating Access Class Restriction SET UACALGO: AcRstrctSwitch=ON, AcRstrctPercent=5, AcIntervalOfCell=1, AcRstrctIntervalLen=6;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


945



//Verifying Access Class Restriction based on CPU overload SET FCCPUTHD: BRDCLASS=XPU, ACCTHD=40, ACRTHD=35; SET FCCPUTHD: BRDCLASS=XPU, ACCTHD=80, ACRTHD=70; //Verifying Access Class Restriction based on the access failure on the Iu interface SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST-1&BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST-1 ; //Deactivating Access Class Restriction SET UACALGO: AcRstrctSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


946



285

Configuring Traffic Priority

Mapping onto Transmission Resources

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050424 Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature enables the dynamical mapping of the services onto the transport bearers according to the TC, ARP, and THP of the user. Operators can flexibly configure the mapping to provide differentiated services while guaranteeing the QoS.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the transport resource mapping. NOTE

l Before setting the type of a mapping path for a service, ensure that this type of path is available. Otherwise, the service may fail to be set up. l The primary path and the secondary path for the same service type must be different. l The default 14 transport resource mappings (indexed from 0 to 13) are added when the system is initialized, and you cannot modify them.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


947



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJMAP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the TRM mapping to the adjacent node. NOTE

Before running this command, ensure that the adjacent node or the NodeB is added by running the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > Adjacent Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) or ADD UNODEB (CME single configuration: Main View > Right Click RNC > Create Logical NodeB; CME batch modification center: not supported).

l

Verification Procedure This feature can be verified only by running the LST commands. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP to check whether the transport resource mapping is correct.

2.

If the mapping is incorrect, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD TRMMAP to modify the mapping. NOTE

Do not modify Interface Type and Transport Type in the MOD TRMMAP command.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ADJMAP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the TRM mapping to the adjacent node.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the transport resource mapping.

----End

Example //Activating Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources ADD TRMMAP: TMI=15, REMARK="15", ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, VOICEPRIPATH=AF11; ADD ADJMAP: ANI=10, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, CNMNGMODE=SHARE, TMIGLD=15, TMISLV=15, TMIBRZ=15, FTI=13; //Verifying Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources LST TRMMAP: TMI=15; MOD TRMMAP: TMI=15, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, CCHSECPATH=RT_VBR; //Deactivating Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources RMV ADJMAP: ANI=10,ITFT=IUB,CNMNGMODE=SHARE; RMV TRMMAP: TMI=15;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


948



286

Configuring Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: – WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR has been configured before this feature is applied in the downlink over the Uu interface. – WRFD-01061402 Enhanced Fast UL Scheduling or WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE Resource Management has been configured before this feature is applied in the uplink over the Uu interface. When this feature is enabled together with the optional feature WRFD-01061402 Enhanced Fast UL Scheduling, only uplink Uu interface resources can be differentially scheduled. When this feature is enabled together with the optional feature RFD-010638 Dynamic CE Resource Management, both uplink Uu interface resources and CE resources can be differentially scheduled. – WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-050405 Overbooking on ATM Transmission, or WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-050408 Overbooking on IP Transmission have been configured before this feature is applied in the downlink over the Iub interface. – WRFD-010637 HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion has been configured before this feature is applied in the uplink over the Iub interface.

l


Context When Uu interface resources, CE resources, and Iub transmission resources do not meet the GBR requirements of all online users, this feature enables the RAN to preferentially guarantee Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


949



the GBR of high-priority users. The RAN can thereby provide differentiated services under a certain level of fairness.

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUSERPRIORITY (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > User Integrated Priority Parameters Configuration > RNC Oriented User Priority Related Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to configure gold, silver, and copper users.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UTHPCLASS (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Channel Management Configuration > THP Class for Interactive Users; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set priorities of PS interactive services to appropriate values.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USCHEDULEPRIOMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Channel Management Configuration > Schedule Priority Map Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the scheduling priority mapping information.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCAPARATERANGE (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Channel Management Configuration > Rate Thresholds for Differentiated HSPA Services Based on SPI Weight; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set RNCspecific reference rates and rate thresholds of all levels in the uplink and downlink.

5.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UOPERCAPARATERANGE (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Channel Management Configuration > Operator-Level Rate Thresholds for SPI Weight of HSPA Services; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set operator-specific reference rates and rate thresholds of all levels in the uplink and downlink.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USPIWEIGHT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Channel Management Configuration > Factor of Schedule Priority; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set RNC-specific scheduling priority weight.

7.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UOPERSPIWEIGHT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Channel Management Configuration > Operator-Oriented Factor of Schedule Priority; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set operator-specific scheduling priority weight.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Process switch to NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH.


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Establish services on UE A and UE B. Assume that the SPI and SPI weight of UE A are 7 and 50 respectively and the SPI and SPI weight of UE B are 7 and 100 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

950



respectively. In the traced Iub interface messages, check the information element (IE) schedulingPriorityIndicator in the NBAP_RL_RECFG_PREP message to obtain the SPI value; check the IE schedule-Prior-Indication-Weight-Private to obtain the SPI weight, which is the actual SPI value for the NodeB, as shown in Figure 286-1, Figure 286-2, Figure 286-3, and Figure 286-4. Figure 286-1 SPI and SPI weight of UE A in the uplink

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


951



Figure 286-2 SPI and SPI weight of UE A in the downlink

Figure 286-3 SPI and SPI weight of UE B in the uplink

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


952



Figure 286-4 SPI and SPI weight of UE B in the downlink

2.

l

Check the real-time throughput of UEs by referring to Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth and Monitoring DL Throughput and Bandwidth. Generally, if the throughput of users with higher SPI weight is higher than that of users with lower SPI weight, this feature has taken effect. The throughput of UE B is approximately twice the throughput of UE A, as shown in the NBAP_RL_RECFG_PREP message. If the throughput of users with higher SPI weight is lower than that of users with lower SPI weight, this feature has not taken effect.



----End

Example /*Activating Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight*/ //Configuring gold, silver, and copper users SET UUSERPRIORITY: ARP1Priority=Gold, ARP2Priority=Gold, ARP3Priority=Gold, ARP4Priority=Gold, ARP5Priority=Gold, ARP6Priority=Silver, ARP7Priority=Silver, ARP8Priority=Silver, ARP9Priority=Silver, ARP10Priority=Silver, ARP11Priority=Copper, ARP12Priority=Copper, ARP13Priority=Copper, ARP14Priority=Copper, ARP15Priority=Copper, PriorityReference=ARP, CarrierTypePriorInd=NONE; //Setting the priorities of PS interactive services

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


953



SET UTHPCLASS: THP1Class=High, THP2Class=High, THP3Class=High, THP4Class=High, THP5Class=High, THP6Class=Medium, THP7Class=Medium, THP8Class=Medium, THP9Class=Medium, THP10Class=Medium, THP11Class=Low, THP12Class=Low, THP13Class=Low, THP14Class=Low, THP15Class=Low; //Setting the scheduling priority mapping information SET USCHEDULEPRIOMAP: TrafficClass=INTERACTIVE, UserPriority=GOLD, THPClass=High, SPI=7; //Setting the RNC-specific reference rates and rate thresholds of all levels in the uplink and downlink SET UCAPARATERANGE: DlCapacitySelect=MBR, DlRateThreshold1=128, DlRateThreshold2=256, DlRateThreshold3=512, DlRateThreshold4=1000, DlRateThreshold5=4000, DlRateThreshold6=8000, DlRateThreshold7=10000, DlRateThreshold8=20000, DlRateThreshold9=45000, UlCapacitySelect=MBR, UlRateThreshold1=128, UlRateThreshold2=256, UlRateThreshold3=512, UlRateThreshold4=1000, UlRateThreshold5=4000, UlRateThreshold6=8000, UlRateThreshold7=10000, UlRateThreshold8=20000, UlRateThreshold9=45000; //Setting the operator-specific reference rates and rate thresholds of all levels in the uplink and downlink ADD UOPERCAPARATERANGE: CnOpIndex=0, DlRateThreshold1=128, DlRateThreshold2=384, DlRateThreshold3=512, DlRateThreshold4=1000, DlRateThreshold5=2000, DlRateThreshold6=4000, DlRateThreshold7=8000, DlRateThreshold8=16000, DlRateThreshold9=32000, UlRateThreshold1=128, UlRateThreshold2=384, UlRateThreshold3=512, UlRateThreshold4=768, UlRateThreshold5=1000, UlRateThreshold6=1500, UlRateThreshold7=2500, UlRateThreshold8=5500, UlRateThreshold9=7500; //Setting the RNC-specific scheduling priority weight SET USPIWEIGHT: SPI=7, SpiWeight=100, RateRangeSPIWeightInd=TRUE, DlRateRange1SPIWeight=10, DlRateRange2SPIWeight=20, DlRateRange3SPIWeight=30, DlRateRange4SPIWeight=40, DlRateRange5SPIWeight=50, DlRateRange6SPIWeight=60, DlRateRange7SPIWeight=70, DlRateRange8SPIWeight=80, DlRateRange9SPIWeight=90, DlRateRange10SPIWeight=100, UlRateRange1SPIWeight=10, UlRateRange2SPIWeight=20, UlRateRange3SPIWeight=30, UlRateRange4SPIWeight=40, UlRateRange5SPIWeight=50, UlRateRange6SPIWeight=60, UlRateRange7SPIWeight=70, UlRateRange8SPIWeight=80, UlRateRange9SPIWeight=90, UlRateRange10SPIWeight=100; //Setting the operator-specific scheduling priority weight ADD UOPERSPIWEIGHT: CnOpIndex=0, SPI=7, RateRangeSPIWeightInd=TRUE; //Enabling the switch for a NodeB private interface SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


954



287

Configuring Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020131 Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The HBBI and HULP boards in the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE do not support this feature. To support this feature, the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI or EDLP board. – The BBU3806 in the DBS3800 does not support this feature. To support this feature, the DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. – To support this feature, the 3900 series base stations must be configured with WBBPb or WBBPd boards. WBBPa boards in the 3900 series base stations do not support this feature.

l


l


Context In scenarios where R99 and HUSUPA users share the same TRX, this feature provides fair services for the two types of users and improves HSUPA user experience by considering R99 and HSUPA user satisfaction with throughput, that is, the ratio of effective rate to guaranteed bit rate (GBR).

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

To enable the algorithm switch for cell-level rate reduction for BE services based on R99 and HSUPA user fairness, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

955



UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) with BE rate reduction switch based on fairness set to ON(Algorithm is ON).

l

2.

To set the common measurement period based on R99 and HSUPA user fairness, run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with Fairness period timer length set to an appropriate value according to the network plan.

3.

To set the common measurement period based on R99 and HSUPA user fairness in a satellite communications environment, run the BSC6900 MML command SET USATLDCPERIOD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length Under Satellite Circuit Emulation; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with Fairness period timer length set to an appropriate value according to the network plan.

4.

To set the fairness threshold for R99 and HSUPA users, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) with Fairness threshold set to an appropriate default value according to the network plan.

5.

To enable the DCCC algorithm switch for applying the dynamic channel reconfiguration control algorithm to the RNC, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select the DRA_DCCC_SWITCH from the drop-down list Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Initiate Iub interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 287-1.


956



Figure 287-1 Iub interface tracing dialog box

2.

Establish PS BE services on the HSUPA and R99 UEs.

3.

The BSC6900 side sends a COMMON MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST message to the NodeB side. The NodeB side submits fairness common measurement reports to the BSC6900 side, as shown in Figure 287-2.

Figure 287-2 fairness common measurement report

l


To disable the algorithm switch for cell-level rate reduction for BE services based on R99 and HSUPA user fairness, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) with BE rate reduction switch based on fairness set to OFF(Algorithm is OFF).

----End

Example /*Activating the Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness feature //Enabling the algorithm switch for cell-level rate reduction for BE

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


957



services based on R99 and HSUPA user fairness MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11011, BERateReduceOnFairnessSwitch=ON; Where, [PARA]CellId[/PARA] is set to the cell ID for the algorithm switch. //Setting the common measurement period based on R99 and HSUPA user fairness SET ULDCPERIOD: FairnessPeriodTimerLen=11; //Setting the common measurement period based on R99 and HSUPA user fairness in a satellite communications environment SET USATLDCPERIOD: FairnessPeriodTimerLen=11; //Setting the fairness threshold for R99 and HSUPA users MOD UCELLLDM: CellId=11011,FairnessThd=150; Where, [PARA]CellId[/PARA] is set to the cell ID for the algorithm switch. //Enable the DCCC algorithm switch SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-1; /*Deactivating the Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness feature //Disabling the algorithm switch for cell-level rate reduction for BE services based on R99 and HSUPA user fairness MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11011, BERateReduceOnFairnessSwitch=OFF; Where, [PARA]CellId[/PARA] is set to the cell ID for the algorithm switch.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


958



288

Configuring Active Queue Management (AQM)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011502 Active Queue Management (AQM).

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context The AQM feature can improve user's feeling when HTTP and download services simultaneously exist.

Procedure l


l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the RNC-level AQM switch. In this step, select the Dynamic resource allocation switch check box under the parameter DRA_AQM_SWITCH. Initiate UE tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. In the displayed UE Trace dialog box, select the Debug Mode check box, as shown in Figure 288-1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

959



Figure 288-1 UE Trace dialog box

2.

Establish a BE service on the UE. Verify the value of the information element (IE) "ucAqmSwitch" contained in the message PdcpSetupInfo as follows: – If the value of the IE "ucAqmSwitch" is 1, this feature has been activated. – If the value of the IE "ucAqmSwitch" is 0, this feature is not activated.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the DRA_AQM_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic resource allocation switch.

----End

Example //Activating Active Queue Management (AQM) SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_AQM_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating Active Queue Management (AQM) SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_AQM_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


960



289

Configuring Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020128 Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only BSC6900 supports this feature. – For BTS3812E and BTS3812AE, EBBI, EBOI, EULP or EULPd board is needed. – For BBU3806, EBBC/EBBCd is needed. – For BBU3900, WBBPb or WBBPd is needed.

l


l


l

Others – None.

Context This feature enables BSC6900 to adjust the user scheduling priority by identifying the characteristics of IP data streams and modifying the initial Scheduling Priority Indicator (SPI) Weight of downlink services. The feature grants high scheduling priorities to specific services on which telecom operators focus, such as services from specific servers or http services. By doing this, the bandwidth required for processing the services is guaranteed. In addition, the feature lowers the scheduling weight of some non-paying services that consume a large amount of bandwidth. By doing this, sufficient bandwidth is available for services with high scheduling priorities. Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


961



Procedure l


Set the initial SPI Weight on the BSC6900 LMT. – If the license controlling the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight has been activated, run the BSC6900 MML command SET USPIWEIGHT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Channel Management Configuration > Factor of Schedule Priority; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the parameters Scheduling Priority Indicator and SPI Weight based on the actual network plan. – If the license controlling the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is not activated, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Default SPI Weight based on the actual network plan.

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH check box under the parameter Process switch.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_IP_SERVICE_QOS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIPSERVICEQOS (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Operator Configuration > Simple Packet Identify Three Element Parameter; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set the parameters related to the Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service feature to appropriate values based on the network plan.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > DPU Data Configuration > DPU Configuration Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Service Priority Adjusting Coefficient to an appropriate value.


l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

When the resources (for example, resources on the air interface) are limited, activating this feature may increase the throughput of FTP services and shorten the network delay of HTTP services. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

962



Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the DRA_IP_SERVICE_QOS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. ----End

Example //Activating Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service //Setting the initial SPI weight value if the license control switch for the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is turned on SET USPIWEIGHT: SPI=4, SPIWEIGHT=10; //Setting the initial SPI weight value if the license control switch for the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is not turned on SET UFRC: DefaultSPIWeight=10; //Turning on the switch for a NodeB private interface SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1; //Turning on the switch for the Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service feature SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_IP_SERVICE_QOS_SWITCH-1; //Setting the parameters related to the Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service feature ADD UIPSERVICEQOS: CnOpIndex=0, RecIndex=1, TrafficType=SPI, MatchType=IPAndPort, IPAddress="192.168.0.100", IPMask="255.255.255.255", PortNum=8080, ProtocolType=TCP, TrafficPriority=HIGH; //Setting the scheduling priority weight corresponding to high-priority services SET UDPUCFGDATA: ServPriAdjCoefHigh=100; //Deactivating Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_IP_SERVICE_QOS_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


963



290

Configuring TCP Accelerator

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020123 TCP Accelerator.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The TCP Accelerator feature takes effect only when the server has the Time Stamp option in the TCP deselected. – Downlink TCP accelerator requires that the BSC6900 version is RAN11.0 or later. – Uplink TCP accelerator requires that the BSC6900 version is RAN12.0 or later.

Context The TCP Accelerator feature in RAN11.0 optimizes the data transmission performance in the downlink. Based on this feature in RAN11.0, RAN12.0 introduces the TCP Accelerator feature to optimize the data transmission in the uplink. In addition, the Acknowledgment (ACK) splitting technology, ACK splitting monitoring technology, and uplink data packet sequencing technology are adopted. These technologies aim at accelerating the slow start and restore processes during uplink data transmission, reducing the impact of packet loss on the performance of uplink TCP data transmission. NOTE

Data configurations are required only at the BSC6900 to activate, verify, and deactivate this feature.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


964



Procedure l


l

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > DPU Data Configuration > DPU Configuration Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the TCP accelerator switch. In this step, select TPE_DOWNLINK_SWITCH or TPE_UPLINK_SWITCH from TPE switch according to the actual requirements.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UDPUCFGDATA to check whether the TCP accelerator switch is turned on. If the switch is turned on, this feature has been activated.

2.

Use a test terminal to download a file of 200 KB from the FTP server. Then, compare the download time taken before and after the TPE_DOWNLINK_SWITCH is turned on.

3.

Use a test terminal to upload a file of 200 KB to the FTP server. Then, compare the upload time taken before and after the TPE_UPLINK_SWITCH is turned on.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > DPU Data Configuration > DPU Configuration Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn off the TCP accelerator switch. In this step, deselect TPE_DOWNLINK_SWITCH or TPE_UPLINK_SWITCH from TPE switch according to the actual requirements.

----End

Example //Activating TCP Accelerator Turning on the TCP accelerator switch at the RNC SET UDPUCFGDATA: TpeSwitch=TPE_DOWNLINK_SWITCH-1&TPE_UPLINK_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating TCP Accelerator Turning off the TCP accelerator switch at the RNC SET UDPUCFGDATA: TpeSwitch=TPE_DOWNLINK_SWITCH-0&TPE_UPLINK_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


965



291

Configuring Rate Negotiation at Admission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010507 Rate Negotiation at Admission Control.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – For Iu QoS negotiation, the CN nodes must support this feature. – For RAB rate reduction, the CN nodes do not need to support this feature.

Context This feature supports the procedures for Iu QoS negotiation and RAB rate reduction.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Activating QoS negotiation 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH, and set PS rate negotiation switch to Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

966



PS_BE_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and PS_STREAM_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH. – Activating RAB rate reduction 1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH, and set PS rate negotiation switch to PS_RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH.

Verification Procedure – Verifying QoS negotiation 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to query the activation result.

2.

Start Iu message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT and establish a PS service, as shown in Figure 291-1.

Figure 291-1 Iu message tracing

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

View the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message. If it contains the IE "altRAB-Parameters", the CN supports Iu QoS negotiation, as shown in Figure 291-2.


967



Figure 291-2 RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message on the Iu interface

– Verifying RAB rate reduction 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to query the activation result.

2.

Start Iu message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT and establish a PS service, as shown in Figure 291-3.

Figure 291-3 Iu message tracing

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

View the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_RESP message. If it contains the IE "ass-RAB-Parameters", rate negotiation at admission control takes effect, and the MaxBitrate is the data rate negotiated by the RNC, as shown in Figure 291-4.


968



Figure 291-4 RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_RESP message on the Iu interface

l

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivating QoS negotiation 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect DRA_DCCC_SWITCH from the Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch drop-down list box, and deselect PS_BE_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and PS_STREAM_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH from the PS rate negotiation switch drop-down list box.

– Deactivating RAB rate reduction 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect DRA_DCCC_SWITCH from the Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch drop-down list box, and deselect PS_RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH from the PS rate negotiation switch dropdown list box.

----End

Example //Activating Rate Negotiation at Admission Control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1, PsSwitch =PS_BE_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH-1&PS_STREAM_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH-1; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1, PsSwitch=PS_RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating Rate Negotiation at Admission Control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-0, PsSwitch =PS_BE_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH-0&PS_STREAM_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH-0; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-0, PsSwitch=PS_RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


969



292

Configuring Videophone Service Restriction

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020130 Videophone Service Restriction.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature disables the videophone (VP) function of a cell through cell-level configurations to meet telecom operators' requirements for information security in restricted areas.

Procedure l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the cell. In this step, set Cell ID to an appropriate value.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell VP Limit Indicator to TRUE.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

970



Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to activate the cell. In this step, set Cell ID to an appropriate value. 4.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) on another RNC that controls the neighboring cell. In this step, set Cell VP Limit Indicator to TRUE.


Use two VP-capable UEs to camp on the same cell, and then use one UE to initiate a VP to the other UE.

2.

Initiate Iu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. The BSC6900 sends an RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_RSP message to the CN.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the cell. In this step, set Cell ID to an appropriate value.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell VP Limit Indicator to FALSE.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to activate the cell. In this step, set Cell ID to an appropriate value.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) on another RNC that controls the neighboring cell. In this step, set Cell VP Limit Indicator to FALSE.

----End

Example //Activating Videophone Service Restriction DEA UCELL: CellId=1111; MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1111, VPLimitInd=TRUE; ACT UCELL: CellId=1111; MOD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=1, CellId=1111, VPLimitInd=TRUE; //Deactivating Videophone Service Restriction DEA MOD ACT MOD

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

UCELL: CellId=1111; UCELLSETUP: CellId=1111, VPLimitInd=FALSE; UCELL: CellId=1111; UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=1, CellId=1111, VPLimitInd=FALSE;


971



293

Configuring Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020135 Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature allows the RAN to intelligently distinguish between UEs and data cards in multicarrier scenarios and to separately set up services on different carriers.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure The following methods assume that cell F1 and cell F2 are used.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Device Type Steering DRD Switch to ON.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLLICENSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell License Resource/Function Item; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) twice to enable the layered terminal Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

972



management function for cell F1 and cell F2 respectively. In this step, set FuncSwitch1 to INTELLIGENT_INTERFREQ_UE_TYPE_STEERING. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Direct Retry Switch to DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UDEVICETYPEIMSI (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > IMSI segment; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set IMSI Segment Choice to MultiIMSI and specify the IMSI number range by setting IMSI Segment Start Value and IMSI Segment End Value. If the IMSI of a terminal falls into the IMSI number range, the terminal is regarded as a data card.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UDEVICETYPEPRIOGROUP (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > Device Type Steering Priority Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add terminal type priorities.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) twice to bind a terminal type priority to cell F1 and cell F2 respectively.

7.

Optional: Configure preferred camping. Cell F1 is a preferred camping frequency, and cell F2 is a services balancing frequency. NOTE

This feature does not depend on the camping policy setting of an existing network. When this feature is activated and cell F2 provides discontinuous coverage, you must configure interfrequency neighboring cells for cell F2 during network optimization so that this feature can be enabled.

– Method 1

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSELRESEL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Selection And Reselection; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to make it difficult for UEs in idle mode to trigger inter-frequency measurement. In this step, set Interfreq cell reselection threshold for idle mode of cell F1 to 0.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSELRESEL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Selection And Reselection; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to make UEs in idle mode keep triggering inter-frequency measurement. In this step, set Inter-freq cell reselection threshold for idle mode of cell F2 to 127.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Inter-frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set inter-frequency neighboring cell parameters (cell F1 to cell F2). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

973



– Set SIB11 Indicator to TRUE(Send). – Set IdleQoffset1sn and IdleQoffset2sn to 20. – Set SIB12 Indicator to FALSE(Do not send). d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Inter-frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set inter-frequency neighboring cell parameters (cell F2 to cell F1). – Set SIB11 Indicator to TRUE(Send). – Set IdleQoffset1sn and IdleQoffset2sn to -20. – Set SIB12 Indicator to FALSE(Do not send).

e.

Optional: For cell F2 that provides discontinuous coverage, it is recommended to Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSELRESEL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Selection And Reselection; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to prevent UEs in idle mode from camping on the edge of cell F2. In this step, set Min Quality Level to -10 and Min RX level to -48.

f.

Optional: When the UE state transition function is enabled, it is recommended to turn on the SIB4 message switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSIBSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell SIB Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to turn on the SIB4 message switch of cell F2. In this step, select the SIB4 check box under the parameter SIB Switch.

– Method 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLACCESSSTRICT (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Access Restriction Information; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to forbid UE access to cell F2. Set the parameters according to the network condition. l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

On the Trace tab page of the BSC6900 LMT, initiate Uu interface tracing, as shown in Figure 293-1.


974



Figure 293-1 Uu interface tracing task

2.


3.

Check that data card A is in idle mode and camps on cell F2. The priority of data cards in cell F1 (the cell ID is 11013) is higher than that of data cards in cell F2 (the cell ID is 11014).

4.

Use data card A to establish an R99 PS service, and check the messages traced on the Uu interface. The BSC6900 sends an RRC_RB_SETUP message to data card A in cell F2. Data card A responds to the BSC6900 with an RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP message in cell F1. The R99 PS service is established in cell F1, as shown in Figure 293-2.

Figure 293-2 Message tracing

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


975



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Device Type Steering DRD Switch to OFF.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELLLICENSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell License Resource/Function Item; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable the layered terminal management function for the cell.

----End

Example //Activating Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management //Turning on the layered terminal management switch SET UDRD: DPGDRDSwitch=ON; //Enabling the layered terminal management function for cell F1 and cell F2 ADD UCELLLICENSE: CellId=11013, INTELLIGENT_INTERFREQ_UE_TYPE_STEERING-1; ADD UCELLLICENSE: CellId=11014, INTELLIGENT_INTERFREQ_UE_TYPE_STEERING-1; //Turning on the single-service DRD switch SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1; //Configuring an IMSI number range ADD UDEVICETYPEIMSI: IMSISegIndex=1, IMSISegChoice=MultiIMSI, IMSIStart="502808888800070", IMSIEnd="502808888800080"; //Adding terminal type priorities ADD UDEVICETYPEPRIOGROUP: DPGId=1, UEDP=1, DataCardDP=1, ReservedDP=1; ADD UDEVICETYPEPRIOGROUP: DPGId=2, UEDP=2, DataCardDP=2, ReservedDP=1; //Binding terminal type priorities to cells MOD UCELL: CellId=11013, DPGId=1; MOD UCELL: CellId=11014, DPGId=2; //Configuring cell reselection for cell F1 MOD UCELLSELRESEL:CellId=11013, QualMeas=CPICH_ECNO, IdleSintersearch=0; //Configuring cell reselection for cell F2 MOD UCELLSELRESEL:CellId=11014, QualMeas=CPICH_ECNO, IdleSintersearch=127, ConnSintrasearch=5, ConnSintersearch=2, SsearchRat=2; //Configuring co-coverage inter-frequency neighboring cell parameters (cell F1 to cell F2) MOD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=3012, CellId=11013, NCellRncId=3012, NCellId=11014, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, IdleQoffset1sn=20, IdleQoffset2sn=20; //Configuring co-coverage inter-frequency neighboring cell parameters (cell F2 to cell F1) MOD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=3012, CellId=11014, NCellRncId=3012, NCellId=11013, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, IdleQoffset1sn=-20, IdleQoffset2sn=-20; //Turning on the SIB4 message switch for cell F2 MOD UCELLSIBSWITCH: CellId=11014, SibCfgBitMap=SIB4-1; MOD UCELLSELRESEL: CellId=11014, QualMeas=CPICH_ECNO, Qqualmin=-10, Qrxlevmin=-48; //Deactivating Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management //Turning off the layered terminal management switch SET UDRD: DPGDRDSwitch=OFF; //Disabling the layered terminal management function for a cell RMV UCELLLICENSE: CellId=11013; RMV UCELLLICENSE: CellId=11014;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


976



294

Configuring Micro NodeB SelfPlanning

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140219 Micro NodeB Self-Planning.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only the BTS3902E supports this feature. – The BTS3902E has been configured with the SON receiver (default configuration) and antenna. – If the BTS3902E uses an integrated antenna, the integrated antenna incorporates the function of the SON receiver antenna and therefore a SON receiver antenna does not need to be configured. – If the BTS3902E uses an external antenna, a SON receiver antenna needs to be configured. – The RNC version must be RAN13.0 or later, and the RNC data can be configured and modified on the M2000.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature WRFD-031101 NodeB Self-discovery Based on IP Mode and WRFD-031102 NodeB Remote Self-configuration must be configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Others – Data has been configured for micro NodeBs on the RNC side. The UARFCN, scrambling code, LAC, RAC, and SAC do not need to be planned, but they must have initial values in the data configuration file. The initial SAC value is configured in the core network.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


977



– OM channels have been established for micro NodeBs, and micro NodeBs have obtained their configuration files from the M2000. The UARFCN does not need to be planned, but it must have an initial value in the data configuration file. – Necessary information has been obtained for SON receiver parameter settings. – The NodeB auto deployment function is enabled on the M2000 side. – The M2000 must support BTS3902E WCDMA self-planning. – The RNC version must be RAN13.0 or later, and the RNC data can be configured and modified on the M2000. – The GBSC version must be GBSS 14.0 or later to support remote configuration by the M2000.

Context l

This feature automatically plans the following information for micro NodeBs: – Available UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Numbers (UARFCNs) – Scrambling codes – Intra-frequency neighboring cells – Inter-frequency neighboring cells – Inter-RAT neighboring cells between UMTS and GSM – LAC/SAC/RAC parameters, in which SAC self-planning results is cell ID.

l

Precautions – This feature interrupts micro NodeB services. – In micro NodeB self-planning, ensure that the logical cell on the RNC has been deactivated when preparing the RNC-side micro NodeB configuration file. The UARFCN, scrambling code, intra-frequency neighboring cell, inter-frequency neighboring cell, and neighboring GSM cell, LAC, RAC, and SAC in the logical micro NodeB configuration file on the RNC are initial values, not optimal values. They may cause interference to neighboring cells.

l

Data Preparation – Preparing Data for SON Receivers Before enabling this feature, SON receiver parameters must be preconfigured.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

SON Receiver Parameter

Description

Source

RNC Name

Name of the radio network controller in the WCDMA system.

Network plan

MCC

The mobile country code (MCC) consists of three digits and identifies a country to which a mobile subscriber belongs.

Network plan


978




Description

Source

MNC

The mobile network code (MNC) consists of two or three digits and identifies a PLMN to which a mobile subscriber belongs.

Network plan

Macro Frequency

Downlink UARFCNs available to the macro NodeB, which are listed on the UARFCN list of the macro NodeB. Value range: 0 to 16383

Network plan is not required. The range is provided by operators.

NOTE As specified in 3GPP TS 25.133, the UE in idle or connected mode can measure inter-frequency neighboring cells corresponding to only two inter-frequency UARFCNs. Therefore, the RNC instructs the UE to measure not greater than two UARFCNs of interfrequency neighboring cells delivered in the system broadcast message and measurement control. To ensure continuous mobility, UARFCNs for continuous coverage must be specified when macro downlink UARFCNs are configured, so that the micro NodeB can select the macro cells corresponding to the UARFCNs for continuous coverage as inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Micro Frequency

Downlink UARFCNs available to the micro NodeB, which are listed on the UARFCN list of the micro NodeB. Value range: 0 to 16383


NOTE If necessary, the operator can directly add a specific UARFCN to the UARFCN list of the micro NodeB.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


979




Description

Source

Micro Scrambling Code

Primary scrambling code available to the micro NodeB. Value range: 0 to 511


– Preparing Configuration Files During initial deployment, data configuration files need to be prepared on both the RNC and micro NodeBs. The usual method is to prepare configuration files based on the network plan. Since micro NodeB self-planning generates the settings of parameters such as the UARFCN, scrambling code, intra-frequency neighboring cell, interfrequency neighboring cell, and neighboring GSM cell, and LAC/RAC/SAC, these parameters do not need to be included in the network plan. However, these parameters are mandatory in configuration files. The following table describes how to configure them in default settings. For the other parameters such as transmission parameters, configure them using the usual method. Parameter Name

Setting Description

Source

UARFCN

Select the first downlink UARFCN in the range available to the SON receiver as the downlink UARFCN in the initial configuration file.

Operating parameter of the SON receiver

Calculate the uplink UARFCN based on the correlation between the uplink and downlink UARFCNs.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Scrambling Code

Select the first scrambling code in the range available to the SON receiver as the scrambling code in the initial configuration file.


Neighbor Relationship

It is null in the initial configuration file.


LAC/RAC

Select the LAC and RAC that have been configured on the RNC to which the micro NodeB belongs.


SAC

Equal to the cell ID of the micro NodeB.



980



Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Configuring SON Receiver Parameters on the M2000 After necessary data has been collected, perform the following steps on the M2000 to configure SON receiver parameters. 1.

Choose Configuration > UMTS Self-Planning.

2.

Click the Receiver Parameter Settings tab.

3.

Under the Parameters node, select the data type to be configured. and configure parameters in the added pre-configuration data. To – Click change the value of a parameter, double-click the parameter and enter the new value. – To delete a parameter value, click

.

4.

Click Save. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

5.

to manually synchronize the self-planning parameters configured by Click other clients on the M2000 for other self-planning regions.

– Enabling Self-Planning on the M2000 After configuring SON receiver parameters, perform the following steps to enable selfplanning on the M2000.

l

1.

On the M2000, choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment.

2.

On the Deployment List tab, right-click one or more commissioning tasks and choose Start from the shortcut menu. The Task Settings dialog box is displayed.

3.

Based on site conditions, select micro NodeB self-planning on the Select column. After NodeB auto deployment starts, it will automatically start self-planning upon the completion of self-discovery and self-configuration.

Verification Procedure Check the progress and result of self-planning. A report is also available. 1.

Choose Configuration > UMTS Self-Planning.

2.

Check the task progress. Click the Task Monitor tab to check ongoing and finished tasks. If required, click to synchronize the self-planning tasks on the M2000 server.

3.

View the task report. On the Task Monitor tab, right-click a finished task and choose View Report from the shortcut menu. A report will be displayed in a browser window. Save the report locally.

l

Deactivation Procedure On the M2000 side, you can suspend a NodeB auto deployment task before the system proceeds to the self-planning step. Once the self-planning step starts, it cannot be suspended.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


981



Once a micro NodeB receives a self-planning command, it starts procedures such as SON receiver scanning and scanning result reporting. You cannot suspend self-planning. ----End

Example None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


982



295

Configuring NodeB Integrated IPSec

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140209 NodeB Integrated IPSec.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only the 3900 series base stations equipped with the UMPT board support this feature on Ethernet ports.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature depends on the feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface. – When a digital certificate is used for authentication, this feature depends on the feature WRFD-140210 NodeB PKI Support. – This feature cannot be used with the Automatic Address Configuration Protocol (AACP) function in the feature WRFD-031101 NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Route.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – On a UMTS network, an SeGW must be deployed on the RNC side to support IP Security (IPSec).

Context l

IPSec policies include access control list (ACL) rules, IPSec protocols, and Internet Key Exchange (IKE). – An ACL consists of a series of ACL rules, which are used to specify the data streams to be protected. Only data streams that comply with ACL rules can enter an IPSec tunnel. – An IPSec protocol defines how to protect data streams and includes the protocol type, encapsulation mode, and encryption and verification algorithms.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


983



– IKE is used to authenticate IPSec peers, negotiate encryption algorithms, and generate session keys before an IPSec SA is established. IKE supports two methods for authenticating IPSec peers: pre-shared key (PSK) and digital certificate. l

During IPSec deployment, base station data can be encrypted in two modes: unified encryption and separate encryption. – In unified encryption mode, O&M data streams are protected by IPSec. Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption can be implemented before IPSec encryption. – In separate encryption mode, O&M data streams are protected by SSL, not by IPSec.

l

Accordingly, IPSec networking scenarios are classified into the following types: – PKI-based networking in unified encryption mode – PKI-based networking in separate encryption mode – PSK-based networking in unified encryption mode – PSK-based networking in separate encryption mode

l

Precautions – IPSec ensures transmission security by encapsulating and encrypting IP packets. This reduces the transmission efficiency of service packets on the bearer network.

l

Data Preparation – Prepare the data required for the IKE proposal (the IKEPROPOSAL MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Proposal ID

PROPID

-

User-defined

Encryption Algorithm

ENCALG

The parameter setting on the base station and SeGW sides must be the same.

Network plan

Authentication Algorithm

AUTHALG



984



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Authentication Method

AUTHMETH

If digital certificates are used for identity authentication, this parameter must be set to IKE_RSA_SIG (RSA Digital Certificate Signature).

Source

If a PSK is used for identity authentication, this parameter must be set to PRE_SHARED_ KEY(Pre-shared Key). Diffie-Hellman Group

DHGRP


PRF Algorith

PRFALG

This parameter must be specified when Version in the IKEPEER MO is set to IKE_V2 (IKE V2). The default value is recommended.

ISAKMP SA Duration(s)

DURATION


– Prepare the data required for the IKE peer (the IKEPEER MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

IKE Peer Name

PEERNAME

-

User-defined


985


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

IKE Proposal ID

PROPID

The value of this parameter must be the same as the value of Proposal ID in the IKEPROPOSAL MO.

Version

IKEVERSION


Network plan (negotiation with the IPSec peer)

Exchange Mode

EXCHMODE

This parameter must be specified when Version is set to IKE_V1 (IKE V1). The parameter setting on the base station and SeGW sides must be the same.


Local ID Type

IDTYPE




Source

986



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Remote IP Address

REMOTEIP

If ENCAPMODE in the IPSECPROPOS AL MO is set to TRANSPORT, the value of this parameter must be the same as that of DIP in the ACLRULE MO. Otherwise, encrypted packets cannot be decrypted.

Network plan

When Encapsulation Mode in the IPSECPROPOS AL MO is set to TUNNEL (Tunnel), the value of this parameter must be the same as the IP address of the peer security gateway and the subjectaltname field of the local certificate.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


987



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Remote Name

REMOTENAME

The value of this parameter must be the same as the IKE name configured at the IKE peer (for example, the SeGW).

Network plan

l If a PSK is used for authentication, the value of this parameter must be the same as that of Local NAME of the IKE peer. l If digital certificates are used for authentication, the subjectaltname fields in the certificates used by the local and peer ends must be set to the same value. Pre-shared Key

PKEY

If digital Network plan certificates are (negotiation with used for identity the IPSec peer) authentication, this parameter does not need to be configured. If a PSK is used for identity authentication, this parameter must be specified and the parameter value must be the same as that of the IKE peer.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


988



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

DPD Mode

DPD

Network plan

DPD Idle Time(s)

DPDIDLETIME

DPD Retransmission Interval(s)

DPDRETRI

DPD Retransmission Count

DPDRETRN

DPD is enabled by default. It is recommended that the values of DPDrelated parameters be the same at both IKE ends. If the values are different, the IKE SA end with a shorter timer length will detect that the peer is offline before the other IKE SA end does and an IKE re-negotiation will be triggered.

Local IP Address

LOCALIP

When Version is set to IKE_V1 (IKE V1) and Local ID Type is set to IP(IP Identify), the value of this parameter must be the same as the port ID bound to the IPSec.

Network plan

– Prepare the data required for the ACL rule (the ACL MO). One or multiple ACLs need to be configured based on the planned IPSec tunnels. In the IPSECPOLICY MO, an IPSec policy is bound to an ACL based on the ACLID setting. Only data streams that comply with ACL rules are processed according to the operations defined in the IPSec policy. Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

ACL ID

ACLID

An ACL must contain at least one ACL rule.

Network plan

If an ACL is bound to an IPSec policy, the value of this parameter ranges from 3000 to 3999.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


989



– Prepare the data required for the ACL rule (the ACLRULE MO). Depending on the network plan, an IPSec tunnel may require multiple ACL rules to protect different types of data streams.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

ACL ID

ACLID

The value of this parameter must be the same as that of ACL ID in the ACL MO.

Network plan

Rule ID

RULEID

Each ACL rule in an ACL must have a unique ID.

Protocol Type

PT

-

Source IP Address

SIP

If ENCAPMODE in the IPSECPROPOS AL MO is set to TRANSPORT, the value of this parameter must be an existing device IP address. Otherwise, encrypted packets cannot be decrypted.

Source Wildcard

SWC

-

Match Source Port

SMPT

This parameter and the Match Fragment Messageparamete r cannot be set to YES simultaneously.

Source Port Operate

SOP

-

Source Port 1

SPT1

-

Source Port 2

SPT2

-


990


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Destination IP Address

DIP

If ENCAPMODE in the IPSECPROPOS AL MO is set to TRANSPORT, the value of this parameter must be a host IP address. The value of this parameter must be the same as that of REMOTEIP in the IKEPEER MO. Otherwise, encrypted packets cannot be decrypted.

Destination Wildcard

DWC

-

Match Destination Port

DMPT


Destination Port Operate

DOP

-

Destination Port 1

DPT1

-

Destination Port 2

DPT2

-

Match DSCP

MDSCP

-

DSCP

DSCP

-

Match Fragment Message

MFRG

-

VLAN ID Operate

VLANIDOP

If an ACL is bound to an IPSec policy, this parameter does not need to be configured.


Source

991



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

VLAN ID 1

VLANID1


VLAN ID 2

VLANID2


Source

– Prepare the data required for the IPSec proposal (the IPSECPROPOSAL MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

IPSec Proposal Name

PROPNAME

-

User-defined

Encapsulation Mode

ENCAPMODE

The tunnel mode is recommended. The parameter setting on the base station and SeGW sides must be the same.


Transform

TRANMODE


AH Authentication Algorithm

AHAUTHALG


ESP Authentication Algorithm

ESPAUTHALG


ESP Encryption Algorithm

ESPENCALG



992



– Prepare the data required for the IPSec policy (the IPSECPOLICY MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Policy Group Name

SPGN

-

User-defined

IPSec Sequence No.

SPSN

-

User-defined

ACL ID

ACLID

An IPSec policy is bound to an ACL by using the ACL IDparameter. Only data streams that comply with the ACL are processed according to the operations defined in the IPSec policy.

User-defined

IPsec Proposal Name

PROPNAME

The value of this parameter must be the same as the value of IPSec Proposal Namein the IPSECPROPOS AL MO.

User-defined

IKE Peer Name

PEERNAME

The value of this parameter must be the same as the value of IKE Peer Name in the IKEPEER MO.

User-defined

Perfect Forward Secrecy

PFS




993



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Lefttime Config

LTCFG

If this parameter is set to GLOBAL, the IPSec SA lifetime is permanently set to 3600 seconds. If this parameter is set to LOCAL, the IPSec SA lifetime is specified by LTS and LTKB.

Network plan

Lifetime Based On Time(s)

LTS

This parameter needs to be specified when LTCFG is set to LOCAL.

Network plan

Lifetime Based On Traffic(KB)

LTKB


Network plan

Anti-Replay Windows

REPLAYWND

If this parameter is set to 0, the antireplay function does not take effect.

Network plan

– Prepare the data required for binding an IPSec policy group to a port (the IPSECBIND MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Cabinet No.

CN

-

Network plan

Subrack No.

SRN

-

Slot No.

SN

-

Subboard Type

SBT

-

Port Type

PT

Port No.

PN

If PT is set to ETH, the port specified by PN must not be a member of an Ethernet trunk.


994



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Policy Group Name

SPGN

The value of this parameter must be the same as the value of Policy Group Namein the IPSECPOLICY MO.

User-defined

– If a PSK is used for authentication, prepare the IKE configuration data (the IKECFG MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Local Name

IKELNM

This parameter must be specified when Local ID Typeis set to FQDN(Name Identify). The value of this parameter must be the same as the IKE peer name configured at the SeGW.

Network plan

Keepalive Interval

IKEKLI

Keepalive Timeout

IKEKLT

These two parameters need to be specified when the keepalive function is required by IKEv1 entities. If Keepalive Timeout or Keepalive Interval is set to 0, the keepalive function is disabled. The value of Keepalive Timeout must be greater than that of Keepalive Interval.


995



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

DSCP

DSCP

This parameter specifies the differentiated services code point (DSCP) for IKE negotiation packets. The recommended value of this parameter is 48.

Source

Procedure l

Activation Procedure Scenario 1: PKI-based Networking for a NodeB Using Unified Encryption Figure 295-1 Example of PKI-based networking for a NodeB using unified encryption

In this networking scenario: – The UMTS UMPT provides IPSec and PKI. – The UMTS UMPT provides IPSec for the following data streams: – Signaling, service, and O&M data streams on the NodeB – Certificate-management-related data streams between the NodeB and the CA server – Data streams generated when the NodeB obtains the CRL from the CRL server

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IKEPROPOSAL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IKE > IKE Proposal; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IKE proposal.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IKEPEER (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

996



Configuration > IPSecurity > IKE > IKE Peer; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IKE peer. 3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD ACL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > ACL > Access Control List; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an ACL.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD ACLRULE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > Ipsecurity > ACL > Access Control List Rule; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a rule to the ACL.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPSECPROPOSAL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IPSec > IPSec Proposal; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IPsec proposal.

6.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPSECPOLICY (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IPSec > IPSec Policy; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IPSec policy.

7.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPSECBIND (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IPSec > IPSec Policy Group Binding; CME batch modification center: not supported) to bind an IPSec policy to a port.

Scenario 2: PKI-based Networking for a NodeB Using Separate Encryption Figure 295-2 Example of PKI-based networking for a NodeB using separate encryption

In this networking scenario: – The UMTS UMPT provides IPSec and PKI. – The UMTS UMPT does not provide IPSec for O&M data streams on the NodeB. It provides IPSec for the following data streams: – Signaling and service data streams on the NodeB – Certificate-management-related data streams between the NodeB and the CA server – Data streams generated when the NodeB obtains the CRL from the CRL server 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IKEPROPOSAL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

997



Configuration > IPSecurity > IKE > IKE Proposal; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IKE proposal. 2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IKEPEER (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IKE > IKE Peer; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IKE peer.

3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


Scenario 3: PSK-based Networking for a NodeB Using Unified Encryption Figure 295-3 Example of PSK-based networking for a NodeB using unified encryption

In this networking scenario: – The UMTS UMPT provides IPSec and PSK. – The UMTS UMPT provides IPSec for signaling, service, and O&M data streams on the NodeB. 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command SET IKECFG (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

998



Configuration > IPSecurity > IKE > IKE Basic Configuration; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set local IKE configurations. 2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.


Scenario 4: PSK-based Networking for a NodeB Using Separate Encryption Figure 295-4 Example of PSK-based networking for a NodeB using separate encryption

In this networking scenario: – The UMTS UMPT provides IPSec and PSK.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


999



– The UMTS UMPT provides IPSec for signaling and service data streams on the NodeB, not for O&M data streams on the NodeB.

l

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the NodeB MML command SET IKECFG (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IKE > IKE Basic Configuration; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set local IKE configurations.

2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.



Run the NodeB MML command DSP IKESA. Check whether IKE SA data is displayed in the returned result. If IKE SA data is displayed, go to step 2. If IKE SA data is not displayed, IPSec fails to be activated.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP IPSECSA. Check whether IPSec SA data is displayed in the returned result. If IPSec SA data is displayed, this feature has been activated.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command LST ACLRULE to check the ACL rules and determine whether service data is protected by IPSec tunnels. Check whether the protected services are running normally. For example, if voice services are protected by IPSec tunnels, place a call to check whether voice services are still running normally; if management plane packets are protected by IPSec tunnels, check whether the corresponding NodeB is still online on the topology view of the M2000.


1000



1.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV IPSECBIND (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IPSec > IPSec Policy Group Binding; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the binding between an IPSec policy and a port.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV IPSECPOLICY (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IPSec > IPSec Policy; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an IPSec policy.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV IPSECPROPOSAL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IPSec > IPSec Proposal; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an IPSec proposal.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV ACLRULE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > Ipsecurity > ACL > Access Control List Rule; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a rule from an ACL.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV ACL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > ACL > Access Control List; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the ACL.

6.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV IKEPEER (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IKE > IKE Peer; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an IKE peer.

7.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV IKEPROPOSAL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IKE > IKE Proposal; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an IKE proposal.

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Scenario 1: PKI-based Networking for a NodeB Using Unified Encryption //Adding an IKE proposal ADD IKEPROPOSAL: PROPID=10, ENCALG=3DES, AUTHALG=MD5, AUTHMETH=IKE_RSA_SIG, DHGRP=DH_GROUP14, DURATION=86400; //Adding an IKE peer ADD IKEPEER: PEERNAME="ike", PROPID=10, IKEVERSION=IKE_V1, EXCHMODE=MAIN, IDTYPE=IP, REMOTEIP="90.90.90.90", REMOTENAME="secgw", DPD=PERIODIC, DPDIDLETIME=20, DPDRETRI=4, DPDRETRN=6, LOCALIP="20.20.20.188"; //Adding an ACL ADD ACL: ACLID=3000, ACLDESC="for IPsec"; //Adding a rule to the ACL ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1, PT=IP, SIP="32.32.32.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="15.15.15.15", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=2, PT=IP, SIP="30.30.30.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="60.60.60.60", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=3, PT=IP, SIP="30.30.30.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="88.88.88.88", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=4, PT=IP, SIP="30.30.30.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="86.86.86.86", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; //Adding an IPSec proposal

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1001



ADD IPSECPROPOSAL: PROPNAME="prop0", ENCAPMODE=TUNNEL, TRANMODE=ESP, ESPAUTHALG=MD5,ESPENCALG=DES; //Adding an IPSec policy ADD IPSECPOLICY: SPGN="Policy0", SPSN=1, ACLID=3000, PROPNAME="prop0", PEERNAME="ike", PFS= DISABLE, LTCFG=LOCAL, LTS=86400, REPLAYWND=WND_DISABLE; //Adding the binding between an IPSec policy and a port ADD IPSECBIND: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=1, SPGN="Policy0"; Scenario 2: PKI-based Networking for a NodeB Using Separate Encryption //Adding an IKE proposal ADD IKEPROPOSAL: PROPID=10, ENCALG=3DES, AUTHALG=MD5, AUTHMETH=IKE_RSA_SIG, DHGRP=DH_GROUP14, DURATION=86400; //Adding an IKE peer ADD IKEPEER: PEERNAME="ike", PROPID=10, IKEVERSION=IKE_V1, EXCHMODE=MAIN, IDTYPE=IP, REMOTEIP="90.90.90.90", REMOTENAME="secgw", DPD=PERIODIC, DPDIDLETIME=20, DPDRETRI=4, DPDRETRN=6, LOCALIP="20.20.20.188"; //Adding an ACL ADD ACL: ACLID=3000, ACLDESC="for IPsec"; //Adding a rule to the ACL ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1, PT=IP, SIP="32.32.32.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="15.15.15.15", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=3, PT=IP, SIP="30.30.30.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="88.88.88.88", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=3, PT=IP, SIP="30.30.30.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="86.86.86.86", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; //Adding an IPSec proposal ADD IPSECPROPOSAL: PROPNAME="prop0", ENCAPMODE=TUNNEL, TRANMODE=ESP, ESPAUTHALG=MD5,ESPENCALG=DES; //Adding an IPSec policy ADD IPSECPOLICY: SPGN="Policy0", SPSN=1, ACLID=3000, PROPNAME="prop0", PEERNAME="ike", PFS= DISABLE, LTCFG=LOCAL, LTS=86400, REPLAYWND=WND_DISABLE; //Adding the binding between an IPSec policy and a port ADD IPSECBIND: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=1, SPGN="Policy0"; Scenario 3: PSK-based Networking for a NodeB Using Unified Encryption //Set local IKE configurations SET IKECFG: IKELNM="IKECFG1", IKEKLI=20, IKEKLT=60, DSCP=48; //Adding an IKE proposal ADD IKEPROPOSAL: PROPID=10, ENCALG=3DES, AUTHALG=MD5, AUTHMETH=PRE-SHAREDKEY, DHGRP=DH_GROUP14, PRFALG=AES128_XCBC, DURATION=86400; //Adding an IKE peer ADD IKEPEER: PEERNAME="ike", PROPID=10, IKEVERSION=IKE_V1, EXCHMODE=MAIN, IDTYPE=IP, REMOTEIP="90.90.90.90", REMOTENAME="secgw", PKEY="ikekey", DPD=PERIODIC, DPDIDLETIME=20, DPDRETRI=4, DPDRETRN=6, LOCALIP="20.20.20.188"; //Adding an ACL ADD ACL: ACLID=3000, ACLDESC="for IPsec"; //Adding a rule to the ACL ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1, PT=IP, SIP="32.32.32.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="15.15.15.15", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=2, PT=IP, SIP="30.30.30.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="60.60.60.60", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; //Adding an IPSec proposal ADD IPSECPROPOSAL: PROPNAME="prop0", ENCAPMODE=TUNNEL, TRANMODE=ESP, ESPAUTHALG=MD5,ESPENCALG=DES; //Adding an IPSec policy ADD IPSECPOLICY: SPGN="Policy0", SPSN=1, ACLID=3000, PROPNAME="prop0", PEERNAME="ike", PFS= DISABLE, LTCFG=LOCAL, LTS=86400,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1002



REPLAYWND=WND_DISABLE; //Adding the binding between an IPSec policy and a port ADD IPSECBIND: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=1, SPGN="Policy0"; //Scenario 4: PSK-based Networking for a NodeB Using Separate Encryption //Set local IKE configurations SET IKECFG: IKELNM="IKECFG1", IKEKLI=20, IKEKLT=60, DSCP=48; //Adding an IKE proposal ADD IKEPROPOSAL: PROPID=10, ENCALG=3DES, AUTHALG=MD5, AUTHMETH=PRE-SHAREDKEY, DHGRP=DH_GROUP14, PRFALG=AES128_XCBC, DURATION=86400; //Adding an IKE peer ADD IKEPEER: PEERNAME="ike", PROPID=10, IKEVERSION=IKE_V1, EXCHMODE=MAIN, IDTYPE=IP, REMOTEIP="90.90.90.90", REMOTENAME="secgw", PKEY="ikekey", DPD=PERIODIC, DPDIDLETIME=20, DPDRETRI=4, DPDRETRN=6, LOCALIP="20.20.20.188"; //Adding an ACL ADD ACL: ACLID=3000, ACLDESC="for IPsec"; //Adding a rule to the ACL ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1, PT=IP, SIP="32.32.32.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="15.15.15.15", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; //Adding an IPSec proposal ADD IPSECPROPOSAL: PROPNAME="prop0", ENCAPMODE=TUNNEL, TRANMODE=ESP, ESPAUTHALG=MD5,ESPENCALG=DES; //Adding an IPSec policy ADD IPSECPOLICY: SPGN="Policy0", SPSN=1, ACLID=3000, PROPNAME="prop0", PEERNAME="ike", PFS= DISABLE, LTCFG=LOCAL, LTS=86400, REPLAYWND=WND_DISABLE; //Adding the binding between an IPSec policy and a port ADD IPSECBIND: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=1, SPGN="Policy0"; //Verification procedure DSP IKESA:; DSP IPSECSA: SN=7, SPGN="Policy0", SPSN=1; LST ACLRULE:; //Deactivation procedure RMV IPSECBIND: SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=1; RMV IPSECPOLICY: SPGN="Policy0, SPSN=1; RMV IPSECPROPOSAL: PROPNAME="prop0"; RMV ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1; (Optional)RMV ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=2; (Optional)RMV ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=3; (Optional)RMV ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=4; RMV ACL: ACLID=3000; RMV IKEPEER: PEERNAME="ike"; RMV IKEPROPOSAL: PROPID=10;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1003



296

Configuring NodeB PKI Support

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140210 NodeB PKI Support. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the UTRPc or UMPT board to support this feature.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – On a live network, the operator's Certificate Authority (CA) that supports Certificate Management Protocol version 2 (CMPv2) has been deployed. – An SeGW has been deployed to support IP Security (IPSec) on the RNC side. – The device certificate has been obtained. – Huawei device certificates have been configured for the NodeB.

Context l

Precautions – Public key infrastructure (PKI) is implemented on the M2000. Therefore, you must run MML commands on the M2000 to activate PKI.

l

Data Preparation – Prepare the data related to certificate deployment on the NodeB (the CERTDEPLOY MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1004



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Certification Deploy Position Type

DEPLOYTYPE

If a digital certificate is deployed on the main control board, this parameter must be set to DEFAULT (Default). If a digital certificate is deployed on another board in a specified slot, this parameter must be set to SPECIFIC (Specific). If no digital certificate is deployed on the NodeB, this parameter must be set to NULL (NULL).

Network plan

Cabinet No.

CN

-

Subrack No.

SRN

-

Slot No.

SN

-

– Prepare the data related to the CA server (the CA MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Certificate Authority Name

CANAME

This parameter is set based on the subject of the operator's CA. For example, the value of this parameter is as follows: C = cn, S = sh, CN = enbca.

Network plan


1005



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Certificate Authority URL

URL

Currently, NodeBs cannot translate domain names. Therefore, an IP address instead of a domain name is used in the uniform resource locator (URL). The default TCP port number is 80 for HTTP services and 443 for HTTPS services. For example, http:// 10.121.0.81:80/ pkix is an HTTP URL.

Signature Algorithm

SIGNALG

-

Source

– Prepare the data related to the certificate request template (the CERTREQ MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Common Name

COMMNAME

-

Network plan

Common Name Additional Info.

USERADDINFO

When automatic base station deployment is used, this parameter is set to .huawei.com by default.

Country

COUNTRY

-

Organization

ORG

-

Organizational Unit

ORGUNIT

-

State or Province

STATEPROVINC ENAME

-

Locality

LOCALITY

-

Key Usage

KEYUSAGE

-


1006



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Signature Algorithm

SIGNALG

The secure hash algorithm 1 (SHA1) is recommended for signing a certificate request file.

Key Size

KEYSIZE

-

Local Name

LOCALNAME

XXX.huawei.com

Source

Here, XXX indicates the ESN. Local IP

LOCALIP

The value of this parameter must be the same as the value of Local IP Address in the IKEPEER MO.

– Prepare the data related to the device certificate (the CERTMK MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1007



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Certificate File Name

APPCERT

l When automatic base station deployment is used, two CERTMK MOs must be configured to specify an operator-issued device certificate and a Huawei-issued device certificate. This parameter must be set to OPKIDevCert .cer for the operator-issued device certificate and appcert.pem for the Huaweiissued device certificate.

Network plan

l When base station deployment by a USB flash drive is used, only one CERTMK MO can be configured to specify a Huawei-issued device certificate. This parameter is set to appcert.pem accordingly. Users cannot modify or remove this MO. – Prepare the data related to the active certificate.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1008



The active certificate is the device certificate that is currently used by a NodeB (the APPCERT MO). Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Application Type

APPTYPE

This parameter must be set to IKE (IKE).

Network plan


APPCERT

l When automatic base station deployment is used, this parameter must be set to OPKIDevCert .cer. l When PKIbased base station deployment by a USB flash drive is used, this parameter must be set to appcert.pem.

– Prepare the data related to the trust certificate (the TRUSTCERT MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1009



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source


CERTNAME

The NodeB must be configured with an operator-issued trust certificate and a Huawei-issued trust certificate. This parameter is set to caroot.pem for the Huaweiissued trust certificate and is set to the name of the operator's root certificate for the operator-issued trust certificate. If the operator's CA has multiple layers, the NodeB must be configured with all trust certificates in the certificate chain.

Network plan

– Prepare the data related to the task of periodically checking certificate validity (the CERTCHKTSK MO). Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Certificate Validity Period Checking

ISENABLE

The recommended value of this parameter is ENABLE.

Network plan

Checking Period

PERIOD


Alarm Threshold

ALMRNG


Update Method

UPDATEMETHO D

This parameter must be set to CMP.

– (Optional) If the NodeB needs to obtain certificate revocation list (CRL) information from the CA, prepare the data related to the CRL (the CRL MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1010



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

CRL File Name

CERTNAME

-

Network plan

– Prepare the data related to the CRL application policy (the CRLPOLICY MO). Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

CRLPOLICY

CRLPOLICY

The recommended value of this parameter is NOVERIFY, indicating that the base station does not perform CRLbased certificate validity checks.

Network plan

– Prepare the data related to the task of periodically downloading the CRL (the CRLTSK MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

IP Address

IP

This parameter is set to the IP address of the CRL server.

Network plan

User Name

USR

-

Password

PWD

-

File Name

FILENAME

-

Using CRL's Next Update

ISCRLTIME

This parameter specifies whether to update the CRL at the next update time. If this parameter is set to ENABLE, the NodeB downloads the CRL when the next update time arrives.


1011



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

CRL Updating Period

PERIOD

This parameter must be specified when ISCRLTIME is set to DISABLE.

Access Method

CRLGETMETHO D

-

Distinguish Name

SEARCHDN

This parameter must be specified when CRLGETMETH OD is set to LDAP.

Task ID

TSKID

-

Source

Procedure l


Run the NodeB MML command SET CERTDEPLOY to set the board where a certificate is to be deployed on the NodeB.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD CA to add the operator's CA server.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command DLD CERTFILE to download an operator's trust root certificate.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD TRUSTCERT to add an operator's trust certificate.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD CERTREQ to modify configurations of a certificate request template.

6.

Run the NodeB MML command REQ DEVCERT to apply for a device certificate through a CMP session.

7.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD APPCERT to modify configurations of an active certificate. In this step, set Application Type to IKE(IKE).

8.

Run the NodeB MML command SET CERTCHKTSK to set a task of periodically checking certificate validity.

9.

Optional: Run the NodeB MML command DLD CERTFILE to download the CRL file.

10. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command ADD CRL to add a CRL. 11. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command ADD CRLTSK to add a task of periodically downloading the CRL. l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command DSP APPCERT. Check the value of Status in the returned result. If NORMALLY is displayed, the device certificate has been loaded to the NodeB. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1012


l


2.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP TRUSTCERT. Check the value of Status in the returned result. If NORMALLY is displayed, the trust certificate has been loaded to the NodeB.

3.

Optional: Run the NodeB MML commandDSP CRL. Check the value of Status in the returned result. If NORMALLY is displayed, the CRL has been loaded to the NodeB.

4.

After IPSec policies authenticated by the digital certificate take effect, Run the NodeB MML commandDSP IKESA. Check the value of SA Flag in the returned result. If READY is displayed, an IKE SA has been established.


Run the NodeB MML command SET CERTDEPLOY. In this step, set Certification Deploy Position Type to NULL(NULL).

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Setting the board where a certificate is to be deployed on the NodeB SET CERTDEPLOY: DEPLOYTYPE=SPECIFIC, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7; //Adding the operator's CA server ADD CA: CANAME="C=AU, S=Some-State, O=Internet Widgits Pty Ltd, CN=eca1", URL="http://88.88.88.88:80/pkix/"; //Downloading the operator's trust root certificate DLD CERTFILE: IP="60.60.60.60",USR="admin",PWD="*****",SRCF="OperationCA.cer",DSTF="Ope rationCA.cer"; //Adding an operator's trust certificate ADD TRUSTCERT: CERTNAME="OperationCA.cer"; //Modifying configurations of a certificate request template MOD CERTREQ: COMMNAME=ESN, USERADDINFO=".huawei.com", COUNTRY="CN", ORG="ITEF", ORGUNIT="Hw", STATEPROVINCENAME="sc", LOCALITY="cd", KEYUSAGE=DATA_ENCIPHERMENT-1&DIGITAL_SIGNATURE-1&KEY_AGREEMENT-1&KEY_ENCI PHERMENT_1, SIGNALG=SHA1, KEYSIZE=KEYSIZE1024, LOCALNAME="abcdefghijklmn.huawei.com", LOCALIP="20.20.20.188"; //Starting the CMP session to apply for a device certificate REQ DEVCERT: CANAME="C=AU, S=Some-State, O=Internet Widgits Pty Ltd, CN=eca1", APPCERT="OPKIDevCert.cer"; //Adding the active certificate MOD APPCERT: APPTYPE=IKE, APPCERT="OPKIDevCert.cer"; //Setting a task of periodically checking certificate validity SET CERTCHKTSK: ISENABLE=ENABLE, PERIOD=7, ALMRNG=30, UPDATEMETHOD=CMP; //(Optional)Downloading a CRL file to a base station DLD CERTFILE: IP="60.60.60.60",USR="admin",PWD="*****",SRCF="NodeB.crl",DSTF="NodeB.crl "; //(Optional)Adding a CRL ADD CRL: CERTNAME="NodeB.crl";

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1013



//(Optional) Adding a task of periodically downloading the CRL ADD CRLTSK: IP="86.86.86.86", USR="admin", PWD="*****", FILENAME="NodeB.crl", ISCRLTIME=DISABLE, TSKID=0, CRLGETMETHOD=FTP; //Verification procedure DSP APPCERT: APPTYPE=IKE; DSP TRUSTCERT: CERTNAME="OperationCA.cer"; DSP CRL: CERTNAME="NodeB.crl"; DSP IKESA: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, IKEVSN=IKE_V1; //Deactivation procedure SET CERTDEPLOY: DEPLOYTYPE=null;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1014



297

Configuring Intelligent Battery Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140220 Intelligent Battery Management. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The APM30H (Ver. C), BTS3900AL, TP48600A, and batteries must be configured.

l


l


l

Others – In a base station newly updated to RAN14.0 or later, update the PMU software version to version corresponding to R14.0 or later and then activate the PMU software. In addition, ensure that the PMU software version can work with the software version of the base station. – In a new base station, activating the PMU software is not required because the PMU software version delivered with the software version of the base station has been up to date.

Context The intelligent power management feature has the following functions: automatic switch between the charge and discharge modes, self-protection under high temperature, and battery runtime display. This feature enables the base station to prolong the battery lifespan by battery self-protection, and therefore increase profits of operators by reducing operating expenses. l

Precautions – Check the local grip type. If the grid type is 1 or 2, it is recommended that the function of automatic switch between the charge and discharge modes be enabled.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1015



– Check the ambient temperature of the base stations and determine the policies and parameters for battery self-protection under high temperature. l


Parame ter ID

Description

Data Source

Battery Intelligen t Manage ment Swtich

BATIM S

Whether to activate Intelligent Battery Management. This switch takes effect only when the license controlling this feature has been obtained.

Data plan

High Temperat ure Shutdow n Flag

HTSDF

Whether to power off batteries under high temperature. When this parameter is set to ENABLE, batteries are powered off. When this parameter is set to DISABLE, the base station lowers the battery charging voltage. It is recommended that this parameter be set to ENABLE under high temperature.

Data plan

Shutdow n Temperat ure

SDT

Temperature threshold for powering off batteries or decreasing the battery charging voltage. The default value 53ºC is recommended for this parameter.

Data plan

If the battery temperature exceeds this threshold for 5 minutes, the power monitoring unit (PMU) performs either of the following operations to prolong the battery lifespan: powering off batteries when HTSDF is set to ENABLE, or decreasing the battery charging voltage to 50.5 V when HTSDF is set to DISABLE. Temperat ure Alarm Upper Threshol d

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

TUTHD

Threshold for reporting the ALM-25654 Battery Temperature Unacceptable. If the battery temperature exceeds this threshold for 5 minutes, the ALM-25654 Battery Temperature Unacceptable is generated. If the battery temperature decreases to a temperature 5 degree lower than this threshold for 5 minutes, batteries enter the floating charge state and no alarms are generated. The default value 50ºC is recommended for this parameter.


Data plan

1016



Procedure l

l


(Optional) Activate the PMU software: Run the NodeB MML command ACT SOFTWARE to activate the PMU software. Run the NodeB MML command DSP BRDVER to query the PMU software version and ensure the version has been upgraded to version corresponding to R14.0 or later.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command SET EQUIPMENT. In this step, set Battery Intelligent Management Swtich to ON.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD BATTERY or MOD BATTERY. In this step, set High Temperature Shutdown Flag to ENABLE, Shutdown Temperature to 53, and Temperature Alarm Upper Threshold to 50.


Intelligent Battery Management: Run the NodeB MML command DSP PMU to check the values of Battery Intelligent Management Capability and Battery Intelligent Management Mode. Expected result: The value of Battery Intelligent Management Capability is Support, and the value of Battery Intelligent Management Mode is ENABLE.

2.

Self-Protection Under High Temperature: Run the NodeB MML command LST BATTERY to check the values High Temperature Shutdown Flag, Shutdown Temperature, and Temperature Alarm Upper Threshold. Expected result: The value of High Temperature Shutdown Flag is ENABLE. The value of Shutdown Temperature is 53. The value of Temperature Alarm Upper Threshold is 50.

3. l

Battery Runtime Display: Run the NodeB MML command DSP BATTERY to check the value of Remaining Time to get the battery leftover capacity.


Run the NodeB MML command SET EQUIPMENT. In this step, set Battery Intelligent Management Swtich to OFF.

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Activating BIMS SET EQUIPMENT: BATIMS=ON; //Setting HTSDF, SDT, and TUTHD ADD BATTERY: HTSDF=ENABLE, SDT=53, TUTHD=50; /*Deactivation procedure*/ //Deactivating BATIMS SET EQUIPMENT: BATIMS=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1017



298

Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only the MRFU and the MRRU supports GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing at present.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature can't be activated with WRFD-010684 2×2 MIMO or WRFD-010693 DL 64QAM+MIMO simultaneously. – This feature has to be activated with MRFD-211801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM) simultaneously.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UMTS cell must exist HSDPA Carry.

Context In the case of a 3900 series multi-mode base station, the GSM and UMTS TRXs can share one power amplifier. When there is unbalanced traffic in the GSM and the UMTS, the power can be used more efficiently in an effective way, namely, sharing the power amplifier. The overall network quality of the GSM and the UMTS is therefore improved.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1018



NOTE

l The feature may fail to recall the shared power in one second when the GSM services increase suddenly. As a result, internal GSM peak clipping occurs, which affects service quality. l Enabling the feature may cause the UMTS coverage to shrink and therefore increase the drop rate. The problem can be addressed by handing over services in marginal coverage to a GSM/UMTS cell under the same coverage as the original UMTS. l The switch and other parameter configurations are performed only on the GSM side. The UMTS side requires no configuration.

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Power > BTS GU Dynamic Power Sharing Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES) and set the period for enabling GU power sharing.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > RXU Topology > Right click RXU Board > RXU Board Porperties > RUX board Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, setRXU Board Type to MRRU(MRRU) or MRFU (MRFU), set GU Dynamic Power Sharing Switchto YES(YES), and set parameters Minimum Number of Non-BCCH TRXs in GSM for GU Power Sharing, GSM Power Load Threshold for GU Power Sharing, Number of Checked Timeslots for Retrieving Shared Power, Num of Timeslots Meet Requirements for Retrieving Shared Pwr, GSM Power Reserve Coefficient for Retrieving Shared Power, GSM Idle Channel Threshold for GU Power Sharing, GSM Idle Channel Hysteresis for GU Power Sharing, GSM Power Reserve in Low Load for GU Power Sharing, GSM Power Reserve in High Load for GU Power Sharing, Maximum Accumulated Shared Power That UMTS Can Accept, Maximum Shared Power That UMTS Can Accept In Each Period to actual conditions.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches), set GU Power Share Flag to TRUE(TRUE).


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSGUPWRSHRFP and LST BTSRXUBP and check the returned message. Exception result: Board Parameter Configuration Enabled and GU Dynamic Power Sharing Switch are YES.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL, and check the returned message. Exception result: GU Power Share Flag is YES.

l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches), set GU Power Share Flag to FALSE(FALSE).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Power > BTS GU Dynamic Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1019



Power Sharing Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO). 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > RXU Topology > Right click RXU Board > RXU Board Porperties > RUX board Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set GU Dynamic Power Sharing Switch to NO(NO). NOTE

GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing can be deactivated by performing either of the two steps discussed above.

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CFGFLAG=YES, GUPWRSHARESTM1=07&00, GUPWRSHAREETM1=09&00, GUPWRSHARESTM2=10&00, GUPWRSHAREETM2=12&00, GUPWRSHARESTM3=14&00, GUPWRSHAREETM3=16&00, GUPWRSHARESTM4=20&00, GUPWRSHAREETM4=22&00; SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=MRFU, GUPWRSHARESWITCH=YES, GUPWRSHARETRXNUM=1, GUPWRSHAREPWRLOAD=80, GUPWRSHAREN=8, GUPWRSHAREP=6, GUPWRSHARERSVFACTOR=50, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLETH=12, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLEHS=2, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLERSVPWR=5, GUPWRSHAREGSMBUSYRSVPWR=10, GUPWRSHAREURCVPWR=15, GUPWRSHAREURCVPWRPD=5; MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=0, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, GUPOWERSHARE=TRUE; //Verification procedure LST BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; LST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=0; //Deactivation procedure SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CFGFLAG=NO; SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=MRFU, GUPWRSHARESWITCH=NO; MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=0, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, GUPOWERSHARE=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1020



299

Configuring GSM and UMTS

Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS). This feature enables the spectrum resources to be dynamically shared between the GSM and UMTS networks based on their traffic load, improving frequency utilization.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The 900 MHz MRFU and MRRU must support this feature. – GSM and UMTS sharing the same MRFU/MRRU.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – On the dynamic spectrum shared carrier, this feature can not be activated with MRFD-211703 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(GSM), MRFD-221703 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS) simultaneously – This feature can not be activated with GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO simultaneously. – This feature has to be activated with MRFD-211802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (GSM) simultaneously.

l


l

Start Dynamic Spectrum Sharing on the M2000 by referring to the M2000 Online Help.

l

Other Prerequisites – A specific M2000 V200R011 version that matches SRAN6.0 is required to support this feature. – GSM and UMTS sharing the same MRFU/MRRU.

Context The dynamic spectrum sharing (DSS) between GSM and UMTS increases network throughput and reduces the total cost of data services because UMTS has higher spectral efficiency than Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1021



GSM. In theory, the maximum throughput gain is about 50%. After this feature is used, the total cost of ownership (TCO) of mobile broadband (MBB) can be reduced, and dynamic GSM/ UMTS refarming can be implemented. Thus, the maintenance cost of manual refarming is reduced.

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB; CME batch modification center: not supported) with DSS NodeB Flag set to TRUE.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click NodeB > Add UMTS Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set up a DSS cell, set DSS Cell Flag to TRUE, and set Maximum TX Power in Small DSS Coverage and PCPICH TX Power in Small DSS Coverage based on network conditions.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLACCESSSTRICT (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Access Restriction Information; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) with both Cell barred indicator for SIB3 and Cell barred indicator for SIB4 of DSS cells set to BARRED.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Inter-frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the neighbor 3G cells of DSS cells as inter-frequency neighboring cells, and set Blind Handover Flag to TRUE and DrdOrLdrFlag to TRUE.

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > GSM Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the neighboring GSM cells for DSS cells, and set Blind Handover Flag to TRUE.

f.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > GSM Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the neighboring DSS cells as intra-frequency neighboring cells.

g.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with both DRD switch for single RAB and HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH set to ON.

h.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with Load balance DRD switch for HSDPA set to ON and Load Balancing DRD Choice set to UserNumber. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1022



2.

i.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) with Load balance DRD switch for HSDPA set to ON and Load Balancing DRD Choice set to UserNumber.

j.


Configuration on the NodeB side – Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add local DSS cells, and set GU Power Share Flag to FALSE.

3.


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add 3G external cells.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 3G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add 3G neighboring cells.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GDSSPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS Spectrum Sharing Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) with Spectrum Sharing Allowed set to YES(Yes).

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches) with Spectrum Sharing Shutdown Allowed set to YES (Yes).

CAUTION The parameter Spectrum Sharing Shutdown Allowed for all TRXs to be shared under a base station should be set to YES(Yes) except for the BCCH TRX. l


Start spectrum sharing on the M2000 manually.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UNODEB to query the DSS status of a NodeB. Expected result: The value of NodeB DSS state is Actived in Normal DSS coverage.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1023



3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to query the DSS status of a cell. Expected result: The value of DSS state is Actived in Normal DSS coverage.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to check the value of GU Power Share Flag. Expected result: The value of GU Power Share Flag is TRUE.

5.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT to query the value of Dynamic Spectrum Sharing. Expected result: The value of Dynamic Spectrum Sharing is Yes.


Stop Dynamic Spectrum Sharing on the M2000 by referring to the M2000 Online Help.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB; CME batch modification center: not supported) with DSS NodeB Flag set to FALSE.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GDSSPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS Spectrum Sharing Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) with Spectrum Sharing Allowed set to NO(No).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches) with Spectrum Sharing Shutdown Allowed set to NO(No).

5.

Remove the neighboring cell by referring to Reconfiguration Guide.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate a cell.

----End

Example //Activation procedure MOD UNODEB: NodeBId=1, DSSFlag=TRUE; ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=102, CellName="dss102", PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=0, BandInd=Band2, UARFCNDownlink=412, PScrambCode=0, TCell=CHIP256, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, SpgId=1, URANUM=D1, URA1=0, NodeBName="102", LoCell=102, SupBmc=FALSE, DSSFlag=TRUE, DSSSmallCovMaxTxPower=431, DSSSmallCovPCPICHPower=331; MOD UCELLACCESSSTRICT: CellId=102, IdleCellBarred=BARRED, IdleIntraFreqReselection=ALLOWED, IdleTbarred=D320, ConnCellBarred=BARRED, ConnIntraFreqReselection=ALLOWED, ConnTbarred=D320; ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=0, CellId=102, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=105, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, NPrioFlag=FALSE, DrdOrLdrFlag=TRUE, InterNCellQualReqFlag=FALSE; ADD U2GNCELL: RNCId=2, CellId=102, GSMCellIndex=120, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, NPrioFlag=FALSE; ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=0, CellId=102, NCellRncId=3, NCellId=121, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1, HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1024



SET UDRD: LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, LdbDRDchoice=UserNumber; ADD UCELLDRD: CellId=120, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, ReDirBandInd=DependOnNCell; ACT UCELL: CellId=102; ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=102, STN=1, SECN=0, GUPOWERSHARE=FALSE; ADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=120, EXT3GCELLNAME="120", MCC="460", MNC="10", LAC=10, CI=60, RNCID=0, DF=412, SCRAMBLE=0, DIVERSITY=NO, UTRANCELLTYPE=TDD, SYNCCASE=SyncCase1; ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=102, NBR3GNCELLID=120; SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=102, DSSENABLE=YES; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1002, DSSTRXOFFLINE=YES; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1003, DSSTRXOFFLINE=YES; //Deactivation procedure MOD UNODEB: NodeBId=1, DSSFlag=FALSE; SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=102, DSSENABLE=NO; SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1002, DSSENABLE=NO; SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1003, DSSENABLE=NO; HO UCELL: CellId=102, CellChoice=ALLCELL; DEA UCELL: CellId=102; RMV UNRELATION: RNCId=0, CellId=102, NCellType=IntraFreqNCell&InterFreqNCell&InterRatNCell;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1025


300

300 Configuring IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission on Base Station Side (NodeB)

Configuring IP-Based Multi-Mode

Co-Transmission on Base Station Side (NodeB) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221501 IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission on Base Station Side. For details about data configurations, see section Configuration Reference > MBTS Configuration Reference (V100R007C00) > Common Transmission in the 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide, or see section Common Transmission in the WCDMA RAN Feature Documentation. The latest 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide can be obtained from the following path: HUAWEI Technical Support (support.huawei.com), Support > Documentation > SingleRAN > MBTS > SingleRAN7.0.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1026


301 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB)

301

Configuring TDM-Based Multi-

mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221504 TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – A GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station supports this feature. – When the TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission feature is supported by a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station, a UTRP should be configured for the BTS. The UTRP type must be UTRP3, UTRP4, or UTRPb4.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-050302 Fractional ATM Function on Iub Interface – WRFD-050411 Fractional IP Function on Iub Interface

l


Context This feature enables the BTS and NodeB to share E1/T1 transmission resources through a backplane clock channel with the effective TDM timeslot cross connection function. Backplane-based co-transmission is classified into the following scenarios: l

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

In the scenario of GTMU-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission, E1/T1 timeslots on the UMTS side are transmitted to the GTMU through the backplane TOP channel on the WMPT. E1/T1 ports on the GTMU are connected to the transmission network. The TDM timeslot cross connection function enables GSM data and UMTS data to be multiplexed on the transmission network. Therefore, E1/T1 transmission resources are shared by the GSM and UMTS modes by timeslot, as shown in Figure 301-1.


1027



Figure 301-1 GTMU-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission

l

In the scenario of GSM-UTRP-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission, a UTRP is configured on the GSM side. Therefore, extra E1/T1 resources can be shared by the UMTS mode through the backplane TOP channel to extend E1/T1 transmission resources for the UMTS mode, as shown in Figure 301-2. NOTE

l The number of E1/T1 on the BTS backplane is within the range of 16 through 19. E1/T1 numbers 16 through 19 on the BTS backplane correspond to E1/T1 numbers 0 through 3 on the NodeB backplane. Cross connection is not supported. For example, E1/T1 No. 16 on the BTS backplane only corresponds to E1/T1 No. 0 on the NodeB backplane. l E1 timeslot numbers configured on the BTS side must be consistent with those configured on the NodeB side.

Figure 301-2 GSM-UTRP-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission

Procedure l

Activating the BTS data (GTMU-based) 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection between a GTMU port and the NodeB. Set Dest Node Type (select Connect to BSC on the CME) to OTHER. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1028



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTOPCONFIG to configure the TOP switching parameters. – Set Port Subrack No. and Port Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot where the BTS port connected to the NodeB interface board is located. Set TOP Board Subrack No. and TOP Board Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot where the NodeB interface board is located. – Set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT. – Set TS Mask to the timeslot of the NodeB backplane. NOTE

When E1 transmission resources on the BTS side are shared by the NodeB, set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT.

l

Activating the NodeB data (GTMU-based) 1.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD BACKE1T1 to add a backplane E1/T1 link. – Set Subrack No. and Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot that house the Iub interface board. – Set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD. – Set Destination Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the GTMU. NOTE

Similar to a common E1, the backplane E1 can be configured with the upper-layer bearer. It, however, does not support the configuration of the operating work mode and loopback mode, and online and offline tests. The upper-layer link bearer of the backplane E1 can be UNILNK/IMALNK/ FRAATMLNK/PPLNK/MPLNK. You need to configure the link bearer according to actual networking mode.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMAGRP to add an IMA group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMALNK to add an IMA link and then add it to the MP group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD or BASE_BOARD.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD SAALLNK to add an SAAL link. – Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD. – Set Rate Unit to KBPS or CELL/S. Only one rate unit can be used. Therefore, rate units in other configuration must be consistent.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2NODE to add an AAL2 node. – Set Node Type to LOCAL(LOCAL). – Set ATM Address to a valid ATM address. The recommended value is H'3900000000000000000000000000000000000000.

6.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an AAL2 path. – Set Node Type to LOCAL(End Node). – Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD. – Set Rate Unit to KBPS or CELL/S. Only one rate unit can be used. Therefore, rate units in other configuration must be consistent.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

7.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, set NCP/CCP Port Type to NCP(NCP Port).

8.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, set NCP/CCP Port Type to CCP(CCP Port). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1029


301 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB) NOTE

Before a CCP link is added, the number of the CCP port must be the same as that of the CCP port on the BSC6900 side. To query information about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side, run the BSC6900 MML command LST UIUBCP.

l

Activating the BTS data (GSM-UTRP-based) 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection between a UTRP port and the NodeB. Set Dest Node Type (select Connect to BSC on the CME) to OTHER.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTOPCONFIG to configure the TOP switching parameters. – Set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT. – Set TS Mask to the timeslot of the NodeB backplane. NOTE

When E1 transmission resources on the BTS side are shared by the NodeB, set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT.

l

Activating the NodeB data (GSM-UTRP-based) 1.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD BACKE1T1 to add a backplane E1/T1 link. – Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the numbers of the cabinet, subrack, and slot that house the Iub interface board. – Set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD. – Set Destination Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the UTRP. NOTE

Similar to a common E1, the backplane E1 can be configured with the upper-layer bearer. It, however, does not support the configuration of the operating work mode and loopback mode, and online and offline tests. The upper-layer link bearer of the backplane E1 can be UNILNK/IMALNK/ FRAATMLNK/PPLNK/MPLNK. You need to configure the link bearer according to actual networking mode.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMAGRP to add an IMA group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMALNK to add an IMA link and then add it to the MP group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD or BASE_BOARD.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD SAALLNK to add an SAAL link. – Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD. – Set Rate Unit to KBPS or CELL/S. Only one rate unit can be used. Therefore, rate units in other configuration must be consistent.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2NODE to add an AAL2 node. – Set Node Type to LOCAL(LOCAL). – Set ATM Address to a valid ATM address. The recommended value is H'3900000000000000000000000000000000000000.

6.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an AAL2 path. – Set Node Type to LOCAL(End Node). – Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD. – Set Rate Unit to KBPS or CELL/S. Only one rate unit can be used. Therefore, rate units in other configuration must be consistent.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1030



7.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, set NCP/CCP Port Type to NCP.

8.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, set NCP/CCP Port Type to CCP. NOTE

Before a CCP link is added, the number of the CCP port must be the same as that of the CCP port on the BSC6900 side. To query information about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side, run the BSC6900 MML command LST UIUBCP.

----End

Example //Activating the BTS data (GTMU-based) //Configuring a connection between a GTMU port and the NodeB ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=OTHER; //Configuring the TOP switching relation between the GTMU and the WMPT: E1 port 16 on the backplane corresponds to port 0 on the WMPT, the GTMU provides the WMPT with a transmission path, the port type is TOPEXTINPO, and the output port is E1 port 1 on the GTMU ADD BTSTOPCONFIG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, E1T1PORTNO=16, TOPBOARDCN=0, TOPBOARDSRN=0, TOPBOARDSLOTNO=7, PORTTYPE=TOPEXTOUTPORT, ORIPORT=1, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS111&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&T S22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1; //Activating the NodeB data (GTMU-based) //Adding a backplane E1/T1 link ADD BACKE1T1: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, DSTSN=6; //Adding an IMA group ADD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD; //Adding an IMA link ADD IMALNK: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, IMAGRPSBT=BASE_BOARD; //Adding three SAAL links ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=4, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=0, VCI=32, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=1024; ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=5, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=1, VCI=33, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256; ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=6, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=2, VCI=34, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256; //Adding an AAL2 node ADD AAL2NODE: NT=LOCAL, LN=4, ADDR="H'3900000000000000000000000000000000001980"; //Adding an AAL2 path ADD AAL2PATH: NT=LOCAL, PATHID=23, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=4, VCI=36, RU=KBPS, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1024, SCR=512, RCR=512; //Adding an NCP or CCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=5; ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=6; //Activating the BTS data (GSM-UTRP-based) //Configuring a connection between a UTRP port and the NodeB ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=0, DESTNODE=OTHER; //Configuring the TOP switching relation between the UTRP and the WMPT: E1 port 16 on the backplane corresponds to port 0 on the WMPT, the UTRP provides the WMPT with a transmission path, the port type is TOPEXTINPO, and the output port is E1 port 1 on the UTRP

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1031



ADD BTSTOPCONFIG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, E1T1PORTNO=16, TOPBOARDCN=0, TOPBOARDSRN=0, TOPBOARDSLOTNO=7, PORTTYPE=TOPEXTOUTPORT, ORIPORT=1, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS111&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&T S22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1; Activating the NodeB data (GSM-UTRP-based) //Adding a backplane E1/T1 link ADD BACKE1T1: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, DSTSN=0; //Adding an IMA group ADD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD; //Adding an IMA link ADD IMALNK: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, IMAGRPSBT=BASE_BOARD; //Adding three SAAL links ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=4, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=0, VCI=32, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=1024; ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=5, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=1, VCI=33, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256; ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=6, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=2, VCI=34, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256; //Adding an AAL2 node ADD AAL2NODE: NT=LOCAL, LN=4, ADDR="H'3900000000000000000000000000000000001980"; //Adding an AAL2 path ADD AAL2PATH: NT=LOCAL, PATHID=23, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=4, VCI=36, RU=KBPS, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1024, SCR=512, RCR=512; //Adding an NCP or CCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=5; ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=6;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1032


302 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB)

302

Configuring Multi-Mode BS

Common Reference Clock (NodeB)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221601 Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB). For details about data configurations, see section Configuration Reference > MBTS Configuration Reference (V100R007C00) > Common Clock in the 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide, or see section Common Clock in the WCDMA RAN Feature Documentation. The latest 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide can be obtained from the following path: HUAWEI Technical Support (support.huawei.com), Support > Documentation > SingleRAN > MBTS > SingleRAN7.0.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1033



303

Multi-mode BS Common IPSec (UMTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature MRFD-221602 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(UMTS).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – UMPT or UTRPc

l

Dependencies on other features – MRFD-221501 IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (NodeB). – One mode of multi-mode shall support IPSec feature (GBFD-113524 BTS Integrated IPsec, WRFD-140209 NodeB Integrated IPSec, LOFD-003009 IPsec). – This feature must be used together with one of features MRFD-211602 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec (GSM) and MRFD-231602 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec (LTE), or both.

l


Context IPSec Networking of an MBTS l

IPSec networking for a GU, GL, and UL dual-mode base station: IPSec-related data on the UTRPc board is configured by the mode with the highest priority. During secure base station deployment, all security-related configuration data is configured by the mode with a higher priority. The mode with a lower priority does not participate in secure base station deployment.

l

IPSec networking for a GUL triple-mode base station: – GU+L (BBU interconnection): IPSec is implemented on the LMPT board, and the UTRPc board forwards the LTE service data and processes UMTS and GSM IPSec data. IPSec-related data on the UTRPc board is configured by the mode with a higher

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1034



priority. If digital certificates are used for identity authentication, the LMPT and UTRPc boards use their respective digital certificates to authenticate with the SeGW. – GU+L (BBU interconnection): IPSec is implemented on the UMPT board, and the UTRPc board forwards the UMTS service data and processes LTE and GSM IPSec data. IPSec-related data on the UTRPc board is configured by the mode with a higher priority. If digital certificates are used for identity authentication, the UMPT and UTRPc boards use their respective digital certificates to authenticate with the SeGW. – In other BBU interconnection scenarios: The UTRPc board performs IPSec-related processing. IPSec-related data on the UTRPc board is configured by the mode with a higher priority. If digital certificates are used for identity authentication, the UTRPc board uses its digital certificate to authenticate with SeGW, and the three mode of the base station share the same IPSec tunnels and digital certificate. l

Data Preparation – Prepare the data required for the IKE proposal (the IKEPROPOSAL MO). Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Proposal ID

PROPID

-

User-defined

Encryption Algorithm

ENCALG


Network plan

Authentication Algorithm

AUTHALG


Authentication Method

AUTHMETH

If digital certificates are used for identity authentication, this parameter must be set to IKE_RSA_SIG (RSA Digital Certificate Signature). If a PSK is used for identity authentication, this parameter must be set to PRE_SHARED_ KEY(Pre-shared Key).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1035



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Diffie-Hellman Group

DHGRP


PRF Algorith

PRFALG

This parameter must be specified when Version in the IKEPEER MO is set to IKE_V2 (IKE V2). The default value is recommended.

ISAKMP SA Duration(s)

DURATION


Source

– Prepare the data required for the IKE peer (the IKEPEER MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

IKE Peer Name

PEERNAME

-

User-defined

IKE Proposal ID

PROPID

The value of this parameter must be the same as the value of Proposal ID in the IKEPROPOSAL MO.

Version

IKEVERSION



Exchange Mode

EXCHMODE

This parameter must be specified when Version is set to IKE_V1 (IKE V1). The parameter setting on the base station and SeGW sides must be the same.



1036



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Local ID Type

IDTYPE



Remote IP Address

REMOTEIP

If ENCAPMODE in the IPSECPROPOS AL MO is set to TRANSPORT, the value of this parameter must be the same as that of DIP in the ACLRULE MO. Otherwise, encrypted packets cannot be decrypted.

Network plan

When Encapsulation Mode in the IPSECPROPOS AL MO is set to TUNNEL (Tunnel), the value of this parameter must be the same as the IP address of the peer security gateway and the subjectaltname field of the local certificate.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1037



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Remote Name

REMOTENAME

The value of this parameter must be the same as the IKE name configured at the IKE peer (for example, the SeGW).

Network plan

l If a PSK is used for authentication, the value of this parameter must be the same as that of Local NAME of the IKE peer. l If digital certificates are used for authentication, the subjectaltname fields in the certificates used by the local and peer ends must be set to the same value. Pre-shared Key

PKEY

If digital Network plan certificates are (negotiation with used for identity the IPSec peer) authentication, this parameter does not need to be configured. If a PSK is used for identity authentication, this parameter must be specified and the parameter value must be the same as that of the IKE peer.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1038



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

DPD Mode

DPD

Network plan

DPD Idle Time(s)

DPDIDLETIME

DPD Retransmission Interval(s)

DPDRETRI

DPD Retransmission Count

DPDRETRN

DPD is enabled by default. It is recommended that the values of DPDrelated parameters be the same at both IKE ends. If the values are different, the IKE SA end with a shorter timer length will detect that the peer is offline before the other IKE SA end does and an IKE re-negotiation will be triggered.

Local IP Address

LOCALIP

When Version is set to IKE_V1 (IKE V1) and Local ID Type is set to IP(IP Identify), the value of this parameter must be the same as the port ID bound to the IPSec.

Network plan

– Prepare the data required for the ACL rule (the ACL MO). One or multiple ACLs need to be configured based on the planned IPSec tunnels. In the IPSECPOLICY MO, an IPSec policy is bound to an ACL based on the ACLID setting. Only data streams that comply with ACL rules are processed according to the operations defined in the IPSec policy. Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

ACL ID

ACLID

An ACL must contain at least one ACL rule.

Network plan

If an ACL is bound to an IPSec policy, the value of this parameter ranges from 3000 to 3999.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1039



– Prepare the data required for the ACL rule (the ACLRULE MO). Depending on the network plan, an IPSec tunnel may require multiple ACL rules to protect different types of data streams.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

ACL ID

ACLID

The value of this parameter must be the same as that of ACL ID in the ACL MO.

Network plan

Rule ID

RULEID

Each ACL rule in an ACL must have a unique ID.

Protocol Type

PT

-

Source IP Address

SIP

If ENCAPMODE in the IPSECPROPOS AL MO is set to TRANSPORT, the value of this parameter must be an existing device IP address. Otherwise, encrypted packets cannot be decrypted.

Source Wildcard

SWC

-

Match Source Port

SMPT


Source Port Operate

SOP

-

Source Port 1

SPT1

-

Source Port 2

SPT2

-


1040


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Destination IP Address

DIP

If ENCAPMODE in the IPSECPROPOS AL MO is set to TRANSPORT, the value of this parameter must be a host IP address. The value of this parameter must be the same as that of REMOTEIP in the IKEPEER MO. Otherwise, encrypted packets cannot be decrypted.

Destination Wildcard

DWC

-

Match Destination Port

DMPT


Destination Port Operate

DOP

-

Destination Port 1

DPT1

-

Destination Port 2

DPT2

-

Match DSCP

MDSCP

-

DSCP

DSCP

-

Match Fragment Message

MFRG

-

VLAN ID Operate

VLANIDOP



Source

1041



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

VLAN ID 1

VLANID1


VLAN ID 2

VLANID2


Source

– Prepare the data required for the IPSec proposal (the IPSECPROPOSAL MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

IPSec Proposal Name

PROPNAME

-

User-defined

Encapsulation Mode

ENCAPMODE

The tunnel mode is recommended. The parameter setting on the base station and SeGW sides must be the same.


Transform

TRANMODE


AH Authentication Algorithm

AHAUTHALG


ESP Authentication Algorithm

ESPAUTHALG


ESP Encryption Algorithm

ESPENCALG



1042



– Prepare the data required for the IPSec policy (the IPSECPOLICY MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Policy Group Name

SPGN

-

User-defined

IPSec Sequence No.

SPSN

-

User-defined

ACL ID

ACLID

An IPSec policy is bound to an ACL by using the ACL IDparameter. Only data streams that comply with the ACL are processed according to the operations defined in the IPSec policy.

User-defined

IPsec Proposal Name

PROPNAME

The value of this parameter must be the same as the value of IPSec Proposal Namein the IPSECPROPOS AL MO.

User-defined

IKE Peer Name

PEERNAME

The value of this parameter must be the same as the value of IKE Peer Name in the IKEPEER MO.

User-defined

Perfect Forward Secrecy

PFS




1043



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Lefttime Config

LTCFG

If this parameter is set to GLOBAL, the IPSec SA lifetime is permanently set to 3600 seconds. If this parameter is set to LOCAL, the IPSec SA lifetime is specified by LTS and LTKB.

Network plan

Lifetime Based On Time(s)

LTS


Network plan

Lifetime Based On Traffic(KB)

LTKB


Network plan

Anti-Replay Windows

REPLAYWND

If this parameter is set to 0, the antireplay function does not take effect.

Network plan

– Prepare the data required for binding an IPSec policy group to a port (the IPSECBIND MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Cabinet No.

CN

-

Network plan

Subrack No.

SRN

-

Slot No.

SN

-

Subboard Type

SBT

-

Port Type

PT

Port No.

PN

If PT is set to ETH, the port specified by PN must not be a member of an Ethernet trunk.


1044



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Policy Group Name

SPGN

The value of this parameter must be the same as the value of Policy Group Namein the IPSECPOLICY MO.

User-defined

– If a PSK is used for authentication, prepare the IKE configuration data (the IKECFG MO).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

Source

Local Name

IKELNM

This parameter must be specified when Local ID Typeis set to FQDN(Name Identify). The value of this parameter must be the same as the IKE peer name configured at the SeGW.

Network plan

Keepalive Interval

IKEKLI

Keepalive Timeout

IKEKLT

These two parameters need to be specified when the keepalive function is required by IKEv1 entities. If Keepalive Timeout or Keepalive Interval is set to 0, the keepalive function is disabled. The value of Keepalive Timeout must be greater than that of Keepalive Interval.


1045



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Description

DSCP

DSCP

This parameter specifies the differentiated services code point (DSCP) for IKE negotiation packets. The recommended value of this parameter is 48.

Source

Procedure l

Activation Procedure Scenario 1: PKI-based Networking for a NodeB Using Unified Encryption Figure 303-1 Example of PKI-based networking for a NodeB using unified encryption

In this networking scenario: – The UMTS UMPT provides IPSec and PKI. – The UMTS UMPT provides IPSec for the following data streams: – Signaling, service, and O&M data streams on the NodeB – Certificate-management-related data streams between the NodeB and the CA server – Data streams generated when the NodeB obtains the CRL from the CRL server

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.


2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IKEPEER (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1046



Configuration > IPSecurity > IKE > IKE Peer; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IKE peer. 3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


Scenario 2: PKI-based Networking for a NodeB Using Separate Encryption Figure 303-2 Example of PKI-based networking for a NodeB using separate encryption

In this networking scenario: – The UMTS UMPT provides IPSec and PKI. – The UMTS UMPT does not provide IPSec for O&M data streams on the NodeB. It provides IPSec for the following data streams: – Signaling and service data streams on the NodeB – Certificate-management-related data streams between the NodeB and the CA server – Data streams generated when the NodeB obtains the CRL from the CRL server 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IKEPROPOSAL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1047



Configuration > IPSecurity > IKE > IKE Proposal; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IKE proposal. 2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


Scenario 3: PSK-based Networking for a NodeB Using Unified Encryption Figure 303-3 Example of PSK-based networking for a NodeB using unified encryption

In this networking scenario: – The UMTS UMPT provides IPSec and PSK. – The UMTS UMPT provides IPSec for signaling, service, and O&M data streams on the NodeB. 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command SET IKECFG (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1048



Configuration > IPSecurity > IKE > IKE Basic Configuration; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set local IKE configurations. 2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.


Scenario 4: PSK-based Networking for a NodeB Using Separate Encryption Figure 303-4 Example of PSK-based networking for a NodeB using separate encryption

In this networking scenario: – The UMTS UMPT provides IPSec and PSK.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1049



– The UMTS UMPT provides IPSec for signaling and service data streams on the NodeB, not for O&M data streams on the NodeB.

l

l Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

1.

Run the NodeB MML command SET IKECFG (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IKE > IKE Basic Configuration; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set local IKE configurations.

2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.



Run the NodeB MML command DSP IKESA. Check whether IKE SA data is displayed in the returned result. If IKE SA data is displayed, go to step 2. If IKE SA data is not displayed, IPSec fails to be activated.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP IPSECSA. Check whether IPSec SA data is displayed in the returned result. If IPSec SA data is displayed, this feature has been activated.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command LST ACLRULE to check the ACL rules and determine whether service data is protected by IPSec tunnels. Check whether the protected services are running normally. For example, if voice services are protected by IPSec tunnels, place a call to check whether voice services are still running normally; if management plane packets are protected by IPSec tunnels, check whether the corresponding NodeB is still online on the topology view of the M2000.


1050



1.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV IPSECBIND (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IPSec > IPSec Policy Group Binding; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the binding between an IPSec policy and a port.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV IPSECPOLICY (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IPSec > IPSec Policy; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an IPSec policy.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV IPSECPROPOSAL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IPSec > IPSec Proposal; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an IPSec proposal.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV ACLRULE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > Ipsecurity > ACL > Access Control List Rule; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a rule from an ACL.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV ACL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > ACL > Access Control List; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the ACL.

6.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV IKEPEER (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IKE > IKE Peer; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an IKE peer.

7.

Run the NodeB MML command RMV IKEPROPOSAL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > Feature Configuration > IPSecurity > IKE > IKE Proposal; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an IKE proposal.

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Scenario 1: PKI-based Networking for a NodeB Using Unified Encryption //Adding an IKE proposal ADD IKEPROPOSAL: PROPID=10, ENCALG=3DES, AUTHALG=MD5, AUTHMETH=IKE_RSA_SIG, DHGRP=DH_GROUP14, DURATION=86400; //Adding an IKE peer ADD IKEPEER: PEERNAME="ike", PROPID=10, IKEVERSION=IKE_V1, EXCHMODE=MAIN, IDTYPE=IP, REMOTEIP="90.90.90.90", REMOTENAME="secgw", DPD=PERIODIC, DPDIDLETIME=20, DPDRETRI=4, DPDRETRN=6, LOCALIP="20.20.20.188"; //Adding an ACL ADD ACL: ACLID=3000, ACLDESC="for IPsec"; //Adding a rule to the ACL ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1, PT=IP, SIP="32.32.32.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="15.15.15.15", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=2, PT=IP, SIP="30.30.30.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="60.60.60.60", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=3, PT=IP, SIP="30.30.30.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="88.88.88.88", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=4, PT=IP, SIP="30.30.30.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="86.86.86.86", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; //Adding an IPSec proposal

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1051



ADD IPSECPROPOSAL: PROPNAME="prop0", ENCAPMODE=TUNNEL, TRANMODE=ESP, ESPAUTHALG=MD5,ESPENCALG=DES; //Adding an IPSec policy ADD IPSECPOLICY: SPGN="Policy0", SPSN=1, ACLID=3000, PROPNAME="prop0", PEERNAME="ike", PFS= DISABLE, LTCFG=LOCAL, LTS=86400, REPLAYWND=WND_DISABLE; //Adding the binding between an IPSec policy and a port ADD IPSECBIND: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=1, SPGN="Policy0"; Scenario 2: PKI-based Networking for a NodeB Using Separate Encryption //Adding an IKE proposal ADD IKEPROPOSAL: PROPID=10, ENCALG=3DES, AUTHALG=MD5, AUTHMETH=IKE_RSA_SIG, DHGRP=DH_GROUP14, DURATION=86400; //Adding an IKE peer ADD IKEPEER: PEERNAME="ike", PROPID=10, IKEVERSION=IKE_V1, EXCHMODE=MAIN, IDTYPE=IP, REMOTEIP="90.90.90.90", REMOTENAME="secgw", DPD=PERIODIC, DPDIDLETIME=20, DPDRETRI=4, DPDRETRN=6, LOCALIP="20.20.20.188"; //Adding an ACL ADD ACL: ACLID=3000, ACLDESC="for IPsec"; //Adding a rule to the ACL ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1, PT=IP, SIP="32.32.32.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="15.15.15.15", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=3, PT=IP, SIP="30.30.30.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="88.88.88.88", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=3, PT=IP, SIP="30.30.30.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="86.86.86.86", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; //Adding an IPSec proposal ADD IPSECPROPOSAL: PROPNAME="prop0", ENCAPMODE=TUNNEL, TRANMODE=ESP, ESPAUTHALG=MD5,ESPENCALG=DES; //Adding an IPSec policy ADD IPSECPOLICY: SPGN="Policy0", SPSN=1, ACLID=3000, PROPNAME="prop0", PEERNAME="ike", PFS= DISABLE, LTCFG=LOCAL, LTS=86400, REPLAYWND=WND_DISABLE; //Adding the binding between an IPSec policy and a port ADD IPSECBIND: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=1, SPGN="Policy0"; Scenario 3: PSK-based Networking for a NodeB Using Unified Encryption //Set local IKE configurations SET IKECFG: IKELNM="IKECFG1", IKEKLI=20, IKEKLT=60, DSCP=48; //Adding an IKE proposal ADD IKEPROPOSAL: PROPID=10, ENCALG=3DES, AUTHALG=MD5, AUTHMETH=PRE-SHAREDKEY, DHGRP=DH_GROUP14, PRFALG=AES128_XCBC, DURATION=86400; //Adding an IKE peer ADD IKEPEER: PEERNAME="ike", PROPID=10, IKEVERSION=IKE_V1, EXCHMODE=MAIN, IDTYPE=IP, REMOTEIP="90.90.90.90", REMOTENAME="secgw", PKEY="ikekey", DPD=PERIODIC, DPDIDLETIME=20, DPDRETRI=4, DPDRETRN=6, LOCALIP="20.20.20.188"; //Adding an ACL ADD ACL: ACLID=3000, ACLDESC="for IPsec"; //Adding a rule to the ACL ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1, PT=IP, SIP="32.32.32.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="15.15.15.15", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=2, PT=IP, SIP="30.30.30.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="60.60.60.60", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; //Adding an IPSec proposal ADD IPSECPROPOSAL: PROPNAME="prop0", ENCAPMODE=TUNNEL, TRANMODE=ESP, ESPAUTHALG=MD5,ESPENCALG=DES; //Adding an IPSec policy ADD IPSECPOLICY: SPGN="Policy0", SPSN=1, ACLID=3000, PROPNAME="prop0", PEERNAME="ike", PFS= DISABLE, LTCFG=LOCAL, LTS=86400,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1052



REPLAYWND=WND_DISABLE; //Adding the binding between an IPSec policy and a port ADD IPSECBIND: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=1, SPGN="Policy0"; //Scenario 4: PSK-based Networking for a NodeB Using Separate Encryption //Set local IKE configurations SET IKECFG: IKELNM="IKECFG1", IKEKLI=20, IKEKLT=60, DSCP=48; //Adding an IKE proposal ADD IKEPROPOSAL: PROPID=10, ENCALG=3DES, AUTHALG=MD5, AUTHMETH=PRE-SHAREDKEY, DHGRP=DH_GROUP14, PRFALG=AES128_XCBC, DURATION=86400; //Adding an IKE peer ADD IKEPEER: PEERNAME="ike", PROPID=10, IKEVERSION=IKE_V1, EXCHMODE=MAIN, IDTYPE=IP, REMOTEIP="90.90.90.90", REMOTENAME="secgw", PKEY="ikekey", DPD=PERIODIC, DPDIDLETIME=20, DPDRETRI=4, DPDRETRN=6, LOCALIP="20.20.20.188"; //Adding an ACL ADD ACL: ACLID=3000, ACLDESC="for IPsec"; //Adding a rule to the ACL ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1, PT=IP, SIP="32.32.32.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="15.15.15.15", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO; //Adding an IPSec proposal ADD IPSECPROPOSAL: PROPNAME="prop0", ENCAPMODE=TUNNEL, TRANMODE=ESP, ESPAUTHALG=MD5,ESPENCALG=DES; //Adding an IPSec policy ADD IPSECPOLICY: SPGN="Policy0", SPSN=1, ACLID=3000, PROPNAME="prop0", PEERNAME="ike", PFS= DISABLE, LTCFG=LOCAL, LTS=86400, REPLAYWND=WND_DISABLE; //Adding the binding between an IPSec policy and a port ADD IPSECBIND: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=1, SPGN="Policy0"; //Verification procedure DSP IKESA:; DSP IPSECSA: SN=7, SPGN="Policy0", SPSN=1; LST ACLRULE:; //Deactivation procedure RMV IPSECBIND: SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=1; RMV IPSECPOLICY: SPGN="Policy0, SPSN=1; RMV IPSECPROPOSAL: PROPNAME="prop0"; RMV ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1; (Optional)RMV ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=2; (Optional)RMV ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=3; (Optional)RMV ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=4; RMV ACL: ACLID=3000; RMV IKEPEER: PEERNAME="ike"; RMV IKEPROPOSAL: PROPID=10;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1053



304

Configuring 2.0MHz Central

Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221703 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – MRFU and RRU3908 of V2 or later versions support the feature. – UMTS:900M MRRU, 900M MRFU (excluding V1), 850M MRRU V2.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) Downlink – GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm – GBFD-117602 Active Power Control – MRFD-211703 2.0 MHz Central Frequency Point Separation Between GSM and UMTS Mode (GSM)

l


l

Other Prerequisites – GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing is not supported in GSM dynamic transmit diversity. – It is not recommended that GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing coexist with the baseband frequency hopping algorithm involving two power amplifiers because their coexistence would result in a certain level of performance loss. – GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing in MIMO is not recommended. – It needs to purchase professional service additionally to minimize the KPI losses.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1054



Context This feature improves frequency utilization. It enables the UMTS carriers to use the bandwidth 3.8 MHz and therefore increase the capacity of the GSM network.

Procedure l


Run the NodeB MML command SET FREQBWH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > RUX Topology > Right click RRU > RXU Board Property > Radio Frequency Unit; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the minimal frequency bandwidth on the UMTS side. In this step, set Frequency Min Bandwidth to 3800.

2.

To ensure that the UMTS carrier bandwidth is 3.8 MHz and the frequency spacing between GSM and UMTS carriers is 2.0 MHz, as set in step 1, do as follows to modify frequency points on the GSM or UMTS side: – Modify the UMTS carrier Central Frequency Point a.


b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, modify frequency points for UMTS cells at the BSC6900. Set Band Indicator, UL Frequency Ind, Uplink UARFCN and Downlink UARFCN.

c.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to modify some properties of a local cell. In this step, set UL Frequency Channel Number and DL Frequency Channel Number.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to activate a cell.

– Modify the GSM central frequency point separation a.

l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GTRX (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click Cell > Configure TRX Frequency; CME batch modification center: not supported) to modify the frequency of a TRX. In this step, set Frequency to ensure that the frequency spacing between GSM and UMTS carriers is 2.0 MHz.

Run the NodeB MML command LST FREQBWH to check whether the UMTS carrier bandwidth is 3.8 MHz. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1055


l


2.

Check on the NodeB side whether all TRXs work properly when the frequency spacing between GSM and UMTS carriers is 2.0 MHz.

3.

Check on the BSC side whether services in all cells are normal when the frequency spacing between GSM and UMTS carriers is 2.0 MHz.


Run the NodeB MML command SET FREQBWH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > RUX Topology > Right click RRU > RXU Board Property > Radio Frequency Unit; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the UMTS carrier bandwidth. The UMTS carrier bandwidth should range from 4.2 MHz to 5.0 MHz.

2.

To ensure that the UMTS carrier bandwidth is the bandwidth set in step 1, do as follows to modify frequency points on the GSM or UMTS side: – Modify the UMTS central frequency point separation a.


b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, modify frequency points for UMTS cells at the BSC6900 and set Band Indicator, UL Frequency Ind and Downlink UARFCN.

c.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to modify some properties of a local cell. In this step, set UL Frequency Channel Number and DL Frequency Channel Number.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to activate a cell.

– Modify the GSM central frequency point separation a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GTRX (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click Cell > Configure TRX Frequency; CME batch modification center: not supported) to modify the frequency of a TRX. In this step, set Frequency to ensure that the frequency spacing between GSM and UMTS carriers no less than 2.2 MHz.

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Setting the UMTS carrier bandwidth to 3.8 MHz SET FREQBWH: CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, FMBWH=3800; //Setting the uplink and downlink frequencies of a UMTS cell to 2815 and

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1056



3040 DEA UCELL: CellId=101; MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=101, BandInd=Band8, UARFCNUplinkInd=FALSE, UARFCNDownlink=3040; MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=101, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, ULFREQ=2815, DLFREQ=3040; ACT UCELL: CellId=101; //Setting the frequency of a specified GSM TRX to 55 MOD GTRX: TRXID=122, FREQ=55; //Verification procedure LST FREQBWH: CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0; //Deactivation procedure //Setting the UMTS carrier bandwidth to 5.0 MHz SET FREQBWH: CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, FMBWH=5000; //Setting the uplink and downlink frequencies of a UMTS cell to 2821 and 3046 DEA UCELL: CellId=101; MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=101, BandInd=Band8, UARFCNUplinkInd=FALSE, UARFCNDownlink=3046; MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=101, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, ULFREQ=2821, DLFREQ=3046; ACT UCELL: CellId=101; //Setting the frequency of a specificed GSM TRX to 52 MOD GTRX: TRXID=122, FREQ=52;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1057



305

Configuring Dynamic MA for GU

Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature MRFD-221803 Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(UMTS).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: MRFD-221802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(UMTS). – This feature cannot be used together with MRFD-211703 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(GSM) and MRFD-221703 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS). – The feature must be used together with the feature MRFD-211803 Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (GSM).

l


l

Requirements for the Operating Environment – The M2000 is of the V200R011 version. – A common M2000 configuration is required.

Context After this feature is activated, the BSC starts spectrum sharing when the traffic volume of a cell is lighter than what can be carried on two or three TRXs, increasing the spectrum sharing time. Operators are advised to enable this feature in the scenario where the GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing feature is enabled. l

Precautions – After this feature is activated, dynamically changing an absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN) of a cell leads to cell reset. – This feature affects the following algorithms:

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1058



– Handover algorithm: During dynamic MA changing, the BSC performs an intra-cell handover on MSs in the GSM cell. – Admission algorithm: During dynamic MA changing, the BSC preferentially allocates timeslots with new MA to new MSs. l


Parame ter ID

Description

Data Source

FH Index Used After Frequenc y Spectrum Sharing

TRXDS SHOPIN DEX

FH index of channels after spectrum sharing

Network planning

MAIO Used After Frequenc y Spectrum Sharing

TRXDS SMAIO

MAIO of channels after spectrum sharing

Network planning

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Cell > Configure MA Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the mobile allocations (MAs) before and after dynamic spectrum sharing is enabled.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Cell > Configure MA Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set FH Index Used After Frequency Spectrum Sharing and MAIO Used After Frequency Spectrum Sharing for the channels in the cell.


l

Check that this feature has taken effect by viewing the value of the Number of dynamic MA changing requests counter.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Cell > Configure MA Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set FH Index Used After Frequency Spectrum Sharing to 255.

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing must have been configured before

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1059



this feature is activated. //Setting the cell frequency hopping (FH) group ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=100, HOPINDEX=1, HSN=0, TSC=0, HOPMODE=1, FREQ1=802, FREQ2=804, FREQ3=806, FREQ4=808; ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=100, HOPINDEX=2, HSN=0, TSC=0, HOPMODE=1, FREQ1=802, FREQ2=804; ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=100, HOPINDEX=3, HSN=0, TSC=0, HOPMODE=1, FREQ1=806, FREQ2=808; //Setting the FH groups for a channel SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1001, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=2, TRXDSSMAIO=0; SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1001, CHNO=1, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=2, TRXDSSMAIO=0; SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1003, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=3, TRXDSSMAIO=0; SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1003, CHNO=1, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=3, TRXDSSMAIO=0; //Deactivation procedure SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1001, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=255, TRXDSSMAIO=0; SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1001, CHNO=1, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=255, TRXDSSMAIO=0; SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1003, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=255, TRXDSSMAIO=0; SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1003, CHNO=1, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=255, TRXDSSMAIO=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1060



306

Configuring GSM Power Control on

Interface Frequency for GU Small Frequency Gap (UMTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature MRFD-221804 GSM Power Control on Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency gap (UMTS).

Prerequisites l

Requirements on Hardware – Only 3900 series base stations support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) has been configured before this feature is activated. – MRFD-221703 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode (UMTS) or WRFD-021001 Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS. – The feature must be used together with MRFD-211804 GSM Power Control on Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency gap (GSM).

l


Context This feature is recommended for the GU refarming 3.8 MHz or 4.2 MHz scenario where the number of FH TCH frequencies is greater than or equal to 6. l

Precautions – The interfering frequencies must join in FH. – Operators are not advised to enable this feature together with the feature MRFD-211801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing(GSM) or MRFD-221801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing(UMTS).

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1061



– This feature affects the following features: GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation), GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing, GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell, GBFD-115507 WB AMR, and GBFD-115830 VAMOS. l

Data Preparation – When this feature is used together with the feature 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode, operators only need to prepare the data for the feature 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode. – When this feature is used together with the function GU Refarming 4.2 MHz of the Flexible Frequency Bandwidth of UMTS Carrier feature, the data for this feature is the same as the data for the function GU Refarming 4.2 MHz. – The following table describes the parameters that are specific to this feature.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Paramet er Name

Parame ter ID

Description

Data Source

Cell Index

CELLI D

Cell in which frequency-based power control is enabled

Network planning

Frequenc y-based Power Control

GUDegr atePwrC trl

Whether to enable frequency-based power control.

Network planning

Interfere nce Coordina tion Policy

GUDegr atePwrP ri

Frequency-based power control policy. If this parameter is set to GSM (GSM), this feature preferentially guarantees the GSM network quality while minimizing interference to the UMTS network. If this parameter is set to UMTS(UMTS), this feature preferentially guarantees the UMTS network quality. The specific setting depends on customers' requirements.

Network planning


1062


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Paramet er Name

Parame ter ID

Description

Data Source

GU2.0 MHz Max. Power Decrease for Interferin g Frequenc y

GU2000 KHzMa xVal

Maximum power decrease for the interfering frequency when there is a 2.0 MHz frequency spacing between the GSM and UMTS networks. The expected transmit power of the interfering frequency can be calculated with the following formula: Expected transmit power of the interfering frequency = Maximum TRX transmit power GU2.0 MHz Max. Power Decrease for Interfering Frequency. The larger the parameter value, the lower the expected transmit power of the interfering frequency is, and the more GSM users are affected in terms of service quality. In this case, if this parameter is set to UMTS(UMTS), the UMTS network has more performance gains; if this parameter is set to GSM(GSM), the GSM users on which power compression is performed are more closer to the cell center.

Network planning

GU2.2 MHz Max. Power Decrease for Interferin g Frequenc y

GU2200 KHzMa xVal

Maximum power decrease for the interfering frequency when there is a 2.2 MHz frequency spacing between the GSM and UMTS networks. The expected transmit power of the interfering frequency can be calculated with the following formula: Expected transmit power of the interfering frequency = Maximum TRX transmit power GU2.2 MHz Max. Power Decrease for Interfering Frequency. The larger the parameter value, the lower the expected transmit power of the interfering frequency is, and the more GSM users are affected in terms of service quality. In this case, if this parameter is set to UMTS(UMTS), the UMTS network has more performance gains; if this parameter is set to GSM(GSM), the GSM users on which power compression is performed are more closer to the cell center.

Network planning


1063


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


Paramet er Name

Parame ter ID

Description

Data Source

UMTS Center Frequenc y1

UMTSF reqNum 1

Downlink absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN) for the first UMTS frequency that has a 2.0 MHz or 2.2 MHz spacing with the GSM frequency in GU refarming scenarios. When one UMTS frequency is deployed in GU refarming scenarios, one ARFCN is configured. When multiple UMTS frequencies are deployed in GU refarming scenarios, multiple ARFCNs are configured. Currently, a maximum of two such ARFCNs can be configured.

Network planning

UMTS Center Frequenc y2

UMTSF reqNum 2

Downlink ARFCN for the second UMTS frequency that has a 2.0 MHz or 2.2 MHz spacing with the GSM frequency in GU refarming scenarios. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 1023. When one UMTS frequency is deployed in GU refarming scenarios, one ARFCN is configured. When multiple UMTS frequencies are deployed in GU refarming scenarios, multiple ARFCNs are configured. Currently, a maximum of two such ARFCNs can be configured.

Network planning

NonAHR Power Compens ation Proportio n

NAHR CompC oeff

Proportion of power compensation for the non-interfering frequencies to power decrease each time the transmit power of the interfering frequency is decreased by 1 dB for enhanced full rate (EFR), full rate (FR), half rate (HR), and adaptive multirate (AMR) FR calls. Increasing the value of this parameter increases the power compensation amplitude.

Network planning


1064



Paramet er Name

Parame ter ID

Description

Data Source

NonAHR Power Compens ation Offset

NAHR CompO ffVal

Power compensation offset for EFR, FR, HR, and AMR FR calls. Power decrease amplitude that requires power compensation = NAHRCompOffVal/ NAHRCompCoeff. When NAHRCompCoeff is set to 0, this parameter does not need to be configured. When this parameter is set to a smaller value, the power decrease amplitude that does not require power compensation increases.

Network planning

AHR Power Compens ation Proportio n

AHRCo mpCoef f

Proportion of power compensation for the non-interfering frequencies to power decrease each time the transmit power of the interfering frequency is decreased by 1 dB for AMR HR calls. Increasing the value of this parameter increases the power compensation amplitude.

Network planning

AHR Power Compens ation Offset

AHRCo mpOffV al

Power compensation offset for AMR HR calls. Power decrease amplitude that requires power compensation = AHRCompOffVal/ AHRCompCoeff. When AHRCompCoeff is set to 0, this parameter does not need to be configured. When this parameter is set to a smaller value, the power decrease amplitude that does not require power compensation increases.

Network planning

Procedure l


Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNONSTANDARDBW (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > GSM/UMTS Small Frequency Spacing Interference Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Frequency-based Power Control to ON and set the other parameters to appropriate values. The other parameters are Cell Index, Interference Coordination Policy, GU2.0 MHz Max. Power Decrease for Interfering Frequency, GU2.2 MHz Max. Power Decrease for Interfering Frequency, UMTS Center Frequency 1, UMTS Center Frequency 2, Non-AHR Power Compensation Proportion, Non-AHR


1065



Power Compensation Offset, AHR Power Compensation Proportion, and AHR Power Compensation Offset. l

l


When this feature is used together with the feature 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode, the procedure used to verify this feature is the same as that used to verify the feature 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode.

2.

When this feature is used together with the GU Refarming 4.2 MHz function of the Flexible Frequency Bandwidth of UMTS Carrier feature, the procedure used to verify this feature is the same as that used to verify the Flexible Frequency Bandwidth of UMTS Carrier feature.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP LICENSE to query whether the license controlling this feature has been activated.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLNONSTANDARDBW to query whether Frequency-based Power Control is set to ON and whether Cell Index is set to the index of the cell where this feature is to be enabled.

5.

Check the values of the counters in the following table. Counter ID

Counter Name

Description

1282449360

CELL. 2MDISTURB.AVG.FAL L.POWER.RANGE

Average Power Decrease on GSM 2.0 MHz Interfering Frequency

1282449361

CELL. 2.2MDISTURB.AVG.F ALL.POWER.RANGE

Average Power Decrease on GSM 2.2 MHz Interfering Frequency

1282449362

CELL.UNDISTURB.AV G.UP.POWER.RANGE

Average Power Increase on GSM Non-Interfering Frequency


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNONSTANDARDBW (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > GSM/UMTS Small Frequency Spacing Interference Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Frequency-based Power Control to OFF.

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ SET GCELLNONSTANDARDBW: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, GUDegratePwrCtrl=ON, GUDegratePwrPri=GSM, GU2000KHzMaxVal=10, GU2200KHzMaxVal=3, UMTSFreqNum1=0, UMTSFreqNum2=0, NAHRCompCoeff=5, NAHRCompOffVal=-15, AHRCompCoeff=5, AHRCompOffVal=-15; /*Deactivation procedure*/ SET GCELLNONSTANDARDBW: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, GUDegratePwrCtrl=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)


1066

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

Recommend Documents